JP6733643B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, a plurality of control means for executing various settings and processing of a game are arranged on the back side of a game machine, and a player contacts the control means when the opening/closing body on which the control means are mounted is closed. It is configured so that it cannot.

On the other hand, a person related to the hall opens the opening/closing body and performs various settings and maintenance work for the control means outside the business hours of the hall (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2005-024202, A

However, with respect to such a gaming machine, there is a possibility that a fraudulent act may be performed on the control means from the back side of the gaming machine even when the opening/closing body is closed, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing fraudulent acts against the control means from the back side of the gaming machine.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1, the opening and closing body is openably and closably supported with respect to the support body, the first control means for controlling the game on the back side of the opening and closing body of the gaming machine and the second. A control means is installed. Then, at least part or all of the first control means on the rear surface side of the gaming machine is covered by the first protection means mounted on the rear surface side of the gaming machine of the opening/closing body. In addition, at least a part or all of the second control means on the rear surface side of the gaming machine is covered by the second protection means provided on the support. Here, a part of the first protection means is formed so as to overlap with a part of the second protection means in the back surface direction of the gaming machine and abut.

A gaming machine according to a second aspect is the gaming machine according to the first aspect, further comprising a gaming value giving means capable of giving a gaming value to the player.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the opening/closing body is supported so as to be openable/closable with respect to the support body, and the first control means and the second control means for controlling the game are mounted on the back side of the opening/closing body of the gaming machine. It Then, at least a part or all of the first control means on the rear surface side of the game machine is covered by the first protection means mounted on the rear surface side of the game machine of the opening/closing body. Moreover, at least a part or the whole of the second control means on the rear surface side of the gaming machine is covered by the second protection means provided on the support body. Here, a part of the first protection means is formed so as to overlap with a part of the second protection means in the back surface direction of the gaming machine to abut. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts against the control means from the back side of the gaming machine .

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of a display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a main controller. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of various counters, a reserve ball storage area, and a reserve ball execution area. (A) is a figure which showed typically an example of a jackpot random number table, (b) is a figure which showed an example of a jackpot classification table typically, (c) shows the number of reservation balls 2 It is the figure which showed typically an example of the variation pattern table for big hits in the case of, and (d) is the figure which showed typically an example of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table when the number of reserved balls is two. FIG. 7E is a diagram schematically showing an example of a deviation (probability change) variation pattern table when the number of reserved balls is 2. It is the figure which showed an example of the prize ball number table typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows switch reading processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the starting winning processing executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flow chart which shows the change processing performed by MPU in the main control unit. 7 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the starting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the character ratio management main process performed by the character ratio management chip in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a part of setting information reception process performed by the accessory ratio management chip in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a part of setting information reception process performed by the accessory ratio management chip in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the character ratio calculation process performed by the character ratio management chip in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the inspection result output process performed by the accessory ratio management chip in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the starting processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a variable display process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device, (b) is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, (C) is a flowchart showing a V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows winning information storage processing performed by the accessory ratio management chip in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the inspection result output process performed by the accessory ratio management chip in a main controller. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows role ratio processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the ratio main processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows role ratio processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ratio main processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the base display device, (b) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the display content in a base display device. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing information necessary for displaying a base value, which is stored in an outer work area of a RAM in the MPU of the main controller, and (b) is a diagram showing each base. It is a schematic diagram which showed the structure of value data typically. It is a flow chart which shows the starting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the base value process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows base value calculation processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows a part of base value display process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the remaining part of the base value display process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in a 6th embodiment. (A) is a front view of the setting key showing a case where the setting key is in an off state, and (b) is a front view of the setting key showing a case where the setting key is in an on state. The figure which shows the start-up mode of the pachinko machine and the respective states of the RAM erase switch, the setting key and the door open switch when the pachinko machine is powered on for starting in that start-up mode. Is. (A) is a figure showing a role of a RAM deletion switch and a setting key in a setting change mode, and (b) is a figure showing a role of a setting key in a setting confirmation mode. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically various examples of the display content of the base display apparatus in a setting change mode and a setting confirmation mode. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically various examples of the display content at the time of displaying an error history on a base display apparatus. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the arrangement|positioning of LED of the 1st symbol display device, (b) is a case where it notifies that the maximum number of rounds is 2 in a round number notification LED. Lighting pattern, lighting pattern for notifying that the maximum number of rounds is 15, lighting pattern for notifying that setting is being changed, and lighting for notifying that setting is being confirmed It is the figure which showed the pattern. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the data stored in the outer work area of RAM in MPU of the main controller. It is a flow chart which shows the starting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. 7 is a flowchart showing a setting change process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows the setting confirmation processing performed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows base display processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process performed by MPU in the main control device of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 8th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the data stored in the work area in RAM in MPU of a main controller. FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining a startup mode set corresponding to each startup operation when the power is turned on after the power is turned off during the setting change or the setting confirmation. It is a flow chart which shows the starting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. 7 is a flowchart showing a setting change process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows the setting confirmation processing performed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in a 9th embodiment. (A) is a left front perspective view seen from the left front side of the protective cover in the ninth embodiment, and (b) is a right rear perspective view seen from the right rear side of the protective cover in the ninth embodiment. It is a right view of the pachinko machine in a 9th embodiment. It is a left front perspective view for explaining a mounting method of a protection cover member to an outer frame in a 9th embodiment. It is a front view of an outer frame and a protective cover member attached to the outer frame in a 9th embodiment. It is a front view of the board box of the main control unit in a 9th embodiment. FIG. 68 is a cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along the line AA in FIG. 67. FIG. 74 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the main control device and the protective cover member in a region B of FIG. 73. It is a left front perspective view which expands and shows an inner frame and a front frame to an outer frame which attached a protection cover member in a 9th embodiment. The start-up mode of the pachinko machine in the tenth embodiment and the respective information of the RAM erase switch and the setting key at the time of power-on of the pachinko machine for starting up the pachinko machine for each start-up mode are shown. It is a figure. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 10th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the starting processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 10th embodiment. The start-up mode of the pachinko machine in the eleventh embodiment and the respective information of the RAM erase switch and the setting key at the time of power-on of the pachinko machine for starting up the pachinko machine for each start-up mode are shown. It is a figure. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting-up process performed by MPU in the main controller in 11th Embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in a 12th embodiment. It is a right view of the pachinko machine in 12th Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 26, a first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape substantially the same as the outer frame 11 with respect to the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided serves as an opening/closing shaft. The frame 12 is supported openably and closably on the front side.

On the inner frame 12, a game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning holes 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a, etc. is detachably mounted from the back side. A ball game is performed by the ball flowing down on the front surface of the game board 13. In addition, in the inner frame 12, a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 5) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side provided with the hinges 19 is used as an opening/closing shaft. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported openably and closably on the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a door opening switch 208g (see FIG. 6) that detects that either the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is unlocked and opened (the door is opened). There is.

The front frame 14 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is arranged on the rear surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

An upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in the front frame 14 in a substantially box-like shape having an open upper surface and protruding toward the front, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the left side of the upper plate 17 when viewed from the front.

The frame button 22 is, for example, a button pressed by the player when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later. Further, the frame button 22 is also used as an operation button for allowing the player to select the content of the effect in so-called super reach, which is one mode of the variable effect.

The variation effect is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and as described later, the ball fired in the front area of the game board 13 has a specific winning opening (a second starting opening 64b described later. 2)) is executed as a result of entering the ball (starting winning), and after the symbols (third symbols described later) are variably displayed for a predetermined time, by the combination of the symbols that are stopped and displayed, the starting winnings are This is an effect for presenting the result (whether or not it is a big hit) of the lottery performed by the player.

The stage is a production mode in which various productions displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are made uniform, and in the pachinko machine 10, three stages of “a town stage”, an “empty stage”, and an “island stage” are used. There are two stages. Various effects such as the above-described variation effect and the reach effect executed during the variation effect are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage.

The change of the stage is performed when the frame button 22 is pressed by the player during a period in which the variable effect is not performed or during the high-speed change in which the third symbol is displayed at high speed invisible to the player. That is, every time the frame button 22 is operated, the order is repeatedly changed in the order of “town stage”→“empty stage”→“island stage”→“town stage”→... Immediately after the power is turned on, the "town stage" is set as the initial stage.

In addition, when the normal reach effect is started in the variable effect performed on the third symbol display device 81, when the normal reach is expanded to the super reach, the selection screen of the effect mode of the super reach during the normal reach is the third symbol. It is configured to be displayed on the display device 81.

On the selection screen, a plurality of effect mode candidates that can be selected as effect modes for super reach are displayed, and one of the effect mode candidates is selected. When the frame button 22 is pressed by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the selected effect form candidate is changed. Then, the production mode of the super reach is determined based on the production mode candidate selected when developing to the super reach, and the super reach is executed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the production mode.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the frame button 22 is configured as a button that is pressed, but instead of the frame button 22, the player moves in a predetermined direction with respect to the pachinko machine 10 (for example, forward with respect to the pachinko machine 10). , Rearward, rightward, and leftward) and can be tilted. Then, based on the direction in which the operation lever is tilted, the effect stage may be selectively changed or the effect mode of super reach may be selected.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 which incorporate a light emitting means such as an LED. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as a production lamp such as a jackpot lamp, and during the jackpot or reach production, the illumination parts 29 to 33 are turned on by turning on or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress, or that the reach before the jackpot is in progress. Further, a display lamp 34, which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and is capable of displaying during payout of an award ball and when an error occurs, is provided in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 in a front view.

A small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right illumination portion 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2). ), etc., is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more brilliance.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in a state where banknotes, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up to display the balance as a number as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a loan ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the loan ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a balance on the card or the like. To be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit.

It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, that is, a cash machine, but in this case, the ball rental operation unit 40 is used. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a central portion of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is provided, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Sensor 51a for pressing, a push-button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 by the change of the electric resistance. (Not shown) and are built in.

When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount, and the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes as a result, and thereby the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. The sphere firing interval in the sphere firing unit 112a is set to about 0.6 seconds. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

At the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward is provided. This ball-pulling lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens, The sphere falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state in which a box (generally referred to as “thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 that is cut into a substantially square shape in front view, and has a large number of nails for guiding balls, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a first ordinary winning opening 63a, The second normal winning opening 63b, the first starting opening 64a, the second starting opening 64b, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the rear surface side of the inner frame 12. Attached to. The first normal winning opening 63a, the second normal winning opening 63b, the first starting opening 64a, the second starting opening 64b, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. And is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with wood screws or the like. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted. At the inner position of the outer rail 62, a band-shaped metal plate is formed like the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front surface of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area formed by partitioning the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 on the front surface of the game board 13 (where a winning opening or the like is provided, and a shot ball is It is the area that flows down.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the situation where the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. At the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2), a return rubber 69 is attached at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a momentum higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. Is attenuated and bounces back toward the center. In addition, between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is a base. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

The first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter, abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side in the front view of the game area (upper right side in FIG. 2). A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 is a display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

The plurality of LEDs 37a show a variable display that is performed in association with a ball (start prize) into one of the first start opening 64a and the second start opening 64b, depending on the lighting state of the LED 37a, or a change display. As a stop symbol after the end, a symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery performed for the starting winning is shown in a lighting state, or fluctuations among the balls entered in the first starting opening 64a or the second starting opening 64b. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of unexecuted balls (reserved balls), is indicated by a lighting state. The 7-segment display 37b is for displaying the number of rounds in a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37a are configured so that the light emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the light emission colors can suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

In addition, in the present pachinko machine 10, whether or not a big hit for a ball entering the first start opening 64a or the second start opening 64b is determined (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, the big hit type Is also determined. As the types of jackpots determined here, 15R certainty jackpots, 2R certainty jackpots, and 15R regular jackpots are prepared.

The LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, as a stop symbol after the end of the variation executed with the entry into the first start opening 64a or the second start opening 64b. If the jackpot is a jackpot, a design corresponding to the jackpot type is shown.

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum round number shifts to a high probability state after the 15 rounds jackpot, and the "2R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum round number of 2 rounds. It is a certainty jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. Further, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum round number shifts to a low-probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds and becomes a shortened state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). ..

In addition, "high probability state" means a state in which the jackpot probability increases after the jackpot as an added value, that is, during so-called probability fluctuation (probably changing, probability changing state), in other words, a special game state (big hit). ) Is the state of the game that is easy to move to. The high-probability state (probability change state, probability change state) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of hitting a second symbol, which will be described later, increases and the ball easily enters the second starting opening 64b.

On the other hand, the "low-probability state" refers to a state where the probability of big jackpot is not in progress and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of a probability change. In addition, the short-time state (time-shortening state) of the "low probability state" is that the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to the second starting opening 64b It is a game state where the ball is easy to enter.

Instead of changing the winning probability of the second symbol, depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the time when an electric accessory to be described later attached to the second starting opening 64b is opened, or once by the second symbol. It is also possible to change the number of times the electric accessory is released depending on the hit. Specifically, in the time saving state, the time for which the electric accessory attached to the second starting opening 64b is opened is longer than that in the case other than the time saving state, and the number of times the electric accessory is released per hit May be larger than in other than the time saving state. Further, in the time saving state, at least two of increasing the winning probability of the second symbol, prolonging the opening time of the electric accessory, and increasing the number of times the electric accessory is opened may be performed at the same time. Good.

A first normal winning opening 63a is provided on the lower left side of the game area, and a second normal winning opening 63b is provided on the lower right side of the playing area. When the ball enters the first normal winning opening 63a, the first normal winning opening switch 208c (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, which is caused by the turning on of the first normal winning opening switch 208c. Eight balls are paid out as prize balls. Further, when the ball enters the second normal winning opening 63b, the second normal winning opening switch 208d (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second normal winning opening switch 208d is turned on. Due to this, eight balls are paid out as prize balls. It should be noted that the number of prize balls when a ball is won in the first normal winning opening 63a and the number of prize balls when a ball is winning in the second ordinary winning opening 63b do not necessarily have to be the same. The number of prize balls may be different, such as 8 balls or the latter.

A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 and a second symbol display device 83. While the third symbol display device 81 is synchronized with the variable display on the first symbol display device 37, with the entry (start prize) into any one of the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b as a trigger. , A liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") for performing variable display (variable effect) of the third symbol. The second symbol display device 83 is provided with a second symbol display device 83 configured by an LED that variably displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball of the through gate 67. Further, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of, for example, a large 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 (see FIG. 5) described later, for example, left, center. And the three symbol columns on the right are displayed.

Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, the display of the game state accompanied by the control of the main controller 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, while the decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. It is performed by the third symbol display device 81. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4(a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 4B is a diagram exemplifying an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9". Each main symbol is formed by attaching numbers from "0" to "9" on the rear symbol made of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are , A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) are attached to the front of the wooden box with attached symbols imitating characters such as plane, furoshiki, and helmet. An even number is green and small on the lower right side of the attached design, and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached design.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 5) described later is a big hit, a variation display (variation effect) in which the same main symbols are aligned on the activated line L1. ) Is done, it is configured so that the jackpot occurs after the variable display is over. When transitioning to a high probability state (probability change state) after the jackpot ends, a variable display in which the main symbols to which odd numbers are added (corresponding to “high probability symbols”) are aligned on the activated line L1 is displayed. On the other hand, when transitioning to the low-probability state after the jackpot, the variable display in which the main symbols (corresponding to the “low-probability symbol”) to which an even number is added are aligned on the activated line L1 is performed.

As shown in FIG. 4(a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower parts, and the lower 2/3 variably displays the third symbol (main symbol) (variable effect). The main display area Dm that is displayed and the other upper third is the sub display area Ds that displays the notice effect, the character, and the like. Further, in the central portion on the lower bottom side of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a reserved ball number display area Db for displaying the reserved ball number is provided.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, center, and right. The display area Dm1 displays the symbol row Z1, and the display area Dm2 displays the symbol row Z2. The symbol string Z3 is displayed on Dm3.

In each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers, and each symbol column Z1 to Z3 is cyclically scrolled from the top to the bottom for variable display. In particular, in the left symbol column Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order, and in the middle symbol column Z2 and the right symbol column Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and in each variation production, the third symbol on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol column Z1, the right symbol column Z3, and the middle symbol column Z2. It will be stopped. If the combination of the jackpot symbols (combination of the same main symbols) is arranged on the activated line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, the jackpot moving image is displayed as the jackpot.

The sub display area Ds is provided horizontally longer than the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. The small areas Ds1 to Ds3 are areas for displaying a character and a notice effect image, respectively. The image displayed in each of the small areas Ds1 to Ds3 gives the player an expectation that a big hit will result as a result of the variable display performed in the main display area Dm. The reserved ball number display area Db is the number of reserved balls which is the number of balls (reserved balls) for which the variable display (variable effect) has not been executed among the balls entered in the first starting opening 64a and the second starting opening 64b. Is an area for displaying.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the left small area Ds1 and the right small area Ds3, which suggests to the player that the jackpot is in a state in which it is easier to make a transition to the big hit than usual. In the small region Ds2 in the center, a predetermined character (in this embodiment, a boy with a hachimaki) normally performs a predetermined action, sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action, or is normally a black boy. The notice effect is performed by changing the color of the hair, the color of the normally white bee, or the appearance of another character.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b while the variable effect (variable display) is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), The maximum number of times the player can enter the ball is 4 times. The number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the number of reserved balls display area Db. In the reserved sphere number display area Db, one reserved sphere number pattern ("●" symbol) is displayed for each reserved sphere number, and the number of reserved spheres is displayed according to the number of the reserved sphere number patterns displayed. ..

That is, when one reserved sphere number design is displayed in the reserved sphere count display region Db, it indicates that the number of reserved spheres is one sphere, and when four reserved sphere count designs are displayed, it is reserved. It indicates that the number of spheres is four. Further, when the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the reserved ball number display area Db, the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the ball entering the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b is configured to be reserved up to four times in total, but the maximum number of reserved balls is four times in total. The number of times is not limited, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the number of holding balls in the holding ball number display area Db, the number of holding balls is a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or an area divided into four is the number of holding balls. However, they may be displayed in different modes (for example, color and lighting pattern). Moreover, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs variable display in which the symbol "○" and the symbol "x" as display symbols (second symbol) are alternately turned on every time the ball passes through the through gate 67. is there. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped by a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol "○"), the electric accessory provided in the second starting opening 64b is for a predetermined time. It is configured so that it is activated (opened) only.

The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and is also lit and displayed in the second symbol reservation lamp 84. Four of the second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81. Then, the number of holdings is displayed by the number of the second symbol holding lamps 84 that are turned on.

Note that the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol. Alternatively, a part of the display device 81 may be used. Similarly, instead of turning on the second symbol holding lamp 84, the variable display of the second symbol may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the passage of the through gate 67 is not limited to the maximum number of reserved balls of 4 times as in the case of the second starting port 64b, and is not more than 3 times or not less than 5 times (for example, 8 times). It may be set to. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not be lit.

A first starting port 64a is provided below the variable display device unit 80, and a second starting port 64b is provided below the first starting port 64a. The first starting opening 64a is provided with an opening through which a ball can enter upward. The opening of the first starting port 64a is always open so that a ball can enter. When the ball enters the first starting opening 64a, the first starting opening switch 208a (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control is caused by the turning on of the first starting opening switch 208a. The device 110 (see FIG. 5) is used to perform a lottery, and a display according to the result of the lottery is shown by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37, and at the third symbol display device 81, a variation effect of the third symbol To be executed. The first starting opening 64a is also one of the winning openings through which three balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

On the other hand, the second starting port 64b is provided with an electric accessory having two blades that cover the opening into which the ball enters the second starting port 64b. The electric accessory puts the second starting port 64b into an open state (enlarged state) or a closed state (reduced state) by opening and closing two blades. In the normal state, the second starting port 64b is in a closed state in which the blade of the electric accessory is closed (the blade is erected upward), and the ball cannot enter the second starting port 64b, or the ball enters the ball. It is in a difficult state.

Then, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at the symbol "O", the electric accessory of the second starting opening 64b is operated for a predetermined time. From the state where the blade of the electric accessory stands up while the electric accessory is being operated. The second starting port 64b is opened and the second starting port 64b is opened. When the second starting port 64b is in the open state, the ball can enter the second starting port 64b or is in a state in which the ball can easily enter as compared with the closed state. That is, as a result of the variable display on the second symbol display device 83, the player stops at the symbol "○" and hits, and when the second starting port 64b is in the open state, the ball enters the second starting port 64b. Then, the jackpot lottery can be performed in a large number.

When the ball enters the second starting port 64b, the second starting port switch 208b (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control is caused by the turning on of the second starting port switch 208b. The device 110 (see FIG. 5) is used to perform a lottery, and a display according to the result of the lottery is shown by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37, and at the third symbol display device 81, a variation effect of the third symbol To be executed. The second starting opening 64b is also one of the winning openings through which two balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the second starting opening 64b, and a horizontally-oriented rectangular large winning opening (also called a large opening or a specific winning opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery in the main controller 110 is a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so that a big hit stop pattern is lit after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed, and The stop symbol corresponding to the big hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the big hit is shown. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the large winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

The special winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the special winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening/closing operation of the special winning opening 65a can be repeated, for example, 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum.

The variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally-long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the special winning opening 65a, and a big winning opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open and close forward with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. It has and. The special winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which a ball cannot be won or it is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the special winning opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower side of the front surface to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily wins the special winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state. The state and the state operate alternately.

When the ball enters the special winning opening 65a, the special winning opening switch 208e (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the number of times the big winning opening switch 208e is turned on is counted. The number of balls that have won the special winning opening 65a is counted, and the condition for closing the special winning opening 65a is determined. Further, due to the turning on of the special winning opening switch 208e, 12 balls are paid out as prize balls. By repeating the open state and the closed state of the special winning opening 65a due to the big hit, many balls are in a state where it is easy to win the big winning opening 65a, and the player has a game value (game value). As a grant, a larger amount of prize balls than usual will be paid out. This state is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player.

The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A special winning opening and a large opening opening separately from the specific winning opening are provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit in the first symbol display device 37 is turned on, the specific winning opening is opened for a predetermined time. The game state in which the large opening is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times may be formed as a special game state when the ball wins in the specific winning opening during the opening of the specific winning opening.

Through gates 67 are provided on the left side and the right side of the variable display device unit 80, respectively. The through gate 67 is provided with through holes (not shown) for passing balls in the vertical direction. When the ball shot in the game area passes through the through gate 67, a through gate switch (not shown) provided in the through hole is turned on, and due to the on, the main controller 110 causes the second symbol ( Ordinary symbol) will be won.

As a result of the lottery of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) performed on the ball that has passed through the through gate 67, if it is determined that the hit, through the variable display of the second symbol in the second symbol display device 83 " After the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed, the electric accessory of the second starting opening 64b is activated. As a result, the blade of the electric accessory, which makes it difficult for the ball to enter the second starting opening 64b, moves from a substantially vertical position to a substantially V shape (reverse C shape), and the ball moves for a predetermined time. Can enter the second starting opening 64b, or a state in which the ball can enter the second starting opening 64b more easily than in the closed state.

Adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for adhering a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. are provided in the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13. It can be seen through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an outlet 66. Balls that have not entered any of the winning openings 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a are guided to the ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 66. In addition, the balls entering the winning openings 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a are guided to the ball discharging path after passing through a switch for detecting the entering of the balls provided for each winning opening. It The ball guided to the ball discharging path passes through an out switch 208f (see FIG. 6) for detecting the guided ball, and is then discharged to an island facility (not shown) in which the pachinko machine 10 is installed. ..

Here, the ball shot into the game area of the pachinko machine 10 always enters any of the winning openings 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a or the out opening 66. Therefore, the balls that have entered the winning openings 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a and the out opening 66 are guided to the ball discharge path and always pass through the out switch 208f. Therefore, by counting the number of balls detected by the out switch 208f, the number of balls shot in the game area (the number of balls used in the game) can be grasped. Further, the out switch 208f detects a ball that has actually passed through the game area and entered any of the winning openings 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a or the out opening 66. In other words, a ball that has been launched into the game area but is caught somewhere in the game area and as a result is not used in the game is not detected. Therefore, by counting the number of balls detected by the out switch 208f, it is possible to prevent the balls not used in the game as a result from being counted as balls launched into the game area.

In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as required.

In addition, the main board is provided with an inspection terminal 207a (see FIG. 5) to which an inspection device 300 for inspecting the performance of the game machine such as a ratio of accessories can be connected. The inspection terminal 207a is normally covered with the back pack 92 of the back pack unit 94, and appears by opening the back pack 92. However, the back pack 92 may be provided with an opening for the inspection terminal 207a, and the inspection terminal 207a may be exposed from the opening. When the connector of the cable connected to the inspection device 300 is inserted into the inspection terminal 207a, the inspection device 300 can inspect the gaming performance such as the role ratio of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

In the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) in an unopenable manner (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). In addition, a sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, extending over the box base and the box cover. The seal sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the seal sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102 or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Be cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing sticker, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with the balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately dispensed by the dispensing device 133. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as the ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 5). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. In addition to a certain RAM 203, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built in.

In the main controller 110, the major of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, setting of variable display (variation effect) on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83. Execute the process. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed by the MPU 201, and the RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer that stores various counters for controlling these processing.

The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is shut down due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. Then, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 15) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input/output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol holding lamp 84, the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the special winning opening 65a is an axis. As a result, a solenoid 209 including a special winning opening solenoid for driving to open and close to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 sends various command and control signals to them via an input/output port 205. To send.

Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

In addition, the input/output port 205 includes a switch group and a sensor group including various switches for detecting a ball that has entered each winning port and a ball that has been guided to the ball discharge path through each winning port and an out port. And a RAM erasing switch circuit 253, which will be described later, provided in the power supply device 115 are connected to the MPU 201. The MPU 201 outputs signals from the various switches 208 and RAM erasing signal output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253. Various processes are executed based on SG2.

The main controller 110 is provided with an accessory ratio management chip 207 that manages information about the accessory ratio in the pachinko machine 10. The character ratio management chip 207 is connected to the MPU 201 via the bus 206, receives information necessary for managing the character ratio from the MPU 201, processes the received information, and stores the received information, whereby the character of the pachinko machine 10 is processed. It is a microchip (integrated circuit) that manages information about ratios.

An inspection terminal 207a is connected to the accessory ratio management chip 207. The inspection terminal 207a is configured to be connectable to an external inspection device 300 that inspects the performance of the gaming machine such as the ratio of the accessory, and when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a via a cable and a connector, Information on the character ratio managed by the character ratio management chip 207 and other information on the inspection are transmitted to the inspection device 300. The inspection device 300 can determine whether the accessory ratio of the pachinko machine 10 is within the normal range based on the information on the accessory ratio received via the inspection terminal 207a.

Here, the detailed configuration of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of main controller 110.

As described above, the RAM erase switch circuit 253 is connected to the input/output port 205 as the input side, and the solenoid 209, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 38, the second symbol holding lamp 84 as the output side, The payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 are connected, and as various switches 208 connected as an input side, a first starting opening switch 208a and a second starting opening switch 208a for detecting a ball winning in the first starting opening 64a. A second starting opening switch 208b for detecting a ball winning at the starting opening 64b, a first ordinary winning opening switch 208c for detecting a ball winning at the first ordinary winning opening 63a, and a second ordinary winning opening 63b Second ordinary winning opening switch 208d for detecting a winning ball, large winning opening switch 208e for detecting a winning ball in the special winning opening 65a, balls winning in each winning opening 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a And an out switch 208f that detects a ball that has entered the out port 66 and is guided to the ball discharge path, and that at least one of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 is locked and opened. The door opening switch 208g is connected.

The input/output port 205 includes a first port 205a to which the output of the first starting port switch 208a is input, a first 2 port 205b to which the output of the second starting port switch 208b is input, and a first normal winning port switch 208c. A universal port 205c to which the output is input, a universal port 205d to which the output of the second ordinary winning opening switch 208d is input, a large winning port 205e to which the output of the special winning opening switch 208e is input, and an out switch An out port 205f to which the output of 208f is connected and a door opening port 205g to which the output of the door opening switch 208g is connected are provided.

The MPU 201 executes a switch reading process (see FIG. 11) for checking the states of various switches in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) executed every 2 milliseconds. In the switch reading process, the MPU 201 refers to the first 1 port 205a, the second 2 port 205b, the ordinary 1 port 205c, the ordinary 2 port 205d, the special winning opening port 205e and the out port 205f, and wins the winning opening. And the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path within 0.5 seconds, and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (ie, Count the number of balls launched into the game area). Then, the number of each ball counted and the game state at that time (whether it is a big hit, the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 (so-called door) is open, is in an error state, etc.) It is set in the accessory ratio management chip 207 every 0.5 seconds. The character ratio management chip 207 calculates and manages the character ratio based on the number of each ball. Whether the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is open is determined by the MPU 201 referring to the door opening port 205g and confirming the output of the door opening switch 208g.

The ROM 202 of the MPU 201 stores at least a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a stop pattern table 202c, a variation pattern table 202d, a prize ball number table 202e, and trigger information data 202f. Main controller 110 executes main processing of pachinko machine 10 by various counters stored in RAM 203 and various tables 202a to 203d stored in ROM 202. The prize ball number table 202e and the trigger information data 202f are data used for managing the character ratio in the character ratio management chip 207, and the character ratio when the main controller 110 is powered on. It is transmitted to the management chip 207.

Here, with reference to FIG. 7, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters are mainly used for jackpot lottery, setting of variable display (variation effect) of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of display result of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. It is used by the MPU 201 of the control device 110. Further, in the description of the various counters, various tables 202a to 202d stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 will also be described with reference to FIG.

To set the jackpot lottery and the variable display (variation effect) of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the selection used for the jackpot symbol The per-percent type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 used for the variation pattern selection, and the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first per random number counter C1 are used. ..

The second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for the initial value setting of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10 ), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 17 ). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although details will be described later, the RAM 203 is provided with a holding ball storage area 203b composed of four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and in each of these areas, a first starting opening 64a and The respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the change type counter CS1 are stored at the timing of entering the second starting opening 64b.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 899) and reaches 0 after reaching a maximum value (for example, 899 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 899). It is configured to return to. In addition, when the first random number counter C1 is updated once, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1. The random number counter C1 is updated.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 899, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 17).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the ball wins either the first starting opening 64a or the second starting opening 64b ( The value of the first random number counter C1 at that time is the first winning random number counter storage area of any one of the reserved first to fourth reserved areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing of starting winning) It is stored in 203b1. The value of the random number to be a big hit is set by the big hit random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the holding area is set by the big hit random number table 202a. When it coincides with the value of the random number that is a jackpot, it is determined to be a jackpot.

Here, the jackpot random number table 202a will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 8A is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot random number table 202a. The jackpot random number table 202a is for the low probability state used when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a low probability state (a period during which the probability is not changing), and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a jackpot rather than the low probability state. It is divided into two types: a high-probability state used in the case of a high-probability state with high probability (during probability change). Then, the numbers of random numbers to be a big hit included in the low probability state and the high probability state are set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between the low-probability state and the high-probability state.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. In this first random number counter C1, the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that are a big hit in the low probability state is 3, and the value “7,307,582” is stored in the big hit random number table 202a. ing.

On the other hand, the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that are a big hit in the high probability state is 30, and the value is “28,58,85,122,144,178,213,238,276,298,322. , 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892" are stored in the jackpot random number table 202a. ..

In the present embodiment, the jackpot random number values for the low-probability state and the jackpot random number value for the high-probability state stored in the jackpot random number table 202a are set so that the jackpot random number values are not duplicated. It is set. Here, if there is a value that is a jackpot random number value regardless of the status of the pachinko machine 10, the value is likely to be predicted from the outside, so there is a possibility that the jackpot may be illegally assigned. On the other hand, like the present embodiment, by changing the value of the random number to be a big hit depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high-probability state or the low-probability state), Since it is possible to make it difficult to predict the value of the random number, it is possible to suppress fraud.

Returning to FIG. 7, the description will be continued. The first hit type counter C2 determines a big hit type in the case of a big hit, and is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99) to obtain a maximum value (for example, 0 to 99). In the case of a counter that can take a value, it is configured to return to 0 after reaching 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the ball starts either of the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b. At the timing of winning the mouth (starting winning), the value of the first hit type counter C2 at that time is determined by the first hit random number counter C1 of the holding first to fourth areas provided in the holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. It is stored in the first hit type counter storage area 203b2 of the same holding area as the stored holding area.

Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the one holding area in the holding ball storage area 203b is not a big hit random number, that is, if it is a random number that is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuating effect Alternatively, the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") is the one at the time of disconnection. On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the one holding area in the holding ball storage area 203b is a big hit random number, the change pattern and the stop type in the change effect are those at the time of a big hit. .. In this case, the variation pattern and the stop type at the time of the jackpot are determined corresponding to the jackpot type indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area.

The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. The jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202b stored in the ROM 202. Here, the jackpot type table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8B is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot type table 202b. As shown in FIG. 8B, the jackpot type table 202b is a table in which the jackpot type and the value of the first hit type counter C2 are associated with each other.

As the jackpot type, as described above, the maximum round number shifts to a high-probability state after a 15-round jackpot, "15R probability variation jackpot", and the maximum round number shifts to a low-probability state after a 15-round jackpot. There are "15R regular jackpots" that are short-lived states during the number of fluctuations, and "2R probability variation jackpots" that shift to a high-probability state after the maximum number of rounds is 2 rounds.

In the jackpot type table 202b, each jackpot type is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 that determines the jackpot type. In the example of FIG. 8B, the value “0 to 39” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R probability variation big hit, and the value “40 to 40” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R normal big hit. 79" is associated, and the value "80 to 99" of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 2R probability variation big hit.

When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is a big hit value, the big hit type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area is determined from the big hit type table 202b. .. For example, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "20", "15R probability variation big hit" is determined as the big hit type, and if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "60", the big hit type is " "15R normal big hit" is determined, and if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "90", "2R certainty variation big hit" is determined as the big hit type.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the case of a big hit, the 15R certainty jackpot is selected with a 40% probability, the 15R regular jackpot is selected with a 40% probability, and the 2R certainty jackpot is selected with a 20% probability. .. In addition, the probability that each jackpot type will be selected when it becomes a jackpot is appropriately set depending on the model. Then, according to the set probability, the jackpot type table defines the value of the first hit type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type.

The probability that the jackpot type is selected may be changed according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, a jackpot type table corresponding to each gaming state may be prepared, and the number of values of the first hit type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type may be changed in each jackpot type table.

Further, the probability that the jackpot type is selected may be changed depending on the starting opening that entered the ball. That is, as the probability of each jackpot type selected when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a jackpot, triggered by the ball entering the first starting opening 64a, For example, "15R probability variation jackpot" is 40%, "15R probability variation jackpot" is 40%, "2R probability variation jackpot" is 20%, and the ball is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b when the second start opening 64b is thrown. As the probability of each jackpot type selected when the value of the first random number counter C1 is a big hit random number, for example, "15R probability jackpot" is 55%, "15R regular jackpot" is 40%, "2R probability jackpot". May be 5%.

In this case, a jackpot type table corresponding to the first starting port 64a and a jackpot type table corresponding to the second starting port 64b are prepared, and the first hit type associated with each jackpot type in each jackpot type table. The number of values of the counter C2 may be changed. Then, in the holding first to fourth areas of the holding ball storage area 203b, the values of the various counters stored in the respective areas are used for winning the starting opening of either the first starting opening 64a or the second starting opening 64b. A flag indicating whether the jackpot is also stored is also stored, and the jackpot type used when determining the jackpot type based on the first hit type counter C2 stored in each area based on the flag. A table may be selected. Alternatively, a flag is separately provided in a form corresponding to each of the holding first to fourth areas, and the values of various counters stored in the corresponding areas are set to the values of the first starting opening 64a and the second starting opening 64b by the flag. The jackpot type used when determining the jackpot type based on the first hit type counter C2 stored in each area on the basis of the flag indicating which of the starting openings has been stored A table may be selected.

Returning to FIG. 7, description of various counters will be continued. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 99, for example, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99), returns to 0. In the present embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disengagement displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. 3 stops including "rear out of front/rear" that stops when the reach is reached, and "reach other than out of front/rear" in which the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol, and "complete detachment" in which reach does not occur ( A production pattern is selected.

The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the ball is placed in one of the first starting opening 64a and the second starting opening 64b. At the timing of winning (starting winning), the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 at that time is stored in the first random number counter C1 out of the reserved first to fourth areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. It is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 of the same holding area as the holding area.

Corresponding to the stop pattern selection counter C3, the ROM 202 is provided with a plurality of stop pattern tables 202c having different ranges of random number values for which stop types are selected. The plurality of stop pattern tables 202c are prepared in order to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is the high probability state or the low probability state.

For example, in the high-probability state, a large stop pattern table 202c is selected so that a range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “complete deviation” is 0 to 89 and a wide range is selected so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Therefore, it becomes easy to select “completely off”. In this stop pattern table 202c, the "rearward/rearward reach" is narrowed to 98 and 99, and the "reach other than front/rear outreach" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, so that it is difficult to select "rearward/rearward reach" or "reach other than front/rear outreach". Become.

Further, in the low probability state, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “complete deviation” is 0 to 79 in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first starting opening 64a or the second starting opening 64b. Therefore, the narrow stop pattern table 202c is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "completely disengaged". In this stop pattern table 202c, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than out-of-front/backward" is widened to 80 to 97, and "reach other than out-of-front-rear" is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, since many reach displays having a long production time can be performed, it is possible to secure the time for the ball to enter the first starting opening 64a or the second starting opening 64b, and the fluctuation by the third symbol display device 81. It is easy to continue displaying. In the latter stop pattern table 202c as well, the range of random number values corresponding to the stop type of "out-of-position reach" is set to 98,99.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and then return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 17). Further, at the timing when the ball wins (start wins) in either of the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b, the value of the variation type counter CS1 at that time is set in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. It is stored in the variable type counter storage area 203b4 of the same reserved area as the reserved area in which the first random number counter C1 is stored among the reserved first to fourth areas.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is used to determine the fluctuation pattern. That is, when the MPU 201 makes a variation effect based on various counters stored in one holding area, the MPU 201 stores the variation type counter CS1 stored in the variation type counter storage area 203b4 of the holding area and the ROM 202. The fluctuation pattern is determined by the fluctuation pattern table 202d. The determination of the variation pattern is specifically the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. The voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The change mode is determined, and the presence/absence of advance notice effect execution and the advance notice effect execution mode are determined.

Here, the details of the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. The pachinko machine 10 is provided with, as the variation pattern table 202d, a big hit variation pattern table 202d1 used at the time of a big hit, and a deviation variation pattern table 202d2, 202d3 used at the time of disengagement. Also, as the deviation pattern table for deviation 202d2, 202d3, depending on whether the gaming state is a high probability state at the time saving state or the probability changing time, or a low probability state at the normal time excluding the time saving state, the deviation (probability changing) A fluctuation pattern table 202d3 and a deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 are prepared.

Furthermore, each of the fluctuation pattern tables 202d1 to 202d3 is referred to when the number of reserved balls is 0 (that is, when there is no reserved ball), and a table which is referred to when the number of reserved balls is 1. A table referred to when the number of reserved balls is 2, a table referred to when the number of reserved balls is 3, and a table referred to when the number of reserved balls is 4 are separately provided.

Note that, as in the present embodiment, it is not always necessary to prepare a variation pattern table for each number of reserved balls, and each variation pattern table 202d1 to 202d3 is simply changed so that the table referred to by the number of reserved balls is changed. May be prepared. For example, each of the fluctuation pattern tables 202d1 to 202d3 may be prepared separately as a table referred to when the number of reserved balls is less than 3 and a table referred to when the number of reserved balls is 3 or more. .. Further, in each of the fluctuation pattern tables 202d1 to 202d3, the condition of the number of reserved balls for determining the table to be referred to may be different. For example, the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 includes a table referred to when the number of reserved balls is less than 3 and a table referred to when the number of retained balls is 3 or more, and the variation pattern for out-of-range (normal) A different table may be prepared as the table 202d2 for each number of reserved balls, and one table may be prepared as the deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d3 regardless of the number of reserved balls.

FIG. 8C is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 that is referred to when the number of reserved balls is 2, of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 stored in the ROM 202.

The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is divided into groups (groups) based on the jackpot type, regardless of the number of reserved balls. Specifically, it is divided into 15R probability jackpot common and 15R jackpot common that are referred to when the 15R probability jackpot and 15R regular jackpot are determined, and 2R probability variation jackpot only that is referenced when the 2R probability variation jackpot is determined. There is. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups.

When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is a big hit value (big hit random number value), a variation pattern according to the big hit type corresponding to the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area. The group to be referred to in the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is determined. In the group (group) of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1, the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the suspension area is determined as the variation pattern in the variation effect suspended in the suspension area. To be done.

Common to 15R jackpot, three fluctuation patterns of fluctuation A having a fluctuation time of 30 seconds, fluctuation B having a fluctuation time of 60 seconds, and fluctuation C having a fluctuation time of 90 seconds are selectably prepared. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with.

The variation A is a variation pattern in which the so-called normal reach in which the third symbols are aligned after the reach having a short variation time is executed by the third symbol display device 81. The variation B is a variation pattern in which the so-called super reach in which the third symbols are aligned after the reach having a longer variation time than the normal reach is executed by the third symbol display device 81. The super reach includes, for example, a reach that develops from a normal reach, and a long reach that simply has a long reach. The variation C is a variation pattern in which the so-called special reach in which the third symbols are aligned after the reach having a longer variation time than the super reach is executed by the third symbol display device 81. The special reach includes, for example, a reach that further develops after the super reach, and a special reach that develops from the normal reach different from the super reach.

In the example shown in FIG. 8C, the variation pattern and the value of the variation type counter CS1 when the number of reserved balls is 2 are 0 to 10 for the variation A in the table common to the 15R jackpot and the variation. It is 11 to 99 for B and 100 to 198 for variation C. The table common to the 15R jackpot is the case where the 15R certainty variation jackpot or the 15R regular jackpot is selected, so that the variation C in which the special reach is executed is easily selected to give the player a sense of expectation. Has become. However, by configuring so that the variation A in which the normal reach is executed and the variation B in which the super reach is executed are also selected, it is possible to provide a gaming property in which a jackpot can be expected from any reach.

In this pachinko machine 10, a large number of things with different effect contents are prepared for each reach, for example, in the super reach, the rear image (the third symbol which is the main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81). The image displayed on the back side of) is displayed by rapidly changing it, and the reach that suddenly displays a certain character, etc. In addition to that, a notice effect before the start of fluctuation is added, and a big hit by re-changing A plurality of reach with different effect contents are included, such as the one to which is added. The main controller 110 determines only the fluctuation A, the fluctuation B, and the fluctuation C as the fluctuation patterns when the 15R certainty variation jackpot or the 15R normal jackpot is obtained, and each of the variations A to C in the voice lamp controller 113 and the display controller 114. The detailed variation pattern corresponding to C is determined. According to the detailed variation pattern, the variation effect is executed on the third symbol display device 81.

Only for the 2R certainty variation jackpot, a variation pattern of “2R variation” with a variation time of 59 seconds is prepared so that it can be selected. In the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1, as shown in FIG. 7C, all the values that the variation type counter CS1 can take in the group dedicated to the 2R certainty variation jackpot, regardless of the number of holding balls, ( 2R variations are associated with 0 to 198). That is, when the jackpot variation type is the 2R certainty variation jackpot, the 2R variation is always selected as the variation pattern.

When the 2R fluctuation is selected by the main control device 110, a detailed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the 2R fluctuation is determined by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. Therefore, when the 2R certainty variation jackpot is determined as the jackpot type in the main control device 110, the variation effect is executed on the third symbol display device 81 by a detailed variation pattern corresponding to the 2R variation. In the pachinko machine 10, as a detailed variation pattern corresponding to the 2R variation, for example, while displaying a character such as “chicken” or “girl” in the small areas Ds1 and Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81, finally. A variation pattern in which the third symbol stops at a specific symbol, a variation pattern in which the third symbol finally stops at a specific symbol with the lighting or blinking of a specific lamp, and the like are included.

Note that the variation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined using only the variation type counter CS1, but it may be configured to be determined using a plurality of other variation type counters. For example, whether or not to add a notice effect for announcing the start of the jackpot or reach effect before or during the change effect may be determined by another change type counter, or when the reach is established, It may be determined by another variation type counter how many symbols are shifted to stop the third symbol that is stopped (for example, the front and rear deviated by one symbol).

Further, in the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1, a group dedicated to the 2R certainty variation jackpot is provided, but in the pachinko machine 10, when the 2R certainty variation jackpot is selected, only the variation pattern of “2R variation” is selected. A group dedicated to the 2R probability variable jackpot may not be provided, and the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 may specify only the association between the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation pattern when the 15R probability variation jackpot or the 15R normal jackpot is achieved. In this case, when the big hit type is 2R certainty variation big hit, the 2R variation may be determined as the change pattern without referring to the big hit variation pattern table 202d1.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, only "2R fluctuation" is selected when the 2R certainty variation jackpot is hit, but one variation pattern is selected from a plurality of variation patterns when the 2R certainty variation jackpot is hit. You may do it. In this case, even in a group dedicated to the 2R certainty variation jackpot, such as the 15R jackpot common group, the variation type counter CS1 is associated with the variation pattern selected when the 2R certainty variation jackpot is selected, and the variation pattern counter CS1 is associated with a certain holding area. The fluctuation pattern associated with the stored value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 may be determined as the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation effect held in the holding area.

FIG. 8D schematically illustrates an example of the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 referred to when the number of reserved balls is 2 in the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 stored in the ROM 202. It is the figure shown.

As shown in FIG. 8D, the detachment (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 is dedicated to complete detachment, referred to when complete detachment is determined as the stop type at the time of detachment, and front and rear detachment and front and rear detachment. Other than the common reach that is referred to when a reach is determined and the group (group) based on the stop type at the time of deviation, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 corresponds to each of the divided groups. It is attached.

When the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in a certain holding area is not a big hit value (big hit random value), that is, when the value is out of the normal state, the gaming state is in the normal state except the time saving state. When in the low-probability state, the variation type counter CS1 stored in the holding area according to the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same holding area as the first random number counter C1. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of is determined from the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2.

For the complete deviation only, two fluctuation patterns, a fluctuation D having a fluctuation time of 7 seconds and a fluctuation E having a fluctuation time of 10 seconds, are prepared in a selectable manner, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set for each fluctuation pattern. It is associated. When the variation D or the variation E is selected as the variation pattern, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation effect is displayed in which the reach is not established and the stop is displayed after the high-speed variation of the third symbol is started. As shown in FIG. 8D, in the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2, the fluctuation D is associated with each fluctuation only for complete deviation when the number of reserved balls is 2 and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. 0 to 98, and variation E is 99 to 198.

Further, in common to reach, the above-mentioned three variations A to C, that is, variation A in which the variation time is 30 seconds and normal reach is executed on the third symbol display device 81, and variation time is 60 seconds, the super reach is the second. Three variation patterns are provided, a variation B executed by the three symbol display device 81 and a variation C executed by the third symbol display device 81 with a variation time of 90 seconds and special reach. In the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2, when the number of reserved balls is 2, each variation common to the reach is associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1, the variation A is 0 to 98, and the variation B is 99 to 190. , The variation C is 191-198.

FIG. 8E schematically illustrates an example of the deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 referred to when the number of reserved balls is 2 in the deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 stored in the ROM 202. It is the figure shown.

As shown in FIG. 8E, the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 is referred to when complete deviation is determined as the stop type at the time of deviation, like the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table. Fluctuation D and fluctuation E can be selected as fluctuation patterns only, and out-of-front/rear reach and common reach that can be selected when fluctuations other than front-rear reach are determined and fluctuations A to C can be selected as fluctuation patterns, The values are set in groups (groups) based on the stop type at the time of disengagement, and the values of the change type counter CS1 are associated with the change patterns that can be selected in each of the divided groups.

When the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in a certain holding area is a value that does not become a big hit, that is, a value that is out of range, when the gaming state is in a time saving state or a high probability state at the time of probability change, According to the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same holding area, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the holding area is the deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern. It is determined from the table 202d3.

As shown in FIG. 8E, in the deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202d3, when the number of reserved balls is 2, the correspondence between each fluctuation and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 only for complete deviation is 0 to 190, and fluctuation E is 191 to 198. Further, in the case where the number of reserved balls is 2, each variation in the common reach and the value of the variation type counter CS1 are associated with each other, the variation A is 0 to 98, the variation B is 99 to 190, and the variation C is 191 to 198. ing. That is, the correspondence between each variation and the value of the variation type counter CS1 common to the reach is the same in the out-of-regulation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 and the out-of-regulation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3.

On the other hand, when the gaming state is in the time saving state or the high probability state of the probability change, it is easy for a ball to enter the second start opening 64b, and a large deviation (variation E) with a long variation time is often executed. Then, it takes time to start the next variable display, which may make the player feel uncomfortable by giving a waiting state. In addition, the operating rate of the hall is reduced, which is not preferable.

Therefore, if the game state is completely lost when the game state is in the time saving state or the high probability state of probability change, the complete disconnection with a shorter fluctuation time than in the other game state (normal state excluding the time saving state) ( The deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 and the deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 are configured so that the fluctuation D) can be easily selected. Thus, by starting the next variable display early, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will feel uncomfortable. Further, it is possible to prevent the operating rate from extremely decreasing.

Although the variation pattern at the time of deviation is selected by using only the variation type counter CS1, it may be selected by using a plurality of variation type counters in combination (whether or not a notice is displayed). Further, the selection of the deviation type is configured to be divided into a deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table and a deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table, but even if the game state is normal, there are a plurality of holding balls (for example, In the case of a maximum of four, three or more), the variable display may be ended early, and therefore the out-of-range (probability change) variation pattern table may be referred to and selected.

Further, the variation A to C selected when the variation type is the out-of-front/rear reach or the reach other than the out-of-front/rear, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 are the same regardless of the game state, so that the out ( The normal) variation pattern table 202d2 and the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 do not include a group common to the reach, and the variation pattern tables 202d2 and 202d3 are referred to only when the stop type is completely out. Alternatively, a variation pattern table to be referred to when the stop type is the front/rear outreach or the reach other than the front/rear outreach regardless of the game state may be separately prepared.

In the pachinko machine 10, the variations A to C selected when the variation type is the out-of-front/rear reach or the reach other than the out-of-front/rear, and the association of the value of the variation type counter CS1 is the same regardless of the game state. However, it may be different depending on the gaming state.

Further, in the deviation pattern tables 202d2 and 202d3 for each deviation shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, the fluctuations D and E are simply referred to as “complete deviation fluctuations”, and the “perfect deviation fluctuations” are selected. In this case, the variation D and the variation E may be selected with a predetermined probability by referring to another table. Of course, also in this case, each table corresponding to the number of reserved balls may be prepared.

Returning to FIG. 7, the second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 250, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). Further, when the second per random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second per random number counter C4.

In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), and is acquired when it is detected that the sphere has passed either the left or right through gate 67. The number of random number values to be won is 149, and the range is “5 to 153”. That is, when the value of the acquired second hit random number counter C4 is in the range of “5-153”, it is determined to be a hit, and the symbol “◯” is displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol) on the second symbol display device 83. At the same time as being lit and displayed, the electric accessory of the second starting port 64b is activated, and the second starting port 64b is opened for a predetermined time.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value=0 to 250), and is once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10). It is updated and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 17).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the variable display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the values of the counters and the like. It is possible to execute main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as (variation effect) setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The prize ball number table 202e of the ROM 202 is a table that defines the number of prize balls to be paid out when the balls enter (win) the respective winning openings 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a. Here, the details of the prize ball number table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the prize ball number table 202e.

As shown in FIG. 9, in the prize ball number table 202e, as the "starting opening type", the first starting opening 64a, the second starting opening 64b, the first normal winning opening 63a, the second normal winning opening 63b, the big winning opening 65a. Is defined, and for each winning opening, the “number of prize balls” corresponding to the winning opening is defined. Specifically, in the award ball number table 202e, the award ball number 3 is associated with the first starting opening 64a, and the award ball number 2 is associated with the second starting opening 64b. The number of prize balls 8 is associated with the mouth 63a, the number of prize balls 8 is associated with the second normal prize hole 63b, and the number of prize balls 12 is associated with the major prize hole 65a.

It should be noted that the prize ball number table 202e defines the number of prize balls corresponding to each of the winning openings for all the winning openings provided in the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, when a prize hole is provided in addition to each of the prize holes 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a, the prize ball number table 202e including the number of prize balls corresponding to the prize hole. Is prescribed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the number of prize balls is the same in the first normal winning opening 63a and the second normal winning opening 63b. Therefore, in the prize ball number table 202e, the "starting mouth type" is defined as "ordinary winning hole" by combining the first ordinary winning hole 63a and the second ordinary winning hole 63b, and is associated with the "ordinary winning hole". The number of prize balls may be eight. Further, if the number of prize balls of the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b is the same as "3", the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b are combined in the prize ball number table 202e. The "starting opening type" may be defined as "starting opening" and the number of prize balls may be defined in association with the "starting opening".

The prize ball number table 202e is transmitted to the character role ratio management chip 207 during the initialization process of the MPU 201 executed when the main controller 110 is powered on, and the character role ratio management chip 207 receives the character types. Used when calculating the ratio.

The trigger information data 202f is data that defines the timing (trigger) for calculating the character ratio in the character ratio management chip 207. Although details will be described later, the accessory ratio management chip 207 calculates the accessory ratio at the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f.

The character ratio management chip 207 corresponds to three timings (triggers) as timings (triggers) for calculating the character ratio. The first is the number of shots of the sphere, and the accessory ratio management chip 207 calculates the accessory ratio each time the number of shot balls reaches a predetermined number. The second is the time, and the accessory ratio management chip 207 calculates the accessory ratio at a predetermined time. The third is game time, and the character ratio management chip 207 calculates the character ratio when the game time by the player has passed a predetermined time.

In the trigger information data 202f, information indicating any of "number of shots", "time", and "game time" is defined as the timing (trigger) for calculating the character ratio in the character ratio management chip 207.

When the information indicating the "number of shots" is defined, the trigger information data 202f also defines the information indicating the "predetermined number of balls" which is the timing for calculating the accessory ratio. For example, if the trigger information data 202f defines information indicating "the number of shots" and information indicating "500 balls" as the "predetermined number of balls", the character role ratio is set every time the number of shot balls becomes 500. The management chip 207 calculates the accessory ratio.

When the information indicating “time” is specified, the trigger information data 202f also specifies information indicating “predetermined time”, which is the timing for calculating the accessory ratio. For example, when the trigger information data 202f defines information indicating “time” and information indicating 12:00, 17:00, 19:00, and 22:00 as “predetermined time”, the time is 12:00. At 17:00, 19:00, 22:00, the accessory ratio management chip 207 calculates the accessory ratio.

When the information indicating the "game time" is specified, the trigger information data 202f also specifies the information indicating the "predetermined time" which is the timing for calculating the accessory ratio. For example, when the information indicating "game time" and the information indicating 2 hours as the "predetermined time" are defined in the trigger information data 202f, the accessory ratio management chip 207 every 2 hours of the game time. At, the character ratio is calculated.

The trigger information data 202f, together with the prize ball number table 202e, is transmitted to the character role ratio management chip 207 in the initialization process of the MPU 201 which is executed when the main controller 110 is powered on, and the character role ratio is calculated. It is used when the management chip 207 determines a trigger for calculating the accessory ratio.

In addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 7, the RAM 203 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, and I/O. And a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. It should be noted that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off (including the occurrence of a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the power failure signal SG1 output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201. By this input, the power failure occurrence information is set by the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 15) executed. Then, in the main process of the MPU 201 (FIG. 17), when it is determined that there is power-off occurrence information, the stack pointer at that time and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203.

On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on by elimination of power failure. The same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power-off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by the main process (see FIG. 20), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 19).

The RAM 203 further includes a reserved ball number counter 203a, a reserved ball storage area 203b, a reserved ball execution area 203c, a start 1 counter 203d, a start 2 counter 203e, a regular 1 counter 203f, a regular 2 counter 203g, a special winning opening counter 203h, and an out. It has at least a counter 203i.

The number of reserved balls counter 203a is one of the first starting opening 64a and the second starting opening 64b detected in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 14) that is regularly executed every 2 milliseconds. Based on the entry into the ball (start prize), the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display (variation effect performed on the third symbol display device 81) performed on the first symbol display device 37 is counted up to 4 times. It is a counter that does. The holding ball number counter 203a is set to zero as an initial value by the initial setting process (S616 in FIG. 16) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, every time the winning a prize is detected and the number of balls to be held for variable display is increased, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 (see S202 and S203 in FIG. 12). On the other hand, the pending ball number counter 203a is decremented by 1 each time the variation effect is executed (see S305 in FIG. 13).

The value of the hold ball number counter 203a (that is, the hold ball number) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the hold ball number command (see S205 in FIG. 12). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the start winning is detected and the reserved ball number counter 203a is incremented by one.

The voice lamp control device 113 can acquire the value of the number of reserved balls itself of the variable effect suspended in the main control device 110 by the reserved ball number command. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can manage the number of times the variable effect is held without accessing the main control device 110. In addition, by transmitting a reserve ball number command from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time a start winning is detected, the number of reserve ball numbers of the variable effect managed by the voice lamp control device 113 is reduced by noise. Even if the number of balls to be held is changed from the actual number of balls to be held in the main control unit 110 due to the influence of the above, the deviation can be corrected by the next command to hold balls.

It should be noted that the voice lamp control device 113 transmits a display reserved ball number command for notifying the reserved ball number to the display control device 114 every time the reserved ball number managed therein changes. The display control device 114 displays the reserved sphere number pattern in the reserved sphere number display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved sphere number notified by the display reserved sphere number command.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the main control device 110 transmits a holding ball number command to the voice lamp control device 113, not only the value of the holding ball number counter 203a incremented by 1 in the holding ball number command, , The first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter, which are acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 6) in accordance with the above-mentioned start winning that triggered the addition of the reserved ball number counter 203a. The values of C3 and fluctuation type counter CS1 are also included.

That is, when there is a start winning, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer by the main controller 110 are The number of reserved balls is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

In the voice lamp control device 113, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the change type counter CS1 transmitted by the hold ball number command are changed based on the respective values. Prior to execution of the effect, pre-reading is performed to determine what the variable effect will look like (whether it is a big hit, what will happen to the change time, etc.) before execution of the effect. The execution of various effects can be determined based on the result of the pre-reading judgment.

The reserved ball storage area 203b includes a first random number counter C1, a first hit type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3, and a change type counter CS1 acquired from a counter buffer (see FIG. 7) in accordance with the detection of a start winning. It is a memory for storing each value. When the MPU 201 detects in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) that the ball has won a prize (start prize) in one of the first starting opening 64a and the second starting opening 64b, each counter is counted from the counter buffer. The values of C1 to C3 and CS1 are acquired and stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b. The holding ball storage area 203b has four holding areas (holding 1st to 1st holding) so that data (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) corresponding to one start winning can be stored (holding) up to four times. 4 areas) (see FIG. 7).

The reserved ball execution area 203c is data to be referred to in a jackpot lottery and a process of setting variable display (fluctuation effect) of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 (each of counters C1 to C3 and CS1). This is a memory for storing (value).

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the fluctuating effect, the jackpot lottery, in order to execute the process of setting the variable display (fluctuation effect) of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, etc. Among the data (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) corresponding to each starting prize stored in the holding ball storage area 203b described above, the data corresponding to one starting prize is stored in the holding ball execution area 203c. Shift to. The shift in this embodiment means moving the data stored in one area to another area.

Here, with reference to FIG. 7 again, the details of the reserved ball storage area 203b and the reserved ball execution area 203c will be described. The reserved ball storage area 203b and the reserved ball execution area 203c are jackpot lottery and MPU201 of the main controller 110 for setting the variable display (fluctuation effect) of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. Used by.

To set the jackpot lottery and the variable display (fluctuation effect) of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first hit random number counter C1 used in the jackpot lottery and the first used to determine the jackpot type. The hit type symbol counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3 used to determine the stop type at the time of disengagement, and the variation type counter CS1 used to determine the variation pattern are used. Each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 is acquired from the counter buffer by the MPU 201 when the ball holds a prize (start prize) in either the first starting opening 64a or the second starting opening 64b. Remember each value.

The reserved ball storage area 203b is composed of four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas). In each of the four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), a first per random number counter storage area 203b1 for storing the value of the first per random number counter C1 and a first per random type counter C2 for storing the value of each per type counter C2. There is provided a per-type classification counter storage area 203b2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203b4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1.

In the present embodiment, the first random number counter storage area 203b1, the first hit type counter storage area 203b2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3, and the fluctuation type counter storage area 203b4 are combined into one reserved ball storage area. Although provided in 203b, a plurality of reserved ball storage areas may be provided, and four areas 203b1, 203b2, 203b3, 203b4 may be provided in any of the reserved ball storage areas.

As described above, in the reserved ball storage area 203b, data (each counter C1 to C3, each value of CS1) acquired at the timing when the ball wins the second starting opening 64b (start winning) is stored up to four times. However, in this case, the data is stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the starting prize that is older in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, the data that corresponds to the starting prize that is earliest in time is stored.

On the other hand, the reserved ball execution area 203c is composed of only one area. In the reserved sphere execution area 203c, like the reserved sphere storage area 203b, a first per random number counter storage area 203c1 for storing the value of the first per random number counter C1 and a value of the first per type counter C2 are stored. A first hit type counter storage area 203c2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3 that stores the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203c4 that stores the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided.

When the MPU 201 determines that the execution start timing of the variable effect has come, the MPU 201 sets the data (each value of the counters C1 to C3, CS1) stored in the holding first area of the holding ball storage area 203b to the holding ball. The areas 203c1 to 203c4 of the execution area 203c are respectively shifted. Then, the data shifted to the holding ball execution area 203c is referred to in the variation start process (see FIG. 17), the jackpot lottery is performed based on the reference data, and the variation pattern and the stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. decide. In the first symbol display device 37, the variable display is performed under the control of the main control device 110 based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

Further, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the change pattern command and the stop type command, and also to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113. .. Then, by the control of the display control device 114, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation effect is performed based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

Details of data shift will be described. When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start the execution of the variable effect, the MPU 201 transfers the random number value of the first random number counter storage area 203b1 of the reserved first area to the first random number counter storage area 203c1 of the reserved ball execution area 203c. shift. Similarly, the random number value of the first hit type counter storage area 203b2 is shifted to the first hit type counter storage area 203c2, and the random number value of the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 is shifted to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3. The random number value in the variation type counter storage area 203b4 is shifted to the variation type counter storage area 203c4.

Then, when the shift of the data to the reserved ball execution area 203c is completed, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that it is stored (held) in each area (second to fourth) of the reserved ball storage area 203b. A shift process is performed in which data is packed in an area having a smaller area number by 1 (first to third areas). In the present embodiment, in the reserved ball storage area 203b, the data is shifted only for the reserved areas (first to fourth) in which the data is stored (held).

Here, the data shift performed for each holding area in the holding ball storage area 203b will be described. For example, it is assumed that the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a at the time when the start of the variation effect is determined is "4" and data is stored in all areas (first to fourth) of the reserved ball storage area 203b. To do. In this state, the data in the reserved first area is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203c, and when the reserved first area becomes empty, the MPU 201 sets the data in the other areas (second to fourth) respectively. Shift to the area with the smallest number by 1 (first to third). That is, the data in the reserved second area is shifted to the reserved first area, the data in the reserved third area is shifted to the reserved second area, and the data in the reserved fourth area is shifted to the reserved third area.

In addition, for example, if the value of the number-of-holding-balls 203a when the change effect start determination is made is “2”, the MPU 201 shifts only the data of the holding second area to the holding first area. , Data shift ends. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the data shift processing is not performed for the holding areas (third to fourth) in which the data is not stored (held), the number of data shifts can be reduced. Therefore, the control load can be reduced.

It should be noted that, regardless of the presence/absence of data, each data in the holding area (second to fourth) may be configured to be shifted to an area having a smaller area number by one. In that case, it is unnecessary to determine whether or not the data is stored (held) in the holding areas (second to fourth), and thus it is possible to easily create the program.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The starting 1 counter 203d is a counter for counting the number of balls winning the first starting opening 64a, the starting 2 counter 203e is a counter for counting the number of balls winning the second starting opening 64b, and a normal 1 counter 203f. Is a counter that counts the number of balls that have won the first regular winning opening 63a, a normal 2 counter 203g that counts the number of balls that have won the second regular winning opening 63b, and a large winning opening counter 203h that is large. The counter for counting the number of balls won in the winning opening 65a, the out counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game). is there. All of these counters 203d to 203i are set to zero as initial values by the initial setting process (S616 of FIG. 16) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on.

Further, the MPU 201 performs the switch reading process (see FIG. 11) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) executed every 2 milliseconds, and the start 1 port 205a, the start 2 port 205b, and the normal 1 port 205a. With reference to the port 205c, the ordinary second port 205d, the special winning opening port 205e, and the out port 205f, the first starting opening switch 208a, the second starting opening switch 208b, the first normal winning opening switch 208c, and the second normal winning opening switch 208d. It is determined whether or not a ball is detected in each of the special winning opening switch 208e and the out switch 208f. Then, when there is a prize in any of the winning openings (a ball is detected in the corresponding switch), the counter corresponding to the winning opening in which the winning is made is incremented by one, and the ball is set in the out switch 208f. When is detected, the out counter 203i is incremented by 1.

The counting of the number of balls in the counters 203d to 203i is continuously performed for 0.5 seconds. Then, when 0.5 seconds has elapsed, the values of the counters 203d to 203h are set as winning information, and the values of the out counter 203i are set as out information, together with the information indicating the game state at that time, and set in the character ratio management chip 207. To be done. When the setting of the values of the counters 203d to 203i on the character ratio management chip 207 is completed, the values of the counters 203d to 203i are initialized to zero, and the prize holes are won again in the next 0.5 seconds. The number of balls played is counted for each winning opening, and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game) is counted.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the MPU 201 counts the number of balls won in each winning opening for each winning opening at intervals of 0.5 seconds, and detects the number of balls guided to the ball discharging path. The number (that is, the number of balls used in the game) is counted, and the counted result is set in the accessory ratio management chip 207. Then, as will be described later, the accessory ratio management chip 207 accumulates these counted values for each value until the timing for calculating the accessory ratio is reached, so that it is the first time since the power is turned on. The number of balls won in each winning opening until the timing to calculate the property ratio or the time to calculate the next character ratio after the last character ratio is calculated. It is counted every time, and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game) is counted.

In this way, since the MPU 201 inputs the number of winning balls to the winning opening that are actually detected by the MPU 201 to the accessory ratio managing chip 207, the accessory ratio managing chip 207 is used in the actual game. It is possible to accurately grasp the number of balls recognized as winning.

Further, suppose that the MPU 201 counts the number of balls won in each winning hole for each winning hole and the number of balls guided to the ball discharging path (that is, the number of balls used in the game). If it is not performed and only the character ratio management chip 207 performs these counting, the character ratio management chip 207 also guides each prize hole to the winning opening or guides the ball to the ball discharge path at short intervals (for example, every 2 milliseconds). It is necessary to monitor the spheres that have been struck, which may increase the processing load and power consumption.

On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, since the counting results of the MPU 201 set these counting results in the character ratio management chip 207 at intervals of 0.5 seconds, the character ratio management chip 207 measures 0.5 seconds each. During the period from when the power is turned on until the timing of calculating the character ratio for the first time, or from the time when the character ratio is calculated last time to the time when the character ratio is calculated next time. It suffices to execute the process of counting the number of balls that have won the mouth for each winning port and also the number of balls that have been guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls that have been used in the game). Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in processing load and power consumption in the accessory ratio management chip 207.

On the other hand, the MPU 201 counts the number of balls that have won in each winning opening for each winning opening, and also counts the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game). For this reason, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, it is necessary to monitor the winning of each winning opening and the balls guided to the ball discharging path. In the first place, these monitoring are major jackpot lottery and prize ball determination such as main game. It is necessary to perform such control, and is originally processed at a short time interval of 2 milliseconds. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, since the firing interval of the balls fired to the game area by the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 5) is about 0.6 seconds, each winning opening counted at 0.5 second intervals is used. The number of winning balls and the number of balls guided to the ball discharging path (that is, the number of balls used in the game) are 0 or 1 in most cases, and at most several. Therefore, the amount of data required for the counters 203d to 203i provided in the RAM 203 may be small. Therefore, the increase in the capacity of the RAM 203 can be suppressed by this counting process. Therefore, in the MPU 201, the number of balls that have won in each winning opening within 0.5 seconds is counted for each winning opening, and the number of balls guided to the ball discharging path (that is, the balls used in the game) Even if the processing of counting the number of) is executed, no great influence occurs.

The accessory ratio management chip 207 is provided with a CPU 261, a buffer 262, a first reading memory 263, a second reading memory 264, a setting register 265, and a real time clock (hereinafter referred to as “RTC”) 266. And these are connected to each other via a bus 206. The bus 206 is also connected to the MPU 201 and the inspection terminal 207a.

Further, a high-capacity capacitor 267 is connected to the accessory ratio management chip 207. The capacitor 267 is configured to be charged while power is being supplied to the main controller 110, and when the power supply to the main controller 110 is stopped due to a power failure or the like, the accessory ratio management chip 207 By using the electric power charged in the capacitor 267, the process associated with the power interruption is executed. A secondary battery that can be charged and discharged may be connected to the accessory ratio management chip 207 instead of the capacitor 267.

The CPU 261 is an arithmetic unit that controls the operation of the accessory ratio management chip 207, and executes a control program stored in a ROM (not shown) provided in the accessory ratio management chip 207 to execute a role in the pachinko machine 10. The property ratio management chip 207 manages the property ratio and the like. The CPU 261 manages the character ratio in the character ratio management chip 207, thereby changing the software to flexibly cope with a change in the function or specification of the character ratio management chip 207.

The RTC 266 outputs the current time. The RTC 266 has a built-in rechargeable secondary battery (not shown), and the RTC 266 outputs the time while always keeping the present time as a power source. The time output by the RTC 266 is referred to by the CPU 261 when the timing (trigger) for calculating the accessory ratio set by the trigger setting area 265b is “time”, and the time indicated by the RTC 266 is the time set by the trigger setting area. When it coincides with or exceeds the “predetermined time” set in 265b, the process of calculating the accessory ratio is executed. Further, as will be described later in detail, the jackpot information, the door opening information, the error information, or the in-error information for the big reading data 263g, the opening data 263h, the error data 263i, and the overtime data 263j in the first reading memory 263, respectively. When the after-hours information is added, the time at that time is read from the RTC 266, and the read time is added to each data together with each information.

The buffer 262 is a memory for temporarily storing various types of information set by the MPU 201, and is configured by an SRAM (Static Random Access Memory) that is a volatile memory capable of reading and writing data. The buffer 262 includes a start 1 buffer 262a, a start 2 buffer 262b, a regular 1 buffer 262c, a regular 2 buffer 262d, a special winning opening buffer 262e, an out buffer 262f, a jackpot buffer 262g, an open buffer 262h, an error buffer 262i, and the like. Is provided at least.

The start-first buffer 262a stores the value of the start-first counter 203d set by the MPU 201 at intervals of 0.5 seconds. The start 2 buffer 262b stores the value of the start 2 counter 203e set by the MPU 201 at 0.5 second intervals. The ordinary-first buffer 262c stores the value of the ordinary-first counter 203f set by the MPU 201 at intervals of 0.5 seconds. The ordinary second buffer 262d stores the value of the ordinary second counter 203g set by the MPU 201 at 0.5 second intervals. The special winning opening buffer 262e stores the value of the special winning opening counter 203h set by the MPU 201 at intervals of 0.5 seconds. The value of the out counter 203i set by the MPU 201 at 0.5 second intervals is stored in the out buffer 262f.

The jackpot buffer 262g stores information (jackpot information) when the gaming state set by the MPU 201 at intervals of 0.5 seconds is jackpot. In the opening buffer 262h, when the game state set by the MPU 201 at intervals of 0.5 seconds is the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14, that information (door opening information) is stored. The error buffer 262i stores information (error information) when the gaming state set by the MPU 201 is in error at 0.5 second intervals.

In the accessory ratio management chip 207, the MPU 201 sets (writes) various buffers provided in the buffer 262, and when an interrupt signal is received from the MPU 201, the CPU 261 receives the setting information reception processing (see FIG. 19) described later. ). The setting information reception process counts the number of balls won for each winning opening based on various information set in the buffer 262, and is guided to the ball discharge path (that is, a ball launched to the game area). The number of balls is counted and the number of these balls is stored in the first reading memory 263, and the information on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is also stored in the first reading memory 263.

The setting register 265 is a register for setting a setting value necessary for the operation of the accessory ratio management chip 207. The setting register 265 is provided with at least a prize ball number data setting area 265a and a trigger setting area 265b.

In the prize ball number data setting area 265a, a prize ball number table 202e (see FIG. 9) stored in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 is set. In the trigger setting area 265b, the trigger information data 202f stored in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 is set. When the main controller 110 is powered on, the prize ball number table 202e and the trigger information data 202f are transmitted to the accessory ratio management chip 207. Then, the CPU 261 sets the prize ball number table 202e in the prize ball number data setting area 265a, and sets the trigger information data 202f in the trigger setting area 265b.

The prize sphere number table 202e set in the prize sphere number data setting area 265a is referred to by the CPU 261 when calculating the accessory ratio. Here, the number of prize balls when each prize is won is determined by the model of the pachinko machine, and conventionally, the information is stored in the ROM 202. The prize ball number table 202e stored in the ROM 202 is transmitted to the character ratio management chip 207 every time the power is supplied, and the information about the number of prize balls is set in the character ratio management chip 207. By setting it to 265a, it is not necessary to store the information of the number of prize balls, which is different for each model, in the ROM of the accessory ratio management chip 207 at the manufacturing stage. Therefore, the manufacturing of the accessory ratio management chip 207 can be simplified. If the model of the pachinko machine is different, the ROM 202 may be changed, and even if the same character role ratio management chip 207 is used for the pachinko machines of different models, the character role ratio can be accurately calculated.

The trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is also referred to by the CPU 261 to determine whether or not it is the timing (trigger) for calculating the accessory ratio shown in the trigger information data 202f. When it is determined, the processing for calculating the accessory ratio is executed. Here, the timing (trigger) for calculating the character ratio is determined by the character ratio management chip 207 because there is a physical limit to the storage capacity in which the character ratio management chip 207 can record information on the character ratio. Instead of fixing the timing, it is preferable to consider the jackpot probability and the probability of change in the pachinko machine 10. Like the pachinko machine 10, the ROM 202 stores the trigger information data 202f that defines the timing of the calculation of the accessory ratio determined in consideration of the jackpot probability and the probability variation ratio in the pachinko machine 10, and the power is supplied. Each time the trigger information data 202f is transmitted to the ROM 202 to the character ratio managing chip 207, the character ratio managing chip 207 causes the character ratio managing chip 207 to match the jackpot probability or the probability variation ratio in the pachinko machine 10. It is possible to calculate the ratio and the continuous winning character ratio, and record it in the second reading memory 264.

It should be noted that only the prize ball number table 202e and the trigger information data 202f transmitted in the startup process (so-called boot process) executed by the MPU 201 when the main controller 110 is powered on are the prize ball number data. It is configured to be set in the setting area 265a and the trigger setting area 265b. The startup process is a so-called boot process and is a non-user program that is not programmed by the user. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fraudulent person from setting the false prize ball number table and the trigger information data in the prize ball number data setting area 265a and the trigger setting area 265b.

The first reading memory 263 is a memory for temporarily storing, while accumulating, the information set in the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 until the timing of calculating the role ratio. The first reading memory 263 is a volatile memory capable of reading and writing data, such as SRAM. The first reading memory 263 may be configured by a DRAM (Dynamic Random Access Memory) that is a volatile memory that can read and write a larger amount of data.

In the first reading memory 263, the starting 1 counter 263a, the starting 2 counter 263b, the ordinary 1 counter 263c, the ordinary 2 counter 263d, the special winning opening counter 263e, the out counter 263f, the jackpot data 263g, the opening data 263h, and the error At least data 263i and after-hours data 263j are stored. These counters and data stored in the first reading memory 263 are all initialized to 0 by the CPU 261 based on the initialization signal transmitted from the MPU 201 when the main controller 110 is powered on ( (See S710 in FIG. 18).

Further, these counters and data stored in the first reading memory 263 are referred to by the character role ratio calculation processing executed by the CPU 261 when it is time to calculate the character role ratio, and necessary processing is executed. After that, all are initialized to 0 by the CPU 261 again (S744 in FIG. 21). As a result, in the first reading memory 263, the information set in the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 is temporarily stored again while accumulating until the timing of calculating the accessory ratio next time. ..

The starting 1 counter 263a is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of balls that have won the first starting opening 64a until the timing of calculating the character ratio. When the MPU 201 sets the value of the start-1 counter 203d indicating the number of balls that have won the first start opening 64a in the start-1 buffer 262a, the value set in the start-1 buffer 262a by the CPU 261. (That is, the number of balls winning the first starting opening 64a for 0.5 seconds) is added to the first-one counter 263a.

The start 2 counter 263b is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of balls winning the second starting opening 64b until the timing of calculating the accessory ratio. When the MPU 201 sets the value of the starting 2 counter 203e indicating the number of balls that have won the first starting opening 64a in the starting 2 buffer 262b, the value set in the starting 2 buffer 262b by the CPU 261. (That is, the number of balls winning the second starting opening 64b for 0.5 seconds) is added to the start 2 counter 263b.

The normal 1 counter 263c is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of balls that have won the first normal winning opening 63a until the timing of calculating the character ratio. When the MPU 201 sets the value of the ordinary 1 counter 203f indicating the number of balls that have won the first ordinary winning opening 63a in the ordinary 1 buffer 262c for 0.5 seconds, the CPU 261 sets the value in the ordinary 1 buffer 262c. The value (that is, the number of balls that have won the first regular winning opening 63a for 0.5 seconds) is added to the regular 1 counter 263c.

The ordinary second counter 263d is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of balls that have won the second regular winning opening 63b until the timing of calculating the character ratio. When the MPU 201 sets the value of the ordinary 2 counter 203g indicating the number of balls that have won the second ordinary winning opening 63b in the ordinary 2 buffer 262d for 0.5 seconds, the CPU 261 sets the value in the ordinary 2 buffer 262d. The value (that is, the number of balls that have won the second regular winning opening 63b for 0.5 seconds) is added to the regular second counter 263d.

The special winning opening counter 263e is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of balls that have won the special winning opening 65a until the timing of calculating the character ratio. When the value of the special winning opening counter 203h indicating the number of balls that have won in the special winning opening 65a is set in the special winning opening buffer 262e by the MPU 201, the value is set in the special winning opening buffer 262e by the CPU 261. The value (that is, the number of balls that have won the special winning opening 65a for 0.5 seconds) is added to the special winning opening counter 263e.

The out counter 263f is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, balls launched into the game area) by the time it is time to calculate the character ratio. When the MPU 201 sets the value of the out counter 203i indicating the number of spheres guided to the sphere discharge path in the out buffer 262f for 0.5 seconds, the CPU 261 sets the value set in the out buffer 262f (that is, 0). The number of balls guided to the ball discharge path for 5 seconds) is added to the out counter 263f. When the trigger for calculating the character ratio set in the trigger setting area 265b is the "firing number", this out counter 263f is referred to, and the number of balls (firing number) indicated by the out counter 263f is the trigger setting area. When the number of balls is equal to or more than the “predetermined number of balls” set in 265b, the CPU 261 executes the processing for calculating the accessory ratio.

The jackpot medium data 263g is jackpot information indicating that the pachinko machine 10 has been a jackpot when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has been a jackpot by the time when it is time to calculate the character ratio, and the time at that time. It is the data specified together. When MPU201 sets the jackpot information indicating that the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot in the jackpot medium buffer 262g, the CPU261 causes the jackpot information to be combined with the current time indicated by the RTC266, and hits the jackpot. Added to the medium data 263g.

The open data 263h indicates that the pachinko machine 10 opens the door when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is opening the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 (door) by the time it is time to calculate the character ratio. This is data that defines the door opening information indicating that the state has been entered together with the time at that time. When the MPU 201 sets door opening information indicating that the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opening in the opening buffer 262h as the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the CPU 261 opens the door opening information. Is added to the open data 263h together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266.

The in-error data 263i is in-error information indicating that the pachinko machine 10 is in an error state when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in an error state by the time it is time to calculate the character ratio. It is the data specified together with the time. When the in-error information indicating that the pachinko machine 10 is in an error state is set in the in-error buffer 262i by the MPU 201, the CPU 261 sets the in-error information together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266. , Is added to the in-error data 263i.

In the pachinko machine 10, the after-hours data 263j is set in the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 when the setting (writing) is performed in the midnight hours (for example, from midnight to early morning 6:00) which is normally outside the business hours. It is data that defines after-hours information indicating that some operation has been performed at midnight, together with the time at that time. When the setting (writing) to the buffer 262 is performed by the MPU 201, when the time at that time is read from the RTC 266 by the CPU 261 and it is determined that the time is in the midnight time zone, the overtime information is It is added to the after-hours data 263j together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266.

The second reading memory 264 is composed of a nonvolatile memory capable of reading and writing data, for example, a flash memory. The second reading memory 264 only needs to retain the stored data while the power is turned off, and other than the flash memory, a ferroelectric memory (FeRAM: Ferroelectric Random Access Memory) or a magnetic resistance RAM. (MRAM: Magnetoresistive Random Access Memory), resistance change type memory (ReRAM: Resistive Random)
Access Memory) or the like. Further, by configuring the second reading memory 264 with a DRAM and continuously supplying the backup voltage to the DRAM from the power supply device 115 even when the power is off, data is retained even when the power is off. You may do so.

The second reading memory 264 stores at least character ratio data 264a, continuous character ratio data 264b, number of shot balls data 264c, and game state data 264d.

The character ratio data 264a is data in which data indicating the character ratio calculated at each timing (trigger) for calculating the character ratio is recorded together with the calculated time. The continuous accessory ratio data 264b is data in which the data representing the continuous accessory ratio calculated at the same timing (trigger) is recorded together with the calculated time.

Here, the prize ratio is paid out in accordance with the winning of the second start opening 64b and the special winning opening 65a in which the prize is operated, out of the total number of balls (prize balls) paid to the player. It shows the ratio of the number of balls (prize balls), and is set to 70% or less. Further, the continuous winning character ratio is a ball (prize that is paid out in association with winning of the special winning opening 65a in which the winning character continuously operates, out of the total number of balls (prize balls) paid out to the player. It shows the ratio of the number of spheres and is set to 60% or less.

Originally, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio refer to the above ratios when the test shooting test of the game ball is performed for 10 hours, but here, in the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b. At each timing (trigger) for calculating the accessory ratio shown by, the CPU 261 allows the player to reach the timing for the first time after the power is turned on, or between the previous timing and the current timing. Of the total number of balls (prize balls) paid out to the second starting opening 64b and the special winning opening 65a, the ratio of the number of balls (prize balls) paid out along with winning is calculated, It is recorded in the accessory ratio data 264a together with the time. Also, of the total number of balls (prize balls) paid out to the player from the time the power was turned on until the timing reached for the first time, or from the timing from the previous time to this timing, the grand prize. The ratio of the number of balls (prize balls) paid out in accordance with the winning of the mouth 65a is calculated, and is recorded in the continuous accessory ratio data 264b together with the time at that time.

In addition, even when the power is cut off, the power charged in the capacitor 267 is used to be paid out while it is determined that the power is cut off from the latest timing (trigger) for calculating the accessory ratio. The character ratio and the continuous character ratio are calculated on the basis of the number of the balls (prize balls), and are recorded in the character ratio data 264a or the continuous character ratio data 264b together with the time at that time. .. As a result, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are calculated and recorded, and thereafter, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are kept even for the number of prize balls paid out before the power is turned off. The ratio can be calculated.

The number of balls which are stored in the first reading memory 263 and which are won in the first starting opening 64a which is indicated by the starting 1 counter 263a, and the number of balls which are winning in the second starting opening 64b which are indicated by the starting 2 counter 263b The number of balls that have been won in the first ordinary winning opening 63a indicated by the 1 counter 263c, the number of balls that have been won in the second ordinary winning opening 63b indicated by the ordinary 2 counter 263d, and the large amount that is indicated by the large winning opening counter 263e. The number of prize balls associated with each prize hole shown in the prize ball number table 202e (see FIG. 9) set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a with respect to the number of balls won in the prize hole 65a. By multiplying by, it is possible to calculate, for each winning opening, the number of balls paid out in accordance with the winning of the winning opening. Then, by summing these, the total number of balls paid out to the player can be calculated.

As a result, of the total number of balls paid out to the player, the number of balls paid out in accordance with the winning in the second starting opening 64b and the ball paid out in accordance with the winning in the special winning opening 65a. By calculating the total ratio with the number of characters, the character ratio can be calculated. Further, by calculating the ratio of the number of balls paid out along with the winning of the special winning opening 65a to the total number of balls paid out to the player, the continuous winning character ratio can be calculated.

The number of shot balls data 264c is the total number of balls shot to the game area counted by the out counter 263f of the first reading memory 263, and the time at that timing for each timing (trigger) for calculating the accessory ratio. The data is also recorded. The out counter 263f indicates the total number of balls shot to the game area from the time the power is turned on until the timing reaches the timing for the first time, or the timing from the previous timing to the current timing. When it is time to calculate the accessory ratio, the value of the out counter 263f at that time is recorded in the number of shot balls data 264c together with the time at that time indicated by the RTC 266.

The gaming state data 264d is the big hit data 263g, the opening data 263h, the error data 263i and the after-hours data 263j stored in the first reading memory 263. The jackpot information, the door opening information, the during-error information and the after-hours information. Is recorded together with the time associated with each piece of information. When it is time to calculate the character ratio, the big hit data 263g, the opening data 263h, the error data 263i and the overtime data 263j of the first reading memory 263, the big hit information, the door opening information, The in-error information, the after-hours information, and the time associated with each information are recorded in the game state data 264d by the CPU 261.

At this time, for example, if the big hit information is stored in the big hit medium data 263g at intervals of less than 1 second, it means that the big hits are continuously occurring as a game state, and thus the big hit at the oldest time. Only the information and the time are recorded in the game state data 264d. Similarly, in the door opening information, the error information, and the after-hours information, when each information is stored in each data 263h to j at intervals of less than 1 second, the information of the oldest time and the time Only the game state data 264d is recorded. As a result, the storage capacity required for the game state data 264d can be reduced.

When the jackpot information, the door opening information, the error information and the overtime information are recorded in the game state data 264d, the CPU 261 arranges (sorts) each information from the information of the old time, and then to the game state data 264d. Record. Then, when outputting the information recorded in the game state data 264d to the inspection device 300, the CPU 261 outputs the information in the recorded order. As a result, each piece of information is output in order from the oldest time, so that the inspection device 300 can easily analyze the change in the gaming state with the passage of time by analyzing the information in the output order.

However, the CPU 261 does not necessarily have to store the pieces of information in the gaming state data 264d side by side from the information of the old time. In this case, when outputting the information recorded in the game state data 264d to the inspection device 300, the CPU 261 may read out the game state data 264d in order from the oldest time information and transmit the information to the inspection device 300. The information may be output to the inspection apparatus 300 in the order in which the information is recorded, and the received information may be rearranged in the inspection apparatus 300 from the information at the oldest time.

The big hit data 263g, the opening data 263h, the error data 263i, and the after-hours data 263j of the first reading memory 263 correspond to the jackpot information, the door-opening information, the during-error information, and the after-hours information, respectively. All of them may be recorded in the game state data 264d together with the attached time. The storage capacity required for the game status data 264d becomes large, but by outputting this to the inspection device 300, it is possible to analyze the operation status of the pachinko machine 10 while watching the minute changes in the game status.

Here, the information about the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, and the total number of balls shot to the game area that can be recorded in the character ratio data 264a, the continuous character ratio data 264b, and the number of shot balls data 264c is a predetermined number ( For example, it is limited to 1024). Further, the total number of the jackpot information, the door opening information, the error information, and the after-hours information that can be recorded in the game state data 264d are also limited to a predetermined number (for example, 16384). If a predetermined number of information is already recorded in the character ratio data 264a, the continuous character ratio data 264b, the number of shot balls data 264c, or the game state data 264d, the oldest information is deleted and the latest information is stored therein. Is recorded. For example, the character ratio data 264a, the continuous character ratio data 264b, the number of shot balls data 264c, and the game status data 264d are respectively configured like ring buffers, and the position for writing information on each ring buffer is managed. The memory is prepared separately in the second reading memory 264 or a non-volatile memory provided separately from the second reading memory 264, and the writing position is shifted by 1 each time information is written. It is possible to realize a process of erasing and deleting the latest information. In this way, by setting an upper limit on the number of information that can be recorded in each data, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the second reading memory 264. In addition, when the information to be recorded in each data has reached the upper limit number, the oldest information is erased and the latest information is recorded to analyze the inspection device 300 including the latest state of the pachinko machine 10. Can be done. By providing a memory for managing the position where information is written on the ring buffer in the second reading memory 264, even if the power is cut off in the middle, the power is supplied after the power is supplied. From the continuation of the information stored up to, new information can be added and recorded.

When the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, the CPU 261 is interrupted, and the CPU 261 causes the character ratio data 264a recorded in the second reading memory 264, the continuous character ratio data 264b, and the shooting. The ball count data 264c and the game state data 264d are sequentially transmitted to the inspection device 300. When transmitting each data 264a-d to the inspection device 300, the CPU 261 records each information recorded in each data 264a-d (including the recorded time information associated with each information). The data is read in order and transmitted to the inspection device 300. By simply connecting the inspection device 300 to the inspection terminal 207a, an interrupt occurs, and a process of transmitting each piece of information recorded in the second reading memory 264 to the inspection device 300 is executed. Can be completed. Therefore, the inspection device 300 can analyze the character ratio or the continuous character ratio from the information received from the pachinko machine 10 and quickly and easily find a fraudulent act from the character ratio or the continuous character ratio.

Specifically, when the data to be transmitted to the inspection device 300 from now on does not satisfy the upper limit number (the above-mentioned predetermined number) of recordable information set for each, the CPU 261 first writes information to the data. The information recorded from the position where is written to the position indicated in the memory that manages the position where information is written (that is, the position where the information at the latest time is recorded) is sequentially read and inspected. Transmit to device 300. On the other hand, in the data for transmitting information to the inspection device 300, when the upper limit number of the recordable information (the above predetermined number) specified for each is satisfied, it is indicated by the memory that manages the position to write the information. The position next to the read position (that is, the position where the information of the oldest time is recorded) is sequentially shifted one by one, and the position where the information is written is managed (that is, the position shown in the memory). , The information recorded up to the position at which the latest time information was recorded) is sequentially read and transmitted to the inspection device 300. As a result, information is output to the inspection device 300 in order from the oldest time information.

Since the second reading memory 264 is composed of a non-volatile memory, even if the power is turned off midway, the second reading memory 264 records information on the role ratio, etc. in the pachinko machine 10. Continue to be done. Therefore, the inspection device 300 can receive and analyze the information on the accessory ratio including the information before the power is turned off.

Here, some fraudulent persons illegally open the electric accessory of the second starting opening 64b by some method or guide the ball to the second starting opening 64b, thereby making the second starting opening 64b. There are things that try to increase the number of prizes to increase the possibility of becoming a jackpot. Further, there are those that try to obtain many prize balls by illegally opening the opening/closing plate of the special winning opening 65a or guiding the ball to the special winning opening 65a. In the case of such a dishonest act, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio increase.

On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 10, by providing the accessory ratio management chip 207 in the main control device 110, and in the accessory ratio management chip 207, the winning information for each winning opening is obtained from the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. , The ratio of continuous characters and the ratio of continuous characters in the pachinko machine 10 are calculated at predetermined timings and continuously recorded. When the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio recorded in the accessory ratio management chip 207 are output to the inspection device 300. Accordingly, by analyzing the character ratio and the continuous character ratio in the inspection device 300, it is possible to discover the illegal act when the illegal act is performed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, information regarding the number of balls shot to the game area and information regarding the game state are also recorded in the accessory ratio management chip 207 and output to the inspection device 300. Therefore, when the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are high as a result of the analysis by the inspection device 300, the cause is searched based on the information on the number of balls shot to the game area and the information on the game state. be able to.

The accessory ratio management chip 207 is provided in the main controller 110, and is housed in one board box 100 together with the MPU 201, the ROM 202 and the like. As a result, it is difficult for a cheating person to modify the winning information or the like input to the character ratio management chip 207. It is also difficult to falsify or delete the character ratio and the continuous character ratio recorded by the character ratio management chip 207. Therefore, high reliability can be maintained for the character ratio and the continuous character ratio calculated and output by the character ratio management chip 207.

In addition, the accessory ratio management chip 207 is provided with a first reading memory 263 and a second reading memory 264, counts the number of balls won in each winning opening in the first reading memory 263, and reads the first reading memory 263. Based on the number of balls that have won a prize for each prize hole, the ratio of the character role and the ratio of the continuous character are calculated and recorded in the second reading memory 264. Here, the second reading memory 264 is composed of a non-volatile memory, but in general, the non-volatile memory requires a large amount of power for writing, takes a long time for writing, and is durable. There is a limit to the number of writes. In the present embodiment, the first reading memory 263 including a volatile memory and the second reading memory 264 including a non-volatile memory are separated from each other. By performing the process of counting and storing the number of winning balls for each mouth at high speed, it is possible to count the winning balls in each winning opening without omission. Then, afterwards, a process of calculating the character ratio and the continuous character ratio from the number of balls won for each winning opening stored in the first reading memory 263 and recording the ratio in the second reading memory 264 at a predetermined timing ( By executing each trigger, the number of writings to the second reading memory 264 can be reduced, so that it is possible to prevent the above problems caused by the non-volatile memory from being actualized.

Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I/O, and the like are stored in a work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 15) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input/output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to fire a sphere, the sphere launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated) on condition that the operation handle is not operated. The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired at an interval corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 at an interval of about 0.6 seconds.

The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice in a voice output device (a speaker not shown) 226, outputs a light and a light in a lamp display device (illumination parts 29 to 33, a display lamp 34, etc.) 227, a fluctuating effect and a continuous effect. This is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 such as the notice effect.

The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed or the super reach is performed. The voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the presentation mode at that time, and the display control device 114 is instructed.

When the stage is changed, in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When the frame button 22 is operated for a purpose other than changing the stage, such as changing the production mode of super reach, the frame button operation command is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving the frame button operation command, the display control device 114 displays an image corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 on the third symbol display device 81.

The RAM 223 indicates a command storage area (not shown) in which a command received from the main control device 110 is temporarily stored until a process corresponding to the command is performed, or a variation effect should be started in an ON state. It has a fluctuation start flag (not shown) and the like.

The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 25) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

The fluctuation start flag is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when the stop type command output from the main control device 110 is received (see S1005 in FIG. 25). Then, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S1102 in FIG. 26).

The display control device 114 is a device that controls the screen display of the third symbol display device (LCD) 81, and various screen displays such as variable display of the third symbol (fluctuation effect) and jackpot effect at the time of a big hit, a voice lamp. The control is performed according to a command transmitted from the control device 113 (main control device 110).

The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a ROM (program ROM) 232, a work RAM 233, a video RAM 234, a character ROM 235, an image controller 236, an input port 237, an output port 238, bus lines 239 and 240. have. The input side of the input port 237 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp controller 113, and the output side of the input port 237 is connected to the MPU 231, the ROM 232, the work RAM 233, and the image controller 236. A video RAM 234 and a character ROM 235 are connected to the image controller 236, and an output port 238 is connected via a bus line 240. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 238. Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model having a different jackpot winning probability or the number of prize balls paid out in one big jackpot, a model having exactly the same design configuration as that displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is a model. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce the cost.

The MPU 231 of the display control device 114 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 and other various commands. The ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data. The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various programs.

The character ROM 235 is a memory that stores data (character information) for presentation such as symbols (background symbol and third symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a compressed format. The video RAM 234 has an area (not shown) in which a plurality of pieces of character information read from the character ROM 235 in order to generate an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored in a decompressed form, and the decompressed plurality of pieces. A memory having a frame buffer area (not shown) for temporarily storing display data for one frame generated using at least a part of character information until the display is performed.

The image controller 236 adjusts the timings of the MPU 231, the video RAM 234, and the output port 238 to intervene in the reading and writing of data, and at the same time, reads the display data stored in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 234 at a predetermined timing. This is displayed on the symbol display device 81.

The power supply unit 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline thereof, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 V AC supplied from the outside, and 12 V voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors and the like, A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like as necessary.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power cut, power cut) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the NMI terminals of the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V which is the drive voltage of the control system for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 18).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data, and the payout controller 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 10 to 17. The process of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a regular process (in this embodiment, a cycle of 2 milliseconds). There are a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. Here, for convenience of description, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the startup process and the main process will be described.

FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is repeatedly executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. By the MPU 201 executing this timer interrupt process, various processes that should be executed periodically are performed.

In this timer interrupt process, first, an external output process is executed (S101). In the timer interrupt process and the main process, a command or the like to be transmitted to the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, or the like is generated based on various processes and is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. .. In the external output process of S101, output data such as a command stored in the command transmitting ring buffer is transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side.

For example, the holding ball number command set in the starting winning process (see FIG. 12) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the fluctuation pattern command, the stop type command, the confirmation command, etc. set in the fluctuation process (see FIG. 13) and the fluctuation start process (FIG. 14) which is one process of the fluctuation process are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, the sphere emission signal set when the sphere is emitted in the process of S111 described later is transmitted to the emission control device 112.

Next, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S102), and then the special winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened or closed in the case of a big hit state. A large opening opening/closing process for executing is performed (S103). That is, the big winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a predetermined number of balls have been put into the big winning opening 65a. When any of these conditions is established, the special winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the special winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds.

Next, the display control process of the second symbol (for example, a symbol of "O" or "x") by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S105). Briefly described, on condition that the sphere has passed through the through gate 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing when it passes, and the variation of the second symbol on the second symbol display device 83. The display is carried out. And the lottery of the second symbol is carried out by the value of the second hit random number counter C4, and when the second symbol is hit, the electric accessory attached to the second starting opening 64b is opened for a predetermined time.

Next, a switch reading process is executed (S106). That is, the states of the various switches 208 connected to the main controller 110 are read, the states of the switches are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. Further, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of acquired balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 based on the winning detection information is set in the command transmitting ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. Thereby, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process that is executed next. Details of the switch reading process (S106) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S107). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S108). Specifically, each of the first random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 and the second per random number counter C4 is incremented, and their counter values are the maximum values. (In the present embodiment, when it reaches 899, 99, 99, 198, 250 respectively), it is cleared to 0 respectively. Further, when the first random number counter C1 or the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is changed to the first random number counter C1 or The second per random number counter C4 is read as an initial value, and the initial value is set in the first per random number counter C1 or the second per random number counter C4. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, the process for performing the display by the first symbol display device 37 and the variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S109), and then the first starting opening 64a. And the starting winning process associated with winning a prize in any one of the second starting openings 64b is executed (S110). The details of the variation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 13, and the details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the start winning process is executed, the firing control process is executed (S111), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S112), and the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a and that the hit switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated, and the ball is fired. Is a process for determining whether to turn on or off. Then, when the sphere launch is on, the sphere launch signal information is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 in order to transmit the sphere launch signal to the launch control device 112. As a result, the ball firing signal is transmitted to the firing control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interruption process to be executed next.

Further, the other processing (S112) includes processing for determining whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in an error state. For example, although the information of the ball emission signal is set in the process of S111, the ball guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the ball emitted to the game area) is detected by the out switch 208f for a predetermined time or more. If not, it is judged that there is a possibility that the ball is clogged and it is in an error state. If the payout abnormality signal is read in the process of S102, it is determined that the payout of the ball is in an error state. Further, even when a large vibration is given to the pachinko machine 10, or when it is determined that the magnet is brought close to the pachinko machine 10, it is determined that there is a possibility that a fraudulent act was performed in the game, and it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in an error state. ..

To determine whether or not a large vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a vibration detection sensor for detecting the vibration, and the output of the vibration detection sensor is input to the input/output port 205 of the main controller 110. This is performed by reading the output of the vibration sensor in the process of S112. Further, to determine whether or not the magnet is brought close to the pachinko machine 10, a magnetic sensor for detecting a change in magnetism is provided in the pachinko machine 10, and the output of the magnetic sensor is input to the input/output port 205 of the main controller 110. This is performed by reading the output of the magnetic sensor in the process of S112.

If it is determined in the process of S112 that there is an error state, an error command including information regarding the error type is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. As a result, the error command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process that is executed next. Then, a warning sound corresponding to the error type is output from the voice output device 226, the display lamp 34 is turned on/blinked, and an image corresponding to the error type can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. ..

Next, the switch reading process (S106), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the switch reading process (S106).

In the switch reading process, first of all, the first starting opening switch 208a, the second starting opening switch 208b, the first ordinary winning opening switch 208c, the second ordinary winning opening switch 208d, the large winning opening switch 208e, and the out switch 208f. The output is read by referring to the first 1 port 205a, the first 2 port 205b, the ordinary 1 port 205c, the ordinary 2 port 205d, the special winning opening port 205e and the out port 205f of the input/output port 205, and the first starting port 64a, The presence/absence of a winning in the second starting opening 64b, the first ordinary winning opening 63a, the second ordinary winning opening 63b, the big winning opening 65a and the presence/absence of a ball guided to the ball discharging path are determined, and the detection information ( The winning detection information) is stored (S151). The winning of one ball and the determination of one ball guided to the ball discharging path are performed over three timer interrupt processes based on the outputs of the switches 208a to 208f.

Next, based on the winning detection information, among the first starting opening 64a, the second starting opening 64b, the first ordinary winning opening 63a, the second ordinary winning opening 63b, and the big winning opening 65a, it is determined that the winning is achieved by the processing of S151. When there is a determined winning opening, the number of winning balls is corresponded so that the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning opening (that is, the number defined by the winning ball number table 202e) is paid out. The prize ball command is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S152). Thereby, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process that is executed next.

Then, based on the winning detection information, it is determined that the first starting opening 64a, the second starting opening 64b, the first ordinary winning opening 63a, the second ordinary winning opening 63b, and the big winning opening 65a are won by the processing of S151. When there is a determined winning opening, the counter corresponding to the winning opening having a winning is selected from among the starting 1 counter 203d, the starting 2 counter 203e, the ordinary 1 counter 203f, the ordinary 2 counter 203g, and the special winning opening counter 203h. In addition to counting up, when it is determined that there is a ball guided to the ball discharging path, the out counter 203i is incremented by 1 (S153).

Next, it is determined whether or not 0.5 seconds have passed since the winning information (values of the counters 203d to 203i and information on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10) was previously set in the accessory ratio management chip 207 ( S154). As a result, if 0.5 seconds has not elapsed (S154: No), the switch reading process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that 0.5 seconds have elapsed (S154: Yes), the processes of S155 to S157 are executed. First, in the process of S155, the values of the start 1 counter 203d, the start 2 counter 203e, the ordinary 1 counter 203f, the ordinary 2 counter 203g, and the special winning opening counter 203h are used as winning information, and the value of the out counter 203i is used as out information. It is set in the accessory ratio management chip 207 in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (S155).

As a result, the value of the start 1 counter 203d is set in the start 1 buffer 262a of the character ratio management chip 207, the value of the start 2 counter 203e is set in the start 2 buffer 262b of the character ratio management chip 207, and the normal 1 counter is set. The value of 203f is set in the buffer 1 buffer 262c of the character ratio management chip 207, the value of the counter 2 counter 203g is set in the buffer 2 buffer 262d of the character ratio management chip 207, and the value of the special winning opening counter 203h is used. It is set in the special winning opening buffer 262e of the property ratio management chip 207, and the value of the out counter 203i is set in the out buffer 262f of the character ratio management chip 207.

As described above, the counting of the number of balls in the counters 203d to 203i is continuously performed for 0.5 seconds, and when 0.5 seconds has elapsed, the values of the counters 203d to 203h are set as the winning information, and the values of the out counter 203i are set. Is set as the out information in the accessory ratio management chip 207 together with the information indicating the game state at that time. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the MPU 201 counts the number of balls won in each winning opening for each winning opening at every 0.5 seconds, and the number of balls guided to the ball discharging path ( That is, the number of balls used in the game) is counted, and the counted result is set in the accessory ratio management chip 207. Then, as will be described later, the accessory ratio management chip 207 accumulates these counted values for each value until the timing for calculating the accessory ratio is reached, so that it is the first time since the power is turned on. The number of balls won in each winning opening until the timing to calculate the property ratio or the time to calculate the next character ratio after the last character ratio is calculated. It is counted every time, and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game) is counted.

Suppose that the MPU 201 does not count the number of balls won in each winning hole for each winning hole or the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game). If these numbers are calculated only by the character ratio management chip 207, the character ratio management chip 207 is also guided to each winning port or the ball discharge path at short intervals (for example, every 2 milliseconds). Since the sphere must be monitored, the processing load increases and the power consumption may increase.

On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, since the counting results of the MPU 201 set these counting results in the character ratio management chip 207 at intervals of 0.5 seconds, the character ratio management chip 207 measures 0.5 seconds each. During the period from when the power is turned on until the timing of calculating the character ratio for the first time, or from the time when the character ratio is calculated last time to the time when the character ratio is calculated next time. It suffices to execute the process of counting the number of balls that have won the mouth for each winning port and also the number of balls that have been guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls that have been used in the game). Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in processing load and power consumption in the accessory ratio management chip 207.

On the other hand, the MPU 201 counts the number of balls that have won in each winning opening for each winning opening, and also counts the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game). In order to do so, it is necessary to monitor the winning of each winning opening and the balls guided to the ball discharge path at intervals of 2 milliseconds when the timer interrupt processing is executed. It is necessary for performing the main control of the game such as prize ball determination, and is originally processed at a short time interval of 2 milliseconds. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, since the firing interval of the balls fired to the game area by the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 5) is about 0.6 seconds, each winning opening counted at 0.5 second intervals is used. The number of winning balls and the number of balls guided to the ball discharging path (that is, the number of balls used in the game) are 0 or 1 in most cases, and at most several. Therefore, the amount of data required for the counters 203d to 203i provided in the RAM 203 may be small. Therefore, the increase in the capacity of the RAM 203 can be suppressed by this counting process. Therefore, in the MPU 201, the number of balls that have won in each winning opening within 0.5 seconds is counted for each winning opening, and the number of balls guided to the ball discharging path (that is, the balls used in the game) Even if the processing of counting the number of) is executed, no great influence occurs.

The game state set by the process of S155 includes, for example, a big hit, an opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14, and an error. Whether the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is open is determined by the MPU 201 referring to the door opening port 205g and confirming the output of the door opening switch 208g.

Further, whether or not the game state is in error is based on the result determined by the process of S112 of the timer interrupt process. In the process of S155, when it is determined that the error state is in the process of S112, information indicating that the game state is in error is set in the accessory ratio management chip 207.

When the big hit is included in the game state set by the processing of S155, big hit information is stored in the big hit medium buffer 262g, and when the open state of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is included in the game state, it is opened. If the door open information is stored in the medium buffer 262h and the game state includes an error, the error information is stored in the error buffer 262i. Then, in the accessory ratio management chip 207, these pieces of information are finally recorded in the game state data 264d of the second reading memory 264. When the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, the information on the game state is transmitted to the inspection device 300 together with the information on the accessory ratio. Therefore, when the inspection device 300 analyzes the character ratio of the pachinko machine 10, and if a mysterious tendency is found in the character ratio, the inspection device 300 refers to the information indicating the gaming state to find the cause. You can

After the processing of S155, an interrupt signal is transmitted to the accessory ratio management chip 207 (S156). Based on this interrupt signal, the accessory ratio management chip 207 executes a setting information receiving process (see FIG. 19) described later, and based on various information set in the buffer 262, a winning ball for each winning opening. The number of balls that are guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the ball that is launched into the game area) is counted, the number of these balls is stored in the first reading memory 263, and the pachinko machine is used. Information regarding the 10 gaming states is also stored in the first reading memory 263.

After the processing of S156, the first 1 counter 203d, the first 2 counter 203e, the ordinary 1 counter 203f, the ordinary 2 counter 203g, the large winning edge counter 203h, and the out counter 203i corresponding to the out switch 208f corresponding to each winning opening are set to 0. Is initialized (S157), the switch reading process is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. When these counters 203d to 203i are initialized to 0 by the processing of S157, the number of balls winning each winning opening in the next 0.5 seconds is counted again by the counters 203d to 203h. The number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game) is counted by the out counter 203i.

In the process of S154, when this process is executed for the first time after power is supplied to the main controller 110, the winning information (values of the counters 203d to i and the pachinko machine) is given to the preceding character product ratio management chip 207. It is considered that 0.5 seconds have passed since the setting of (10) game state information) (S154: Yes), and the process proceeds to S155. As a result, the number of balls that have been won at each winning port detected before the power is turned off and the number of balls that are guided to the ball discharge path are set in the accessory ratio management chip 207 when the power is turned off. The values of the counters 203d to 203i of the RAM 203, which have not been set, can be set in the accessory ratio management chip 207 immediately after the power is supplied, provided that the values of the counters 203d to 203i are held even when the power is off. Therefore, in the accessory ratio management chip 207, it is possible to suppress the omission of the record of the winning information and the out information due to the power failure.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 12, a start winning process (S110) which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S110). In the starting winning process, it is determined whether or not there is a ball (starting winning) into any one of the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b, and if there is a starting winning, each of the counters C1 to C3. A process of storing (holding) the value of CS1 in the holding sphere storage area 203b is executed. In addition, the processing for transmitting the values of the respective held counters C1 to C3, CS1 to the voice lamp control device 113 together with the number of holding balls is executed.

When the MPU 201 executes the start winning process, first, the MPU 201 determines whether or not the ball has won (start winning) the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b (S201). Here, by the process of S151 of the switch reading process (see FIG. 11), the first starting port switch 208a for detecting the winning in the first starting port 64a and the second starting for detecting the winning in the second starting port 64b. The result of presence/absence of winning of the first start opening 64a or the second start opening 64b, which is determined based on the output signal from the mouth switch 208b, is used.

When it is determined that the ball has won the first starting opening 64a or the second starting opening 64b (there is a starting winning) (S201: Yes), the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (main controller 110 holds the ball). It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls N for the fluctuating effect is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S202). Then, whether or not there is a winning in any of the first starting opening 64a and the second starting opening 64b (S201: No), or even if there is a winning in the first starting opening 64a or the second starting opening 64b If the number of reserved balls N<4 (S202: No), the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

On the other hand, if there is a winning in the first starting opening 64a or the second starting opening 64b (S201: Yes) and the number of reserved balls N<4 (S202: Yes), the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (reserved) The number of balls N) is incremented by 1 (S203). Then, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are read from the counter buffer (see FIG. 7) and provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. Among the reserved first to fourth areas, the first per random number counter storage area 203b1, the first per type counter storage area 203b2, and the stop pattern selection counter storage area of the area corresponding to the value indicated by the reserved sphere number counter 203a. It is reserved (stored) in each of 203b3 and the fluctuation type counter storage area 203b4 (S204).

Specifically, if the value of the number-of-holding-balls counter 203a after the addition in the process of S203 is “1”, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are held in the respective storage areas of the holding first area. Further, if the value of the reserved sphere number counter 203a after addition is "2", it is stored in each storage area of the reserved second area, and if the value of the reserved sphere number counter 203a after addition is "3", the reserved third area. If the value of the holding sphere number counter 203a after addition is "4" in each of the storage areas, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are held in the respective storage areas of the holding fourth area.

Next, the value of the reserved sphere number counter 203a (the number of reserved spheres N) after the addition in the process of S203 and the first random number counter C1 and the first perimeter stored (held) in the reserved sphere storage area 203b by the process of S204. A command transmission ring provided in the RAM 203 for holding the number-of-holding-balls command in order to send the number-of-holding-balls including the values of the type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 to the voice lamp control device 113. It is set in the buffer (S205). As a result, the number-of-holding-balls command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process of S101 of the timer interrupt process to be executed next.

In the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 is instructed to display the holding ball number design corresponding to the holding ball number N in the holding ball number display area Db (see FIG. 4) by receiving the holding ball number command. To do. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 uses the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the number-of-holding-balls command to pre-read before the variation effect based on each of the values is executed, and which variation effect is determined. It is determined whether such a change (whether it is a big hit, what the change time will be, etc.) will be before the execution of the change effect. The execution of various effects can be determined based on the result of the pre-reading judgment.

The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the number of reserved balls command in the process of S205 may be the values read from the counter buffer in the process of S204, or the reserved ball storage area in the process of S204. You may use what read the value stored (held) in 203b.

When the process of S205 ends, the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 13, a variation process (S109) which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing this variation process (S109). The variation process (S109) is for controlling variation display on the first symbol display device 37 and variation effect performed on the third symbol display device 81.

In this variation process, first, it is determined whether or not a big hit is currently being made (S301). As the big hit, during the big hit game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 at the time of big hit, and during the predetermined time after the big hit game is included. If the result of the determination is that the jackpot is in progress (S301: Yes), this processing is ended as it is.

If it is not a big hit (S301: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing. (S302: No), then, after the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed (S303). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed after the fluctuation stop (S303: No), the present process ends. As a result, the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined time, so that the player can visually recognize the stop symbol.

On the other hand, as a result of the process of S303, if the predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation stop (S303: Yes), the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (the variable display reserved ball number N that is reserved in the main controller 110) It is determined whether is greater than 0 (S304). As a result, if the value of the number-of-holding-balls counter 203a (number-of-holding-balls N) is not 0 (S304: Yes), it is determined that it is the timing to start execution of the variable effect, and first, the value of the number-of-holding-balls counter 203a (holding The number of balls N) is subtracted by 1 (S305). This is because the variation start process (S307) starts the execution of one variation effect of the variation effects that have been suspended, so that the number of reserved balls decreases by one.

Then, the data stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b is subjected to shift processing (S306). This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first to fourth areas of the reserved sphere storage area 203b toward the reserved sphere execution area 203c. The data in each area is shifted such as the area 203c, the reserved second area→the reserved first area, the reserved third area→the reserved second area, and the reserved fourth area→the reserved third area.

After the data shift process of S306, based on the values of the various counters stored in the holding ball execution area 203c by the data shift process, the variation start process for the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is executed. (S307), the process returns to the timer interrupt process. The fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S304, when it is determined that the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (reserved ball number N) is 0 (S304: No), the demonstration effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81. It is determined whether or not, that is, whether or not the demonstration is in progress (S308). In this determination processing, after the demo command is transmitted to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113, until the value of the number of held balls counter 203a (the number of held balls N) is determined to be greater than 0. It is determined that the period is being demonstrated.

When it is determined that the demo is not in progress (S308: No), a demo command to be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S309), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the demonstration is in progress (S309: Yes), the process directly returns to the timer interrupt process. The demo command set in the process of S309 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted in the external output process (S101 of FIG. 14) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the demo command, the voice lamp control device 113 instructs the display control device 114 to display the demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, as described above, the demo command is set when there is no holding ball when a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation stop. Therefore, if the variable display is not started even after a lapse of a predetermined time after the fluctuation is stopped, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, when it is determined that the demonstration is not in progress in the process of S308 (S308: No), a process of further determining whether or not a second predetermined time longer than the predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation is stopped is executed. After executing the change and stopping the fluctuation, the process of S309 may be executed and the demo command may be set when the second predetermined time has elapsed. Accordingly, after the fluctuation stop, when there is no holding ball, it is possible to show the stopped symbol of the stopped fluctuation effect to the player for a relatively long time without immediately starting the demonstration effect.

In the process of S302, when it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302: Yes), it is determined whether the changing time has elapsed (S310). The display time during change of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the change pattern selected by the change type counter CS1 (determined according to the change pattern command), and this change time elapses. If not (S310: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S311), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the change time elapses after the change is started, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED. If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. And a display mode for turning on the red LED is set.

The variation process is executed every 2 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the variation process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is incremented by 1 each time the variation process is executed so that the player can check the change in the LED lighting color, and when the counter reaches 200, the LED Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

On the other hand, if the variation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S310: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol is set for the first symbol display device 37 (S312). The stop symbol is preset by a fluctuation start process (S307) described later with reference to FIG. In the fluctuation start process, whether or not a big hit is determined according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the holding ball execution area 203c in the process of S306, and if it is a big hit, the first winning type counter C2 Depending on the value of 15R probability jackpot after jackpot (probability jackpot that the maximum number of rounds goes to high probability state after jackpot of 15 rounds) or 2R probability variation jackpot (maximum number of rounds goes to high probability state after jackpot of 2 rounds) It is determined whether the symbol is a sure-change jackpot that shifts or a 15R normal jackpot (a jackpot that shifts to a low-probability state after the jackpot of maximum 15 rounds).

In the present embodiment, a blue LED is lit when the 15R probability variation jackpot is hit after the jackpot, a red LED is lit when the 2R probability variation jackpot is hit, and a red LED and a blue color when the 15R regular jackpot is hit. Turn on the LED and. If it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. Although each LED is turned off when the next variation display is started, the LEDs may be illuminated only for a few seconds after the variation is stopped.

When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S312, the stop symbol of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 is synchronized with the lighting of the LED on the first symbol display device 37. Then, a confirmation command is set for confirmation display (S313), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives this confirmation command, the display control device 114 is instructed to stop the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 and confirm the stop symbol. To do.

Next, the fluctuation start process (S307), which is one process of the fluctuation process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process (S307). This variation start processing (S307) is based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area, and performs a "big hit" or "miss" lottery (big hit lottery) and the first symbol display device 37. And the effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) of the fluctuation effect performed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined.

In the fluctuation start process, first, a jackpot that determines whether or not it is a jackpot based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c and the jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 8A). A lottery (judgment) is performed (S401).

Whether or not it is a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the mode at that time. As described above, in the jackpot random number table 202a, when the gaming state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is the normal low probability state, "7,307,582" is defined as the jackpot random number value. Further, when the gaming state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is in the high probability state, “28,58,85,122,144,178,213,238,276,298,322,354,390,420. , 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892" are defined as the jackpot random number values.

In the processing of S401, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is compared with the jackpot random number values defined in these jackpot random number table 202a, and they are matched. In that case, it is determined to be a big hit. As a result of the processing in S401, when it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit (S401: Yes), the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the holding ball execution area 203c and the big hit type table 202b (FIG. 8B). (See) and the display mode at the time of jackpot is set (S402).

In this process, the jackpot type table 202b indicates a jackpot type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c, that is, a high probability state after the jackpot of which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds. There is a 15R probability jackpot that moves to 15R regular jackpot that the maximum round number shifts to a low probability state after 15 rounds jackpot, or a 2R probability variation jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after a maximum round number of 2 rounds jackpot. To be determined. Then, based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode at the time of jackpot in the first symbol display device 37 (lighting state of the LED 37a) is set.

Further, in the third symbol display device 81, in order to stop and display the various jackpot symbols corresponding to the jackpot type, by setting the jackpot type (15R certainty variation jackpot, 2R certainty variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot) as it is, The display mode at the time of a big hit in the 3 symbol display device 81 is set.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined (S403), and the process proceeds to S406. Specifically, in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the variable time until the stop display in the display mode at the time of a big hit is determined. In the determination of the variation pattern at the time of big hit, first, the variation pattern table 202d1 for big hit to be used (see FIG. 8C) is selected according to the number of held balls at that time indicated by the number of held balls counter 203a. Then, if 15R certainty variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot is set as the jackpot type in the process of S402, the 15B jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 of the selected "15R jackpot common" group is stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c. A fluctuation pattern associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected. That is, in this case, any one of the variation A, the variation B, and the variation C is selected.

When 2R certainty variation jackpot is set as the jackpot type in the processing of S402, the variation type stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c in the "only for 2R certainty variation jackpot" group of the selected jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. A variation pattern associated with the value of the counter CS1 is selected. In this embodiment, in this case, only the 2R variation is selected. The relationship between the variation pattern (variation A, variation B, variation C, 2R variation) and the variation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S401 that the jackpot is not a big hit (S401: No), the display mode at the time of the deviation is set (S404). In the process of S404, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the out-of-design, and the third mode is determined based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c. As the stop type to be displayed on the symbol display device 81, either front/rear outreach, other than front/rear outreach, or complete outreach is set. In the present embodiment, as described above, the range of the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each stop type depends on whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the high probability state or the low probability state. The tables are set differently.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S405), and the process proceeds to S406. Specifically, in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the variable time until the stop symbol is displayed in the off symbol is determined. At this time, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state in the normal state excluding the time saving state, the deviation pattern table for deviation (normal) corresponding to the number of holding balls at that time indicated by the holding ball number counter 203a. 202d2 (see FIG. 8D) is selected. Further, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state or a high probability state at the time of probability change, the deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202d3( corresponding to the number of holding balls at that time indicated by the number of holding balls counter 203a ( 8(e)) is selected.

Then, when the complete disengagement is set as the stop type in the processing of S404, the suspension is held in the group of "complete disengagement only" in the selected disparity (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 or disassociation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202d3. A fluctuation pattern associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the ball execution area 203c is selected. That is, in this case, the fluctuation D or the fluctuation E is selected.

Further, in the processing of S402, when the front/rear outreach or the reach other than the front/rear outreach is set as the stop type, the “reach common” of the selected out-of-normality (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 or out-of-range (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 In the group, the fluctuation pattern associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c is selected. That is, in this case, the variation A, the variation B, and the variation C are selected. Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the variation pattern and the variation time defined in advance by a table or the like.

In the process of S406, based on the variation patterns determined in the processes of S403 and S405, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern via the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S406). Further, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113 of the stop type set in the process of S402 or S404 is set (S415), and the process returns to the variation process. These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) to be executed next, these commands are voiced. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the variation pattern command and the stop type command, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a display variation pattern command and a display type command based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command, and transmits the display variation pattern command and the display type command to the display control device 114.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S501), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

Note that the NMI interrupt process described above is similarly executed in the payout control device 111, and the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 16, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S601). For example, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. Then, in order to wait until the sub-side control device (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) becomes operable, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed. (S602). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S603).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S604), and if it is turned on (S604: Yes), the process proceeds to S614. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S604: No), it is further determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S605), and if it is not stored (S605: No). Since there is a possibility that the previous process at the time of power shutoff did not end normally, the process proceeds to S614 also in this case.

If the power failure information is stored in the RAM 203 (S605: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S606), and the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S607: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case also, the process proceeds to S614.

Note that the RAM determination value is a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, for example, as described later in the process of S706 of FIG. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

In the process of S614, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S614). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 203, sets an initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S615, S616) of RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when opening a hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed at the time of executing the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S615, S616) is executed. In addition, the initialization processing (S615, S616) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). .. In the RAM initialization processing (S615, S616), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S615), and then an initial value is set in the RAM 203 (S616). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S610.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S604: No), the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored (S605: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal ( (S607: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S608). Then, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S609), and the process proceeds to S610. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is ready to start the payout control of the game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S610, an initialization signal is transmitted to the accessory ratio management chip 207 (S610). As a result, the accessory ratio management chip 207 executes an initialization process such as initialization of the buffer 262 and the first reading memory 263 to 0 by receiving the initialization signal (S711 of FIG. 18), The character ratio management chip 207 is initialized so that the character ratio can be managed.

Next, the information of the prize ball number table 202e is transmitted to the accessory ratio management chip 207 (S611). As a result, in the accessory ratio management chip 207, the prize ball number table 202e is set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a, and each prize when there is a prize in each winning opening indicated by the prize ball number table 202e. The character ratio and the continuous character ratio of the pachinko machine 10 are calculated based on the number of balls.

Here, the number of prize balls when each prize is won is determined by the model of the pachinko machine, and conventionally, the information is stored in the ROM 202. The prize ball number table 202e stored in the ROM 202 is transmitted to the character ratio management chip 207 every time the power is supplied, and the information about the number of prize balls is set in the character ratio management chip 207. By setting it to 265a, it is not necessary to store the information of the number of prize balls, which is different for each model, in the ROM of the accessory ratio management chip 207 at the manufacturing stage. Therefore, the manufacturing of the accessory ratio management chip 207 can be simplified. In addition, when the model of the pachinko machine is different, it is only necessary to change the ROM 202, and even if the same character role ratio management chip 207 is used for the pachinko machines of different models, the character role ratio can be accurately calculated.

Next, the information of the trigger information data 202f is transmitted to the accessory ratio management chip 207 (S612). As a result, in the accessory ratio management chip 207, when the trigger information data 202f is set in the trigger setting area 265b and the timing (trigger) for calculating the accessory ratio indicated by the trigger information data 202f is reached, the pachinko machine 10 is operated. The character ratio and the continuous character ratio of are calculated.

Here, the timing (trigger) for calculating the character ratio is determined by the character ratio management chip 207 because there is a physical limit to the storage capacity in which the character ratio management chip 207 can record information on the character ratio. Instead of fixing the timing, it is preferable to consider the jackpot probability and the probability of change in the pachinko machine 10. Like the pachinko machine 10, the ROM 202 stores the trigger information data 202f that defines the timing of the calculation of the accessory ratio determined in consideration of the jackpot probability and the probability variation ratio in the pachinko machine 10, and the power is supplied. Each time the trigger information data 202f is transmitted to the ROM 202 to the character ratio managing chip 207, the character ratio managing chip 207 causes the character ratio managing chip 207 to match the jackpot probability or the probability variation ratio in the pachinko machine 10. It is possible to calculate the ratio and the continuous winning character ratio, and record it in the second reading memory 264.

After the processing of S612, the interrupt is permitted (S613). Then, the process shifts to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 16, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In the main process, the counter updating process and the power-off process are roughly performed.

In the main process, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S701). Then, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S701: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 does not output the power failure signal SG1 and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S702, S703).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S702). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899 or 250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are respectively stored in the corresponding counter buffer areas of the RAM 203. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S108 (see FIG. 10) (S703), and the process proceeds to S701.

Here, while this main processing is being executed, the timer interrupt processing described with reference to FIG. 10 is started and executed at predetermined time intervals (2 milliseconds in this embodiment). In the timer interrupt process, different processes are executed depending on the game state. For example, during the big hit, the execution of controlling the opening and closing of the special winning opening 65a is performed, and if the ball passes through the through gate 67, the display control of the second symbol by the second symbol display device 83 is performed. Further, in the jackpot lottery executed when starting the variable display on the first symbol display device 37, the number of jackpot random number values to be compared with the obtained first hit random number counter C1 depending on whether it is a high probability state or a low probability state. Will be different. Therefore, the time required to execute the timer interrupt process once changes depending on the state of the game. Therefore, the remaining time from the end of one timer interrupt process to the execution timing of the next timer interrupt process is not constant, and changes depending on the state of the game at that time.

The processes of S702 and S703, which are one of the main processes, are executed in the remaining time of the timer interrupt process. That is, since the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is repeatedly executed using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI1 are updated. The counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated. .. In particular, by updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at random, the first per random number counter C1 and the second per random number counter C4 that use these as initial values for updating are updated. Can have randomness.

In the process of S701, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S701: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1. Since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 15 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S704 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S704), and a power-off command indicating that the power is cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). And the power cut information is transmitted to the accessory ratio management chip 207 (S705). Then, the RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S706), the access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S707), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area of the RAM 203 that are backed up.

The process of S701 is executed at the timing when one cycle of the processes of S702 and S703 performed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt process is completed. As a result, in the main process of the main controller 110, various settings by the timer interrupt process are completed, and the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when the counters CINI1, CINI2, CS1 are updated. .. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the process can be started from the process of S701 after the start-up process is completed. That is, the processing can be started from the processing of S701, as in the case where the initialization is performed in the startup processing.

Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the process when the power is shut down, the stack pointer is not changed in the initialization process (S601). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the process can be started from S701. As a result, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which the process that is periodically executed is executed by the timer interrupt process, and the main processes update the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 in the remaining time of the timer interrupt process. A part or all of the processing executed in the timer interrupt processing may be executed every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) in the main processing. For example, the prize ball count signal, the payout abnormality signal reading process (S102), the large opening opening/closing process (S103), the second symbol control process (S105), and the switch reading which are executed in the timer interrupt process in the present embodiment. A part or all of the process (S106) may be configured to be executed every 2 milliseconds in the main process instead of the timer interrupt process.

In this case, a step of determining whether or not a predetermined time (2 milliseconds) has elapsed in the main processing is provided, and only when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the processing to be executed at predetermined time intervals is executed. The counters CINI1, CINI2, CS1 may be updated regardless of whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed. As a result, the updating of the counters CINI1, CINI2, CS1 is executed in the remaining time of the process executed every predetermined time, but the process executed every predetermined time is executed according to the state of the game. Since the time required for the above changes, each counter CINI1, CINI2, CS1 can be updated at random even in the case of such a configuration.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 261 in the accessory ratio management chip 207 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the CPU 261 is roughly divided into a main character ratio management main processing that is started when the power is turned on, and prize information and the like is set by the MPU 201, and then setting information reception is executed based on an interrupt signal received from the MPU 201. There are a process and an inspection result output process executed based on the inspection device 300 being connected to the inspection terminal 207a.

First, with reference to FIG. 18, a character ratio management main process executed by the CPU 261 in the character ratio management chip 207 will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing this accessory character ratio management main processing. This accessory ratio management main processing is activated when power is supplied to the accessory ratio management chip 207.

When the accessory ratio management main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not an initialization signal has been received from the MPU 201 (S710). While it is determined that the initialization signal has not been received (S710: No), the determination of S710 is continued. When it is determined that the initialization signal has been received (S710: Yes), the process proceeds to S711 and initialization is performed (S711). As a result, in the accessory ratio management chip 207, at least the initialization of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 is completed, and after waiting for the stage where the control of the game by the MPU 201 can be started, the initialization of the accessory ratio management chip 207 is executed. Will be done.

In the initial setting of S711, when the operation of the accessory ratio managing chip 207 is started, initialization necessary for each device in the accessory ratio managing chip 207 is executed. For example, the buffer 262 and the first reading memory 263 are all initialized to 0. As a result, in the buffer 262, even if there is a buffer that is not set by the MPU 201 for each of the buffers 262a to 262i, it is possible to prevent meaningless data from remaining in the buffer, and the meaningless data is read as the first reading. It can be prevented from being stored in the memory 263. In addition, in the first reading memory 263, the number of balls won in each winning port and the ball discharge path are guided from the time when power is supplied to the character ratio management chip 207 until the timing of calculating the character ratio. It is possible to accumulate and count the number of spheres (that is, the number of spheres shot to the game area), and store information on the game state during that time.

Next, it is determined whether or not the information of the prize ball number table 202e is received from the MPU 201 (S712). Then, while not receiving (S712: No), the process of S712 is continuously executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the prize ball number has been received (S712: Yes), the received prize ball number table 202e is set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a (S713). As a result, in the accessory ratio management chip 207, the prize ball number table 202e is set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a, and each prize when there is a prize in each winning opening indicated by the prize ball number table 202e. The character ratio and the continuous character ratio of the pachinko machine 10 are calculated based on the number of balls.

Next, it is determined whether the information of the trigger information data 202f is received from the MPU 201 (S714). Then, while not receiving (S714: No), the process of S714 is continuously executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the trigger information data 202f has been received (S714: Yes), the received trigger information data 202f is set in the trigger setting area 265b. Accordingly, in the character ratio management chip 207, when the timing (trigger) for calculating the character ratio indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is reached, the character ratio of the pachinko machine 10 and The continuous character ratio is calculated.

As described above, only the prize ball number table 202e and the trigger information data 202f transmitted in the startup process (so-called boot process) executed by the MPU 201 when the main controller 110 is powered on are the prize balls. The number data setting area 265a and the trigger setting area 265b are set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fraudulent person from setting the false prize ball number table and the trigger information data in the prize ball number data setting area 265a and the trigger setting area 265b.

Next, when the processes of S710 to S715 are completed, the interrupt permission is set (S716). As a result, thereafter, when the interrupt signal transmitted after the prize information and the like is set from the MPU 201 is received, the setting information reception process is executed, and the inspection device 300 is generated based on the connection to the inspection terminal 207a. The inspection result output process is executed by the interrupt signal.

When the interrupt signals are input at the same time, the setting information reception process is executed prior to the inspection result output process. As a result, the latest prize information, out information, and information about the game state input from the MPU 201 are accumulated and stored in the accessory ratio management chip 207, and then information such as the accessory ratio is transmitted to the inspection device 300. Therefore, the analysis by the inspection device 300 can be performed including the latest information. On the other hand, when the interrupt signals are simultaneously input, the inspection result output process may be executed prior to the inspection device output process. In this case, when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, it is possible to transmit information about the accessory ratio and the like to the inspection device 300.

Next, it is determined whether the power-off information is received from the MPU 201 (S717), and unless the power-off information is received (S717: No), S717 is continuously executed. Further, during that time, when the CPU 261 receives the interrupt signal from the MPU 201, the setting information receiving process is executed prior to the process of S717, and the interrupt occurs when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a. When the embedded signal is received, the inspection result output process is executed.

As a result of the processing in S717, when the power-off information is received (S717: Yes), the power supply to the main control device 110 (the character ratio management chip 207) is cut off due to a power failure or the like. Therefore, the accessory ratio calculation process is executed (S718), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed. Details of the accessory ratio calculation processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the setting information receiving process executed by the CPU 261 in the accessory ratio management chip 207 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing this setting information reception processing. The setting information receiving process is executed based on the interrupt signal received from the MPU 201 after the winning information and the like are set by the MPU 201.

The setting information reception process includes winning information (each value of the first 1 counter 203d, the first 2 counter 203e, the ordinary 1 counter 203f, the ordinary 2 counter 203g, and the large winning opening counter 203h) set in the buffers 262a to 262e by the MPU 201. This is a process of storing the out information (the value of the out counter 203i) set in the out buffer 262f and the gaming state set in each of the buffers 262g to 262i in the first reading memory 263. If it is the timing of calculating the character ratio, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are calculated based on the counters 263a to 263e stored in the first reading memory 263, and the data on the number of shot balls and the game state are calculated. At the same time, the process of recording in the second reading memory 264 is also performed.

First, refer to FIG. In the setting information reception process, first, it is determined whether there is door opening information in the opening buffer 262h (S720). When the door opening information is present in the opening buffer 262h (S720: Yes), the door opening information is set (added and stored) in the opening data 263h together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266 ( S721).

When it is determined by the processing of S720 that there is no door opening information in the opening buffer 262h (S720: No), and after the processing of S721, whether there is in-error information in the in-error buffer 262i or not. Is determined (S722). When the in-error buffer 262i has the in-error information (S722: Yes), the in-error data 263i is set (added and stored) together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266 (S723). ..

When it is determined by the processing of S722 that there is no error information in the error buffer 262i (S722: No), and after the processing of S723, the current time indicated by the RTC 266 is the midnight time zone (midnight 0). It is determined whether it is between the hour and 6:00 in the early morning (S724). Normally, since the midnight hours are outside business hours, the fact that the MPU 201 has transmitted an interrupt signal during this midnight hours to execute this setting information reception process means that some fraudulent acts are performed during the midnight hours. It is also considered to have been broken. Therefore, if it is determined by the process of S724 that it is in the midnight time zone (S724: Yes), in order to keep a record of that fact, the after-hours information is indicated by the RTC 266 in the after-hours data 263j. It is set (added and stored) together with the time (S725).

When it is determined by the processing of S724 that it is not in the midnight time zone (S724: No), and after the processing of S725, it is then determined whether or not there is jackpot information in the jackpot medium buffer 262g (S726). When there is big hit information in the big hit medium buffer 262g (S726: Yes), the big hit information 263g is set (added and stored) together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266 (S727).

By the process of S726, when it is determined that there is no big hit information in the big hit medium buffer 262g (S726: No), and after the process of S727, it is set in the buffers 262a to 262f corresponding to each winning opening and the out switch 208f. The respective values are added to the corresponding counters 263a to 263f of the first reading memory 263 (S728).

Specifically, the value set in the start 1 buffer 262a corresponding to the first start opening 64a (that is, the number of balls winning the first start opening 64a for 0.5 seconds) is added to the start 1 counter 263a. As a result, the number of balls winning the first starting opening 64a is accumulated in the first 1 counter 263a. The value set in the start 2 buffer 262b corresponding to the second start opening 64b (that is, the number of balls winning the second start opening 64b for 0.5 seconds) is added to the start 2 counter 263b. As a result, the number of balls that have won the second starting opening 64b is accumulated in the first 2 counter 263b.

The value set in the ordinary first buffer 262c corresponding to the first regular winning opening 63a (that is, the number of balls winning the first ordinary winning opening 63a for 0.5 seconds) is added to the ordinary first counter 263c. As a result, the number of balls that have won the first regular winning opening 63a is accumulated in the regular 1 counter 263c. The value set in the ordinary second buffer 262d corresponding to the second ordinary winning opening 63b (that is, the number of balls winning the second ordinary winning opening 63b for 0.5 seconds) is added to the ordinary second counter 263d. As a result, the number of balls that have won the second regular winning opening 63b is accumulated in the regular second counter 263d. The value set in the special winning opening buffer 262e corresponding to the special winning opening 65a (that is, the number of balls winning in the special winning opening 65a) is added to the special winning opening counter 263e. As a result, the number of balls that have won the special winning opening 65a is accumulated in the special winning opening counter 263e.

The counters 263a to 264f and the data 263g to 264j of the first reading memory 263 indicate the initial setting process (see FIG. 18) executed when power is supplied to the character ratio management chip 207 and the character ratio. It is initialized to 0 in S744 (see FIG. 21), which will be described later, executed when it comes to the calculation timing. As a result, in the first reading memory 263, the information set in the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 is temporarily stored again while accumulating until the timing of calculating the accessory ratio next time. ..

Subsequently, the description of the setting information winning process will be continued with reference to FIG. After the processing of S728, the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is referred to (S729). Then, when the trigger (timing) for calculating the character ratio shown in the trigger information data 202f is the “number of shots” (S729: “number of shots”), the value of the out counter 263f (that is, the game). It is determined whether or not the number of spheres fired in the area is equal to or larger than the “predetermined number of spheres” (set value) included in the trigger information data 202f (S730). When the value of the out counter 263f is equal to or more than the “predetermined number of balls” (S730: Yes), it is determined that it is time to calculate the character ratio, and the character ratio calculation process is executed (S733). , S734. The details of the accessory ratio calculation processing will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, when the value of the out counter 263f is not equal to or more than the “predetermined number of balls” (S730: No), the process directly proceeds to S734.

By defining the trigger (timing) for calculating the character ratio by the number of shot balls, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio can be calculated without fail while a predetermined ball is fired. Therefore, it is possible to calculate the ratio of continuous characters and the ratio of continuous characters at the stage when many balls have won various prize holes and prize balls have been calculated. it can. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate fluctuations in the character role ratio and the continuous character ratio in a short time in a normal game, so that it is possible to more easily analyze the cheating in the inspection device 300.

In the process of S729, when the trigger (timing) for calculating the accessory ratio shown by the trigger information data 202f is "time" (S729: "time"), the current time shown by the RTC 266 is Then, it is determined whether or not the "predetermined time" (set value) included in the trigger information data 202f has been reached (S731). Here, “arriving” includes not only the case where the current time indicated by the RTC 266 coincides with the “predetermined time” but also the case where the “predetermined time” has passed for the first time.

When it is determined by the processing in S731 that the current time indicated by the RTC 266 has reached the "predetermined time" (S731: Yes), it is determined that it is time to calculate the character ratio. Then, the accessory ratio calculation process is executed (S733), and the process proceeds to S734. On the other hand, when the current time indicated by the RTC 266 has not reached the “predetermined time” (S731: No), the process directly proceeds to S734.

By defining the trigger (timing) for calculating the character ratio by the current time, the character ratio can be surely reached by the arrival of the predetermined time even in a situation where the pachinko machine 10 does not play much game. And the ratio of continuous character parts can be calculated. Therefore, the inspection device 300 can be made to reliably analyze the presence/absence of a fraudulent act based on the reliably calculated accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio.

In the process of S729, when the trigger (timing) for calculating the character ratio shown in the trigger information data 202f is the "game time" (S729: "game time"), the player at the pachinko machine 10 can play the game. Thus, it is determined whether the cumulative time (game time) during which the game is played is equal to or longer than the "predetermined time" included in the trigger information data 202f (S732).

Here, the game time can be calculated by the following method, for example. That is, a game time counter is provided in the first reading memory 263. The game time counter, like other counters and data stored in the first reading memory 263, has an initial setting process (see FIG. 18) that is executed when power is supplied to the accessory ratio management chip 207. It is initialized to 0 in S744 (see FIG. 21) described later, which is executed when it is time to calculate the accessory ratio. Then, in the setting information receiving process, the value of the out buffer 262f is confirmed, and if the value is 1 or more, the ball guided to the ball discharge path is detected, that is, the ball is in the game area. Since it means that the game time has been fired, the game time counter is incremented by 1. The setting information reception counter is activated by an interrupt signal transmitted from the MPU 201 at 0.5 second intervals. Therefore, the game time can be calculated by adding 0.5 seconds to the value of the game time counter.

When it is determined that the game time is equal to or longer than the “predetermined time” by the process of S732 (S732: Yes), it is determined that it is time to calculate the character ratio, and the character ratio calculation process is executed. (S733) and S734 are entered. On the other hand, when the game time is less than the “predetermined time” (S731: No), the process directly proceeds to S734.

The accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are originally calculated by performing a test shooting test of a game ball for 10 hours. By defining the trigger (timing) for calculating the character ratio by the game time, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio close to the original definition can be calculated by the character ratio management chip. Analysis can be performed using the character ratio and the continuous character ratio that are close to the original definition.

In the process of S734, the buffer 262 is initialized to 0 (S734). As a result, in the next setting of prize information, out information, and game information from the MPU 201, even if there is a buffer that is not set for each buffer 262a to 262i, it is possible to suppress meaningless data from remaining in the buffer. It is possible to prevent the meaningless data from being stored in the first reading memory 263. After the processing of S734, the setting information reception processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the character ratio calculation processing (S718, S733) executed by the CPU 261 in the character ratio management chip 207 will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing this accessory ratio calculation process. The character ratio calculation process is a process of calculating a character ratio and a continuous character ratio from the information stored in the first reading memory 263 and recording the ratio in the second reading memory 264. Timing for calculating the character ratio ( The trigger is executed (see FIG. 20) and also executed when the power is turned off (see FIG. 18).

In the character ratio calculation process, first, the character ratio is calculated from the values of the counters 263a to 263f stored in the first reading memory 263 and added to the character ratio data 264a together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266. And record it (S740). Next, the continuous winning role ratio is calculated from the values of the counters 263a to 263f stored in the first reading memory 263, and is additionally recorded in the continuous winning role ratio data 264b along with the current time indicated by the RTC 266 (S741). ).

The character ratio and the continuous character ratio are calculated as follows. That is, the number of balls that have been won in the first starting opening 64a indicated by the first 1 counter 263a stored in the first reading memory 263, and the number of balls that have been won in the second starting opening 64b indicated by the first 2 counter 263b. , The number of balls winning the first ordinary winning opening 63a indicated by the ordinary 1 counter 263c, the number of balls winning the second ordinary winning opening 63b indicated by the ordinary 2 counter 263d, and the great winning opening counter 263e The number of balls that have won in the special winning opening 65a corresponding to each of the winning openings shown in the award ball number table 202e (see FIG. 9) set in the award ball number data setting area 265a. When the number of balls is multiplied, the number of balls paid out for each winning opening is calculated. Then, by summing these, the total number of balls paid out to the player is calculated.

Then, of the total number of balls paid out to the player, the number of balls paid out in accordance with the winning in the second starting opening 64b and the ball paid out in accordance with the winning in the special winning opening 65a. The accessory ratio is calculated by calculating the total ratio with the number. Further, the ratio of continuous winnings is calculated by calculating the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the special winning opening 65a to the total number of balls paid to the player.

Originally, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio refer to the above ratio when the test shooting test of the game ball is performed for 10 hours, but in the present embodiment, the trigger information data set in the trigger setting area 265b. At each timing (trigger) for calculating the character ratio shown by 202f, the player is instructed to reach the timing for the first time after the power is turned on, or from the previous timing to the current timing. Of the total number of balls (prize balls) paid out, the ratio of the number of balls (prize balls) paid out along with the winning of the second start opening 64b and the special winning opening 65a is calculated as a character role ratio. Then, it is recorded in the accessory ratio data 264a together with the time at that time. Also, of the total number of balls (prize balls) paid out to the player from the time the power was turned on until the timing reached for the first time, or from the timing from the previous time to this timing, the grand prize. The ratio of the number of balls (prize balls) paid out in accordance with the winning in the mouth 65a is calculated as the continuous character ratio, and is recorded in the continuous character ratio data 264b together with the time at that time.

In addition, even when the power is cut off, the power charged in the capacitor 267 is used to be paid out while it is determined that the power is cut off from the latest timing (trigger) for calculating the accessory ratio. The character ratio and the continuous character ratio are calculated on the basis of the number of the balls (prize balls), and are recorded in the character ratio data 264a or the continuous character ratio data 264b together with the time at that time. .. As a result, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are calculated and recorded, and thereafter, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are kept even for the number of prize balls paid out before the power is turned off. The ratio can be calculated.

Next, the value of the out counter 263f indicating the total number of balls shot to the game area is added to the shot ball number data 264c and recorded together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266 (S742). Further, various jackpot information, door opening information, error information, and overtime information stored in the jackpot data 263g, the opening data 263h, the error data 263i, and the afterhours data 263j are associated with each information. The time (time when the information is stored) is arranged (sorted) in order from the oldest time information, and is additionally recorded in the game state data 264d (S743).

In the processing of S743, for example, when the big hit information is stored in the big hit medium data 263g at intervals of less than 1 second, it means that the big hits are continuously generated as the gaming state, so the oldest time Only the jackpot information and the time is recorded in the game state data 264d. Similarly, in the door opening information, the error information, and the after-hours information, when each piece of information is stored in each data 263h to j at intervals of less than 1 second, the information of the oldest time and the time Only the game state data 264d is recorded. As a result, the storage capacity required for the game state data 264d can be reduced.

As described above, in the character ratio management chip 207, when the winning information, the out information, and the information regarding the game state are received from the MPU 201, the first reading memory 263 accumulates these information and temporarily stores the information. Each time the timing (trigger) for calculating the character ratio is reached, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are calculated based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263, and added to the second reading memory 264. Record. As a result, it is possible to manage the character ratio and the like with a small storage capacity and transmit the information regarding the character ratio and the like to the inspection device 300.

In addition, in the second reading memory 264, the time when they are recorded in the second reading memory 264 is also stored for the character ratio and the continuous character ratio. Further, in the second reading memory 264, not only the character ratio and the continuous character ratio, but also the information indicating the total number of balls shot to the game area is stored at the time when the information is recorded in the second reading memory 264. The second reading memory, which is also recorded together, further includes information related to the gaming state (big hit information, door opening information, error information, overtime information), together with the time when each information is stored in the first reading memory 263. Stored in H.264. Therefore, as a result of analyzing the character ratio and the continuous character ratio in the inspection device 300, when there is a large change in the character ratio or the continuous character ratio, the changed character ratio or the continuous character ratio is the first. By analyzing the total number of balls shot in the game area and the game state around the time recorded in the 2 reading memory 264, it is possible to find the cause of the change in the character ratio or the continuous character ratio.

Here, the information about the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, and the total number of balls shot to the game area that can be recorded in the character ratio data 264a, the continuous character ratio data 264b, and the number of shot balls data 264c is a predetermined number ( For example, it is limited to 1024). Further, the total number of hit information, door opening information, error information and overtime information that can be recorded in the game state data 264d is also limited to a predetermined number (for example, 16384). If a predetermined number of information is already recorded in the character ratio data 264a, the continuous character ratio data 264b, the number of shot balls data 264c, or the game state data 264d, the oldest information is deleted and the latest information is stored therein. Is recorded.

Specifically, each of the continuous role ratio data 264b, the number of shot balls data 264c, and the game state data 264d is configured by a ring buffer, and a memory for managing a position for writing information on each ring buffer is prepared. By shifting the writing position by 1 each time information is written, the process of erasing the oldest information and recording the latest information there can be realized.

In this way, by setting an upper limit on the number of information that can be recorded in each data, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the second reading memory 264. In addition, when the information to be recorded in each data has reached the upper limit number, the oldest information is erased and the latest information is recorded to analyze the inspection device 300 including the latest state of the pachinko machine 10. Can be done.

After the processing of S743, all the first reading memory 263 is initialized to 0 (S744). As a result, the first reading memory 263 temporarily stores the information set in the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 again while accumulating until the timing for calculating the accessory ratio next time. ..

When the process of S744 ends, the accessory ratio calculation process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 22, an inspection result output process executed by the CPU 261 in the accessory ratio management chip 207 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing this inspection result output processing. This inspection result output processing is executed based on the interrupt signal input to the CPU 261 when the connector of the cable connecting the inspection device 300 is inserted into the inspection terminal 207a. In the inspection result output process, the data in the second reading memory 264 is output to the inspection device 300.

When the inspection result output processing is executed, first, all the character ratios recorded in the character ratio data 264a and the character ratios associated with the character ratios are recorded in the second reading memory 264. The specified time is output to the inspection apparatus 300 in order from the accessory ratio having the oldest recording time (S751).

Specifically, when the character ratio data 264a does not satisfy the upper limit number (predetermined number) of recordable information, the CPU 261 first writes the character ratio information in the character ratio data 264a. From the position where the information is written to the position indicated by the memory that manages the position where the information is written (that is, the position where the information on the character ratio at the latest time is recorded). The data is sequentially read and transmitted to the inspection device 300. On the other hand, in the accessory ratio data 264a, when the upper limit number (predetermined number) of recordable information is satisfied, the position next to the position indicated by the memory managing the position for writing information (that is, The position indicated by the memory that manages the position where the information is written by shifting the reading position one by one in order from the position where the information on the accessory ratio at the oldest time is recorded (that is, the position at the latest time). The information recorded up to the position where the information of the object ratio is recorded) is sequentially read and transmitted to the inspection device 300. As a result, the inspection device 300 outputs the information on the accessory ratio in order from the oldest time information.

Next, all the continuous character ratios recorded in the continuous character ratio data 264b and the times at which the continuous character ratios associated with the respective continuous character ratios are recorded in the second reading memory 264. , And outputs to the inspection device 300 in order from the character product ratio having the oldest recording time (S752).

Specifically, when the continuous accessory ratio data 264b does not satisfy the upper limit number (predetermined number) of recordable information, the CPU 261 firstly records the continuous accessory ratio information in the continuous accessory ratio data 264b. From the position where is written to the position shown in the memory that manages the position where information is written (that is, the position where the information of the ratio of continuous character at the latest time is recorded). The information of the object ratio is sequentially read and transmitted to the inspection device 300. On the other hand, when the continuous accessory ratio data 264b satisfies the upper limit number (predetermined number) of recordable information, the position next to the position indicated by the memory managing the position for writing information (that is, , The position indicated by the memory that manages the position where the information is written by shifting the reading position one by one from the position where the information of the continuous accessory ratio at the oldest time is recorded) (that is, the latest time). The information recorded up to the position at which the information of the continuous accessory ratio is recorded is sequentially read and transmitted to the inspection device 300. As a result, the inspection device 300 outputs the information of the continuous accessory ratio in order from the information of the old time.

Next, the information about the number of balls (the number of shots) shot to all the game areas recorded in the number of shot balls data 264c and the information on the number of shot balls associated with the information of each number of shot balls are given. 2 The times recorded in the reading memory 264 are output to the inspection device 300 in order from the role ratio with the oldest recording time (S753).

Specifically, when the number of shot balls data 264c does not satisfy the upper limit number (predetermined number) of recordable information, the CPU 261 first writes the number of shot balls information in the number of shot balls data 264c. Information on the number of shot balls recorded from the position indicated by the memory that manages the position where information is written (that is, the position where the information on the number of shot balls at the latest time is recorded) The data is sequentially read and transmitted to the inspection device 300. On the other hand, when the number of shot balls data 264c satisfies the upper limit number (predetermined number) of recordable information, the position next to the position shown in the memory managing the position for writing information (that is, The position indicated by the memory that manages the position where information is written by shifting the reading position one by one in order from the position where the information of the number of shot balls at the oldest time is recorded (that is, the shooting at the latest time) The information recorded up to the position where the information of the number of balls is recorded is sequentially read and transmitted to the inspection device 300. As a result, the number of shot balls is output to the inspection device 300 in order from the oldest time information.

Next, all the jackpot information, door opening information, error information and overtime information recorded in the game state data 264d, and the time when the information associated with each information is stored in the first reading memory 263. And are output to the inspection device 300 in order from the oldest information (S754).

Specifically, when the game state data 264d does not satisfy the upper limit number (predetermined number) of recordable information, the CPU 261 reads information from the position where the information is first written in the game state data 264d. The information recorded up to the position (that is, the position where the latest time information is recorded) indicated in the memory that manages the writing position is sequentially read and transmitted to the inspection device 300. On the other hand, in the game state data 264d, when the upper limit number (predetermined number) of recordable information is satisfied, the position next to the position shown in the memory managing the position for writing information (that is, the most The position indicated by the memory that manages the position where information is written by shifting the reading position one by one from the position where the old time information was recorded (that is, the position where the latest time information was recorded) The information recorded up to () is sequentially read and transmitted to the inspection device 300. As described above, in the game status data 264d, pieces of information related to the game status are recorded in the game status data 264d side by side (sorted) from the oldest time information. Therefore, the information on the gaming state is output to the inspection device 300 in order from the oldest time information.

By the processing of S751 to S754, each information is output in order from the oldest time, so the inspection device 300 analyzes each information in the output order, thereby determining the ratio of character parts with the passage of time, It is possible to easily analyze changes in the ratio of consecutive characters, the number of shot balls, and changes in the game state.

After the processing of S754, the inspection result output processing ends.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the accessory ratio management chip 207 is provided in the main controller 110, winning information is obtained from the MPU 201, and the accessory ratio management chip 207 calculates the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio. And record. Then, when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, information on the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio recorded in the accessory ratio management chip 207 is output to the inspection device 300.

Here, some fraudulent persons illegally open the electric accessory of the second starting opening 64b by some method or guide the ball to the second starting opening 64b, thereby making the second starting opening 64b. There are things that try to increase the number of prizes to increase the possibility of becoming a jackpot. Further, there are those that try to obtain many prize balls by illegally opening the opening/closing plate of the special winning opening 65a or guiding the ball to the special winning opening 65a. In the case of such a dishonest act, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio increase.

On the other hand, since the pachinko machine 10 is configured as described above, by analyzing the character ratio and the continuous character ratio in the inspection device 300, if the cheating is performed, the cheating is performed. Can be found.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, information regarding the number of balls shot to the game area and information regarding the game state are also recorded in the accessory ratio management chip 207 and output to the inspection device 300. Therefore, when the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are high as a result of the analysis by the inspection device 300, the cause is searched based on the information on the number of balls shot to the game area and the information on the game state. be able to.

The accessory ratio management chip 207 is provided in the main controller 110, and is housed in one board box 100 together with the MPU 201, the ROM 202 and the like. As a result, it is difficult for a cheating person to modify the winning information or the like input to the character ratio management chip 207. Therefore, high reliability can be maintained for the character ratio and the continuous character ratio calculated and output by the character ratio management chip 207.

In addition, the MPU 201 is not allowed to manage the character ratio and the like, but is provided with the exclusive character ratio management chip 207 for managing the character ratio and the like, so that an increase in the processing load of the MPU 201 can be suppressed and the main game The MPU 201 can be dedicated to various controls.

Further, the prize ratio management chip 207 is provided with a prize ball number data setting area 265a, and when power is supplied, the prize ball number table 202e stored in the ROM 202 is set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a. Then, the character ratio management chip 207 calculates the character ratio and the continuous character ratio using the prize ball number table 202e set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a. As a result, it is not necessary to store information on the number of prize balls, which is different for each model, in the ROM of the accessory ratio management chip 207 at the manufacturing stage. Therefore, the manufacturing of the accessory ratio management chip 207 can be simplified. If the model of the pachinko machine is different, the ROM 202 may be changed, and even if the same character role ratio management chip 207 is used for the pachinko machines of different models, the character role ratio can be accurately calculated.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 to 27. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on and a main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, referring to FIG. 23, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S801). Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, the power-up processing of S915 (see FIG. 24) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called “instantaneous stop”) in the startup processing of this time. It is determined whether or not it was started during the execution of () (S802). As described later with reference to FIG. 24, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S912 in FIG. 24), the power-off process in S915 is executed. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S915 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process in progress flag.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S802: No), the startup processing of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure has occurred, and the power-off in S915 is performed. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or is started (without receiving the power-off command from the main control unit 110) only on the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S803).

The confirmation of the data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S806. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it is possible to confirm the data destruction in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S803: Yes), the process proceeds to S804 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S803: No), the process proceeds to S808.

If the power-on process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). Therefore, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S803: Yes), and the process proceeds to S804. On the other hand, this startup processing is started after the momentary power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off processing in S915 is completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like. If it is started due to the trouble, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S803: No), and the process proceeds to S808.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (S802: Yes), the start-up processing of this time is after the momentary power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off processing of S915, the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. The MPU 221 has been reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, and therefore the process proceeds to S804 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S804, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S804). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read/write check of the RAM 223, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S805: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S806). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data destruction in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if a read/write check abnormality is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S805: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S807), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

In the process of S808, it is determined whether the power-off flag is turned on (S808). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S915 is executed (see S914 in FIG. 24). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S915 is executed, the process of S808 with the power-off flag turned on is that the start-up process of this time is instantaneous. This is the case after the power failure occurs and the processing is started in the state where the execution of the power-off processing in S915 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S808: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S809), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S810), and then the interruption is performed. The permission is set (S811), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S808 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the current startup process is started after the power has been completely cut off, for example, and the process of S804 to S806 is followed to the process of S808. This is the case when the processing has been started, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110) and started. Therefore, in such a case (S808: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S809, is skipped, the process proceeds to S810, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S810), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S811), the process proceeds to the main process.

It should be noted that skipping the clearing process of S809 means that when the process of S808 is performed through the processes of S804 to S806, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S804. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 22, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the processing of S901 was executed last time (S901), and if 1 millisecond or more has not elapsed (S901: No). , And proceeds to the processing of S910 without performing the processing of S902 to S908. In the processing of S901, it is not necessary to perform processing in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond) in S902 to S908 to determine whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed, whereas in S910, the variable display processing is performed. This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process in S911 or S911 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S911 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception failure of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S910 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process is executed. Based on the above, it is possible to perform the setting related to the variation effect without delay.

In the process of S901, when it is determined that 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the process of S901 was executed last time (S901: Yes), the process proceeds to S902. If the process of S901 is executed for the first time after the startup process shown in FIG. 21, the process directly proceeds to S902.

In the process of S902, the various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S903 to S911 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S902). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S906 described later (S903), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S904). The power-on notification processing is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Be seen. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that the power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not being turned on, the process goes to the processing of S905 without performing the notification by the power-on notifying process.

Next, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S905). In this frame button input monitoring/rendering process, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the effect is monitored and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process of setting to produce an effect. In this processing, when the player's operation of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

Further, when the frame effect is not executed or when the frame button 22 is pressed during the high speed fluctuation period, a process of changing the stage is performed, and instead of the frame button operation command, the rear image change to the display control device 114 is performed. Set the command. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the changed stage in the back image changing command, the display control device 114 causes the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to be an image corresponding to the stage. The process of changing to. In addition, when the preview character appears at the start of the variation display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to this change, or by pressing the frame button 22 during the reach production, the expectation for the jackpot is displayed. It is also possible to change to an effect that can be held or to use the frame button 22 as a determination button for selecting one reach effect from a plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S905 is omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect process (S905) is completed, the ramp edit process is then executed (S906), and then the sound edit/output process is executed (S907). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination portions 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S907, the liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S908). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp edit process of S906 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, and the sound edit/output process of S907 is also synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81. Run in time. After the processing of S908, the processing shifts to the processing of S910.

In the process of S910, in order to display the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, a variation pattern command for display is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is displayed on the display control device 114. The variable display process, which is the process set for transmission, is executed. Details of this variable display processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the variable display process, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S911). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process of S911 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S912). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S912 (S912: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (S914), and the power-off process is executed (S915). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off (S916), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. Also, the storage of the information on the occurrence of power failure is erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S912 (S912: No), it is determined whether the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S913), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S913: No), the process returns to S901, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S913: Yes), the processing is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processing.

Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and thus can call a clerk in the hall or the like to request the pachinko machine 10 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the command determination processing (S911) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S911). The command determination process (S911) is performed in the main process (see FIG. 24) performed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. ..

In the command determination processing, first, of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main control device 110 is read out from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223 and analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not (S1001). When it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command is received (S1001: Yes), the fluctuation pattern is extracted from the fluctuation pattern command (S1002), and the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and in a variation display process (see FIG. 26) described later, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation effect start and the variation pattern is displayed. Used when setting.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation pattern command is not received (S1001: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command is received from the main control device 110 (S1003). If it is determined that the stop type command is received (S1003: Yes), the stop type is extracted from the stop type command (S1004), the fluctuation start flag is set to ON (S1005), and the process returns to the main process. ..

It should be noted that the stop type command indicates the stop type of the fluctuating effect whose fluctuation pattern is indicated by the fluctuation pattern command after the main controller 110 transmits the fluctuation pattern command when starting the fluctuating effect. This command is always sent from 110. By setting the variation start flag to ON in the process of S1005, based on the variation pattern extracted from the variation pattern command received earlier and the stop type extracted from the stop type command in the variation display process executed later. Then, a process for generating a display variation pattern command and a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of these variation patterns and stop types and transmitting them to the display control device 114 is executed.

As a result of the processing in S1003, when it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S1003: No), it is then determined whether or not the reserved ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1006). When it is determined that the number of reserved balls command is received (S1006: Yes), the value of the number of reserved balls counter 203a of the main control device 110 included in the number of reserved balls command (that is, the pending variation effect is reserved). The number of balls is extracted and stored in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1007).

Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins (start winning) in either the first starting opening 64a or the second starting opening 64b. Every time there is, the value of the reserved ball number stored in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 can be matched with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 by the process of S1007. Therefore, even if the value of the reserved ball number of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the hold ball of the voice lamp control device 113 is detected at the time of detecting the start winning. The value of the number counter 223a can be modified to match the value of the reserved sphere number counter 203a of the main controller 110.

Next, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the change type counter CS1 included in the received reserved ball number command is extracted and stored in the RAM 223 (S1008).

The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the reserved ball number command are acquired from the counter buffer in the main controller 110 when the balls win the first starting opening 64a and the second starting opening 64b (start winning). It was done. The voice lamp control device 113 can execute the prefetching process by referring to the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the RAM 223. That is, when the suspended variable effect is executed, the result of the variable effect is determined (whether it is a big hit, what the change time is, etc.) before the variable effect is executed. Execution of various effects can be decided.

Next, a display reserved ball count command for notifying the display controller 114 of the value of the reserved ball count stored in the RAM 223 by the processing of S1007 is set (S1009), and the process returns to the main processing. The display reserved sphere number command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S902) of the main process. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the processing is executed so that the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As a result of the processing in S1006, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls command has not been received (S1006: No), it is then determined whether the confirmation command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1010). The confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variation effect being executed on the third symbol display device 81. When it is determined that the confirmation command has been received (S1010: Yes), the display confirmation command for notifying the display control device 114 of the reception of the confirmation command is set (S1011), and the process returns to the main process. .. The display confirmation command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S902) of the main process. In the display control device 114, by receiving the confirmation command for display, the variation effect being executed in the third symbol display device 81 is stopped, and the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is corresponded to. By displaying the stop symbol, it is confirmed and displayed.

As a result of the processing in S1010, when it is determined that the confirmation command has not been received (S1010: No), it is determined whether another command has been received, and the processing according to the received command is executed. (S1012), the process proceeds to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed controlled. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114. The demo command received from the main controller 110 is set as a display demo command by the process of S1013, is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and then is output as a command output process of the main process (S902). ) To the display control device 114.

Next, the variable display process (S910) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this variable display processing (S910).

This variation display process (S910) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In order to do so, a change pattern command for display and a stop type command for display are generated based on the change pattern command and stop type command received from the main controller 110, and these commands are set to be transmitted to the display controller 114. It is a process to do.

In the fluctuation display process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1101). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is not on (that is, it is off) (S1101: No), it means that the stop type command is not received from the main control device 110. The process ends and returns to the main process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag is on (S1101: Yes), the variation start flag is turned off (S1102), and the variation pattern command is extracted in the process of S1002 of the command determination process (see FIG. 25). The variation pattern in the variation effect is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1103). The fluctuation pattern extracted here is a fluctuation time. In the voice lamp control device 113, a plurality of detailed fluctuation patterns are prepared for each fluctuation time, and one detailed fluctuation pattern is prepared from among the plurality of detailed fluctuation patterns prepared in the extracted fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time). A pattern is determined by lottery, and a display variation pattern command for notifying the determined detailed variation pattern to the display control device 114 is set (S1104).

The display variation pattern command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S902) of the main process. In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, the variation display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81 with the detailed variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display. , The display control of the change effect is started.

Next, the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command in the process of S1004 of the command determination process (see FIG. 23) is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1105). Then, the display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the extracted stop type is set (S1104). The display stop type command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S902) of the main process. In the display control device 114, when the variation effect executed by the display variation pattern command set by the processing of S1105 is confirmed and displayed, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is set. To do.

Next, the value of the number of reserved balls in the RAM 223 is decremented by 1 as the holding balls are consumed (that is, the variable display corresponding to the holding balls is set) in accordance with the setting of the display variation pattern command. (S1107), a display reserved sphere number command for notifying the value of the updated reserved sphere number to the display control device 114 is set (S1108). Then, the process returns to the main process.

The display reserved ball count command set by the processing of S1108 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing (S902) of the main processing. .. The display control device 114 executes a process of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the number of holding sphere numbers corresponding to the number of holding spheres indicated by the display holding sphere number command. Therefore, the player can recognize the number of held balls by counting the number of held ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, with reference to FIG. 27, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly classified into a main processing repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and one frame from the image controller 236. There is V interrupt processing executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. If the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp controller 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27A is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process is started when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off.

When the power is turned on and the main process is executed by the MPU 231, first, the initial setting process is executed (S1401). Specifically, first, a process of initializing the MPU 231 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 233 and the video RAM 234 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 235 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the video RAM 234. Further, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 234, and the extracted information is stored in an area in the video RAM 234 different from the area in which the decompressed character information is stored. The extracted character information is written in the prepared frame buffer area. In addition, other settings necessary for initialization are performed.

When the initial setting process is completed, next, interrupt permission is set (S1402), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S1402, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27B is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when the command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interruption processing, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S1501), and the processing is ended. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27C is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. And display is instructed to the image controller 236.

As described above, the V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 236 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated by the image controller 236 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction is given to the image controller 236 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 236 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the image controller 236 starts drawing a new image while drawing an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored according to a new drawing instruction.

In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 27C, first, a command determination process (S1602) is executed. In this command determination processing (S1602), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing is analyzed, and the processing according to the command is executed. For example, when the display variation pattern command is stored, the image is drawn so that the variation effect is executed on the third symbol display device 81 by the detailed variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern table command. And start controlling the display.

If the display stop type command is stored, during the high-speed change (the change effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 is stopped and displayed with the stop symbol indicated by the display stop type command ( While the variation display of the third symbol is being performed so that the contents of the third symbol cannot be recognized by the player), the displayed third symbol is replaced. When the confirmation command for display is stored, the drawing and display of the image are controlled so as to be confirmed and displayed in the variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81.

Now, in this command determination processing (S1602), all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at an interval of 20 milliseconds during which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus it is highly possible that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when it is determined in the main controller 110 that the variation effect is started, it is highly possible that the variation pattern command for display, the stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the mode of the variation effect or other effects selected by the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113, and the effect image according to the mode. The drawing of the image can be controlled so that the third symbol display device 81 is displayed.

When the command determination process (S1602) is completed, the display setting process (S1603) is then executed. In the display setting process (S1603), based on the type of the screen to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 determined by the command determination process (S1602) and the like, one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81. The content of the image of is specifically specified.

After the display setting process (S1603) is executed, next, the task process is executed (S1064). In this task process, based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third display device 281 that is specified by the display setting process (S1603), the character (sprite, display object) that constitutes the image is displayed. In addition to specifying the type, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each character (sprite).

Then, the drawing process is executed (S1504). In this drawing process, the types of various characters that make up one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character determined in the task process (S1503) are transmitted to the image controller 236. Thereby, in the image controller 236, in accordance with these pieces of information, the image drawing process is executed, and the image drawn according to the information received 1V before is displayed together with the drive signal so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The control for transmitting the image data to the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

After that, after performing other necessary processing, for example, updating processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 (S1505), the V interrupt processing is ended.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the accessory ratio management chip 207 is provided in the main controller 110, the winning information is obtained from the MPU 201, and the accessory ratio management chip 207 is used. Calculate and record the material ratio and continuous character ratio. Then, when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, information on the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio recorded in the accessory ratio management chip 207 is output to the inspection device 300.

Here, some fraudulent persons illegally open the electric accessory of the second starting opening 64b by some method or guide the ball to the second starting opening 64b, thereby making the second starting opening 64b. There are things that try to increase the number of prizes to increase the possibility of becoming a jackpot. Further, there are those that try to obtain many prize balls by illegally opening the opening/closing plate of the special winning opening 65a or guiding the ball to the special winning opening 65a. In the case of such a dishonest act, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio increase.

On the other hand, since the pachinko machine 10 is configured as described above, by analyzing the character ratio and the continuous character ratio in the inspection device 300, if the cheating is performed, the cheating is performed. Can be found.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, information regarding the number of balls shot to the game area and information regarding the game state are also recorded in the accessory ratio management chip 207 and output to the inspection device 300. Therefore, when the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are high as a result of the analysis by the inspection device 300, the cause is searched based on the information on the number of balls shot to the game area and the information on the game state. be able to.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 30. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when it is time to calculate the character ratio, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are calculated based on the values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the first reading memory 263. Was calculated and recorded in the second reading memory 264. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when the trigger (timing) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is reached, each recorded in the first reading memory 263. The values of the counters 263a to 263e are recorded in the second reading memory 264 as they are, and the values of the counters 263a to 263e recorded in the second reading memory 264 are output to the inspection device 300 as they are.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described focusing on the points different from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the same components and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals as those of the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 28 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main controller 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment. The electrical configuration of the main controller 110 of the second embodiment differs from that of the first embodiment in that the second reading memory 264 of the accessory ratio management chip 207 includes the accessory ratio data 264a of the first embodiment. Instead of the continuous winning role ratio data 264b, the winning counter data 264e is recorded.

In the second embodiment, the meaning of the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is different from that of the first embodiment. That is, in the second embodiment, the trigger information data 202f indicates a trigger (timing) for recording the values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the first reading memory 263 in the second reading memory 264. The meaning of the trigger information data 202f is different from that of the first embodiment, and the content itself is the same as that of the first embodiment.

That is, in the trigger information data 202f, as the trigger (timing) for recording the values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the first reading memory 263 in the second reading memory 264, "number of shots", "time", " Information indicating any of the "game time" is defined.

When the information indicating the "number of shots" is defined, the trigger information data 202f also defines the information indicating the "predetermined number of balls" which is the timing for calculating the accessory ratio. For example, when the trigger information data 202f defines information indicating “the number of shots” and information indicating “500 balls” as the “predetermined number of balls”, the first reading is performed every time the number of shot balls reaches 500. The values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the memory 263 are recorded in the second reading memory 264.

When the information indicating “time” is specified, the trigger information data 202f also specifies information indicating “predetermined time”, which is the timing for calculating the accessory ratio. For example, when the trigger information data 202f defines information indicating “time” and information indicating 12:00, 17:00, 19:00, and 22:00 as “predetermined time”, the time is 12:00. , 17:00, 19:00, and 22:00, the values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the first reading memory 263 are recorded in the second reading memory 264.

When the information indicating the "game time" is specified, the trigger information data 202f also specifies the information indicating the "predetermined time" which is the timing for calculating the accessory ratio. For example, when the trigger information data 202f defines information indicating "game time" and information indicating 2 hours as "predetermined time", the first reading memory 263 is generated every 2 hours of game time. The values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the second reading memory 264 are recorded.

The winning counter data 264e is stored in the first reading counter 263a of the first reading memory 263 at each timing (trigger) of recording the values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the first reading memory 263 into the second reading memory 264. The total number of balls that have been won in the first starting opening 64a, the total number of balls that have been winning in the second starting opening 64b that have been counted by the first 2 counter 263b, and the first ordinary number that has been counted by the ordinary 1 counter 263c. The total number of balls that have won the winning opening 63a, the total number of balls that have won the second ordinary winning opening 63b that has been counted by the ordinary 2 counter 263d, and the large winning opening 65a that has been counted by the special winning opening counter 263e. It is the data recorded with the total number of hit balls together with the time at the recording timing.

The counters 263a to 263e corresponding to the respective winning openings are the total number of balls won in each winning opening from the time the power is turned on until the timing is reached for the first time, or from the previous timing to the current timing. Indicated by. When it is time to record the values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the first reading memory 263 into the second reading memory 264, the values of the counters 263a to 263e at that time are indicated by the RTC 266 at that time. It is recorded in the prize winning counter data 264e together with the time.

The winning counter data 264e is associated with one time, and the total number of balls winning the first starting opening 64a at that time, the total number of balls winning the second starting opening 64b, and the first normal winning opening 63a The total number of balls, the total number of balls that have won the second regular winning opening 63b, and the total number of balls that have won the special winning opening 65a may be recorded.

In addition, in the winning counter data 264e, an area for recording the total number of balls won in the first starting port 64a, an area for storing the total number of balls winning in the second starting port 64b, and the first ordinary winning port 63a The first reading memory is provided with an area for recording the total number of balls that have been won, an area for storing the total number of balls that have won in the second regular winning opening 63b, and an area that records the total number of balls that have won in the special winning opening 65a. When it becomes a timing (trigger) to record the values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in 263 in the second reading memory 264, the total number of balls winning in the corresponding winning opening is calculated for each area. The winning counter data 264e may be configured to be recorded together with the time at the timing.

Here, the information regarding the total number of spheres that have won each winning opening that can be recorded in the prize counter data 264e is limited to a predetermined number (for example, 16384). For example, in association with one time, the total number of balls winning the first starting opening 64a, the total number of balls winning the second starting opening 64b, the total number of balls winning the first ordinary winning opening 63a at that time, When the prize counter data 264e is configured to record the total number of balls that have won in the second regular winning opening 63b and the total number of balls that have won in the large winning opening 65a, a predetermined number of information has already been recorded in the prize counter data 264e. If so, the oldest time information is erased and the latest information is recorded there. For example, the prize-winning counter data 264e is configured like a ring buffer, a memory for managing the position for writing information is separately prepared on the ring buffer, and the writing position is shifted by 1 each time information is written. Thus, the process of deleting the oldest information and recording the latest information there can be realized. In this way, by setting an upper limit on the number of information that can be recorded in the winning counter data 264e, it is possible to prevent the storage capacity of the second reading memory 264 from increasing. Further, when the number of information to be recorded in the winning counter data 264e reaches the upper limit number, the oldest information is erased and the latest information is recorded, so that the inspection device 300 including the latest state of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed. Analysis can be performed.

An area for recording the total number of balls won in the first starting opening 64a, an area for storing the total number of balls winning in the second starting opening 64b, and a total number of balls winning in the first ordinary winning opening 63a are recorded. In the case where the winning counter data 264e is configured by providing an area for storing the total number of balls that have won in the second ordinary winning opening 63b and an area that records the total number of balls that have won in the large winning opening 65a, Alternatively, a ring buffer may be configured for each area, and an upper limit may be set for the number of pieces of information that can be recorded in each area, and control may be performed as described above. As a result, when the information to be recorded reaches the upper limit number in each area, the inspection device 300 including the latest state of the pachinko machine 10 is deleted by deleting the oldest information and recording the latest information. Analysis can be performed.

When the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, the CPU 261 is interrupted, and the CPU 261 causes the prize reading counter data 264e, the number of shot balls data 264c, and the game state data recorded in the second reading memory 264. H.264d is transmitted to the inspection device 300 in order. When transmitting each data 264e, 264c, 264d to the inspection device 300, the CPU 261 includes each information recorded in each data 264e, 264c, 264d (including the recorded time information associated with each information). , Are read in the recorded order and transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300.

Specifically, when the data to be transmitted to the inspection device 300 from now on does not satisfy the upper limit number (the above-mentioned predetermined number) of recordable information set for each, the CPU 261 first writes information to the data. The information recorded from the position where is written to the position indicated in the memory that manages the position where information is written (that is, the position where the information at the latest time is recorded) is sequentially read and inspected. Transmit to device 300. On the other hand, in the data for transmitting information to the inspection device 300, when the upper limit number of the recordable information (the above predetermined number) specified for each is satisfied, it is indicated by the memory that manages the position to write the information. The position next to the read position (that is, the position where the information of the oldest time is recorded) is sequentially shifted one by one, and the position where the information is written is managed (that is, the position shown in the memory). , The information recorded up to the position at which the latest time information was recorded) is sequentially read and transmitted to the inspection device 300. As a result, information is output to the inspection device 300 in order from the oldest time information.

An area for recording the total number of balls won in the first starting opening 64a, an area for storing the total number of balls winning in the second starting opening 64b, and a total number of balls winning in the first ordinary winning opening 63a are recorded. In the case where the winning counter data 264e is configured by providing an area for storing the total number of balls that have won in the second normal winning opening 63b and an area that records the total number of balls that have won in the large winning opening 65a, By reading out the information as described above for each area, the total number of balls winning the winning opening is output to the inspection device 300 in order from the oldest time information for each winning opening. Become.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the winning information storage processing (S718, S733) executed by the CPU 261 in the accessory ratio management chip 207 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this winning information storage processing. In the first embodiment, the information stored in the first reading memory 263 when the timing (trigger) for calculating the accessory ratio comes (see FIG. 20) and when the power is turned off (see FIG. 18). Although the accessory ratio calculation process of calculating the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio from the above and recording them in the second reading memory 264 is executed (see FIG. 21), in the second embodiment, they are stored in the first reading memory 263. When the timing (trigger) for recording the respective information to the second reading memory 264 is reached (see FIG. 20) or when the power is turned off (see FIG. 18), instead of the accessory ratio calculation process, a prize is won. Executes information storage processing. The winning information storage process is a process of recording each information stored in the first reading memory 263 in the second reading memory 264.

In the winning information storage processing, first, the values of the counters 263a to 263e corresponding to the winning openings, which are stored in the first reading memory 263, are combined with the current time indicated by the RTC 266, and stored in the second reading memory 264. It is additionally recorded in the prize winning counter data 264e (S761). As a result, for each combination timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b, from the time the power is turned on to the time when the timing reaches the first time, or from the previous timing to the current time Until the timing of, the total number of balls winning the first starting opening 64a of the first reading counter 263a of the first reading memory 263 and the second starting opening 64b of the starting second counter 263b. Of the total number of balls that have won, the total number of balls that have won the first ordinary winning opening 63a counted by the ordinary 1 counter 263c, and the number of balls that have won the second ordinary winning opening 63b counted by the ordinary 2 counter 263d. The total number and the total number of balls winning the special winning opening 65a counted by the special winning opening counter 263e are additionally recorded in the second reading memory 264.

Further, even when the power is cut off, it is determined that the power is cut off from the timing (trigger) at which the second reading memory 264 is most recently recorded by using the electric power charged in the capacitor 267. In addition, the total number of balls that have been won in the first start opening 64a counted by the first 1 counter 263a of the first reading memory 263 and the total number of balls that have been won in the second start opening 64b that have been counted by the first 2 counter 263b. And the total number of balls that have been won in the first ordinary winning opening 63a counted by the ordinary 1 counter 263c, and the total number of balls that have been won in the second ordinary winning opening 63b that have been counted by the ordinary 2 counter 263d. The total number of balls that have won the special winning opening 65a counted by the mouth counter 263e is additionally recorded in the second reading memory 264. As a result, even if a prize is won at each winning opening that was detected during the time when the power was cut off from the timing (trigger) at which the second reading memory 264 was most recently recorded, there is no omission of the winning. The total number of spheres can be recorded in the second reading memory 264 for each winning opening.

In subsequent S742 to S744, the same processing (see FIG. 21) as S742 to S744 of the accessory ratio calculation processing of the first embodiment is executed, and the winning information storage processing ends.

Next, the inspection result output processing executed by the CPU 261 in the accessory ratio management chip 207 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this inspection result output processing. This inspection result output processing is executed based on an interrupt signal input to the CPU 261 when the connector of the cable connecting the inspection device 300 is inserted into the inspection terminal 207a, as in the first embodiment. In the inspection result output process, the data in the second reading memory 264 is output to the inspection device 300.

When the inspection result output processing in the second embodiment is executed, first, the prize ball number table 202e set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a is output to the inspection device 300 (S771). Then, all the information indicating the total number of winning balls at each winning opening recorded in the prize winning counter data 264e is associated with each information, and the information is recorded in the second reading memory 264 together with the recording time. Sequentially outputs the oldest information to the inspection apparatus 300 (S772). In S753 and S754 executed after the process of S772, the same process as S753 and S754 of the inspection result output process of the first embodiment is executed, and the inspection result output process ends.

The inspection device 300 calculates the character role ratio and the continuous character ratio based on the information indicating the total number of winning balls in each winning opening output in S772 and the prize ball number table 202e output in S771. Then, the calculated accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio are analyzed. Then, when the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are high as a result of the analysis by the inspection device 300, the cause is searched based on the information on the number of balls shot to the game area and the information on the game state. be able to. Further, by the process of S772, the information indicating the total number of the winning balls at each winning opening is output in order from the oldest time. Therefore, the inspection device 300 analyzes each information in the output order. It is possible to easily analyze changes in the character role ratio and the continuous character ratio with the passage of time.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, in the accessory ratio management chip 207, every time the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f stored in the trigger setting area 265b is reached. The values of the counters 263a to 263e, which are stored in the first reading memory 263 and which count the total number of balls won for each winning opening, are sequentially recorded in the winning counter data 264e of the second reading memory 264. Then, when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, information indicating the total number of winning balls for each winning opening recorded in the winning counter data 264e of the second reading memory 264 is the winning ball number table 202e. In addition, it is transmitted to the inspection device 300.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the total number of balls that have been won in the corresponding winning openings is calculated for all winning openings and recorded in the second reading memory 264. Therefore, the storage capacity required for the second reading memory 264 is larger than that in the case where the calculated accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio calculated in the first embodiment are recorded in the second reading memory 264. Since the total number of winning balls for each winning opening is transmitted to the device 300, if the result of the analysis by the inspection device 300 shows a large change in the character ratio or the continuous character ratio, the inspection device 300. Thus, by referring to the total number of winning balls for each winning opening, the cause can be grasped more accurately.

In addition, the information indicating the total number of balls won in each winning opening, which is transmitted to the inspection device 300, is associated with the time when the information is recorded in the second reading memory 264, and is transmitted to the inspection device 300. It Therefore, in the inspection device 300, when the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio is analyzed based on the information indicating the total number of the balls that have won each winning opening, and there is a large change in the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio. , The total number of balls winning in each winning opening used to calculate the changed character ratio or the continuous character ratio is specified at the time recorded in the second reading memory 264, and in the vicinity of that time, By analyzing the total number of balls that have won the prize holes, the total number of balls that have been launched in the game area, or the game state, it is possible to find the cause of the change in the character ratio or the continuous character ratio.

In addition, with the same configuration as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the same effects as those obtained by the configuration can be obtained.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 31 to 34, a pachinko machine 10 according to a third embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first and second embodiments, a case where the accessory ratio management chip 207 is provided in the main controller 110 and the accessory ratio management chip 207 manages the information regarding the accessory ratio in the pachinko machine 10 is described. explained. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the MPU 201 manages the information regarding the accessory ratio. Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is provided with a winning combination ratio display device 400, and displays information on the winning role ratio on the winning ratio display device 400.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described focusing on the points different from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment or the second embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the same components and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment or the second embodiment will be denoted by the same reference numerals as the first embodiment or the second embodiment. The description is omitted.

FIG. 31 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the first and second embodiments in that the configuration of the main controller 110 is different. Other configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first and second embodiments.

As described above, the main controller 110 of the third embodiment is not provided with the accessory ratio management chip 207, and the MPU 201 manages information regarding the accessory ratio. Specifically, the accessory ratio management main process executed by the CPU 261 of the accessory ratio management chip 207 of the first embodiment or the second embodiment is executed in the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201. .. At this time, each counter and data stored in the first reading memory 263 of the accessory ratio management chip 207 are stored in the RAM 203 in the third embodiment.

The second reading memory 264 provided in the accessory ratio management chip 207 is provided in the main controller 110 in a form of being connected to the input/output port 205. Further, in the third embodiment, the RTC 266 provided in the accessory ratio management chip 207 in the first embodiment and the second embodiment uses that which is built in (not shown) in the MPU 201.

Furthermore, the inspection terminal 207a to which the inspection device 300 is connected is connected to the input/output port 205. When the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a via a cable and a connector, the MPU 201 executes an inspection result output process, and information about the accessory ratio and other inspection information is transmitted to the inspection device 300.

Further, the ratio display device 400 is connected to the input/output port 205 of the main control device 110. The role ratio display device 400 is composed of, for example, a plurality of 7-segment displays, and is arranged on the main board that constitutes the main controller 110. That is, when the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is viewed, the display screen of the ratio display device 400 is assembled. It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 may be assembled so that the display screen of the ratio display device 400 can be seen from the front side.

The role ratio display device 400 displays the character ratio or the continuous character ratio, or information (for example, a base value) related to the character ratio or the continuous character ratio. The information on the character ratio and the continuous character ratio displayed on the ratio display device 400 may be, for example, information indicating the total number of balls paid out by winning for each winning opening, or all winnings. The total number of balls paid out by winning in the mouth, the total number of balls paid out by winning in the winning openings (the second starting opening 64b and the special winning opening 65a) where the winning character operates, and the winning character are consecutive. It may be information indicating the total number of balls paid out by winning the winning opening (major winning opening 65a). Further, information indicating the total number of balls shot in the game area (the number of shot balls) may be included in the information on the character ratio and the continuous character ratio displayed on the character ratio display device 400. The role ratio display device 400 is configured by a liquid crystal display having a predetermined number of pixels, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display, or the like, instead of the 7-segment display, and the role ratio or the continuous role ratio, or Information relating to the character ratio or the continuous character ratio may be displayed.

The MPU 201 has a ROM 202 and a RAM 203 built-in, and also has a plurality of registers 200 for storing various data in a layer closest to an ALU (Arithmetic Logic Unit) which is the heart of the MPU 201. The plurality of registers 200 are used for general purposes in various situations without having a specific purpose, such as temporarily holding a value in the middle of calculation or storing an address of a memory required for processing. It includes various registers such as a general-purpose register and an accumulator register for accumulating the arithmetic results of the ALU to obtain a sum.

Further, the plurality of registers 200 also includes a flag register 200a (also referred to as a status register or the like) including a flag indicating a digit overflow due to the ALU operation, a flag indicating an interrupt state, and the like. Due to the nature of the register, the flag register 200a can have its contents updated every time one instruction is executed.

The RAM 203 is provided with a use area inside area 203x and a use area outside area 203y, each of which is a work area (inner work area 203x1, outer work area 203y1) and a stack area (inner stack area 203x2, outer stack area 203y2). ) And are provided.

When the MPU 201 controls the game mainly, while the MPU 201 is configured to manage the information on the character ratio, various counters stored in the RAM 203 and used for the main control of the game, This is because it is necessary to prevent the data from being erroneously destroyed by the various counters and data that are stored in the RAM 203 and are used to manage the information relating to the accessory ratio. That is, various counters and data used for the main control of the game must be protected and given priority in order to protect the interests of the player. In addition, the data saved in the stack area of the RAM 203 when the main control of the game is performed, the main control of the game continues without any problems after the process related to the management of the information on the accessory ratio is performed on the way. It must be ensured that it is done.

Therefore, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 stores various counters and data used for the main control of the game in the working area 203x1 of the use area inner area 203x, and the stack area when the main control of the game is performed. The data to be saved in the area is saved in the inner stack area 203x2 of the in-use area 203x. On the other hand, the MPU 201 stores various counters and data used for managing the information on the character ratio in the outer work area 203y1 of the outside-use area 203y, and also stores the counter in the stack area when managing the information on the character ratio. The data to be saved is saved to the outer stack area 203y2 of the use area outside area 203y. As a result, various counters and data used for the main control of the game, and the data saved in the stack area when the control is performed can be reliably protected.

32 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the third embodiment with reference to FIG. 32. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is repeatedly executed, for example, every 4 milliseconds. By the MPU 201 executing this timer interrupt process, various processes that should be executed periodically are performed.

In this timer interrupt process, first, a game process for controlling the main game is executed (S2001). For example, the processes such as S101 to S111 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 described in the first embodiment are executed in the process of S2001. That is, the main control of the game includes lottery for big hits, setting of variable display, opening/closing control of the big winning opening (large opening mouth) 65a at the time of big hit, and lottery for winning the second symbol display device 83. .. As described above, the MPU 201 uses the use area inner area 203x (the inner work area 203x1 and the inner stack area 203x2) in the RAM 203 while executing the processing of S2001.

Next, a winning ratio process for managing information about the winning ratio is executed (S2002). Details of the ratio processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After the processing of S2002, the timer interrupt processing ends.

As described above, in the timer interrupt process of the present embodiment, the game process is performed first, and then the winning ratio process is performed, so that the main control of the game, which is an important control, is preferentially executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, details of the ratio processing (S2002) executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 32) will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the winning combination processing. In this ratio processing, first, interrupts are prohibited (S2011), then the flag register 200a is saved to the inner stack area 203x2 by the PUSH instruction (S2012), and then the ratio main process is executed by the CALL instruction. The subroutine program to be executed is read, and the combination ratio main processing is executed (S2013). Details of the winning ratio main processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 33. Note that in the processing steps of S2011 and S2012, the MPU 201 executes the processing using the in-use area area 203x of the RAM 203.

When the processing of S2013 ends and the processing returns from the subroutine program of the processing main processing to this processing, the flag register 200a saved in the inner stack area 203x2 is restored by the POP instruction (S2015), Permission is permitted (S2016), and then the ratio processing ends. The MPU 201 also executes the processes of S2015 and S2016 by using the in-use area area 203x of the RAM 203.

In the process of S2012, the flag register 200a is saved in the inner work area 203x1 by using the load (LD) instruction, and in the process of S2014, the flag register 200a is saved in the inner work area 203x1 by using the load (LD) instruction. The flag register 200a may be restored.

Next, with reference to FIG. 34, details of the ratio main process (S2013) executed by reading the subroutine program by the ratio process (S2002) (see FIG. 33) will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the combination ratio main processing.

In the duty ratio main process, first, a stack pointer (not shown) of the MPU 201 is set to the start position of the outer stack area 203y2 by a load (LD) instruction (S2021). As a result, in the subsequent processing, the data is saved in the outer stack area 203y2. After this process, the MPU 201 uses the outside work area 203y1 as the work area of the RAM 203. That is, the MPU 201 stores various counters and data using the outer work area 203y1, and uses the outer stack area 203y2 as necessary.

Then, among the registers 200, the registers 200 (excluding the flag register 200a) used in the processing relating to the character ratio are individually and individually loaded into the areas determined as the outer work areas 203y1 by a load (LD) instruction. It is saved (S2022). Then, the processing relating to the accessory ratio is executed (S2023).

In the processing of S2023, for example, the same processing as the accessory ratio management main processing (see FIG. 18) executed by the CPU 261 of the accessory ratio management chip 207 in the first embodiment or the second embodiment is executed. Also, a process of controlling the display of the ratio display device 400 is executed. Further, when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, the inspection result output process executed by the CPU 261 of the accessory ratio management chip 207 of the first embodiment or the second embodiment (see FIGS. 22 and 30). A process similar to the above may be executed during the process of S2023.

When the processing of S2023 is completed, then, the stack pointer (not shown) of the MPU 201 is set to a fixed address in the inner stack area 203x2 by a load (LD) instruction (S2024). As a result, in the subsequent processing, data is restarted in the inner stack area 203x2.

Here, the role ratio process (S2002) in which the role ratio main process (S2013) is executed is the same as the game process (S2001) for executing main control of the game in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It will be done after the end. The timer interrupt process is read when the counter update process (S702 to S703) is not executed in the infinite loop (the loop of S701 to S703) of the main process (FIG. 17) executed by the MPU 201. Is executed.

Therefore, when the process of S2024 is executed, the inner stack area 203x2 contains the data saved when the main process shifts to the timer interrupt process, and the flag register 200a saved by the process of S2012. It is saved (however, if the flag register 200a is saved in the inner work area 203x1 by the load instruction, it does not exist in the inner stack area 203x2), and the number of saved data is fixed. Therefore, in the process of S2012, when the stack pointer is designated at the position where it is stacked in the inner stack area 203x2, the position can be surely designated only by setting the fixed address for the stack pointer. Since it is not necessary to save the stack pointer value indicating the inside of the inner stack area 203x2 before the stack pointer is moved from the inner stack area 203x2 to the outer stack area 203y2 (before executing the process of S2012), It is possible to prevent the capacity of the RAM 203 from increasing due to the saving.

Next, by the processing of S2022, the value of each register 200 saved individually in the determined area of the external work area 203y1 is transferred from the determined area of the external work area 203y1 corresponding to the load (LD) instruction. It is restored by reading and setting it in the corresponding register 200 (S2025). Then, after the processing of S2025, the winning ratio main processing is ended, and the processing returns to the winning ratio processing. After the processing of S2025 is completed, the MPU 201 uses the inner work area 203x1 as the work area of the RAM 203. That is, the MPU 201 uses the inner work area 203x1 to store various counters and data, and uses the inner stack area 203x2 as necessary.

In this way, the MPU 201 uses the area outside the use area 203y (the outside work area 203y1 and the outside stack area 203y2) to execute each processing when executing the processing related to the accessory ratio (S2023). Of the registers 200 provided in the MPU 201, the registers 200 used in the processing relating to the accessory ratio are individually saved to the outside work area 203y1 of the RAM 203 at the stage of shifting to the processing of S2023 using the outside area 203y. To do. Then, before the process of S2023 ends and the MPU 201 returns to the process using the in-use area 203x, the registers 200 saved in the outside work area 203y1 are restored to the corresponding registers 200. After that, a game process that uses the area 203x in the use area (the inner work area 203x1 and the inner stack area 203x2) and performs the main control of the game is executed.

Here, from the game processing which mainly controls the game using the in-use-area area 203x, the processing relating to the ratio of the accessory that uses the out-of-use-area area 203y is performed, and the game in which the in-use-area area 203x is used again. When returning to the game process that performs the main control of, the game that performs the main control of the game from the protection of the profit of the player and the fact that the main control of the game must be continuously performed again without any problem. The treatment must not be influenced by the treatment relating to the duty ratio. Therefore, the RAM 203 is divided into an in-use area area 203x used for main game control processing and an out-of-use area area 203y used for processing relating to character ratios. However, the register 200 has a smaller capacity than the RAM 203, and there is a register 200 whose purpose of use is specified. Therefore, the register 200 to be used in the main control process of the game and the process relating to the accessory ratio. Is impossible or difficult to separate.

In addition, before and after performing the processing relating to the character ratio, in other words, the game processing which mainly controls the game using the in-use area 203x shifts to the processing relating to the character ratio using the out-of-use area 203y. The contents of the register 200 are the same in the step of performing and the step of shifting from the processing relating to the character ratio using the outside-use-area 203y to the game processing which mainly controls the game using the inside-use-area 203x. Therefore, there is also a demand for surely ensuring that the game processing for performing the main control of the game is not affected by the processing relating to the role ratio executed between them.

On the other hand, before performing the processing related to the character ratio using the outside-use-area 203y, the contents of all the registers 200 are collectively saved to the outer stack area 203y2 using the PUSH instruction, and the processing related to the character ratio is performed. A method of collectively recovering from the outer stack area 203y2 using the POP instruction after all the registers 200 may be considered. However, in this case, in order to save the contents of all the registers 200, it is necessary to set the capacity of the outer stack area 203y2 large in advance, and the capacity of the outer work area 203y1 becomes smaller or the RAM 203 has a larger capacity. I have to turn it on.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the MPU 201 is provided when the game process for controlling the game using the in-use area 203x is shifted to the process relating to the character ratio using the out-of-use area 203y. Of the registered registers 200, the registers 200 used in the processing relating to the accessory ratio are individually saved in the outer work area 203y1 of the RAM 203, and after the processing relating to the ratio processing is executed, the outside area 203y of the use area is saved. When shifting (returning) from the processing relating to the accessory ratio to be used to the game processing for performing the main control of the game using the in-use area 203x, the registers 200 saved in the outside work area 203y1 are individually restored. As a result, a step of shifting from a game process that mainly controls a game using the in-use area 203x to a process relating to a character ratio using the outside-use area 203y, and a role using the outside-use area 203y Since the contents of the register 200 can be made the same at the stage of shifting from the process relating to the object ratio to the game process for performing the main control of the game using the use area area 203x, the game for performing the main control of the game It can be ensured that the processing is not affected by the processing relating to the accessory ratio executed between the processing.

In addition, a step of shifting from a game process that mainly controls a game using the in-use area 203x to a process relating to a character ratio using the outside-use-area area 203y, and an accessory using the outside-use-area area 203y. At the stage of shifting from the process related to the ratio to the game process for performing the main control of the game that uses the in-use area 203x, the contents related to all the registers 200 are not saved/restored, but the process related to the character ratio is performed. Since the contents of only some of the registers 200 that are used as a result are saved/restored, the capacity of the RAM 203 (outer work area 203y1) required to save the contents of the registers can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the capacity of the RAM 203 and to secure a large area for storing other data and the like in the outer work area 203y1.

Note that the register 200 that is not used in the processing relating to the character ratio is not affected by the processing relating to the character ratio in the first place, and the contents thereof are retained before and after the processing relating to the character ratio is executed. Therefore, without saving/restoring the contents of the registers 200 that are not used in the processing relating to the accessory ratio, only by saving/restoring the contents of only some of the registers 200 used in the processing relating to the accessory ratio, It can be reliably ensured that the game process that performs the main control of the game is not affected by the process relating to the character ratio executed between.

However, since the flag register 200a is a register used for all instructions executed by the MPU 201, it naturally becomes a register also used for processing relating to the character ratio, but in the processing of S2022, Does not save in exceptional cases. This changes the contents of the flag register 200a only by reading the ratio main process (S2013) in the ratio process shown in FIG. 33, and shifts from the game process for executing the main control of the game to the process relating to the character ratio. This is because the value of the flag register 200a at the time when the game process is finished cannot be saved at the stage of the process of S2022.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, before reading the role ratio main process (S2013) in the role ratio process shown in FIG. 33, only the flag register 200a is saved in the inner stack area 203x2, and after the role ratio main process (S2013) is finished. , The flag register 200a alone is restored from the inner stack area 203x2. As a result, the value of the flag register 200a at the time when the game process is completed can be reliably returned after the process relating to the accessory ratio is executed.

In addition, a step of shifting from a game process that mainly controls a game using the in-use area 203x to a process relating to a character ratio using the outside-use-area area 203y, and an accessory using the outside-use-area area 203y. The saving/restoring of the registers 200 at the stage of shifting from the processing relating to the ratio to the gaming processing for performing the main control of the game using the in-use area 203x is performed individually for each individual register. Only the register 200 that needs to be saved/restored in order to ensure that the game process that performs the main control is not affected by the process relating to the role ratio executed between (only used for the process relating to the role ratio) Register 200 only) can be individually specified to save/restore them.

Further, since the register 200 is saved in the outer work area 203y1 instead of the outer stack area 203y2, the capacity required for the outer stack area 203y2 can be reduced and the capacity of the outer work area 203y1 can be secured large. Further, some MPU 201 pre-designate a stack area and a work area depending on its model (type). Such an MPU 201 has a function of clearing (initializing to 0) the content itself of the RAM 203 when the data is further saved and stacked beyond the area of the stack area designated in advance. is there. On the other hand, by saving the register 200 to the outer work area 203y1 instead of the outer stack area 203y2, it is possible to prevent the outer stack area 203y2 from being filled with the immediately stacked data. Therefore, in the MPU 201 having such a function, it is possible to prevent the RAM 203 from being cleared because the data is further stacked beyond the predetermined area of the outer stack area 203y2.

Further, since the register 200 is saved using the load (LD) instruction instead of using the PUSH instruction/POP instruction, the save location can be fixed by the program. Therefore, while the processing related to the accessory ratio is being performed, the area in which the register 200 is saved is clearly avoided, and a program is configured to use the outside work area 203y1, thereby performing the main control of the game. The contents of the register 200 used in the processing can be surely protected.

When all the registers 200 are used in the processing relating to the accessory ratio, all the registers 200 are saved/restored in a predetermined area of the outside work area 203y1 by using a load (LD) instruction individually. It may be allowed to. This can also enjoy the effect of saving the register 200 to the outside work area 203y1.

Further, when a part of the registers 200 used in the processing relating to the accessory ratio are to be saved, they are individually saved to the determined area of the outer stack area 203y2 using the PUSH instruction, and the outer stack area 203y2 is determined. The registers 200 saved in the different areas may be individually restored using the POP instruction. As a result, the capacity of the RAM 203 necessary for saving the contents of the register can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the capacity of the RAM 203 and secure a large area for storing the outside work area 203y1. In this case, when the register 200 saved by using the POP instruction is restored, it is necessary to restore the register 200 saved by the LIFO method, that is, the PUSH instruction later by the POP instruction. ..

In addition, the same configuration as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the first and second embodiments can achieve the same effect as that obtained by the configuration.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the main controller 110 shifts from a game process that mainly controls a game that uses the in-use area 203x to a process relating to a role ratio that uses the outside-use-area area 203y. In the step, the registers 200 used in the processing regarding the accessory ratio are individually saved, and after the processing regarding the accessory ratio ends, the area outside the use area 203y is changed from the processing regarding the accessory ratio to the inside of the use area. The case has been described in which the saved registers 200 are individually restored at the stage of shifting to the game processing for performing the main control of the game using the area 203x. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the main control unit 110 uses the in-use area 203x in the accessory processing (S2002) executed in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 32). At the stage of reading the accessory main process (S2013) for executing the processing regarding the accessory ratio that uses the outside-use-area area 203y during the execution of the process by the CALL command, the register 200 used in the processing regarding the accessory ratio Are individually cleared to 0, and the accessory main process (S2013) is read by the CALL command. In addition, in the accessory main process (S2013), the accessory main process (S2013) that uses the outside-use-area area 203y is terminated, and the process related to the accessory ratio is returned to the processing that uses the inside-use-area area 203x. The registers 200 used in step 1 are individually cleared to 0, and then the processing returns to the ratio processing.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described focusing on the points different from the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the same configurations and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to third embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the first to third embodiments, and The description is omitted.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment in the role ratio process (S2002) that is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. A part of the process and a part of the ratio main process (S2013) which is one process of the ratio process (S2002) are different.

FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the winning combination processing (S2002) in the fourth embodiment. In this winning ratio processing, first, the same processing of S2011 and S2012 as in the third embodiment is executed, and then all the registers 200 (except the flag register 200a) used in the processing relating to the winning ratio. For each of the above, it is cleared to 0 by using a load (LD) instruction. Then, the processing shifts to S2013, the subroutine program for executing the duty ratio main processing that uses the outside-use-area 203y is read by the CALL instruction, and the duty ratio main processing is executed. Then, the same processes of S2014 and S2015 as in the third embodiment are executed, and then the winning ratio process is ended.

Next, FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the winning ratio main processing (S2013) in the fourth embodiment. In this winning ratio main processing, first, the same processing of S2021 as that of the third embodiment is executed, and then the same processing of S2023 as that of the third embodiment (that is, processing relating to the winning ratio) is executed. Next, the registers 200 used in the processing relating to the accessory ratio are individually cleared to 0 (S2041). Then, the same processing of S2024 as in the third embodiment is executed to end the role ratio main processing that uses the outside-use-area 203y, return to the ratio processing, and perform the processing that uses the area-in-use-area 203x. Execute.

In the fourth embodiment, in the register 200 used in the processing regarding the character ratio using the outside-use area 203y, the value is changed by the processing regarding the character ratio, and the value is left as it is in the corresponding register 200. On the other hand, even if the MPU 201 executes the game process that mainly controls the game using the in-use area 203x, it is premised that the game process is not affected at all. In this case, originally, provided in the MPU 201 at the stage of shifting from the game processing that mainly controls the game using the in-use area 203x to the processing relating to the character ratio using the out-of-use area 203y. The register 200 used in the processing related to the accessory ratio is saved, the processing related to the accessory ratio is executed, and then the processing related to the accessory ratio using the area 203y outside the used area is changed to the inside of the used area. There is no problem even if the saved register 200 is not restored at the stage of shifting to the game processing for performing the main control of the game using the area 203x. However, in this case, the value of the register 200 changes before and after the processing relating to the accessory ratio, so that it is impossible for an external person to judge whether or not this really causes a problem.

Therefore, as in the present embodiment, first, in the winning ratio processing, the game processing that mainly controls the game using the in-use area 203x shifts to the processing relating to the character ratio using the outside-use-area 203y. At the step of performing, that is, before reading the subroutine program for executing the duty ratio main processing by the CALL instruction, once all the registers 200 used in the duty ratio main processing performed in the duty ratio main processing are individually set to 0. To clear. Then, in the role ratio main process, after a process relating to the character ratio is executed, a game process for performing main control of a game using the area 203x in the use region from the process related to the character ratio using the area 203y outside the use area. At the stage of shifting to, all the registers 200 used in the process relating to the role ratio (that is, the same register 200 that was cleared to 0 before executing the role ratio main process) are individually set to 0. clear. As a result, a stage of shifting from a game process that mainly controls a game using the in-use area 203x to a process relating to a character ratio that uses the out-of-use area 203y (a stage of reading the ratio main process), From the processing relating to the character ratio using the area outside use area 203y to the game processing for performing the main control of the game using the area inside use area 203x (the step of returning from the ratio main processing to the ratio processing), Thus, the contents of the register 200 can be made identical at a glance. Therefore, it is possible to surely ensure that the game process that performs the main control of the game is not affected by the process relating to the character ratio executed between. It should be noted that the register 200 that is not used in the processing related to the character ratio does not change its contents before and after the processing related to the character ratio and continues to be held. Therefore, even if the register 200 not used is not cleared to 0, It will be the same at both stages.

Here, in the fourth embodiment, in the processing of S2031 and S2041, the case where the registers 200 used in the processing relating to the accessory ratio are individually cleared to 0 has been described, but it is not always necessary to clear to 0. For example, even if the same predetermined value is stored in the processes of S2031 and S2041, the above effect can be enjoyed. However, immediately after the power is turned on and the reset input to the MPU 201 is released (at the stage where software initialization is not executed), all the registers are initialized to 0. In the process (1), it is desirable to individually clear (initialize) the registers 200 used in the process related to the accessory ratio. In addition, by individually clearing the registers 200 used in the processing relating to the accessory ratio to 0, it is possible to understand at a glance that the registers 200 are cleared to 0.

In addition, with the same configuration as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to third embodiments, the same effects as those obtained by the configuration can be obtained.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 44. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, instead of the role ratio display device 400 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment or the fourth embodiment, four 7-segment indicators (lower right of the 7-segment portion). A base display device 401 (see FIG. 38(a)) configured by 401a, 401b, 401c, and 401d including a dot segment provided on the side is provided. On the base display device 401, the base value of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed as one of the pieces of information regarding the character ratio.

The base value is the number (ratio) of balls to be paid out (prize balls) for 100 balls at the time of jackpot, high probability (probability change), and normal time excluding time saving. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the number of out balls guided from the game area to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls hit in the game area, in other words, the number of balls used in the game). Every time the total number of outs is 60,000, the base value for the 60,000 spheres is measured and stored.

Then, on the base display device 401, the base value measured in real time during the period until the total out number reaches 60000 (hereinafter referred to as “real-time base value”) and the previous (nearest) total out number. In addition to the base value measured when the number reaches 60,000 (hereinafter referred to as the “previous base value”), it is measured when the total number of outs reaches 60000 one time before (previously). The base value (hereinafter referred to as the “previous two-time base value”) and the base value measured when the total number of outs reaches 60000 one before the previous two (previous two-time) (hereinafter “previous two-time base value”). The “base value” is switched and displayed every predetermined period (5 seconds in this embodiment). In addition to the real-time base value, by displaying the base value for the past multiple times (previous base value, pre-previous time base value, pre-previous time base value), it becomes possible to more accurately determine whether or not there has been cheating, In addition, it is possible to predict to some extent the time when the wrongdoing has occurred.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, every time the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, all segments (including dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 immediately after the power is turned on. Is turned on for a predetermined period (5 seconds in this embodiment). In the base display device 401, if some of the segments are not lit due to a failure such as a wire breakage, the base value and the like cannot be displayed correctly, and there is a risk of making an erroneous judgment in determining whether or not there has been a dishonesty. By turning on all the segments of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 each time the power is turned on, it is possible to confirm whether or not all the segments can be normally turned on. It can be easily determined whether or not the display of 401 is normally performed.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is new to the pachinko machine 10 at the time of a completely new start-up of the pachinko machine 10 in the manufacturing factory, or when the used pachinko machine 10 is moved to another hall as a used table. When starting up, the display of the base display device 401 until the total number of outs reaches the predetermined number (300 in this embodiment) is first displayed in a special display mode different from the normal base value display. .. When the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up, balls may be manually inserted into the respective winning openings to pay out the prize balls in a shipping inspection for confirming the quality of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the base value at this time is significantly different from the actual base value of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up, the display of the base display device 401 until the total number of outs reaches the predetermined number (300 in this embodiment) is referred to as a normal base value display. By displaying in different special display modes, it is possible to show that the base value being displayed is not a regular base value. In addition, it is possible to indicate that the pachinko machine 10 is in a new startup state by performing the display.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the pachinko machine 10 of the first to fourth embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the same components and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to fourth embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals as those of the first to fourth embodiments, and The description is omitted.

FIG. 37 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment in that the role ratio display device 400 is connected to the main controller 110 in the third embodiment, whereas In the embodiment, the base display device 401 is connected to the main controller 110. As described above, the base display device 401 is for displaying the base value of the pachinko machine 10.

In addition, in the winning combination ratio display device 400 in the third embodiment, the base value of the pachinko machine 10 may be switched and displayed every predetermined period together with the winning object ratio of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the present embodiment, the inspection terminal 207a does not necessarily have to be provided, and it is not necessary that the inspection device 300 be configured to output information on the accessory ratio. Further, when the information regarding the accessory ratio is not output to the inspection device 300, the second reading memory 264 may be omitted.

Here, the details of the base display device 401 will be described with reference to FIG. 38. First, FIG. 38A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the base display device 401. The base display device 401 is composed of four 7-segment displays 401a to 401d arranged side by side in a row, and is arranged on a main board constituting the main control device 110. That is, when the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is viewed, the display screen of the base display device 401 is assembled so that the four-digit number or alphabet can be confirmed. The base display device 401 may be mounted so that the display screen of the base display device 401 can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

Each of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d has a dot segment provided on the lower right side of the 7-segment portion in addition to the 7-segment portion. Of the four 7-segment displays 401a to 401d, the base display device 401 uses the two left 7-segment displays 401a and 401b as identification segments, and uses the two right 7-segment displays 401c and 401d as ratio segments. To do. The identification segment is used to indicate identification information for identifying the content displayed in the ratio segment. The ratio segment is used to display the ratio of the contents specified by the identification information shown in the identification segment.

FIG. 38B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display content on the base display device 401. As described above, in the base display device 401, the real-time base value measured in real time during the period until the total out number reaches 60,000 and the previous (most recent) total out number reaches 60,000. To the previous base value measured before and the previous base value measured when the total number of outs reached 60000 one time before the previous time (before the previous time), and the previous base value before the previous two times (the time before the previous time). ) The pre-previous two-time base value measured when the total number of outs reaches 60,000 is switched and displayed every 5 seconds.

When displaying the real-time base value on the base display device 401, “bL.” is displayed in the identification segment and the real-time base value being measured is displayed in two digits in the ratio segment. By displaying “bL.” on the identification segment, it is possible to make a person who sees the number displayed on the ratio segment a real-time base value.

When the previous base value is displayed on the base display device 401, “b1.” is displayed in the identification segment and the previous base value is displayed in two digits in the ratio segment. By displaying “b1.” on the identification segment, it is possible to make a person who sees that the number displayed on the ratio segment is the base value last time.

In the base display device 401, when displaying the two-preceding base value, “b2.” is displayed in the identification segment and the two-preceding base value is displayed in the ratio segment. By displaying "b2." on the identification segment, it is possible to make a person who sees that the number displayed on the ratio segment is the base value two times before.

When the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 two before two times, “b3.” is displayed in the identification segment and the two-digit before and after base value is displayed in the ratio segment. By displaying "b3." on the identification segment, it is possible to make a person who sees that the number displayed on the ratio segment is the base value two times before the other.

In this manner, the base display device 401 also displays the base values for the past multiple times (previous base value, pre-previous time base value, pre-previous second time base value) in addition to the real-time base value. Here, as described above, the real-time base value is a base value measured in real time during the period until the total out number reaches 60000. Here, generally, in the hall, about 10,000 to 20,000 balls are struck out for one pachinko machine 10 per day to play a game. That is, the previous base value, the two-preceding base value, and the two-preceding base value measured for 60,000 spheres are base values over several days of about 3 to 6 days. If the real-time base value is not displayed on the base display device 401, it will take about 3 to 6 days until the base values for the 60,000 spheres are measured. It can be the base value 3-6 days ago. Therefore, if there is some cheating after the base value is measured last time, the base value for the next 60000 spheres is measured and displayed on the base display device 401 for 3 to 6 days. There is a risk that cheating cannot be found. On the other hand, by displaying the real-time base value on the base display device 401, the current base value can be shown as a preliminary value, so that if any illegal action is taken, the real-time base value is immediately changed to the illegal value. You can discover the possibility that there was an act.

On the other hand, the real-time base value is a base value measured in real time when the total number of outs is less than 60000, as described above. As described above, the base value is the number (percentage) of balls to be paid out (prize balls) to 100 balls in the normal time, so that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes. The real-time base value may fluctuate depending on whether the normal state happens to last for a long time, the big hit state happens to occur frequently, or the probability change state happens to last for a long time. Therefore, if only the real-time base value is displayed on the base display device 401, it may be difficult to determine whether or not there has been a misconduct.

On the other hand, the previous base value, the pre-previous time base value, and the pre-previous time base value measured for 60,000 spheres are base values over several days of about 3 to 6 days. Whatever gaming state the pachinko machine 10 has followed for the corresponding number of days, the previous base value, the two-preceding base value, and the two-preceding base value can be averaged. Therefore, by displaying not only the real-time base value but also the base value measured for 60,000 spheres such as the previous base value on the base display device 401, it is possible to more accurately determine the presence or absence of fraud. it can.

On the other hand, when only the previous base value is displayed as the base value measured for 60,000 balls, it is happened that a player accustomed to the pachinko machine 10 played the game during the period when the previous base value was measured. Then, the base value generally becomes low. Therefore, even when only the real-time base value and the previous base value are displayed on the base display device 401, it may be difficult to determine whether or not there has been a misconduct. On the other hand, as the base value measured for 60,000 spheres, not only the previous base value but also a plurality of base values such as a two-preceding base value and a two-preceding base value are displayed, so that each base value can be displayed. In, it is possible to determine whether or not the base value has changed based on the habituation of the player who played the game. Therefore, it is possible to more accurately determine the presence or absence of fraud.

In the present embodiment, the base display device 401 switches and displays the real-time base value, the previous base value, the two-preceding base value, and the two-preceding base value every 5 seconds. May be increased to display the real-time base value and the previous base value at the same time, and the mode in which the two-preceding base value and the two-preceding base value are simultaneously displayed may be switched and displayed every predetermined period. Alternatively, the real-time base value, the previous base value, the two-preceding base value, and the two-preceding base value may all be simultaneously displayed on the base display device 401.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the case of displaying three base values measured on 60,000 spheres, which are displayed on the base display device 401, the previous base value, the two-previous base value, and the two-previous base value. However, it is also possible to display the last base value and the two-preceding base value, or in addition to the previous base value, the two-preceding base value, and the two-preceding base value, Alternatively, the base value may be further displayed before and after once when the total number of outs reaches 60000 (before and after again). That is, as the base value measured for 60,000 spheres displayed on the base display device 401, an arbitrary number of base values of 2 or more may be displayed.

Returning to FIG. 37, the description will be continued. The base display device 401 is connected to the base display device control circuit 402 which is provided in the main controller 110 and is connected to the input/output port 205. The base display device control circuit 402 drives and controls each of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d of the base display device 401 based on the drive/control signal from the MPU 201, and various types as shown in FIG. 38(b). The display is performed.

In the processing for displaying the base value on the base display device 401, the processing is performed using the outside-use-area area 203y of the RAM 203. That is, the information necessary for displaying the base value on the base display device 401 is stored in the outside work area 203y1 of the outside of the use area 203y. Here, with reference to FIG. 39, the details of the information stored in the outside work area 203y1 for displaying the base value on the base display device 401 will be described. First, FIG. 39A is a schematic diagram schematically showing information required for displaying the base value, which is stored in the outer work area 203y1 of the RAM 203.

Information necessary for displaying the base value, which is stored in the outside work area 203y1, includes a total out number counter 203j, a low-probability payout number counter 203k, real-time base value data 203l, a previous base value data 203m, and a two-preceding base value data. 203n, two before two base value data 203o, new start-up flag 203p, and display type counter 203q are prepared at least.

Of these, the total out number counter 203j, the low-probability payout number counter 203k, the real-time base value data 203l, the previous base value data 203m, the two-preceding base value data 203n, the two-preceding base value data 203o, and the new rising flag 203p are Even when the power is turned on while the RAM erasing switch 122 is operated, the information is not initialized (cleared) and is kept retained. As a result, even if the RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on, the measurement of the real-time base value that has been performed before that operation is continued, and the measured real-time base value is displayed on the base display device 401. Can be made. Further, the previous base value, the two-previous-time base value, and the two-previous-time base value held before the operation of the RAM erase switch 122 can be displayed on the base display device 401.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, a RAM all erase switch (not shown) is provided in the substrate box 100 in which the main substrate is stored, and only when the power is turned on while the RAM all erase switch is operated. The RAM 203 including the total out number counter 203j, the low-probability payout number counter 203k, the real-time base value data 203l, the previous base value data 203m, the two-preceding base value data 203n, the two-preceding base value data 203o, and the new rising flag 203p. It is supposed to be initialized (cleared). When the pachinko machine 10 is completely newly started up in the manufacturing plant, or when the used pachinko machine 10 is moved to another hall as a used table, the RAM all erase switch is operated when the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up. However, by turning on the power, the total out number counter 203j, the low-probability payout number counter 203k, the real-time base value data 203l, the previous base value data 203m, the two-preceding base value data 203n, the two-preceding base value data 203o, a new one. The rising flag 203p can be initialized, and the measurement of the base value can be newly started from there. In addition, when the used pachinko machine 10 is moved to another hall as a second-hand stand, it is possible to initialize (clear) these pieces of information so that a fraudulent act is performed in the previous hall and the base value is set. Even if is changed, the information is continuously displayed at the next store, so that it is possible to suppress the suspicion that there is a cheating act at the next store. Further, since the RAM all-erasing switch is provided in the substrate box 100 which is connected in an unopenable manner, it cannot be operated unless the connection of the substrate box 100 is broken to open it. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the fraudulent person from erasing the information necessary for displaying the base value, and it is possible to reliably protect this information.

It should be noted that instead of the RAM erasure switch, a hole such as a keyhole is provided, and only when a key or the like matching the hole is inserted, the total out number counter 203j, the low-probability payout number counter 203k, the real-time base value data 203l, The previous base value data 203m, the two-preceding base value data 203n, the two-preceding base value data 203o, and the new rising flag 203p may be initialized. As a result, only those who have a key that fits the hole can erase the information required to display the base value, and thus prevent fraudsters from deleting the information required to display the base value. You can surely protect this information.

The total out number counter 203j is a counter for counting the total out number which is the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game). The total out number counter 203j is initialized to zero when the power is turned on while operating the RAM all clear switch, and the ball is guided to the ball discharge path when the ball is detected by the out switch 208f. Is incremented by 1. When the total out number counter 203j reaches 60000, the MPU 201 determines that the total out number has reached 60,000, executes a predetermined process described later, and initializes the total out number counter 203j to zero. Turn into. As a result, the total out number counter 203j again counts the total out number until the total out number reaches 60000.

The low-probability-payout-number counter 203k is a counter for counting the number of prize balls paid out in a normal time excluding a jackpot, a high probability (probability change), and a time saving. The low-probability payout number counter 203k is initialized to zero when the power is turned on while operating the RAM erasing switch. Then, when the balls are paid out (prize balls) when the game state is normal, the low certainty payout number counter 203k is incremented by the number of the paid out balls.

For example, in the present embodiment, with respect to the first starting opening 64a, which is a so-called "belly", in which the opening is normally opened, the first normal winning opening 63a and the second normal winning opening 63b, which are general winning openings, are normally used. When it is detected by the first starting opening switch 208a, the first normal winning opening switch 208c, and the second normal winning opening switch 208d that the number of prize balls set for the corresponding winning opening is reached. Is determined by the prize ball number table 202e (see FIGS. 6 and 9), and the prize ball number is added to the low-probability payout number counter 203k.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, when a "small hit" is provided as one mode of "disengagement" and the special winning opening 65a is configured to be opened for a few seconds and a few when the "small hit" is achieved, the gaming state Ordinarily, when the special winning opening 65a in the "small hit" is opened and there is a ball in the special winning opening 65a. May be added to. In addition, when the game state is normal and there is a ball in the second starting opening 64b and a prize ball is played, the number of prize balls may be added to the low certainty payout number counter 203k.

The addition of the number of prize balls to the low certainty payout number counter 203k is cumulatively performed until the total out number counter 203j reaches 60000. That is, the value of the low-probability payout number counter 203k when the total out number counter 203j reaches 60,000 is the value of the ball paid out in the normal game state with respect to the 60,000 balls that have been hit in the game area. It becomes the number.

When the total out number counter 203j reaches 60000, the low-probability payout number counter 203k is initialized to zero together with the total out number counter 203j. As a result, again, the number of balls paid out in the normal game state is counted by the low certainty payout number counter 203k until the total out number reaches 60000.

The MPU 201 calculates the real-time base value for each predetermined period (for example, every 4 milliseconds when the timer interrupt process is executed) using the following equation (1).
Real-time base value=low-probability payout number counter 203k value/total out-number counter 203j value×100 (1)
The real-time base value calculated by the equation (1) is stored in the real-time base value data 203l.

That is, the real-time base value data 203l is data indicating the measured (calculated) real-time base value. The previous base value data 203m is data indicating the previous base value, the two-preceding base value data 203n is data indicating the two-preceding base value, and the two-preceding base value data 203o is data indicating the two-preceding base value. is there.

Here, the configuration of the real-time base value data 203l, the previous base value data 203m, the two-preceding base value data 203n, and the two-preceding base value data 203o will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of each of the base value data 203l to 203o.

As shown in FIG. 39(b), each of the base value data 203l to 203o is composed of 8 bits (1 byte), and the 7th bit (most significant bit) on the MSB side is a valid data flag and the rest. The base value is stored in the 0th to 6th bits (lower 7 bits). When the valid data flag is 1, each of the base value data 203l to 203o means that a valid base value is stored in the 0th to 6th bits. On the other hand, in the base value data 203l to 203o, when the valid data flag is 0, it means that the valid base value is not stored in the 0th to 6th bits.

Each of the base value data 203l to 203o is initialized to zero when the power is turned on while operating the RAM all erase switch. That is, immediately after the power is turned on while operating the RAM erasure switch, valid data is not stored in all of the real-time base value, the previous base value, the two-preceding base value, and the two-preceding base value.

After that, until the total out number counter 203j reaches 300, the base value calculated by the equation (1) is stored in the base value of the real-time base value data 203l as the real-time base value data 203l. The valid data flag of is left at 0. Then, in this case, when the real-time base value is displayed on the base display device 401, “88.” is blinked (or lit) in the identification segment, and the real-time base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l is proportional. Flashes (or lights) on the segment.

As described above, the RAM all-erasure switch is used to newly start up the pachinko machine 10 when the pachinko machine 10 is completely newly started up in the manufacturing factory or when the used pachinko machine 10 is moved to another hall as a used table. It is operated when you do. When the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up, in some cases, such as a shipping inspection for confirming the quality of the pachinko machine 10 or the like, balls may be manually inserted into the respective winning openings to pay out the prize balls. Therefore, the base value at this time is significantly different from the actual base value of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up, the display of the base display device 401 until the total number of outs reaches 300 first causes the identification segment to blink (or light) "88.". At the same time, the real-time base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l is displayed in a special display mode which is different from the normal base value display in which the real-time base value stored in the ratio segment is blinked (or lit). It can be shown that it is not the base value of (effective base value) of. In addition, it is possible to indicate that the pachinko machine 10 is in a new startup state by performing the display. In this special display mode, both “88.” of the identification segment and the real-time base value of the ratio segment may be turned on or may be blinked. Further, the identification segment “88.” may be lit to blink the real-time base value of the ratio segment, or conversely, the identification segment “88.” may be blinked to light the real-time base value of the ratio segment. May be.

When the total out number counter 203j reaches 300, the valid data flag of the real time base value data 203l is set to 1. As a result, the base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l becomes a valid base value. Therefore, based on the fact that the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l has become 1, "bL." is lighted on the identification segment of the base display device 401, and the base value of the real-time base value data 203l is displayed on the ratio segment. By doing so, an effective real-time base value can be notified.

On the other hand, at this stage, the valid data flags of the previous base value data 203m, the two-preceding base value data 203n, and the two-preceding base value data 203o remain 0. At this time, when the previous base value, the two-preceding base value, and the two-preceding base value are displayed on the base display device 401 by switching every predetermined period, the identification segment is displayed corresponding to each base value, while the ratio segment is displayed. "---" is turned on. As a result, it can be shown that a valid base value has not been obtained as the previous base value, the two-preceding base value, or the two-preceding base value.

When the total out number counter 203j reaches 60,000, the base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l at that time becomes the base value for the total out number of 60,000. Therefore, the two-preceding base value data 203n is shifted to the two-preceding base value data 203o, the previous base value data 203m is shifted to the two-preceding base value data 203n, and the real-time base value data 203l is changed to the previous base value data 203m. To shift. As a result, the base value measured when the total out number reaches 60000 is held as the previous base value.

Here, when the data is shifted to the previous base value data 203m, the valid data flag of the real time base value data 203l to be shifted is "1", and the valid data flag of the previous base value data 203m after the shift is set. Is also "1". Therefore, thereafter, when the previous base value is displayed on the base display device 401, the base value stored in the previous base value data 203m is displayed in the ratio segment as an effective base value.

Further, when the previous base value data 203m is shifted to the two-previous base value data 203n, if the valid data flag of the previous base value data 203m is "1" (the power is turned on while operating the RAM all erase switch). This applies when the total number of outs reaches 60000 for the second time after all the initialization of the RAM 203 has been executed), and the valid data flag of the pre-previous two-time base value data 203n becomes "1". Therefore, after that, when the base value before display is displayed on the base display device 401, the base value stored in the base value data 203n before display is displayed in the ratio segment as an effective base value.

Furthermore, when shifting the pre-previous-previous-second base value data 203n to the pre-previous-previous-second base value data 203n, if the valid data flag of the pre-previous-previous-second base value data 203n is "1" (the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch). This applies when the total number of outs reaches 60000 for the third time after all the RAM 203 has been turned on and the initialization has been performed), and the valid data flag of the base value data 203o before and after the shift is "1". It becomes. Therefore, thereafter, when the base value before two times before is displayed on the base display device 401, the base value stored in the before-before-two times base value data 203o is displayed in the ratio segment as an effective base value.

When the total out number counter 203j reaches 60000 and the real time base value data 203l is shifted to the previous base value data 203m, the real time base value data 203l is also updated as the total out number counter 203j is initialized to 0. It is initialized to 0 including the valid data flag. The valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l is held at 0 until the total out-number counter 203j reaches 300 again, and when the total out-number counter 203j reaches 300, the valid data of the real-time base value data 203l. 1 is stored in the flag. Thereafter, 1 is held in the valid data flag of the real time base value data 203l until the total out number counter 203j reaches 60000.

Here, while the total number of outs is small, the measured real-time base value is greatly influenced by the game content at that time, so even if it is displayed, it becomes a meaningless base value, which adversely affects fraudulent judgment. May affect. Therefore, when the total out number is 0 to 300, the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l is set to 0, so that when the real-time base value is displayed on the base display device 401, the identification segment includes the real-time base value. While "bL." indicating the value is turned on, "---" is turned on for the ratio segment. As a result, it can be shown that the currently effective real-time base value is not obtained because the total out number is small. In this case, “bL.” indicating the real-time base value may be blinked on the identification segment, and the base value of the real-time base value data 203l may be displayed on the ratio segment. As a result, it is possible to indicate that a valid real-time base value is not currently obtained due to the small total number of outs, and also to inform the real-time base value at that time as a reference.

On the other hand, after the total number of outs is 300, by setting the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l to 1, when displaying the real-time base value on the base display device 401, the real-time base value is displayed in the identification segment as real-time. While “bL.” indicating the base value is turned on, the ratio segment displays the base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l as an effective base value.

Returning to FIG. 39(a), the new start-up flag 203p indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is completely newly started up in the manufacturing plant, or when the used pachinko machine 10 is moved to another hall as a used table. 10 is a flag indicating that the new startup period is in progress. When the new startup flag 203p is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the new startup period, and when it is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the new startup period.

The new start-up flag 203p is initialized to ON when the power is turned on while operating the RAM delete switch that is operated when the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the new start-up period. Is shown. The new rising flag 203p is kept on until the total out number counter 203j reaches 300, and when the total out number counter 203j differs by 300, the new rising flag 203p is set off. After that, the new start-up flag 203p is kept off.

When the new start-up flag 203p is turned on, the base display device 401 blinks (or lights) the above-mentioned special display mode, that is, “88.” in the identification segment, and the real-time base value data 203l is displayed in the ratio segment. The stored real-time base value is displayed in a blinking (or lit) manner. In addition, it is possible to indicate that the pachinko machine 10 is in a new startup state by performing the display.

The display type counter 203q is a counter for determining the type of base value to be displayed on the base display device 401. When the display type counter 203q is 0, the real time base value is displayed on the base display device 401, and when the display type counter 203q is 1, the previous base value is displayed on the base display device 401 and the display type counter 203q is displayed. Is 2, the base display device 401 is caused to display the base value before two times, and when the display type counter 203q is 3, the base display device 401 is caused to display the base value before two times.

When the new startup flag 203p is set to OFF, that is, when the total number of outs reaches 300 after the new startup of the pachinko machine 10 is completed, the display type counter 203q ends the new startup period. Is initialized to 0. Then, the display type counter 203q is incremented by 1 every 5 seconds, and when the value of the display type counter 203q is 3 at the time of counting up, it is returned to 0. As a result, the base value displayed on the base display device 401 changes every 5 seconds in the order of the real-time base value, the previous base value, the two-preceding base value, and the two-preceding base value. After that, the display returns to the real-time base value, and the display of the real-time base value, the previous base value, the two-preceding base value, and the two-preceding base value is repeated every 5 seconds.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. Here, this start-up process will be described focusing on differences from the start-up process (see FIG. 16) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the first embodiment. Note that, as described above, the same processes as those of the startup process of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, in the processing of S604, it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 has been turned on (S604: Yes), and in the processing of S605, it is determined that the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 ( When it is determined that the calculated RAM determination value is not normal by the processing of S605: No) and S607 (S607: No), after the payout initialization command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 (S614), the RAM 203 is stored. Of the used area, the total out number counter 203j, the low-probability payout number counter 203k, the real-time base value data 203l, the previous base value data 203m, the two-preceding base value data 203n, the two-preceding before and after information, which are information necessary for displaying the base value. The area excluding the base value data 203o and the new start-up flag 203p is cleared to 0 (S3001), and an initial value is set to the cleared area of the RAM 203 excluding information necessary for displaying the base value (S3002). ..

As a result, even if the RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on, the measurement of the real-time base value that has been performed before that operation is continued, and the measured real-time base value is displayed on the base display device 401. Can be made. Further, the previous base value, the two-previous-time base value, and the two-previous-time base value held before the operation of the RAM erase switch 122 can be displayed on the base display device 401. Even if the fraudulent person operates the RAM erasing switch 122 in order to erase the evidence, the information necessary for displaying the base value continues to be held, so that the evidence of the fraudulent activity can be suppressed.

If it is determined by the process of S604 that the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S604), then it is determined whether or not the RAM all erase switch is turned on (S3003). If the RAM erasure switch is not turned on (S3003: No), the process proceeds to S605.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch is turned on (S3003: Yes), a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 (S3004), and then the RAM 203 All initialization processing (S3005, S3006) is executed. In the all initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S3005, S3006), the total out number counter 203j, the low sure payout number counter 203k, the real time base value data 203l, the previous base value data 203m, and the two-preceding base which are information necessary for displaying the base value. The used area of the RAM 203 including the value data 203n, the two-preceding base value data 203o, and the new rising flag 203p is cleared to 0 (S3005), and then the initial value is set in the RAM 203 (S3006).

As described above, the RAM all-erasure switch is used to newly start up the pachinko machine 10 when the pachinko machine 10 is completely newly started up in the manufacturing factory or when the used pachinko machine 10 is moved to another hall as a used table. If you do, it is designed to be operated. Then, by turning on the power while operating the RAM all erasing switch, the total out number counter 203j, the low-probability payout number counter 203k, the real-time base value data 203l, the previous base value data 203m, the two-preceding base value data 203n, the second before last. The individual base value data 203o and the new rising flag 203p can be initialized, and the base value measurement can be newly started from there. In addition, when the used pachinko machine 10 is moved to another hall as a second-hand stand, it is possible to initialize (clear) these pieces of information so that a fraudulent act is performed in the previous hall and the base value is set. Even if is changed, the information is continuously displayed at the next store, so that it is possible to suppress the suspicion that there is a cheating act at the next store. Further, since the RAM all-erasing switch is provided in the substrate box 100 which is connected in an unopenable manner, it cannot be operated unless the connection of the substrate box 100 is broken to open it. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the fraudulent person from erasing the information necessary for displaying the base value, and it is possible to reliably protect this information.

When any one of S609, S3002, and S3006 is executed, then all the segments (including dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 are turned on (S3007), In that state, wait processing is executed for 5 seconds (S3008). Thus, every time the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, all the segments (including the dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 are continuously illuminated for at least 5 seconds. ..

In the base display device 401, if some of the segments are not lit due to a failure such as a wire breakage, the base value and the like cannot be displayed correctly, and there is a risk of making an erroneous judgment in determining whether or not there has been a dishonesty. By turning on all the segments of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 for at least 5 seconds each time the power is turned on, it is possible to confirm whether or not all the segments can be normally turned on. It can be easily determined whether or not the display of the device 401 is normally performed.

Further, the progress of the start-up process is waited for 5 seconds during which this lighting is performed, and the start of the normal game process is awaited. As a result, when the base value cannot be displayed correctly on the base display device 401, it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding without being able to determine whether there is a cheating act, and there was a cheating act. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player, the hall, or the like from having some disadvantage.

In the present embodiment, every time the power is turned on, all segments of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 are lit up and stopped for 5 seconds so that the game does not progress. However, a normal game process may be started and the game may be advanced while the lighting is being performed. In this case, while the real-time base value is being measured in accordance with the progress of the game, only the display of the base value on the base display device 401 may be put on standby. As a result, even if a process of turning on all the segments of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 when a momentary power failure occurs, the player immediately starts playing the game. I can resume.

In the startup process, after the process of S3008, the process proceeds to the process of S613.

Next, with reference to FIG. 41, base value processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the base value processing. This base value process is a ratio comparison process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32) that is periodically (for example, every 4 milliseconds) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 shown in the third embodiment. This is executed as one process of (S2002), and calculates (measures) the base value and displays the base value.

In this base value process, first, a base value calculation process is executed (S3101) to calculate (measure) a real-time base value, and when the total number of outs reaches 60000, between the base value data 203l to 203o. Shift processing and the like are executed. Details of this base value calculation processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 42.

Next, it is determined whether 1 second has elapsed since the base value display processing (S3103) was executed last time (S3102), and it was determined that 1 second has elapsed since the base value display processing (S3103) was executed last time. If so (S3102: Yes), the base value display process is executed (S3103), and the process of displaying the base value on the base display device 401 is executed. The details of the base value display processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 43 and 44.

When the process of S3103 is completed, the base value process ends. On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S3102, when it is determined that one second has not elapsed since the last execution of the base value display processing (S3103) (S3102: No), the base value display processing (S3103) is skipped. To end the base value processing. As a result, the base value display process (S3103) is executed at 1 second intervals, and the display on the base display device 401 is drive-controlled every 1 second.

In the determination processing of S3102, if the processing of S3102 is executed for the first time after the main controller 110 is powered on (that is, after the startup processing shown in FIG. 40 is executed), Whether or not one second has elapsed since the value display process (S3103) was performed, the affirmative determination is made (S3102: Yes), and the base value display process (S3103) is performed. Thus, the drive control process of the base display device 401 can be promptly executed after the startup process shown in FIG. 40 is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, details of the above-described base value calculation processing (S3101) which is one processing of the base value processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the base value calculation process.

In the base value calculation process (S3101), first, at least the outputs of the first starting opening switch 208a, the first normal winning opening switch 208c, the second normal winning opening switch 208d, and the out switch 208f are read, and the first starting opening is set. The detection information (winning detection information) is saved by determining whether or not there is a winning in the 64a, the first normal winning opening 63a, the second normal winning opening 63b, and the presence or absence of a ball guided to the ball discharging path (S3201). ). It should be noted that the winning of one ball and the determination of one ball guided to the ball discharging path are performed over three times of the timer interrupt processing based on the outputs of the switches 208a, 208c, 208d and 208f.

Next, it is determined whether or not the out switch 208f is on (S3201), and when the out switch 208f is on and it is determined that there is a ball guided to the ball discharge path (S3201: Yes), the total out 1 is added to the number counter 203j (S3203). As a result, the total out number counter 203j counts the total out number, which is the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of struck out balls).

After the processing of S3203 or by the processing of S3201, when it is determined that the out switch 208f is not on and there is no ball guided to the ball discharging path (S3201: No), then the gaming state is a big hit. Instead, it is determined whether it is in the low probability state and not in the time saving state, that is, whether the game state is the normal time (S3204). Then, when it is determined that the game state is not the jackpot time, the low probability state, and the time saving state, that is, the game state is the normal time (S3204: Yes), the process of S3205 is executed.

That is, in the process of S3205, it is determined that there is a win among the first starting opening 64a, the first normal winning opening 63a, and the second normal winning opening 63b based on the winning detection information stored in the processing of S3201. When there is a mouth, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning mouth having the prize (that is, the number defined by the prize ball number table 202e) is added to the low-probability payout number counter 203k. As a result, the number of prize balls paid out in the normal time excluding a big hit, a high probability (probability change), and a short time is counted by the low-probability-payout-number counter 203k.

After the processing of S3205 or by the processing of S3204, when the gaming state is a jackpot, a high probability (probability change), or a short time, that is, when it is determined that the gaming state is not the normal time (S3204: No), then the real-time base value is calculated by the above equation (1), and the calculated real-time base value is stored as the base value of the real-time base value data 203l (S3206). By this processing, the base value is measured in real time.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the total out number counter 203j is 60000, that is, whether or not the total out number has reached 60,000 (S3207). As a result, when the total number of outs does not reach 60000 (S3207: No), the processes of S3208 to S3210 are skipped and the process proceeds to S3211. On the other hand, if the total number of outs has reached 60000 (S3207: Yes), the processes of S3208 to S3210 are executed, and the process proceeds to S3211.

In the process of S3208, first, the two-previous-time base value data 203n is shifted to the two-previous-time base value data 203o, the previous base value data 203m is shifted to the two-previous time base value data 203n, and the real-time base value data 203l is changed to the previous time. The base value data 203m is shifted (S3208). As a result, the real-time base value measured when the total number of outs reaches 60000 is held as the previous base value, and thereafter, the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 as the previous base value. Further, the respective base values that have been displayed as the previous base value and the two-preceding base value so far are subsequently displayed on the base display device 401 as the two-preceding base value and the two-preceding base value.

Each base value may be stored in a ring buffer of the FIFO (First In First Out) system. In this case, in the process of S3208, the address (ring buffer pointer) that stores the real-time base value may be updated. However, when the base value is stored in the FIFO type ring buffer, and once the ring buffer pointer is broken due to some influence of noise or the like, the base value may be correctly stored in the RAM 203 and may not be displayed. is there. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the area of the RAM 203 that stores the real-time base value, the previous base value, the two-preceding base value, and the two-preceding base value is fixed, and the total number of outs reaches 60,000. By shifting the data during that period, it is possible to avoid the above-mentioned problems that may occur when the base value is stored in the FIFO ring buffer.

Further, in the process of S3208, these shift processes are executed by one LDIR instruction. The LDIR instruction enables block transfer of data simply by setting the start address (HL) of the data to be transferred, the start address (DE) of the transfer destination, and the number of transfer bytes (BC). That is, the data is transferred from (HL) to (DE), 1 is added to both (HL) and (DE), and 1 is subtracted from (BC). Then, this is repeated until (BC) becomes 0. Therefore, the two-preceding base value data 203o is stored in the address (AA) (AA is one address of the RAM 203), the two-preceding base value data 203n is stored in the address (AA+1), and the previous base value data 203m is stored in the address (AA+2). ), the real time base value data 203l is stored in the address (AA+3), the start address (HL) of the data to be transferred is set to (AA), the transfer destination address is set to (AA+1), The shift process of S3208 can be easily realized by setting the number of transfer bytes to 3 and executing one LDIR instruction.

In the subsequent processing of S3209, the base value of the real-time base value data 203l and the valid data flag are initialized to 0 (S3209). As a result, again, the base value is newly measured in real time until the total number of outs reaches 60,000, while the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l remains unchanged until the total number of outs reaches 300. It is held at 0. While the total number of outs is small, the measured real-time base value is greatly influenced by the game content at that time, so even if it is displayed, it becomes a meaningless base value, which may adversely affect the judgment of misconduct. is there. Therefore, when the total out number is 0 to 300, the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l is set to 0, so that when the real-time base value is displayed on the base display device 401, the identification segment includes the real-time base value. While "bL." indicating the value is turned on, "---" is turned on for the ratio segment. As a result, it can be shown that the currently effective real-time base value is not obtained because the total out number is small.

In the subsequent process of S3210, the total out number counter 203j is initialized to 0 (S3210). As a result, the total out number counter 203j again counts the total out number until the total out number reaches 60000.

In the process of S3211, it is determined whether or not the value of the total out number counter 203j is 300, that is, whether or not the total out number counter reaches 300 (S3211). As a result, when the total number of outs does not reach 300 (S3211: No), the processes of S3212 to S3215 are skipped, and the base value calculation process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the total number of outs has reached 300 (S3211: Yes), the processes of S3212 to S3215 are executed, and then this base value calculation process is ended.

In the process of S3212, it is determined whether or not the new startup flag 203p is on (S3212). As a result, when the new startup flag 203p is on (S3212: Yes), it means that the pachinko machine 10 is in the new startup period because the power is turned on while operating the RAM all erase switch. .. Since the total number of outs has reached 300 as a result of the process of S3211, the new start-up flag 203p is set to OFF at the timing to end the new start-up period (S3213). Then, the display type counter 203q is initialized to zero (S3214). As a result, thereafter, the real-time base value, the previous base value, the two-preceding base value, and the two-preceding base value are switched and displayed on the base display device 401 every 5 seconds.

After the process of S3214 or by the process of S3212, when it is determined that the new start-up flag 203p is off (S3212: No), 1 is set to the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l. It As a result, after the total out number becomes 300, by setting the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l to 1, when the real-time base value is displayed on the base display device 401, the identification segment is While “bL.” indicating the real-time base value is turned on, the base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l is displayed as an effective base value in the ratio segment.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43 and FIG. 44, details of the base value display process (S3103) which is one process of the base value process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 and is executed at 1 second intervals. Will be described. 43 and 44 are flowcharts showing the base value calculation processing (S3103).

First, with reference to FIG. 43, when the base value calculation process (S3103) is started, it is determined whether or not the new start-up flag 203p is on (S3301). When the new startup flag 203p is on (S3301: Yes), it means that the pachinko machine 10 is in the new startup period because the power is turned on while operating the RAM all erase switch. Therefore, the base display device control circuit 402 controls the identification segment of the base display device 401 so that “88.” blinks (or lights up) and the ratio segment displays the base value of the real-time base value data 203l blinks (or lights up). The control signal is transmitted to (S3302). Then, the base value display processing ends.

As described above, when the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up, balls may be manually inserted into the respective winning openings to pay out the prize balls in a shipping inspection or the like for confirming the quality of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the base value at this time is significantly different from the actual base value of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, during the new start-up period of the pachinko machine 10, the display of the base display device 401 blinks (or lights) “88.” in the identification segment, and the real-time base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l is displayed. Show that the base value being displayed is not a normal base value (valid base value) by displaying it in a special display mode that blinks (or lights) in the ratio segment and is different from the normal base value display. You can In addition, it is possible to indicate that the pachinko machine 10 is in a new startup state by performing the display.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S3302, if the new start-up flag 203p is off (S3301: No), then it is determined whether 5 seconds have elapsed since the display type counter 203q was updated or initialized (S3303). As a result, when 5 seconds have elapsed (S3303: Yes), the display type counter 203q is updated (S3304), and the process proceeds to S3305 shown in FIG. On the other hand, as a result of the process of S3303, if 5 seconds have not elapsed (S3303: No), the process of S3304 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3305 shown in FIG.

In updating the display type counter 203q in S3304, if the display type counter 203q is other than 3, 1 is added to the display type counter 203q. If the display type counter 203q is 3, the display type counter 203q is initialized to 0. By updating the display type counter 203q every 5 seconds, the type of the base value displayed on the base display device 401 can be the real-time base value, the previous base value, the two-preceding base value, the two-preceding base value, the real-time base value. , Last time base value,... Every 5 seconds.

Referring to FIG. 44, in the process of S3305, the value of display type counter 203q is determined (S3305). When the display type counter 203q is 0 (S3305: “0”), it is a period for displaying the real-time base value on the base display device 401. Therefore, it is determined whether the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l is 1 (S3306), and if the valid data flag is 1 (S3306: Yes), the identification segment of the base display device 401 is displayed with "bL. Is lit and displayed, and a control signal is transmitted to the base display device control circuit 402 so that the base value of the real-time base value data 203l is lit and displayed in the ratio segment (S3307). As described above, when the base value of the real-time base value data 203l is measured for the total number of outs of 300 or more, the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l is 1 as the base value is valid. Is set to. Therefore, the real-time base value measured as the effective base value can be displayed and shown on the base display device 401.

On the other hand, as a result of the process of S3306, when the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l is 0 (S3306: No), “bL.” is lit and displayed on the identification segment of the base display device 401, and “ratio” is displayed on the ratio segment. A control signal is transmitted to the base display device control circuit 402 so that "--" is lit and displayed (S3308).

As described above, when the base value of the real-time base value data 203l is measured when the total number of outs is less than 300, it is determined that the base value is not valid, and the valid data of the real-time base value data 203l. The flag is set to 0. As a result, it can be shown that the currently effective real-time base value is not obtained because the total out number is small.

When the display type counter 203q is 1 as a result of the process of S3305 (S3305: “1”), it is a period during which the previous base value is displayed on the base display device 401. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the valid data flag of the base value data 203m last time is 1 (S3309), and if the valid data flag is 1 (S3309: Yes), the identification segment of the base display device 401 displays “b1. Is displayed, and the control signal is transmitted to the base display device control circuit 402 so that the base value of the previous base value data 203m is displayed in the ratio segment (S3310). Thereby, when a valid base value is stored in the previous base value data 203m, the valid previous base value can be displayed and shown on the base display device 401.

Further, when the total out number reaches 60000 and the data is shifted to the base value data 203m the previous time, the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l to be shifted is "1", and the last time after the shift. The valid data flag of the base value data 203m also becomes "1". Therefore, when the total out number first reaches 60000 after the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up, when the previous base value is displayed on the base display device 401, it is stored in the previous base value data 203m. The base value will be displayed in the ratio segment as a valid base value.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S3309, when the valid data flag of the previous base value data 203m is 0 (S3309: No), the identification segment of the base display device 401 is lit and displayed, and the ratio segment is displayed. A control signal is transmitted to the base display device control circuit 402 so that "---" is lit and displayed (S3311). As a result, when a valid base value is not obtained as the previous base value, "---" displayed in the ratio segment can indicate that the valid previous base value has not been obtained.

When the display type counter 203q is 2 as a result of the process of S3305 (S3305: “2”), it is a period in which the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 two times before. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the valid data flag of the base value data 203n before two times is 1 (S3312), and when the valid data flag is 1 (S3312: Yes), the identification segment of the base display device 401 displays “b2. Is lit and displayed, and a control signal is transmitted to the base display device control circuit 402 so as to illuminate and display the base value of the base value data 203n two times before in the ratio segment (S3313). As a result, when a valid base value is stored in the pre-previous two-time base value data 203n, the valid pre-previous two-time base value can be displayed and shown on the base display device 401.

Further, when the previous base value data 203m is shifted to the two-previous base value data 203n, if the valid data flag of the previous base value data 203m is "1" (the power is turned on while operating the RAM all erase switch). This applies when the total number of outs reaches 60000 for the second time after all the initialization of the RAM 203 has been executed), and the valid data flag of the pre-previous two-time base value data 203n becomes "1". Therefore, thereafter, when the base value before display is displayed on the base display device 401, the base value stored in the base value data 203n before display is displayed as an effective base value in the ratio segment.

On the other hand, as a result of the process of S3312, when the valid data flag of the base value data 203n before two times is 0 (S3312: No), the identification segment of the base display device 401 is lit and "b2." is lit, and the ratio segment is displayed. A control signal is transmitted to the base display device control circuit 402 so that “−−” is lit and displayed (S3313). As a result, when a valid base value is not obtained as the previous-two-time base value, it is possible to indicate that an effective previous-two-time base value is not obtained by "---" displayed in the ratio segment.

When the display type counter 203q is 3 as a result of the process of S3305 (S3305: “3”), it is a period before the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 two times before. Therefore, it is determined whether the valid data flag of the base value data 203o is two before two times (S3315). If the valid data flag is 1 (S3315: Yes), the identification segment of the base display device 401 is determined. The control signal is transmitted to the base display device control circuit 402 so that "b3." is lit and displayed, and the base value of the base value data 203o is lit and displayed in the ratio segment two times before (S3316). As a result, when a valid base value is stored in the two-previously before base value data 203o, the valid two-before-before base value can be displayed on the base display device 401 to be shown.

Further, when the pre-previous two-time base value data 203n is shifted to the pre-previous two-preceding base value data 203o, if the valid data flag of the pre-previous two-time base value data 203n is "1" (the power is turned on while operating the RAM all erase switch). This applies when the total number of outs reaches 60000 for the third time after all the RAM 203 has been turned on and the initialization has been performed), and the valid data flag of the base value data 203o before and after the shift is "1". It becomes. Therefore, after that, when the base value before two times before is displayed on the base display device 401, the base value stored in the before-before-two times base value data 203o is displayed in the ratio segment as an effective base value. Become.

On the other hand, as a result of the process of S3315, when the valid data flag of the base value data 203o two before two times is 0 (S3315: No), “b2.” is lit and displayed on the identification segment of the base display device 401, A control signal is transmitted to the base display device control circuit 402 so that “−−” is lit and displayed in the ratio segment (S3317). As a result, if a valid base value is not obtained as the two-previously before base value, it is possible to confirm that a valid two-previously before base value is not obtained by the ``---'' displayed in the ratio segment. Can be shown.

When any one of S3307, S3308, S3310, S3311, S3313, S3314, S3316, and S3371 ends, the base value display process ends, as shown in FIG.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the base display device 401 measures the real-time base value (hereinafter, “real-time base value” that is measured in real time during the period until the total out number reaches 60000 pieces). "Base value"), the previous base value measured when the total number of outs reached the last (most recent) 60,000, and the total number of outs one time before (previously) reached 60000. The pre-two-preceding base value measured when the total number of outs reaches 60000 one before the pre-preceding (previously pre-preceding) times, at predetermined intervals. Is displayed by switching to. In addition to the real-time base value, by displaying the base value for the past multiple times (previous base value, pre-previous time base value, pre-previous time base value), it becomes possible to more accurately determine whether or not there has been cheating, In addition, it is possible to predict to some extent the time when the wrongdoing has occurred.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, every time the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, all segments (including dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 immediately after the power is turned on. Is lit for a predetermined period (5 seconds in this embodiment). Thereby, it is possible to confirm whether all the segments can be normally turned on, and it is possible to easily determine whether or not the display on the base display device 401 is normally performed.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is new to the pachinko machine 10 at the time of a completely new start-up of the pachinko machine 10 in the manufacturing factory, or when the used pachinko machine 10 is moved to another hall as a used table. When starting up, the display of the base display device 401 until the total number of outs reaches the predetermined number (300 in this embodiment) is first displayed in a special display mode different from the normal base value display. .. When the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up, balls may be manually inserted into the respective winning openings to pay out the prize balls in a shipping inspection for confirming the quality of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the base value at this time is significantly different from the actual base value of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up, the display of the base display device 401 until the total number of outs reaches the predetermined number (300 in this embodiment) is referred to as a normal base value display. By displaying in different special display modes, it is possible to show that the base value being displayed is not a regular base value. In addition, it is possible to indicate that the pachinko machine 10 is in a new startup state by performing the display.

In addition, with the same configuration as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to fourth embodiments, the same effect as that obtained by the configuration can be obtained.

<Sixth Embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 of a sixth embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 58. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment to the fifth embodiment, the jackpot probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol is preset in the main controller 110, and the jackpot probability and/or the jackpot probability by a person related to the hall. We made it impossible to change the winning probability of two symbols. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, the jackpot probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol can be set in a plurality of stages (in the present embodiment, set values “1” to “6”) by a hall person or the like. 6 stages). Then, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment changes the setting value of the jackpot probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol (hereinafter referred to as “probability setting value”) (hereinafter referred to as “setting change mode”) or When confirming the probability setting value (hereinafter referred to as “setting confirmation mode”), the probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401 provided in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment. Further, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment is configured such that the base display device 401 can display a history of errors (hereinafter, referred to as “error history”) of errors that occurred in the pachinko machine 10.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the same configurations and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to fifth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the first to fifth embodiments, and The description is omitted.

FIG. 45 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, the base display device 401 is arranged on the main board that constitutes the main controller 110, and as shown in FIG. The display screen of the device 401 is assembled so that it can be seen. On the base display device 401, the base value is normally displayed, while the probability setting value is displayed in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. The base display device 401 is also configured to be able to display an error history.

Further, on the main board constituting the main controller 110, a setting key 501 used for changing a set probability setting value or confirming a set probability setting value, and a base display device 401 are provided. An error display button 502 used when displaying an error history is provided. The setting key 501 and the error display button 502 are provided so as to protrude from the main board through a hole provided in the board box 100, and can be operated by persons related to the hall without opening the board box 100.

Here, the setting key 501 will be described with reference to FIG. 46(a) is a front view of the setting key 501 showing the case where the setting key 501 is in the off state, and FIG. 46(b) is a setting key 501 showing the case where the setting key 501 is in the on state. FIG. The setting key 501 is inserted between the two positions of the off side indicated by “OFF” and the on side indicated by “ON” by inserting a dedicated key into a keyhole provided in the setting key 501. It is configured to be rotatable. The setting key 501 is turned off when it is located on the off side, and is turned on when it is located on the warm side.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the pachinko machine according to the states of the RAM erase switch 122, the setting key 501, and the door opening switch (not shown). The startup mode of the machine 10 is determined. The door opening switch is a switch that detects that the inner frame 12 is unlocked and opened (the door is opened).

FIG. 47 shows a start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10, and a RAM erase switch 122, a setting key 501 and a door opening switch (at the time of power-on of the pachinko machine 10 for starting the pachinko machine 10 in each start-up mode. It is a figure showing each state of (not shown).

As the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10, four modes of a normal mode, a RAM clear mode, a setting change mode, and a setting confirmation mode are prepared. The RAM clear mode is a mode for erasing (clearing) the data stored in the RAM 203 in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state. The setting change mode is a mode for changing the set probability setting value. The setting confirmation mode is a mode for confirming the set probability setting value.

The normal mode is a startup mode other than the RAM clear mode, the setting change mode, and the setting confirmation mode, and when the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 or the data stored in the RAM 203 is corrupted. Except for the above, this is a mode for restarting the game of the pachinko machine 10 from the state before power-off by executing various start-up processes while holding the data stored in the RAM 203.

Then, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on without turning on the RAM erase switch 122 and with the setting key 501 in the off state, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the normal mode. When the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key 501 is in the off state, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the RAM clear mode.

On the other hand, when the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on and the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key 501 is on, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the setting change mode on condition that the door opening switch is on. .. When the setting key 501 is turned on and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 kept off, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the setting confirmation mode on condition that the door opening switch is on.

In this way, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, if the setting key 501 is turned off, a hall person or the like can operate the pachinko machine 10 according to whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. As the start-up mode, it is possible to select either the RAM clear mode or the normal mode which is a start-up mode not related to the probability setting value.

On the other hand, when turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10, if the inner frame 12 is unlocked and opened and the setting key 501 is turned on, a hall person or the like turns on the RAM erasing switch 122. Depending on whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is started up, it is possible to select either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode related to the probability set value.

That is, depending on whether the setting key 501 is in the off state or the on state, it is possible to select a start-up mode that is not related to the probability setting value and a start-up mode that is related to the probability setting value. When the startup mode is set regardless of the probability setting value, either the RAM clear mode or the normal mode can be selected as the startup mode depending on whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. When setting the startup mode that is related to the probability setting value, it is possible to select whether the startup mode is the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode depending on whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on.

Here, when the probability setting value is changed, the jackpot probability in the game and/or the hit probability of the second symbol is changed, so if the game state before power-off is taken over and the game continues, the pachinko machine 10 May not be able to exhibit the predetermined game performance. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 erases (clears) the data stored in the RAM 203 when the probability setting value is changed in the setting change mode. On the other hand, since the setting confirmation mode is a start-up mode for only confirming the probability setting value, the data stored in the RAM 203 is retained (does not clear) so that the game state before power-off can be taken over and the game can be continued. ..

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode in which the data in the RAM 203 is cleared, the inner frame 12 is unlocked and opened, and then the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM is erased. When the pachinko machine 10 is turned on by turning on the switch 122 and the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting confirmation mode in which the data of the RAM 203 is not cleared, the inner frame 12 is unlocked and opened before setting. The power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the key 501 is turned on and the RAM erase switch 122 is kept off.

As described above, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode related to the probability set value, the setting key 501 is turned on before the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. When the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the RAM clear mode or the setting change mode in which the data stored in the RAM 203 is cleared, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is being pressed (while being turned on). In other words, if a person involved in the hall understands the meaning of each start-up mode, he or she can easily understand what kind of operation is required as an operation to the pachinko machine 10 necessary for the start-up mode to be started.

Further, in order to start the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, a dedicated key that can be inserted into the setting key 501 is required, and the key will be managed by the hall. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from arbitrarily checking the probability setting value to search for a pachinko machine 10 having a high jackpot probability and/or a high winning probability, or arbitrarily changing the probability setting value to a high probability. Further, since the RAM erasing switch 122 is usually provided at a position that is not easily touched by the player, it is possible to prevent the player from arbitrarily changing the probability setting value to a high probability in that respect as well.

Further, even if the switch or the like to be operated at the same time is two even when it is started up in the setting operation mode, it can be operated sufficiently with both hands, and thus the operability is good. As described above, a hall person or the like can easily and easily select the startup mode of the pachinko machine 10 by selectively turning on/off the RAM erase switch 122 and the setting key 501.

In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the door opening switch is turned on, that is, the inner frame 12 is opened. That is the condition.

This is because, in order to change or check the probability setting value, it is necessary for a person involved in the hall or the like to visually check the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. This is because 12 needs to be open. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on without opening the inner frame 12 despite the setting key 501 being in the ON state, the setting key 501 does not start in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As in the case of the off state, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is off, the pachinko machine 10 is started in the normal mode, and if the RAM erasing switch 122 is on, the pachinko machine 10 is started in the RAM clear mode. As a result, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on even though the inner frame 12 is closed while the setting key 501 remains in the ON state, and the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the game is played on the pachinko machine 10. It can suppress that it is not started. Moreover, in order to open the inner frame 12, a dedicated key managed by the hall side is required. Therefore, the player arbitrarily opens the inner frame 12 and confirms the probability setting value to search for a pachinko machine 10 having a high jackpot probability and/or a high winning probability, or arbitrarily changing the probability setting value to a high probability. Can be suppressed.

When starting up in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, it is not always a condition that the door opening switch is on when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, that is, the inner frame 12 is opened. You don't have to. That is, when the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key 501 is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 is set to the setting change mode regardless of whether the door opening switch is on. You can launch it at. When the setting key 501 is turned on and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 kept off, the pachinko machine 10 is set in the setting confirmation mode regardless of whether the door opening switch is on or not. You may start it up.

Now, the pachinko machine 10 has a setting change mode and a setting confirmation mode for changing or confirming the probability setting value as one of the start-up modes, but in the present embodiment, changing and confirming the probability setting value. With this setting confirmation mode, it is possible only when the pachinko machine 10 is started up (when the power is on), and the probability setting value cannot be confirmed while the game is in progress. This is for the following reason.

That is, the display of the character ratio such as the base value displayed by the base display device 401, the display of the character ratio, etc., and the display of the value indicating the game performance, the game state, etc., make it possible to detect fraud early. Therefore, in principle, it must be displayed during the game. Therefore, at least while the player is playing the game, the probability setting value cannot be displayed.

If the setting key 501 is turned on so that the probability setting value can be displayed even when the pachinko machine 10 is not started up, that is during the game being played by the player. For example, it is possible to stop the game. However, with the main control device 110, along with stopping the game, it is possible to stop the variation time, but in the third symbol display device 81, the variation effect may be continuously performed, and with the main control device 110, A mismatch may occur between the audio lamp controller 113 and the display controller 114.

When the setting key 501 is turned on so that the probability setting value can be displayed even when the pachinko machine 10 is not started, that is during the game being played by the player. However, it is possible to continue the game as it is and to confirm the probability setting value on the base display device 401, but it is necessary to open the inner frame 12 to confirm the display on the base display device 401. Therefore, it is practically difficult for the player to continue playing the game.

It is also conceivable that after the setting key 501 is turned on, the probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401 after waiting for the completion of all the variation effects including the jackpot and the held amount. However, there are many variation effects that have a long variation time, and some of them may continue for about 5 minutes. In addition, the variation time of the normal symbol is also set to be long in the normal game state, and it takes a long time until all of these holdings are exhausted, so it is difficult to wait until the probability setting value is displayed.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, when it is desired to change or check the probability setting value, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is once turned off, the setting key 501 is turned on, and the pachinko machine 10 is turned on again. As a result, the probability setting value can be displayed on the base display device 401 while the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game, and the probability setting value can be surely changed or confirmed by a person involved in the hall. Moreover, once the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the state before the power is turned off is backed up in the RAM 203, and the startup process is performed without clearing the backed up state. Even if the set value is confirmed, the game can be restarted from the state before the power is cut off.

Further, by limiting the change or confirmation of the probability setting value only when the pachinko machine 10 is started up, it is possible to prevent the player from arbitrarily confirming or changing the probability setting value at the normal time.

FIG. 48A is a diagram showing the roles of the RAM erase switch 122 and the setting key 501 in the setting change mode. Further, FIG. 48B is a diagram showing the role of the setting key 501 in the setting confirmation mode.

As shown in FIG. 48A, when the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on in the setting change mode, the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 is updated. When the setting key 501 is turned off in the setting change mode, the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 at that time is fixed as the probability setting value in the pachinko machine 10.

In the present embodiment, “1” to “6” can be set as the probability setting values, and for each probability setting value (“1” to “6”), a big hit random number value and/or a second value. The winning random number value of the symbol is stored in the ROM 202 in advance. The jackpot probability value and/or the hit probability of the second symbol in the probability setting value are determined by the jackpot random number value and/or the number of hit random number values of the second symbol set for each probability setting value. In this pachinko machine 10, the smaller the probability setting value (closer to 1), the lower the jackpot probability and/or the probability of hitting the second symbol, and the larger the probability setting value (closer to 6), the larger the jackpot probability and/or. Alternatively, for each probability setting value, a big hit random number value and/or a hit random number value of the second symbol is set so that the hit probability of the second symbol becomes a high probability.

In addition, the jackpot random number value and/or the hit random number value of the second symbol is fixed, and for each probability setting value (“1” to “6”), the range of random numbers generated for performing the jackpot lottery and// Alternatively, a range of random numbers generated to perform the winning lottery of the second symbol may be stored in the RAM 203 in advance. The range of jackpot random numbers and/or the range of hit random numbers of the second symbol set for each probability setting value determines the jackpot probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol at that probability setting value.

In the setting change mode, each time the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on, the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 is incremented by one. However, when the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on when the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 is “6”, the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 is updated to “1”. It That is, each time the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed in the setting change mode, the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 loops while incrementing by 1 in the range of "1" to "6".

Then, in the setting change mode, when the setting key 501 is turned off, the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 at that time is fixed as the probability setting value of the pachinko machine 10. Then, after the data of the RAM 203 is cleared, the pachinko machine 10 performs the game control thereafter with the confirmed probability set value, and displays the base value on the base display device 401.

In the setting confirmation mode, as shown in FIG. 48B, when the setting key 501 is turned off, the setting confirmation mode is ended and the base value is displayed instead of the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401. Is displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the display contents of the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode will be described. FIG. 49 is a schematic diagram schematically showing various examples of display contents of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, and FIG. 49(a) is an example thereof.

In the example shown in FIG. 49A, in the case of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, all the segments of the 7-segment display units 401a and 401b forming the identification segment of the base display device 401 are turned off. Further, among the 7-segment displays 401c and 401d that form the ratio segment of the base display device 401, all the segments of the left 7-segment display 401c are turned off, and only the right 7-segment display 401d is used. The probability setting value (1 to 6) is displayed.

As described in the fifth embodiment, when the base value is displayed on the base display device 401, the identification segment includes characters (bL., b1....) for identifying the type of the base value displayed in the ratio segment. ) Is displayed, in the example shown in FIG. 49A, all the segments of the identification segment are turned off in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. As a result, the display state can be clearly differentiated between the case where the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 and the case where the probability setting value is displayed. Therefore, it is displayed on the base display device 401 at a glance. It is possible to grasp whether the stored information is the base value or the probability setting value. When displaying the base value on the base display device 401, the base value is displayed in two digits in the ratio segment. That is, when the base value is, for example, "6", it is displayed as "06" in the ratio segment. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 49(a), in the case of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the probability setting value is displayed using only the 7-segment display 401d on the right side of the ratio segment and the 7th display on the left side is displayed. Since all the segments of the segment display 401c are turned off, even if the identification segment is broken and cannot be turned on, all the segments of the 7-segment display 401c on the left side of the ratio segment are turned off. Thus, it is possible for the persons related to the hall to clearly understand that the information displayed on the base display device 401 is the probability setting value.

FIG. 49B is a schematic diagram showing another example of the display contents of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. In the example shown in FIG. 49(b), in the case of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, in the 7-segment displays 401a and 401b forming the identification segment of the base display device 401, only the middle horizontal bar segment is lit, Turn off the other segments. That is, "---" is displayed on the identification segment. Further, of the 7-segment displays 401c and 401d forming the ratio segment of the base display device 401, also in the left 7-segment display 401c, only the middle horizontal bar segment is turned on and the other segments are turned off. That is, "-" is also displayed in the segment. Then, the probability setting values (1 to 6) are displayed using only the 7-segment display 401d on the right side of the ratio segment.

This also makes it possible to clearly differentiate the display state of the identification segment between the case where the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 and the case where the probability setting value is displayed. It is possible to grasp whether the information displayed in 401 is the base value or the probability setting value. Further, in the case of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the probability setting value is displayed using only the 7-segment display 401d on the right side of the ratio segment, and "-" is displayed on the 7-segment display 401c on the left side. Therefore, even if the identification segment is broken and cannot be lit, the information displayed on the base display device 401 is confirmed to be the probability set value by looking at the display on the 7-segment display 401c on the left side of the ratio segment. It is possible to make people in the hall understand clearly.

FIG. 49(c-1) is a schematic diagram showing another example of the display contents of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode, and FIG. 49(c-2) is a display of the base display device 401 in the setting confirmation mode. It is a schematic diagram which showed another example of the content. In this example, the display contents are changed even in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Specifically, the identification segment turns off all the segments of the 7-segment displays 401a and 401b constituting the identification segment as in the case of FIG. 49(a). On the other hand, the ratio segment displays “H” indicating the setting change mode or “C” indicating the setting confirmation mode on the left 7-segment display unit 401c among the 7-segment display units 401c and 401d constituting the ratio segment. , Probability setting values (1 to 6) are displayed on the right 7-segment display 401d.

This also makes it possible to clearly differentiate the display state of the identification segment between the case where the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 and the case where the probability setting value is displayed. It is possible to grasp whether the information displayed in 401 is the base value or the probability setting value.

When displaying the base value on the base display device 401, the base value is displayed in two digits in the ratio segment. That is, when the base value is, for example, "6", it is displayed as "06" in the ratio segment. On the other hand, in the examples shown in FIGS. 49(c-1) and (c-2), in the case of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the probability setting is performed using only the 7-segment display 401d on the right side of the ratio segment. A value is displayed, and the 7-segment display 401c on the left side displays "H" in the setting change mode and "C" in the setting confirmation mode. As a result, even if the identification segment is broken and cannot be lighted, “H” or “C” different from the number is displayed on the 7-segment display 401c on the left side of the ratio segment. It is possible for the persons involved in the hall and the like to clearly understand that the information displayed in is the probability setting value.

In addition, by displaying different display contents on the 7-segment display 401c on the left side of the ratio segment in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, it is possible to clearly indicate whether it is currently in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. be able to.

FIG. 49(d-1) is a schematic diagram showing another example of the display contents of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode, and FIG. 49(d-2) is a display of the base display device 401 in the setting confirmation mode. It is a schematic diagram which showed another example of the content. Also in this example, the display contents are changed between the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, as in FIGS. 49(c-1) and (c-2). Specifically, the identification segment turns on only the middle horizontal bar segment and turns off the other segments in the 7-segment displays 401a and 401b constituting the identification segment, as in FIG. 49(b). That is, "---" is displayed on the identification segment. On the other hand, in the ratio segment, the 7-segment display units 401c and 401d constituting the ratio segment are set in the left 7-segment display unit 401c in the same setting change mode as in FIGS. 49(c-1) and (c-2). “H” shown or “C” showing the setting confirmation mode is displayed, and the probability setting value (1 to 6) is displayed on the 7-segment display 401d on the right side.

This also makes it possible to clearly differentiate the display state of the identification segment between the case where the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 and the case where the probability setting value is displayed. It is possible to grasp whether the information displayed in 401 is the base value or the probability setting value. Even if the identification segment is broken and cannot be lit, the 7-segment display 401c on the left side of the ratio segment displays "H" or "C", which is different from the numbers, on the base display device 401. It is possible for the persons related to the hall to clearly understand that the displayed information is the probability setting value. In addition, by displaying different display contents on the 7-segment display 401c on the left side of the ratio segment in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, it is possible to clearly indicate whether it is currently in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. be able to.

FIG. 49(e-1) is a schematic diagram showing another example of the display contents of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode, and FIG. 49(e-2) is a display of the base display device 401 in the setting confirmation mode. It is a schematic diagram which showed another example of the content. In this example as well, the display contents are changed between the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, but the display contents are changed by the identification segment. Therefore, in FIG. 49(c-1) and (c-2), This is different from the example and the examples in FIGS. 49(d-1) and (d-2). Specifically, on the 7-segment displays 401a and 401b forming the identification segment, "SH." is displayed in the setting change mode, and "SC." is displayed in the setting confirmation mode. On the other hand, the ratio segment turns off all the segments of the left 7-segment display 401c and displays the probability setting values (1 to 6) using only the right 7-segment display 401d.

As described above, when the base value is displayed on the base display device 401, characters (bL., b1..., etc.) for identifying the type of the base value displayed in the ratio segment are displayed in the identification segment. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 49A, “SH.” indicating the setting change mode is displayed in the setting change mode, and “SC.” indicating the setting confirmation mode is displayed in the setting check mode. .. In this way, as the display content displayed in the identification segment, the base value is displayed and the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode have different display contents, so that they can be clearly differentiated. Therefore, at a glance, it is possible to grasp whether the information displayed on the base display device 401 is the base value or the probability setting value. Further, by displaying different display contents on the identification segment in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, it is possible to clearly indicate whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is currently set.

Further, when the base value is displayed on the base display device 401, the base value is displayed in two digits on the ratio segment, while in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the 7-segment display on the right side of the ratio segment is displayed. Since only 401d is used to display the probability setting value and all the segments of the left 7-segment display 401c are extinguished, even if the identification segment is broken and cannot be lighted, the 7th segment on the left side of the ratio segment is displayed. By seeing that all the segments of the segment display 401c are turned off, it is clearly shown to the hall-related persons that the information displayed on the base display device 401 is not the base value but the probability setting value. Can be grasped.

Returning to FIG. 45, the description will be continued. The error display button 502 is a button for displaying an error history on the base display device 401. As described above, the base display device 401 can display the error history, which is the history of errors that have occurred in the pachinko machine 10. The display of the error history is displayed on the base display device 401 only while the error display button 502 is being pressed. That is, the base value continues to be displayed on the base display device 401 unless the error display button 502 is pressed.

Illegal actions such as impacting the pachinko machine 10 or moving a magnet closer to it, changing the direction of flow of the ball, causing the ball to win various prize holes, and intentionally obtaining prize balls or performing a jackpot lottery. There is a case where an act or a fraudulent act of passing a ball to the through gate 67 and intentionally performing a winning lottery for a normal symbol is performed. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 is configured so as to be able to detect an impact and the approach of a magnet, and when these are detected, the game is stopped as a serious error. At this time, the base display device 401 continues to display the base value instead of displaying the error history.

If it is configured that the error type is displayed on the base display device 401 when a serious error is detected, the base display device 401 may be the one who has made an illegal act such that the base value is changed. In order to hide the base value displayed on the screen, the pachinko machine 10 is intentionally shocked or a magnet is brought close to cause a serious error, and the base display device 401 displays the error type, and the base value is not displayed. It is conceivable that

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, even if a serious error is detected, by continuing to display the base value on the base display device 401, a person who commits an illegal act such that the base value is changed, It is possible to hide the display of the base value after the fraudulent act, and it is possible to surely find the fraudulent act for the base value.

Then, in the pachinko machine 10, when the error display button 502 is pressed, the error history is displayed on the base display device 401 only during the pressing operation. From the displayed error history, a person concerned with the hall or the like can grasp what kind of error the error occurred in the pachinko machine 10. When the pressing operation of the error display button 502 is released, the base value is displayed again on the base display device 401.

Note that the error history may display only the error type that occurred closest in time. In addition, the error type may be displayed up to a plurality of times (for example, four times) at the maximum, including the error that occurred closest in time. When displaying the error types for a maximum of a plurality of times, the base display device 401 is caused to display the generated time for each predetermined time in order from the closest occurrence time to the current time. In addition, when the error display button 502 is pressed when the error does not occur in the pachinko machine 10 (or when the error record does not remain), an error message is displayed while the pressing operation is being performed. A display indicating that there is no recording may be displayed on the base display device 401, or the base value may be displayed as it is.

In the pachinko machine 10, the error history is displayed on the base display device 401 while the error display button 502 is being pressed, but the error display is displayed when the base value is displayed on the base display device 401. When the button 502 is pressed once, the error history is displayed on the base display device 401, and when the error display button 502 is pressed once when the error history is displayed on the base display device 401, the base display device 401 is displayed. The base value may be redisplayed.

Here, the display contents when the error history is displayed on the base display device 401 will be described with reference to FIG. 50A and 50B are schematic diagrams schematically showing various examples of display contents when the error history is displayed on the base display device 401, and FIG. 50A is an example thereof.

In the example shown in FIG. 50A, when displaying the error history on the base display device 401, all the segments of the 7-segment display devices 401a and 401b forming the identification segment of the base display device 401 are turned off. Further, of the 7-segment displays 401c and 401d that form the ratio segment of the base display device 401, "E" indicating that the error history is displayed is displayed on the 7-segment display 401c on the left side, and the 7-segment display on the right side is displayed. Only the device 401d is used to display the error type as a numerical value. For example, if there is a shock detection error, "1" is displayed as the error type, and if there is a magnet detection error, "2" is displayed as the error type.

As described in the fifth embodiment, when the base value is displayed on the base display device 401, the identification segment includes characters (bL., b1....) for identifying the type of the base value displayed in the ratio segment. ) Is displayed, in the example shown in FIG. 49A, all the segments of the identification segment are turned off in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. As a result, the display state can be clearly differentiated between the case where the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 and the case where the error history is displayed. Therefore, it is displayed on the base display device 401 at a glance. It is possible to grasp whether the information being displayed is a base value or an error history. When displaying the base value on the base display device 401, the base value is displayed in two digits in the ratio segment. That is, when the base value is, for example, "6", it is displayed as "06" in the ratio segment. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 50A, when the error history is displayed on the base display device 401, only the 7-segment display 401d on the right side of the ratio segment is used to display the probability setting value, and the left side is displayed. Since the "E" indicating the display of the error history is displayed on the 7-segment display 401c, the information displayed on the base display device 401 is the error history even if the identification segment is broken and cannot be lighted. It is possible to make people in the hall understand this clearly.

Even when the display contents of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are as shown in FIG. 49(a), FIG. 49(c-1), and (c-2), the error history is based on When displaying on the display device 401, “E” indicating the display of the error history is displayed on the 7-segment display 401c on the left side, so that the probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401 and the error history is displayed. Depending on the case, the display state can be clearly differentiated, and at a glance, it is possible to grasp whether the information displayed on the base display device 401 is the probability setting value or the error history. it can.

On the other hand, the display contents of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are as shown in FIG. 49(b), FIG. 49(d-1), (d-2), FIG. 49(e-1), (e- In the case of 2), the display in the identification segment can be clearly differentiated between displaying the probability setting value and displaying the error history, and it is displayed on the base display device 401 at a glance. It is possible to grasp whether the information that is present is the probability setting value or the error history. Further, when the error history is displayed on the base display device 401, "E" indicating the display of the error history is displayed on the 7-segment display 401c on the left side, so that the identification segment is broken and cannot be lit. Also, it is possible for a person involved in the hall or the like to clearly understand that the information displayed on the base display device 401 is an error history.

FIG. 50B is a schematic diagram showing another example of display contents when the error history is displayed on the base display device 401. In the example shown in FIG. 50(b), when displaying the error history on the base display device 401, in the 7-segment display devices 401a and 401b forming the identification segment of the base display device 401, only the middle horizontal bar segment is turned on. And turn off the other segments. That is, "---" is displayed on the identification segment. Further, of the 7-segment displays 401c and 401d forming the ratio segment of the base display device 401, "E" indicating that the error history is displayed is displayed on the 7-segment display 401c on the left side, and the 7-segment display on the right side is displayed. Only the device 401d is used to display the error type by a numerical value as in the case of FIG.

This also makes it possible to clearly differentiate the display state between the case where the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 and the case where the error history is displayed. It is possible to grasp whether the stored information is the base value or the error history. Further, when the error history is displayed on the base display device 401, the base history is displayed using only the 7-segment display 401d on the right side of the ratio segment, and the error history is displayed on the 7-segment display 401c on the left side. Since "E" is displayed, even if the identification segment is broken and cannot be lit, the information displayed on the base display device 401 is displayed by looking at the display of the 7-segment display 401c on the left side of the ratio segment. It is possible for the persons related to the hall to clearly understand that it is the probability setting value.

Even when the display contents of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are as shown in FIG. 49(b), FIG. 49(d-1), and (d-2), the error history is based on When displaying on the display device 401, “E” indicating the display of the error history is displayed on the 7-segment display 401c on the left side, so that the probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401 and the error history is displayed. Depending on the case, the display state can be clearly differentiated, and at a glance, it is possible to grasp whether the information displayed on the base display device 401 is the probability setting value or the error history. it can.

On the other hand, the display contents of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are as shown in FIG. 49(a), FIG. 49(c-1), (c-2), FIG. 49(e-1), (e- In the case of 2), the display in the identification segment can be clearly differentiated between the case where the probability setting value is displayed and the case where the error history is displayed, and it is displayed on the base display device 401 at a glance. It is possible to grasp whether the information that is present is the probability setting value or the error history. Further, when the error history is displayed on the base display device 401, "E" indicating the display of the error history is displayed on the 7-segment display 401c on the left side, so that the identification segment is broken and cannot be lit. Also, it is possible for a person involved in the hall or the like to clearly understand that the information displayed on the base display device 401 is an error history.

FIG. 50(c-1) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents when an error type that occurs closest in time is displayed as an error history, and FIG. 50(c-2) is an error history. FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents when an error type that occurs second closest in time is displayed. In the examples of FIGS. 50(c-1) and 50(c-2), among the 7-segment displays 401a and 401b forming the identification segment, the left 7-segment display 401a displays “E” indicating the error history display. Is displayed on the right side of the 7-segment display 401b, and a numerical value indicating how close in time the error type to be displayed is related to the generated error is displayed. That is, when the identification segment is displayed as "E1.", it indicates that the error type of the error that occurred closest in time is displayed, and when the identification segment is displayed as "E2." Indicates that the error type of the error that occurred second most closely is displayed. On the other hand, the ratio segment turns off all the segments of the left 7-segment display 401c, and displays the error type using only the right 7-segment display 401d.

In this way, as the display content displayed in the identification segment, the display content is different between when the base value is displayed, when the probability setting value is displayed, and when the error history is displayed, so that each of them can be clearly displayed. Can be differentiated. Therefore, at a glance, it is possible to grasp whether the information displayed on the base display device 401 is the base value, the probability setting value, or the error history. In addition, in the identification segment, by displaying a numerical value that indicates how closely the error type to be displayed is related to the error that occurred in time, the displayed error type is closest in time. It is possible to clearly indicate whether or not the error has occurred.

When displaying the base value on the base display device 401, the base value is displayed in two digits on the ratio segment, while when displaying the error history on the base display device 401, the seven segments on the right side of the ratio segment are displayed. Since the error type is displayed using only the display 401d and all the segments of the left 7-segment display 401c are turned off, even if the identification segment is broken and cannot be turned on, the left side of the ratio segment is displayed. By seeing that all the segments of the 7-segment display 401c are turned off, it is possible to clearly inform the hall personnel etc. that the information displayed on the base display device 401 is not at least the base value. it can. Then, from the situation such as when the pachinko machine 10 is not started up or when the error display button 502 is pressed, it is possible to inform the person concerned with the hall that the information displayed on the base display device 401 is an error history. Can be easily grasped.

Next, referring to FIG. 51, in the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37, the base display device 401 displays the probability setting value in the setting change mode (hereinafter referred to as “setting changing display”). The display mode shown and the display mode showing that the probability setting value is displayed in the setting confirmation mode (hereinafter, referred to as “setting confirmation display”) will be described.

First, FIG. 51( a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the LED 37 a of the first symbol display device 37. A plurality of LEDs 37a are provided as described above in the description of the first embodiment. Depending on the lighting state of the plurality of LEDs 37a, a variable display is performed, a symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery is displayed after the variable display, and a holding class is set. To show. Further, the LED 37a includes seven round number notification LEDs 37a1 (first round number notification LED to seventh round number notification LED) for notifying the maximum number of rounds in the case of a big hit.

The pachinko machine 10 uses the number-of-rounds notification LED 37a1 to light the number-of-rounds notification LED 37a1 in a lighting pattern different from the notification of the maximum number-of-rounds so that the setting change display is being performed or the setting is being confirmed. Notify that the display is being performed.

FIG. 51B shows a lighting pattern for notifying that the maximum number of rounds is 2 and a lighting pattern for notifying that the maximum number of rounds is 15 on the number-of-rounds notification LED 37a1, and the setting is being changed. It is the figure which showed the lighting pattern when notifying that it is a display and the lighting pattern when notifying that it is a setting confirmation display.

The lighting pattern of the round number notification LED 37a1 when notifying that the maximum round number is 2 is as follows: the first round number notification LED is "off", the second round number notification LED is "off", and the third round number notification LED. Is “OFF”, the fourth round number notification LED is “OFF”, the fifth round number notification LED is “ON”, the sixth round number notification LED is “ON”, and the seventh round number notification LED is “ON”. ..

The lighting pattern of the round number notification LED 37a1 when notifying that the maximum round number is 15 is as follows: the first round number notification LED is "on", the second round number notification LED is "on", and the third round number notification LED. Is "ON", the fourth round number notification LED is "ON", the fifth round number notification LED is "OFF", the sixth round number notification LED is "OFF", and the seventh round number notification LED is "OFF". ..

The lighting pattern of the round number notification LED 37a1 when notifying that the setting is being changed is as follows: the first round number notification LED is “ON”, the second round number notification LED is “OFF”, and the third round number notification LED is “ON”, the fourth round number notification LED is “ON”, the fifth round number notification LED is “ON”, the sixth round number notification LED is “OFF”, and the seventh round number notification LED is “ON”.

The lighting pattern of the round number notification LED 37a1 in the case of notifying that the setting confirmation display is being performed is as follows: “On”, the fourth round number notification LED is “off”, the fifth round number notification LED is “on”, the sixth round number notification LED is “off”, and the seventh round number notification LED is “on”.

In addition, in the present embodiment, not only the maximum number of rounds at the time of jackpot is notified using the number-of-rounds notification LED 37a1, but also the setting change is being displayed or the setting is being confirmed by a lighting pattern different from the lighting pattern used in those notifications. Although the case of notifying that the display is being performed has been described, an LED other than the round number notification LED 37a1, such as an LED for notifying the big hit symbol or an LED for notifying the hit symbol, or the entire LED 37a is used. It may be configured to notify that the setting change display or the setting confirmation display is being performed by using a lighting pattern that is not used in the notification. With this, without changing the hardware configuration of the first symbol display device 37, it is possible to notify the setting change display or the setting confirmation display on the first symbol display device 37 only by controlling the software.

Next, with reference to FIG. 52, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 52 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment in that the setting key 501 and the error display button 502 are connected to the input/output port 205 of the main controller 110. The impact detection sensor 503 and the magnetic sensor 504 are connected to the input/output port 215 of the payout control device 111. Further, the point that an error detection signal is output from the payout controller 111 to the main controller 110 is also different from the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment.

The setting key 501 outputs a signal indicating whether it is in an off state or an on state to the main control device 110. The main controller 110 grasps the state of the setting key 501 during the startup process executed when the power is turned on, and outputs from the RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The start-up mode is determined based on the conditions shown in FIG. 47 by grasping the contents of the RAM erase signal SG2 and the signal output from the door opening switch.

The error display button 502 outputs a signal indicating the presence/absence of a pressing operation to the main control device 110. The main control device 110 determines whether or not the error display button 502 has been pressed based on the signal output from the error display button 502, and displays the error history on the base display device 401 while the pressing operation is being performed.

The shock detection sensor 503 is a sensor for detecting that a shock has been applied to the pachinko machine 10. The magnetic sensor 504 is a sensor for detecting that a magnet is brought close to the pachinko machine 10.

When the impact detection sensor 503 detects that the pachinko machine 10 is impacted, the payout control device 111 causes the pachinko machine 10 to be impacted by a fraudulent person, and the falling direction of the ball is illegally changed. In order to determine that there is a possibility that a serious error has occurred, the firing control device 112 is instructed to stop firing the ball, and the main control device 110 is notified of the occurrence of the error. Output an error detection signal.

Further, when the magnetic sensor 504 detects that the magnet is brought close to the pachinko machine 10, the payout control device 111 causes the fraudulent person to bring the magnet close to the pachinko machine 10 and illegally changes the flow direction of the ball. In order to notify the main controller 110 of the occurrence of a serious error, the launch controller 112 is instructed to stop firing the ball, and the main controller 110 is notified of the occurrence of the error. The error detection signal of is output.

When the main control device 110 receives the error detection signal from the payout control device 111, it stops the progress of the game. As a result, when there is a possibility that a serious error has occurred, the game in the pachinko machine 10 can be stopped. Further, the main control device 110 indicates the error type (whether it is a shock detection error or a magnet detection error) notified by the error detection signal received from the payout control device 111 by the error data 203t of the RAM 203 described later (see FIG. 53). ). When the error display button 502 is pressed, the error history is displayed on the base display device 401 based on the error type stored in the error data 203t.

FIG. 53 is a schematic diagram schematically showing data stored in the outer work area 203y1 of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. At least the base value data 203r, the accessory ratio data 203s, and the error data 203t are stored in the outside work area 203y1.

The base value data 203r is data necessary for calculating the base value and displaying the calculated base value on the base display device 401. For example, the total out number counter shown in FIG. 203j, low-probability payout number counter 203k, real-time base value data 203l, previous base value data 203m, two-preceding base value data 203n, two-preceding base value data 203o, new start-up flag 203p, and the like.

The character ratio data 203s is data necessary for calculating the character ratio and displaying the calculated character ratio on the base display device 401, and for example, the start 1 counter 263a shown in FIG. , Start 2 counter 263b, ordinary 1 counter 263c, ordinary 2 counter 263d, special winning opening counter 263e, out counter 263f, character ratio data 264a, data equivalent to continuous character ratio data 264b or similar data. ..

The error data 203t is data indicating the error type of the error that has occurred in the pachinko machine 10. When the error detection signal is received from the payout control device 111, the error type indicated by the error detection signal is stored as the error data 203t. When the error display button 502 is pressed, an error history is displayed on the base display device 401 based on the error type stored in the error data 203t.

Here, when the error history displayed on the base display device 401 is only the error type that occurs closest in time, only the latest error type is always stored in the error data 203t. Specifically, when the main control device 110 receives the error detection signal from the payout control device 111, the main control device 110 overwrites the error data 203t with the error type indicated by the error detection signal. As a result, the base display device 401 always stores only the latest error type, and the error history displayed on the base display device 401 displays only the error type that occurs closest in time.

On the other hand, in the case where the error history displayed on the base display device 401 is set to display the error types up to a plurality of times (for example, four times), including the error that occurred closest in time, going back from the error. In the error data 203t, a plurality of times are stored in order from the closest occurrence time to the present time.

For example, the error data 203t stores the error types that occurred closest in time so that the error data 203t stores four types of error types in order from the closest occurrence time to the current time. The first error type data to be stored, the second error type data to store the error type that occurred second closest in time, and the third error type that stores the error type that occurred third closest to time It has data and fourth error type data that stores an error type that occurs fourth closest in time. When the main controller 110 receives the error detection signal from the payout controller 111, the main controller 110 shifts the third error type data to the fourth error type data, the second error type data to the third error type data, and the The one error type data is shifted to the second error type data, and the error type indicated by the received error detection signal is stored as the first error type data. As a result, the error data 203t stores four types of error types in order from the closest occurrence time to the current time, and the base display device 401 includes the error that occurred closest in time. A maximum of a plurality of times (for example, four times) of error types can be traced back from the error. Further, in this case, if the address of each error type data is assigned so that the shift process of each error type data can be performed by one LDIR instruction, the shift process can be performed by only one LDIR instruction. ..

In addition, in the case where the error history displayed on the base display device 401 is set to display the error types up to a plurality of times (for example, four times), including the error that occurred closest in time, and going back from the error. The error data 203t may be configured by a FIFO (First In First Out) type ring buffer, and the error types for a plurality of times may be stored. In this case, when the main control device 110 receives the error detection signal from the payout control device 111, the main control device 110 may update the address (ring buffer pointer) that stores the error type.

Here, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the RAM clear mode, at least the base value data 203r, the accessory ratio data 203s, and the error data 203t are retained without being erased. To do. As a result, even if the RAM erasing switch 122 is turned on, the base value data 203r, the accessory ratio data 203s, and the error data 203t cannot be erased, so that these are displayed on the base display device 401. You can Therefore, even if the fraudulent person turns on the RAM erasing switch 122 in an attempt to conceal the fraudulent activity, it is possible to prevent the evidence from being concealed.

Also, the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode and the data in the RAM 203 is deleted even when the probability setting value is changed, but the base value data 203r and the error data 203t are deleted. Instead, keep it. As a result, even if the dishonest person changes the probability setting value in an attempt to conceal the dishonest act, it is possible to prevent the evidence from being concealed. On the other hand, the accessory ratio data 203s is deleted during the deletion of the data in the RAM 203 performed after the probability setting value is changed. This is because if the probability setting value is changed, the character ratio also changes. Therefore, if the character ratio data 203s based on the probability setting value before the change remains, the character ratio based on the changed probability setting value remains. This is because the product ratio cannot be calculated correctly. On the other hand, since the base value does not change even if the probability setting value is changed, the base value data 203r is held, and the past base value and information necessary for calculating the base value are held. By setting it, it is possible to detect the illegal acts performed in the past without being hidden.

As described above, when the data in the RAM 203 is erased after the probability setting value is changed, some of the data related to the display on the base display device 401 is not erased and is retained, and the remaining data is retained. By erasing the data, the data can be retained or erased according to the actual condition of each data.

Further, in the outside work area 203y1, it is divided into an area to be erased by erasing the data of the RAM 203 after the change of the probability setting value and an area to be retained without erasing, and the character ratio to the area to be erased. The base value data 203r and the error data 203t may be stored in an area for storing the use data 203s without erasing. As a result, the data including the accessory ratio data 203s stored in the area to be erased can be easily erased by erasing the data in the RAM 203 after the probability setting value is changed, and the data can be erased. Instead, the data including the base value data 203r and the error data 203t stored in the area to be retained can be surely retained by erasing the data in the RAM 203 after the probability setting value is changed. it can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 54, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment is powered on will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on.

In this start-up process, first, an initial value setting process associated with power-on is executed (S4001). For example, the access permission to the RAM 203 is set, and the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value.

Next, an internal function register setting process is executed (S4002). In the present embodiment, the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58) that performs the main control of the game is executed with a timer interrupt (hereinafter referred to as "4 ms timer interrupt") generated every 4 ms as a trigger, and the base The base display control process (see FIG. 57) for controlling the display contents displayed on the display device 401 is executed with a timer interrupt (hereinafter referred to as “2 millisecond timer interrupt”) generated every 2 milliseconds. In the processing of S4002, for example, these 4 millisecond timer interrupt and 2 millisecond timer interrupt are permitted. Further, when a random number value necessary for performing the big hit lottery or the lottery lottery is generated by the random number generation circuit (not shown) provided in the main control device 110, in the process of S4002, the range of the generated random number value ( Maximum value).

In particular, by enabling the 2 millisecond timer interrupt in this internal function register setting processing, a 2 millisecond timer interrupt is generated every 2 milliseconds and the base display control processing is executed. Then, when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the probability setting value can be displayed on the base display device 401.

In the process of S4002, it is not always necessary to permit the 4-millisecond timer interrupt and set the range (maximum value) of the random number value. In the process of S4002, if the 4-millisecond timer interrupt is not permitted or/and the range (maximum value) of the random number value is not set, the other processes described below that are executed at the stage of transition from the startup process to the main process are performed. In the raising process (S4013), the 4-millisecond timer interrupt not performed in the process of S4002 may be permitted and/or the range (maximum value) of the random number value may be set.

Next, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S4003), and if it is turned on (S4003: Yes), it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is on and the door opening switch is on. Is determined (S4004). If an affirmative judgment is made in the processing of S4004 (S4004: Yes), the RAM erase switch 122 is on, the setting key 501 is on, and the door open switch is on. Therefore, as shown in FIG. The startup mode is set to the setting change mode, and the setting change process is executed (S4005).

Here, details of the setting change process (S4005) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the setting change processing (S4005). The setting change process (S4005) is a process executed when the start-up mode is the setting change mode, and is a process for accepting and confirming the change of the probability setting value from a person related to the hall or the like.

In the setting change process (S4005), first, the start of displaying the probability setting value on the base display device 401 is set (S4101). With the start setting of the display of the probability setting value, the display of the probability setting value is started on the base display device 401 under the control of the base display control process (see FIG. 57) executed every 2 milliseconds. The display mode at this time is any one of FIGS. 49(a), (b), (c-1), (d-1), and (e-1).

The probability setting value displayed here may be fixed to a specific value without fail. That is, when the start-up mode is changed to the setting change mode, the base display device 401 may always start displaying with a specific probability setting value. The specific probability setting value may be, for example, "1" which is the minimum value of the probability setting values ("1" to "6"), or "3" or "which is an intermediate value of the probability setting values. It may be “4” or may be “6” which is the maximum value of the probability setting values. As a result, regardless of the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off, the hall parties can change the probability setting value from the specific probability setting value.

On the other hand, when the start-up mode is set to the setting change mode, the base display device 401 may start displaying the probability setting value set before the power is turned off. As a result, a hall person or the like can change the probability setting value while considering the probability setting value set before the power is turned off.

Further, when the startup mode is the setting change mode, if the probability setting value set before the power is turned off is 3 or more, the probability setting value is displayed as “3” on the base display device 401. If the probability setting value set before the power is turned off is less than 3, the probability setting value set before the power is turned off may be displayed as it is. Good. For example, when the probability setting value set before the power is turned off is high such as “5” or “6”, there are many cases where it is desired to reduce the probability setting value a little (for example, 1). In such a case, if the probability setting value is displayed without changing the probability setting value set before the power is turned off, the following problems occur. That is, the update of the probability setting value is incremented by 1 each time the RAM erasing switch 122 is turned on, and when the RAM erasing switch 122 is turned on when the probability setting value is "6", the probability setting value is set to " It is done by returning to 1”. Therefore, for example, when it is desired to change the probability setting value from “6” to “5”, the probability setting value has to be substantially rotated once while the RAM erase switch 122 is repeatedly turned on. On the other hand, when the probability setting value set before the power is turned off is high, the probability setting value is started to be displayed as “3” to suppress the number of times the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on and set the probability setting value. The value can be updated.

Next, it is judged whether or not the probability setting value is in the range of "1" to "6" (S4102). If it is not within the predetermined range, that is, if the probability setting value is abnormal (S4102). : No), the probability setting value is changed to the initial value (S4103), and the process proceeds to S4104. The initial value may be "1" which is the minimum value of the probability setting values ("1" to "6") or "3" or "4" which is the intermediate value of the probability setting values. Alternatively, the maximum probability setting value may be “6”. On the other hand, as a result of the process of S4102, when it is determined that the probability setting value is within the range of “1” to “6” (S4102: Yes), the process of S4103 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4104. ..

In the process of S4104, it is determined whether the setting key 501 has been turned off (S4104). In the process of S4104, when it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 transits from the on state to the off state (edge is detected), it is determined that the setting key 501 is in the off state. As will be described later, when the pachinko machine 10 is started without turning on the RAM erasing switch 122, the probability setting value is broken and is within a normal range (range of “1” to “6”). If not, this setting change process is executed, but at this time, the setting key 501 is normally in the OFF state. If it is determined that the setting key 501 is in the off state by detecting that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 is in the off state, the probability setting value is broken and the probability setting value is in the normal range (“1”). If the setting key 501 is in the OFF state even if this setting change process is executed, it is immediately determined to be affirmative in this process of S4104, and as will be described later, probability setting is performed. The value is confirmed and the setting change process ends. Therefore, it is impossible for the persons related to the hall to change the probability setting value. On the other hand, in the process of S4104, if it is determined that the setting key 501 is in the off state when it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has transitioned from the on state to the off state, the hall If a person concerned does not operate the setting key 501 from the OFF state to the ON state and then returns it to the OFF state, an affirmative judgment is not made in the processing of S4104. It can be changed.

In addition, even if the pachinko machine 10 is started up without turning on the RAM erasing switch 122, even if the probability setting value is broken and is not within the normal range (range of “1” to “6”), the setting is performed. When the change processing is not executed (for example, the case where the hall-related persons are urged to restart the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode), the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 is in the off state. It may be determined that the setting key 501 is turned off by detecting that the setting key 501 is in the off state.

As a result of the processing in S4104, when it is determined that the setting key 501 is not in the off state (S4104: No), it is then determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S4105). As a result, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S4105: No), the process returns to S4102, and if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S4105: Yes), the probability setting value Is updated (S4106), and the process returns to S4102. As described above, the update of the probability setting value in the process of S4106 is performed by adding 1 to the probability setting value when the previous probability setting values are “1” to “5” and setting the probability setting up to that point. When the value is "6", the probability setting value is returned to "1". The probability setting value updated by the process of S4106 is displayed on the base display device 401 under the control of the base display control process (see FIG. 57) executed every 2 milliseconds.

The loop process of S4102→S4103→S4104: No→S4105 (and S4106)→S4102 continues to be executed until it is determined by the process of S4104 that the setting key 501 is in the ON state (S4104: Yes). When it is determined by the process of S4104 that the setting key 501 has been turned on (S4104: Yes), the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 is set to the probability setting value used in the game from now on. Is confirmed (S4107). Then, the display of the probability setting value on the base display device 401 is set to end (S4108), and the setting change process ends. By the processing of S4108, the display of the probability setting value on the base display device 401 is ended by the control of the base display control processing (see FIG. 57) executed every 2 milliseconds by the end setting of the display of the probability setting value. The base value is displayed on the base display device 401.

Returning to FIG. 54, the description of the startup processing will be continued. When the setting change process of S4005 is completed, a setting change RAM clear process is then executed (S4006). In this setting change RAM clearing process, of the data stored in the RAM 203, the data used for controlling the game (predetermined data excluding the probability set value stored in the inner work area 203x1) and the character ratio data 203s While erasing (clearing) and, the base value data 203r and the error data 203t are retained without being erased. By deleting the data used for controlling the game (predetermined data excluding the probability setting value stored in the inner work area 203x1), the game is newly started using the newly set probability setting value. You can

Further, as described above, if the probability setting value is changed, the character ratio also changes. Therefore, if the character ratio data 203s based on the probability setting value before the change remains, the probability setting value after the change. It becomes impossible to correctly calculate the character ratio based on. In the setting change RAM clearing process, by deleting the character ratio data 203s, the character ratio based on the changed probability setting value can be calculated correctly.

On the other hand, the base value does not change even if the probability setting value is changed. Therefore, in the setting change RAM clearing process, the base value data 203r is held and the past base value and the base value are calculated. By holding the necessary information, it is possible to detect fraudulent acts performed in the past without being hidden. In addition, by retaining the error data 203t in the setting change RAM clearing process, even if the fraudulent person who has caused the error activates the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode, the error history is recorded. It cannot be erased and it is possible to suppress the concealment of fraudulent activity.

After the processing of S4006, other startup processing is executed (S4013), and the processing shifts to the main processing.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in the process of S4004 (S4004: No), the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on and the setting key 501 is in the off state or the door opening switch is off. When the RAM erase switch 122 is on and the setting key 501 is off, as shown in FIG. 47, the startup mode is set to the RAM clear mode and the normal RAM clear processing is executed (S4007). In addition, even if the RAM erase switch 122 is on and the setting key 501 is on, if the door open switch is off (that is, the inner frame 12 is closed), the startup mode is set. Normal RAM clear processing is executed in the RAM clear mode instead of the change mode (S4007). As a result, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from being powered on and starting in the setting change mode, even though the inner frame 12 is closed with the setting key 501 being in the ON state, and the game is not started in the pachinko machine 10. it can.

In the normal RAM clearing process (S4007), one of the data stored in the RAM 203, which is used for controlling the game (predetermined data excluding the probability setting value stored in the inner work area 203x1), is erased (cleared). The base value data 203r, the accessory ratio data 203s, and the error data 203t are retained without being erased. By deleting the data used for controlling the game (predetermined data excluding the probability setting value stored in the inner work area 203x1), the game can be newly started.

On the other hand, by keeping the base value data 203r, the accessory ratio data 203s, and the error data 203t without erasing them, the RAM erasing switch 122 is turned on to erase the data in the RAM 203. Even if they are broken, these can be displayed on the base display device 401. Therefore, even if a fraudulent person turns on the RAM erasing switch 122 in an attempt to conceal the fraudulent activity, the fraudulent activity can be found from the base value, role ratio, error history, etc. displayed on the base display device 401. ..

After the processing of S4007, other startup processing is executed (S4013), and the processing shifts to the main processing.

As a result of the processing in S4003, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is off (S4003: No), then it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S4008), and the storage is performed. If not (S4008: No), there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off has not been normally completed, and in this case also, the process proceeds to S4007 and the normal RAM clear process is executed (S4007). ..

If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S4008: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated and whether or not the calculated RAM determination value is normal, that is, the calculated RAM determination value is saved when the power is shut off. It is determined whether or not it matches the RAM determination value (S4009). The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. In the present embodiment, the probability setting value stored in the RAM 203 is also used for calculating the checksum value.

If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S4009: No), that is, if the calculated RAM determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the data in the backed up RAM 203 is destroyed. In this case, first, it is determined whether the probability setting value stored in the RAM 203 is within the normal range (range of “1” to “6”) (S4010). If the probability setting value is within the normal range (S4010: Yes), the process proceeds to S4007 and the normal RAM clearing process is executed. Needless to say, the probability setting value is not erased and is retained in the normal RAM clearing process and the setting change RAM clearing process.

On the other hand, if the probability setting value is not within the normal range such as "7" (S4010: No), the process proceeds to S4005, where the setting changing process shown in FIG. Ask the relevant parties to set the probability setting value again. At this time, a display prompting the change of the probability setting value may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or a notification sound or a voice notifying that effect may be output from the voice output device 226. In addition, an external terminal (not shown) provided in main controller 110 may notify hall computer 600 that the probability setting value is not within the normal range. As a result, it is possible to notify the hall-related persons that the probability setting value needs to be reset.

If the calculated RAM determination value is normal as a result of the processing in S4009 (S4009: Yes), then it is determined whether the setting key 501 is in the on state and the door opening switch is on (S4011). If an affirmative judgment is made in the processing of S4011 (S4011: Yes), the RAM erase switch 122 is off, the setting key 501 is on, and the door open switch is on, so as shown in FIG. The startup mode is set to the setting confirmation mode, and the setting confirmation processing is executed (S4012).

Here, details of the setting confirmation process (S4012) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation processing (S4012). The setting confirmation process (S4012) is a process executed when the startup mode is the setting confirmation mode, and is a process for displaying the probability setting value on the base display device 401.

In the setting confirmation process (S4012), first, the start of displaying the probability setting value on the base display device 401 is set (S4201). With the start setting of the display of the probability setting value, the display of the probability setting value is started on the base display device 401 under the control of the base display control process (see FIG. 57) executed every 2 milliseconds. The display mode at this time is any one of FIG. 49(a), (b), (c-2), (d-2), and (e-2).

Next, it is determined whether the setting key 501 is turned off (S4202). In the processing of S4202, when it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has changed from the ON state to the OFF state, it is determined that the setting key 501 has turned into the OFF state. Note that it may be determined that the setting key 501 is in the off state by detecting that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 is in the off state.

If the setting key 501 is not in the off state as a result of the processing in S4202 (S4202: No), S4202 is repeatedly executed and waits until the setting key 501 is in the off state. During this period, the probability setting value is continuously displayed on the base display device 401. When the setting key 501 is turned off (S4202: Yes), the display of the probability setting value on the base display device 401 is set to end (S4203), and the setting confirmation process ends. By the processing of S4203, the display of the probability setting value on the base display device 401 is ended by the control of the base display control processing (see FIG. 57) executed every 2 milliseconds by the end setting of the display of the probability setting value. The base value is displayed on the base display device 401.

The setting confirmation process (S4012) is executed after it is determined whether the RAM determination value (checksum) is normal. This is because, if the RAM determination value is abnormal, the RAM clearing process should be executed before checking the probability setting value. However, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting certainty mode, the setting confirmation process may be executed before the RAM determination value (checksum) is determined to be normal. ..

Returning to FIG. 54, the description of the startup processing will be continued. When the setting confirmation processing of S4012 is completed, other startup processing is executed (S4013), and the process proceeds to the main processing.

When a negative determination is made in the process of S4011 (S4011: No), the RAM erase switch 122 is turned off and the setting key 501 is in the off state or the door opening switch is off. When the RAM erase switch 122 is off and the setting key 501 is off, the startup mode is set to the normal mode as shown in FIG. 47, the setting confirmation process of S4012 is skipped, and the other startup of S4013 is performed. After executing the raising process, the process shifts to the main process. Further, even if the RAM erase switch 122 is off and the setting key 501 is on, if the door opening switch is off (that is, the inner frame 12 is closed), the startup mode is set. The normal mode is set instead of the confirmation mode, the setting confirmation process of S4012 is skipped, the other startup process of S4013 is executed, and then the process proceeds to the main process. As a result, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from being powered on and starting in the setting confirmation mode, even though the inner frame 12 is closed while the setting key 501 remains in the ON state, and the game is not started in the pachinko machine 10. it can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 57, a base display control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described. As described above, this base display control process is a process for controlling the display content displayed on the base display device 401, and is executed with a 2-millisecond timer interrupt occurring every 2msec as a trigger.

In the base display control process, first, the base display device control circuit 402 executes various setting processes for controlling the display of the base display device 401 (S4301). Then, it is determined whether or not the setting of the probability setting value in the setting change mode is being changed (S4302). If it is determined that the setting is being changed (S4302: Yes), the probability setting value being changed is set. The included setting change segment data is set as segment data (S4303), the segment data is output to the base display device control circuit 402 (S4309), and the base display control process is ended. Accordingly, the probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401 in any one of the display modes of FIGS. 49(a), (b), (c-1), (d-1), and (e-1). It

As a result of the processing in S4302, if it is determined that the setting is not being changed (S4302: No), then it is determined whether the setting of the probability setting value in the setting confirmation mode is being confirmed (S4304). As a result, when it is determined that the setting is being confirmed (S4304: Yes), the setting confirmation segment data including the probability setting value during the configuration confirmation is set as the segment data (S4305), and the segment display data is controlled by the base display device control circuit. This is output to 402 (S4309), and this base display control processing is ended. Accordingly, the probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401 in any one of the display modes of FIGS. 49(a), (b), (c-2), (d-2), and (e-2). It

As a result of the processing in S4304, if it is determined that the setting confirmation is not in progress (S4304: No), then it is determined whether or not the error history based on the pressing operation of the error display button 502 is being displayed ( S4306). As a result, when it is determined that the error history is being displayed (S4306: Yes), the error history segment data including the error type is set as the segment data (S4307), and the segment data is output to the base display device control circuit 402. (S4309), the base display control process is ended. As a result, the error history is displayed on the base display device 401 in any one of the display modes of FIGS. 50(a), (b), (c-1), and (c-2).

As a result of the processing in S4306, when it is determined that the error history is not being displayed (S4306: No), the segment data for normal game including the base value or the accessory ratio is set as segment data (S4308), and the segment data is displayed as the base. The data is output to the device control circuit 402 (S4309), and this base display control processing is ended. As a result, in normal times, the base display device 401 displays the base value or the accessory ratio.

Next, with reference to FIG. 58, a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing. As described above, this timer interrupt process is a process that performs the main control of the game, and is executed with the 4-millisecond timer interrupt that occurs every 4ms as a trigger.

In the timer interrupt process, first, it is determined whether the probability setting value is within the normal range (“1” to “6”) (S4401). Every time the timer interrupt process is executed, it is determined whether the probability setting value is within the normal range, so that even if the probability setting value is destroyed for some reason, it will be discovered early. can do.

As a result of the processing in S4401, if the probability setting value is within the normal range (S4401: Yes), the normal game processing for performing the main control of the game is executed (S4402), and then the character ratio is calculated and the base is calculated. A ratio processing (base processing) for performing processing for managing information about a character ratio and a base value such as calculation of a value is executed (S4403), and the timer interrupt processing ends.

In the game process (S4402), for example, processes such as S101 to S111 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 described in the first embodiment are executed. That is, the main control of the game includes lottery for big hits, setting of variable display, opening/closing control of the big winning opening (large opening mouth) 65a at the time of big hit, and lottery for winning the second symbol display device 83. .. The MPU 201 uses the use area inner area 203x (the inner work area 203x1 and the inner stack area 203x2) in the RAM 203 while executing the processing of S4402. On the other hand, the MPU 201 uses the use area outside area 203y (the outside work area 203y1 and the outside stack area 203y2) in the RAM 203 while executing the processing of S4403.

At this time, in the processing of S4403, as described in the third embodiment, from the game processing that mainly controls the game using the area-in-use area 203x, the ratio of the role object using the area 203y outside the-use area and the base When shifting to the processing related to the value, among the registers 200 provided in the MPU 201, the registers 200 used in the processing related to the accessory ratio are individually saved to the outside work area 203y1 of the RAM 203, and the ratio processing and After execution of the processing relating to the base processing, when the processing relating to the character ratio using the area outside the use area 203y shifts to (returns to) the game processing for performing the main control of the game using the area inside the use area 203x, the outside The registers 200 saved in the work area 203y1 may be individually restored.

Further, as described in the fourth embodiment, during the process of using the in-use-area area 203x, the process of executing the process related to the accessory ratio or the base value using the out-of-use-area area 203y is changed to the CALL command. In the step of reading out by using the CALL instruction, the register 200 used in the processing relating to the character ratio or the base value may be individually cleared to 0 and the processing for executing the processing relating to the character ratio or the base value may be read by the CALL instruction. .. Then, at the stage of ending the process of using the outside-use-area area 203y read by the CALL instruction and returning to the processing of using the inside-use-area area 203x, the registers 200 used in the processing regarding the accessory ratio are individually set. Alternatively, after clearing to 0, the processing may return to the ratio processing (base processing).

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S4401, if the probability setting value is not within the predetermined range (S4401: No), the notification command is set (S4404) without setting the game processing (S4402), and the notification command is issued. It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In response to the notification command, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs, from the voice output device 226, a notification sound or a voice prompting the hall-related persons to restart the pachinko machine 10 and change the probability setting value. Or, it outputs a command for causing the third symbol display device 81 to perform a display prompting the hall-related person to be called, to the display control device 114. In addition, an external terminal (not shown) provided in main controller 110 may notify hall computer 600 that the probability setting value is not within the normal range. As a result, the hall-related person or the like restarts the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode to perform the process of changing the probability setting value.

Further, following the processing of S4404, a ball firing stop instruction is issued to the payout control device 111 (S4405). As a result, the firing of the ball is stopped. After the processing of S4405, the timer interrupt processing ends. While the probability setting value is not within the normal range (S4401: No), the game process (S4402) is not executed even if the timer interrupt process is executed every 4 milliseconds, so the game is not executed. Completely stopped. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by the fact that the game is continuously played with the abnormal probability setting value.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the startup regardless of the probability setting value is performed depending on whether the setting key 501 is in the off state or the on state. A mode and a start-up mode related to the probability setting value can be selected. When the startup mode is set regardless of the probability setting value, either the RAM clear mode or the normal mode can be selected as the startup mode depending on whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. When setting the startup mode that is related to the probability setting value, it is possible to select whether the startup mode is the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode depending on whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. Accordingly, if the hall-related persons understand the meaning of each launch mode, they can easily understand what kind of operation is required for the pachinko machine 10 required for the launch mode to be started. ..

In addition, the effects described above can be obtained by the configuration referred to in the description of the sixth embodiment. Further, with the same configuration as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to fifth embodiments, the same effect as that obtained by the configuration can be obtained.

<Seventh Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 59, a pachinko machine 10 of a seventh embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described. In the fifth embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode, it is detected that the probability setting value is updated by turning on the RAM erasing switch 122 and the setting key 501 is turned off. The case where the probability setting value is determined when the above is performed has been described. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode, the probability setting value is updated by turning on the setting change switch (not shown). The probability setting value is fixed by turning on the RAM erasing switch 122.

Here, the setting change switch is a switch for updating the probability set value by being operated in the setting change mode, and like the error display button 502, the setting change switch is provided through the hole provided in the board box 100 to the main board. It is provided so as to project further, and can be operated by a person concerned in the hall or the like without opening the substrate box 100. The setting change switch normally outputs an off signal, and outputs an on signal by pressing all of them.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment will be described focusing on the points different from the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, the same configurations and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to sixth embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals as those of the first to sixth embodiments, and The description is omitted.

FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the setting change process (S4005) executed in the startup process (see FIG. 54) by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 according to the seventh embodiment. Similar to the sixth embodiment, the setting change process (S4005) is a process executed when the startup mode is the setting change mode, and accepts and confirms the change of the probability setting value from the hall-related person or the like. This is processing for.

In the setting change process according to the seventh embodiment, first, the same processes of S4101 to S4103 as in the sixth embodiment are executed, and then it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S4111). As a result, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S4111: No), then it is determined whether the setting change switch is turned on (S4112).

As a result, if it is determined that the setting change switch is not turned on (S4112: No), the process returns to S4102, and if it is determined that the setting change switch is turned on (S4112: Yes), the sixth embodiment The probability setting value is updated by the same method as S4106 (see FIG. 55) (S4106), and the process returns to S4102. The probability setting value updated by the process of S4106 is displayed on the base display device 401 under the control of the base display control process (see FIG. 57) executed every 2 milliseconds.

The loop process of S4102→S4103→S4111: No→S4112 (and S4106)→S4102 continues to be executed until it is determined by the process of S4111 that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S4111: Yes). When it is determined by the processing of S4111 that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S4111: Yes), the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 is set to the probability setting value used in the game from now on. Is confirmed (S4107). When the probability setting value is confirmed, the data in the RAM 203 is erased (cleared) as described above in the sixth embodiment. Therefore, by turning on the RAM erasing switch 122 to confirm the probability setting value, it is possible for the person concerned with the hall to strongly recognize that the data in the RAM 203 will be erased thereafter.

After the processing of S4107, it is next determined whether or not the setting key 501 has been turned on (S4113). In the processing of S4113, when it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has changed from the on state to the off state, it may be determined that the setting key 501 has turned off. It may be determined that the setting key 501 is in the off state by detecting that the level of the signal output from is in the off state.

As a result of the processing of S4113, while it is determined that the setting key 501 is not in the off state (S4113: No), the processing of S4113 is repeatedly executed. When it is determined that the setting key 501 is in the off state as a result of the processing in S4113 (S4113: Yes), the display end of the probability setting value on the base display device 401 is set (S4108), and the setting change processing is performed. To finish. By the processing of S4108, the display of the probability setting value on the base display device 401 is ended by the control of the base display control processing (see FIG. 57) executed every 2 milliseconds by the end setting of the display of the probability setting value. The base value is displayed on the base display device 401.

As described above, the effects described above can be obtained by the configuration referred to in the description of the seventh embodiment. Further, with the same configuration as that of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to sixth embodiments, the same effect as that obtained by the configuration can be obtained.

<Eighth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 66. In the sixth and seventh embodiments, when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode, the probability setting value can be updated, and when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting confirmation mode, the probability setting value can be confirmed. I explained. Further, in the case where the startup mode of the pachinko machine 10 is determined from the normal mode, the RAM clear mode, the setting change mode, and the setting confirmation mode according to the operation states of the RAM erase switch 122 and the setting key 501 when the power is turned on. explained.

Here, when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like during the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, what kind of mode should be started when the power is turned on again becomes a problem. The pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment solves this problem. In addition, in the eighth embodiment, the abnormality of the RAM 203 (hereinafter referred to as “RAM abnormality”), the fact that the setting change processing has been performed, and the fact that the setting confirmation processing has been performed are reported to the hall via the external output terminal 503. Output to the computer 600. Through the hall computer 600, a person involved in the hall can understand a RAM abnormality that has occurred in the pachinko machine 10 and a fact that the setting change processing or the setting confirmation has been performed.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment will be described focusing on the points different from the pachinko machines 10 of the sixth and eighth embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment, the same components and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to seventh embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals as those of the first to seventh embodiments, and The description is omitted.

FIG. 60 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment in that an external output terminal 503 is connected to the input/output port 205 of the main controller 110. The external computer 503 can be connected to the external output terminal 503. The external output terminal 503 is provided so as to project from the main board through a hole provided in the board box 100, and by connecting a connector (not shown) of a wire connected to the hall computer 600 to the external output terminal 503, The signals and data output from the main controller 110 are relayed to the hall computer 600.

FIG. 61 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the data stored in the inner work area 203x1 of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. In this work area 203x1, probability setting value data 203x11, change probability setting value data 203c12, setting change flag 203x13, setting confirmation flag 203x14, RAM abnormality flag 203x15, and RAM erase switch flag 203x16 are stored. At least stored.

The probability setting value data 203x11 is data indicating a probability setting value set (established) in the pachinko machine 10. Also in the present embodiment, as in the sixth and seventh embodiments, it is possible to set probability setting values of "1" to "6", and the respective probability setting values ("1" to "6"). On the other hand, the jackpot random number value and/or the hit random number value of the second symbol is stored in the ROM 202 in advance. The jackpot probability value and/or the hit probability of the second symbol in the probability setting value are determined by the jackpot random number value and/or the number of hit random number values of the second symbol set for each probability setting value. In this pachinko machine 10, the smaller the probability setting value (closer to 1), the lower the jackpot probability and/or the probability of hitting the second symbol, and the larger the probability setting value (closer to 6), the larger the jackpot probability and/or. Alternatively, for each probability setting value, a big hit random number value and/or a hit random number value of the second symbol is set so that the hit probability of the second symbol becomes a high probability.

In the setting change process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 executed when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode, the probability setting value determined by the hall-related person is the probability setting value data 203x11. Stored in. The pachinko machine 10 sets the jackpot random number value and/or the hit random number value of the second symbol corresponding to the probability set value indicated by the probability set value data 203x11 based on the ROM 202, and hits the jackpot lottery or the hit lottery of the second symbol. To execute.

In addition, the jackpot random number value and/or the hit random number value of the second symbol is fixed, and for each probability setting value (“1” to “6”), the range of random numbers generated for performing the jackpot lottery and// Alternatively, a range of random numbers generated to perform the winning lottery of the second symbol may be stored in the RAM 203 in advance. The range of jackpot random numbers and/or the range of hit random numbers of the second symbol set for each probability setting value determines the jackpot probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol at that probability setting value. In this case, the pachinko machine 10 has a range of random numbers generated to perform the jackpot lottery corresponding to the probability setting value indicated by the probability setting value data 203x11 and/or a random number generated to perform the winning lottery of the second symbol. The range is set, and a random number for performing the big hit lottery and/or a random number for performing the hit lottery of the second symbol is generated.

The update probability set value data 203x12 is a probability that the hall related person, etc., updates the probability set value in the setting change process executed when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode. It is data indicating a set value. That is, the above-described probability setting value data 203x11 is data indicating the confirmed probability setting value, whereas the updating probability setting value data 203x12 is updated by a person concerned with the hall or the like before the confirmation in the setting change process. The data is the probability setting value.

Specifically, when the execution of the setting change process is started, first, the probability setting value data 203x11 is saved as the updating probability setting value data 203x12. That is, the probability setting value so far is set in the update probability setting value data 203x12, and the hall related persons etc. are made to update the probability setting value starting from the probability setting value so far. Then, each time the RAM erasing switch 122 that also serves as a switch for updating the probability setting value is turned on, the updating probability setting value data 203x12 is incremented by 1, and the updating probability setting value data 203x12 is "6". At this time, when the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on, the update probability setting value data 203x12 is updated to "1". Then, when the setting key 501 is turned off, the update probability setting value data 203x12 is saved as the probability setting value data 203x11, and the probability setting value updated by the person related to the hall or the like is used in the game from now on. Confirmed as a probability setting value.

Here, in the setting change process, the probability setting value is not updated using the probability setting value data 203x11, but the probability setting value is updated using the updating probability setting value data 203x12 for the following reason. .. That is, if the probability set value is updated using the probability set value data 203x11, if the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like during the setting change process, the probability set value used for the game is deleted by the update. Will be done. Therefore, even if you turn on the power again and start the pachinko machine 10 and try to change the probability setting value from the beginning, the probability setting value used in the game up to that point is gone, so you can do it. Disappear. In this case, the setting change process can be restarted from the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value data 203x11 before the power is turned off, that is, the probability setting value in the middle of the setting change, but the probability setting value that has not been confirmed is saved. There is a risk that the illusion of "may be given to people involved in the hall.

Also, depending on the relationship between the timing when the RAM erasing switch 122 is turned on and the power-off timing, a phenomenon occurs in which the probability setting value data 203x11 is not updated even though the RAM erasing switch 122 is turned on. obtain. In that case, the probability setting value which the person concerned with the hall thought to have updated and the probability setting value saved by the pachinko machine 10 are different from each other, so that the person concerned with the hall may feel distrust.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the probability setting value is updated in the setting changing process, the probability setting value is updated by using the updating probability setting value data 203x12 to update the probability setting value data during the setting process changing. The probability setting value used so far can be stored in 203x11. As a result, even if the power is cut off during the setting change process, in the setting change process to be executed again, the probability setting value remaining as the probability setting value data 203x11 for updating the probability setting value used in the previous game is updated. By storing the probability setting value data 203x12, the probability setting value can be updated again from the beginning. Therefore, a person concerned with the hall or the like can re-update the probability setting work with confidence.

The setting change flag 203x13 is a flag indicating whether or not the setting change process is being executed. The setting change flag 203x13 indicates that the setting change process is being executed when it is on, and indicates that the setting change process is not being executed when it is off. The setting change flag 203x13 is normally set to off. Then, when the execution of the setting change process is started, the setting change flag 203x13 is set to ON. When the probability setting value updated in the setting change process is confirmed and the execution of the setting change process is completed, the setting change flag 203x13 is turned off.

By the way, when the setting change flag 203x13 is ON in the startup process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 when the power is turned on, the setting change process is being executed when the power was last turned off. That is, that is, the power is turned off while updating the probability setting value by the setting changing process. Therefore, in this case, the startup mode of the pachinko machine 10 is partially changed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 62, a startup mode when the power is turned on after the power is turned off during the setting change will be described. FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining a startup mode set corresponding to each startup operation when the power is turned on after the power is turned off during the setting change or the setting confirmation.

As shown in FIG. 62, after the power is turned off during the setting change, a startup operation for booting in the normal mode, that is, the power is turned on with the setting key 501 turned off and the RAM erase switch 122 turned off. When the startup operation is performed, the pachinko machine 10 is started up not in the normal mode but in the setting change mode in which the setting change process is performed again from the beginning (from the beginning).

After the power was turned off during the setting change, a startup operation for booting in the RAM clear mode, that is, a startup operation of turning on the RAM erasing switch 122 with the setting key 501 turned off and turning on the power was performed. In this case, the pachinko machine 10 is started up not in the RAM clear mode but in the setting change mode in which the setting change process is performed again from the beginning (from the beginning).

After the power is turned off during the setting change, a start-up operation for starting in the setting change mode, that is, a start-up operation in which the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on to turn on the power. If so, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode as in the startup operation. Also in this case, the setting change process is performed again from the beginning (from the beginning).

After the power is turned off while the setting is being changed, a startup operation for booting in the setting confirmation mode, that is, a startup operation in which the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned off and the power is turned on. In this case, the pachinko machine 10 is started up not in the setting confirmation mode but in the setting change mode in which the setting change process is performed again from the beginning (from the beginning).

In this way, the start-up mode when the power is turned on after the power is turned off while changing the settings is not limited to the start-up operation for starting in the setting change mode. Even if it is a raising operation, the setting change mode is executed in which the setting change process is performed again from the beginning. As a result, when the power is turned off while the setting is being changed, when the power is turned on after that, it is possible to always cause the hall-related person or the like to change the probability setting value from the beginning. Therefore, the probability setting value can be surely changed by the person concerned with the hall and the change can be confirmed. Therefore, even if the power is turned off while the settings are being changed, hall personnel can reliably update and confirm the probability setting value when the power is turned on again, and the pachinko machine can be used with confidence. The probability setting value for 10 can be changed.

Also, by restarting the setting change process from the beginning (from the beginning), instead of continuing from the probability setting value being updated at the time the power was turned off during the setting change and restarting the updating of the probability setting value, By using the probability setting value (probability setting value data 203x11) used in the game so far, the probability setting value can be updated again from the beginning. Therefore, a person concerned with the hall or the like can re-update the probability setting work with confidence.

Returning to FIG. 61, the description will be continued. The setting confirmation flag 203x14 is a flag indicating whether or not the setting confirmation processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is being executed when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting confirmation mode as the startup mode. is there. The setting confirmation flag 203x14 indicates that the setting confirmation process is being executed when it is on, and indicates that the setting confirmation process is not being executed when it is off. The setting confirmation flag 203x14 is normally set to off. Then, when the execution of the setting confirmation process is started, the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is set to ON, and when the setting confirmation process is completed, the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is turned OFF.

Now, when the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is ON in the startup process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 when the power is turned on, the setting confirmation process is being executed when the power was last turned off. That is, that is, that is, the power is turned off while the probability setting value is being confirmed by the setting confirmation processing. Therefore, in this case, the startup mode of the pachinko machine 10 is partially changed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 62 again, the startup mode when the power is turned on after the power is turned off during the setting confirmation will be described. As shown in FIG. 62, after power is turned off during confirmation of settings, a startup operation for booting in the normal mode, that is, power is turned on with the setting key 501 turned off and the RAM erase switch 122 turned off. When the startup operation is performed, the pachinko machine 10 is started up not in the normal mode but in the setting confirmation mode in which the setting confirmation process is performed again from the beginning (from the beginning). As a result, even if the hall person or the like starts up by the operation in the normal mode after the power is turned off during the setting confirmation, the probability setting value can be confirmed. As a result, the hall-related person or the like can confirm that the probability setting value has not been destroyed due to the power being turned off during the setting confirmation, so that the pachinko machine 10 can be started up with peace of mind.

After the power was turned off while checking the settings, a startup operation for booting in the RAM clear mode, that is, a startup operation of turning on the RAM erase switch 122 with the setting key 501 turned off and turning on the power was performed. In this case, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the RAM clear mode as per the start-up operation by the person involved in the hall. The fact that the RAM erasing switch 122 is turned on indicates that the person concerned with the hall or the like at least clearly wants to clear the RAM. Therefore, in this case, by starting the pachinko machine 10 in the RAM clear mode, it is possible to perform the start-up process according to the intentions of the persons related to the hall.

After the power is turned off while confirming the settings, a startup operation for booting in the setting change mode, that is, a startup operation in which the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on to turn on the power. Also in the case, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode as in the startup operation. Also in this case, the fact that the setting key 501 is in the ON state and the RAM erasing switch 122 is in the ON state indicates that the person concerned with the hall or the like clearly wants to change the probability setting value. Therefore, in this case, by starting the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode, it is possible to perform the start-up process according to the intention of the hall personnel.

After the power is turned off while the setting is being changed, a startup operation for booting in the setting confirmation mode, that is, a startup operation in which the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned off and the power is turned on. Also in the case, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting confirmation mode as in the startup operation. Also in this case, the fact that the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erasing switch 122 is turned on indicates that the person concerned with the hall or the like clearly wants to confirm the probability setting value again. Therefore, in this case, by starting the pachinko machine 10 in the setting check mode in which the setting check process is performed again from the beginning (from the beginning), it is possible to perform the start-up process according to the intentions of the persons related to the hall.

Returning to FIG. 61, the description will be continued. The RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is a flag for indicating that the RAM 203 has an abnormality such as the data stored in the RAM 203 being destroyed. The RAM abnormality flag 203x15 indicates that the RAM 203 has an abnormality when turned on, and indicates that the RAM 203 has no abnormality when turned off.

The RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is normally set to off. Then, in the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 when the power is turned on, the RAM 203 does not have the power-off occurrence information that should have been saved at the previous power failure, or the RAM of the RAM 203. If the judgment value (checksum) is not normal or the probability setting value is not within the normal range (“1” to “6”), it is determined that the RAM 203 is abnormal and the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is set to ON.

When the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is turned on, the RAM abnormality is notified to prompt the restart in the setting change mode, and the hall computer 600 is notified of that fact via the external output terminal 503. The MPU 201 of the control device 110 is put into an infinite loop state. Thereby, the pachinko machine 10 can be restarted in the setting change mode to surely reset the probability set value, and the RAM 203 can be cleared so that the pachinko machine 10 can operate normally. Can be directed to.

The RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is a flag indicating the previous state of the RAM erase switch 122 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. In the present embodiment, the RAM erase switch 122 is used to determine the start-up mode when the pachinko machine 10 is started up, and the probability setting value is set when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode. It is also used when updating. That is, the probability setting value is updated every time the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on.

At this time, when the state of the RAM erasing switch 122 is changed from the off state to the on state, it is determined that the RAM erasing switch 122 is turned on, and the probability setting value is updated. The RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is used to determine whether or not the state of the RAM erase switch 122 has changed from the off state to the on state. That is, when the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 indicating the previous state of the RAM erase switch 122 is off and the RAM erase switch 122 is on, it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 has been turned on. Then, after making that determination, the state of the RAM erase switch 122 at that time is stored in the RAM erase switch flag 203x16.

Here, after the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode, the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is temporarily set to "1" before it is determined whether the state of the RAM erase switch 122 is changed from the off state to the on state. Is set to "on". This is the stage at which it is first determined whether the state of the RAM erase switch 122 has changed from the off state to the on state, and the RAM erase switch is still a startup operation for starting the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode. While 122 may remain on, if the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is turned off at this time, the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is off and the RAM erase switch 122 is on. There is a possibility that the probability setting value may be updated by erroneously determining that the RAM erase switch 122 has been turned on to update the probability setting value. As a result, even though the hall related person or the like does not turn on the RAM erasing switch 122 to update the probability setting value, the probability setting value is updated and the person concerned feels distrust.

On the other hand, after the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode, the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is temporarily set to "1" before it is determined whether the state of the RAM erase switch 122 is changed from the off state to the on state. By setting it to “on”, even if the RAM erase switch 122 is still turned on as a startup operation for booting the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode at the time of this first determination, it is set as a probability. It is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being updated by mistakenly determining that the RAM erasing switch 122 has been turned on for updating the value.

Next, with reference to FIG. 63, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment is powered on will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on.

In this start-up process, first, an initial value setting process associated with power-on is executed (S4201). For example, access permission to the RAM 203 is set, and a predetermined value set in advance is set to the stack pointer.

Next, an internal function register setting process is executed (S4202). In the present embodiment as well, as in the sixth and seventh embodiments, a 2-millisecond timer interrupt for generating a base display control process (see FIG. 57) for controlling the display contents displayed on the base display device 401 is generated every 2 ms. Execute as an opportunity. In the process of S4202, for example, the 2-millisecond timer interrupt is permitted. Further, when a random number value necessary for performing the big hit lottery or the lottery is generated by the random number generation circuit (not shown) provided in the main controller 110, in the process of S4202, the range of the generated random number value ( Maximum value). Further, in the processing of S4202, access to the RAM 203 is permitted. Further, in the processing of S4202, main controller 110 makes various settings for transmitting and receiving signals by serial communication with payout controller 111 and voice lamp controller 113.

In particular, by enabling the 2 millisecond timer interrupt in this internal function register setting processing, a 2 millisecond timer interrupt is generated every 2 milliseconds and the base display control processing is executed. Then, when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the probability setting value can be displayed on the base display device 401.

In the process of S4202, it is not always necessary to set the range (maximum value) of random number values. If the range of random value (maximum value) is not set in the process of S4202, in the other startup process (S4221) described later that is executed at the stage of shifting from the startup process to the main process, The range (maximum value) of the random number value not performed in the processing of S4202 may be set.

Next, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S4203). As a result, if the power-off occurrence information is stored (S4203: Yes), it means that the process at the previous power-off is normally completed, and then the RAM determination value is calculated and calculated. It is determined whether the determined RAM determination value is normal, that is, whether the calculated RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored when the power is shut off (S4204). The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. In the present embodiment, the case where the probability setting value stored in the RAM 203 is excluded from the checksum value calculation will be described, but the probability setting value may be included in the checksum value calculation.

As a result of the processing of S4204, when it is determined that the calculated RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value saved when the power is shut off (S4204: Yes), the RAM determination value is normal and at least used for calculating the RAM determination value. Since it can be determined that the existing data (information) is normally held, it is then determined whether the probability setting value is within the normal range (“1” to “6”) (S4205). Here, to determine whether the probability setting value is within the normal range, it is determined whether the probability setting value at that stage is normal although the process related to the power cut was normally performed when the power was turned off last time. This is because it may be broken and out of the normal range. The process of S4205 is performed in order to reliably detect such an abnormality in the probability setting value.

If the probability setting value is within the normal range (S4205: Yes), it is then determined whether the setting change flag 203x13 is on (S4206). If the setting change flag 203x13 is on (S4206: Yes), the setting change process was being executed when the power was last turned off, that is, the power supply is being updated while the probability setting value is being updated by the setting change process. Indicates that it has been turned off. Therefore, in this case, the process proceeds to S4213 and the setting change process is executed (S4213).

As a result, the startup mode when the power is turned on after the power is turned off while changing the settings is not only the startup operation for starting in the setting change mode, but also other startup operations. Even if the operation is performed, the setting change mode can be set to execute the setting change process again from the beginning. Therefore, if the power is turned off during the setting change, the probability of the probability setting value can be changed from the beginning when the power is turned on thereafter. Therefore, the probability setting value can be surely changed by the person concerned with the hall and the change can be confirmed. Therefore, even if the power is turned off while the settings are being changed, hall personnel can reliably update and confirm the probability setting value when the power is turned on again, and the pachinko machine can be used with confidence. The probability setting value for 10 can be changed.

Also, by restarting the setting change process from the beginning (from the beginning), instead of continuing from the probability setting value being updated at the time the power was turned off during the setting change and restarting the updating of the probability setting value, By using the probability setting value (probability setting value data 203x11) used in the game so far, the probability setting value can be updated again from the beginning. Therefore, a person concerned with the hall or the like can re-update the probability setting work with confidence. The details of the setting change process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if the setting change flag 203x13 is turned on as a result of the process of S4206 (S4206: No), it means that the setting change process was not being executed when the power was last turned off. As a process for confirming the start-up operation performed when the related person or the like turns on the power to the pachinko machine 10, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S4207). In the process of S4207, since the 4-millisecond timer interrupt is not permitted and the timer interrupt process described later is not executed, the state of the RAM erase switch 122 is changed by the switch state read process of the timer interrupt process. Instead of making a judgment using the read one, the input/output port 205 is directly accessed to read the state of the RAM erase switch 122.

As a result of the processing of S4207, when the RAM erase switch 122 is off (S4207: No), it is then determined whether or not the setting key 501 is in the on state to further confirm the startup operation ( S4208). In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is turned on. However, as in the sixth and seventh embodiments, the setting key 501 is on and the door is open. It may be determined whether or not the switch is on.

If the setting key 501 is in the off state as a result of the processing in S4208 (S4208: N0), the RAM erasing switch 122 is off and the setting key 501 is in the off state. It means that you operated. Then, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is on (S4209). As a result, if the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is on (S4209: Yes), it means that the setting confirmation process was being executed when the power was last turned off, that is, the probability setting value is confirmed by the setting confirmation process. Indicates that the power supply was cut off. In this case, as shown in FIG. 62, the setting confirmation process is executed from the beginning (S4210). By the setting confirmation process, the currently set probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401. Thereby, the probability setting value can be confirmed.

As described above, even when the hall-related person performs the startup operation for launching in the normal mode as the startup operation, instead of launching the pachinko machine 10 in the normal mode, the setting confirmation process is performed from the beginning ( Start the pachinko machine 10 in the setting confirmation mode in which the operation is performed again (from the beginning). As a result, even if the hall person or the like starts up by the operation in the normal mode after the power is turned off during the setting confirmation, the probability setting value can be confirmed. As a result, the hall-related person or the like can confirm that the probability setting value has not been destroyed due to the power being turned off during the setting confirmation, so that the pachinko machine 10 can be started up with peace of mind. The details of the setting confirmation process will be described with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S4209, when it is determined that the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is off (S4209: No), it means that the setting confirmation processing was not being executed when the power was last turned off. .. The process of S4209 is executed when the setting change flag 203x13 is determined to be off in the process of S4206 (S4206: No), that is, the setting change process is performed when the power is turned off last time. Even if it was not running.

Therefore, in this case, the startup mode is set to the normal mode shown by the hall-related person in the startup operation, the setting confirmation process of S4210 and the process of S4211 described later are skipped, and other startup processes are executed. After that (S4214), the process proceeds to the main process. In addition, as other startup processing, a 4-millisecond timer interrupt is permitted. In the present embodiment, similarly to the sixth or seventh embodiment, the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 58) for performing the main control of the game is executed with the 4-millisecond timer interrupt generated every 4 milliseconds as a trigger. .. By allowing the 4-millisecond timer interrupt in the process of S4214, the timer interrupt process is executed every 4 msec.

Further, in the main processing of the present embodiment, only the update processing of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the update processing of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S702 and S703 of FIG. 17) are executed during the loop. Infinite loop processing is executed. The power outage monitoring process executed in the main process in the first embodiment and the like (process for monitoring whether there is power-off occurrence information and executing a process related to power-off when there is power-off occurrence information, FIG. The processing of S701 and S704 to S707) is executed in the timer interrupt processing in this embodiment.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S4208, when it is determined that the setting key 501 is in the ON state (S4208: Yes), the RAM erasing switch 122 is OFF and the setting key 501 is in the ON state. Indicates that the startup operation was performed in the setting confirmation mode. Here, the process of S4208 is executed when the setting change flag 203x13 is determined to be off in the process of S4206 (S4206: No), that is, when the power is turned off last time. Is not running. Therefore, in this case, as shown in FIG. 62, regardless of whether or not the setting confirmation processing was being executed when the power was last turned off, the pachinko machine 10 is set in the setting confirmation mode in which a hall person or the like has started up the operation. To start up, the process shifts to S4210, and the setting confirmation process is executed (S4210). By the setting confirmation process, the currently set probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401. Thereby, the probability setting value can be confirmed. Details of the setting confirmation processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the setting confirmation processing (S4210) is completed, external output processing is executed (S4211). In this external output processing, information indicating that the setting confirmation processing has been executed or that the probability setting value has been displayed on the base display device 401 is output to the hall computer 600 via the external output terminal 503. As a result, a hall-related person or the like can recognize that the setting confirmation process is executed by the pachinko machine 10 and the probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401. Therefore, when the probability setting value is illegitimately displayed, it can be grasped promptly. After the external output processing is executed, other startup processing is executed (S4221), and the processing shifts to the main processing.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the RAM erasing switch 122 is turned on in the process of S4207, which is a process for confirming the start-up operation performed when the hall-related person turns on the pachinko machine 10, ( (S4207: Yes), to further confirm the startup operation, it is determined whether the setting key 501 is in the on state (S4212). In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is turned on. However, as in the sixth and seventh embodiments, the setting key 501 is on and the door is open. It may be determined whether or not the switch is on.

As a result of the processing of S4212, when the setting key 501 is in the ON state (S4212: Yes), the RAM erasing switch 122 is ON and the setting key 501 is in the ON state, so that a hall person or the like stands up in the setting change mode. It means that it was lifted. When the startup operation is performed in the setting change mode, as shown in FIG. 62, regardless of whether or not the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is on, that is, whether or not the setting confirmation process was being executed when the power was last turned off. Regardless of this, the startup mode of the pachinko machine 10 is set to the setting change mode.

Therefore, as a result of the processing of S4212, when the setting key 501 is in the ON state (S4212: Yes), the setting change processing is executed (S4213). By the setting change process, the probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401, and when the RAM erasing switch 122 is turned on by a person concerned with the hall or the like, the probability setting value is updated and the setting key 501 is turned off. The updated probability setting value is determined as the probability setting value to be used in the game from now on, and the RAM clearing process is performed. Thereby, after changing the probability setting value, the game machine can be newly started with the changed probability setting value. Details of the setting confirmation processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Here, even if the setting confirmation process is being executed when the power is turned off last time, the fact that the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on means that it is related to the hall. Clearly indicate the intention to change the probability setting value. Therefore, in this case, by starting the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode, it is possible to perform the start-up process according to the intention of the hall personnel.

When the setting change processing (S4213) is completed, external output processing is executed (S4214). In this external output processing, information indicating that the setting change processing has been executed or the probability setting value has been changed is output to the hall computer 600 via the external output terminal 503. As a result, a person involved in the hall or the like can understand that the setting change process is executed by the pachinko machine 10 and the probability setting value is changed. Therefore, when the probability setting value is illicitly changed, the probability setting value can be grasped promptly. After the external output processing is executed, other startup processing is executed (S4221), and the processing shifts to the main processing.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S4212, if the setting key 501 is in the OFF state (S4212: No), then it is determined whether or not the RAM is abnormal by referring to whether or not the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is ON. (S4215). Here, it is determined by the process of S4207 that the RAM erase switch 122 is on (S4207: Yes), by the process of S4212 that the setting key 501 is off (S4212: No), and the process of S4215 is performed. When it is executed, the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is always off, so it is determined in the processing of S4215 that there is no RAM abnormality (S4215: No).

Further, in this case, since the setting change flag 203x13 is determined to be off in the process of S4206 (S4206: No), the setting change process is not being executed when the power was last turned off. is there. Therefore, it is determined by the processing of S4207 that the RAM erase switch 122 is on (S4207: Yes), the setting key 501 is determined by the processing of S4212 that it is off (S4212: No), and the RAM abnormality by the processing of S4215. If it is determined that it is not (S4215: No), it means that a person related to the hall has performed a startup operation in the RAM clear mode, and the setting change process was not being executed when the power was last turned off. As shown in FIG. 62, the pachinko machine 10 is started in the RAM clear mode regardless of whether or not the setting confirmation process was being executed when the power was last turned off. Therefore, RAM clear processing is executed (S4216).

In this RAM clearing process, out of the data stored in the RAM 203, the data used for controlling the game (predetermined data excluding the probability setting value data 203x11 stored in the inner work area 203x1) is erased (cleared), The accessory ratio data 203s, the base value data 203r, and the error data 203t (see FIG. 53) stored in the outside work area 203y1 are retained without being erased. The game can be newly started by deleting the data used for controlling the game (predetermined data excluding the probability setting value data 203x11 stored in the inner work area 203x1). Further, even if the RAM clearing process is executed, the probability setting value data 203x11 is retained, so that the game can be continued with the probability setting value that was fixed before the RAM clearing process was executed.

Here, as described above, even when the setting confirmation process was being executed when the power was last turned off, there is no RAM abnormality and the startup operation for booting in the RAM clear mode is performed. The pachinko machine 10 is started up in the RAM clear mode as per the start-up operation of the hall personnel. The fact that the RAM erasing switch 122 is turned on indicates that the person concerned with the hall or the like at least clearly wants to clear the RAM. Therefore, in this case, by starting the pachinko machine 10 in the RAM clear mode, it is possible to perform the start-up process according to the intentions of the persons related to the hall.

When the RAM clearing process in S4216 is completed, other startup processes are executed (S4221) and the process proceeds to the main process.

On the other hand, when it is determined by the processing of S4203 that the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S4203: No), the calculated RAM determination value is the RAM determination value saved at the time of power shutdown by the processing of S4204. If they do not match and it is determined that the RAM determination value is abnormal (S4204: No), it is determined by the processing of S4205 that the probability setting value is not within the normal range (S4205: No). If YES, it can be determined that the RAM 203 has an abnormality, so the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is turned on (S4217), and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on to confirm the start-up operation by a person related to the hall. It is determined whether or not (S4218). In the process of S4218 as well, similar to the process of S4207, the input/output port 205 is directly accessed to read the state of the RAM erase switch 122.

As a result of the processing of S4218, when it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is on (S4218: Yes), the process proceeds to the above-described processing of S4212, and it is further determined whether the setting key 501 is in the on state. It is determined (S4212). As a result, when the setting key 501 is in the ON state (S4212: Yes), it means that the person related to the hall or the like has started up in the setting change mode. Then, in this case (S4212: Yes), in order to start up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode in accordance with the start-up operation by a person related to the hall, the process proceeds to S4213 and the above-mentioned setting change process is executed.

Here, even if a RAM abnormality occurs, if the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode, the probability setting value can be reset and the RAM can be cleared. Therefore, the game can be newly started with the newly set normal probability setting value. The RAM clear flag 203x15 is turned off by this RAM clear. Therefore, after that, the main control device 110 can control the game without executing the process related to the RAM abnormality.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is off as a result of the process of S4218 (S4218: No), even if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is on as a result of the process of S4218, the process proceeds to S4212. As a result of the processing, when it is determined that the setting key 501 is in the off state (S4218: Yes, S4212: No), in the RAM abnormality, the hall-related person or the like is in the normal mode, the RAM clear mode, or the setting confirmation mode. This means that the startup operation was performed in one of the startup modes.

In this case, the process proceeds to S4215 described above, and in the process of S4215, it is always determined that the RAM is abnormal (S4215: Yes), and the process proceeds to S4219. In the processing of S4219, RAM abnormality setting processing is performed (S4219). In the RAM abnormality setting processing, processing for notifying the RAM abnormality is executed. For example, a voice lamp is used so that the power output is once turned off, and the notification prompting to start the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode is performed by voice output from the voice output device 226 and/or display on the third symbol display device 81. The command is transmitted to the control device 113.

Then, an external output process for notifying the hall computer 600 that the RAM is abnormal via the external output terminal 503 is executed (S4220), and another startup process is executed (S4221), and the process proceeds to the main process. To do. Since the RAM abnormality is notified to the hall computer 600, a hall person or the like can surely know that the RAM abnormality has occurred, without being aware of the notification from the pachinko machine 10.

Here, although details will be described later, when the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is turned on due to the occurrence of the RAM abnormality, the timer interrupt processing does not execute main control relating to the game except the random number update processing and the power failure monitoring processing. And In other words, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 enters the infinite loop state since the main control relating to the game is not executed even in the timer interrupt process after shifting to the main process. Then, the hall related person or the like recognizes the RAM abnormality by the RAM abnormality setting processing of S4219 or the external output processing of S4220, and then the pachinko machine 10 is restarted in the setting change mode to ensure the probability setting value. By resetting and clearing the RAM 203 together with the RAM abnormality flag 203x15, the pachinko machine 10 can be operated normally.

As described above, in order to eliminate the RAM abnormality, it is necessary for a person related to the hall to restart the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode. Then, in order to start in the setting change mode, a dedicated key corresponding to the setting key 501 is required. Therefore, the elimination of the RAM abnormality always involves the hall (store manager) that manages the dedicated key. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the RAM abnormality from being resolved without the hall side knowing that the RAM abnormality has occurred.

Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the details of the setting change process (S4213) which is one process of the startup process (FIG. 63) will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the setting change process (S4213). The setting change process (S4213) is a process executed when the startup mode is the setting change mode, and is a process for accepting and confirming the change of the probability setting value from a person related to the hall or the like.

In this setting change process, first, the 4-millisecond timer interrupt is permitted (S4301). By allowing the 4-millisecond timer interrupt, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 66) described later is executed upon the occurrence of the 4-millisecond timer interrupt. Although details will be described later, when the power outage monitoring process is executed in the timer interrupt process and the power is cut off during the setting change process, the power outage monitoring process holds the state at that time in the RAM 203. As it is, it is configured to wait in an infinite loop until the power is completely cut off.

Next, the setting change flag 203x13 is set to ON (S4302), and the initial setting required at the start of setting change is performed (S4303). In the processing of S4303, for example, an initial value is set in the RAM area used in this setting change processing. It should be noted that the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 may be cleared (OFF setting) by executing the setting change processing when the RAM is abnormal, by the processing of S4303 or by the RAM clear processing (S4313) described later. Good. As described above, when the RAM is abnormal, a person related to the hall is urged to restart the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode. When the pachinko machine 10 is restarted in the setting change mode, the probability setting value is reset and the RAM 203 is cleared, so that the pachinko machine 10 can operate normally. Therefore, it is possible to indicate that the RAM abnormality has been resolved by clearing (off setting) the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 along with the execution of the setting change process.

Next, the probability setting value data 203x11 indicating the probability setting value that has been used so far is read and saved as update probability setting value data 203x12 (S4303). The update of the probability setting value is performed not by using the probability setting value data 203x11 but by using the update probability setting value data 203x12. The update probability set value data 203x12 is displayed on the base display device 401. The display mode at this time may be any of FIG. 49(a), (b), (c-1), (d-1), and (e-1).

Next, the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is set to ON (S4305). The RAM erase switch flag 203x16 may be turned on during the process of S4303. The RAM erasing switch flag 203x16 is turned on during any of the period from the execution of the setting changing process to the execution of the later-described process of S4309 (determination process of whether or not the RAM erasing switch 122 is turned on). All that has to be done is the setting.

Next, it is determined whether the probability setting value stored in the update probability setting value data 203x12 is within the normal range (“1” to “6”) (S4306), and the probability setting value is not within the normal range, that is, abnormal. If it is the probability setting value (S4306: No), the updating probability setting value data 203x12 is changed to the initial value (S4307), and the process proceeds to S4308. The initial value may be "1" which is the minimum value of the probability setting values ("1" to "6") or "3" or "4" which is the intermediate value of the probability setting values. Alternatively, the maximum probability setting value may be “6”. As a result, even if the probability setting value data 203x11 is destroyed due to a RAM abnormality, or even if the updating probability setting value data 203x12 is destroyed while updating the probability setting value, the updating probability setting value data 203x12 By storing the probability setting value in the normal range, the probability setting value in the normal range can be updated.

On the other hand, as a result of the process of S4306, when it is determined that the probability setting value stored in the update probability setting value data 203x12 is within the range of “1” to “6” (S4306: Yes), the process of S4307. Is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4308.

In the process of S4308, it is determined whether the setting key 501 is in the off state (S4308). In the processing of S4308, when it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 transits from the on state to the off state (edge is detected), it is determined that the setting key 501 is in the off state.

As described above, even if the pachinko machine 10 is started in the normal mode or the RAM clear mode in which the setting key 501 is turned off when the power is turned off while the setting change process is being executed, as described above, This is because the pachinko machine 10 is configured to execute the setting change process from the beginning (from the beginning). In the processing of S4308, when it is determined whether the setting key 501 is turned off only by looking at the level of the setting key 501 being in the off state, the pachinko machine is started by the startup operation in the normal mode or the RAM clear mode. When 10 is started and the setting change process is started as described above, the setting key 501 is in the off state from the beginning, so a positive determination is made immediately in the process of S4308, and the probability setting value cannot be updated. As described later, there is a problem that the probability setting value is fixed.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4308, when it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has transitioned from the ON state to the OFF state (edge is detected), the setting key 501 is in the OFF state. By making the determination, it is possible to avoid the determination that the setting key 501 is in the off state unless the setting key 501 is once in the on state and then in the off state. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is started by the startup operation of the normal mode or the RAM clear mode and the setting change processing is executed after the power is turned off while the setting change processing is being executed, the setting key 501 is once turned on. Since the probability setting value can be confirmed only after the state is set to the off state, the problem that the probability setting value is confirmed without updating the probability setting value can be avoided.

As a result of the processing in S4308, when it is determined that the setting key 501 is not in the off state (S4308: No), it is determined whether the RAM erasing switch 122 is turned on (S4309). In the process of S4309, when the state of the RAM erasing switch 122 is changed from the off state to the on state, it is determined that the RAM erasing switch 122 is turned on, and the probability setting value is updated.

As described above, the RAM erase switch 122 is used to determine the start-up mode when the pachinko machine 10 is started up, and updates the probability setting value when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode. Also used when doing. That is, the probability setting value is updated every time the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. Therefore, as a result of the process of S4309, when it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S4309: Yes), the update probability setting value data 203x12 is updated (S4310), and the process returns to S4306. In the process of S4010, specifically, the update probability setting value data 203x12 is updated by adding 1, and when the update probability setting value data 203x12 is “6”, the update probability setting value data 203x12 is set to “1”. To update.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S4309, when it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S4309: No), the processing of S4310 is skipped and the processing returns to S4306.

As described above, in the process of S4309, when the state of the RAM erase switch 122 is changed from the off state to the on state, it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. Specifically, the RAM erasing switch flag 203x16 indicating the previous state of the probability setting RAM erasing switch 122 and the output of the RAM erasing switch flag 203x16 read by the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 66) described later. When the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is off and the RAM erase switch 122 is on, it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. After making that determination, in the process of S4309, the state of the RAM erase switch 122 at that time is stored in the RAM erase switch flag 203x16.

Here, as described above, the RAM erasing switch flag 203x16 is once set to "ON" after the execution of the setting changing process by the process of S4305 and the like and before the process of S4309 is first performed. This is because the RAM erase switch 122 may still be turned on as a start-up operation for starting the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode at the stage of executing the process of S4309 at this time. If the RAM erasing switch flag 203x16 is turned off, the RAM erasing switch flag 203x16 is off and the RAM erasing switch 122 is on. Therefore, the RAM erasing switch 122 is turned on to update the probability setting value. There is a risk that the probability setting value may be updated by erroneously determining that there was an error. As a result, even though the hall related person or the like does not turn on the RAM erasing switch 122 to update the probability setting value, the probability setting value is updated and the person concerned feels distrust.

On the other hand, after the setting change process is started and before the process of S4309 is first performed, the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is once set to "on", so that the pachinko machine can perform the first determination. Even if the RAM erasing switch 122 is still turned on as a startup operation for booting 10 in the setting change mode, it is erroneously determined that the RAM erasing switch 122 was turned on for updating the probability setting value. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being updated.

The loop processing of S4306 to S4310 is continuously executed until it is determined by the processing of S4308 that the setting key 501 has been turned on (S4308: Yes). If it is determined by the process of S4308 that the setting key 501 has been turned on (S4308: Yes), the update probability setting value data 203x12 is stored as the probability setting value data 203x11 (S4311). As a result, the probability setting value updated by the person related to the hall is fixed as the probability setting value to be used in the game in the future.

Next, the 4-millisecond timer interrupt is prohibited (S4312), and the execution of the timer interrupt process is stopped. Then, the RAM clearing process is executed (S4313), and the setting changing process is ended.

In the process of S4313, of the data stored in the RAM 203, the data used for controlling the game (predetermined data excluding the probability setting value data 203x11 stored in the inner work area 203x1) is erased (cleared), and While deleting the accessory ratio data 203s stored in the outside work area 203y1, the base value data 203r and the error data 203t (see FIG. 53) are retained without being deleted. The game can be newly started by deleting the data used for controlling the game (predetermined data excluding the probability setting value data 203x11 stored in the inner work area 203x1). Further, since the probability setting value data 203x11 is held, it is possible to play a game with the confirmed probability setting value.

The RAM clearing process also sets the setting change flag 203x13 to OFF. Therefore, if the power is not turned off during execution of the setting change process, the setting change flag 203x13 is set to off, while if the power is turned off during execution of the setting change process, the setting change flag 203x13 is turned on. Will remain. Therefore, in the startup process shown in FIG. 63, if the setting change flag 203x13 is on, it can be determined that the setting change process was being executed when the power was last turned off.

Further, if the probability setting value is changed, the character ratio also changes. Therefore, if the character ratio data 203s based on the probability setting value before the change remains, the character ratio based on the changed probability set value is left. The ratio cannot be calculated correctly. In the setting change RAM clearing process, by deleting the character ratio data 203s, the character ratio based on the changed probability setting value can be calculated correctly.

On the other hand, the base value does not change even if the probability setting value is changed. Therefore, in the setting change RAM clearing process, the base value data 203r is held and the past base value and the base value are calculated. By holding the necessary information, it is possible to detect fraudulent acts performed in the past without being hidden. In addition, by retaining the error data 203t in the setting change RAM clearing process, even if the fraudulent person who has caused the error activates the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode, the error history is recorded. It cannot be erased and it is possible to suppress the concealment of fraudulent activity.

When the setting change process is completed, the display of the probability setting value on the base display device 401 is ended, and the display of the base value is started on the base display device 401.

Next, with reference to FIG. 65, details of the setting confirmation process (S4210) which is one process of the startup process (FIG. 63) will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation processing (S4215). The setting confirmation process (S4215) is a process executed when the startup mode is the setting confirmation mode, and is a process of displaying the currently set probability setting value on the base display device 401.

In this setting confirmation processing, first, similarly to the processing of S4301 of the setting change processing, the 4-millisecond timer interrupt is permitted (S4401). By allowing the 4-millisecond timer interrupt, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 66) described later is executed upon the occurrence of the 4-millisecond timer interrupt. Although details will be described later, when the power outage monitoring process is executed in the timer interrupt process and the power is cut off during the setting change process, the power outage monitoring process holds the state at that time in the RAM 203. As it is, it is configured to wait in an infinite loop until the power is completely cut off.

Next, the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is set to ON (S4402), and for example, it is shown in any of FIGS. 49(a), (b), (c-2), (d-2), and (e-2). When the display of the probability setting value indicated by the probability setting value data 203x11 is started on the base display device 401 in the display mode, it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is turned off (S4403). In the process of S4403, when it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 transits from the on state to the off state (edge is detected), it is determined that the setting key 501 is in the off state.

As described above, even if the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the normal mode in which the setting key 501 is turned off when the power is turned off while the setting confirmation process is being executed, the pachinko machine 10 is started up. This is because it is configured to execute the setting confirmation process from the beginning (from the beginning). In the process of S4403, when it is determined whether the setting key 501 is turned off only by seeing that the level of the setting key 501 is in the off state, the pachinko machine 10 is started by the start operation in the normal mode. When the setting confirmation process is started as described above, the setting key 501 is in the OFF state from the beginning, so a positive determination is made immediately in the process of S4403, and the confirmation of the probability setting value ends in an instant. The problem arises.

On the other hand, in the process of S4403, when it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has transitioned from the on state to the off state (edge is detected), the setting key 501 is in the off state. By making the determination, it is possible to avoid the determination that the setting key 501 is in the off state unless the setting key 501 is once in the on state and then in the off state. Therefore, if the pachinko machine 10 is started up by the startup operation in the normal mode and the setting confirmation processing is executed after the power is turned off while the setting confirmation processing is being executed, the setting key 501 is once turned on. Since the confirmation of the probability setting value can be completed only when the state is turned off, it is possible to avoid the problem that the confirmation of the probability setting value is completed in an instant.

As a result of the processing in S4403, if the setting key 501 is not in the off state (S4403: No), S4403 is repeatedly executed and waits until the setting key 501 is in the off state. During this period, the probability setting value is continuously displayed on the base display device 401. When the setting key 501 is turned off (S4403: Yes), the display of the probability setting value on the base display device 401 is ended, and the display of the base value on the base display device 401 is started. The flag 203x14 is cleared to off (S4404). As a result, if the power is not turned off during execution of the setting confirmation process, the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is set to OFF, while if the power is turned off during execution of the setting confirmation process, the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is It remains on. Therefore, in the startup process shown in FIG. 63, if the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is on, it can be determined that the setting confirmation process was being executed when the power was last turned off.

Then, the 4-millisecond timer interrupt is prohibited (S4405), the execution of the timer interrupt process is stopped, and the setting confirmation process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 66, a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing. As described above, this timer interrupt process is a process that performs the main control of the game, and is executed with the 4-millisecond timer interrupt that occurs every 4ms as a trigger.

In this timer interruption process, first, a random number update process for a big hit lottery or a winning lottery for the second symbol is executed (S4501), and then a power failure monitoring process is executed (S4502). In the power failure monitoring process, a process of monitoring whether there is power-off occurrence information and performing a process related to power-off when there is power-off occurrence information (process corresponding to S701 and S704 to S707 in FIG. 17) ) Is executed.

Next, referring to the RAM abnormality flag 203x15, it is determined whether or not the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is ON and a RAM abnormality has occurred (S4503). As a result, when the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is off and it is determined that the RAM abnormality has not occurred (S4503: No), the processing of S4504 to S4515 is executed as normal game processing.

That is, a trial shooting test information setting process for setting trial shooting test information is executed (S4504), and then the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the solenoid 209, and the base display device control circuit 402 connected to the input/output port 205. , The first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, the external output terminal 503, etc., the port output process for outputting the output signal set in the previous timer interrupt process. Execute (S4505).

Next, the states of various sensors, switches 208, etc. are read (S4506). The state of the RAM erase switch 122 is also read by the process of S4506. Next, a subtraction process of various timers used for controlling the game is executed (S4507), and then, based on an error signal from the payout control device 111, a process of detecting an improper act due to a shock or a magnet is executed ( S4508).

Next, a launch control process for controlling the launch of a ball by the ball launch unit 112a is executed (S4509), and then a payout command for notifying the number of balls paid out by the payout controller 111 is issued to the payout controller 111. The payout command reception process to be received further is executed (S4510), and then the payout command transmission process for instructing the payout control device 111 to pay out the ball is executed (S4511).

Next, the special symbol/special electric power control process regarding the variable display and the big hit of the first symbol (third symbol, special symbol) is executed (S4512), and then the general symbol concerning the variable display and hit of the second symbol (ordinary symbol). The ordinary electric power control processing is executed (S4513). Then, the display LED data setting process of the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol holding lamp 84 and the like is executed (S4514), and output to the hall computer 600 via the external output terminal 503. The external signal setting process for setting the external signal to be executed is executed (S4515), and the timer interrupt process is ended.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S4503, when the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is on and it is determined that the RAM abnormality has occurred (S4503: Yes), the processing of S4504 to S4515 which is the normal game processing is skipped. , And the timer interrupt processing is ended.

In this way, when the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is turned on by detecting the occurrence of the RAM abnormality by the start-up processing of FIG. 63, the timer interruption processing is the main game-related operation except the random number update processing and the power failure monitoring processing. Control is not executed. As a result, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 enters the infinite loop state since the main control relating to the game is not executed even in the timer interrupt process after shifting to the main process. After the RAM abnormality setting process of S4219 and the external output process of S4220 of the start-up process are made to cause the hall-related persons to understand the RAM abnormality, the pachinko machine 10 is restarted in the setting change mode to set the probability. By surely resetting the value and clearing the RAM 203 together with the RAM abnormality flag 203x15, the pachinko machine 10 can be operated normally.

As described above, in order to eliminate the RAM abnormality, it is necessary for a person related to the hall to restart the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode. Then, in order to start in the setting change mode, a dedicated key corresponding to the setting key 501 is required. Therefore, the elimination of the RAM abnormality always involves the hall (store manager) that manages the dedicated key. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the RAM abnormality from being resolved without the hall side knowing that the RAM abnormality has occurred.

On the other hand, in the timer interrupt process, the random number updating process and the power failure monitoring process are executed even if the RAM abnormality occurs. By executing the random number update process, the random number can be continuously generated while the power is turned on. Further, by executing the power failure monitoring process, it is possible to monitor the occurrence of power failure even when the RAM abnormality occurs, and when the power failure occurs, it is possible to reliably execute the corresponding process. In particular, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode in the situation where the RAM abnormality is detected, the setting change process is executed in the startup process. Then, when the power is turned off while the setting change process is being executed, the setting change flag 203x13 is held in the RAM 203 while being turned on. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is started next time, Regardless of the startup operation, the setting change process can be redone from the beginning.

As described above, the effects described above can be obtained by the configuration referred to in the description of the eighth embodiment. Further, with the same configuration as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to seventh embodiments, the same effect as that obtained by the configuration can be obtained.

<Ninth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 75. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, a setting key 501 is provided on the front surface side (that is, the back surface side of the pachinko machine 10) of the main control device 110 provided on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 10, and persons related to the hall or the like. Thereby, the big hit probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol can be changed to a plurality of stages (for example, 6 stages of set values “1” to “6”).

The setting key 501 is provided so as to be exposed in the back surface direction of the pachinko machine 10 when the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, and the lock of the inner frame 12 is released by a person related to the hall. When the inner frame 12 is rotated with respect to the outer frame 11, the setting key 501 is exposed in the front direction of the pachinko machine 10 as the inner frame 12 rotates. With this configuration, when a person involved in the hall wants to change the setting of the pachinko machine 10, by rotating the inner frame 12, it becomes possible to immediately insert the setting change key into the setting key 501. The configuration change work of the pachinko machine 10 can be quickly performed.

In addition, the hall is provided with an island facility that has an automatic sphere feeder installed in a closed predetermined space.By attaching the outer frame of the pachinko machine to both sides of the island facility in the long side direction, It is configured to be able to install multiple pachinko machines. Then, outside the business hours of the hall, the persons related to the hall unlock the inner frame and/or the front frame and the outer frame of each pachinko machine installed in the island facility to the outer frame (island facility). On the other hand, the inner frame and/or the front frame is opened, and setting work and maintenance work for each pachinko machine are performed.

However, since the setting key 501 is configured to be exposed on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, for example, in the situation where the pachinko machine 10 is installed on the long side of the island facility 1 of the hall, the pachinko machine 10 is installed. The inner frame of the other pachinko machine installed on the other long side side (that is, the back side of the pachinko machine 10) that is not the long side side is opened for some reason (for example, cheating). In that case, it becomes possible to directly operate the setting key 501 provided so as to be exposed on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, even when the inner frame 12 of the pachinko machine 10 is not opened, the setting key 501 of the pachinko machine 10 is directly operated by opening the pachinko machine on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. If the setting key 501 is illegally operated, the setting contents may be changed, which may cause an unexpected disadvantage in the hole. Further, for example, a fraudulent act such as illegal replacement of the main control device 110 due to cutting of the sealing unit 100c that connects the box base 100a and the box cover 100b of the board box 100 may cause an unexpected disadvantage to the hole. May cause.

Here, like a slot machine, a structure in which the entire back side of the pachinko machine 10 is covered with a housing structure to prevent fraudulent activity from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the setting key 501 of the main controller 110 can be considered. Unlike a slot machine, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine needs to replenish balls from the upper side of the island facility and to eject out balls, and the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is a casing. If it is covered with a structure, a complicated structure for replenishing and discharging the balls becomes necessary, and the manufacturing cost may increase due to the casing structure and the replenishing and discharging structure.

Further, in the island facility, in consideration of the wiring connection with the card sanding device arranged adjacent to the left side of the pachinko machine 10 and the connection wiring with the power supply, the back surface structure of the pachinko machine 10, especially the back surface of the pachinko machine 10. It is desirable that the structure on the left side be configured to be open to some extent and be easily connected by wiring to the above-described device or the like.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, a protective cover member 140 that covers the setting key 501 from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is provided on the right side plate 11d of the outer frame 11, and the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11. In such a situation, the protective cover member 140 is configured to prevent the setting key 501 from being exposed on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 10. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the setting key 501 from being directly operated by the protective cover member 140 from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 in a situation where the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an illegal act such that the setting key 501 is illegally operated.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, the sealing unit 100c provided on the left side of the board box 100 that houses the main control device 110 in the rear view (right side of the pachinko machine 10 in the front view) is covered with the protective cover member 140. By configuring the sealing unit 100c so that it cannot be directly contacted with the sealing unit 100c, it is difficult to perform fraud such as cutting the sealing unit 100c and exchanging the main control device 110. It can be prevented from occurring.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to eighth embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, the same configurations and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment to the eighth embodiment will be denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the first embodiment to the eighth embodiment. And its illustration and description are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 67, a back surface configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 67 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment in that the outer frame 11 is configured by combining a wooden plate material and an aluminum plate material, and the outer frame. 11 is the point where the protective cover member 140 is attached. Other configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment.

The outer frame 11 of the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment has an upper plate 11a composed of a wooden plate material as an upper side, a lower plate 11b also composed of a wooden plate material as a lower side, and is more rigid than a wooden plate material. The left side plate 11c made of a high aluminum plate material is the left side, and the right side plate 11d also made of an aluminum plate material is the right side.

By constructing the left side plate 11c and the right side plate 11d of the outer frame 11 by plate members made of aluminum, even if the left side plate 11c and the right side plate 11d are formed thinner than the conventional wooden plate member, Since the rigidity of the entire pachinko machine 11 can be maintained, the lateral design space of the pachinko machine 10 can be secured, and the degree of freedom in designing the pachinko machine 10 can be increased.

Further, the left side plate 11c and the right side plate 11d are formed in a U-shaped cross section when viewed from above, and are directed to the inside of the pachinko machine 10 on the side surface portion located on the side surface of the pachinko machine 10 and on the front side of the side surface of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is provided with a front surface portion extended and formed on the side surface thereof, and a rear surface portion extending toward the inside of the pachinko machine 10 on the rear side of the side surface portion of the pachinko machine 10.

Note that the pachinko machine 10 drives the outer frame 11 (that is, the pachinko machine 10) by driving a nail into the island equipment (not shown) from the inner wall side of the upper plate 11a and the lower plate 11b of the outer frame 11. Is configured to be attached and fixed to the island equipment.

The protective cover member 140 is fixed to the right side plate 11d of the outer frame 11 by a fixing screw 11g (see FIG. 69) described later, and includes the setting key 501 of the main controller 110 and a sealing unit 100c (see FIG. 72) described later. It is configured to cover together.

The base display device 401 and the error display button 502 of the main controller 110 are not covered by the protective cover member 140 and are exposed toward the back surface side of the pachinko machine 10. The base display device 401 and the error display button 502 are devices that are used to display the state of the pachinko machine 10 and do not change the setting contents of the pachinko machine 10 and are unlikely to be misconducted. Therefore, it is not necessary to cover with the protective cover member 140. With this configuration, it is possible to form the protective cover member 140 with a necessary minimum size and reduce the manufacturing cost required for the protective cover member 140.

Here, the details of the protective cover member 140 of the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 68. 68A is a left front perspective view of the protective cover member 140 according to the ninth embodiment as viewed from the left front side, and FIG. 68B is a right front view of the protective cover member 140 according to the ninth embodiment as viewed from the rear side. It is a right rear perspective view.

The protective cover member 140 is formed of a resin (for example, polycarbonate resin) having transparency as a whole of the protective cover member 140, and the cover attaching portion 150 attached to the right side plate 11 d of the outer frame 11 and the cover attaching portion 150 An upright portion 160 formed to extend in the back surface direction (rear side) of the pachinko machine 10, and a right side of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 from the tip side of the upright portion 160 (that is, the back surface side (rear side) of the pachinko machine 10). That is, the cover portion 170 is formed so as to extend in the left direction (that is, to the left of the pachinko machine 10 when viewed from the front).

The cover mounting portion 150 includes a mounting surface 151 that comes into surface contact with a part of the inner wall surface of the side surface portion of the right side plate 11 d of the outer frame 11, and an upper mounting hole 152 and a lower mounting hole 153 that are formed through the mounting surface 151. , And a curved portion 154 formed in a shape that abuts along the inner wall shape of the right side plate 11d.

The upper mounting hole 152 and the lower mounting hole 153 are formed in the mounting surface 151 so that a fixing screw 11g (see FIG. 69) described later can be inserted therein. The upper mounting hole 152 and the lower mounting hole 153 are located at positions where they can be mounted respectively in a cover upper mounting hole 11e and a cover lower mounting hole 11f (see FIG. 69) which will be described later and are formed in the right side plate 11d of the outer frame 11. It is provided.

Here, with reference to FIG. 69 to FIG. 71, an attachment mode of the protective cover member 140 to the outer frame 11 will be described. FIG. 69 is a right side view of the pachinko machine 10 (excluding the front frame 14) in the ninth embodiment. Further, FIG. 70 is a left front perspective view for explaining a method of attaching the protective cover member 140 to the outer frame 11 in the ninth embodiment. Further, FIG. 71 is a front view of the outer frame 11 and the protective cover member 140 attached to the outer frame 11 in the ninth embodiment. For convenience of explanation, FIG. 69 shows the front frame 14 removed from the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12, and FIGS. 70 and 71 show the inner frame 12 and front frame 14 removed from the outer frame 11. The states shown in FIG.

First, as shown in FIG. 69, a cover upper mounting hole, which is a through hole for mounting the protective cover member 140, is located slightly below the central portion of the side surface portion of the right side plate 11d forming the outer frame 11 of the pachinko machine 10. 11e and a cover lower mounting hole 11f are formed by drilling, and fixing screws 11g are respectively screwed therein.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70, the cover upper mounting hole 11e and the cover lower mounting hole 11f are formed at positions corresponding to the upper mounting hole 152 and the lower mounting hole 153 of the protective cover member 140, respectively. Specifically, an upper cover mounting hole 11e is formed at a position corresponding to the upper mounting hole 152, and a lower cover mounting hole 11f is formed at a position corresponding to the lower mounting hole 153. Then, with the (outer) mounting surface 151 and the curved portion 154 of the protective cover member 140 in contact with the inner wall sides of the side surface portion and the rear surface portion of the right side plate 11d, the outside of the right side plate 11d (the right rear side in FIG. 70). ), each fixing screw 11g is screwed into the cover upper mounting hole 11e and the upper mounting hole 152, and is screwed into the cover lower mounting hole 11f and the lower mounting hole 153. The protective cover member 140 is fixed to the right side plate 11d).

Here, the curved portion 154 of the protective cover member 140 is formed in a shape that abuts the inner wall shapes of the side surface portion and the rear surface portion of the right side plate 11d. The rear surface of the right side plate 11d is made of aluminum. Therefore, in a state where the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the inner walls of the side surface portion and the rear surface portion of the right side plate 11d come into contact with the curved portion 154, and the right side plate 11d and the protective cover member 140 are attached to each other. No gap (space) is created. As a result, in a state where the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the fixing screw 11g inserted into the upper mounting hole 152 and the cover upper mounting hole 11e from the back surface side of the pachinko machine 10 and the lower mounting. Preventing the protective cover member 140 from being removable from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 by making it impossible to directly operate the fixing screw 11g inserted in the hole 153 and the under-cover mounting hole 11f. You can

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a card sanding device (not shown) adjacently to the island facility so that normally no gap is created between the right side plate 11d of the outer frame 11 and the card sanding device. Is configured. Therefore, by configuring so that the fixing screw 11g cannot be directly operated from the right side of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to prevent the protective cover member 140 from being removable from the side of the pachinko machine 10.

Therefore, it becomes difficult to remove the protective cover member 140 from the back side or the side surface side of the pachinko machine 10, and by covering the setting key 501 with the protective cover member 140 when the inner frame 12 is closed, the setting key 501 is directly attached to the setting key 501. It is possible to prevent the operation.

Further, the curved portion 154 is formed in a thin plate shape, and is configured to be elastically deformable based on the elastic force of the resin material forming the entire protective cover member 140. Therefore, when an external force is applied to the protective cover member 140, the protective cover member 140 is configured to slightly bend in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 10 by the curved portion 154. With such a configuration, for example, when the inner frame 12 is closed, even if the main control device 110 (see FIG. 69) comes into contact with the protective cover member 140 and is impacted by the momentum at the time of closing, The bending portion 154 is bent by the elastic force and absorbs the impact, so that the protective cover member 140 can be prevented from being damaged.

Here, returning to FIGS. 68A and 68B again, the configuration of the protective cover member 140 will be described. In addition to the cover mounting portion 150, the protective cover member 140 is provided with a standing portion 160 extending from the cover mounting portion 150 toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10. The leading end side of the standing portion 160 (that is, A cover portion 170 is formed so as to extend in a cantilever shape from the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10 toward the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The standing portion 160 is provided with a standing cover wall 161, a standing upper cover portion 162, a standing lower cover portion 163, a standing inner rib 164, and a standing outer rib 165. Further, the cover portion 170 is provided with a cover plate 171, a cover side protrusion 172, a key cover portion 173, and a cover outer rib 174.

From here, the configuration of the standing portion 160 will be described in detail. The standing cover wall 161 is continuously extended from the curved portion 154 of the cover mounting portion 150 toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10. The standing cover wall 161 covers the right side surface of the main control device 110 when viewed from the front (the left side surface when viewed from the rear surface), and is provided with a setting key 501 and a sealing unit 100c (see FIG. 72) which will be described later. It is possible to prevent cheating from the right side of the front view 110 (left side of the rear view).

The upright upper cover portion 162 is composed of an upper inner cover portion 162a and an upper outer cover portion 162b. The upper inner cover part 162a extends horizontally from the entire upper part of the standing cover wall 161 and a part of the upper part of the cover plate 171 toward the inside of the pachinko machine 10 (direction in which the main controller 110 is arranged). Is formed. Further, the upper outer cover portion 162b is formed to extend horizontally from the entire upper portion of the standing cover wall 161 toward the outside of the pachinko machine 10 (the direction in which the main controller 110 is not arranged).

In this way, by forming the upright upper cover portion 162 such that the upper inner cover portion 162a and the upper outer cover portion 162b are flush with each other, the right upper portion in front view (the left upper portion in rear view) of the main control device 110 is changed. It is possible to prevent fraudulent activity from above the right side in the front view (upper left side in the back view) of the main control device 110 that is covered and provided with the setting key 501 and the sealing unit 100c described later (both of which are shown in FIG. 72). Further, by the upper outer cover portion 162b, for example, when an illegal act by a wire is performed from the left side of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10, when the wire is transmitted from the outside of the standing cover wall 161 to the upper side, By hitting the upper outer cover portion 162b, the wire can be prevented from entering.

The upright lower cover portion 163 includes a lower inner cover portion 163a (see FIG. 68(a)) and a lower outer cover portion 163b (see FIG. 68(b)). The lower inner cover portion 163a extends horizontally from the entire lower portion of the standing cover wall 161 and the entire lower portion of the cover plate 171 toward the inside of the pachinko machine 10 (direction in which the main controller 110 is arranged). Has been formed. The lower outer cover portion 163b is formed to extend horizontally from the entire lower portion of the standing cover wall 161 toward the outside of the pachinko machine 10 (the direction in which the main controller 110 is not arranged).

The lower inner cover portion 163a has a larger area than the upper inner cover portion 162a. This is because the arrangement position of the main controller 110 is closer to the lower side of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 67 ), and the upper side of the pachinko machine 10 accesses the main controller 110 from the lower side. Since it is easy, a person who conducts an illegal act with respect to the main control device 110 often conducts an illegal act by inserting a wire or the like from the lower side of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, in order to prevent the above-mentioned fraudulent acts, the lower inner cover portion 163a is formed to have a large area, and the lower inner cover portion 163a allows the main control device 110 to have a main portion in a lower right portion in front view (lower left portion in rear view). The gap between the control device 110 and the protective cover member 140 is configured to be as small as possible.

Thus, by forming the standing lower cover portion 163 so that the lower inner cover portion 163a and the lower outer cover portion 163b are flush with each other, the right lower portion when viewed from the front of the main controller 110 (the lower left portion when viewed from the rear) is controlled. It is possible to prevent fraudulent activity from the lower right side in the front view (lower left side in the rear view) of the main control device 110 that is covered and has the setting key 501 and the sealing unit 100c described later (both of which are shown in FIG. 72). Further, by the lower outer cover portion 163b, for example, when an illegal act is performed by a wire, when the wire is transmitted downward from the outside of the standing cover wall 161, the wire is connected to the lower outer cover portion 163b. By hitting, it is possible to prevent the wire from entering.

The upright inner ribs 164 (see FIG. 68(a)) are formed in a rib shape in which a protruding amount is gradually increased toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 in a middle portion of the upright cover wall 161 inside the pachinko machine 10. There is. The upright inner ribs 164 function as reinforcing ribs of the upright cover wall 161, prevent the upright cover wall 161 from being damaged, and particularly prevent the upright cover wall 161 from being damaged by other parts (for example, the main control unit) provided in the pachinko machine 10. It is configured to increase the degree of reinforcement of the standing cover wall 161 by gradually increasing the protrusion amount of the standing inner rib 164 toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 within a range in which the standing cover wall 161 is not in contact with the device 110).

The standing outer ribs 165 (see FIG. 68(b)) are formed in a rib shape in which a protruding amount is gradually reduced toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 in a middle portion of the standing cover wall 161 outside the pachinko machine 10. It is formed at a position that makes a pair inside/outside with the above-mentioned standing inside rib 164. The upright outer ribs 165, like the upright inner ribs 164, function as reinforcing ribs for the upright cover wall 161 and prevent the upright cover wall 161 from being damaged.

Further, the standing outer ribs 165 are formed so as to have the same protrusion amount as that of the upper outer cover portion 162b and the lower outer cover portion 163b described above, and the pachinko machine 10 to which the protective cover member 140 is attached is installed in the island facility. In such a case, the standing outer ribs 165 are configured so as not to become an obstacle when the pachinko machine 10 is installed, such as being caught by the island facility.

From here, the structure of the cover part 170 will be described in detail. The cover plate 171 has the plate surface of the cover plate 171 extending in the front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10 from the above-mentioned standing portion 160 (the standing cover wall 161, the standing upper cover portion 162, the standing lower cover portion 163, and the standing inner rib 164). Each of the orientations is greater than or equal to the setting unit 100d (see FIG. 72) of the main control device 110 and extends to a position less than the base display device 401 (error display button 502).

On the front side of the pachinko machine 10 of the cover plate 171 (that is, the side facing the main controller 110. The same applies hereinafter), at a position corresponding to a setting unit 100d (see FIG. 72) of the main controller 110 described later, The cover side protrusion 172 is formed in a square shape so as to protrude toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and a part of the cover plate 171 surrounded by the cover side protrusion 172 is configured as a key cover portion 173.

The cover-side protrusion 172 is formed so as to enter the space formed by the setting-unit side wall 100e of the setting unit 100d and the case-side protrusion 100g, which will be described later, and has a protrusion amount enough to contact the setting-unit bottom surface 100f. Is formed by.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71, the protective cover member 140 attached to the right side plate 11d of the outer frame 11 is installed so that the plate surface of the cover plate 171 of the cover part 170 described later faces the front side of the pachinko machine 10. To be done. Further, on the cover plate 171, a setting unit 100d (see FIG. 74) provided on the board box 100 of the main controller 110, which will be described later, is referred to simply as "main controller 110". 110"), and a key surrounded by the cover-side protrusion 172, which is formed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10. And a cover portion 173. Therefore, the key cover portion 173 of the protective cover member 140 and the setting portion 100d of the main control device 110 are configured to face each other.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74, configurations of the setting unit 100d, the cover-side protrusion 172 of the protective cover member 140, and the key cover unit 173 in the main controller 110 of the ninth embodiment will be described. 72 is a front view of the board box 100 of the main controller 110 in the ninth embodiment, FIG. 73 is a cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 taken along the line AA of FIG. 67, and FIG. FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of main controller 110 and protective cover member 140 in a B region of FIG. Note that, for convenience of explanation, in FIG. 72, parts not related to the present invention are omitted, and in FIG. 73, a state in which the front frame 14 is removed from the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12 is shown. The description is also omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 72, in the main controller 110 of the ninth embodiment, the main controller 110 is housed in a board box 100 that is a combination of a box base 100a (see FIG. 74) and a box cover 100b. A setting key 501 used for changing a set probability setting value and for confirming a set probability setting value is provided on a main board constituting the control device 110.

The box cover 100b is provided with a setting unit 100d at a position corresponding to the setting key 501, and the setting unit 100d extends from the outermost surface side of the box cover 100b (that is, the back surface side of the pachinko machine 10) to the cover side projection. The protrusion is recessed by an amount corresponding to the protrusion amount of 172, and is formed to have a size to accommodate the entire cover side protrusion 172. As parts that configure the setting part 100d, a setting part side wall 100e, a setting part bottom surface 100f, and a case side protrusion 100g are provided.

The setting portion side wall 100e is formed so as to extend from the outermost surface side of the box cover 100b toward the main substrate side (not shown). As shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, the setting portion side wall 100e is extended. The depth (the amount of depression of the setting portion 100d) is formed to be equal to the amount of protrusion of the cover-side protrusion 172.

The setting portion bottom surface 100f is formed so as to extend from the setting portion side wall 100e, has a key hole (not shown) that exposes the key hole portion of the setting key 501, and is formed so as to close the portion other than the key hole. .. With this configuration, main controller 110 can be operated on setting key 501 while being housed in the closed space formed by box base 100a (see FIG. 74) and box cover 100b.

The case side protrusion 100g is formed so as to protrude from the setting unit bottom surface 100f toward the protective cover member 140 side (the back side of the pachinko machine 10) so as to have the same protrusion amount as the cover side protrusion 172 of the protective cover member 140. ing. In addition, the cover-side protrusion 172 of the protective cover member 140 is formed so as to be housed in the space formed by the setting portion side wall 100e and the case-side protrusion 100g.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, when the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the cover side protrusion 172 is a space formed by the setting portion side wall 100e and the case side protrusion 100g. The case-side protrusion 100g contacts the cover plate 171 of the protective cover member 140 while the cover-side protrusion 172 contacts the setting part bottom surface 100f of the setting part 100d. .. With this configuration, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the portion where the setting key 501 is disposed is sealed by the key cover portion 173 of the protective cover member 140 and the case side protrusion 100g of the setting portion 100d, and the cover is further provided. By making the side protrusion 172 difficult to access the setting unit 100d, the crime prevention of the setting key 501 is improved and there is no room for wires or the like to enter, so it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on the setting key 501.

Further, the case-side protrusion 100g of the main control device 110 and the cover plate 171 of the protective cover member 140, and the setting portion bottom face 100f of the main control device 110 and the cover-side protrusion 172 of the protective cover member 140 contact each other. Since it is configured, the inner frame 12 cannot be locked with respect to the outer frame 11 if the setting key 501 is still inserted with the setting change key. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the person concerned with the hall from forgetting to collect the key for changing the setting.

68(a) and 68(b), the description will be continued. On the back surface side of the pachinko machine 10 of the cover plate 171 (that is, the side not facing the main controller 110), outer cover ribs 174 are formed in a square and cross rib shape. The outer cover ribs 174 function as reinforcing ribs for the cover plate 171, and prevent the cover plate 171 from being damaged.

Further, by the cover outer rib 174, for example, when an illegal act by a wire is performed from the back side of the pachinko machine 10, when the wire is transmitted to the upper side or the lower side of the cover plate 171, the wire is covered. By hitting the outer ribs 174, it is possible to prevent the wire from entering.

Next, with reference to FIG. 75, the state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of work of changing the settings of the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 75 is a left front perspective view showing the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 developed (opened) with respect to the outer frame 11 to which the protective cover member 140 according to the ninth embodiment is attached. Note that, for convenience of explanation, in FIG. 75, the portions not related to the present invention are omitted or simplified and shown, and the explanation thereof is also omitted.

As shown in FIG. 75, when the person involved in the hall unlocks the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 with respect to the outer frame 11 outside the business hours of the hall, the state shown in FIG. The frame 14 rotates with respect to the outer frame 11, and the back surface side of the inner frame 12 is exposed toward the front surface side of the pachinko machine 10. At this time, the protective cover member 140 remains fixed to the outer frame 11, and the setting key 501 of the main control device 110 installed on the back surface of the inner frame 12 rotates the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14. It is exposed to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 in association with the movement, and can be immediately operated by a person involved in the hall.

Therefore, a person involved in the hall can immediately perform the setting change work of the pachinko machine 10 by unlocking and rotating the inner frame 12 without performing a complicated work such as removing the protective cover member 140. .. In addition, the setting change work can be performed while visually observing the base display device 401, and the setting change work can be easily performed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, the protective cover member 140 that covers the setting key 501 from the back surface side of the pachinko machine 10 is provided on the right side plate 11d of the outer frame 11 with respect to the outer frame 11. When the inner frame 12 is closed, the protective cover member 140 prevents the setting key 501 from being exposed on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when the inner frame 12 is unlocked and the setting change operation is performed, the back surface side of the inner frame 12 is exposed to the front of the pachinko machine 10 with the protective cover member 140 left on the outer frame 11. To be configured.

With this configuration, when the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the setting key 501 is directly operated from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 with a simple configuration using the protective cover member 140. The setting key 501 can be prevented, and an illegal act such as an illegal operation of the setting key 501 can be prevented. Further, since the security performance on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved without using a case structure such as a slot machine, an increase in the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 due to the use of the case structure or the like is suppressed. be able to.

Further, when the inner frame 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11, the setting key 501 of the main controller 110 installed on the back surface of the inner frame 12 causes the pachinko to move as the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 rotate. It is exposed on the front side of the machine 10 and can be immediately operated by a person involved in the hall. Therefore, a person involved in the hall can change the setting of the pachinko machine 10 without performing a complicated work such as removing the protective cover member 140. In addition, the setting change work can be performed while visually observing the base display device 401, and the setting change work can be easily performed.

Further, when the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the cover side protrusion 172 is configured to enter the space formed by the setting portion side wall 100e and the case side protrusion 100g, and the case When the side protrusion 100g contacts the cover plate 171 of the protective cover member 140, the cover side protrusion 172 is configured to contact the setting portion bottom surface 100f of the setting portion 100d. With this configuration, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the portion where the setting key 501 is disposed is sealed by the key cover portion 173 of the protective cover member 140 and the case side protrusion 100g of the setting portion 100d, and the cover is further provided. By making the side protrusion 172 difficult to access the setting unit 100d, the crime prevention of the setting key 501 is improved and there is no room for wires or the like to enter, so it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on the setting key 501.

Further, the case-side protrusion 100g of the main controller 110 and the cover plate 171 of the protective cover member 140 are in contact with the setting portion bottom surface 100f of the main controller 110 and the cover-side protrusion 172 of the protective cover member 140, respectively. Since it is configured, if the setting change key is still inserted in the setting key 501, the inner frame 12 cannot be locked with respect to the outer frame 11. It is possible to prevent forgetting to retrieve the change key.

Further, in a state where the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the inner wall of the right side plate 11d and the curved portion 154 contact each other, and no gap (space) is created between the right side plate 11d and the protective cover member 140. It becomes a state. As a result, in a state where the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the fixing screw 11g inserted into the upper mounting hole 152 and the cover upper mounting hole 11e from the back surface side of the pachinko machine 10 and the lower mounting. Preventing the protective cover member 140 from being removable from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 by making it impossible to directly operate the fixing screw 11g inserted in the hole 153 and the under-cover mounting hole 11f. You can

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a card sanding device is installed adjacent to the island facility, and is normally configured so that no gap is created between the right side plate 11d of the outer frame 11 and the card sanding device. .. Therefore, by configuring so that the fixing screw 11g cannot be directly operated from the right side of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to prevent the protective cover member 140 from being removable from the side of the pachinko machine 10.

Further, the curved portion 154 is formed in a thin plate shape, and is configured to be elastically deformable based on the elastic force of the resin material forming the entire protective cover member 140. Therefore, when an external force is applied to the protective cover member 140, the protective cover member 140 is configured to slightly bend in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 10 by the curved portion 154. With such a configuration, for example, when the inner frame 12 is closed, even if the main control device 110 comes into contact with the protective cover member 140 and an impact is applied due to the momentum at the time of closing, the bending portion 154 is elastic. It is possible to prevent the protective cover member 140 from being damaged by bending due to force and absorbing the impact.

Further, by the upper outer cover portion 162b, the lower outer cover portion 163b, and the outer cover rib 174, for example, when an illegal act by a wire is performed from the back surface of the pachinko machine 10, the wire is raised by the standing cover wall 161 or the cover plate 171. When the wire travels upward or downward from the outside, the wire collides with the upper outer cover portion 162b, the lower outer cover portion 163b, or the cover outer rib 174, so that the wire can be prevented from entering.

Further, the lower inner cover portion 163a is formed to have a large area, and the lower inner cover portion 163a serves to connect the main control device 110 and the protective cover member 140 in the lower right portion in the front view (lower left portion in the rear view) of the main control device 110. The gap is configured to be as small as possible. With this configuration, the lower right side of the main controller 110 when viewed from the front (lower left side when viewed from the rear) is covered, and the lower right of the main controller 110 is viewed from the front (rear view when the setting key 501 and the sealing unit 100c are provided). It is possible to prevent cheating from the lower left side).

As described above, the effects described above can be obtained by the configuration referred to in the description of the ninth embodiment. Further, with the same configuration as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to eighth embodiments, the same effect as that obtained by the configuration can be obtained.

<Tenth Embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a tenth embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 78. In the sixth embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the RAM erasing switch 122, the setting key 501, and the door opening switch 208g that detects the opening of the inner frame 12 (in the tenth embodiment, the inner frame is detected). The start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 is determined according to the state of (opening switch 208g1 will be described instead).

That is, when the power is turned on, the detection mode of the setting key 501 and the RAM deletion switch 122 is detected, and the detection mode of the door opening switch 208g is detected, and the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 is determined according to the detection results. It was configured to change.

However, when the startup mode of the pachinko machine 10 is determined based on the detection result of the door opening switch 208g, if the door opening switch 208g cannot detect ON (that is, opening of the inner frame 12) due to a failure or the like, the door is opened. The startup mode (that is, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode) set based on the detection of the opening switch 208g cannot be started. Therefore, due to erroneous detection of the door opening switch 208g, it is not possible to change settings, which is an important game element of the pachinko machine 10, and it may become impossible to execute the business form expected by the hall.

Further, in the startup process when power is turned on, it is necessary to detect the door opening switch 208g, which complicates the control required when power is turned on, and the processing load on the main controller 110 increases. There is a risk.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, while adopting the protective cover member 140 of the ninth embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the inner frame opening switch 208g1 which is the door opening switch 208g. Regardless of the detection result, the startup mode of the pachinko machine 10 is determined according to the two detection states of the RAM erase switch 122 and the setting key 501.

With this configuration, the protective cover member 140 prevents illicit acts on the setting key 501 from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 when the inner frame 12 is closed, and at the same time, when the inner frame 12 is opened, the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is operated. Regardless of reliability, it is possible to change settings, which is an important game element of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, while improving the security performance of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to surely execute the business form assumed by the hall.

In addition, since the process of detecting the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is unnecessary in the startup process at the time of power-on, the process for the detection process is not executed, and thus the processing load on the main control device 110 is reduced. You can

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment will be described focusing on the points different from the pachinko machines 10 according to the first to ninth embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, the same components and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment to the ninth embodiment will be denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the first embodiment to the ninth embodiment. And its illustration and description are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 76, each start-up mode when the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment is turned on will be described. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a startup mode of the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment, and a RAM erase switch 122 and a setting key 501 for turning on the pachinko machine 10 for each startup mode when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. It is a figure showing each information of.

As in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment is provided with four modes including a normal mode, a RAM clear mode, a setting change mode, and a setting confirmation mode. ing. The RAM clear mode is a mode for erasing (clearing) the data stored in the RAM 203 in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state. The setting change mode is a mode for changing the set probability setting value. The setting confirmation mode is a mode for confirming the set probability setting value.

The normal mode is a startup mode other than the RAM clear mode, the setting change mode, and the setting confirmation mode, and when the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 or the data stored in the RAM 203 is corrupted. Except for the above, this is a mode for restarting the game of the pachinko machine 10 from the state before power-off by executing various start-up processes while holding the data stored in the RAM 203.

Then, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on without turning on the RAM erase switch 122 and with the setting key 501 in the off state, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the normal mode. When the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key 501 is in the off state, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the RAM clear mode.

On the other hand, when the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on and the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key 501 is turned on, regardless of the detection result of the door opening switch 208 (that is, even if it is on detection). The pachinko machine 10 starts up in the setting change mode even if the off state is detected. Further, when the setting key 501 is turned on and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the RAM erasing switch 122 is off, regardless of the detection result of the inner frame opening switch 208g1 (that is, even if it is on detection). The pachinko machine 10 starts up in the setting confirmation mode even when the off state is detected.

As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, regardless of whether the inner frame 12 is unlocked or not, if the setting key 501 is in the off state, a hall person or the like can delete the RAM erase switch. Depending on whether or not 122 is turned on, it is possible to select whether the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the RAM clear mode or the normal mode, which is a start-up mode not related to the probability setting value.

On the other hand, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, regardless of whether the inner frame 12 is unlocked or not, if the setting key 501 is turned on, a hall person or the like turns on the RAM erase switch 122. Depending on whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, it is possible to select, as the startup mode of the pachinko machine 10, a setting change mode related to the probability setting value or a setting confirmation mode.

That is, regardless of the detection mode of the inner frame opening switch 208g1, depending on whether the setting key 501 is in the off state or the on state, the start-up mode not related to the probability setting value and the probability setting value are related. You can select the startup mode with. When the startup mode is set regardless of the probability setting value, either the RAM clear mode or the normal mode can be selected as the startup mode depending on whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. When setting the startup mode that is related to the probability setting value, it is possible to select whether the startup mode is the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode depending on whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on.

Here, since the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment is configured such that the setting change or the setting confirmation can be performed regardless of the opening of the inner frame 12, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 when the inner frame 12 is closed. Although there is a concern that a fraudulent act may be caused by an illegal operation on the setting key 501 from the above, the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment employs the protective cover member 140 of the ninth embodiment. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the protective cover member 140 is configured so as not to directly contact the setting key 501 and the sealing unit 100c from the back side of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts when the inner frame 12 is closed, while enabling setting changes and the like without performing processing such as detecting the opening of the inner frame 12.

In other words, the provision of the protective cover member 140 means that the inner frame 12 is opened when the setting key 501 is operated. Therefore, even if the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is not detected in the process, it is possible to recognize that the inner frame 12 is open.

Next, with reference to FIG. 77, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 77 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 77, an inner frame opening switch 208g1 is connected to the input/output port 205 of the main controller 110 of the tenth embodiment. The inner frame opening switch 208g1 is for detecting whether or not the inner frame 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11, and a projecting piece (not shown) projecting to the upper back side of the inner frame 12. An elastic body (not shown) that applies an elastic force such as a spring to the projecting piece, and a detection sensor (not shown) that detects the position of the projecting piece. The protruding piece of the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is pressed into the upper portion of the outer frame 11 when the inner frame 12 is closed, and the force of the cylinder lock 20 is stronger than the elastic force of the elastic body. On the other hand, when the dedicated key is inserted into the cylinder lock 20 and rotated in the first direction (for example, clockwise), the inner frame 12 is released from the outer frame 11, and when the inner frame 12 is opened, the elastic force of the elastic body is released. The protruding piece is configured to protrude toward the outer frame 11 side. Then, when the protrusion of the protruding piece is detected by the detection sensor, it is determined whether the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is on, and the inner frame opening signal is output.

The detection result of the inner frame opening switch 208g1 (that is, the presence/absence of the inner frame opening signal) is input to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via the input/output port 205. In this case, when the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is not determined to be ON and does not output the inner frame opening signal to the MPU 201. On the other hand, the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is turned on when the inner frame 12 is open with respect to the outer frame 11, and outputs an inner frame opening signal to the MPU 201. The MPU 201 specifies that the inner frame 12 is in the open state when the inner frame opening signal is input from the inner frame opening switch 208g1, and closes the inner frame 12 when the inner frame opening signal is not input. Identify the condition.

Next, with reference to FIG. 78, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment is powered on will be described. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup processing is started by a reset when the power is turned on.

In the startup process of the tenth embodiment, first, an initial value setting process associated with power-on is executed (S4401). For example, access permission to the RAM 203 is set, and a predetermined value set in advance is set to the stack pointer.

Next, an internal function register setting process is executed (S4402). In the tenth embodiment, as in the eighth embodiment, the base display control process (see FIG. 57) for controlling the display content displayed on the base display device 401 is triggered by a 2-millisecond timer interrupt that occurs every 2 ms. Execute. In the process of S4402, for example, the 2-millisecond timer interrupt is permitted. Further, when a random number value necessary for performing a big hit lottery or a lottery lottery is generated by a random number generation circuit (not shown) provided in the main controller 110, in the process of S4402, a range of random number values to be generated ( Maximum value). Further, in the process of S4402, access to the RAM 203 is permitted. Further, in the processing of S4402, main controller 110 makes various settings for transmitting and receiving signals by serial communication with payout controller 111 and voice lamp controller 113.

In particular, by enabling the 2 millisecond timer interrupt in this internal function register setting processing, a 2 millisecond timer interrupt is generated every 2 milliseconds and the base display control processing is executed. Then, when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the probability setting value can be displayed on the base display device 401.

In the process of S4402, it is not always necessary to set the range (maximum value) of random number values. In the process of S4402, when the range of random value (maximum value) is not set, in the other startup process (S4421) described later executed at the stage of transition from the startup process to the main process, The range (maximum value) of the random value not performed in the process of S4402 may be set.

Next, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S4403). As a result, if the power-off occurrence information is stored (S4403: Yes), it means that the process at the time of the previous power-off is normally completed, and then the RAM determination value is calculated and calculated. It is determined whether the determined RAM determination value is normal, that is, whether the calculated RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored when the power is shut off (S4404). The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. In the tenth embodiment, the case where the probability setting value stored in the RAM 203 is excluded from the checksum value calculation will be described, but the probability setting value may be included in the checksum value calculation.

As a result of the processing in S4404, when it is determined that the calculated RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off (S4404: Yes), the RAM determination value is normal and at least used for calculating the RAM determination value. Since it can be determined that the stored data (information) is normally held, it is then determined whether the probability setting value is within the normal range (“1” to “6”) (S4405). Here, to determine whether the probability setting value is within the normal range, it is determined whether the probability setting value at that stage is normal although the process related to the power cut was normally performed when the power was turned off last time. This is because it may be broken and out of the normal range. The processing of S4405 is performed in order to reliably detect such an abnormality in the probability setting value.

If the probability setting value is within the normal range (S4405: Yes), it is then determined whether the setting change flag 203x13 (see FIG. 61) is on (S4406). If the setting change flag 203x13 is on (S4406: Yes), it means that the setting change process was being executed when the power was last turned off, that is, the power supply is being updated while the probability setting value is being updated by the setting change process. Indicates that it has been turned off. Therefore, in this case, the process proceeds to S4413, and the setting change process is executed (S4413).

As a result, the startup mode when the power is turned on after the power is turned off while changing the settings is not only the startup operation for starting in the setting change mode, but also other startup operations. Even if the operation is performed, the setting change mode can be set to execute the setting change process again from the beginning. Therefore, if the power is turned off during the setting change, the probability of the probability setting value can be changed from the beginning when the power is turned on thereafter. Therefore, the probability setting value can be surely changed by the person concerned with the hall and the change can be confirmed. Therefore, even if the power is turned off while the settings are being changed, hall personnel can reliably update and confirm the probability setting value when the power is turned on again, and the pachinko machine can be used with confidence. The probability setting value for 10 can be changed.

Also, by restarting the setting change process from the beginning (from the beginning), instead of continuing from the probability setting value being updated at the time the power was turned off during the setting change and restarting the updating of the probability setting value, By using the probability setting value (probability setting value data 203x11) used in the game so far, the probability setting value can be updated again from the beginning. Therefore, a person concerned with the hall or the like can re-update the probability setting work with confidence.

On the other hand, if the setting change flag 203x13 (see FIG. 61) is off as a result of the process of S4406 (S4406: No), it means that the setting change process was not being executed when the power was last turned off. Therefore, next, as a process for confirming the start-up operation performed when the hall-related person turns on the pachinko machine 10, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S4407). In the process of S4407, since the 4-millisecond timer interrupt is not permitted and the timer interrupt process is not executed, the state of the RAM erase switch 122 is read in the switch state read process of the timer interrupt process. Instead of making a judgment by using one, the state of the RAM erase switch 122 is read by directly accessing the input/output port 205.

As a result of the processing in S4407, if the RAM erase switch 122 is turned off (S4407: No), it is then determined whether or not the setting key 501 is in the on state to further confirm the startup operation ( S4408). In the 10th embodiment, the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is not detected in S4408. Therefore, the process of detecting the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is not necessary in the process of turning on the power supply, and the process of the detection process is not executed, so that the process load of the main controller 110 can be reduced. ..

If the setting key 501 is in the off state as a result of the processing in S4408 (S4408: N0), the RAM erasing switch 122 is off and the setting key 501 is in the off state. It means that you operated. Then, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation flag 203x14 (see FIG. 61) is on (S4409). As a result, when the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is on (S4409: Yes), it means that the setting confirmation process was being executed when the power was last turned off, that is, the probability setting value is confirmed by the setting confirmation process. Indicates that the power supply was cut off. In this case, as shown in FIG. 62, the setting confirmation process is executed from the beginning (S4410). By the setting confirmation process, the currently set probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401. Thereby, the probability setting value can be confirmed.

As described above, even when the hall-related person performs the startup operation for launching in the normal mode as the startup operation, instead of launching the pachinko machine 10 in the normal mode, the setting confirmation process is performed from the beginning ( Start the pachinko machine 10 in the setting confirmation mode in which the operation is performed again (from the beginning). As a result, even if the hall person or the like starts up by the operation in the normal mode after the power is turned off during the setting confirmation, the probability setting value can be confirmed. As a result, the hall-related person or the like can confirm that the probability setting value has not been destroyed due to the power being turned off during the setting confirmation, so that the pachinko machine 10 can be started up with peace of mind.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S4409, when it is determined that the setting confirmation flag 203x14 (see FIG. 61) is off (S4409: No), the setting confirmation processing was not being executed when the power was last turned off. Means that Further, the processing of S4409 is executed when it is determined that the setting change flag 203x13 (see FIG. 61) is off in the processing of S4406 (S4406: No), that is, when the power is turned off last time. This is also the case when the setting change process is not being executed.

Therefore, in this case, the startup mode is set to the normal mode shown by the hall-related person in the startup operation, and the setting confirmation process of S4410 and the process of S4411 described later are skipped and other startup processes are executed. After that (S4414), the process proceeds to the main process. In addition, as other startup processing, a 4-millisecond timer interrupt is permitted. In the tenth embodiment, similarly to the eighth embodiment, the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 58) for performing the main control of the game is executed with the 4-millisecond timer interrupt generated every 4 milliseconds as a trigger. By allowing the 4-millisecond timer interrupt in the process of S4414, the timer interrupt process is executed every 4 msec.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S4408, when it is determined that the setting key 501 is in the on state (S4408: Yes), the RAM erasing switch 122 is off and the setting key 501 is in the on state. Indicates that the startup operation was performed in the setting confirmation mode. Here, the process of S4408 is executed when the setting change flag 203x13 (see FIG. 61) is determined to be off in the process of S4406 (S4406: No), that is, the power supply was turned off last time. This is the case when the setting change process is not being executed. Therefore, in this case, as shown in FIG. 62, regardless of whether or not the setting confirmation processing was being executed when the power was last turned off, the pachinko machine 10 is set in the setting confirmation mode in which a hall person or the like has started up the operation. To start up, the process proceeds to S4410, and the setting confirmation process is executed (S4410). By the setting confirmation process, the currently set probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401. Thereby, the probability setting value can be confirmed.

When the setting confirmation processing (S4410) is completed, external output processing is executed (S4411). In this external output processing, information indicating that the setting confirmation processing has been executed or that the probability setting value has been displayed on the base display device 401 is output to the hall computer 600 via the external output terminal 503. As a result, a hall-related person or the like can recognize that the setting confirmation process is executed by the pachinko machine 10 and the probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401. Therefore, when the probability setting value is illegitimately displayed, it can be grasped promptly. After the external output processing is executed, other startup processing is executed (S4421), and the processing shifts to the main processing.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the RAM erasing switch 122 is turned on in the process of S4407, which is a process for confirming the start-up operation performed when a person related to the hall turns on the pachinko machine 10, ( (S4407: Yes), to further confirm the startup operation, it is determined whether the setting key 501 is in the on state (S4412). In the tenth embodiment, in S4412, the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is not detected. Therefore, the process of detecting the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is not necessary in the process of turning on the power supply, and the process of the detection process is not executed, so that the process load of the main controller 110 can be reduced. ..

If the setting key 501 is in the on state as a result of the processing in S4412 (S4412: Yes), the RAM erasing switch 122 is on and the setting key 501 is in the on state. It means that it was lifted. When the startup operation is performed in the setting change mode, as shown in FIG. 62, regardless of whether the setting confirmation flag 203x14 (see FIG. 61) is on, that is, the setting confirmation process is performed when the power is turned off last time. The startup mode of the pachinko machine 10 is set to the setting change mode regardless of whether it is being executed.

Therefore, as a result of the processing in S4412, if the setting key 501 is in the on state (S4412: Yes), the setting change processing is executed (S4413). By the setting change process, the probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401, and when the RAM erasing switch 122 is turned on by a person concerned with the hall or the like, the probability setting value is updated and the setting key 501 is turned off. The updated probability setting value is determined as the probability setting value to be used in the game from now on, and the RAM clearing process is performed. Thereby, after changing the probability setting value, the game machine can be newly started with the changed probability setting value.

Here, even if the setting confirmation process is being executed when the power is turned off last time, the fact that the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on means that it is related to the hall. Clearly indicate the intention to change the probability setting value. Therefore, in this case, by starting the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode, it is possible to perform the start-up process according to the intention of the hall personnel.

When the setting change processing (S4413) is completed, external output processing is executed (S4414). In this external output processing, information indicating that the setting change processing has been executed or the probability setting value has been changed is output to the hall computer 600 via the external output terminal 503. As a result, a person involved in the hall or the like can understand that the setting change process is executed by the pachinko machine 10 and the probability setting value is changed. Therefore, when the probability setting value is illicitly changed, the probability setting value can be grasped promptly. After the external output processing is executed, other startup processing is executed (S4421), and the processing shifts to the main processing.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S4412, if the setting key 501 is in the off state (S4412: No), then it is determined whether the RAM is abnormal by referring to whether the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 (see FIG. 61) is on. It is determined whether or not (S4415). Here, it is determined by the process of S4407 that the RAM erase switch 122 is on (S4407: Yes), by the process of S4412 it is determined that the setting key 501 is off (S4412: No), and the process of S4415 is performed. When it is executed, the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is always off, so it is determined in the processing of S4415 that there is no RAM abnormality (S4415: No).

Further, in this case, in the process of S4406, it is determined that the setting change flag 203x13 (see FIG. 61) is off (S4406: No), so the setting change process is being executed when the power was last turned off. If not. Therefore, it is determined by the process of S4407 that the RAM deletion switch 122 is on (S4407: Yes), the setting key 501 is determined by the process of S4412 that it is off (S4412: No), and the RAM abnormality occurs by the process of S4415. If it is determined that it is not (S4415: No), it means that the person related to the hall has performed the startup operation in the RAM clear mode, and the setting change process was not being executed when the power was last turned off. The pachinko machine 10 is started in the RAM clear mode regardless of whether or not the setting confirmation process was being executed when the power was last turned off. Therefore, the RAM clear process is executed (S4416).

In this RAM clearing process, of the data stored in the RAM 203, predetermined data except data used for controlling the game (probability set value data 203x11 (see FIG. 61) stored in the inner work area 203x1 (see FIG. 61)) Data) is erased (cleared) while the accessory ratio data 203s, the base value data 203r, and the error data 203t (see FIG. 53) stored in the outside work area 203y1 (see FIG. 53) Retain without erasing. The game can be newly started by deleting the data used for controlling the game (predetermined data excluding the probability setting value data 203x11 stored in the inner work area 203x1). Further, even if the RAM clearing process is executed, the probability setting value data 203x11 is retained, so that the game can be continued with the probability setting value that was fixed before the RAM clearing process was executed.

Here, as described above, even when the setting confirmation process was being executed when the power was last turned off, there is no RAM abnormality and the startup operation for booting in the RAM clear mode is performed. The pachinko machine 10 is started up in the RAM clear mode as per the start-up operation of the hall personnel. The fact that the RAM erasing switch 122 is turned on indicates that the person concerned with the hall or the like at least clearly wants to clear the RAM. Therefore, in this case, by starting the pachinko machine 10 in the RAM clear mode, it is possible to perform the start-up process according to the intentions of the persons related to the hall.

When the RAM clearing process in S4416 is completed, other startup processes are executed (S4421) and the process proceeds to the main process.

On the other hand, when it is determined by the process of S4403 that the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S4403: No), the calculated RAM determination value is the same as the RAM determination value saved when the power is shut off by the process of S4404. If they do not match and it is determined that the RAM determination value is abnormal (S4404: No), or if it is determined by the processing of S4405 that the probability setting value is not within the normal range (S4405: No). If any of the above is true, it can be determined that the RAM 203 has an abnormality, so the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 (see FIG. 61) is turned on (S4417), and in order to confirm the start-up operation by a person related to the hall, etc. , It is determined whether the RAM erase switch 122 is on (S4418). In the process of S4418 as well as the process of S4407, the input/output port 205 is directly accessed to read the state of the RAM erase switch 122.

As a result of the processing of S4418, when it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is on (S4418: Yes), the process proceeds to the processing of S4412 described above, and it is further determined whether or not the setting key 501 is in the on state. It is determined (S4412). As a result, when the setting key 501 is in the ON state (S4412: Yes), it means that a person related to the hall or the like has started up in the setting change mode. Then, in this case (S4412: Yes), in order to start up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode in accordance with the start-up operation of the person related to the hall or the like, the process proceeds to S4413 and the above-mentioned setting change process is executed.

Here, even if a RAM abnormality occurs, if the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode, the probability setting value can be reset and the RAM can be cleared. Therefore, the game can be newly started with the newly set normal probability setting value. The RAM clear flag 203x15 (see FIG. 61) is turned off by this RAM clear. Therefore, after that, the main control device 110 can control the game without executing the process related to the RAM abnormality.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is off as a result of the process of S4418 (S4418: No), or if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is on as a result of the process of S4418, S4412. When it is determined that the setting key 501 is in the off state as a result of the processing of (S4418: Yes, or S4412: No), the hall person or the like sets the normal mode, the RAM clear mode, and the setting in the RAM abnormality. It means that the startup operation was performed in one of the startup modes of the confirmation mode.

In this case, the process shifts to S4415 described above, and in the process of S4415, it is always determined that the RAM is abnormal (S4415: Yes), and the process shifts to S4419. In the process of S4419, a RAM abnormality setting process is performed (S4419). In the RAM abnormality setting processing, processing for notifying the RAM abnormality is executed. For example, a voice lamp is used so that the power output is once turned off, and the notification prompting to start the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode is performed by voice output from the voice output device 226 and/or display on the third symbol display device 81. The command is transmitted to the control device 113.

Then, external output processing for notifying the hall computer 600 of the RAM abnormality via the external output terminal 503 is executed (S4420), and other startup processing is executed (S4421), and the processing shifts to the main processing. To do. Since the RAM abnormality is notified to the hall computer 600, a hall person or the like can surely know that the RAM abnormality has occurred, without being aware of the notification from the pachinko machine 10.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the protective cover member 140 according to the ninth embodiment is used, the door opening switch 208g is not included. Regardless of the detection result of the frame opening switch 208g1, the startup mode of the pachinko machine 10 is determined according to the two detection states of the RAM deletion switch 122 and the setting key 501. With this configuration, the protective cover member 140 prevents illicit acts on the setting key 501 from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 when the inner frame 12 is closed, and at the same time, when the inner frame 12 is opened, the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is operated. Regardless of reliability, it is possible to change settings, which is an important game element of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, while improving the security performance of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to surely execute the business form assumed by the hall.

In addition, since the process of detecting the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is unnecessary in the startup process at the time of power-on, the process for the detection process is not executed, and thus the processing load on the main control device 110 is reduced. You can

As described above, the effects described above can be obtained by the configuration described in the description of the tenth embodiment. Further, with the same configuration as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to ninth embodiments, the same effect as that obtained by the configuration can be obtained.

<Eleventh Embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to an eleventh embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81. In the tenth embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 is responsive to the states of the RAM erase switch 122 and the setting key 501 regardless of the detection mode of the inner frame opening switch 208g1. Had decided the launch mode of.

On the other hand, in the eleventh embodiment, when the front frame opening switch 208g2 that detects the opening of the front frame 14 is provided and the inner frame opening switch 208g1 detects the opening of the inner frame 12 (that is, ON detection), In addition, when the front frame opening switch 208g2 detects closing of the front frame 14 (that is, OFF detection), the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is activated. On the other hand, even when the inner frame opening switch 208g1 detects closing of the inner frame 12 (that is, OFF detection), or even when the inner frame opening switch 208g1 detects opening of the inner frame 12, the front surface When the frame opening switch 208g2 detects the opening of the front frame 14 (that is, ON detection), the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is not started, but is started in the normal mode.

Conventionally, if the setting of the pachinko machine 10 is easily changed to a state in which the setting can be changed or the setting can be confirmed, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set as much as possible because it is not possible to eliminate the room for unauthorized setting change or setting confirmation. It is desirable to take multi-step security measures for the pachinko machine 10 so as not to shift.

On the other hand, when a person involved in the hall performs maintenance work on the pachinko machine 10, both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are opened from the outer frame 11, and the maintenance work is performed by the hall having the authority to change settings and confirm settings. It is general that not the person in charge, but an employee in the hall who does not have the authority to change or check the settings.

Here, if the employee in the hall who does not have the authority to change or confirm the setting can enter the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode during the maintenance work, the employee has become incompetent with an external illicit person. The information on the setting status of the pachinko machine 10 may be leaked to the unauthorized person.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, it is possible to change the setting or confirm the setting during the maintenance work in which both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are open, so that the authority to change the setting can be given. It is possible to improve the security performance for the pachinko machine 10 by making it difficult to change settings or the like for an unemployed employee.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with a focus on differences from the pachinko machines 10 according to the first to tenth embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, the same components and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to tenth embodiments will be designated by the same reference numerals as those of the first to tenth embodiments. And its illustration and description are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 79, each start-up mode when the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment is powered on will be described. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a startup mode of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment, and a RAM erase switch 122 and a setting key 501 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on for booting in each startup mode. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing information on each of the inner frame opening switch 208g1 and the front frame opening switch 208g2.

As in the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment, the startup mode of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment is provided with four modes including a normal mode, a RAM clear mode, a setting change mode, and a setting confirmation mode. ing. The RAM clear mode is a mode for erasing (clearing) the data stored in the RAM 203 in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state. The setting change mode is a mode for changing the set probability setting value. The setting confirmation mode is a mode for confirming the set probability setting value.

The normal mode is a startup mode other than the RAM clear mode, the setting change mode, and the setting confirmation mode, and when the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 or the data stored in the RAM 203 is corrupted. Except for the above, this is a mode for restarting the game of the pachinko machine 10 from the state before power-off by executing various start-up processes while holding the data stored in the RAM 203.

Then, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on without turning on the RAM deletion switch 122 and with the setting key 501 kept in the off state, the detection mode of the inner frame opening switch 208g1 and the front frame opening switch 208g2 is determined. Regardless, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the normal mode. When the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on and the pachinko machine 10 is powered on while the setting key 501 is in the off state, the pachinko machine 10 regardless of the detection mode of the inner frame opening switch 208g1 and the front frame opening switch 208g2. Starts up in RAM clear mode.

In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, this normal mode may be set based on the detection mode of the inner frame opening switch 208g1 or the front frame opening switch 208g2 even when the setting key 501 is turned on. is there.

Specifically, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, even if the RAM erase switch 122 and the setting key 501 are both on, the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is not on or the front frame opening switch 208g2 is off. If not, that is, if the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is off or the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is on, the front frame opening switch 208g2 is on, the normal mode is started instead of the setting change mode. Is configured.

Even when the RAM erase switch 122 is off and the setting key 501 is on when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is not on or the front frame opening switch 208g2 is on. If it is not turned off, that is, if the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is off or the front frame opening switch 208g2 is on even if the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is on, it is not the setting confirmation mode but the normal mode. Is configured to stand up.

Conventionally, when a person involved in the hall performs maintenance work on the pachinko machine 10, both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are opened from the outer frame 11, and the setting change is not made by the person in charge of the setting change or confirmation of the setting. Employees in halls that do not have the authority to check settings and settings are generally used. That is, during maintenance work on the pachinko machine 10, the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is turned on and the front frame opening switch 208g2 is turned on.

Here, if the employee in the hall who does not have the authority to change or confirm the setting can enter the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode during the maintenance work, the employee has become incompetent with an external illicit person. The information on the setting status of the pachinko machine 10 may be leaked to the unauthorized person.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, during maintenance work in which both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are open, that is, when both the inner frame open switch 208g1 and the front frame open switch 208g2 are on. , Configure so that the setting cannot be changed or confirmed. With this configuration, it is difficult to change or confirm the setting for an employee who does not have the authority to change the setting, so that the security performance for the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

Next, when the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on and the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key 501 is turned on, the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is on and the front frame opening switch 208g2 is off. The pachinko machine 10 starts up in the setting change mode on condition that there is. When the setting key 501 is turned on and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the RAM erasing switch 122 is off, the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is on and the front frame opening switch 208g2 is off. On that condition, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the setting confirmation mode.

As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the hall person or the like turns the pachinko machine 10 off depending on whether the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on after the setting key 501 is turned off. As the start-up mode, it is possible to select the RAM clear mode or the normal mode which is a start-up mode not related to the probability setting value.

On the other hand, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, if the setting key 501 is turned on under the condition that only the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is turned on, a hall person or the like can turn on the RAM erase switch 122. Depending on whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, it is possible to select, as a startup mode of the pachinko machine 10, a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode related to the probability set value.

That is, first, depending on whether the setting key 501 is turned off or on, a startup mode irrelevant to the probability setting value and a startup mode irrelevant to the probability setting value can be selected. When the start-up mode is set regardless of the probability setting value, the RAM erasing switch 122 is turned on regardless of the detection mode of the inner frame opening switch 208g1 and the front frame opening switch 208g2. While it is possible to select whether the start-up mode is the RAM clear mode or the normal mode, when the start-up mode is related to the probability set value, only the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is turned on. Depending on whether or not the erase switch 122 is turned on, it is possible to select whether the startup mode is the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 80, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 80 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 80, a front frame opening switch 208g2 is connected to the input/output port 205 of the main controller 110 of the eleventh embodiment as the door opening switch 208g in addition to the inner frame opening switch 208g1. The front frame opening switch 208g2 is for detecting whether or not the front frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 12, and a front projecting piece (not shown) projecting to the upper back side of the front frame 14 is shown. ), a front elastic body (not shown) that applies an elastic force such as a spring to the front protrusion, and a front detection sensor (not shown) that detects the position of the front protrusion. When the front frame 14 is closed, the front protruding piece of the front frame opening switch 208g2 is pressed against the upper portion of the inner frame 12, and the cylinder lock 20 is stronger than the elastic force of the front elastic body. On the other hand, when the dedicated key is inserted into the cylinder lock 20 and rotated in the second direction (for example, counterclockwise direction) different from the first direction, the front frame 14 is released from the inner frame 12, and the front frame 14 When is opened, the front projecting piece is configured to project toward the inner frame 12 side by the elastic force of the front elastic body. Then, when the front face detection sensor detects the protrusion of the front face protruding piece, the front frame opening switch 208g2 is determined to be ON, and the front frame opening signal is output.

The detection result of the front frame opening switch 208g2 (that is, the presence/absence of the front frame opening signal) is input to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via the input/output port 205. In this case, the front frame opening switch 208g2 is not turned on when the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12, and does not output the front frame opening signal to the MPU 201. On the other hand, the front frame opening switch 208g2 is turned on when the front frame 14 is open with respect to the inner frame 12, and outputs a front frame opening signal to the MPU 201. The MPU 201 specifies that the front frame 14 is in the open state when the front frame open signal is input from the front frame open switch 208g2, and closes the front frame 14 when the front frame open signal is not input. Identify the condition.

Next, with reference to FIG. 81, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment is powered on will be described. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup processing is started by a reset when the power is turned on.

The start-up process of the eleventh embodiment is different from the start-up process of the tenth embodiment in that when the RAM erase switch 122 is off and the setting key 501 is on, the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is turned on. On condition that the front frame opening switch 208g2 is off, the setting confirmation process (S4410) is executed, the RAM erase switch 122 is on, and the setting key 501 is on. In some cases, the setting change process (S4413) is executed on condition that the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is on and the front frame opening switch 208g2 is off, and the inner frame opening switch 208g1 and In the confirmation processing of the front frame opening switch 208g2, when the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is not on, or when the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is on but the front frame opening switch 208g2 is not off (that is, on) It is to start in the normal mode without starting in the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode.

In the startup process of the eleventh embodiment, in the determination of the setting key 501 in S4408, it is determined that the setting key 501 is not on (S4408: No), and the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is on. If it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not turned on (SS4409: No), the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 and the setting key 501 both turned off. Therefore, the process proceeds to S4421 to start in the normal mode. ..

On the other hand, in the process of S4408, when it is determined that the setting key 501 is turned on (S4408: Yes), or even when it is determined that the setting key 501 is turned off (S4408: No). ), if it is determined that the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is turned on (S4409: Yes), the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on, and the setting key 501 is turned on, so that the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Since it is turned on, the process proceeds to S4451 to confirm whether the setting confirmation process (S4410) can be executed, that is, whether it is not the maintenance work.

In the process of S4451, it is determined whether the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is turned on (S4451). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is turned on (S4451: Yes), that is, if it is determined that the inner frame 12 is in the open state, then the front frame opening switch 208g2 is turned on. It is determined whether it is off (S4452). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the front frame opening switch 208g2 is off (S4452: Yes), that is, if the front frame 14 is determined to be closed, the person in charge of the hall having the setting confirmation authority. Thus, it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the process proceeds to S4410, and the setting confirmation process (S4410) is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S4451, when it is determined that the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is not turned on (S4451: No), that is, when it is determined that the inner frame 12 is in the closed state, the outer frame 11 is compared with the outer frame 11. Since the inner frame 12 is closed and there is a possibility of fraudulent activity from the back side of the pachinko machine 10, the setting confirmation process (S4410) is not executed and the process proceeds to S4421 Start up in mode.

Further, in the processing of S4452, when it is determined that the front frame opening switch 208g2 is not turned off (S4452: No), that is, it is determined that the inner frame 12 is in the open state and the front frame 14 is in the open state. If so, it is highly likely that the pachinko machine 10 is performing maintenance work. Therefore, the setting confirmation process (S4410) is not executed, the process proceeds to S4421, and the normal mode is started.

Next, if the setting change flag 203x13 is determined to be on in the process of S4406 (S4406: Yes), or if the setting key 501 is determined to be on in the process of S4412, the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. Since it means that the pachinko machine 10 is powered on while the setting key 501 is on, the setting change process (S4413) can be executed, that is, whether the maintenance work is not performed. In order to confirm that, the process proceeds to S4453.

In the process of S4453, similarly to the process of S4451, it is determined whether the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is turned on (S4453). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is turned on (S4453: Yes), that is, if it is determined that the inner frame 12 is in the open state, then the front frame opening switch 208g2 is turned on. It is determined whether it is off (S4454). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the front frame opening switch 208g2 is off (S4454: Yes), that is, when the front frame 14 is determined to be closed, the person in charge of the hall having the setting confirmation authority. Thus, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is considered to be turned on, the process proceeds to S4413, and the setting change process (S4413) is executed.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4453, when it is determined that the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is not turned on (S4453: No), that is, when it is determined that the inner frame 12 is in the closed state, the outer frame 11 is compared with the outer frame 11. Since the inner frame 12 is closed and there is a possibility of a fraudulent act from the back side of the pachinko machine 10, the setting change process (S4413) is not executed, the process proceeds to S4421, and the normal operation is performed. Start up in mode.

Further, in the processing of S4454, when it is determined that the front frame opening switch 208g2 is not turned off (S4454: No), that is, it is determined that the inner frame 12 is in the open state and the front frame 14 is in the open state. If so, it is highly likely that the pachinko machine 10 is performing maintenance work, so the setting change process (S4413) is not executed, the process proceeds to S4421, and the normal mode is started.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, only the inner frame 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11, that is, the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is turned on and the front frame is opened. When the opening switch 208g2 is off, the setting change or the setting confirmation work can be performed, while the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are both opened during the maintenance work, that is, the inner frame open switch. When both 208g1 and the front frame opening switch 208g2 are on, the setting change or the setting confirmation cannot be performed. Therefore, during maintenance work in which both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are open, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the normal mode, not in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. With this configuration, it is difficult to change or confirm the setting for an employee who does not have the authority to change the setting, so that the security performance for the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

As described above, the effects described above can be obtained by the configuration referred to in the description of the eleventh embodiment. Further, with the same configuration as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to tenth embodiments, it is possible to obtain the same effect as that obtained by the configuration.

<Twelfth Embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the protective cover member 140 attached to the outer frame 11 covers the setting key 501 and the sealing unit 100c of the main controller 110, and when the inner frame 12 is closed. The setting key 501 and the sealing unit 100c are so constructed that they cannot be directly operated.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment, the protective cover member 140 is extended to the left side in front view (that is, the right side in rear view) up to the portion covering the connector attachment part 100h of the main control device 110, and is paid out. The controller 111 is formed so as to extend downward to the front side up to the portion covering the sealing portion 111a. That is, in addition to the setting key 501 and the sealing unit 100c of the main control device 110, the connector attaching portion 100h of the main control device 110 and the sealing portion 111a of the payout control device 111 are configured to be covered by the protective cover member 140. ..

With this configuration, when the inner frame 12 is closed, in addition to the setting key 501 of the main control device 110 and the sealing unit 100c, a connector connector used for communication of control signals to the respective control devices 111, 113 and the like. It is possible to prevent direct operation from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to parts related to the game specifications, such as the wearing part 100h and the sealing part 111a of the payout control device 111 that manages the payout of prize balls and rental balls. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the security performance on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described focusing on the points different from the pachinko machines 10 according to the first to eleventh embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment, the same components and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to eleventh embodiments will be designated by the same reference numerals as those of the first to eleventh embodiments. And the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

Here, the configuration of the protective cover member 140 in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83. FIG. 82 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment, and FIG. 83 is a right side view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment. For convenience of description, FIG. 82 shows the front frame 14 removed from the outer frame 11 and inner frame 12, and FIG. 83 shows the inner frame 12 and front frame 14 removed from the outer frame 11. Are illustrated and their description is omitted.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment in that the cover plate 171 of the protective cover member 140 includes the connector mounting portion 100h of the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. The point that the back side of the pachinko machine 10 with the sealing portion 111a is covered, and the standing cover wall 161 and the standing lower cover portion 163 of the protective cover member 140 are the right side when viewed from the front side of the sealing section 111a of the payout control device 111 (the left side when viewed from the rear side). ) And the positions of the cover lower mounting hole 11f of the right side plate 11d and the lower mounting hole 153 of the cover mounting portion 150 are provided slightly below the ninth embodiment. Other configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the standing cover wall 161 of the protective cover member 140 of the twelfth embodiment is continuously slid from the curved portion 154 of the cover mounting portion 150 formed longer than that of the ninth embodiment. It is formed so as to extend toward the rear side of the machine 10 (see FIG. 83). The standing cover wall 161 covers the right side surface of the main control device 110 in front view (left side surface in rear view) and the right side surface of the payout control device 111 in front view (left side surface in rear view). Therefore, the setting key 501 of the main control device 110 and the sealing unit 100c, and the side of the pachinko machine 10 provided with the sealing portion 111a of the payout control device 111 when viewed from the right side in the front view (the left side when viewed from the rear side), directly. Since it is not possible to touch the part, it is possible to prevent fraudulent activity from the right side of the pachinko machine 10 when viewed from the front.

The standing lower cover part (not shown) of the twelfth embodiment includes a lower inner cover part (not shown) and a lower outer cover part (not shown). The lower inner cover part is horizontally oriented from the entire lower part of the standing cover wall 161 and the entire lower part of the cover plate 171 toward the inside of the pachinko machine 10 (direction in which the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 are arranged). It is formed to extend in the direction. Further, the lower outer cover portion is formed to extend horizontally from the entire lower portion of the standing cover wall 161 toward the outside of the pachinko machine 10 (the direction in which the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 are not arranged). There is.

The lower inner cover portion (not shown) has a larger area than the upper inner cover portion (not shown) as in the ninth embodiment. This is because the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111, in particular, the disposition position of the payout control device 111 is closer to the lower side of the pachinko machine 10, and the main control is performed from the upper side of the pachinko machine 10 to the lower side. Since it is easy to access the device 110 or the payout control device 111, in many cases, a person who cheats the main control device 110 or the payout control device 111 intrudes a wire or the like from the lower side of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10. To commit cheating. Therefore, in order to prevent the above-mentioned fraudulent acts, the area of the lower inner cover portion is formed to be wide, and the lower inner cover portion 163a allows the payout control in the lower right portion in the front view (lower left portion in the rear view) of the dispensing control device 111. The gap between the device 111 and the protective cover member 140 is configured to be as small as possible.

Thus, by forming the lower inner cover portion (not shown), the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111, in particular, the lower right part in front view (lower left part in rear view) of the payout control device 111 is covered, It is possible to prevent fraudulent activity from the lower right side in front view (lower left side in rear view) of the payout control device 111 provided with the sealing portion 111a or the main control device 110 provided with the setting key 501 and the sealing unit 100c. ..

Next, the cover plate 171 of the twelfth embodiment is configured such that the standing plate 160 (the standing cover wall 161, the standing upper cover part 162, the standing lower cover part 163, and the standing inner rib 164 (see FIG. 68)) of the cover plate 171 is removed. The plate surfaces face the front and rear directions of the pachinko machine 10 to cover the setting unit 100d of the main controller 110 and extend to a position to cover the connector mounting unit 100h of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 82). The plate surface of the cover plate 171 covers the RAM erase switch 122 provided in the power supply device 115. In this way, by covering the devices 501, 100c, 122, 111a that may affect the game specification with the protective cover member 140, the security performance on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. The cover plate 171 of the twelfth embodiment is formed so as not to cover the base display device 401 and the error display button 502. Since the cover plate 171 is transparent, the visibility of the back surface of the cover plate 171 does not deteriorate, and therefore the base display device 401 and/or the error display button 502 may be covered from the viewpoint of the security of the entire main control device 110. ..

An outer cover rib 174 formed on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 10 of the cover plate 171 is formed so as to project from a portion corresponding to the setting key 501 and a portion corresponding to the RAM erase switch 122. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to form a hole or the like in the cover plate 171, and it is possible to improve the security performance on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 10.

An upper side protrusion (not shown) of the cover plate 171 of the twelfth embodiment is formed in a rib shape in the front direction of the pachinko machine 10, and a lower side protrusion (not shown) of the back pack 92 of the back pack unit 94 is shown. No.) may be formed in the shape of a rib in the back surface direction of the pachinko machine 10. Further, by configuring the lower side surface of the upper side protrusion and the upper side surface of the lower side protrusion to contact each other, even when the protective cover member 140 is attached to the outer frame 11, the upper side protrusion of the protective cover member 140 is attached. Section and the lower side projection of the back pack 92 do not interfere with each other, and the back pack 92 mounted on the inner frame 12 can be closed, and the upper side surface of the lower side projection contacts the lower side surface of the upper side projection. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the gap between the back pack 92 and the protective cover member 140, and prevent the pachinko machine 10 from coming into contact with the main controller 110 by using wire or the like. Therefore, fraud from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 can be prevented. Further, the back pack 92 is attached to the outer frame 11 in a cantilevered manner because the back pack 92 is attached to the inner frame 12 in the form of both ends fixed beams in which one end and the other end of the back pack 92 are fixed, respectively. Even when an impact is applied to the protective cover member 140 from the back side of the pachinko machine 10, the rigidity of the protective cover member 140 is supplemented by the back pack 92 attached to the inner frame 12 in the shape of both ends fixed beams. can do. Therefore, even when an impact or the like is applied from the back side of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to prevent the protective cover member 140 from being damaged.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment, the protective cover member 140 is extended to the left side in front view (that is, the right side in back view) up to the portion covering the connector attachment portion 100h of the main controller 110. At the same time, it is formed so as to extend downward from the front as far as a portion that covers the sealing portion 111a of the payout control device 111. That is, in addition to the setting key 501 and the sealing unit 100c of the main control device 110, the connector attaching portion 100h of the main control device 110 and the sealing portion 111a of the payout control device 111 are configured to be covered by the protective cover member 140. .. With this configuration, when the inner frame 12 is closed, in addition to the setting key 501 of the main control device 110 and the sealing unit 100c, a connector connector used for communication of control signals to the respective control devices 111, 113 and the like. It is possible to prevent direct operation from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to parts related to the game specifications, such as the wearing part 100h and the sealing part 111a of the payout control device 111 that manages the payout of prize balls and rental balls. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the security performance on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved with a simple configuration of one member.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed. For example, in each embodiment, a part or a plurality of parts of the configuration of another embodiment is added to the embodiment or a part or a plurality of parts of the configuration of the embodiment is exchanged, thereby The embodiment may be modified and configured. Further, the numerical values mentioned in the above embodiment are examples, and it is naturally possible to adopt other numerical values.

<Modification 1>
In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are calculated, recorded, and output to the inspection device 300 has been described, but instead of the character ratio and the continuous character ratio, or In addition to the object ratio and the continuous accessory ratio, information indicating the gaming performance of the pachinko machine 10, for example, a base value, the number of balls sucked in for 100 balls hit (=100-base value), and a jackpot. It is also possible to calculate and record the average number of outs, etc. until it is output to the inspection device 300.

<Modification 2>
In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the counter is provided in the first reading memory 263 to count the number of balls won for each winning opening has been described. However, the counter provided in the first reading memory 263 allows each winning opening for each winning opening. The number of balls paid out by winning may be counted. Then, in the first embodiment, the winning combination is calculated based on the number of balls paid out for each winning opening counted by the first reading memory 263 at the timing of calculating the winning character ratio. The object ratio and the continuous winning character ratio may be calculated and accumulated in the second reading memory 264 and recorded. In addition, in the second embodiment, when it is the time to calculate the character ratio, when it is the time to calculate the character ratio, the winning for each winning opening counted by the first reading memory 263. The number of balls paid out by may be accumulated and recorded in the second reading memory 264. In this case, when the number of balls that have won a prize for each 0.5 seconds is stored in the buffer 262, the CPU 261 responds to the number of balls that have won a prize for each winning port. Multiply the number of prize balls of the winning opening to calculate the number of balls paid out for the prize in 0.5 seconds, and the calculated number of balls paid out corresponds to that provided in the first reading memory 263. The number of spheres paid out by winning may be counted for each winning port by adding to the counter of the winning port. Further, when the MPU 201 detects that there is a winning in one winning opening, the MPU 201 writes the information indicating the winning opening having the winning in the buffer 262, and the CPU 261 has the winning in the buffer 262. When the information indicating the mouth is written, the number of balls paid out by winning the prize is added to the corresponding prize-winning counter provided in the first reading memory 263, whereby The number of balls paid out by winning may be counted. In addition, the MPU 201 counts the number of spheres paid out for each winning opening every 0.5 seconds (or every predetermined time) and stores the number in the buffer 262. When the writing to the buffer 262 is performed, the CPU 261 determines, for each winning opening, the number of balls paid out by the winning in the winning opening in the buffer 262 for each winning opening as a first value. The number of balls paid out by winning may be counted for each winning opening by adding to the corresponding winning opening counter provided in the reading memory 263. Further, when it is detected that there is a winning in one winning opening, the MPU 201 stores the number of balls paid out by the winning in the area corresponding to the winning opening in the buffer 262. In the CPU 261, when writing to the buffer 262 is performed, the payout written to the buffer 262 is given to the counter of the first reading memory 263 corresponding to the winning opening in which the number of the paid-out balls is stored. The number of balls paid out by winning may be counted for each winning opening by adding the number of balls. As described above, even if the counter provided in the first reading memory 263 is configured to count the number of balls paid out for each winning opening, the payout is made for each winning opening thus counted. Since the character ratio and the continuous character ratio can be calculated from the number of balls that have been formed, it is possible to detect fraud by analyzing the calculated character ratio and the continuous character ratio. When the MPU 201 stores the number of balls paid out by winning in the buffer 262, the prize ball number table 202e does not have to be transmitted to the accessory ratio management chip 207, and the buffer 262 does not have to be transmitted. The winning character ratio and the continuous winning character ratio can be calculated from the number of balls paid out by winning the winning prize for each winning prize stored in. Further, in order to calculate the character ratio and the continuous character ratio in the inspection device 300, the number of balls paid out by the winning, which is counted for each winning opening, may be transmitted to the inspection device 300. .. In this case, the inspection device 300 can calculate the approximate gate ratio and the continuous winning role ratio without transmitting the contents of the prize ball number table 202e to the inspection device 300.

<Modification 3>
In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the character ratio data 264a and the continuous character ratio data 264b are recorded in the second reading memory 264 and are transmitted to the inspection device 300 has been described, but only the character ratio data 264a is described. The second reading memory 264 may be recorded and transmitted to the inspection device 300, or only the continuous accessory ratio data 264b may be recorded in the second reading memory 264 and transmitted to the inspection device 300. You may The inspection device 300 can analyze fraud by analyzing the character ratio or the continuous character ratio transmitted from the character ratio management chip 207.

<Modification 4>
In each of the above embodiments, the case where the first reading memory 263 is configured by a volatile memory has been described, but the first reading memory 263 is configured by a non-volatile memory (for example, flash memory, FeRAM, MRAM, ReRAM, etc.). May be done. Further, the backup voltage may be supplied from the power supply device 115 to the first reading memory 263 while the power is off. In this case, the initialization of the first reading memory 263 may be non-executed in the processing of S711 (see FIG. 18) executed by the CPU 261 when power is supplied to the accessory ratio management chip 207. As a result, the counters 263a to 263f and the data 263g to 263j stored in the first reading memory 263 can be retained while the power is off. Therefore, when the power supply to the accessory ratio management chip 207 is cut off, even if the accessory ratio calculation process or the winning information storage process is not executed, the latest second reading memory 264 before the power supply is cut off. Calculate the character ratio, etc. without leaking the winnings to each winning opening that was during the time when it was determined that the power was cut off from the timing (trigger) at which the recording was performed, and read the total number of winnings in the second reading It can be recorded in the memory 264. Therefore, in this case, the capacitor 267 may be unnecessary.

<Modification 5>
In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a and the inspection result output process is executed to output the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 has been described. In addition, the information stored in the first reading memory 263 may also be output. Since the information stored in the first reading memory 263 has not yet reached the timing (trigger) for recording in the second reading memory 264, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio recorded in the second reading memory 264 can be calculated. The information is information that is not used for calculation or is not recorded in the second reading memory 264. Therefore, by transmitting the information stored in the first reading memory 263 to the inspection device 300, the inspection device 300 can be analyzed using the latest information.

Further, in the first embodiment, as the information recorded in the second reading memory 264, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio calculated by the accessory ratio management chip 207 are transmitted to the inspection device 300. However, the information stored in the first reading memory 263 is also transmitted to the inspection device 300, so that although it is short-term information, it is the total number of balls winning each winning opening, the character ratio and the continuous character. The raw information before the ratio is calculated can be grasped by the inspection device 300. Therefore, the analysis in the inspection device 300 can be performed deeper and more accurately.

As a modified example of the first embodiment, as the information recorded in the second reading memory 264, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio calculated by the accessory ratio management chip 207 are transmitted to the inspection device 300. When the information stored in the first reading memory 263 is also configured to be transmitted to the inspection device 300, the prize ball number table 202e may be further transmitted to the inspection device 300. Thereby, the inspection device 300 calculates the latest winning character ratio and continuous winning character ratio from the total number of winning balls for each winning hole transmitted from the first reading memory 263, using the prize ball number table 202e. Can be analyzed. The winning character ratio and the continuous winning character ratio calculated here are won in each winning opening in a short period before reaching the timing indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b. Since it is calculated based on the total number of balls, the calculated accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio are not necessarily accurate values, but can be used as reference values for analysis of the inspection device 300. ..

In addition, when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, the CPU 261 calculates the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263, and the calculated accessory. The ratio and the continuous accessory ratio may be output to the inspection device 300 together with the information recorded in the second reading memory 264. Thereby, the inspection device 300 can easily analyze the misconduct by using the character ratio and the continuous character ratio output from the character ratio management chip 207. In this case, the information stored in the first reading memory 263 may also be output to the inspection device 300. As a result, it is possible to cause the inspection device 300 to perform a deep analysis using the latest information related to winning. Also in this case, the prize ball number table 202e may be transmitted to the inspection device 300. This allows the inspection device 300 to perform a deeper analysis while referring to the prize ball number table 202e.

<Modification 6>
In each of the above-described embodiments, the accessory ratio management chip 207 is provided with the volatile first reading memory 263 and the non-volatile second reading memory 264, and the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is used. Information set in the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 is temporarily stored in the first reading memory 263 while accumulating until the timing (trigger) shown, and when the timing comes, the first reading memory 263 Based on the information stored in 263, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are calculated and recorded in the second reading memory 264, or accumulated and stored in the first reading memory 263 by the timing. The case of recording various kinds of information in the second reading memory 264 has been described. On the other hand, in the accessory ratio management chip 207, a non-volatile memory provided with at least a first reading area that plays the role of the first reading memory 263 and a second reading area that plays the role of the second reading memory 264. The information set in the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 is temporarily accumulated in the first reading area until the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is reached. And when it comes to the timing, based on the information temporarily stored in the first reading area, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are calculated and recorded in the second reading area, or Various information accumulated and stored in the first reading area may be recorded in the second reading area by the timing. As a result, the number of parts of the memory can be reduced, so that the cost increase of the accessory ratio management chip 207 can be suppressed.

<Modification 7>
In each of the above-described embodiments, the MPU 201 counts the number of balls won for each winning opening within 0.5 seconds for each winning opening, and also counts the number of balls guided to the ball discharging path. Then, the number of balls counted for each winning opening, the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path, and information about the game state at that time are stored in the buffer 262 of the character ratio management chip 207 every 0.5 seconds. Every time the setting is made in the buffer 262, the number of balls won for each winning opening set in the buffer 262, the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path, and the gaming state The case where information is accumulated and stored in the first reading memory 263 has been described. On the other hand, in the MPU 201, the winning of the first starting opening 64a is detected by the output of the first starting opening switch 208a in the timer interrupt process executed every 2 milliseconds based on the outputs of various switches. In this case, the starting 1 buffer 262a is turned on, and when the winning of the second starting opening 64b is detected by the output of the second starting opening switch 208b, the starting 2 buffer 262b is turned on and the first normal winning opening switch 208c is turned on. When the winning of the first normal winning opening 63a is detected by the output, the ordinary first buffer 262c is turned on, and when the winning of the second normal winning opening 63b is detected by the output of the second ordinary winning opening switch 208d. When the normal 2 buffer 262d is turned on and the winning of the special winning opening 65a is detected by the output of the special winning opening switch 208e, the big winning opening buffer 262e is turned on and the out switch 208f guides the ball to the ball discharging path. When a sphere is detected, the out buffer 262f is turned on, and the corresponding jackpot buffer 262g, opening buffer 262h, and error buffer 262i corresponding to the game state at that time are turned on, and then an interrupt signal is sent. It may be transmitted to the accessory ratio management chip 207. Then, in the accessory ratio management chip 207, in the setting information receiving process executed by receiving the interrupt signal, when the start 1 buffer 262a is turned on, the start 1 counter 263a is incremented by 1, and the start 2 buffer 262b is set. When it is turned on, the first 2 counter 263b is incremented by 1, when the ordinary 1 buffer 262c is turned on, the ordinary 1 counter 263c is incremented by 1, and when the ordinary 2 buffer 262d is turned on, the ordinary 2 buffer is turned on. The counter 263d is incremented by 1, and when the special winning opening buffer 262e is turned on, the special winning opening counter 263e is incremented by 1 and when the out buffer 262f is turned on, the out counter 263f is incremented by 1. When the jackpot buffer 262g is on, the jackpot information 263g is additionally stored with the jackpot information, and when the opening buffer 262h is on, the door is opened to the opening data 263h. The intermediate information is additionally stored together with the time at that time, and when the in-error buffer 262i is turned on, the in-error information is additionally stored together with the time at that time in the in-error data 263i and set. When the time when the information receiving process is executed is in the midnight time zone, the after-hours information may be additionally stored in the after-hours data 263j together with the time at that time. As a result, the MPU 201 does not need to count the number of balls that have won each winning opening or the number of balls that have been guided to the ball discharge path within 0.5 seconds, which increases the processing load of the MPU 201. Can be suppressed. Therefore, much of the processing capability of the MPU 201 can be allocated to the main control of the game that should be originally performed by the MPU 201.

<Modification 8>
Further, in this case, the first starting opening switch 208a, the second starting opening switch 208b, the first normal winning opening switch 208c, the second normal winning opening switch 208d, the big winning opening switch 208e, the out switch 208f, the role ratio management It may be directly input to the chip 207. Then, in the accessory ratio management chip 207, the first starting opening switch 208a, the second starting opening switch 208b, the first ordinary winning opening switch 208c, the second ordinary winning opening switch 208d, the big winning opening switch 208e, and the out switch 208f. From each output of the, the presence or absence of winning in the first starting opening 64a, the second starting opening 64b, the first normal winning opening 63a, the second normal winning opening 63b, the big winning opening 65a, and the ball guided to the ball discharging path. If there is a prize, the counters 263a to 264e of the first reading memory 263 corresponding to the starting opening where the prize is won are incremented by 1 and there is a ball guided to the ball discharge path. In this case, the out counter 263f may be incremented by 1. As a result, when there is a winning in the winning opening or when the ball is guided to the ball discharging path, the situation can be immediately reflected in the accessory ratio management chip 207. Further, the door opening switch 208g is directly input to the accessory ratio managing chip 207, and the accessory ratio managing chip 207 determines whether the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened based on the output of the door opening switch 208g. When the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, the door opening information is added and stored in the opening data 263h together with the time indicated by the RTC 266 at that time. The management chip 207 may be configured. Accordingly, when the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, the situation can be immediately reflected in the accessory ratio management chip 207.

<Modification 9>
In each of the above-described embodiments, in the accessory ratio management chip 207, the number of spheres that have won each winning opening before the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is set to the first value. Each of the counters 263a to 264e of the reading memory 263 counts, and the number of balls discharged to the ball discharging path by the timing (trigger) is counted by the out counter 263f of the first reading memory 263. Although the case has been described, in the first reading memory 263, the start 1 buffer 262a, the start 2 buffer 262b, the ordinary 1 buffer 262c, the ordinary 2 buffer 262d, and the special winning opening buffer 262e are set by the MPU 201 every 0.5 seconds. , Each value of the out buffer 262f (that is, the number of balls for each winning opening that won in 0.5 seconds, and the number of balls guided to the ball discharging path in 0.5 seconds), The time may be sequentially stored together with the time indicated by the RTC 266. Then, when the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b comes, the role ratio and the continuous role ratio are calculated from the respective values stored in the first reading memory 263. It is calculated and recorded in the second reading memory 264, or the total number of spheres that have won each winning opening by the timing is calculated for each prize, and is discharged to the sphere discharge path by the timing. The total number of spheres may be calculated and recorded in the second reading memory 264. Also by this, by transmitting the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 to the inspection device 300, the inspection device 300 determines whether there is a possibility that a fraudulent act has been performed based on the character ratio or the continuous character ratio. can do. Then, in this case, when transmitting the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 to the inspection device 300, the information stored in the first reading memory 263, that is, each winning opening that won in 0.5 seconds. The number of spheres for each, and the number of spheres guided to the sphere discharge path within 0.5 seconds and the time associated with the number of spheres (that is, the number of spheres is the first reading memory). It may be transmitted to the inspection device 300 together with the time (when stored in the H.263). This makes it possible to obtain information such as how many balls have won in which winning openings and at what time in each extremely short time of 0.5 seconds, and how many balls in which time each very short time of 0.5 seconds. It becomes possible for the inspection device 300 to grasp detailed information such as whether or not the player has been guided to the ball discharge path (that is, whether or not it has been launched into the game area). Therefore, the analysis in the inspection device 300 can be performed deeper and more accurately.

As a modified example of the first embodiment, as the information recorded in the second reading memory 264, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio calculated by the accessory ratio management chip 207 are transmitted to the inspection device 300. When the information stored in the first reading memory 263 is also configured to be transmitted to the inspection device 300, the prize ball number table 202e may be further transmitted to the inspection device 300. As a result, the inspection device 300 calculates the total number of winning balls for each winning opening from the number of balls winning for each winning opening every 0.5 seconds transmitted from the first reading memory 263. The latest prize ratio and continuous prize ratio can be calculated and analyzed using the prize ball number table 202e. The winning character ratio and the continuous winning character ratio calculated here are won in each winning opening in a short period before reaching the timing indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b. Since it is calculated based on the total number of balls, the calculated accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio are not necessarily accurate values, but can be used as reference values for analysis of the inspection device 300. ..

<Modification 10>
In addition, the first reading memory 263, the number of balls for each winning opening in 0.5 seconds, and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path in 0.5 seconds, and When the time associated with the number of spheres (that is, the time when the number of spheres is stored in the first reading memory 263) is stored, it is indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b. The information stored in the first reading memory 263 may be recorded in the second reading memory 264 when the timing (trigger) is reached. Then, in the inspection device 300, the number of balls for each winning opening which is recorded in the second reading memory 264 for each 0.5 seconds and the ball discharging path for 0.5 seconds. The number of guided balls and the time associated with the number of the balls are transmitted, and the prize ball number table 202e set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a is also transmitted to the inspection device 300. You may As a result, the inspection device 300 calculates the total number of winning balls for each winning opening for each predetermined section from the number of winning balls for each winning opening every 0.5 seconds, and then calculates the winning ball number table. By using 202e to calculate the character ratio and the continuous character ratio of each predetermined section, it is possible to analyze the possibility of fraud from the change in the character ratio and the continuous character ratio. Further, when there is a change in the character ratio and the continuous character ratio that are suspected of being illegal, the inspection device 300 causes the number of balls for each winning opening in 0.5 seconds, and 0. Since detailed information related to the game such as the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path in 5 seconds and the time associated with the number of these balls is entered, the role is based on this information. The cause of the change in the ratio of objects and the ratio of consecutive characters can be scrutinized in detail.

<Modification 11>
In addition, the first reading memory 263 is not provided, and the start 1 buffer 262a, the start 2 buffer 262b, the ordinary 1 buffer 262c, the ordinary 2 buffer 262d, the special winning opening buffer 262e, and the out buffer which are set by the MPU 201 every 0.5 seconds. Each value of 262f (that is, the number of balls for each winning opening that won in 0.5 seconds and the number of balls guided to the ball discharging path in 0.5 seconds) is indicated by RTC 266. It may be recorded directly in the second reading memory 264 together with the time at that time. In this case, the information about the game state set in the big hit buffer 262g, the open buffer 262h, and the error buffer 262i every 0.5 seconds, together with the time indicated by the RTC 266, the game state of the second reading memory 264. The data may be recorded in the data 264d, and if the setting of the buffer 262 from the MPU 201 is made at midnight, the game state data 264d is combined with the time information indicated by the RTC 266. It may be recorded in. As a result, the first reading memory 263 can be eliminated, and the cost increase of the accessory ratio management chip 207 can be suppressed.

<Modification 12>
Further, in the MPU 201, when the winning of the first starting opening 64a is detected by the output of the first starting opening switch 208a in the timer interrupt processing executed every 2 milliseconds based on the outputs of various switches. Turns on the starting 1 buffer 262a, turns on the starting 2 buffer 262b when the winning of the second starting opening 64b is detected by the output of the second starting opening switch 208b, and outputs the first ordinary winning opening switch 208c. When the winning of the first normal winning opening 63a is detected, the ordinary 1 buffer 262c is turned on, and when the winning of the second ordinary winning opening 63b is detected by the output of the second ordinary winning opening switch 208d, the ordinary 2 is opened. When the buffer 262d is turned on and the winning of the special winning opening 65a is detected by the output of the special winning opening switch 208e, the big winning opening buffer 262e is turned on, and the ball guided to the ball discharging path by the out switch 208f is detected. When it is configured to turn on the out buffer 262f when it is detected, the first reading memory 263 has a start 1 buffer 262a, a start 2 buffer 262b, and a normal 1 buffer set by the MPU 201 every 2 milliseconds. Each value of 262c, buffer 2 buffer 262d, big winning opening buffer 262e, and out buffer 262f (that is, information indicating presence/absence of winning for 2 milliseconds at each winning opening, and guided to the ball discharging path for 2 milliseconds) Information indicating the presence/absence of a sphere) may be sequentially stored together with the time indicated by the RTC 266. Then, at the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b, based on the respective values stored in the first reading memory 263, the character role ratio and the continuous character role. The ratio is calculated and recorded in the second reading memory 264, or the total number of balls winning each winning opening is calculated for each winning until the timing comes, and the ball is discharged to the ball discharging path by the timing. It is also possible to calculate the total number of the created spheres and record them in the second reading memory 264. Also by this, by transmitting the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 to the inspection device 300, the inspection device 300 determines whether there is a possibility that a fraudulent act has been performed based on the character ratio or the continuous character ratio. can do. Then, in this case, when transmitting the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 to the inspection device 300, the information stored in the first reading memory 263, that is, the presence or absence of winning for 2 milliseconds at each winning opening is checked. Information indicating, and information indicating the presence/absence of a sphere guided to the sphere discharging path for 2 milliseconds and the time associated with the information (that is, when the information is stored in the first reading memory 263). It may be transmitted to the inspection device 300 together with the time). As a result, information such as which winning opening and time was won in an extremely short time interval of 2 milliseconds, and at which time the ball discharge path was guided in an extremely short time interval of 2 milliseconds (that is, game) It becomes possible for the inspection device 300 to grasp detailed information such as "whether it has been fired to an area". Therefore, the analysis in the inspection device 300 can be performed deeper and more accurately.

<Modification 13>
Further, in the MPU 201, when the winning of the first starting opening 64a is detected by the output of the first starting opening switch 208a in the timer interrupt processing executed every 2 milliseconds based on the outputs of various switches. Turns on the starting 1 buffer 262a, turns on the starting 2 buffer 262b when the winning of the second starting opening 64b is detected by the output of the second starting opening switch 208b, and outputs the first ordinary winning opening switch 208c. When the winning of the first normal winning opening 63a is detected, the ordinary 1 buffer 262c is turned on, and when the winning of the second ordinary winning opening 63b is detected by the output of the second ordinary winning opening switch 208d, the ordinary 2 is opened. When the buffer 262d is turned on and the winning of the special winning opening 65a is detected by the output of the special winning opening switch 208e, the big winning opening buffer 262e is turned on, and the ball guided to the ball discharging path by the out switch 208f is detected. When detected, when it is configured to turn on the out buffer 262f, when the first reading memory 263 has the turned-on buffer among the buffers 262a to 262e corresponding to each winning opening, The information indicating the winning opening having the winning, and the information indicating that there is a ball guided to the ball discharging path when the out buffer 262f is turned on, is the time at that time indicated by the RTC 266. In addition, they may be sequentially stored. Then, when the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b comes, based on each information stored in the first reading memory 263, the character role ratio and the continuous character role. The ratio is calculated and recorded in the second reading memory 264, or the total number of balls winning each winning opening is calculated for each winning until the timing comes, and the ball is discharged to the ball discharging path by the timing. It is also possible to calculate the total number of the created spheres and record them in the second reading memory 264. Also by this, by transmitting the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 to the inspection device 300, the inspection device 300 determines whether there is a possibility that a fraudulent act has been performed based on the character ratio or the continuous character ratio. can do. Then, in this case, when transmitting the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 to the inspection device 300, the information stored in the first reading memory 263, that is, the presence or absence of winning for 2 milliseconds at each winning opening is checked. Information indicating, and information indicating the presence/absence of a sphere guided to the sphere discharging path for 2 milliseconds and the time associated with the information (that is, when the information is stored in the first reading memory 263). It may be transmitted to the inspection device 300 together with the time). As a result, the inspection device 300 can grasp detailed information such as which winning opening and at which time the prize was won, and at what time the ball was guided to the ball discharge path (that is, whether it was launched into the game area). Like Therefore, the analysis in the inspection device 300 can be performed deeper and more accurately.

As a modified example of the first embodiment, as the information recorded in the second reading memory 264, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio calculated by the accessory ratio management chip 207 are transmitted to the inspection device 300. When the information stored in the first reading memory 263 is also configured to be transmitted to the inspection device 300, the prize ball number table 202e may be further transmitted to the inspection device 300. Accordingly, the inspection device 300 calculates the total number of the winning balls for each winning opening from the information transmitted from the first reading memory 263 and indicating the presence or absence of the winning ball for each winning opening every 2 milliseconds. Then, the latest prize ratio and continuous prize ratio can be calculated and analyzed using the prize ball number table 202e. The winning character ratio and the continuous winning character ratio calculated here are won in each winning opening in a short period before reaching the timing indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b. Since it is calculated based on the total number of balls, the calculated accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio are not necessarily accurate values, but can be used as reference values for analysis of the inspection device 300. ..

<Modification 14>
In addition, the first reading memory 263 corresponds to information indicating whether or not there is a winning for 2 milliseconds at each winning opening, information indicating whether or not there is a ball guided to the ball discharging path for 2 milliseconds, and corresponding information. When the attached time (that is, the time when the information is stored in the first reading memory 263) is stored, the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is stored. When this happens, the information stored in the first reading memory 263 may be recorded in the second reading memory 264. Then, in the inspection device 300, information indicating the presence/absence of winning for 2 milliseconds at each winning opening, which is recorded in the second reading memory 264, and the presence/absence of a ball guided to the ball discharging path for 2 milliseconds. May be transmitted and the time associated with these pieces of information may be transmitted, and the prize ball number table 202e set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a may also be transmitted to the inspection device 300. As a result, the inspection device 300 calculates the total number of winning balls for each winning opening for each predetermined section from the information indicating the presence or absence of the winning ball for each winning opening every 2 milliseconds. By calculating the character ratio and the continuous character ratio of each predetermined section using the number table 202e, the possibility of fraud can be analyzed from the change of the character ratio and the continuous character ratio. In addition, when there is a change in the character ratio and the continuous character ratio that are suspected of cheating, the inspection device 300 displays information indicating whether or not there is a winning of 2 ms for each winning opening, and a ball of 2 ms. Since detailed information related to the game such as information indicating the presence or absence of a ball guided to the discharge path and the time associated with the information is input, based on this information, the role ratio and the continuous role The cause of changes in the product ratio can be scrutinized in detail.

<Modification 15>
Further, in the first reading memory 263, information indicating a winning opening where a prize has been won, information indicating that there is a ball guided to the ball discharging path, and a time associated with the information (that is, When the information is stored in the first reading memory 263), when the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is reached, The information stored in the reading memory 263 may be recorded in the second reading memory 264. Then, in the inspection device 300, information indicating a winning opening having a prize, recorded in the second reading memory 264, and information indicating that there is a ball guided to the ball discharging path, The time associated with the information may be transmitted, and the prize ball number table 202e set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a may also be transmitted to the inspection device 300. As a result, the inspection device 300 calculates the total number of winning balls for each winning opening for each predetermined section from the information indicating the winning opening for which a prize has been won, and then uses the winning ball number table 202e to calculate each number. By calculating the character ratio and the continuous character ratio in the predetermined section, the possibility of fraud can be analyzed from the changes in the character ratio and the continuous character ratio. In addition, when there is a change in the ratio of character parts and the ratio of continuous character parts that are suspected of misbehavior, the inspection device 300 has information indicating the winning opening with a prize, and a ball guided to the ball discharge path. Since detailed information related to the game, such as information indicating the fact and the time associated with the information, is entered, the cause of the change in the character ratio and the continuous character ratio is determined based on this information. You can search in detail.

<Modification 16>
Further, the first reading memory 263 is not provided, and the start 1 buffer 262a, the start 2 buffer 262b, the ordinary 1 buffer 262c, the ordinary 2 buffer 262d, the special winning opening buffer 262e, and the out buffer 262f set by the MPU 201 every 2 milliseconds. Each value (that is, information indicating presence/absence of winning for 2 ms at each winning opening and information indicating presence/absence of a ball guided to the ball discharging path for 2 ms) is the time at that time indicated by RTC 266. In addition to this, the data may be directly recorded in the second reading memory 264 sequentially. In this case, information about the game state set in the big hit buffer 262g, the open buffer 262h, and the error buffer 262i every 2 milliseconds, together with the time indicated by the RTC 266, the game state data of the second reading memory 264. 264d may be recorded, and if the setting from the MPU 201 to the buffer 262 is made at midnight, the overtime information is added to the game state data 264d together with the time indicated by the RTC 266. It may be recorded. As a result, the first reading memory 263 can be eliminated, and the cost increase of the accessory ratio management chip 207 can be suppressed.

<Modification 17>
In each of the above embodiments, an area in which information is recorded in the second reading memory 264 (for example, in the first embodiment, character ratio data 264a, continuous character ratio data 264b, number-of-fired-balls data 264c, and game state data 264d. Is recorded, in the second embodiment, the checksum value in the number of shot balls data 264c, the game state data 264d, and the winning counter data 264e is calculated and stored in the second reading memory 264. If the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 is transmitted to the inspection device 300, the checksum value may be transmitted together. Then, when the inspection device 300 receives the information recorded in the second reading memory 264, a checksum value is calculated from the received information and compared with the checksum value transmitted from the accessory ratio management chip 207. If they match, the received information may be judged to be correct information for analysis. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inspection apparatus 300 from performing analysis based on incorrect information.

<Modification 18>
In each of the above-described embodiments, when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, an interrupt signal is generated, and the inspection result output process is executed by the CPU 261 based on the interrupt signal to manage the accessory ratio. The case where the information recorded by the chip 207 is output to the inspection device 300 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and based on the command transmitted from the inspection device 300 connected to the inspection terminal 207a. The information recorded in the accessory ratio management chip 207 may be output to the inspection device 300. As a result, if the inspection device 300 becomes ready to receive the information transmitted from the accessory ratio management chip 207 and then sends a command to the accessory ratio management chip 207, The information transmitted from the material ratio management chip 207 can be reliably received.

<Modification 19>
In each of the above-described embodiments, when the CPU 261 is performing the accessory ratio calculation process (first embodiment) or the winning information storage process (second embodiment), the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a and interrupted. When an interruption signal occurs, while the character ratio calculation processing or the prize information storage processing is being executed, the execution of the inspection result output processing corresponding to the interrupt signal is waited for, and the character ratio calculation processing or the prize information is executed. The execution of the inspection result output may be started after the storage process is completed. As a result, the inspection result output process is executed during the execution of the accessory ratio calculation process or the winning information storage process, and the strange information is transmitted to the inspection device 300 because the second reading memory 264 is being written. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a situation.

<Modification 20>
In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the winning information and the like is transmitted from the MPU 201 to the accessory ratio management chip 207 in one direction in the main control device 110 has been described, but the information output from the accessory ratio management chip 207 by the MPU 201 is described. Then, some processing may be executed based on the information. For example, when the operation of the character ratio management chip 207 has stopped, or when an error occurs in the processing by the character ratio management chip 207, the information is transmitted from the character ratio management chip 207 to the MPU 201. Based on the information, the MPU 201 informs that by the display on the first symbol display device 37, lighting/blinking of the lamp, voice output, display on the third symbol display device 81, and the like. You may control. Thereby, the hall-related person can know the abnormality of the accessory ratio management chip 207, and can take some measures. In addition, the MPU 201, based on the information indicating that the operation of the accessory ratio management chip 207 has stopped, or the information indicating that some error has occurred in the processing in the accessory ratio management chip 207, The accessory ratio management chip 207 may be reset. Thereby, the abnormality of the accessory ratio management chip 207 can be automatically resolved, and the accessory ratio management chip 207 can be operated again.

<Modification 21>
Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the accessory ratio calculated by the accessory ratio management chip 207 is received by the MPU 201 and the accessory ratio is higher than the first predetermined ratio, the pachinko machine is set. The MPU 201 may control the machine 10 to perform the first predetermined notification. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the continuous character ratio calculated by the character ratio management chip 207 is received by the MPU 201, and the continuous character ratio is higher than the second predetermined ratio. The MPU 201 may control the pachinko machine 10 to perform the second predetermined notification. Further, also in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the ratio of the accessory character or the ratio of the continuous accessory character is appropriately calculated from the information stored in the first reading memory 263 or the second reading memory 264, and the calculated ratio is transmitted to the MPU 201. Then, the MPU 201 may perform the above comparison and notification based on the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio received from the accessory ratio management chip 207. As the first predetermined notification and the second predetermined notification, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 may be displayed in a predetermined color, or a predetermined number may be displayed on the 7-segment display 37b. Further, as the first predetermined notification and the second predetermined notification, a command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 so as to turn on or blink a predetermined lamp by a predetermined method or output a predetermined voice. Alternatively, a command may be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 so as to display a predetermined symbol or character on the third symbol display device 81, and the voice lamp control device 113 may display the command based on the command. Further commands may be transmitted to 114. Further, as the first predetermined notification and the second predetermined notification, a hall computer 600 provided in a hall in which the pachinko machine 10 is installed via a relay board (not shown) has a role ratio of the first predetermined value. The information indicating that the ratio is higher than the ratio, or the information indicating that the continuous accessory ratio is higher than the second predetermined ratio may be transmitted. By these notifications, the abnormality of the character ratio or the continuous character ratio of the pachinko machine 10 can be directly notified from the pachinko machine 10 to the hall personnel. Therefore, it is possible to easily find the pachinko machine 10 that may have been fraudulently performed on the pachinko machine 10. Moreover, such notification can be linked to the prevention of fraudulent acts.

<Modification 22>
In each of the above-described embodiments, the accessory ratio management chip 207 determines whether or not the calculated accessory ratio or continuous accessory ratio is higher than the first predetermined ratio or the second predetermined ratio. The determination result may be output to the MPU 201. Then, the MPU 201 may perform control so as to perform the first predetermined notification or the second predetermined notification based on the determination result received from the accessory ratio management chip 207. Further, the accessory ratio management chip 207 itself may execute the control for performing the first predetermined notification or the second predetermined notification based on the above determination result. For example, the LEDs for performing these notifications are connected to the accessory ratio management chip 207, and when the accessory ratio management chip 207 performs the first predetermined notification or the second predetermined notification, these LEDs are drive-controlled. You may. Further, the accessory ratio management chip 207 may directly control the first symbol display device 37 to display the LED 37a in a predetermined color or display a predetermined number on the 7-segment display 37b. In addition, the accessory ratio management chip 207 directly transmits a command for performing the first predetermined notification or the second predetermined notification to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 sends the command. Based on the above, it may be controlled to turn on/blink a predetermined lamp, output a predetermined voice, or perform a predetermined display on the third symbol display device 81. Further, directly from the accessory ratio management chip 207 to the hall computer 600, information indicating that the accessory ratio is higher than the first predetermined ratio, or the continuous accessory ratio is higher than the second predetermined ratio. You may make it transmit the information which shows that it is high. Also by this, the abnormality of the character ratio or the continuous character ratio of the pachinko machine 10 can be directly notified from the pachinko machine 10 to the hall related persons. Therefore, it is possible to easily find the pachinko machine 10 that may have been fraudulently performed on the pachinko machine 10. Moreover, such notification can be linked to the prevention of fraudulent acts.

<Modification 23>
In the second embodiment, when the accessory ratio management chip 207 transmits the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 to the inspection device 300, the prize balls set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a are also included. The case of transmitting the information of the number table 202e to the inspection device 300 has been described. On the other hand, in the accessory ratio management chip 207, when the inspection device 300 is output to the inspection terminal 207a or based on a control signal from the inspection device 300, the prize ball number table 202e is sent to the MPU 201. May be configured so that the prize ratio management chip 207 transmits the prize ball number table 202e transmitted by the MPU 201 in response to the request to the inspection device 300. In addition, the inspection device 300 outputs a signal directly requesting the MPU 201 to transmit the prize ball number table 202e, and the MPU 201 receives the request signal and transmits the prize ball number table 202e directly to the inspection device 300. You may do so. Further, after the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, and the prize ball number table 202e is transmitted to the inspection device 300 during the startup process executed by the MPU 201. You may do so. Thereby, the accessory ratio management chip 207 can eliminate the prize ball number data setting area 265a and can reduce the number of registers.

<Modification 24>
The main control device 110 may not manually transmit the prize ball number table 202e to the inspection device 300, and the number of prize balls for the inspection device 300 may be manually set. As a result, the main control device 110 does not have to perform control for transmitting the prize ball number table 202e, and thus it is possible to prevent the programs of the MPU 201 and the accessory ratio management chip 207 from becoming complicated.

<Modification 25>
In the first embodiment, the case where the prize ball number table 202e is not transmitted to the inspection device 300 has been described. However, even in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, even if the prize ball number table 202e is transmitted to the inspection device 300. Good. As a result, the inspection device 300 can analyze whether or not there is a possibility of cheating due to changes in the character ratio and the continuous character ratio, while also referring to the prize ball number table 202e.

<Modification 26>
In each of the above-described embodiments, an output register (buffer) for temporarily storing information transmitted from the second reading memory 264 to the inspection apparatus 300 may be provided between the second reading memory 264 and the inspection terminal 207a. Good. As a result, even if the reading speed of the information read from the second reading memory 264 and the transmission speed for transmitting the information to the accessory ratio management chip 207 are different, by using the output register, 2 Information can be easily transmitted from the reading memory 264 to the inspection device 300.

<Modification 27>
In each of the above-described embodiments, when it is detected that the power is cut off, based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263, the case where the information about the character ratio and the like is recorded in the second reading memory 264 explained. On the other hand, by configuring the first reading memory 263 as a non-volatile memory or supplying a backup voltage to the first reading memory 263, the first reading memory 263 can be saved even while the power is off. It may be configured to be possible, and when the power is supplied, based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263, the information about the accessory ratio and the like may be recorded in the second reading memory 264. This also makes it possible to calculate the character ratio and the continuous character ratio with respect to the number of prize balls paid out before the power is turned off after being recorded in the second reading memory 264. .. In addition, since recording to the second reading memory 264 is performed when the power is turned on, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the power is completely cut off during the recording to the second reading memory 264.

<Modification 28>
In each of the above-described embodiments, when it is detected that the power is cut off, the CPU 261 automatically controls the second information regarding the character role ratio based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263. The case of recording in the reading memory 264 has been described. On the other hand, in the trigger information data 202f, based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263, as a timing (trigger) of recording the information about the character ratio, etc. in the second reading memory 264, “power off” or The "power supply" may be defined. Then, when the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is “power off”, when it is detected that the power is off, based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263. If the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is "power supply", the first reading is performed when the power is supplied. Based on the information stored in the memory 263, information about the character product ratio and the like may be recorded in the second reading memory 264. As a result, according to the setting of the trigger information data 202f in the MPU 201, the recording of the information about the character role ratio and the like in the second reading memory 264 based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263 is turned off. In some cases, it can be performed when power is supplied. When “power supply” can be defined as the trigger information data 202f, the first reading memory 263 is configured as a non-volatile memory, or a backup voltage is supplied to the first reading memory 263, thereby The reading memory 263 may be configured so that it can be stored even when the power is turned off.

<Modification 29>
In each of the above-described embodiments, in the trigger information data 202f, based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263, as the timing (trigger) for recording the information about the role ratio, etc. in the second reading memory 264, the “number of shots” is set. ], "time", and "game time" is described as a case where information is defined. On the other hand, in the trigger information data 202f, the "power supply time" may be defined. When the information indicating the "power supply time" is defined in the trigger information data 202f, the information indicating the "predetermined time" which is the timing for recording the information about the accessory ratio in the second reading memory 264 is also defined. May be. For example, when the information indicating “power supply time” and the information indicating 4 hours as “predetermined time” are defined in the trigger information data 202f, the accessory ratio management chip 207 stores in the trigger setting area 265b, At the stage of setting the trigger information data 202f, the time indicated by the RTC 266 is acquired, the acquired time is stored in the memory as the “power supply time measurement start time”, and then the time indicated by the RTC 266 is changed. Based on the difference from the “power supply time measurement start time”, it is determined whether or not 4 hours have elapsed since the power was supplied, and when 4 hours have elapsed, it is stored in the first reading memory 263 in the accessory ratio management chip 207. Based on the obtained information, information about the character ratio and the like may be recorded in the second reading memory 264. Then, the time when the recording was performed is acquired from the RTC 266, and the time is stored in the memory as a new “power supply time measurement start time”, and then the time indicated by the RTC 266 and the “power supply time measurement It may be possible to determine whether four more hours have elapsed from the difference from the “start time”. By defining the trigger (timing) for calculating the accessory ratio by the power supply time, even if the game is not often played on the pachinko machine 10, the power supply time has elapsed for a predetermined time, so that the role is surely achieved. It is possible to calculate the object ratio and the continuous accessory ratio. Therefore, the inspection device 300 can be made to reliably analyze the presence/absence of a fraudulent act based on the reliably calculated accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio.

<Modification 30>
In the second embodiment, the information recorded in the winning counter data 264e of the second reading memory 264, which indicates the total number of balls won at each winning opening at each timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f. Has been described together with the prize ball number table 202e and transmitted to the inspection device 300. On the other hand, when transmitting to the inspection device 300, information indicating the total number of balls won at each winning opening at each timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f, based on the information at each timing. Then, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio at each timing may be calculated, and information indicating the calculated character ratio and the continuous character ratio may also be transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. Alternatively, when transmitting to the inspection device 300, instead of the information indicating the total number of balls won at each winning opening stored in the second reading memory 264, based on the information, the character ratio and the continuous winning combination. The property ratio may be calculated, and the calculated accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio may be transmitted to the inspection device 300. As a result, the inspection device 300 does not need to calculate the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio, and the analysis by the inspection device 300 can be facilitated. In addition, when the inspection device 300 calculates the character ratio and the continuous character ratio, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio may be calculated based on the incorrectly or wrongly set prize ball number table. However, if the accessory ratio management chip 207 calculates the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio, the number of prize balls in the prize ball number data setting area 265a set by the startup process executed by the MPU 201 when the power is turned on. By using the table 202e, there is no possibility that the prize ball number table 202e will be tampered with, and the winning character ratio and the continuous winning character ratio can be accurately calculated.

<Modification 31>
Further, not limited to the second embodiment, the second reading memory 264 does not store the information indicating the character role ratio or the continuous character ratio, and the information necessary for calculating at least one of them is When stored in the second reading memory 264, the CPU 261 calculates the character ratio and the continuous character ratio from the information stored in the second reading memory 264 when transmitting to the inspection device 300. The calculated accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio may be output to the inspection device 300 in combination with the information stored in the second reading memory 264 or in place of the information. As a result, the inspection device 300 does not need to calculate the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio, and the analysis by the inspection device 300 can be facilitated. In addition, when the inspection device 300 calculates the character ratio and the continuous character ratio, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio may be calculated based on the incorrectly or wrongly set prize ball number table. However, if the accessory ratio management chip 207 calculates the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio, the number of prize balls in the prize ball number data setting area 265a set by the startup process executed by the MPU 201 when the power is turned on. By using the table 202e, there is no possibility that the prize ball number table 202e will be tampered with, and the winning character ratio and the continuous winning character ratio can be accurately calculated. Further, if the calculated accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio are output to the inspection device 300 together with the information stored in the second reading memory 264, the inspection device 300 outputs the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio. If it is determined that there is a suspicious point, the cause can be sought based on the information stored in the second reading memory 264. Further, in the inspection device 300, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are calculated from the information stored in the second reading memory 264, and the character ratio and the continuous character ratio output from the character ratio management chip 207 are calculated. By determining whether or not they match, it is possible to determine whether or not any dishonest act has been performed.

<Modification 32>
In each of the above-described embodiments, an out switch 208f for detecting the ball guided to the ball discharge path is provided, and the number of times the ball is detected by the out switch 208f is counted, so that the number of balls launched into the game area. Although the case of counting is explained, various methods may be used as a method of counting the number of balls shot to the game area. For example, an out-port switch for detecting a ball passing through the out-port 66 is provided, and the number of balls passing through the out-port 66 detected by the out-port switch and the first start detected by the first start-port switch 208a. The number of balls passing through the opening 64a, the number of balls passing through the second starting opening 64b detected by the second starting opening switch 208b, and the first ordinary winning opening 63a detected by the first ordinary winning opening switch 208c. The number of balls that passed through, the number of balls that passed through the second normal winning opening 63b detected by the second normal winning opening switch 208d, and the number of balls that passed through the special winning opening 65a detected by the special winning opening switch 208e. The number of balls shot into the game area may be calculated by summing up with the number of. Further, a supply ball detection switch for detecting a ball supplied to the ball launching unit 112a, and a foul ball for detecting a ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a and discharged from the ball guiding passage as a foul ball without reaching the game area. A detection switch is provided, and a ball is launched into the game area by a counter that counts up every time a ball is detected by the supply ball detection switch and counts down by 1 every time a ball is detected by the foul ball detection switch. May be counted. Further, instead of the supply ball detection switch, a launch ball detection switch for detecting a ball launched by the ball launch unit 112a is provided, and each time a ball is detected by the launch ball detection switch, the count is incremented by 1 to detect a foul ball. The number of balls shot to the game area may be counted by a counter that counts down every time a ball is detected by the switch. Further, a game ball detection switch is provided on the return ball prevention member 68 provided at the tip portion of the inner rail 61, and the game ball detection switch detects the ball guided to the game area from the ball guide passage to detect the game ball. You may count the spheres launched into the game area by providing a counter that counts up every time a sphere is detected by the switch.

<Modification 33>
In each of the above-described embodiments, the character ratio management chip 207 is provided with the CPU 261, and based on the software executed by the CPU 261, the information about the character ratio and the continuous character ratio is recorded in the second reading memory 264, and the inspection device. The case of transmitting to 300 has been described. On the other hand, some or all of the functions of the accessory ratio management chip 207 may be configured by wired logic. By using the wired logic, it is possible to manage the information regarding the character ratio at high speed.

<Modification 34>
In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the accessory ratio management chip 207 is provided in the main controller 110, the accessory ratio management chip 207 records information about the accessory ratio, and transmits the information to the inspection device 300 has been described. On the other hand, a non-volatile memory is connected to the MPU 201, the MPU 201 records information about the accessory ratio in the non-volatile memory, and the MPU 201 transmits the information recorded in the non-volatile memory to the inspection device 300. It may be controlled to do so. As a result, the information about the winning of the ball at each winning opening detected by the MPU 201 and the information about the ball guided to the ball discharging path is used by the MPU 201 itself without transferring to another chip, and the information about the character ratio is obtained. Since it can be managed, it is less likely to be affected by noise, and it is possible to more accurately manage information about the accessory ratio.

<Modification 35>
Further, the accessory ratio management chip 207 may be provided separately from the main controller 110, and the accessory ratio management chip 207 and the main controller 110 may be connected. In this case, the accessory ratio management chip 207 may be housed in the same board box 100 as the main controller 110, or may be housed in a board box different from the board box 100 in which the main controller 110 is housed. Good. When the accessory ratio management chip 207 is housed in a board box different from the main controller 110, the accessory ratio management chip 207 may be housed in a board box dedicated to the accessory ratio management chip 207, or other control. The accessory ratio management chip 207 may be housed in any one of the board boxes 101 to 104 in which devices and the like are housed.

<Modification 36>
Further, the accessory ratio management chip 207 may be connected to the payout control device 111, or the accessory ratio management chip 207 may be provided in the payout control device 111. Then, the accessory ratio management chip 207 may record information on the accessory ratio based on the signal from the payout control device 111 and transmit the information to the inspection device 300. In this case, from the main control device 110 to the payout control device 111, information on the winning for each winning opening (for example, for each winning opening, a ball that has won during a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds)) (Information indicating the number) may be transmitted and the information may be stored in the buffer 262 of the accessory ratio management chip 207. Further, in the prize ball command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the payout control device 111, together with the number of prize balls (the number of balls to be paid out), which prize hole is associated with the winning prize is determined. Based on the award ball command, the buffer 262 sets the number of award balls indicated by the award ball command in the area corresponding to the winning opening having the award based on the award ball command. By adding the number of winning prize balls to the corresponding winning opening counter provided in the first reading memory 263, the number of balls paid out by winning the corresponding winning opening for each winning opening is increased by the counter. The number may be counted. Further, instead of the accessory ratio management chip 207, the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 may realize the function of the accessory ratio management chip 207. Also by these, the character ratio management chip 207 or the payout control device 111 can record information relating to the character ratio and transmit it to the inspection device 300. In these cases, in the main controller 110, the information of the prize ball number table 202e and the information of the trigger information data 202f are transferred to the main controller 110 by the startup process executed by the MPU 201 when the power is turned on. It may be transmitted from the to the payout control device 111 by a command. As a result, the payout control device 111 side can manage the accessory ratio and the like by using these pieces of information stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

<Modification 37>
Further, the accessory ratio management chip 207 may be connected to the voice lamp control device 113, or the accessory ratio management chip 207 may be provided in the voice lamp control device 113. Then, the accessory ratio management chip 207 may record information on the accessory ratio based on the signal from the voice lamp control device 113 and transmit the information to the inspection device 300. In this case, from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, information about winning for each winning opening (for example, a ball that has won during a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) for each winning opening). The information) indicating the number of items) may be transmitted and the information may be stored in the buffer 262 of the accessory ratio management chip 207. Further, instead of the accessory ratio management chip 207, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 may realize the function of the accessory ratio management chip 207. Also by these, the character ratio management chip 207 or the voice lamp control device 113 can record information on the character ratio and transmit it to the inspection device 300. Further, by managing the character ratio with the character ratio management chip 207 or the voice lamp control device 113, the calculated character ratio, the continuous character ratio, etc. are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The command may be transmitted to the control device 114. By displaying on the third pattern display device 81, it is possible for a person involved in the hall to easily find the pachinko machine 10 having a wrong character ratio or a continuous character ratio, or to prevent a fraudulent person from performing misconduct. it can. Further, when the character ratio ratio or the continuous character ratio calculated by the character ratio management chip 207 or the voice lamp control device 113 is in a predetermined state (for example, a state where fraudulent acts are suspected), the voice output device 226 determines a predetermined value. In order to output a notification sound of, or to turn on/blink the lamp display device 227 in a predetermined manner by the voice lamp control device 113, or to display a predetermined display on the third symbol display device 81, A command may be transmitted to the display control device 114. As a result, it is possible for a person involved in the hall to easily discover the pachinko machine 10 suspected of fraudulent activity and to prevent the fraudulent person from performing misbehavior. In these cases, in the main controller 110, the information of the prize ball number table 202e and the information of the trigger information data 202f are changed to the main controller by the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 when the power is turned on. A command may be transmitted from 110 to the voice lamp control device 113. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 side can manage the accessory ratio and the like by using these pieces of information stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

<Modification 38>
Further, the accessory ratio management chip 207 may be connected to the display control device 114, or the accessory ratio management chip 207 may be provided in the display control device 114. Then, the accessory ratio management chip 207 may record information on the accessory ratio based on the signal from the display control device 114 and transmit the information to the inspection device 300. In this case, from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113, information about winning for each winning opening (for example, a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) for each winning opening) is displayed. Information indicating the number of balls that have won a prize) may be transmitted and the information may be stored in the buffer 262 of the accessory ratio management chip 207. Further, instead of the accessory ratio management chip 207, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 may realize the function of the accessory ratio management chip 207. Also by these, the character ratio management chip 207 or the display control device 114 can record the information related to the character ratio and transmit it to the inspection device 300. In addition, by controlling the character ratio with the character ratio management chip 207 or the display control device 114, the display control of displaying the calculated character ratio, continuous character ratio, etc. on the third symbol display device 81. Device 114 may do this. By displaying on the third pattern display device 81, it is possible for a person involved in the hall to easily find the pachinko machine 10 having a wrong character ratio or a continuous character ratio, or to prevent a fraudulent person from performing misconduct. it can. In addition, when the character ratio ratio or the continuous character ratio calculated by the character ratio management chip 207 or the display control device 114 is in a predetermined state (for example, a state where fraudulent acts are suspected), the predetermined display is the third symbol. The display control device 114 may perform control for displaying on the display device 81. As a result, it is possible for a person involved in the hall to easily discover the pachinko machine 10 suspected of fraudulent activity and to prevent the fraudulent person from performing misbehavior. In these cases, in the main controller 110, the information of the prize ball number table 202e and the information of the trigger information data 202f are changed to the main controller by the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 when the power is turned on. A command may be transmitted from 110 to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113. As a result, the display control device 114 can manage the accessory ratio and the like by using these pieces of information stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

<Modification 39>
In each of the above-described embodiments, on the substrate on which the main controller 110 is provided, or connected to the accessory ratio management chip 207, or the accessory ratio management chip 207 is mounted, or the accessory ratio management chip 207 is installed. A display device provided with a plurality of 7-segment displays on a substrate provided with a control device that realizes the function is related to the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio. Information or information indicating game performance (for example, a base value or the like) may be displayed. The display device may be configured by a liquid crystal display having a predetermined number of pixels, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display, or the like, instead of the 7-segment display. The display device is connected to the accessory ratio management chip 207 on the substrate on which the main controller 110 is provided, or is equipped with the accessory ratio management chip 207, or the function of the accessory ratio management chip 207. Is not provided on the substrate on which the control device that realizes the above is provided, but is connected to the substrate on which the main control device 110 is provided, or the accessory ratio management chip 207, or the accessory ratio management chip 207 is mounted. Alternatively, it may be provided by being connected to a substrate provided with a control device that realizes the function of the accessory ratio management chip 207. The display device may be assembled so that the display screen of the display device can be seen when the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is viewed, or the display screen of the display device can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. May be assembled as follows.

<Modification 40>
The information on the character ratio and the continuous character ratio displayed on the display device may be, for example, information indicating the total number of balls paid out by winning for each winning hole, or for all winning holes. The total number of balls paid out by winning the prize, and the total number of balls paid out by winning the winning opening (the second starting opening 64b and the special winning opening 65a in the present embodiment) in which the accessory operates. The information may be information indicating the total number of balls paid out by winning a prize in the prize winning opening (in the present embodiment, the special winning prize 65a) in which objects operate continuously. Further, information indicating the total number of balls shot to the game area (the number of shot balls) may be included in the information on the character ratio and the continuous character ratio displayed on the display device. The display device is composed of a liquid crystal display having a predetermined number of pixels, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display, or the like, instead of a 7-segment display, and has a character ratio, a continuous character ratio, or a character ratio. You may make it display the information relevant to a product ratio and a continuous winning character ratio.

<Variation 41>
The character ratio and the continuous character ratio displayed on the display device, the information relating to the character ratio and the continuous character ratio, or the information indicating the game performance is recorded in the latest second reading memory 264. At the timing (trigger), the information itself recorded in the second reading memory 264 or the information generated from the information may be used. In addition, at the timing (trigger) at which recording is performed in the plurality of second reading memories 264 including the latest, it is recorded in the second reading memory 264 itself, or is recorded in the second reading memory 264 at each timing. The information generated from the information may be displayed on the display device as the character ratio or the continuous character ratio, the information relating to the character ratio or the continuous character ratio, or the information indicating the game performance. In addition, at the timing (trigger) at which recording is performed in the plurality of second reading memories 264 including the latest, the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 or all timings (trigger) recorded in the second reading memory 264. ) Information, take the average value of the character ratio and the continuous character ratio, the information related to the character ratio and the continuous character ratio, or the information indicating the game performance, and display the average value on the display device. May be. Furthermore, not only the information recorded in the second reading memory 264, but also the information stored in the first reading memory 263 is reflected to obtain the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, the character ratio, and the continuous character ratio. Related information or information indicating game performance may be generated and displayed on the display device.

As a result, by looking at the display device, it is possible that a fraudulent act was performed from the character ratio or the continuous character ratio, the information related to the character ratio or the continuous character ratio, or the information indicating the game performance. Can be judged. It should be noted that this display device may simultaneously display any one of the character ratio, the continuous character, the information relating to the character ratio or the continuous character ratio, and the information indicating the game performance, or one by one. You may let me. Further, any one of the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, the information relating to the character ratio or the continuous character ratio, and the information indicating the game performance may be alternately displayed every predetermined time. When they are displayed alternately, information indicating what is being displayed may be displayed together. Further, when the character ratio or the continuous character ratio displayed on the display device or other information exceeds a predetermined ratio (for example, when the character ratio exceeds 70%, the continuous character ratio is If it exceeds 60%), the displayed accessory ratio or continuous accessory ratio and other information may be displayed in a color different from the normal color or may be displayed in blinking. Further, in the display device, it may be a predetermined period (for example, a predetermined time such as 30 seconds) after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, or until the start-up process is completed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. (Period may be a period until a predetermined process is completed, such as a period), information relating to a character ratio, a continuous character ratio, a character ratio or a continuous character ratio, or information indicating a game performance. May be displayed. Thereby, the hall-related person confirms the character ratio and the continuous character ratio displayed on the display device when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and the information related to the character ratio and the continuous character ratio. Therefore, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not there has been any wrongdoing. Further, in the display device, when it is determined that the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, the information related to the character ratio and the continuous character ratio, or the game performance is displayed. Information may be displayed. Thereby, the hall-related person can easily confirm whether or not there has been any wrongdoing by checking the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio displayed on the display device when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. .. In addition, when it is determined that the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, the ratio of the accessory to the display device, the continuous accessory ratio, the information related to the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio, or the information indicating the game performance is displayed. The display may be a predetermined time period (for example, a predetermined time such as 10 seconds), or a time period until the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 completes the processing related to power-off (for example, until the processing of S705 ends) , May be a period until the predetermined process is completed). In addition, when it is determined that the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, the character ratio to the display device, the continuous character ratio, the information related to the character ratio and the continuous character ratio, or the information indicating the game performance is Alternatively, electric power from a backup power source, a secondary battery, a large-capacity capacitor, or the like may be used. Further, the display device may be housed in the substrate box. As a result, it is possible to prevent the display device from displaying an illegal value.

<Modification 42>
Further, the display device is provided with a button for displaying the character ratio or the continuous character ratio, the information relating to the character ratio or the continuous character ratio, or the information indicating the game performance, and the button is operated. In this case, the display device may display the character ratio or the continuous character ratio, the information relating to the character ratio or the continuous character ratio, or the information indicating the game performance. As a result, only when the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, or other information is confirmed, by operating the button, the character ratio or the continuous character ratio, or information related to the character ratio or the continuous character ratio. Alternatively, since the information indicating the game performance can be displayed on the display device, it is possible to suppress wasteful power consumption in the display device. Further, the operation of the button is effective only when the game is in the non-execution state in the pachinko machine 10, and the display device displays the character ratio or the continuous character ratio, the information relating to the character ratio or the continuous character ratio, Alternatively, information indicating the game performance may be displayed. The determination that the game is in the non-execution state in the pachinko machine 10 is, for example, when the detection of the ball guided to the ball discharge path by the out switch 208f is not detected for a predetermined time or more, or the operation handle 51 is rotated. Otherwise, if the ball is not fired by the ball firing unit 112a, it may be performed when the ball guided to the game area is not detected. With this, it is possible to prevent the fraudulent person from trying to commit some fraud while watching the information displayed on the display device while playing the game.

<Modification 43>
Further, the operation of the button may be enabled only when operated in combination with another button. As a result, a fraudulent person who does not know the effective combination of button operations can display information related to the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio, or the information indicating the game performance. The device may not be easily displayed. In addition, while operating buttons for displaying the character ratio or the continuous character ratio, the information relating to the character ratio or the continuous character ratio, or the information indicating the game performance on the display device, the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10. Only when is input, the character ratio or the continuous character ratio, the information relating to the character ratio or the continuous character ratio, or the information indicating the game performance may be displayed on the display device. Accordingly, when the hall-related person turns on the power to the pachinko machine 10, by operating the buttons together, the character ratio or the continuous character ratio, the character ratio or the continuous character displayed on the display device is displayed. By confirming the information relating to the product ratio or the information indicating the game performance, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not there has been any wrongdoing during business hours on the previous day or during non-business hours at night. Further, while operating a button for displaying the character ratio or the continuous character ratio, the information relating to the character ratio or the continuous character ratio, or the information indicating the game performance on the display device, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Only in the case where is turned off, information relating to the character ratio or the continuous character ratio, the information relating to the character ratio or the continuous character ratio, or the information indicating the game performance may be displayed on the display device. Accordingly, when a person involved in the hall turns off the power of the pachinko machine 10, he or she also operates the buttons, so that the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, the character ratio, or the continuous character displayed on the display device is displayed. By confirming the information relating to the product ratio or the information indicating the game performance, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not there has been any fraud before today's business or during today's business. The display of the character ratio or the continuous character ratio, the information related to the character ratio or the continuous character ratio, or the information indicating the game performance on the display device by the operation of the button ends based on the elapse of a predetermined period. Alternatively, the process may be terminated when the button is operated again. In addition, only during a period in which the button is continuously operated, information relating to the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio, or the information indicating the game performance is displayed. Good.

<Modification 44>
When the button is operated and the display device displays information relating to the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, the character ratio or the continuous character ratio, or the information indicating the game performance, the pachinko machine. The game mode of 10 may be set to the check mode, and main control of the game in the main controller 110 may be temporarily stopped. As a result, as the game progresses, the character ratio or the continuous character ratio displayed on the display device, the information related to the character ratio or the continuous character ratio, or the information indicating the game performance changes. It is possible to suppress the difficulty of checking the accessory ratio and the like. In this case, the main control device 110 sets the game mode of the pachinko machine 10 to the check mode and temporarily stops the main control of the game, with respect to the voice lamp control device 113 (and the display control device 114). You may transmit the command which notifies that it changes to check mode. Then, when the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 receive the command notifying that the check mode is entered, for example, a predetermined image (for example, a black screen) corresponding to the check mode is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. ) Is displayed, the variation effect being executed is continuously changed at high speed during the check mode, the voice output from the voice output device 226 is a predetermined voice corresponding to the check mode, or a voice corresponding to the high speed change is displayed. May be controlled to output. Thereby, it is possible to indicate to the player that the pachinko machine 10 has entered the check mode. Further, the main controller 110 releases the check mode as the game mode of the pachinko machine 10 and restarts the main control of the game, and the check mode is set to the voice lamp controller 113 (and the display controller 114). You may transmit the command which notifies that it will be cancelled. Thereby, in the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are returned to those before the transition to the check mode. You can

<Modification 45>
Further, in the modified examples described so far, when the button operation is performed, the ratio of the accessory role or the continuous accessory rate, the ratio of the accessory role or the continuous accessory rate is displayed on the display device provided on the substrate such as the main controller 110. The case where the related information or the information indicating the game performance is displayed has been described, but in addition to this or in place of this, when the button operation is performed, the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device. 81, the lamp display device 227 or the like, information relating to the character ratio or the continuous character ratio, the information relating to the character ratio or the continuous character ratio, or the information indicating the game performance may be displayed, or audio output The device 226 may output a character ratio, a continuous character ratio, or some notification sound indicating game performance. Also in this case, the above-described modified example may be appropriately applied in relation to the button operation.

<Modification 46>
Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a and the information related to the accessory ratio is transmitted to the inspection device 300 has been described. When the button operation is performed, the information regarding the accessory ratio may be transmitted to the inspection device 300. In this case as well, the above-described modified example may be applied as appropriate depending on the button operation.

<Variation 47>
In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the information managed by the accessory ratio management chip 207 is transmitted to the inspection device 300 has been described. However, based on the information managed by the accessory ratio management chip 207, the main controller Various information such as the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are displayed on the display device provided on the substrate such as 110, and the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device 81, the lamp display device 227, etc. By displaying information about the property ratio or the continuous role ratio or information indicating the game performance, or by outputting from the voice output device 226 a notification sound about the role ratio, the continuous role ratio, or the game performance, In the case of being configured to perform some kind of notification, the transmission to the inspection device 300 does not necessarily have to be performed.

<Variation 48>
In each of the above-described embodiments, when the large capacity capacitor 267 or the secondary battery is connected to the accessory ratio management chip 207 and the power supply to the main controller 110 is stopped due to a power failure or the like, the accessory ratio management chip 207. In the above, the case has been described in which the processing that accompanies power-off is executed using the electric power charged in the capacitor 267. On the other hand, instead of the capacitor 267 or the secondary battery, a backup voltage may be supplied from the power supply device 115 to the accessory ratio management chip 207. As a result, the information stored in the first reading memory 263 can be retained even while the power is turned off. Further, when the fraudulent person tries to set the illegal information in the buffer 262 at midnight, the after-hours information is stored in the after-hours data 263j of the first reading memory 263, and then the second reading is performed at a predetermined timing. The after-hours information can be recorded in the game state data 264d of the memory 264.

<Modification 49>
In the above-described embodiment, when it is determined by the process of S724 (see FIG. 19) that the MPU 201 has transmitted the interrupt signal after setting the buffer 262 during the midnight time, the time indicated by the RTC 266 is set. The image described about the case of determining whether it is between midnight and early morning 6:00, and the threshold value of the time used for the determination of the midnight time zone may be set by the MPU 201. For example, the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 stores the midnight time zone determination time data that defines the threshold value of the time, and during the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 when power is supplied, the award ball number table 202e. In addition to the trigger information data 202f and the trigger information data 202f, the midnight time zone determination time data stored in the ROM 202 may be set in the midnight time zone determination time setting area provided in the setting register 265. Then, in the process of S724, it may be determined whether or not the MPU 201 transmits the interrupt signal after the setting of the buffer 262 in the time period indicated by the midnight time period determination time data. As a result, the determination of the midnight time zone can be variably set by the ROM 202.

<Modification 50>
In each of the above-described embodiments, when the accessory ratio management chip 207 is powered on, the power-on information is stored in the first reading memory 263 together with the time indicated by the RTC 266 at that time, and the predetermined reading memory 263 stores the predetermined information. At the timing, the power-on information may be recorded in the game state data 264d of the second reading memory 264 together with the time. In addition, when the power to the accessory ratio management chip 207 is turned on, the power-on information may be directly recorded in the game state data 264d together with the time indicated by the RTC 266 at that time. As a result, the information regarding the time when the power is turned on is also transmitted to the inspection device 300. Therefore, when there is a possibility of a fraudulent act due to a change in the character role ratio and the continuous character role ratio, the cause can be multi-faceted, including the time when the power is turned on.

<Variation 51>
Further, in each of the above embodiments, when the power to the accessory ratio management chip 207 is cut off, the power-off information is stored in the first reading memory 263 together with the time indicated by the RTC 266 at that time. The power-off information may be recorded in the game state data 264d of the second reading memory 264 at a predetermined timing together with the time. In this case, the first reading memory 263 may be a non-volatile memory or may be supplied with a backup voltage. Further, when the power to the accessory ratio management chip 207 is cut off, the power-off information may be directly recorded in the game state data 264d together with the time indicated by the RTC 266 at that time. In this case, the first reading memory 263 does not necessarily have to be a non-volatile memory or to be supplied with a backup voltage. As a result, the information regarding the time when the power is turned off is also transmitted to the inspection device 300. Therefore, if there is a possibility of a fraudulent act due to a change in the character role ratio and the continuous character role ratio, the cause can be multilaterally investigated, including the time when the power supply was cut off.

<Modification 52>
In the above embodiment, when the power supply to the main control device 110 is cut off and the main processing of the MPU 201 (see FIG. 17) executes the processing of S704 to S707, after executing the processing of S704, S705 is executed. Before the processing of (1) is executed, the same processing as the processing of S155 and S156 shown in FIG. 11 may be executed. That is, in the processing at the time of power-off, after the occurrence of interrupt processing is prohibited (S704), the values of the start 1 counter 203d, start 2 counter 203e, ordinary 1 counter 203f, ordinary 2 counter 203g, and special winning opening counter 203h of the RAM 203 As winning information, and the value of the out counter 203i as out information, together with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at that time, set in the character ratio management chip 207, and transmit an interrupt signal to the character ratio management chip 207. You may. As a result, the power is cut off for the number of balls that have won the winning openings and the balls that have been guided to the ball discharge path immediately before the power is turned off and are not counted in the accessory ratio management chip 207. It is possible to count it with the accessory ratio management chip 207 before the operation. Therefore, it is possible to record the number of balls won at each winning opening and the balls guided to the ball discharging path immediately before the power is turned off by the accessory ratio management chip 207.

<Modification 53>
In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, when the trigger (timing) for calculating the character ratio shown by the trigger information data 202f is the "game time", the ball guided to the ball discharge path by the out switch 208f is detected. The case where the game time is calculated by counting the played time has been described, but the game time is not limited to this. For example, an out-port switch for detecting a ball that has passed through the out-port 66 is provided, and the out-port switch, the first starting-port switch 208a, the second starting-port switch 208b, the first normal winning opening switch 208c, and the second normal winning opening are provided. When the passage of a ball to each winning opening or out opening is detected by one of the switch 208d and the special winning opening switch 208e, the game time is calculated by counting the detected time. Good. Further, the game time may be calculated by accumulating the time when it is determined that the player is touching the operation handle 51 based on the output of the touch sensor 51a provided on the operation handle 51. The game time may be calculated by accumulating the time during which 51 is rotationally operated by the player, or by accumulating the time during which the player touches the operation handle 51 and rotationally operates the operation handle 51. The game time may be calculated. Further, the game time may be calculated by accumulating the time during which the ball firing unit 112a is driven by the firing control device 112 and the ball is being fired. Further, a game ball detection switch is provided on the return ball prevention member 68 provided at the tip of the inner rail 61, and the time during which the ball guided from the ball guide passage to the game area is continuously detected is counted by the game ball detection switch. By doing, the game time may be calculated.

<Modification 54>
In each of the above-described embodiments, the jackpot probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol are preset in the main control device 110, and the jackpot probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol cannot be changed by a person related to the hall. However, instead of this, the jackpot probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol may be changed to a plurality of levels (for example, 6 levels) by a person concerned with the hall or the like. As a result, on the hall side, by making the jackpot probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol different for each pachinko machine of the same model, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of selecting a platform. ..

<Modification 55>
The jackpot probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol may be changed, for example, as follows. First, for each of a plurality of stages (henceforth, described as 6 stages (levels 1 to 6)) in which the jackpot probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol can be changed, a jackpot random number value at a corresponding level (stage) and The random number value for the second symbol is stored in the ROM 202 in advance. The jackpot probability and/or the second symbol hit probability at that level is determined by the jackpot random number value and/or the number of hit random number values of the second symbol determined for each level.

<Modification 56>
The main board provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a keyhole for changing the jackpot probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol. The keyhole may be normally covered with the back pack 92 of the back pack unit 94, or may be exposed by opening the back pack 92. Alternatively, the back pack 92 may be provided with an opening for a keyhole, and the keyhole may be exposed from the opening. The keyhole is configured to be rotatable by a dedicated key between two positions of the “probability setting off” side and the “probability setting on” side. On the other hand, the dedicated key can be inserted and removed. When the keyhole is set to the “probability setting ON” position by the dedicated key, the pachinko machine 10 can change the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol. While the power of the pachinko machine 10 is off, the keyhole is rotated from the “probability setting off” to the “probability setting on” position by the dedicated key, and when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, The pachinko machine 10 may be configured to be activated in a probability setting mode in which the jackpot probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol can be changed. Thereby, it is possible to safely change the jackpot probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol in accordance with the activation of the pachinko machine 10 in the hall. Also, while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is on, when the keyhole is turned from the "probability setting off" to the "probability setting on" position by the dedicated key, the jackpot probability and/or the second symbol The hit probability may not be changed. This makes it possible to prevent fraudsters from illegally changing the jackpot probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol during business.

<Modification 57>
In the pachinko machine 10, a push-type probability setting button for changing the jackpot probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol is provided on the main board. Like the keyhole, this probability setting button is normally covered with the back pack 92 of the back pack unit 94, and appears by opening the back pack 92. However, the back pack 92 may be provided with an opening for the probability setting button, and the probability setting button may be exposed from the opening. When the pachinko machine 10 enters the probability setting mode, the level (stage) of the big hit probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol so far is displayed on, for example, a display device provided on the main board. Then, when the probability setting button is pressed, the level of the jackpot probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol is increased by 1, and it is displayed on the display device. Further, when the level before pressing the probability setting button is "6", when the probability setting button is pressed, the level "1" is displayed on the display device. In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 is set to the probability setting mode, the level displayed on the display device is a predetermined level (instead of the level of the conventional jackpot probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol). For example, the level may be “1”).

<Variation 58>
When the RAM elimination switch 122 is pressed when the level of the jackpot probability to be set and/or the hit probability of the second symbol is displayed on the display device, the jackpot value or the second of the level displayed on the display device. The winning value of the symbol is set, and the pachinko machine 10 is activated. Thereby, the pachinko machine 10 operates with the jackpot probability of the set level and/or the hit probability of the second symbol. Further, when the level of the jackpot probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol to be set is displayed, when the keyhole into which the special key is inserted is turned to the position of "probability setting off", that display The jackpot value of the level displayed on the device or the hit value of the second symbol may be set, and the pachinko machine 10 may be activated. Also by this, the pachinko machine 10 operates with the jackpot probability of the set level and/or the hit probability of the second symbol.

<Modification 59>
Here, when the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a display device for displaying information relating to the character ratio or the continuous character ratio or the character ratio or the continuous character ratio, the pachinko machine 10 sets the probability setting. When activated in the mode, the level of the jackpot probability to be set and/or the hit probability of the second symbol may be displayed on the display device. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost by suppressing an increase in the number of display devices mounted on the pachinko machine 10. Further, the display device is also used as the display device and the increase in the number of components is suppressed, whereby the arrangement (layout) of each component can be easily performed.

<Modification 60>
By the way, in the pachinko machine 10, when it is configured to be able to change the jackpot probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio naturally change according to the change. Therefore, whether the change in the character ratio or the continuous character ratio managed by the character ratio management chip 207 is due to the change in the jackpot probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol, or whether it is due to some fraud. There is a risk that you will not know.

Therefore, when the jackpot probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol is changed, all the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 and the information stored in the first reading memory 263 may be deleted. .. Thereby, with the change of the jackpot probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol, it is possible to eliminate the influence of a change in the character ratio or the continuous character ratio. In this case, the jackpot probability and/or information indicating that the hit probability of the second symbol has been changed is recorded in the second reading memory 264, and the information is output to the connected inspection device 300. May be. As a result, the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 can be understood at the inspection stage that the big hit probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol has been erased, and whether or not there is a fraud. Can be used as a reference for the judgment. In this case, the date and time of the change may be stored together. Further, the information indicating that the jackpot probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol has been changed may include information indicating the level after the change, or may include information about the level before the change. Based on these date and time and level, it is possible to more reliably determine whether or not there has been a fraud.

<Modification 61>
On the other hand, even when the jackpot probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol is changed, all the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 and the information stored in the first reading memory 263 are retained. You may Thereby, before the big hit probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol is changed, it is possible to analyze whether or not there is a fraud. In this case, the jackpot probability and/or information indicating that the hit probability of the second symbol has been changed is recorded in the second reading memory 264, and the information is output to the connected inspection device 300. May be. Thereby, it is possible to easily judge whether or not the influence of the change of the character ratio or the continuous character ratio is due to the change of the jackpot probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol. The information indicating that the jackpot probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol has been changed may include the date and time when the change is made. Further, it may include information indicating the level after the change, or may include information about the level before the change. Based on these dates and levels, it is possible to more reliably analyze the factors that cause changes in the character role ratio and the continuous character ratio.

<Modification 62>
In addition, even when the big hit probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol is changed, all the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 and the information stored in the first reading memory 263 are retained. In the case of, the display ratio provided for displaying the character ratio or the continuous character ratio, or the information related to the character ratio or the continuous character ratio, the jackpot probability and/or the second symbol hit After the probability is changed, based on the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 and/or the first reading memory 263, the character ratio or the continuous character ratio, or the character ratio or the continuous character ratio is obtained. The related information may be displayed. Therefore, with respect to the character ratio and the continuous character ratio displayed on this display device, or for information relating to the character ratio and the continuous character ratio, the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol is changed. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the influence of the change of the character ratio or the continuous character ratio, and it is possible to easily find the fraud after the change of the jackpot probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol. Further, in this case, the information indicating that the jackpot probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol has been changed may be recorded in the second reading memory 264 together with the date and time when the change is made. Based on this information, after the jackpot probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol is changed, the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 is easily determined, and based on that, the character ratio or the continuous character It is possible to display the ratio, or information related to the character ratio or the continuous character ratio.

<Modification 63>
In addition, even when the big hit probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol is changed, all the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 and the information stored in the first reading memory 263 are retained. In this case, the information may be recorded in the second reading memory 264 by dividing the jackpot probability and/or the level (stage) of the hit probability of the second symbol. Thereby, for each level of the jackpot probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol, the character ratio or the continuous character ratio when the level is set is determined from the information recorded in the second reading memory 264. be able to. Therefore, the change in the character ratio and the continuous character ratio due to the change of the jackpot probability and/or the second symbol hit probability, and the change in the character ratio and the continuous character ratio due to fraudulent activity are clearly switched and analyzed. it can.

<Modification 64>
When the jackpot probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol is changed, only one or a plurality of pieces of information recorded in the second reading memory 264 immediately before may be stored, and the rest may be erased. Further, the information stored in the first reading memory 263 may be retained. Further, all the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 may be erased, and only the information stored in the first reading memory 263 may be retained. Thereby, the jackpot probability and/or the winning character ratio before the winning probability of the second symbol or the continuous winning character ratio can be excluded as much as possible from affecting the analysis and display, while the jackpot probability and/or Before the hit probability of the second symbol is changed, it is possible to analyze whether there is a possibility that a fraudulent act was performed. In this case, the information indicating that the jackpot probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol has been changed is recorded in the second reading memory 264, and the information may be output to the connected inspection device 300. Good. Thereby, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the influence of the change of the character ratio or the continuous character ratio is due to the change of the jackpot probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol, and the result is recorded in the second reading memory 264. Part of the information, etc. can be understood at the inspection stage that it was erased due to a change in the jackpot probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol, and it can be used as a reference for determining whether there was fraud. it can. The information indicating that the jackpot probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol has been changed may be stored together with the date and time of the change. Further, it may include information indicating the level after the change, or may include information about the level before the change. Based on these dates and levels, it is possible to more reliably analyze the factors that cause changes in the character role ratio and the continuous character ratio.

<Modification 65>
In each of the above-described embodiments, the information recorded in the first reading memory 263 and the second reading memory 264 is prevented from being erased from the outside, so that the fraudster cannot erase the evidence of the fraudulent activity. .. On the other hand, there is a second-hand market in the pachinko machine market, and it is often sold from one store to another store and installed in other stores. In this case, even if a fraudulent act is performed in the previous store and the character ratio and the like change, the information still remains in the first reading memory 263 and the second reading memory 264. There was a risk of suspicion that there was cheating at another store. Therefore, in preparation for such a case, when the information is sold from one store to another store, the information recorded in the first reading memory 263 or the second reading memory 264 is erased or the information to be resold is displayed. The second reading memory 264 may be recorded. If the information recorded in the first reading memory 263 or the second reading memory 264 is erased, it is possible to prevent the record of the fraudulent activity performed at the previous store from being taken over by the next store. it can. In addition, if the information to be resold is recorded in the second reading memory 264, the information relating to the character ratio in the previous one store and the information relating to the character ratio in the next other store can be clearly divided. Therefore, it is possible to analyze, and it is also possible to discover fraudulent acts performed in the previous shop from the information related to the ratio of the accessory in the previous shop.

<Modification 66>
The erasing of information recorded in the first reading memory 263 and the second reading memory 264, and the recording of the information to be resold in the second reading memory 264 are limited to a part of the makers of the pachinko machine 10. It is good to be limited to. As a result, it is possible to prevent the record of fraudulent activity from being easily erased or deceived. Further, the erasing of the information recorded in the first reading memory 263 and the second reading memory 264 and the recording of the resold information in the second reading memory 264 may be performed by the following method. .. For example, by connecting the inspection device 300 to the inspection terminal 207a and inputting a dedicated command from the inspection device 300 to the accessory ratio management chip 207, the data is recorded in the first reading memory 263 or the second reading memory 264. It is also possible to execute a program for erasing the stored information or recording the information to be resold in the second reading memory 264. This command is a secret special command except for some people, so that it is possible to prevent the fraudulent person from easily erasing or cheating the record of the fraudulent activity. Moreover, only when a hole such as a keyhole is provided on the main board and a key or the like matching the hole is inserted, the information recorded in the first reading memory 263 or the second reading memory 264 is erased or resold. The program for recording the information to be stored in the second reading memory 264 may be executed. As a result, only those who have a key or the like that fits into the hole erases the information recorded in the first reading memory 263 or the second reading memory 264, or stores the information resold in the second reading memory 264. Since it is possible to record, it is possible to prevent the fraudulent person from easily erasing or cheating the record of fraudulent activity. In addition, a switch is provided in the board box 100 in which the main board is housed, and only when the switch is operated, the information recorded in the first reading memory 263 or the second reading memory 264 is erased or resold. A program for recording the stored information in the second reading memory 264 may be executed. As a result, unless the substrate box 100 is opened, the switch cannot be operated, the information recorded in the first reading memory 263 and the second reading memory 264 is erased, and the information to be resold is stored in the second reading memory 264. Cannot record. As described above, in the board box 100, the box base and the box cover are connected in an unopenable manner (connection by the caulking structure), and the connection portion between the box base and the box cover extends over the box base and the box cover. A seal sticker is attached. Therefore, since the fraudulent person cannot easily open the board box, it is possible to prevent the fraudulent person from easily erasing the record of the fraudulent activity or faking it. Further, if the board box is opened and the switch is operated, the evidence of the opening remains, so that it is possible to easily determine that the fraudulent act was performed.

<Modification 67>
In the third to seventh embodiments, the processing relating to the accessory ratio and the base value is exemplified as the processing of using the outside-use-area area 203y in the RAM 203, but the processing is not limited to this, and main control of the game. It may be various processes except for. For example, it may be processing for determining fraud. In this fraudulent activity determination process, for example, it is determined whether or not a magnet approaches or vibrates, or an unnatural ball enters the winning opening (a winning ball detected even when the special winning opening 65a is closed). A process may be performed for giving notification when there is an illegal act. In addition, a plurality of processes having different functions (purposes) (for example, a “process relating to a character ratio” and a “process for determining fraud”) may be included as the process of using the outside-use-area area 203y.

<Modification 68>
In the third to seventh embodiments, the case where the contents of the register 200 is saved to the outside work area 203y1 of the outside-use area 203y using the load (LD) instruction has been described, but this is changed to the load (LD) instruction. Alternatively, even if the store (ST) command is used to save the outside of the use area 203y to the outside work area 203y1, the same effect can be obtained.

<Modification 69>
In the fifth to seventh embodiments, in addition to the real-time base value, three base values (previous base value, pre-previous time base value, pre-previous time base value) that have been counted for each predetermined period in the past are used as the base display device. Although the case of displaying in 401 has been described, at least two base values counted in the past for each predetermined period (for example, the previous base value and the two-preceding base value) may be displayed together with the real-time base value. Alternatively, four or more base values counted in the past for each predetermined period may be displayed together with the real-time base value.

<Modification 70>
In the fifth to seventh embodiments, the case where each base value measured in a plurality of periods and the base value being measured in real time are displayed on the base display device 401 have been described, but instead of the base value, Or, in addition to the base value, character ratio, continuous character ratio, information related to character ratio and continuous character ratio, and/or other information indicating game performance is measured in each of a plurality of periods. And what is measured in real time may be displayed on a display device.

<Modification 71>
In the fifth to seventh embodiments, the case where the MPU 201 executes the base value process (FIG. 41) and various base values are displayed on the base display device 401 has been described, but the management for managing the base value in the main controller 110 is described. A chip is provided, or a management chip that manages the base value is provided separately from the main control unit 110, and the management chip executes the same process as the base value process to calculate the real-time base value and calculate the real-time base value. The previous base value, the two-preceding base value, and the two-preceding base value may be displayed on the base display device 401. In this case, the management chip may directly control the display of the base display device 401, or the management chip may control the display of the base display device 401 by the MPU 201 via the MPU 201. Further, the base display device 401 may be directly connected to the management chip.

<Modification 72>
The various counters 203j, 203k, 203q, the base value data 203l to 203o, and the flag 203p shown in FIG. 39A may be stored in the RAM in the management chip. In this case, when the power is turned on while the RAM all erase switch is turned on, the MPU 201 sends a signal to that effect to the management chip during the startup process, and the management chip receives the signal. The various counters 203j, 203k, 203q, the base value data 203l to 203o, the flag 203p, etc. may be initialized.

<Modification 73>
Further, when the power is turned on, the management chip may control the base display device 401 to turn on all the segments of the four 7-segment displays 401a to 401d. In this case, the control may be performed immediately after the management chip starts up when the power is turned on, or when the power is turned on, the MPU 201 sends an initialization signal to the management chip during the startup process. May be transmitted, and the control may be executed in the process executed by the management chip upon receiving the initialization signal.

<Modification 74>
In the fifth to seventh embodiments, when the previous base value, the two-preceding base value, and the two-preceding base value are displayed on the base display device 401, if there is no effective base value as the base value, the comparison segment is selected. The case where "---" is displayed on the display to indicate that there is no valid base value has been described. On the other hand, when there is no valid base value as the previous base value, the two-preceding base value, or the two-preceding base value, only the real-time base value may be displayed on the base display device 401. Thereby, it can be shown that there is no valid base value in the previous base value, the two-preceding base value, and the two-preceding base value. In addition, it is possible to prevent unnecessary display of the previous base value, the two-preceding base value, and the two-preceding base value for which there is no valid base value. On the other hand, in this case, the real-time base value and the previous base value may be displayed on the base display device 401, and the previous base value may be displayed as “−−” in the comparison segment. This can also indicate that the previous base value, the two-preceding base value, and the two-preceding base value have no valid base value. Further, by displaying not only the real-time base value but also the previous base value, it can be suggested that after the effective base value is obtained, the previous base value and the like are also displayed on the base display device 401.

<Modification 75>
In addition, when there is a valid base value in the previous base value, and there is no valid base value as the two-preceding base value or the two-preceding base value, only the real-time base value and the previous base value are displayed on the base display device 401. You may. If there is a valid base value for the previous base value and the two-preceding base value and there is no valid base value for the two-preceding base value, only the real-time base value, the previous base value, and the two-preceding base value are displayed on the base display device. It may be displayed on 401. Accordingly, it is possible to indicate that there is no valid base value for the base value that is not displayed. In addition, it is possible to prevent unnecessary display of information that does not have a valid base value.

<Modification 76>
On the other hand, when there is a valid base value in the previous base value, and there is no valid base value as the two-preceding base value or the two-preceding base value, the real-time base value, the previous base value, and the two-preceding base value are displayed in the base display device. It may be displayed in 401, and "---" may be displayed in the comparison segment as to the base value before two times. If there is a valid base value for the previous base value and the two-preceding base value, and there is no valid base value for the two-preceding base value, the real-time base value, the previous base value, the two-preceding base value and the two-preceding base value. The base value and the base value may be displayed on the base display device 401, and “−−” may be displayed in the comparison segment for the base value two times before. This can also indicate the type of base value for which there is no valid base value. Further, by displaying one base value of a type having no valid base value, it can be suggested that the base value of that type is displayed on the base display device 401 after the effective base value is obtained.

<Modification 77>
In the fifth embodiment, every time the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, all segments (including dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 are predetermined every time the power is turned on. The case of lighting for a period (5 seconds in the present embodiment) has been described, but instead of lighting, all the segments may be blinked for a predetermined period. By blinking all the segments, it is possible to confirm not only that all the segments can be turned on normally, but also whether all the segments can be turned off normally, and whether or not the display on the base display device 401 is normally performed can be confirmed. Easy to judge.

<Modification 78>
In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 is completely newly started up in the manufacturing factory, or when the used pachinko machine 10 is moved to another hall as a used table, when the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up, for example, the entire RAM is used. After the power is turned on while the erase switch is being operated, until all the total number of outs reaches 300, all of the segments (dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 are displayed. (Including) may be lit or blinked for a predetermined period (5 seconds in this embodiment). Accordingly, it is possible to confirm whether or not the display on the base display device 401 is normally performed at least when the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up. Further, it is possible to suggest that the pachinko machine 10 is in a new startup state while the lighting is performed.

<Modification 79>
Further, when the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is operated, all the segments (including the dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 are operated for a predetermined period (this embodiment). Then, it may be lit or blinked for 5 seconds.

<Modification 80>
In the fifth embodiment, immediately after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, all the segments (including dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 are operated for a predetermined period (this embodiment). In the above, the case where the control for lighting (or blinking) for 5 seconds is executed at a predetermined location (S3007) of the startup process (see FIG. 40) has been described. May be performed at any place in. For example, the control may be performed first after the start-up process is started, or the control may be performed after the initial setting (S601). In addition, the control may be executed after setting the interrupt permission (S613). Further, the control may be executed at a place other than the startup process. For example, in the main process (see FIG. 17) executed after the start-up process is completed, the control may be executed before the loop process (S701 to S703) is executed. In the timer interrupt process, for example, in the base value process (see FIG. 41), which is one of the timer interrupt processes, the timer interrupt process or the base value process is executed only after the power is turned on. It may be determined whether the control has been performed, and the control may be performed when the control is performed for the first time after the power is turned on. In other words, after turning on the power, all the segments (including dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 are turned on (or blink) for a predetermined period (5 seconds in this embodiment). If possible, this control may be performed at any timing.

<Modification 81>
In the fifth embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up in the manufacturing plant, or when the used pachinko machine 10 is moved to another hall as a used table, when the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up. , Until the total number of outs reaches 300, every time the power is turned on, all the segments (including dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 are operated for a predetermined period (main In the embodiment, the base display device 401 is turned on for 5 seconds), and then the identification segment is blinked (or turned on) with “88.”, and the real-time base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l is displayed as a ratio segment. The case of displaying in a special display mode that blinks (or lights up) in a different manner from the normal base value display has been described. In this case, each time the power is turned on, the seven segments provided in the base display device 401 are displayed. It is not necessary to turn on all the segments (including the dot segment) of the display devices 401a to 401d for a predetermined period (5 seconds in the present embodiment). In this case, during the new startup period of the pachinko machine 10, since the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 in the special display mode, it can be shown that the displayed base value is not a regular base value. In addition, it is possible to suggest that the pachinko machine 10 is in a new startup state by performing the display.

<Modification 82>
Further, in the fifth embodiment or the modification, as a special display mode displayed on the base display device 401 when the pachinko machine 10 is in the new startup period, “88.” is blinked (or lit) in the identification segment. In addition, the mode in which the real-time base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l is blinked (or lit) in the ratio segment is described, but this mode is not necessarily required, and a normal base value is displayed. The base display device 401 may be displayed in a different manner. For example, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the new startup period, “bL.”, “b1.”, “b2.”, and “b3.” are switched and displayed at 5-second intervals while blinking the identification segment. The display of the base display device 401 may be performed in such a manner that “−−” is lit and displayed on the comparison segment. As a result, it is possible to suggest that the pachinko machine 10 is in the new startup state while this display is being performed. Further, in this aspect, the real-time base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l may be lit or blinked in the ratio segment while "bL." Thereby, the real-time base value at that time can be shown for reference.

<Modification 83>
In the sixth to twelfth embodiments, the probability setting value can be changed in six stages of "1" to "6", and the jackpot probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol can be changed, but the probability setting value The number of stages that can be changed is not limited to six, and may be changed to any stage.

<Modification 84>
In the sixth to twelfth embodiments, the probability setting value is changed to change the jackpot probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol, but when the pachinko machine 10 includes a so-called small hit. Instead of or in addition to the change of the big hit probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol, the win probability of the small hit may be changed. Here, a small hit is a kind of miss, and when a ball enters the big winning opening 65a opened by the small hit and the ball is paid out, the number of the paid-out balls is also a base value calculation. Used for. In other words, when the winning probability of the small hit is changed, the base value is also changed. Therefore, if the base value data 203r based on the probability setting value before the change remains, the base value based on the changed probability setting value is left. Cannot be calculated correctly. Therefore, in this case, the base value data 203r may be erased together with the data in the RAM 203 that is started when the probability setting value is changed in the setting change mode. .. Thereby, the base value based on the changed probability setting value can be calculated correctly.

<Modification 85>
In the sixth and seventh embodiments described above, the case has been described in which whether or not the probability setting value is within the normal range (the range of “1” to “6”) is checked every time the timer interrupt processing is executed. However, this confirmation may be performed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth to twelfth embodiments. In addition, this confirmation is executed each time a predetermined trigger comes, such as every time the variation effect is started, every predetermined time (for example, every one hour, every time the internal clock becomes 00 minutes), or the like. You may

<Modification 86>
In the sixth and seventh embodiments, whether or not the probability set value is within the normal range (range of “1” to “6”) is confirmed in the timer interrupt process, and the probability set value is within the normal range. If it is not within the range, the case has been explained in which the game is stopped and the personnel related to the hall are informed to reactivate the pachinko machine 10 to change the probability setting value, but after the game is stopped. Alternatively, the setting change process may be executed to forcibly change the probability setting value by a person involved in the hall. In this case, a notification sound for prompting a change of the probability setting value may be output, or a notification such as calling a hall related person to the third symbol display device 81 may be performed. An external terminal (not shown) provided in main controller 110 may notify hall computer 600 that the probability setting value is not within the normal range. Thereby, the probability setting value can be reset within a normal range by a person concerned with the hall or the like.

<Modification 87>
In the sixth and seventh embodiments, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the normal mode or the setting confirmation mode, it is confirmed whether the RAM judgment value is normal during the start-up process, and the RAM judgment value is normal. If not, it is further confirmed whether or not the probability setting value is within the normal range, and if it is not within the normal range, the setting change process is executed, and the hall related persons etc. are allowed to change the probability setting value. The case was explained. Instead of executing this setting change process, in the voice output device 226 and the third symbol display device 81, a notification prompting the hall-related persons to restart the pachinko machine 10 and change the probability setting value. And/or from an external terminal (not shown) provided in the main controller 110 to the hall computer 600 to notify that the probability setting value is not within the normal range, and enter an infinite loop. You may do it. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 can be restarted and the probability setting value can be changed for persons involved in the hall.

<Modification 88>
In addition, when it is determined that the probability setting value is not within the normal range during the startup process, the probability setting of a specific probability setting value (for example, "1") from the range of "1" to "6" is performed. You may make it set as a value compulsorily. In addition, when it is determined that the probability setting value is not within the normal range during the game (for example, in the timer interrupt process), it is better not to forcefully set the probability setting value to the specific probability setting value. This is to prevent the player from suffering some disadvantages by suddenly changing the jackpot probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol during the game.

<Modification 89>
In the sixth and seventh embodiments, the case where the probability setting value is included in the calculation of the RAM determination value (checksum) has been described, but the probability setting value may be excluded from the calculation of the RAM determination value. In this case, before determining whether the RAM determination value is normal (S4009 in FIG. 54), it is determined whether the probability setting value is within the normal range. To execute the setting change process to change the probability setting value to those involved in the hall, and to encourage people involved in the hall to restart the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode. A specific probability setting value within the range may be forcibly set.

<Modification 90>
Although the case where the probability setting value is not included in the calculation of the RAM determination value (checksum) has been described in the eighth embodiment, the probability setting value may be included in the calculation of the RAM determination value.

<Modification 91>
In the fifth embodiment, every time the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, all segments (including dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 immediately after the power is turned on. Although the case where the pachinko machine 10 is turned on for a predetermined period (5 seconds in the present embodiment) has been described, the base display device 401 is provided immediately after the pachinko machine 10 is turned on in each of the sixth to twelfth embodiments. All the segments (including dot segments) of the displayed 7-segment displays 401a to 401d may be lit or blinked for a predetermined period. However, even when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, all the segments (including the dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 immediately after the power is turned on. It may be bothersome to turn on or blink for a predetermined period. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, all segments of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d may not be lit or blinked. When the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, all the segments of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d are turned on or blinking after the setting change processing or the setting commission confirmation processing is executed. May be executed. In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, all the segments (including the dot segment) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d are temporarily turned on or blinked for a predetermined period, and When the operation is performed, the lighting or blinking may be ended.

<Modification 92>
In the fifth to twelfth embodiments, the base display device 401 is configured by the identification segment including the two 7-segment displays 401a and 401b and the ratio segment including the two 7-segment displays 401c and 401d. Although the case of being configured has been described, the identification segment may be configured by one or two or more 7-segment displays, and the ratio segment may be configured by two or more 7-segment displays.

<Modification 93>
In the sixth to twelfth embodiments, using the number-of-rounds notification LED, the LED for notifying the big hit symbol, the LED for notifying the hit symbol, or the like prepared in the first symbol display device 37, or the LED 37a as a whole, The case where the base display device 401 notifies that the setting change display or the setting confirmation display is being performed using the lighting pattern that is not used in the original notification has been described, but the first symbol display device Prepared in 37, using the number of rounds notification LED, the LED for notifying the big hit symbol, the LED for notifying the winning symbol, or the like, or the LED 37a as a whole, using a lighting pattern that is not used in the original notification, The fact that the error history is displayed on the base display device 401 may be notified.

<Modification 94>
Further, the first symbol display device 37 is provided with one LED for notifying that the setting change display and the setting confirmation display are being performed on the base display device 401, for example, by turning on the LED. The base display device 401 is informed that the setting change display is being performed, and the LED is made to blink so that the base display device 401 is informed that the setting confirmation display is being performed. May be. Further, on the first symbol display device 37, an LED for notifying that the setting change display is being performed on the base display device 401, and the setting confirmation display is being performed on the base display device 401. 2 LEDs including a LED for notifying the user of the setting are provided, and the respective LEDs are turned on to notify that the setting change display or the setting confirmation display is being performed on the base display device 401. You may Further, the first symbol display device 37 is provided with an LED for notifying that the error history is being displayed on the base display device 401, and by turning on the LED, an error occurs on the base display device 401. You may make it alert that the history display is being performed.

<Modification 95>
In the sixth to twelfth embodiments, when the probability setting value or the error history is displayed on the base display device 401, all the segments of the 7-segment displays 401a and 401b of the identification segment are turned off, or the identification segment is displayed with " “−−” is displayed or a case where fixed characters are displayed on each of the 7-segment displays 401a and 401b in a display mode different from the case where the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 has been described. When the value or the error history is displayed on the base display device 401, the identification segment may be displayed in any display mode as long as the display mode is different from the case where the base value is displayed on the base display device 401. For example, a predetermined segment of each 7-segment display 401a, 401b may be blinked and displayed, or each segment of each 7-segment display 401a, 401b may be turned on or blinked in order or randomly. Further, in the identification segment, a plurality of display modes may be rotated and displayed. Also by this, the display state can be clearly differentiated between the case of displaying the base value on the base display device 401 and the case of displaying the probability setting value or the error history.

<Modification 96>
In the sixth to twelfth embodiments, when the probability setting value or the error history is displayed on the base display device 401, all the segments of the 7-segment display 401c on the left side of the comparison segment are turned off or "-" is displayed. The case where the probability setting value or the error history is displayed on the base display device 401 has been described above. However, when the probability set value or the error history is displayed on the base display device 401, the base display device 401 is displayed on the 7-segment display device 401c on the left side of the comparison segment. The display may be performed in any display mode as long as the display mode is different from the case where the base value is displayed. For example, a predetermined segment of the 7-segment display 401c may be blinked and displayed, or each segment of the 7-segment display 401c may be turned on or blinked sequentially or randomly. Further, a plurality of display modes may be rotated and displayed on the 7-segment display 401c. Also by this, the display state can be clearly differentiated between the case of displaying the base value or the error history and the case of displaying the probability setting value on the base display device 401.

<Modification 97>
In the sixth to twelfth embodiments, the example shown in FIG. 50 is illustrated as the display mode when the error history is displayed on the base display device 401, and the display mode when the probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401. The case where the display mode is different from the above has been described. On the other hand, the display mode when the error history is displayed on the base display device 401 may be the same as the display mode shown in FIG. 49A or 49B. In this case, the display mode when the probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401 may be the same as the display mode when the error history is displayed on the base display device 401. The probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401 when a hall person or the like starts up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Further, the error history is displayed on the base display device 401 when the person related to the hall or the like presses the error display button 502. That is, even if the display mode when the probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401 and the display mode when the error history is displayed on the base display device 401 are the same display mode, the hall-related persons, etc. It is possible to grasp whether the information displayed on the base display device 401 is the probability set value or the error history based on the operation.

<Modification 98>
In the sixth to twelfth embodiments, when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode, the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on or the setting change switch is turned on to update the probability setting value. Although the case has been described, this may be performed using the setting key 501. Specifically, the setting key 501 is made rotatable from the on state to a setting change position provided in the direction opposite to the off side, and when the setting key 501 is turned to the setting change position, the setting key 501 is automatically turned on. The setting key 501 is urged to return. Then, each time the setting key 501 is turned from the ON state to the setting change position, the probability setting value is updated. Also by this, the probability setting value can be easily changed.

<Modification 99>
Further, in the sixth and twelfth embodiments, the case where the probability setting value is updated by turning on the RAM erasing switch 122 when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode has been described, but the seventh embodiment is described. The probability setting value may be updated by providing a setting change switch similar to the above and turning on the setting change switch. As a result, the roles of the RAM erase switch and the setting change switch are clearly separated, so that the operator can clearly understand the role of each switch.

<Modification 100>
In the sixth to twelfth embodiments described above, when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode, the setting key 501 is turned off or the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on to set the probability setting value. Although the case of confirming the above has been described, this may be performed by operating a switch provided separately, for example, a setting confirming switch. This setting confirmation switch is, for example, a switch for confirming the probability setting value by being operated in the setting change mode. Like the error display button 502, the setting confirmation switch is provided through the hole provided in the substrate box 100 through the main substrate. It may be provided so as to protrude further, and may be operated by a person concerned in the hall or the like without opening the substrate box 100. Also by this, the probability setting value can be easily determined.

<Modification 101>
In the above eighth to twelfth embodiments, in the main controller 110, when a hall person or the like starts up in any one of the normal mode, the RAM clear mode, and the setting confirmation mode in the RAM abnormality, In the process of S4215 of the startup process executed by the MPU 201, it is always determined that the RAM is abnormal (S4215: Yes), the process proceeds to S4219, and the notification by the RAM abnormal setting process is given. S4219) and the output to the hall computer 600 (S4220) are executed, and then the case where an infinite loop state occurs is described. On the other hand, in this case, after the notification by the RAM abnormality setting process and the output to the hall computer 600 (S4220) are executed (S4219), the process may proceed to S4213 and the setting change process may be executed. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 can operate normally by surely resetting the probability setting value and clearing the RAM 203 together with the RAM abnormality flag 203x15. Further, in this case, since the setting change process is automatically executed, it is not necessary to restart the pachinko machine 10 again, and it is possible to save time and labor for persons involved in the hall.

<Modification 102>
In the processing of S4313 of the setting change processing in the above eighth to twelfth embodiments, of the data stored in the RAM 203, the data used for controlling the game (excluding the probability setting value data 203x11 stored in the inner work area 203x1) (Predetermined data) is erased (cleared), and the accessory ratio data 203s stored in the outside work area 203y1 is erased, while the base value data 203r and the error data 203t (see FIG. 53) are Although the case of holding without erasing has been described, similar to the process of S4216 of the start-up process, of the data stored in the RAM 203, the data used for controlling the game (stored in the inner work area 203x1) (Predetermined data excluding the probability setting value data 203x11) is erased (cleared), while the accessory ratio data 203s, the base value data 203r, and the error data 203t stored in the outside work area 203y1 (FIG. 53). (See) may be retained without being erased. That is, the RAM clear after the setting change processing and the RAM clear executed when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the RAM clear mode may be the same processing.

<Modification 103>
In the above eighth to twelfth embodiments, the startup mode when the power is turned on after the power is turned off during the setting change is only the startup operation for starting in the setting change mode. Instead, the case has been described in which the setting change mode is performed in which the setting change process is performed again from the beginning even if the operation is another startup operation. On the other hand, if the startup operation when the power is turned on after the power is turned off during the setting change is the startup operation to start in the setting change mode, the setting change process should be performed from the beginning. Start up again as a setting change mode to be executed again, and the start-up operation when the power is turned on after the power is turned off while changing the settings is the other start-up mode (normal mode, RAM clear mode, setting confirmation mode) If the startup operation corresponds to, the MPU 201 may be in an infinite loop state. In this case, a person in charge of the hall is informed that the power should be turned off and then restarted in the setting change mode, or a signal to that effect is output from the external output terminal 503 to the hall computer 600. You may do it. As a result, it is possible to cause the persons involved in the hall or the like to restart the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode and surely reset the probability setting value.

<Modification 104>
Further, when the startup operation when the power is turned on after the power is turned off during the setting change is the startup operation for starting in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (that is, the setting key 501 When the power is turned on after the power was turned off during the setting change, the start operation when the power is turned off during the setting change, When the startup operation corresponds to another startup mode (normal mode, RAM clear mode) (that is, when the setting key 501 is in the off state), the MPU 201 is set to the infinite loop state. Good. In this case, a person in charge of the hall is informed that the power should be turned off and then restarted in the setting change mode, or a signal to that effect is output from the external output terminal 503 to the hall computer 600. You may do it. Accordingly, it is possible to instruct the persons related to the hall to turn on the setting key 501 and then restart the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode to surely reset the probability setting value. .. On the other hand, when the start-up operation is performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the setting key 501 is in the ON state, and the hall person concerned is ready to smoothly update and confirm the probability setting value. There is. Therefore, in this case, the probability setting value can be definitely determined by starting up in the setting change mode.

<Modification 105>
In the eighth to twelfth embodiments, after the power is turned off during the setting change, the power is turned on in the normal mode, that is, the setting key 501 is turned off and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned off. The case where the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode in which the setting change process is performed again from the beginning (from the beginning) when the startup operation of turning on is performed is not performed in the normal mode. On the other hand, in this case, the setting change process may be executed from the probability setting value that was being updated before the power was turned off last time. Further, the setting change process executed before the power is turned off may be ignored, the probability setting value in the middle of updating may be erased, and the pachinko machine 10 may be started in the normal mode.

<Modification 106>
In the eighth to twelfth embodiments, after the power is turned off during the setting change, the startup operation for booting in the RAM clear mode, that is, the setting key 501 is turned off and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. When the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode in which the setting change process is performed from the beginning (from the beginning) instead of starting in the RAM clear mode when the startup operation of turning on the power is performed. explained. On the other hand, in this case, the setting change process may be executed from the probability setting value that was being updated before the power was turned off last time. Also, it waits until the setting key 501 turns on, waits for the setting key 501 to turn off again, and waits for the setting key 501 to turn off again. It may be raised or RAM clear may be executed. Further, the setting change process executed before the power is turned off may be ignored, the probability setting value in the middle of updating may be erased, and the pachinko machine 10 may be started in the RAM clear mode. After that, wait until the setting key 501 is in the ON state, and when the setting key 501 is in the ON state, wait for the setting key 501 to be in the OFF state, and when the setting key 501 is in the OFF state, the game can be executed. May be By waiting until the setting key 501 is turned on, and when the setting key 501 is turned on, waiting for the setting key 501 to be turned off is added. It is possible to give a hall-related person or the like a feeling that the release of is released.

<Modification 107>
In the eighth to twelfth embodiments, after the power is turned off during the setting change, the start operation for starting in the setting change mode, that is, the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. When the startup operation of turning on the power by turning on the power is performed, the case where the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode has been described as in the startup operation. However, wait until the setting key 501 is turned on, When the setting key 501 is turned on, the setting key 501 may be further turned off, and when the setting key 501 is turned off, the normal mode may be started. As a result, it is possible to give a hall-related person or the like the feeling that the cancellation of the setting change mode, which was being executed when the power was turned off last time, is canceled.

<Modification 108>
In the above eighth to twelfth embodiments, after the power is turned off during the setting change, the start operation for starting in the setting confirmation mode, that is, the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned off. When the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode in which the setting change process is restarted from the beginning (from the beginning) instead of starting in the setting confirmation mode when the startup operation of turning on the power is performed As described above, the setting change process may be executed from the probability setting value that was being updated before the power was turned off last time. In this case, the setting confirmation processing may be continuously executed after the setting key 501 is turned off, or the setting confirmation processing may be ignored. Alternatively, the setting change mode may be started up in the setting confirmation mode, the setting change processing executed before the power is turned off may be ignored, and the probability setting value being updated may be deleted.

<Modification 109>
In the eighth to twelfth embodiments, after the power is turned off during the setting confirmation, the power is turned on in the normal mode, that is, the setting key 501 is turned off and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned off. In the case where the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting confirmation mode in which the setting confirmation process is restarted from the beginning (from the beginning) instead of being started in the normal mode when the startup operation of turning on is performed. Alternatively, the pachinko machine 10 may be started up in the normal mode by ignoring the setting confirmation process executed before the power is turned off.

<Modification 110>
In the eighth to twelfth embodiments, after power is turned off during setting confirmation, a startup operation for booting in the RAM clear mode, that is, the setting key 501 is turned off and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. When the startup operation of turning on the power is performed, the case of booting the pachinko machine 10 in the RAM clear mode has been described according to the boot operation of the person related to the hall. The pachinko machine 10 may be started up in the setting confirmation mode in which the confirmation processing is performed again from the beginning (from the beginning). In this case, wait until the setting key 501 is turned on, wait for the setting key 501 to be turned on further, and wait for the setting key 501 to be turned off again. If the setting key 501 is turned off, the RAM is not cleared. It may be started up, or RAM clear may be executed.

<Modification 111>
In the eighth to twelfth embodiments, after the power is turned off during setting confirmation, a startup operation for booting in the setting change mode, that is, the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. Even when the startup operation of turning on the power by turning on the power is performed, as described in the startup operation, the case of starting the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode has been described, but the setting change mode is ignored and the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting confirmation mode. May be. In addition, after starting up in the setting confirmation mode, a predetermined operation may be used as a trigger to shift to the setting change mode.

<Modification 112>
In the eleventh embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, at least opening the inner frame 12 is an essential condition, and the RAM erase switch 122 and the setting key 501 are also included. The startup mode is set according to the detection mode. On the other hand, the hole may be set to be selectable whether or not the opening of the inner frame 12 is a condition for setting change or setting confirmation.

For the island equipment of the hall where the pachinko machine 10 is installed, "both islands" where the pachinko machine 10 can be installed on both sides of the island equipment, "wall islands" where the pachinko machine 10 can be installed on only one side of the island equipment, There are various island facilities such as a "pillar island" constructed by surrounding the pillars of a hall with "wall islands", or a "single island" in which one or two pachinko machines 10 can be installed in units. Depending on the island equipment, the setting change or setting confirmation may be performed with the inner frame 12 locked. Therefore, depending on the business form (island equipment) of the hall, the inner frame 12 is not always opened to perform the setting change or the setting confirmation, and the setting change or the setting confirmation work is performed on the condition that the door opening switch 208g is opened. In the case of such a configuration, the inner frame 12 has to be opened once, and the work becomes complicated.

Therefore, if a dip switch or the like is provided in a portion that cannot be operated by an employee or the like (for example, in the main control device 110) and the startup is performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, is opening of the inner frame 12 a necessary condition? It may be configured such that the manager or the like of the hall can decide whether or not to do. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the security performance of the pachinko machine 10 while considering the work efficiency according to each hall environment.

<Modification 113>
In the eleventh embodiment, the front frame 14 may be prevented from being arbitrarily closed by an employee during maintenance work in which both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are opened. Specifically, when both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are opened, the front frame 14 cannot be closed with respect to the inner frame 12 unless the hall manager or the like inserts a dedicated key. Constitute. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an employee who does not have the authority to change the setting from closing the front frame 14 without permission during the maintenance work, and to prevent the setting change or the setting confirmation from being performed. The security performance of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

<Modification 114>
In the twelfth embodiment, the upper side surface of the lower side protruding portion 92a of the back pack 92 and the upper side surface of the protective cover member 140 contact the upper side protruding portion 171a and the lower side surface. On the other hand, you may comprise so that the upper side surface of the lower side protrusion 92a, the upper side protrusion 171a, and a lower side surface may engage. In this case, when the inner frame 12 is opened, the engagement is easily disengaged, and when the inner frame 12 is closed, the upper side surface of the lower side projection 92a and the upper side projection 171a engage with the lower side surface. It is suitable. With this configuration, the security performance on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved without causing any trouble during the maintenance work of the inner frame 12.

<Modification 115>
In the ninth embodiment, the protective cover member 140 is attached to the right side plate 11d of the outer frame 11 in a cantilever shape. On the other hand, the protective cover member 140 may be attached in the shape of both ends supporting beam from the right side plate 11d to the left side plate 11c. With this configuration, it is possible to enhance the rigidity of the protective cover member 140 and improve the security performance on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 with a simple configuration. Further, since the protective cover member 140 does not cover the upper back surface or the lower back surface of the pachinko machine 10, it does not interfere with the replenishment or discharge of the balls, so that the pachinko machine 10 that employs the protective cover member 140 in the existing island equipment. Can be attached.

<Modification 116>
In the ninth embodiment, the cover-side protrusion 172 is fixedly formed at a predetermined position on the cover plate 171. On the other hand, the cover-side protrusion 172 may be configured to be separable from and attachable to the cover plate 171, and the position of the cover-side protrusion 172 may be adjustable within the cover plate 171. Conventionally, a general pachinko machine 10 is configured such that the game board 13 can be replaced. Here, if the game board 13 attached to the outer frame 11 of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the position of the setting unit 100d of the main control device 110 attached to the game board 13 after the replacement may also be changed. is there. In such a case, the cover-side protrusion 172 of the protective cover member 140 may not fit into the setting unit 100d of the main controller 110, and thus the inner frame 12 may not be closed. On the other hand, when the cover side protrusion 172 is separable from the cover plate 171 and is attachable, the game board 13 is replaced and the position of the setting unit 100d of the main controller 110 is changed. However, since the cover-side protrusion 172 can be fitted into the setting unit 100d, the security performance of the pachinko machine 10 is improved and the cover-side protrusion 172 of the protective cover member 140 and the main controller 110 are improved. It is possible to lock the inner frame 12 without interfering with the setting unit 100d so that the pachinko machine 10 does not interfere with the conventional distribution mode of the pachinko machine 10.

<Modification 117>
In the ninth embodiment, the protective cover member 140 is attached to the right side plate 11d of the outer frame 11. On the other hand, the protective cover member 140 may be attached to the left side plate 11c, the upper plate 11a, and the lower plate 11b in a cantilever shape. Also in this case, it is preferable to mount the mounting surface 151 of the cover mounting portion 150 of the protective cover member 140 from the inner wall surface of each of the plates 11a to 11c.

<Modification 118>
In the ninth embodiment, the mounting surface 151 of the cover mounting portion 150 of the protective cover member 140 is attached to the inner wall surface of the right side plate 11d of the outer frame 11 so as to abut. On the other hand, the mounting surface 151 may be mounted on the outer wall surface of the right side plate 11d, or the cover mounting portion 150 of the protective cover member 140 may be fitted (inserted) inside the right side plate 11d. ..

<Modification 119>
In the twelfth embodiment, the protective cover member 140 is configured to cover the setting key 501 and the sealing unit 100c of the main control device 110 and the sealing portion 111a of the payout control device 111. On the other hand, the protective cover member 140 covers all of the control devices 110 and 111, and in addition to the control devices 110 and 111, another control device arranged on the lower back side of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, It may be configured to cover a part or all of the firing control device 112 and the power supply device 115). By covering many control devices with the protective cover member 140, the security performance on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved with a simple configuration.

<Modification 120>
In the eleventh embodiment described above, the setting change or the setting confirmation can be performed only in the situation where the inner frame 12 is open to the outer frame 11 and the front frame 14 is closed to the inner frame 12. However, in other situations (for example, when the inner frame 12 is not open, or when the inner frame 12 is open but the front frame 14 is also open), setting change or setting confirmation cannot be performed. Had been configured. On the other hand, the configuration may be changed or confirmed when the front frame 14 is open even if the inner frame 12 is not open.

<Modification 121>
In each of the above embodiments, the RAM erase switch 122 is mounted on the power supply device 115. On the other hand, the RAM erase switch 122 may be mounted on the main controller 110 or the payout controller 111.

<Modification 122>
In the twelfth embodiment, the upper side surface of the lower side protrusion of the back pack 92 and the upper side surface of the protective cover member 140 are in contact with the lower side surface. In contrast, the upper side surface of the lower side protrusion of the back pack 92 and the upper side surface of the protective cover member 140 are engaged with each other, and the engagement is released in accordance with the operation of the cylinder lock 20. You may.

<Modification 123>
In the twelfth embodiment, the upper side surface of the lower side protrusion of the back pack 92 and the upper side surface of the protective cover member 140 are in contact with the lower side surface. On the other hand, the cover plate 171 of the protective cover member 140 may be configured to abut or engage with the outermost surfaces of the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111.

<Modification 124>
In the ninth embodiment, the cover-side protrusion 172 has a wall shape surrounding the setting key 501 in the setting unit 100d. On the other hand, the cover-side protrusion 172 may be configured by a protrusion that fits the entire setting unit 100d.

<Modification 125>
In the twelfth embodiment, the upper side surface of the lower side protrusion of the back pack 92 and the upper side surface of the protective cover member 140 are in contact with the lower side surface. On the other hand, the back pack 92 is extended to the portion of the payout control device 111, and the payout control device 111 is mounted on the back surface side of the back pack 92. A part of the extended back pack 92 may be located in the space between the inner frame 12 and the protective cover member 140. With this configuration, even when the back pack 92 is to be opened to the back side of the pachinko machine 10 when the inner frame 12 is locked, the opening is interfered by the protective cover member 140. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is locked, it is possible to prevent tampering with the voice lamp control device 113 and the like arranged inside the pachinko machine 10 of the back pack 92.

<Modification 126>
In the ninth to twelfth embodiments, the protective cover member 140 is composed of one member. On the other hand, two or more protective cover members may be attached to the outer frame 11 to cover part or all of the back side of the pachinko machine 10.

<Modification 127>
In each of the above-described embodiments, the jackpot probability and the like can be changed with the setting key 501. On the other hand, by the setting key 501, the number of prize balls paid out when one winning hole is won (for example, changing from 3 to 5 balls) and the driving of a movable accessory that assists winning the winning hole. The time (change from 3 seconds to 5 seconds), the driving width (for example, change from 20 mm to 30 mm), or the member (for example, the stage or the clune on which the ball can roll) that affects the flow mode of the ball. Settings related to the degree of advantage for the player, such as the inclination mode (for example, change from 1 degree to 3 degrees), the inclination mode of the pachinko machine 10 itself (for example, change from 1 degree to 3 degrees), can be changed in multiple stages. You may comprise.

<Modification 128>
In each of the above embodiments, the key hole of the setting key 501 is configured to face the back side of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, the keyhole of the setting key 501 is configured to face the lateral direction (left or right direction) of the pachinko machine 10, the diagonal direction of the pachinko machine 10, or the front side of the pachinko machine 10. May be.

In the above-described embodiment, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 instructs the display control device 114 to display. The control device 110 may directly send the command to the display control device 114. Further, a voice lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and the display control device may be configured to transmit a command for outputting each voice and lighting the lamp to the voice lamp control device. Furthermore, the voice lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. By using these as one control device, the number of parts can be reduced and the increase in cost of the pachinko machine can be suppressed.

In the embodiment described above, in the command determination process (S911) executed by the voice lamp control device 113, the variation start flag is always set to ON when the stop type command is received. However, the variation pattern command is received. The fluctuation start flag may be set to ON when the stop type command is received after that. As a result, when a variation pattern command is not received but a stop type command is received, it is possible to prevent a strange variation effect from being executed.

Further, the fluctuation start flag may be set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation pattern command is received. In this case, in the fluctuation display process (S910) executed by the voice lamp control device 113, a display for notifying the display control device 114 of the fluctuation pattern extracted by the fluctuation pattern command based on that the fluctuation start flag is turned on. The variation pattern command for use may be generated and transmitted to the display control device 114. As a result, the display control device 114 is caused to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform the variation effect based on the display variation pattern command without waiting for the voice lamp control device 113 to receive the stop type command. You can In this case, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type extracted from the stop type command at the timing of receiving the stop type command, You may make it transmit to the display control apparatus 114. Then, in the display control device 114, the stop symbol of the variable effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 may be determined based on the display stop type command.

In the above-described embodiment, the case where the image controller 236 transmits the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at each display interval (every 20 milliseconds in the above-described embodiment) of the image for one frame in which the drawing process ends is described. However, the image controller 236 may transmit this V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. Since the third symbol display device 81 is driven so that the image for one frame is always displayed at equal time intervals (20 millisecond intervals), the V interrupt signal is displayed every time the image for one frame is displayed. By sending, the time interval can be kept accurate without timing.

In the above-described embodiment, the demonstration effect may be one in which the third symbol, which is the main symbol without the numbers “0” to “9”, is stopped and displayed. Further, the third symbol composed of a main symbol with numbers or a main symbol without numbers may be stopped and displayed in a semitransparent state. Further, only the rear image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Further, a character or a rear image that is completely different from the third symbol or the rear image used in the variable display may be displayed.

In the above-described embodiment, the continuous notice effect may be executed on the third symbol display device 81 in which the variable effect is performed, or a fourth symbol display device different from the third symbol display device 81 is provided, and the third symbol The continuous notice effect may be executed by displaying the fourth symbol on the fourth symbol display device together with the variable effect executed on the display device 81. In this case, the display control device 114 may control the fourth symbol display device or the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, a continuous notice effect may be executed by providing the pachinko machine 10 with an accessory that operates according to various effects and operating the accessory in a predetermined mode together with the variable effect. Further, the sound lamp control device 113 may control the sound output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10 to output a sound for the continuous notice effect, thereby executing the continuous notice effect, or the illumination portion of the pachinko machine 10. The continuous notice effect may be executed by turning on or blinking 29 to 33 together with the variable effect.

As a result, every time a variation effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81 (and the first symbol display device 37), symbols are continuously displayed on the fourth symbol display device, or the accessory operates in a predetermined mode. The player can have a big hit expectation by playing a sound, outputting a sound from the sound output device 226, or lighting or blinking the illumination portions 29 to 33. In addition, the player usually watches the third symbol display device 81 in which the variation effect is performed and continues the game, but the display of the symbol by the fourth symbol display device different from the third symbol display device 81. Since the continuous notice effect is performed by the operation of the accessory, the sound output from the sound output device 226, or the lighting/blinking of the illumination portions 29 to 33, an effect different from the normal effect is given to the player. It can be easily recognized. In addition, the continuous notice effect is easily continuous by simple control such as the display of the symbols by the fourth symbol display device, the operation of the accessory, the voice output from the voice output device 226, or the lighting/blinking of the illumination portions 29 to 33. A notice production can be performed.

Further, if the continuous notice effect is performed by voice output from the voice output device 226 or lighting or blinking of the illumination portions 29 to 33, the control of the continuous notice effect is performed by the voice lamp control device 113. In the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 is continuously operated by causing the main control device 110 to perform the win/no determination process and the lottery process at the start of variation, to cause the voice lamp control device 113 to perform continuous advance notice effect, and to cause the display control device 114 to perform change effect. When the notice production is performed, each control device can share each process. Therefore, the load can be prevented from concentrating on one control device, and the performance required for the MPU of each control device can be suppressed low.

In addition, the display of the symbol for the continuous notice effect on the third symbol display device 81, the display of the symbol for the continuous notice effect on the fourth symbol display device, the operation of the accessory in a predetermined mode, the voice from the voice output device 226. At least two or more of the output and the lighting or blinking of the illumination portions 29 to 33 may be combined, and the continuous notice effects may be executed by controlling them in conjunction with each other. As a result, it is possible to execute more various continuous announcement effects. In addition, a method of executing the continuous notice effect (display by the third symbol display device 81, display by the fourth symbol display device, operation of the accessory, voice output from the voice output device 226, lighting or blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33. , Or a combination thereof), by preparing a plurality of continuous notice production modes selected according to the game state (15R certainty variation jackpot, 2R certainty variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, out) after the end of the consecutive notice production Good.

Further, when the continuous notice effect is performed, an image for the continuous notice effect different from the variation effect may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or the continuous notice effect may be displayed when the variation effect is finished. As the stop symbol to be displayed, a so-called “chance eye”, which is a combination of predetermined symbols, may be displayed. In this case, if it is determined that the continuous notice command is received in the command determination process (S1602 of FIG. 27C) executed by the MPU 221 of the display control device 114, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the chance eye is turned on. The other stop symbol discrimination flags may be set to off. In the command determination process, after the stop identification command process, the process corresponding to the continuous notice command is executed in the other command processes, so instead of the stop design set by the reception of the display stop identification command, the chance stops. It is set as a design. Therefore, the chance eye can be confirmed and displayed when the fluctuation is stopped. Then, in the third symbol display device 81, if the chance eyes are continuously displayed as a stop symbol for each variation effect, it is possible to give the player an expectation that a jackpot will be finally obtained.

In the above-described embodiment, the main control device 110, when there is a prize (start prize) to the first starting opening 64a and the second starting opening 64b, the voice lamp control device 113 adds the number of reserved balls to which "1" is added. The case of transmitting to the voice lamp control device 113, including the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer in association with the start winning award as they are, is described with respect to the hold ball number command notified to The type of counter included in the ball count command may be a part of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 or may include the values of other counters. Further, when the main controller 110 notifies the voice lamp controller 113 of the values of the respective counters acquired with the start winning, the information indicating the values of the respective counters is included in the reserved ball number command and notified. Instead of this, the command other than the reserved ball number command may include information indicating the value of each counter, and the voice lamp control device 113 may be notified of these values. The other command may be a dedicated command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired along with the start winning, or may be a different pattern such as a variation pattern command or a stop symbol command. The value of each counter acquired along with the start winning may be added to the command for notifying the lamp control device 113. As another command, when notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired with the start winning, the value of each counter notified to the command is a variable effect corresponding to any number of holding times. You may include the information which shows whether it is related. Thereby, the voice lamp control device 113, based on the information about the number of times of holding included in the command, each of the prefetch information corresponding to the number of times of holding is included in the command in any one of the first to fourth areas. The value of the counter can be stored.

In the above-described embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 indicated by the reserved ball number command may be stored in the RAM 223. , When receiving a command of the number of held balls (or a command indicating the value of each counter), based on the value of each counter indicated by the command, whether or not it is a jackpot, the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, out In the case of, a part or all of the outlier type, etc. is judged, and these judgment results are replaced with the values of the respective counters indicated by the command, or combined with a part or all of the value of the counter, It may be stored in the RAM 223.

In each of the above-described embodiments, regardless of which of the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b the prize is won, one holding ball number counter 203a is used to determine the number of holding balls in the main controller 110. The case of counting has been described. On the other hand, the first starting opening reserved ball number counter for the first starting opening 64a, the second starting opening reserved ball number counter for the second starting opening 64b, and the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. It is possible to prepare and count the number of reserved balls associated with the starting prize for the first starting opening 64a and the number of reserved balls for the starting winning for the second starting opening 64b separately.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, a case has been described in which the maximum number of holdable balls that can be held is set to "4" regardless of which of the first starter opening 64a and the second starter opening 64b wins the ball. The maximum number of holding balls that can be held with the start winning in the first starting opening 64a and the maximum number of holding balls that can be held with the starting winning in the second starting opening 64b are separately determined and managed. Good. For example, the maximum number of holding balls that can be held with the start winning in the first starting opening 64a is "4", and the maximum number of holding balls that can be held with the starting winning in the second starting opening 64b is "4". Then, at a certain point, the number of holding balls held with the start winning in the first starting opening 64a is "4", and the number of holding balls held with the starting winning in the second starting opening 64b is held. Is "2", even if there are more starting winnings in the first starting opening 64a, the starting winnings will not be held, but if there is a starting winning in the second starting opening 64b, it will be held. May be. This allows the player to recognize the first starting opening 64a and the second starting opening 64b as separate parts, and enhances the enjoyment of the game.

Further, for example, the fluctuating effect based on the starting winning for the second starting opening 64b may be prioritized over the fluctuating effect based on the starting winning for the first starting opening 64a. Alternatively, the fluctuating effect based on the starting winning for the first starting opening 64a may be prioritized over the fluctuating effect based on the starting winning for the second starting opening 64b. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the starting opening in which the variation effect is preferentially performed.

In the above-described embodiment, the case where the first starting opening 64a and the second starting opening 64b and the two starting openings are provided on the game board 13 as the starting openings for which the jackpot lottery is started when the ball is entered will be described. However, the number is not necessarily limited to this, and the number of starting ports may be one, or may be three or more. When there are two or more starting ports, a corresponding holding ball number counter is prepared in the RAM 203 for each starting port, and the holding balls that are held for each starting port with the winning of the corresponding starting port. The number may be counted. In addition, the maximum number of balls that can be reserved may be set for each starting opening in association with the starting winning at the corresponding starting opening.

In addition, when there are two or more starting ports, the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 in order to notify that the holding has been performed in accordance with the winning at the starting port is Information may be included that indicates whether or not a hold was made by winning a prize at the starting opening. Further, the variation pattern command transmitted from main control device 110 to voice lamp control device 113 when the variation is started may also include information indicating by which starting port the variation effect is held. Accordingly, in the voice lamp control device 113, a holding ball number counter is prepared for each starting port, and when a holding ball number command is received, a holding ball number counter for the starting port indicated by the holding ball number command. When the number of holding balls is set to and the fluctuation pattern command is received, the number of holding balls can be counted for each starting port by decrementing the holding ball number counter for the starting port indicated by the fluctuation pattern command.

Further, when a plurality of starting openings are provided on the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 may be notified of the counter value acquired in association with the winning of each starting opening (starting winning). In this case, the command for the main control device 110 to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the counter value obtained with the start winning is the one obtained with the start winning of any of the starting openings. Information indicating whether there is any may be included. Further, the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 when the variation is started may include information indicating which of the starting openings the variation effect is associated with the start winning. .. Further, in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113, a read-ahead information storage area is prepared for each starting opening, and each counter value transmitted from the main control device 110 in association with the starting winning to the corresponding starting opening is made to correspond. It may be stored in the prefetch information storage area. As a result, every time a variation pattern command is received, a shift process can be performed on the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the starting mouth that has detected the starting winning that triggered the execution of the variation effect indicated by the variation pattern command. it can. Therefore, the value of each counter corresponding to the pending change effect for each starting opening can also be held in the voice lamp control device 113. Therefore, in the case where the probability of being a big hit, the distribution probability of the big hit type, the distribution probability of the out-of-class type, etc. are different depending on the starting winning opening, whether or not it is a big hit for each variation effect in the prefetch process It is possible to correctly determine the type of jackpot when the jackpot is a jackpot, the type of the jackpot when a jackpot is missed, and the like, based on the starting winning opening. Further, when the variation effect based on the start winning a prize for one starting opening is prioritized over the variation effect based on the starting winning a prize for another starting opening, the variation based on the starting winning a prize for one starting opening. The prefetching process can be performed in order from the value of the counter corresponding to the effect, and the number of times of holding the variable effect, which is the most recent big hit, can be correctly determined.

In addition, when a plurality of starting openings are provided, the voice lamp control device 113 continuously gives notice when the value of each counter acquired based on the starting winning for the starting opening is received from the main control device 110 by a command. When the start of the effect is determined, the continuous notice effect may be executed over all the variable effects (holding balls) that are held at that time, regardless of the starting opening where the start winning is made. In addition, a plurality of starting openings are provided, and in a pachinko machine that executes the variable effect for winning in one starting opening preferentially over the changing effect for winning in another starting opening, The start of the continuous notice effect may be determined only based on the pre-reading result of the counter value acquired for the winning of the starting opening in which the variable effect is executed. As a result, it is not determined whether or not the execution of the continuous announcement effect is set for the variation effect corresponding to the winning of the starting opening having a low priority, and the continuous announcement effect is not started for this variation effect. If the continuous announcement effect is started for the variation effect corresponding to the winning of the starting opening with the low priority, and the continuous variation effect is continuously held for the starting opening with the high priority, the continuous announcement effect is quite finished. There is a risk of not doing so. On the other hand, in this modified example, it is not judged whether or not the continuous notice effect is set to be executed for the variable effect corresponding to the winning of the starting opening having a low priority, and the continuous notice effect is set for this variable effect. Is not started, so that such a situation can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value of the number of reserved balls stored in the RAM 223 is decremented by 1 (see S1107 in FIG. 26). However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the variation process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 13).
In the reference), the value (N) of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110, which is subtracted according to the setting of the fluctuation pattern command by the fluctuation start process (S307) (see S305 of FIG. 13), The holding ball number command is set so as to be transmitted from the control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the holding ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 together with the transmission of the variation pattern command. It may be transmitted. Accordingly, the voice lamp control device 113 can more accurately grasp the number of holding balls held in the main control device 110. In this case, S1107 in FIG. 26 is omitted. Further, the variation pattern command may include the value (N) of the retained sphere number counter 203a after subtraction. In this case, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command, the holding ball number (N) included in the fluctuation pattern command may be extracted and set to the holding ball number stored in the RAM 223.

In the above-described embodiment, the winning of the first starting opening 64a and the second starting opening 64b and the passage of the through gate 67 are configured to be reserved up to four times each, but the maximum number of reserved balls is four times. The number is not limited, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (e.g., 8 times). In addition, for the winning in the first starting opening 64a and the second starting opening 64b, the maximum holding ball number may be set separately for each starting opening, and the maximum holding ball number for each starting opening is "4. It may be any number other than ". Further, the maximum number of reserved balls in each starting port does not necessarily have to be the same value, and may be different values. In addition, the number of reserved balls for variable display based on winning in the first starting opening 64a and the second starting opening 64b is a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or an area divided into four areas. You may make it display in a mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern) different for the number of holding balls, and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the holding balls are held by the light emitting member. It may be configured to notify the number.

Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to scrolling the symbol as the identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the horizontal display. The symbols may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a direction or an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbols, and for example, one or a plurality of characters may be displayed together with the symbols, or in a variety of different motion displays or change displays. It also includes a display effect that is displayed. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case of displaying the high-speed fluctuation in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at a high speed so as not to be visually recognized by the player when the fluctuation effect is executed has been described. Then, all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be reduced to an invisible degree and displayed, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise images in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

The present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, a pachinko machine that raises the expectation value for a jackpot once it hits the jackpot multiple times (for example, twice or three times) including that (commonly known as a two-time title, a three-time title, and May be implemented as). Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area after the jackpot pattern is displayed. Further, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine which is in a special game state, having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and winning a ball in the special area is a necessary condition. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as arepaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, and game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are integrated.

In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and by operating the stop button, the symbol is stopped and confirmed. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is that "a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information sequence including a plurality of identification information is provided, which is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started by the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses, the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed, and then stopped. It becomes a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time is specific".In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

In the slot machine, the ratio of the number of game media paid out by a bonus (character) to the total number of game media (coins, medals) paid out during a predetermined period is the character ratio. Therefore, the number of game media to be paid out when each winning combination is realized is stored in the ROM of the main control device instead of the prize ball number table 202e, and is equivalent to the character ratio managing chip or the character ratio managing chip. In the control device that executes the function, the number of winning combinations (the symbols are aligned on the activated line) established during the non-bonus game period (normal period), the number of winning combinations established during the bonus game period, and established during the AT period. The number of the winning combinations may be counted to manage the character ratio or the continuous character ratio.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for fixedly displaying a symbol after variable display of a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a ball launching handle is provided. Some are not. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, or due to, for example, the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the definite symbol at the time of stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a special game value. Is a large amount of balls dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is the gaming value seen in the current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve problems such as a burden on equipment and a restriction on a place where a game machine is installed due to separate handling of a medal and a ball.

The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown below. The concepts of various inventions described below are, respectively, a part or a plurality of parts of the configuration of another concept of the invention, or a part or a plurality of configurations of the concept of another invention. The concept of the invention may be modified and constructed by exchanging the parts.

(Issue 1)
Gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 To L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, and O1 were made to solve the following problems.

That is, conventionally, when a game medium is shot by a launching means into a game area provided with a plurality of winning openings, and that gaming medium wins in one of the winning openings, a predetermined winning opening is predetermined. There are gaming machines in which a number of gaming media are paid out to a player. Further, there is a part in which a prize is provided, and the operation of the prize affects the winning of the game medium (for example, JP-A-2003-340046).

By the way, some fraudulent actors will be able to illegally operate the prizes in the prize holes provided with the prizes or induce the game media to win the prizes, thereby providing the prizes. There are those who try to increase the number of winnings to the winning prize holes. However, there are insufficient measures to detect such misconduct.

The present technical idea has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suitably detect fraud.

(Means and effects 1)
<Group A>
A game area provided with a plurality of winning openings including a first winning opening having an accessory that operates based on a game,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the game area,
A prize detecting means which is provided for each prize hole and detects a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize hole,
When it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won in any prize hole, a predetermined number of games for the prize hole in which the game medium is won A payout means for paying out the medium,
Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning hole to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is accumulated and stored in the storage means. Storage control means for
An output unit for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit, and a gaming machine A1.

According to the gaming machine A1, the game medium is launched by the launching means to the gaming area in which a plurality of winning holes including a first winning hole having an accessory that operates based on the game are provided. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the winning detection means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won in one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of gaming media for the winning opening of the game Are paid out by the payout means. Further, information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is stored in the storage means by the storage control means. It Then, at least a signal based on the information stored in the storage means is output by the output means. As a result, based on the output signal, the ratio of the winning character which is a ratio of the number of game media paid out in accordance with the winning of the winning hole, which is due to the first winning hole (that is, the operation of the winning object). Can be analyzed, and there is an effect that fraudulent activity can be discovered based on the role ratio.

In the gaming machine A1,
When it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium launched by the prize detecting means and the launching means has won in one of the winning openings, the payout is made based on the winning opening of the game medium. A payout number setting means for setting the number of game media to be issued and notifying the payout means, and a main control means for performing main control of the game,
A gaming machine A2, wherein the storage means, the storage control means, and the output means are provided in the main control means.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when it is detected by the prize detection means that the winning detection means and the game medium launched by the launch means have won in any of the winning openings, the payout is made based on the winning opening of the game medium. A first control unit for setting the number of game media and for notifying the payout unit to the payout number setting unit, and for the main control unit that performs main control of the game, with respect to the number of game media paid out by the payout unit, Storage means for accumulating and storing information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the winning opening, and storage control means for accumulating and storing the information in the storage means. Output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means is provided. Thereby, the detection of the winning to the winning opening by the winning detection means, the setting of the number of payouts of the game medium based on the detection, based on the set number of payouts, with respect to the number of game media paid out by the payout means, The main control is to store information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning opening in the storage means and to output a signal based on the information stored in the storage means. It can be done by means. Therefore, even if a fraudulent person attempts to prevent the fraudulent activity from being detected by the output means to detect the fraudulent activity based on the character ratio, the above configuration is completed by the main control means. Difficult to type. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the fraudulent person from outputting the fraudulent information to prevent the fraudulent activity from being detected based on the character ratio.

In gaming machine A2,
The gaming machine A3, wherein the main control means is housed in a board box in which a box pace and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base are connected in an unopenable manner.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2, the following effects are produced. That is, since the main control means is housed in the board box in which the box pace and the box cover that covers the opening of the box base are connected in a non-openable manner, a person who misconducts information against the output means is illegal. Even if an attempt is made to prevent the fraudulent activity from being detected based on the character ratio, it becomes difficult to input fraudulent information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably prevent the fraudulent person from outputting the fraudulent information to prevent the fraudulent activity from being detected based on the character ratio.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to 3,
External device connecting means connectable to an external device,
An external device connection detecting means for detecting that the external device is connected to the external device connecting means,
The output unit is based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit with respect to the external device when the external device connection detection unit detects that the external device is connected. A gaming machine A4 characterized by outputting a signal.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect obtained by any of the game machines A1 to A3, the following effect is obtained. That is, when an external device is connected to the external device connecting means, it is detected by the external device connecting means, and triggered by the detection, a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storing means is sent to the external device. Is output by the output means. Thereby, only by connecting the external device to the external device connection means of the gaming machine, the payout is made to the external device based on the winning of the first winning opening with respect to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. Since the game machine outputs a signal based on the information relating to the ratio of the number of the played game media, it is possible to quickly and easily find the illegal act based on the character ratio.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4,
The output means indicates a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and the number of game media paid out by the payout means when there is a prize at a corresponding prize hole at each prize hole. A gaming machine A5 characterized by outputting at least a signal for indicating.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect obtained by any of the game machines A1 to A4, the following effect is obtained. That is, at least a signal based on the information stored in the storage means and a signal for indicating the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when there is a prize in the corresponding prize hole in each winning opening Is output by. As a result, even if the player who receives the signal output from the output means does not have information on the number of game media to be paid out when there is a prize for each winning opening in the connected gaming machine, the gaming machine There is an effect that the accessory ratio can be easily analyzed based on the signal output from the.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A5,
Second storage control means for storing in the second storage means information relating to the winning detected by the winning detection means,
And a determination means for determining that a predetermined opportunity has come,
When the determination means determines that the predetermined trigger has come off, the storage control means, based on the information about the winning combination detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means, the payout means. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning hole to the number of game media paid out by is stored in the storage means. Machine A6.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effect obtained by any of the game machines A1 to A5, the following effect is obtained. That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means. Then, when the determination means determines that the predetermined timing has come, the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information about the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening is cumulatively stored in the storage means by the storage control means. As a result, first, by storing the information related to the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means, the winning of the winning opening is not missed and can be reflected in the information stored in the second storage means. .. Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, all winnings are reflected every time a predetermined timing comes, and the winnings to the first winning opening with respect to the number of game media paid out by the paying means. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out on the basis of can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, more accurate information can be output as information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning hole to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. There is an effect that you can.

In the gaming machine A6,
The gaming machine A7, wherein the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means.

According to the gaming machine A7, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A6. That is, the output means outputs not only the signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, but also the signal based on the information stored in the second storage means. As a result, the information about the latest winning a prize stored in the second memory, which is not reflected in the information stored in the memory, is also output. There is an effect that the presence or absence can be judged.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A7,
The first winning opening includes a second winning opening having an accessory that continuously operates based on a game,
The storage control means stores information relating to a ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning of the second winning hole to the number of the game media paid out by the paying means, Accumulate and store in storage means,
The output means, of the game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning hole with respect to the number of the game media paid out by the payout means, which is cumulatively stored in the storage means. Information related to the number ratio, and information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the second winning hole with respect to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. A gaming machine A8 characterized by outputting and.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the following effect is produced. That is, the first winning opening provided in the game area includes a second winning opening having a winning character that continuously operates based on the game, and the first winning opening with respect to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the second winning opening is also stored in the storage means by the storage control means. And information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning hole to the number of game media paid out by the payout means, which is accumulated and stored in the storage means. , And information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the second winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. As a result, the ratio of those receiving the signal output from the output means, of the number of game media paid out in accordance with the winning of the winning opening, which is due to the first winning opening (that is, the operation of the winning character) It is possible to analyze not only the character ratio, but also the ratio of the continuous character which is the ratio of the second winning port (that is, the operation of the character when the character operates continuously). There is an effect that the fraudulent activity can be detected more accurately based on the ratio of the continuous role.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A8,
When it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium launched by the prize detecting means and the launching means has won in one of the winning openings, the payout is made based on the winning opening of the game medium. A payout number setting means for setting the number of game media to be issued and notifying the payout means, and a main control means for performing main control of the game,
The main control means has a calculation means for executing a calculation for performing the main control of the game,
At least the award detecting means, the payout amount setting means, the storage control means, and the output means are realized by execution of calculation by the calculation means.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A8, the following effect is achieved. That is, when it is detected by the prize detection means that the winning detection means and the game medium launched by the launch means have won in any of the winning openings, the payout is made based on the winning opening of the game medium. There is a payout amount setting means for setting the number of game media and notifying to the payout means, and the main control means for performing the main control of the game is an operation for executing the operation for performing the main control of the game. Means are provided. Then, at least, the payout is made based on the winning of the first winning opening with respect to the number of game media paid out by the payout means, which is cumulatively stored in the prize detection means, the payout amount setting means, and the storage means. The generation of the information relating to the ratio of the number of the played game media and the output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means are realized by executing the calculation by the calculation means. Thereby, the detection of the winning of the winning opening by the prize detecting means, the setting of the number of payouts of the game medium based on the detection, and the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the set number of payouts, 1 The storage of the information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the winning opening into the storage means by the storage control means, and the output of the signal based on the information stored in the storage means, All can be performed by the arithmetic unit of the main control means. Therefore, even if the fraudulent person tries to prevent the fraudulent person from outputting the fraudulent information based on the character ratio, the fraudulent person will not be able to input the fraudulent information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more surely prevent the fraudulent person from outputting the fraudulent information, thereby preventing the fraudulent activity from being detected based on the character ratio.

<Group B>
In any of the gaming machines A1 to A8,
Equipped with main control means to perform the main control of the game,
The main control means is provided with a calculation means for executing a calculation for performing the main control of the game,
When it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium launched by the prize detecting means and the launching means has won in one of the winning openings, the payout is made based on the winning opening of the game medium. The payout amount setting means for setting the number of game media to be issued and notifying the payout means is realized by execution of calculation by the calculation means,
The gaming machine B1 characterized in that the storage control means and the output means are provided on a microchip different from the rendering means.

The gaming machine B1 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7. That is, the main control means for performing the main control of the game is provided with a calculation means for executing the calculation for the control, and the winning detection means or the game medium launched by the launch means is either When the winning detection means detects that a prize has been won, the number-of-payout setting means for setting the number of game media to be paid out based on the winning mouth of the game medium and notifying the payout means , Is realized by execution of calculation by the calculation main means. On the other hand, storage control for accumulating and storing in the storage means information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. The means and the output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means are provided in a microchip different from the arithmetic means. With this, only by providing another microchip, the number of game media paid out by the payout means to the first winning a prize mouth can be increased without rewriting the instruction (program) of the calculation executed by the calculation means significantly. It is possible to output a signal based on information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning. Further, in order to output a signal based on information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning hole to the number of game media paid out by the payout means, the calculating means There is an effect that it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load in, and to devote most of the processing capacity of the arithmetic means to the main control of the game.

In gaming machine B1,
The gaming machine B2, wherein the microchip is provided in the main control means.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the microchip provided with the storage control means, the output means, and the rendering means is provided in the main control means. Thereby, information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the first winning hole to the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the set number of payouts. The storage in the storage means and the output of the signal based on the information stored in the storage means are performed in the main control means. Therefore, even if a fraudulent person tries to prevent the fraudulent person based on the role ratio from discovering the fraudulent information by outputting the fraudulent information to the output means, the above-mentioned configuration is completed by the main control means. It is difficult to enter such information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the fraudulent person from outputting the fraudulent information to prevent the fraudulent activity from being detected based on the character ratio.

In gaming machine B1 or B2,
The gaming machine B3, wherein the main control means and the microchip are housed together in a board box in which a box pace and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base are connected in an unopenable manner.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1 or B2, the following effect is achieved. That is, since the main control means and the microchip are housed in the substrate box in which the box pace and the box cover that covers the opening of the box base are connected in an unopenable manner, a cheating person may Even if an attempt is made to prevent the detection of a fraudulent act based on the character ratio by outputting the fraudulent information, it becomes difficult to input the fraudulent information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably prevent the fraudulent person from outputting the fraudulent information to prevent the fraudulent activity from being detected based on the character ratio.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3,
The main control means,
In each winning opening, a payout information storage means for storing information on the number of game media paid out by the payout means when there is a prize in the corresponding winning opening,
The arithmetic means executes a start-up process when the main control means is powered on,
Based on the storage of the payout information storage means, the start-up processing, for each winning opening, information indicating the number of game media paid out by the payout means when there is a prize in the corresponding winning opening, A gaming machine B4 including a process for transmitting to the microchip.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the main control means, in each payout opening, the payout information storage means stores information regarding the number of game media paid out by the payout means when there is a win in the corresponding payout opening. In the calculation means, a startup process is executed when the main control means is powered on, and in the startup process, based on the memory of the payout information storage means, a corresponding winning opening Information indicating the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when there is a prize is transmitted to the microchip. As a result, the microchip does not perform main control when the power is turned on, even if information indicating the number of game media to be paid out for the winning of each winning opening which is different for each model of the gaming machine is not stored in the microchip in advance. Based on the information transmitted from the means, the character ratio is calculated, or a signal based on the information is output, and the character ratio is calculated with respect to the signal received from the output means. There is an effect that it can be calculated.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B4,
The gaming machine B5, wherein the microchip includes a second arithmetic unit that performs an arithmetic operation for realizing the storage control unit and the output unit.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the following advantages are exhibited. That is, the second operation means is provided in the microchip, and is the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. The storage control means for accumulating and storing related information in the storage means and the output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means are realized by the operation of the second operation means. .. As a result, by changing the calculation command (program) of the second effect means, it is possible to flexibly deal with the function change and the specification change of the storage control means, the output means and the like.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B4,
A game machine B6, wherein the microchip realizes the storage control means and the output means by a wired logic.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the microchip stores, by the wired logic, information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning hole to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. Storage control means for accumulating and storing in the storage means and output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means are realized. As a result, processing such as storage and output of information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means to the storage means. There is an effect that can be done at high speed.

<Group C>
In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9 and B1 to B6,
The game machine C1 is characterized in that the storage means is configured to be able to hold the stored information even when the power is turned off.

The gaming machine C1 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9 and B1 to B6. That is, the information stored in the storage means, which is related to the ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning hole to the number of the game media paid out by the payout means, It is held even when the power is off. Thereby, regardless of whether or not the power is turned on to the gaming machine, the game medium paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening with respect to the number of the game media paid out by the payout means for a long period of time. The information relating to the ratio of the numbers can be accumulated and stored in the storage means. Therefore, the player who receives the signal output from the output means can analyze the role ratio of the gaming machine over a long period of time, and thus can detect the illegal acts in the past.

In gaming machine C1,
Second storage means that cannot retain information while the power is off,
Second storage control means for storing in the second storage means information relating to a prize detected by the prize detection means,
And a determination means for determining that a predetermined opportunity has come,
When the determination means determines that the predetermined trigger has come off, the storage control means, based on the information about the winning combination detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means, the payout means. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning hole to the number of game media paid out by is stored in the storage means. Machine C2.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are produced. That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means. The second storage means cannot hold information while the power is off. Then, when the determination means determines that the predetermined timing has come, the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information on the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening is cumulatively stored in the storage means by the storage control means. As a result, first, by storing the information related to the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means, the winning of the winning opening is not missed and can be reflected in the information stored in the second storage means. .. Then, every time a predetermined trigger comes, based on the information stored in the second storage means, all the winnings are reflected, and the winnings to the first winning opening with respect to the number of game media paid out by the paying out means. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out on the basis of can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, more accurate information can be output as information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning hole to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. There is an effect that you can. In addition, the storage means is configured to be able to retain the stored information even when the power is off, and generally requires a large amount of power for writing, takes a long time for writing, and is durable. Although the number of times of writing is limited from the viewpoint of the nature, the number of times of writing to the storage unit can be reduced and the above-described problem of the storage unit can be suppressed from being actualized by configuring as described above.

In gaming machine C2,
The gaming machine C3, wherein the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means.

According to the gaming machine C3, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2. That is, the output means outputs not only the signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, but also the signal based on the information stored in the second storage means. As a result, the information about the latest winning a prize stored in the second memory, which is not reflected in the information stored in the memory, is also output. There is an effect that the presence or absence can be judged.

<Group D>
In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3,
The storage control means, as the information relating to the ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning hole to the number of the game media paid out by the payout means, A gaming machine D1 characterized by accumulating and storing information indicating a prize detected by the prize detecting means in the storage means.

The gaming machine D1 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, and C1 to C3. That is, the storage control means stores in the storage means information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning hole to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. Information indicating a winning opening for which a winning is detected by the winning detection means is accumulated and stored. Then, a signal based on this information is output. The one receiving the signal output from the output means is based on the number of game media paid out by the payout means and the winning in the first winning opening based on the information indicating the winning opening in which the winning is detected. The number of game media paid out can be calculated, and the character ratio can be analyzed from these numbers. When a suspicious change is found in the character ratio, the cause can be deeply investigated based on the information indicating the winning opening in which the winning is detected. Therefore, there is an effect that a fraudulent act can be detected more reliably based on the character ratio.

In the gaming machine D1,
Second storage control means for storing in the second storage means information relating to the winning detected by the winning detection means,
And a determination means for determining that a predetermined opportunity has come,
The storage control means, when the judgment means judges that the predetermined trigger has come off, pays the payout means information about the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means. The information relating to the ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning hole to the number of the game media taken out is accumulated and stored in the storage means. A gaming machine D2.

The gaming machine D1 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D2. That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means. Then, when the determination means determines that the predetermined timing has come, the information on the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means is relative to the number of game media paid out by the payout means, The information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening is cumulatively stored in the storage means by the storage control means. As a result, first, by storing the information related to the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means, the winning of the winning opening is not missed and can be reflected in the information stored in the second storage means. .. Then, every time a predetermined trigger comes, the information stored in the second storage means that reflects all the winnings is based on the winning in the first winning opening with respect to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. The information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out can be accumulated and stored in the storage means. Therefore, more accurate information can be output as information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning hole to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. There is an effect that you can.

In gaming machine D2,
The output device outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage device and a signal based on the information stored in the second storage device D3.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect of the game machine D2, the following effect is achieved. That is, the output means outputs not only the signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, but also the signal based on the information stored in the second storage means. As a result, the information about the latest winning a prize stored in the second memory, which is not reflected in the information stored in the memory, is also output. There is an effect that the presence or absence can be judged.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3,
The output means indicates a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and the number of game media paid out by the payout means when there is a prize at a corresponding prize hole at each prize hole. A gaming machine D4, which outputs at least a signal for indicating.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect achieved by any of the game machines D1 to D3, the following effect is achieved. That is, at least a signal based on the information stored in the storage means and a signal for indicating the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when there is a prize in the corresponding prize hole in each winning opening Is output by. As a result, even if the player who receives the signal output from the output means does not have information about the number of game media to be paid out when there is a prize for each winning opening in the connected gaming machine, the gaming machine The effect ratio can be calculated and analyzed from the information on winning a prize output from.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4,
Based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, the number of the game media paid out by the payout means with respect to the number of the game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning hole Equipped with a ratio calculation means for calculating the ratio of numbers,
The gaming machine D5, wherein the output means outputs a signal indicating the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation means as a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect achieved by any of the game machines D1 to D4, the following effect is achieved. That is, based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning hole to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is Is calculated by the ratio calculation means. Then, the signal indicating the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation unit is output by the output unit as a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit. As a result, those who receive the signal output by the output means do not need to calculate the ratio (characteristics ratio), and there is an effect that the misconduct can be easily analyzed. Further, in the case of receiving the signal output by the output means, when trying to calculate the character ratio, when there is a prize in the corresponding prize hole at each prize hole that is illegally or erroneously set There is a possibility that the character ratio is calculated based on the number of game media paid out by the payout means. On the other hand, in the gaming machine D5, since the character ratio is calculated and output by the ratio calculating means, there is an effect that the character ratio and the continuous character ratio can be accurately calculated.

In gaming machine D5,
The output means, as a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, a signal indicating the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation means. A gaming machine D6, which outputs a signal indicating the above.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect produced by the game machine D5, the following effect is produced. That is, the first signal with respect to the signal indicating the information related to the winning detected by the winning detection means, which is accumulated and stored in the storage means, and the number of game media paid out by the payout means, which is calculated by the ratio calculation means, A signal indicating the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the winning opening is output by the output means. In this way, when there is a suspicious point in the ratio (characteristics ratio) output from the output means, the cause is to be searched for from the information on the winning detected by the prize detection means, which is also output. There is an effect that can be.

<Group E>
In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3,
Second storage control means for storing in the second storage means information relating to the winning detected by the winning detection means,
Judgment means for judging that a predetermined opportunity has come,
When it is determined by the determination means that the predetermined trigger has come off, based on the information stored in the second storage means, the first number of the game media paid out by the payout means Ratio calculating means for calculating the ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning of the winning hole,
The gaming machine E1 characterized in that the storage control means accumulates and stores information indicating the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation means in the storage means.

The gaming machine E1 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, and C1 to C3. That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means. When it is determined by the determination means that the predetermined timing has come, based on the information stored in the second storage means, a prize is awarded to the first winning opening with respect to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. The ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the ratio is calculated by the ratio calculation means. Then, the storage control means accumulates and stores the information indicating the calculated ratio in the storage means. As a result, since the calculated ratio (characteristics ratio) is output, it is not necessary for the person who receives the signal output by the output means to calculate the ratio (characteristics ratio), and the misconduct is analyzed. There is an effect that can be facilitated. Also, when trying to calculate the accessory ratio by receiving the signal output by the output means, if there is a prize in the corresponding prize hole that is illegally or erroneously set, There is a possibility that the character ratio is calculated based on the number of game media paid out by the payout means, but since the character ratio is calculated and output by the ratio calculation means, the character ratio and the continuous character are accurate. There is an effect that the ratio can be calculated. Further, since the information indicating the character product ratio is accumulated and stored in the storage means, there is an effect that the amount of information stored in the storage means can be reduced and an increase in the storage capacity required for the storage means can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine E1,
The gaming machine E2, wherein the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means.

The gaming machine E2 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1. That is, the output means outputs not only the signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, but also the signal based on the information stored in the second storage means. As a result, the information about the latest winning a prize stored in the second memory, which is not reflected in the information stored in the memory, is also output. There is an effect that the presence or absence can be judged. Further, while the information stored in the storage means is the accessory ratio, the information stored in the second storage means is the information regarding the prize detected by the prize detecting means, and therefore the information regarding the prize is used. This has the effect of enabling a deeper analysis of the cause of the suspected fraudulent activity.

In the gaming machine E1 or E2,
The output means indicates a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and the number of game media paid out by the payout means when there is a prize at a corresponding prize hole at each prize hole. A gaming machine E3, which outputs at least a signal for indicating.

The gaming machine E3 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1 or E2. That is, at least a signal based on the information stored in the storage means and a signal for indicating the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when there is a prize in the corresponding prize hole in each winning opening Is output by. In this way, if there is a situation in which fraudulent behavior is suspected by analyzing the character ratio, the number of game media paid out by the payout means when there is a prize at the corresponding prize hole is referred to. The effect is that the cause of the situation can be investigated.

<F group>
In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3,
Based on the detection by the winning detection means, the number of game media won in each winning opening is counted for each winning opening from the time when the predetermined opportunity comes to the time when the next predetermined opportunity comes, and it is counted for each winning opening. Second storage control means for storing information indicating the number of winning game media in the second storage means,
And a determination means for determining that a predetermined opportunity has come,
The storage control means, when the judgment means judges that the predetermined trigger has come off, the storage control means sets the information stored in the second storage means to the number of the game media paid out by the payout means. The gaming machine F1 is characterized by accumulating and storing in the storage means as information relating to the ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening.

The gaming machine F1 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, and C1 to C3. That is, based on the detection by the winning detection means, the number of game media won in each winning opening from the time when a predetermined timing has come to the time when the next predetermined time comes Then, information indicating the number of winning game media counted for each winning opening is stored in the second storage means. When the determination means determines that the predetermined trigger has come off, the payout means pays out the information indicating the winning game media, which is stored in the second storage means and is counted for each winning opening. The information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number of played game media is cumulatively stored in the storage means by the storage control means. As a result, first, by causing the second storage control means to count the winnings detected by the winning detection means by the second storage control means, the winnings to the winning openings are not missed, and the information stored in the second storage means is obtained. Can be reflected. Then, each time a predetermined trigger comes, information indicating the number of winning game media for each winning opening, which is stored in the second storage means by reflecting all winnings, is paid out by the payout means. The information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number of the can be accumulated and stored in the storage means. Therefore, more accurate information can be output as information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning hole to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. There is an effect that you can. In addition, since the storage means stores the total number of game media for each winning opening from the time when a predetermined timing comes until the time when the next predetermined time comes, the storage capacity necessary for the storage means is increased. There is an effect that the increase can be suppressed. Further, since the second storage means also stores information indicating the number of game media that have won each winning opening from the arrival of the predetermined trigger to the arrival of the next predetermined trigger, it is necessary for the second storage means. This has the effect of suppressing an increase in storage capacity.

In the gaming machine F1,
The game machine F2, wherein the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, the following effects are produced. That is, the output means outputs not only the signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, but also the signal based on the information stored in the second storage means. As a result, information indicating the number of winning game media for each winning opening, which is not reflected in the information stored in the storing means, is stored in the second storing means and includes the latest winning in the winning opening. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to judge whether or not there is any misconduct including the latest winning situation.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2,
The output means indicates a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and the number of game media paid out by the payout means when there is a prize at a corresponding prize hole at each prize hole. A gaming machine F3, which outputs at least a signal for indicating.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the following effects are produced. That is, at least a signal based on the information stored in the storage means and a signal for indicating the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when there is a prize in the corresponding prize hole in each winning opening Is output by. As a result, even if the player who receives the signal output from the output means does not have information about the number of game media to be paid out when there is a prize for each winning opening in the connected gaming machine, the gaming machine The effect ratio can be calculated and analyzed from the information on winning a prize output from.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3,
Based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, the number of the game media paid out by the payout means with respect to the number of the game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning hole Equipped with a ratio calculation means for calculating the ratio of numbers,
The game machine F4, wherein the output means outputs a signal indicating the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation means, as a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effect obtained by any of the game machines F1 to F3, the following effect is produced. That is, based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning hole to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is Is calculated by the ratio calculation means. Then, the signal indicating the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation unit is output by the output unit as a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit. This eliminates the need for a person who receives the signal output from the output means to calculate the ratio (characteristics ratio), which has the effect of facilitating the analysis of fraud. In addition, when the signal output from the output means is received, when trying to calculate the character ratio, or when there is a prize in the corresponding prize hole that is illegally or erroneously set, There is a possibility that the character ratio is calculated based on the number of game media paid out by the payout means. On the other hand, in the gaming machine F4, the character ratio is calculated and output by the ratio calculating means, so that the character ratio and the continuous character ratio can be accurately calculated.

In the gaming machine F4,
The output means, as a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, a signal indicating the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation means. A gaming machine F5 characterized by outputting a signal indicating the same.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F4, the following effects are achieved. That is, as the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, a signal indicating the number of game media that has won each winning opening for each winning opening from the arrival of a certain opening to the arrival of the next predetermined opening. And a signal indicating the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout device, which is calculated by the ratio calculation device. Is output by. Thus, when there is a suspicious point in the ratio (characteristics ratio) output from the output means, the predetermined output, which is also output, from the time when the predetermined time has passed until the time when the next predetermined time comes There is an effect that the cause can be found from the number of game media for each winning opening that has won the winning opening.

<Group G>
In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3,
Based on the detection by the winning detection means, the number of game media won in each winning opening is counted for each winning opening from the time when the predetermined opportunity comes to the time when the next predetermined opportunity comes, and it is counted for each winning opening. Second storage control means for storing information indicating the number of winning game media in the second storage means,
Judgment means for judging that a predetermined opportunity has come,
When it is determined by the determination means that the predetermined trigger has come off, based on the information stored in the second storage means, the first number of the game media paid out by the payout means Ratio calculating means for calculating the ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning of the winning hole,
The gaming machine G1 characterized in that the storage control means accumulates and stores information indicating the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation means in the storage means.

The gaming machine G1 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, and C1 to C3. That is, based on the detection by the winning detection means, the number of game media won in each winning opening from the time when a predetermined timing has come to the time when the next predetermined time comes Then, information indicating the number of winning game media counted for each winning opening is stored in the second storage means. When it is determined by the determination means that the predetermined timing has come, based on the information stored in the second storage means, a prize is awarded to the first winning opening with respect to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. The ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the ratio is calculated by the ratio calculation means. Then, the storage control means accumulates and stores the information indicating the calculated ratio in the storage means. As a result, since the calculated ratio (characteristics ratio) is output, it is not necessary for the person who receives the signal output by the output means to calculate the ratio (characteristics ratio), and the misconduct is analyzed. There is an effect that can be facilitated. In addition, when the signal output from the output means is received, when trying to calculate the character ratio, or when there is a prize in the corresponding prize hole that is illegally or erroneously set, There is a possibility that the character ratio is calculated based on the number of game media paid out by the payout means, but since the character ratio is calculated and output by the ratio calculation means, the character ratio and the continuous character are accurate. There is an effect that the ratio can be calculated. Further, since the information indicating the character product ratio is accumulated and stored in the storage means, there is an effect that the amount of information stored in the storage means can be reduced and an increase in the storage capacity required for the storage means can be suppressed. Further, the second storage means also stores information indicating the number of game media winning each winning opening from the time when a predetermined timing has come to the time when the next predetermined time comes, so that it is necessary for the second storage means. This has the effect of suppressing an increase in storage capacity.

In the gaming machine G1,
The gaming machine G2, wherein the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means.

The gaming machine G2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G1. That is, the output means outputs not only the signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, but also the signal based on the information stored in the second storage means. As a result, information indicating the number of winning game media for each winning opening, which is not reflected in the information stored in the storing means, is stored in the second storing means and includes the latest winning in the winning opening. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to judge whether or not there is any misconduct including the latest winning situation. In addition, while the information stored in the storage means is the accessory ratio, the information stored in the second storage means is provided to each winning opening after the predetermined timing has come and before the next predetermined timing comes. Since the information indicates the number of winning game media, the use of this information has the effect of enabling a deeper analysis of the cause of a situation suspected of being a fraudulent act.

In the gaming machine G1 or G2,
The output means indicates a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and the number of game media paid out by the payout means when there is a prize at a corresponding prize hole at each prize hole. A gaming machine G3, which outputs at least a signal for indicating.

The gaming machine G3 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G1 or G2. That is, at least a signal based on the information stored in the storage means and a signal for indicating the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when there is a prize in the corresponding prize hole in each winning opening Is output by. As a result, the person who receives the signal output from the output means, when there is a situation in which the misconduct is suspected by analyzing the character ratio, there is a prize at the corresponding prize hole at each prize hole. Further, there is an effect that the cause of the situation can be searched for by referring to the number of game media paid out by the payout means.

<Group H>
In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3,
Second storage control means for storing in the second storage means information relating to the prize detected by the prize detection means from the arrival of the predetermined opportunity to the arrival of the next predetermined opportunity;
And a determination means for determining that a predetermined opportunity has come,
When the determination means determines that the predetermined trigger has come off, the storage control means, based on the information about the winning combination detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means, the payout means. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning hole to the number of game media paid out by is stored in the storage means. Machine H1.

According to the gaming machine H1, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, and G1 to G3, the following effects are achieved. .. That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means from the arrival of the predetermined trigger to the arrival of the next predetermined trigger in the second storage means. Then, when the determination means determines that the predetermined timing has come, the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information about the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening is cumulatively stored in the storage means by the storage control means. As a result, first, by storing the information related to the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means, the winning of the winning opening is not missed and can be reflected in the information stored in the second storage means. .. Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, all winnings are reflected every time a predetermined timing comes, and the winnings to the first winning opening with respect to the number of game media paid out by the paying means. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out on the basis of can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, more accurate information can be output as information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning hole to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. There is an effect that you can. Further, since the second storage means stores only the information regarding the winnings detected by the winning detection means from the arrival of the predetermined opportunity to the arrival of the next predetermined opportunity, the storage capacity of the second storage means is reduced. The effect is that it can be kept small.

In the gaming machine H1,
The gaming machine H2, wherein the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means.

According to the gaming machine H2, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1. That is, the output means outputs not only the signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, but also the signal based on the information stored in the second storage means. As a result, the information about the latest winning a prize stored in the second memory, which is not reflected in the information stored in the memory, is also output. There is an effect that the presence or absence can be judged.

In the gaming machine H1 or H2,
The game machine H3, wherein the second storage means is configured to be able to retain the stored information even when the power is turned off.

The gaming machine H3 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1 or H2. That is, the information regarding the winning, which is stored in the second storage means and is detected by the winning detection means from the time when the predetermined timing has come to the time when the next predetermined time comes, is retained even while the power is turned off. With this, it is possible to prevent loss of information on the winning that is stored in the second storage unit and is not reflected in the storage in the storage unit when the power is turned off, and the reliability of the output signal is improved. The effect is that it can be increased.

<Group I>
In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3,
Second storage control means for storing in the second storage means information relating to the winning detected by the winning detection means,
Judgment means for judging that a predetermined opportunity has come,
A power-off detection means for detecting that the power is turned off,
The storage control unit stores in the second storage unit when the determination unit determines that the predetermined trigger has come off and when the power-off detection unit detects that the power is cut off. Based on the information related to the prize detected by the prize detecting means, the game medium paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening with respect to the number of the game media paid out by the paying means. A game machine I1 characterized in that information relating to a ratio of the number of the above is stored in a storage means.

According to the gaming machine I1, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, and H1 to H3, Produce the effect of. That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means. Then, when the determination means determines that the predetermined timing has come, the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information about the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening is cumulatively stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Further, even when the power-off detecting means detects that the power is turned off, the payout means pays out based on the information on the winning detected by the prize detecting means stored in the second storage means. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number of game media is cumulatively stored in the storage means by the storage control means. As a result, first, by storing the information related to the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means, the winning of the winning opening is not missed and can be reflected in the information stored in the second storage means. .. Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time a predetermined trigger comes, and even when the power is cut off before the predetermined trigger comes out, all winnings are reflected and payout is performed. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning hole to the number of game media paid out by the means can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, when the power is turned off, it is possible to suppress the loss of the information regarding the winning that is stored in the second storage means and is not yet reflected in the storage in the storage means, and the game medium paid out by the payout means. There is an effect that more accurate information can be output as the information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number of.

In the gaming machine I1,
An electric power supply means capable of supplying electric power for at least a predetermined period even after the power is cut off,
The game machine I2, wherein the power supply means supplies the power to at least the storage control means.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I1, the following effects are achieved. That is, at least the storage control means is supplied with power by the power supply means for at least a predetermined period even after the power is turned off. Therefore, when the power-off detecting means detects that the power is cut off, the storage control means uses the power to update the information about the prize detected by the prize detecting means stored in the second storage means. Based on the above, to surely store in the storage means information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. There is an effect that can be.

In the gaming machine I2,
The game machine I3, wherein the power supply means supplies the power to the second storage means.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I2, the following effects are produced. That is, not only the storage control unit but also the second storage unit is supplied with power by the power supply unit for at least a predetermined period after the power is turned off. As a result, before the situation stored in the second storage means is erased, the payout means is surely paid out based on the information relating to the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means. There is an effect that information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number of game media can be stored in the storage means.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I3,
Second storage control means for storing in the second storage means information relating to the winning detected by the winning detection means,
And a determination means for determining that a predetermined opportunity has come,
The second storage means is configured to be able to retain the stored information even when the power is cut off,
The storage control means detects a prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means when power is supplied and when the determination means determines that the predetermined timing has come off. Based on the information about the information, the storage means stores information relating to the ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning hole to the number of the game media paid out by the payout means. A gaming machine I4 characterized by being stored in.

According to the gaming machine I4, any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, and I1 to I3 is played. In addition to the following effects. That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means. The information stored in the second storage means is retained even while the power is off. Then, when the power is supplied and when the determination means determines that the predetermined timing has come, the payout means is determined based on the information about the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. .. As a result, first, by storing the information related to the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means, the winning of the winning opening is not missed and can be reflected in the information stored in the second storage means. .. Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, the number of game media paid out by the payout means by reflecting all the winnings each time the power is supplied and each time a predetermined trigger comes. The information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, when the power is turned off, the information regarding the winning, which is stored in the second storage means and is not yet reflected in the storage in the storage means, is surely reflected in the information stored in the storage means after the power is supplied. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the second storage unit from being lost. Therefore, more accurate information can be output as information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning hole to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. There is an effect. Further, when it is detected that the power is cut off, if the information is stored in the storage means on the basis of the information stored in the second storage means, the power is consumed during the storage of the information in the storage means. There is a possibility that the supply will be interrupted and all the information stored in the second storage means will be reflected and the information cannot be stored in the storage means, or that strange information may be stored in the storage means. Is supplied, the information is stored in the storage means on the basis of the information stored in the second storage means, so that such a problem can be suppressed.

<Group J>
In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4,
Second storage control means for storing in the second storage means information relating to the winning detected by the winning detection means,
And a determination means for determining that a predetermined opportunity has come,
When the determination means determines that the predetermined trigger has come off, the storage control means, based on the information about the winning combination detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means, the payout means. Storing the information relating to the ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning hole to the number of the game media paid out by
The game machine J1 characterized in that the predetermined trigger includes that the number of game media launched into the game area reaches a predetermined number.

According to the gaming machine J1, an effect produced by any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, and I1 to I4. In addition to the following effects. That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means. Then, when the determination means determines that the predetermined timing has come, the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information about the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening is cumulatively stored in the storage means by the storage control means. As a result, first, by storing the information related to the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means, the winning of the winning opening is not missed and can be reflected in the information stored in the second storage means. .. Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, all winnings are reflected every time a predetermined timing comes, and the winnings to the first winning opening with respect to the number of game media paid out by the paying means. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out on the basis of can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, more accurate information can be output as information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning hole to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. There is an effect that you can. In addition, the predetermined trigger includes that the number of game media ejected to the game area reaches a predetermined number, so that the game media paid out by the payout means while the predetermined game media are being ejected It is possible to calculate the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number of prizes (proportion of winning character). Therefore, many game media can calculate the prize ratio at the stage when the prizes have been paid to various winning openings and paid out, so that the average prize ratio can be calculated. Therefore, since it is possible to eliminate the fluctuation of the accessory ratio in a short time in a normal game, it is possible to more easily analyze the misconduct in what received the signal output by the output means.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1,
Second storage control means for storing in the second storage means information relating to the winning detected by the winning detection means,
And a determination means for determining that a predetermined opportunity has come,
When the determination means determines that the predetermined trigger has come off, the storage control means, based on the information about the winning combination detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means, the payout means. Storing the information relating to the ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning hole to the number of the game media paid out by
The gaming machine J2, wherein the predetermined trigger includes that the current time has reached a predetermined time.

According to the gaming machine J2, one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1. In addition to the effects produced, the following effects are produced. That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means. Then, when the determination means determines that the predetermined timing has come, the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information about the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening is cumulatively stored in the storage means by the storage control means. As a result, first, by storing the information related to the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means, the winning of the winning opening is not missed and can be reflected in the information stored in the second storage means. .. Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, all winnings are reflected every time a predetermined timing comes, and the winnings to the first winning opening with respect to the number of game media paid out by the paying means. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out on the basis of can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, more accurate information can be output as information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning hole to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. There is an effect that you can. Further, since the predetermined timing includes that the current time has reached the predetermined time, even when the game is not played, the payout means is surely paid out by the arrival of the predetermined time. It is possible to calculate the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number of game media (feature ratio). Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to surely analyze the presence/absence of a fraudulent act with respect to the person who receives the signal output from the output means, by the surely calculated accessory ratio.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1, J2,
Second storage control means for storing in the second storage means information relating to the winning detected by the winning detection means,
And a determination means for determining that a predetermined opportunity has come,
When the determination means determines that the predetermined trigger has come off, the storage control means, based on the information about the winning combination detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means, the payout means. Storing the information relating to the ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning hole to the number of the game media paid out by
A game machine J3 characterized in that the predetermined trigger includes that a cumulative time during which a game has been played has reached a predetermined time.

According to the gaming machine J3, any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 and J2. In addition to the effect produced by Kagami, the following effect is produced. That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means. Then, when the determination means determines that the predetermined timing has come, the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information about the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening is cumulatively stored in the storage means by the storage control means. As a result, first, by storing the information related to the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means, the winning of the winning opening is not missed and can be reflected in the information stored in the second storage means. .. Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, all winnings are reflected every time a predetermined timing comes, and the winnings to the first winning opening with respect to the number of game media paid out by the paying means. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out on the basis of can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, more accurate information can be output as information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning hole to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. There is an effect that you can. Further, the predetermined trigger includes that the accumulated time of playing the game reaches a predetermined time. Here, the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning hole to the number of game media paid out by the payout means (feature ratio) is originally the value of the game ball. It is calculated by performing the test shooting test for 10 hours. The information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is triggered when the game time reaches a predetermined time. By storing in the storage means as, it is possible to calculate the accessory ratio close to the original definition. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to analyze an object that receives the signal output from the output means by using the accessory ratio close to the original definition.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J3,
Second storage control means for storing in the second storage means information relating to the winning detected by the winning detection means,
And a determination means for determining that a predetermined opportunity has come,
When the determination means determines that the predetermined trigger has come off, the storage control means, based on the information about the winning combination detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means, the payout means. Storing the information relating to the ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning hole to the number of the game media paid out by
The above-mentioned predetermined trigger includes the fact that the cumulative time when power is supplied has reached a second predetermined time, the gaming machine J4.

According to the gaming machine J4, any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J3. In addition to the effect produced by Kagami, the following effect is produced.

That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means. Then, when the determination means determines that the predetermined timing has come, the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information about the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening is cumulatively stored in the storage means by the storage control means. As a result, first, by storing the information related to the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means, the winning of the winning opening is not missed and can be reflected in the information stored in the second storage means. .. Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, all winnings are reflected every time a predetermined timing comes, and the winnings to the first winning opening with respect to the number of game media paid out by the paying means. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out on the basis of can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, more accurate information can be output as information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning hole to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. There is an effect that you can. Further, the predetermined trigger includes the fact that the cumulative time when the power is supplied reaches the second predetermined time, so that the time when the power is supplied becomes the second time even when the game is not often played. Since the predetermined time of 2 has been reached, the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning at the first winning a prize hole to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is surely achieved (the ratio of role goods) ) Can be calculated. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to surely analyze the presence/absence of a fraudulent act with respect to the person who receives the signal output from the output means, by the surely calculated accessory ratio.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J4,
Equipped with main control means to perform the main control of the game,
The main control means is provided with a calculation means for executing a calculation for performing the main control of the game,
When it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium launched by the prize detecting means and the launching means has won in one of the winning openings, the payout is made based on the winning opening of the game medium. The payout amount setting means for setting the number of game media to be issued and notifying the payout means is realized by execution of calculation by the calculation means,
The storage control unit and the output unit are provided on a microchip different from the rendering unit,
The microchip is
Second storage control means for storing in the second storage means information relating to the winning detected by the winning detection means,
And a determination means for determining that a predetermined opportunity has come,
When the determination means determines that the predetermined trigger has come off, the storage control means, based on the information about the winning combination detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means, the payout means. Storing the information relating to the ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning hole to the number of the game media paid out by
The main control means,
A predetermined trigger information storage means for storing information indicating the predetermined trigger;
The arithmetic means executes a start-up process when the main control means is powered on,
The start-up process includes a process for transmitting information indicating a predetermined trigger to the microchip based on the information stored in the predetermined trigger information storage means, the gaming machine J5.

According to the gaming machine J5, any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J4. In addition to the effect produced by Kagami, the following effect is produced. That is, the main control means for performing the main control of the game is provided with a calculation means for executing the calculation for the control, and the winning detection means or the game medium launched by the launch means is either When the winning detection means detects that a prize has been won, the number-of-payout setting means for setting the number of game media to be paid out based on the winning mouth of the game medium and notifying the payout means , Is realized by execution of calculation by the calculation main means. On the other hand, storage control for accumulating and storing in the storage means information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. The means and the output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means are provided in a microchip different from the arithmetic means. With this, only by providing another microchip, the number of game media paid out by the payout means to the first winning a prize mouth can be increased without rewriting the instruction (program) of the calculation executed by the calculation means significantly. It is possible to output a signal based on information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning.

Further, in order to output a signal based on information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning hole to the number of game media paid out by the payout means, the calculating means There is an effect that it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load in, and to devote most of the processing capacity of the arithmetic means to the main control of the game. Further, in the microchip, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information on the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means. Then, when the determination means determines that the predetermined timing has come, the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information about the prize detected by the prize detection means stored in the second storage means. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening is cumulatively stored in the storage means by the storage control means. As a result, first, by storing the information related to the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means, the winning of the winning opening is not missed and can be reflected in the information stored in the second storage means. .. Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, all winnings are reflected every time a predetermined timing comes, and the winnings to the first winning opening with respect to the number of game media paid out by the paying means. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out on the basis of can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, more accurate information can be output as information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning hole to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. There is an effect that you can.

On the other hand, in the main control means, the predetermined trigger is stored in the predetermined trigger information storage means. Then, the calculation means executes the start-up processing when the main control means is powered on, and in the start-up processing, a predetermined trigger is generated based on the information stored in the predetermined trigger information storage means. The indicated information is transmitted to the microchip. Here, the storage of the information on the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning hole to the number of game media paid out by the payout means (feature ratio) is Since there is a physical limit to the storage capacity of the storage means that stores information about the ratio, the microchip does not fix the timing of the storage, but considers the jackpot probability and the probability variation ratio in the gaming machine. It is preferable that it has been prepared. Therefore, by causing the main control means to store the predetermined trigger in the predetermined trigger information storage means and transmitting the information indicating the predetermined trigger to the microchip each time the power is turned on, the game is played in the microchip. The ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning at the first winning a prize slot to the number of game media paid out by the payout means at a predetermined trigger suitable for the jackpot probability and probability variation ratio in the machine ( There is an effect that it is possible to store information regarding the character ratio) in the storage means.

<Group K>
In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5,
A third storage control means for accumulating information indicating the gaming state of the gaming machine and storing the accumulated information in the third storage means,
The gaming machine K1 wherein the output means outputs information indicating a gaming state of the gaming machine stored in the third storage means.

According to the gaming machine K1, any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5. In addition to the effect of bending, there are the following effects. That is, the information indicating the gaming state of the gaming machine is accumulated by the third storage control means and stored in the third storage means. The information indicating the gaming state of the gaming machine stored in the third storage means is output by the output means. Thus, the person who receives the signal output from the output means can analyze the gaming state of the gaming machine and find the cause thereof when the illegal behavior is suspected.

In the gaming machine K1,
A door frame covering the front of the game area is provided,
A gaming machine K2, wherein the gaming state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes a state in which the door frame is open.

The gaming machine K2 has the following effects in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K1. That is, the gaming state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes the state in which the door frame covering the front of the game area is open, so that the one receiving the signal output from the output means is There is an effect that it is possible to judge whether or not there has been a possibility of a fraudulent act from the occurrence status of the state in which the door frame is open.

In the gaming machine K1 or K2,
The gaming machine K3, wherein the gaming state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes an error state of the gaming machine.

The gaming machine K3 has the following effects in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1 or K2. That is, since the gaming state of the gaming machine stored as the information in the third storage means includes the error state of the gaming machine, the one that receives the signal output from the output means is the occurrence state of the error state of the gaming machine. Therefore, there is an effect that it can be determined whether or not there is a possibility that a fraudulent act has been performed.

In any of the gaming machines K1 to K3,
The gaming machine K4, wherein the gaming state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes a winning state in which a predetermined gaming value is given to the player.

The gaming machine K4 has the following effects in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K1 to K3. That is, since the gaming state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes the winning state in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, the one that receives the signal output from the output means is There is an effect that it is possible to determine whether or not a fraudulent act may have been performed from the occurrence status of the hit state of the gaming machine.

In any of the gaming machines K1 to K4,
The gaming state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes a state in which it is detected by any one of the winning openings by the winning detection means within a predetermined time. Gaming machine K5.

The gaming machine K5 has the following effects in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines K1 to K4. That is, the gaming state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes a state in which it is detected by any one of the winning openings by the winning detection means within a predetermined time. Therefore, if the person who receives the signal output from the output means has a possibility that fraudulent acts have been carried out based on whether or not the winning state is included outside the business hours such as midnight. There is an effect that can be judged.

<L group>
A gaming machine that includes a lottery means for performing a lottery on the basis of the establishment of a start condition, and gives a favorable game value to a player when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a chance.
A game area provided with a plurality of winning openings including a first winning opening having an accessory that operates based on a game,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the game area,
A prize detecting means which is provided for each prize hole and detects a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize hole,
When it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won in any prize hole, a predetermined number of games for the prize hole in which the game medium is won A payout means for paying out the medium,
Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning hole to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is accumulated and stored in the storage means. Storage control means for
Output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means;
Change means for changing the probability of winning in the lottery by the lottery means,
A gaming machine L1 comprising: an erasing means for erasing all the information accumulated and stored in the storage means when the probability is changed by the changing means.

According to the gaming machine L1, the game medium is launched by the launching means to the gaming area in which a plurality of winning holes including a first winning hole having an accessory that operates based on the game are provided. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the winning detection means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won in one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of gaming media for the winning opening of the game Are paid out by the payout means. Further, information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is stored in the storage means by the storage control means. It Then, at least a signal based on the information stored in the storage means is output by the output means. As a result, based on the output signal, the ratio of the winning character which is a ratio of the number of game media paid out in accordance with the winning of the winning hole, which is due to the first winning hole (that is, the operation of the winning object). Can be analyzed, and there is an effect that fraudulent activity can be discovered based on the role ratio. On the other hand, in the lottery of the lottery means that gives an advantageous game value to the player, when the change probability changes the winning probability, the information accumulated and stored in the storage means is deleted. Are all erased by. Here, if the winning probability is changed, the character ratio also changes. Therefore, if the information accumulated and stored in the storage means remains as it is before the probability of winning is changed, the change in the accessory ratio that can be analyzed based on the accumulated and stored information is It is unclear whether it is due to a change in the probability of winning or due to fraud. On the other hand, when the winning probability is changed, all the information accumulated and stored in the storage means is erased, so that the effect ratio changes along with the changing the winning probability. There is an effect that it is possible to eliminate the fact that it remains in the storage means.

In the gaming machine L1,
The gaming machine L2, wherein the storage control means stores, when the probability is changed by the changing means, information indicating that the change has been made in the storage means.

The gaming machine L2 has the following effects in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L1. That is, when the changing means changes the winning probability, the storage control means stores information indicating that the change has been made in the storage means. As a result, it is possible to grasp that the information stored in the storage unit has been erased due to a change in the probability of winning, at the analysis stage, and can be used as a reference for determining whether there is fraud. There is.

In the gaming machine L2,
When the probability is changed by the changing unit, the storage control unit stores information indicating that the change has been made in the storage unit together with information indicating the date and time at which the change was made. A gaming machine L3, which is characterized by:

The gaming machine L3 has the following effects in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L2. That is, when the probability of winning is changed by the changing means, the information indicating that the change is made is stored in the storage means by the storage control means together with the information indicating the date and time when the change is made. To be done. As a result, it is possible to grasp at the analysis stage that the information stored in the storage means has been erased due to a change in the probability of winning, and the change has been made (that is, erased). Since the date and time can be grasped, there is an effect that it can be more surely judged whether or not there has been a fraud.

In the gaming machine L2 or L3,
The storage control unit stores, in the storage unit, information indicating that the change has been made when the probability has been changed by the changing unit, together with information indicating a probability of winning after the change. A gaming machine L4, which is characterized by:

The gaming machine L4 has the following effects in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L2 or L3. That is, when the winning probability is changed by the changing means, the information indicating that the change is made is stored in the storage means by the storage controlling means together with the information indicating the probability of winning after the change. To be done. As a result, the information stored in the storage means can be grasped at the analysis stage to be erased due to the change in the probability of winning, and the probability of winning after the change can be grasped. There is an effect that it is possible to more reliably determine whether or not there has been a fraud, while suppressing the probability of being hit later.

In any of the gaming machines L2 to L4,
The storage control means stores, in the storage means, information indicating that the change has been made when the probability is changed by the changing means, together with information indicating a probability of hitting before the change. A gaming machine L5 characterized in that

The gaming machine L5 has the following effects in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines L2 to L4. That is, when the probability of winning is changed by the changing means, the information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the storage means by the storage control means together with the information indicating the probability of winning before the change. To be done. As a result, the information stored in the storage unit can be grasped at the analysis stage that the probability of winning is erased due to the change, and the probability of winning before the change can be grasped. There is an effect that it is possible to more reliably determine whether or not there is a fraud, while suppressing the probability of being hit in front.

<M group>
A gaming machine that includes a lottery means for performing a lottery on the basis of the establishment of a start condition, and gives a favorable game value to a player when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a chance.
A game area provided with a plurality of winning openings including a first winning opening having an accessory that operates based on a game,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the game area,
A prize detecting means which is provided for each prize hole and detects a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize hole,
When it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won in any prize hole, a predetermined number of games for the prize hole in which the game medium is won A payout means for paying out the medium,
Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning hole to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is accumulated and stored in the storage means. Storage control means for
Output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means;
Change means for changing the winning probability in the lottery by the lottery means,
The gaming machine M1 characterized in that the information accumulated and stored in the storage means is retained even when the probability is changed by the changing means.

According to the gaming machine M1, the game medium is launched by the launching means to the gaming area in which a plurality of winning openings including a first winning opening having an accessory that operates based on the game are provided. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the winning detection means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won in one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of gaming media for the winning opening of the game Are paid out by the payout means. Further, information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is stored in the storage means by the storage control means. It Then, at least a signal based on the information stored in the storage means is output by the output means. As a result, based on the output signal, the ratio of the winning character which is a ratio of the number of game media paid out in accordance with the winning of the winning hole, which is due to the first winning hole (that is, the operation of the winning object). Can be analyzed, and there is an effect that fraudulent activity can be discovered based on the role ratio. On the other hand, in the lottery of the lottery means that gives an advantageous game value to the player, even if the winning probability is changed by the changing means, all the information stored in the storage means is retained. to continue. As a result, although the winning character ratio changes according to the change in the winning probability, it is possible to analyze whether or not there is a fraud before the winning probability changes.

In the gaming machine M1,
The game machine M2, wherein the storage control means stores, when the probability is changed by the changing means, information indicating that the change has been made in the storage means.

The gaming machine M2 has the following effects in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M1. That is, when the changing means changes the winning probability, the storage control means stores information indicating that the change has been made in the storage means. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to grasp at the analysis stage that the winning character ratio is changed due to a change in the winning probability, and to use it as a reference for determining whether or not there is a fraud.

In the gaming machine M2,
When the probability is changed by the changing unit, the storage control unit stores information indicating that the change has been made in the storage unit together with information indicating the date and time at which the change was made. A gaming machine M3 which is characterized in that

The gaming machine M3 has the following effects in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M2. That is, when the probability of winning is changed by the changing means, the information indicating that the change is made is stored in the storage means by the storage control means together with the information indicating the date and time when the change is made. To be done. As a result, the date and time when the winning probability is changed can be easily grasped.Therefore, if the accessory ratio changes after that, it may be due to the change of the winning probability. There is an effect that it can be easily judged.

In the gaming machine M2 or M3,
The storage control unit stores, in the storage unit, information indicating that the change has been made when the probability has been changed by the changing unit, together with information indicating a probability of winning after the change. A gaming machine M4 characterized in that

The gaming machine M4 has the following effects in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M2 or M3. That is, when the winning probability is changed by the changing means, the information indicating that the change is made is stored in the storage means by the storage controlling means together with the information indicating the probability of winning after the change. To be done. As a result, since the probability of winning after the change can be grasped, it is possible to more reliably determine whether or not there is an illegality while suppressing the probability of winning after the change.

In any of the gaming machines M2 to M4,
The storage control means stores, in the storage means, information indicating that the change has been made when the probability is changed by the changing means, together with information indicating a probability of hitting before the change. A gaming machine M5 which is characterized in that

The gaming machine M5 has the following effects in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines M2 to M4. That is, when the probability of winning is changed by the changing means, the information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the storage means by the storage control means together with the information indicating the probability of winning before the change. To be done. As a result, the probability of hitting before the change can be grasped, so that there is an effect that it is possible to more surely judge whether or not there is an illegality while suppressing the probability of hitting before the change.

In any of the gaming machines M1 to M5,
Based on the information stored in the storage means, a display means for displaying information relating to the character ratio,
The display means displays information relating to the accessory ratio based on only the information stored after the change when the change is made by the changing means.

The gaming machine M6 has the following effects in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines M1 to M5. That is, on the display means, based on the information stored in the storage means, information relating to the accessory ratio is displayed. At this time, when the probability is changed by the changing means, the information on the character ratio is displayed based on only the information stored after the change. As a result, with respect to the information relating to the character ratio displayed on the display means, it is possible to eliminate the change in the character ratio due to the change in the hit probability, and it is possible to easily find the fraud after the change in the hit probability. effective.

In any of the gaming machines M1 to M6,
The gaming machine M7, wherein the storage control means divides the information for each of the probabilities that can be set by the change by the changing means and accumulates and stores the information in the storage means.

The gaming machine M7 has the following effects in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines M1 to M6. That is, the information stored in the storage unit is divided into each probability that can be set by the change by the change unit, and is cumulatively stored in the storage unit. With this, for each probability that can be set, it is possible to easily determine the accessory ratio when the probability is set, from the information stored in the storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that a change in the character ratio due to a change in the winning probability and a change in the character ratio due to fraud can be clearly switched and analyzed.

<N group>
A gaming machine that includes a lottery means for performing a lottery on the basis of the establishment of a start condition, and gives a favorable game value to a player when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a chance.
A game area provided with a plurality of winning openings including a first winning opening having an accessory that operates based on a game,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the game area,
A prize detecting means which is provided for each prize hole and detects a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize hole,
When it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won in any prize hole, a predetermined number of games for the prize hole in which the game medium is won A payout means for paying out the medium,
Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning hole to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is accumulated and stored in the storage means. Storage control means for
Output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means;
Change means for changing the probability of winning in the lottery by the lottery means,
Erasing means for erasing, when the probability is changed by the changing means, excluding some of the most recently stored information among the information accumulated and stored in the storage means. A gaming machine N1.

According to the gaming machine N1, the game medium is launched by the launching means to the gaming area in which a plurality of winning holes including the first winning hole having a winning object that operates based on the game are provided. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the winning detection means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won in one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of gaming media for the winning opening of the game Are paid out by the payout means. Further, information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is stored in the storage means by the storage control means. It Then, at least a signal based on the information stored in the storage means is output by the output means. As a result, based on the output signal, the ratio of the winning character which is a ratio of the number of game media paid out in accordance with the winning of the winning hole, which is due to the first winning hole (that is, the operation of the winning object). Can be analyzed, and there is an effect that fraudulent activity can be discovered based on the role ratio. On the other hand, in the lottery of the lottery means that gives an advantageous game value to the player, when the winning probability is changed by the changing means, the most recently stored information is accumulated in the storage means. It is erased by the erasing means except for a part of the stored information. Here, if the winning probability is changed, the character ratio also changes. Therefore, if the information accumulated and stored in the storage means remains as it is before the probability of winning is changed, the change in the accessory ratio that can be analyzed based on the accumulated and stored information is It is unclear whether it is due to a change in the probability of winning or due to fraud. On the other hand, when the winning probability is changed, the cumulatively stored information in the storage unit is erased except for the most recently stored information, which leads to a change in the winning probability. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate as much as possible the effects of changes in the character ratio remaining in the storage means, but it is possible to analyze whether there is a possibility that fraudulent acts were performed before the probability of winning was changed. There is an effect that can be.

In the gaming machine N1,
The gaming machine N2, wherein the storage control means stores, when the probability is changed by the changing means, information indicating that the change has been made in the storage means.

The gaming machine N2 has the following effects in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N1. That is, when the changing means changes the winning probability, the storage control means stores information indicating that the change has been made in the storage means. As a result, it is possible to understand at the analysis stage that the winning character ratio is changed by changing the probability of winning, and the information stored in the storage means is changed by changing the probability of winning. There is an effect that it can be grasped at the analysis stage that the data has been erased, and that it can be used as a reference for determining whether or not there has been fraud.

In the gaming machine N2,
When the probability is changed by the changing unit, the storage control unit stores information indicating that the change has been made in the storage unit together with information indicating the date and time at which the change was made. A gaming machine N3 characterized in that

The gaming machine N3 has the following effects in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N2. That is, when the probability of winning is changed by the changing means, the information indicating that the change is made is stored in the storage means by the storage control means together with the information indicating the date and time when the change is made. To be done. As a result, it is possible to understand at the analysis stage that the winning character ratio is changed due to the changed probability, and the information stored in the storage means is changed due to the changed probability. Since it is possible to know at the analysis stage that the data has been deleted, and also the date and time at which the change was made (that is, the deletion was made), it is possible to more reliably determine whether or not there has been a fraud. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine N2 or N3,
The storage control unit stores, in the storage unit, information indicating that the change has been made when the probability has been changed by the changing unit, together with information indicating a probability of winning after the change. A gaming machine N4 characterized in that

The gaming machine N4 has the following effects in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N2 or N3. That is, when the winning probability is changed by the changing means, the information indicating that the change is made is stored in the storage means by the storage controlling means together with the information indicating the probability of winning after the change. To be done. As a result, it is possible to understand at the analysis stage that the winning character ratio is changed due to the changed probability, and the information stored in the storage means is changed due to the changed probability. Since it is possible to understand that the data has been erased at the analysis stage and also the probability of being a hit after the change, it is possible to more reliably judge whether there was any fraud while suppressing the probability of being a hit after the change. The effect is that it can be done.

In any of the gaming machines N2 to N4,
The storage control means stores, in the storage means, information indicating that the change has been made when the probability is changed by the changing means, together with information indicating a probability of hitting before the change. A gaming machine N5 characterized in that

The gaming machine N5 has the following effects in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines N2 to N4. That is, when the probability of winning is changed by the changing means, the information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the storage means by the storage control means together with the information indicating the probability of winning before the change. To be done. As a result, it is possible to understand at the analysis stage that the winning character ratio is changed due to the changed probability, and the information stored in the storage means is changed due to the changed probability. Since it is possible to understand that the data has been erased at the analysis stage and also the probability of winning before the change, it is possible to more reliably judge whether or not there was a fraud while suppressing the probability of hitting before the change. The effect is that it can be done.

<O group>
A gaming machine that includes a lottery means for performing a lottery on the basis of the establishment of a start condition, and gives a favorable game value to a player when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a chance.
A game area provided with a plurality of winning openings including a first winning opening having an accessory that operates based on a game,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the game area,
A prize detecting means which is provided for each prize hole and detects a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize hole,
When it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won in any prize hole, a predetermined number of games for the prize hole in which the game medium is won A payout means for paying out the medium,
Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning hole to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is accumulated and stored in the storage means. Storage control means for
Output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means;
Based on the information stored in the storage means, a display means for displaying information relating to the character ratio,
A mode switching means for switching to a mode for changing the winning probability in the lottery by the lottery means,
Means for displaying a value indicating the probability of the hit to be changed on the display means when the mode is changed to the changing mode by the mode changing means,
And a setting unit configured to set the probability of being the hit to be changed displayed on the display unit as the probability of being the hit, when the mode for changing the probability of being the hit is terminated. Gaming machine O1.

According to the gaming machine O1, the game medium is launched by the launching means to the gaming area in which a plurality of winning holes including a first winning hole having an accessory that operates based on the game are provided. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the winning detection means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won in one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of gaming media for the winning opening of the game Are paid out by the payout means. Further, information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is stored in the storage means by the storage control means. It Then, at least a signal based on the information stored in the storage means is output by the output means. As a result, based on the output signal, the ratio of the winning character which is a ratio of the number of game media paid out in accordance with the winning of the winning hole, which is due to the first winning hole (that is, the operation of the winning object). Can be analyzed, and there is an effect that fraudulent activity can be discovered based on the role ratio. Further, since the information regarding the character ratio is displayed on the display means based on the information stored in the storage means, it is possible to easily see whether the fraudulent act is performed by looking at the display on the display means. The effect is that you can judge. On the other hand, when the mode switching means switches to a mode in which the probability of winning in the lottery by the lottery means is changed, a value indicating the probability of winning in the change is displayed on the display means. Then, when the mode for changing the probability of winning is terminated, the probability of winning, which is displayed on the display means, is set as the probability of winning by the setting means. Thereby, the display means for displaying the information relating to the accessory ratio can also be used as the display means for displaying the winning probability to be changed when the winning probability is changed. This has the effect of suppressing an increase in the number of display units mounted on the gaming machine.

(Problem 2)
The gaming machines P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1 and U2 shown below are made to solve the following problems.

That is, the RAM (Random Access Memory) used in the main control means for controlling the game is used as the first storage area used for the processing for performing the main control of the game and the second storage area used for the other processing. There is known a gaming machine configured to protect information that is divided and used for main control of a game from being destroyed by other processing (for example, Japanese Patent No. 6154863).

On the other hand, there is a demand for more appropriate protection from the other processes for the information used in the process that mainly controls the game.

The present technical idea has been made in view of the above circumstances, and provides a gaming machine capable of suitably protecting information used in the main control of a game.

(Means and effects 2)
<P group>
In a gaming machine equipped with main control means for controlling a game,
The main control means,
Calculation means for performing calculation,
Multiple registers,
A first storage means for storing readable and writable first information used when the first processing for performing the main control of the game is executed by the arithmetic means;
A second storage unit that has a storage area different from that of the first storage unit and that stores second information, which is used when the second process different from the first process is executed by the arithmetic unit, in a readable and writable manner. When,
The second calculating means stores the second information stored in the second storage means from the stage in which the first processing is executed by the first calculating means using the first information stored in the first storage means. Save means for saving the contents of the register to a predetermined area of the second storage means by a load instruction or a store instruction when shifting to the stage of executing the second processing by using information,
The first calculating means stores the first storing means from the stage where the second calculating processing is executed by the second calculating means using the second information stored in the second storing means. Return means for returning the content of the register saved in the predetermined area of the second storage means to a corresponding register when returning to the step of executing the first processing using information. A gaming machine P1 characterized by comprising.

According to the gaming machine P1, main control means for controlling the game is provided. In the main control means, when the first processing for performing the main control of the game is executed by the arithmetic means for performing the operation, the first information used for executing the first processing is readable and writable first. It is stored in the storage means. Also, the second information used in the case where the storage area is different from that of the first storage means and the second processing different from the first processing is executed by the calculation means is readable and writable in the second storage means. Remembered. Then, from the stage where the computing means is executing the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means, the computing means uses the second information stored in the second storage means. When shifting to the stage of executing the second processing, the contents of the register are saved by the saving means to a predetermined area of the second storage means by a load instruction or a store instruction. On the other hand, from the stage where the computing means uses the second information stored in the second storage means to perform the second processing, the computing means uses the first information stored in the first storage means. When returning to the stage of executing the first processing, the contents of the registers saved in the predetermined area of the second storage means are restored to the corresponding registers by the restoration means. As a result, the information stored in this register can be appropriately protected from other processing with respect to the information used in the processing that mainly controls the game. Further, since the contents of the register are saved to a predetermined area of the second storage means by a load instruction or a store instruction, the save location is fixed to the predetermined area as compared with the case of saving to the stack area. be able to. Therefore, while the second processing is being performed, the program used is configured so that the predetermined storage area in which the contents of the registers are saved is clearly avoided and the second storage means is used. The contents of can be protected reliably. Therefore, there is an effect that the information used in the main control of the game can be preferably protected.

In the gaming machine P1,
The second storage means includes a stack area for stacking information based on an instruction to the arithmetic means, and a work area for storing information used based on the instruction to the arithmetic means.
The game machine P2, wherein the save means saves the contents of the register to the predetermined area provided in the work area of the second storage means.

According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the second storage means is provided with a stack area for stacking information based on an instruction to the arithmetic means, and a work area for storing information used based on the arithmetic operation to the arithmetic means, and saves it. The contents of the register saved by the means are saved in a predetermined area provided in the work area of the second storage means. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the required capacity in the stack area and secure a large capacity in the work area.

In the gaming machine P2,
The calculation means is
Stack area specifying means for specifying the range of the stack area in advance,
Memory clear for clearing at least all the information stored in the second storage means provided with the stack area when the information is stacked in the stack area beyond the range designated by the stack area designating means A gaming machine P3 comprising:

According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the calculating means specifies the range of the stack area in advance by the stack area specifying means. On the other hand, when the information is stacked in the stack area beyond the designated range, at least the information stored in the second storage means provided with the stack area is cleared by the storage clearing means. Here, from the stage where the computing means uses the first information stored in the first storage means to perform the first process, the computing means uses the second information stored in the second storage means. When the process shifts to the stage of executing the second process, the contents of the register are saved in the work area instead of the stack area by the save means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the information from being stacked beyond the range specified in the stack area by the saving, and thus to suppress the possibility that all the information stored in the second storage unit is cleared. is there.

In any of the gaming machines P1 to P3,
The gaming machine P4, wherein the registers whose contents are saved in the predetermined area by the saving means include a register used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines P1 to P3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the stage in which the register including the register used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing is executing the first processing by the arithmetic means using the first information stored in the first storage means. When the arithmetic unit shifts to the stage of executing the second processing by using the second information stored in the second storage unit, the saving unit saves it to a predetermined area of the second storage unit. .. As a result, the register used by executing the second process can be reliably restored to the contents immediately before executing the second process based on the contents saved in the predetermined area.

In the gaming machine P4, the register whose contents are saved in the predetermined area by the saving means is a register used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing, and the gaming machine P5. ..

According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the register used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing is calculated from the stage where the arithmetic means is executing the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means. When the means shifts to the stage of executing the second processing by using the second information stored in the second storage means, the saving means saves it in a predetermined area of the second storage means. As a result, there is an effect that only the minimum necessary registers can be saved in a predetermined area, and the contents immediately before the execution of the second processing can be reliably restored.

<Group Q>
In a gaming machine equipped with main control means for controlling a game,
The main control means,
Calculation means for performing calculation,
Multiple registers,
A first storage means for storing readable and writable first information used when the first processing for performing the main control of the game is executed by the arithmetic means;
A second storage unit that has a storage area different from that of the first storage unit and that stores second information, which is used when the second process different from the first process is executed by the arithmetic unit, in a readable and writable manner. When,
The second calculating means stores the second information stored in the second storage means from the stage in which the first processing is executed by the first calculating means using the first information stored in the first storage means. Saving means for saving the contents of some of the plurality of registers to a predetermined area of the second storage means when shifting to the step of executing the second processing using information
The first calculating means stores the first storing means from the stage where the second calculating processing is executed by the second calculating means using the second information stored in the second storing means. Return means for returning the content of the register saved in the predetermined area of the second storage means to a corresponding register when returning to the step of executing the first processing using information. A gaming machine Q1 characterized by being provided.

According to the gaming machine Q1, main control means for controlling the game is provided. In the main control means, when the first processing for performing the main control of the game is executed by the arithmetic means for performing the operation, the first information used for executing the first processing is readable and writable first. It is stored in the storage means. Also, the second information used in the case where the storage area is different from that of the first storage means and the second processing different from the first processing is executed by the calculation means is readable and writable in the second storage means. Remembered. Then, from the stage where the computing means is performing the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means, the computing means uses the second information stored in the second storage means. When shifting to the stage of executing the second processing, the contents of some of the plurality of registers are saved in a predetermined area of the second storage unit by the saving unit. On the other hand, from the stage where the computing means uses the second information stored in the second storage means to perform the second processing, the computing means uses the first information stored in the first storage means. When returning to the stage of executing the first processing, the contents of the registers saved in the predetermined area of the second storage means are restored to the corresponding registers by the restoration means. As a result, the information stored in this register can be appropriately protected from other processing with respect to the information used in the processing that mainly controls the game. Further, since only some of the registers are saved in a predetermined area of the second storage means, the storage capacity necessary for saving the contents of the registers can be suppressed to a low level, and the memory capacity can be reduced. It is possible to increase the area for storing the information and the like. Therefore, there is an effect that the information used in the main control of the game can be preferably protected.

In the gaming machine Q1,
The second storage means includes a stack area for stacking information based on an instruction to the arithmetic means, and a work area for storing information used based on the instruction to the arithmetic means.
The game machine Q2, wherein the save means saves the contents of the part of the registers to the predetermined area provided in the work area of the second storage means.

According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the second storage means is provided with a stack area for stacking information based on an instruction to the arithmetic means and a work area for storing information used based on the arithmetic operation to the arithmetic means, and to save the information. The contents of some of the registers saved by the means are saved in a predetermined area provided in the work area of the second storage means. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the required capacity in the stack area and secure a large capacity in the work area.

In the gaming machine Q2,
The calculation means is
Stack area specifying means for specifying the range of the stack area in advance,
Memory clear for clearing at least all the information stored in the second storage means provided with the stack area when the information is stacked in the stack area beyond the range designated by the stack area designating means A gaming machine Q3 comprising:

According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the calculating means specifies the range of the stack area in advance by the stack area specifying means. On the other hand, when the information is stacked in the stack area beyond the designated range, at least the information stored in the second storage means provided with the stack area is cleared by the storage clearing means. Here, from the stage where the computing means uses the first information stored in the first storage means to perform the first process, the computing means uses the second information stored in the second storage means. When the process shifts to the stage of executing the second process, the contents of some of the registers are saved in the work area instead of the stack area by the save means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the information from being stacked beyond the range specified in the stack area by the saving, and thus to suppress the possibility that all the information stored in the second storage unit is cleared. is there.

In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3,
The gaming machine Q4, wherein the part of the registers whose contents are saved in the predetermined area by the saving means includes a register used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing.

According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, the following effects are achieved. That is, some of the registers, including the registers used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing, execute the first processing by the arithmetic means using the first information stored in the first storage means. When the arithmetic unit shifts to the stage of executing the second processing by using the second information stored in the second storage unit, the saving unit moves the predetermined area to the predetermined area of the second storage unit. Evacuated. As a result, the register used by executing the second process can be reliably restored to the contents immediately before executing the second process based on the contents saved in the predetermined area.

In the gaming machine Q4, the partial registers whose contents are saved in the predetermined area by the saving means are registers used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing. Amusement machine Q5.

According to the gaming machine Q5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the registers used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing are part of the registers, and the arithmetic means executes the first processing by using the first information stored in the first storage means. When the arithmetic unit shifts to the stage in which the second process is executed by using the second information stored in the second storage unit, the evacuation unit shifts to a predetermined area of the second storage unit. Evacuated. As a result, there is an effect that only the minimum necessary registers can be saved in a predetermined area, and the contents immediately before the execution of the second processing can be reliably restored.

<R group>
In a gaming machine equipped with main control means for controlling a game,
The main control means,
Calculation means for performing calculation,
Multiple registers,
A first storage means for storing readable and writable first information used when the first processing for performing the main control of the game is executed by the arithmetic means;
A second storage unit that has a storage area different from that of the first storage unit and that stores second information, which is used when the second process different from the first process is executed by the arithmetic unit, in a readable and writable manner. When,
The second calculating means stores the second information stored in the second storage means from the stage in which the first processing is executed by the first calculating means using the first information stored in the first storage means. Saving means for saving the contents of the register to a predetermined area of the second storage means by an individual instruction for each register when shifting to the step of executing the second processing using information
The first calculating means stores the first storing means from the stage where the second calculating processing is executed by the second calculating means using the second information stored in the second storing means. Return means for returning the content of the register saved in the predetermined area of the second storage means to a corresponding register when returning to the step of executing the first processing using information. A gaming machine R1 characterized by comprising.

According to the gaming machine R1, main control means for controlling the game is provided. In the main control means, when the first processing for performing the main control of the game is executed by the arithmetic means for performing the operation, the first information used for executing the first processing is readable and writable first. It is stored in the storage means. Also, the second information used in the case where the storage area is different from that of the first storage means and the second processing different from the first processing is executed by the calculation means is readable and writable in the second storage means. Remembered. Then, from the stage where the computing means is performing the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means, the computing means uses the second information stored in the second storage means. When shifting to the stage of executing the second processing, the contents of the register are saved to a predetermined area of the second storage unit by the saving unit by an individual instruction for each register. On the other hand, from the stage where the computing means uses the second information stored in the second storage means to perform the second processing, the computing means uses the first information stored in the first storage means. When returning to the stage of executing the first processing, the contents of the registers saved in the predetermined area of the second storage means are restored to the corresponding registers by the restoration means. As a result, the information stored in this register can be appropriately protected from other processing with respect to the information used in the processing that mainly controls the game. In addition, since it is saved to a predetermined area of the second storage means by an individual command for each register, the save process is performed to ensure that the game process that mainly controls the game is not affected by other processes. Only the necessary registers can be specified individually to save them. Therefore, there is an effect that the information used in the main control of the game can be preferably protected.

In the gaming machine R1,
The second storage means includes a stack area for stacking information based on an instruction to the arithmetic means, and a work area for storing information used based on the instruction to the arithmetic means.
The game machine R2, wherein the saving means saves the contents of the register to the predetermined area provided in the work area of the second storage means.

The gaming machine R2 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine R1. That is, the second storage means is provided with a stack area for stacking information based on an instruction to the arithmetic means, and a work area for storing information used based on the arithmetic operation to the arithmetic means, and saves it. The contents of the register saved by the means are saved in a predetermined area provided in the work area of the second storage means. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the required capacity in the stack area and secure a large capacity in the work area.

In the gaming machine R2,
The calculation means is
Stack area specifying means for specifying the range of the stack area in advance,
Memory clear for clearing at least all the information stored in the second storage means provided with the stack area when the information is stacked in the stack area beyond the range designated by the stack area designating means And a gaming machine R3.

According to the gaming machine R3, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R2. That is, the calculating means specifies the range of the stack area in advance by the stack area specifying means. On the other hand, when the information is stacked in the stack area beyond the designated range, at least the information stored in the second storage means provided with the stack area is cleared by the storage clearing means. Here, from the stage where the computing means uses the first information stored in the first storage means to perform the first process, the computing means uses the second information stored in the second storage means. When the process shifts to the stage of executing the second process, the contents of the register are saved in the work area instead of the stack area by the save means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the information from being stacked beyond the range specified in the stack area by the saving, and thus to suppress the possibility that all the information stored in the second storage unit is cleared. is there.

In any of the gaming machines R1 to R3,
The gaming machine R4, wherein the registers whose contents are saved in the predetermined area by the saving means include a register used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing.

According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines R1 to R3, the following advantages are exhibited. That is, the stage in which the register including the register used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing is executing the first processing by the arithmetic means using the first information stored in the first storage means. When the arithmetic unit shifts to the stage of executing the second processing by using the second information stored in the second storage unit, the saving unit saves it to a predetermined area of the second storage unit. .. As a result, the register used by executing the second process can be reliably restored to the contents immediately before executing the second process based on the contents saved in the predetermined area.

In the gaming machine R4, the register whose contents are saved in the predetermined area by the saving means is a register used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing, and the gaming machine R5. ..

The gaming machine R5 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine R4. That is, the register used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing is calculated from the stage where the arithmetic means is executing the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means. When the means shifts to the stage of executing the second processing by using the second information stored in the second storage means, the saving means saves it in a predetermined area of the second storage means. As a result, there is an effect that only the minimum necessary registers can be saved in a predetermined area, and the contents immediately before the execution of the second processing can be reliably restored.

<S group>
In a gaming machine equipped with main control means for controlling a game,
The main control means,
Calculation means for performing calculation,
Multiple registers,
A first storage means for storing readable and writable first information used when the first processing for performing the main control of the game is executed by the arithmetic means;
A second storage means which has a storage area different from that of the first storage means and which stores the second information, which is readable and writable, when the second processing relating to the accessory ratio is executed by the arithmetic means;
The second calculating means stores the second information stored in the second storage means from the stage in which the first processing is executed by the first calculating means using the first information stored in the first storage means. Save means for saving the contents of the register to a predetermined area of the second storage means when shifting to the step of executing the second processing using information
The first calculating means stores the first storing means from the stage where the second calculating processing is executed by the second calculating means using the second information stored in the second storing means. Return means for returning the content of the register saved in the predetermined area of the second storage means to a corresponding register when returning to the step of executing the first processing using information. A gaming machine S1 characterized by comprising.

According to the gaming machine S1, main control means for controlling the game is provided. In the main control means, when the first processing for performing the main control of the game is executed by the arithmetic means for performing the operation, the first information used for executing the first processing is readable and writable first. It is stored in the storage means. Further, the storage area is different from that of the first storage means, and the second information used when the second processing relating to the accessory ratio is executed by the calculation means is readable/writably stored in the second storage means. .. Then, from the stage where the computing means is performing the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means, the computing means uses the second information stored in the second storage means. When shifting to the stage of executing the second process, the contents of the register are saved in a predetermined area of the second storage unit by the saving unit. On the other hand, from the stage where the computing means uses the second information stored in the second storage means to perform the second processing, the computing means uses the first information stored in the first storage means. When returning to the stage of executing the first processing, the contents of the registers saved in the predetermined area of the second storage means are restored to the corresponding registers by the restoration means. As a result, the information stored in this register can be appropriately protected from the processing relating to the character ratio, with respect to the information used in the processing that mainly controls the game. Therefore, there is an effect that the information used in the main control of the game can be preferably protected.

In the gaming machine S1,
The game machine S2, wherein the save means saves the content of the register to a predetermined area of the second storage means by a load instruction or a store instruction.

The gaming machine S2 has the following effects in addition to the effects of the gaming machine S1. That is, since the contents of the register are saved to a predetermined area of the second storage means by a load instruction or a store instruction, the saved area is fixed to a predetermined area as compared with the case of saving to the stack area. The effect is that you can.

In the gaming machine S1 or S2,
The game machine S3, wherein the save means saves the contents of a part of the plurality of registers to a predetermined area of the second storage means.

The gaming machine S3 has the following effects in addition to the effects of the gaming machine S1 or S2. That is, since only some of the registers are saved in a predetermined area of the second storage means, the storage capacity required to save the contents of the registers can be suppressed to a low level, and the memory capacity can be reduced, There is an effect that the area for storing the information and the like can be enlarged.

In any of the gaming machines S1 to S3,
The game machine S4, wherein the save means saves the contents of the register to a predetermined area of the second storage means by an individual instruction for each register.

The gaming machine S4 has the following effects in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines S1 to S3. That is, since each register is saved to a predetermined area of the second storage means by an individual instruction, the save process is performed to ensure that the game process that mainly controls the game is not affected by other processes. The effect is that only the necessary registers can be individually specified and saved.

<T group>
In a gaming machine equipped with main control means for controlling a game,
The main control means,
Calculation means for performing calculation,
A first storage means for storing readable and writable first information used when the first processing for performing the main control of the game is executed by the arithmetic means;
A second storage unit that has a storage area different from that of the first storage unit and that stores second information, which is used when the second process different from the first process is executed by the arithmetic unit, in a readable and writable manner. When,
A stack pointer and
The second processing is executed by a program read at a predetermined position of the first processing,
The main control means,
The first calculating means stores the first storing means from the stage where the second calculating processing is executed by the second calculating means using the second information stored in the second storing means. A game machine T1 comprising a stack pointer setting means for setting the stack pointer to a fixed value when returning to the step of executing the first process using information.

According to the gaming machine T1, main control means for controlling the game is provided. In the main control means, when the first processing for performing the main control of the game is executed by the arithmetic means for performing the operation, the first information used for executing the first processing is readable and writable first. It is stored in the storage means. Also, the second information used in the case where the storage area is different from that of the first storage means and the second processing different from the first processing is executed by the calculation means is readable and writable in the second storage means. Remembered. Here, the second processing is executed by a program read at a predetermined position of the first processing. Then, from the stage where the computing means uses the second information stored in the second storage means to perform the second processing, the computing means uses the first information stored in the first storage means. When returning to the stage of executing the first processing, the stack pointer setting means sets the stack pointer to a fixed value. Since the second process is a program read at a predetermined position of the first process, when the execution of the second process is started, the number of pieces of information stacked in the first process is always It is constant. Therefore, a fixed value based on the number of the stacked information is set in the stack pointer when returning from the stage of executing the second process to the stage of executing the first process, and the process is executed again. In the first process, the stacked information can be read out without fail. Therefore, from the stage where the computing means is executing the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means, the computing means uses the second information stored in the second storage means. When shifting to the stage of executing the second processing, it is not necessary to save the value of the stack pointer that points to the stack area provided in the first storage means used in the first processing, so that saving is performed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity. Therefore, there is an effect that the information used in the main control of the game can be preferably protected.

In the gaming machine T1,
The calculating means is configured to perform a timer process executed at a predetermined position of the loop process when a main process, a loop process executed in the main process, and a timer interrupt generated at a predetermined time are detected. To execute the embedded processing,
The gaming machine T2, wherein the first processing and the second processing are processing executed in the timer interrupt processing.

According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine T1, the following effects are produced. That is, a main process, a loop process executed in the main process, and a timer interrupt process executed at a predetermined position of the loop process when a timer interrupt that occurs every predetermined time is detected. , Executed by the calculation means. Then, the first process and the second process are executed in the timer interrupt process. As a result, the number of pieces of information stacked in the first process is always a fixed number when the execution of the second process is started by the program read out at the predetermined position of the first process. Therefore, by setting a fixed value based on the fixed number to the stack pointer when returning from the stage of executing the second process to the stage of executing the first process, the first value to be executed again In the above processing, there is an effect that the stacked information can be surely read out.

<U group>
In a gaming machine equipped with main control means for controlling a game,
The main control means,
Calculation means for performing calculation,
Multiple registers,
A first storage means for storing readable and writable first information used when the first processing for performing the main control of the game is executed by the arithmetic means;
A second storage unit that has a storage area different from that of the first storage unit and that stores second information, which is used when the second process different from the first process is executed by the arithmetic unit, in a readable and writable manner. When,
The second calculating means stores the second information stored in the second storage means from the stage in which the first processing is executed by the first calculating means using the first information stored in the first storage means. A first fixed value storage means for storing a fixed value in a predetermined register when shifting to a step of executing the second processing by using information;
The first calculating means stores the first storing means from the stage where the second calculating processing is executed by the second calculating means using the second information stored in the second storing means. A game machine U1 comprising: a second fixed value storage means for storing the fixed value in the predetermined register when returning to the step of executing the first process using information.

According to the gaming machine U1, main control means for controlling the game is provided. In the main control means, when the first processing for performing the main control of the game is executed by the arithmetic means for performing the operation, the first information used for executing the first processing is readable and writable first. It is stored in the storage means. Also, the second information used in the case where the storage area is different from that of the first storage means and the second processing different from the first processing is executed by the calculation means is readable and writable in the second storage means. Remembered. Then, from the stage where the computing means is performing the first process using the first information stored in the first storage means, the computing means uses the second information stored in the second storage means. When shifting to the stage of executing the second processing, the fixed value is stored in the predetermined register by the first fixed value storage means. On the other hand, from the stage where the computing means is performing the second process using the second information stored in the second storage means, the computing means uses the first information stored in the first storage means. When returning to the stage of executing the first process, the fixed value is stored by the second fixed value storage means in a predetermined register in which the fixed value is stored by the first fixed value storage means. Thus, from the stage where the arithmetic means uses the first information stored in the first storage means to execute the first process, the arithmetic means uses the second information stored in the second storage means. From the stage of executing the second process by executing the second process by using the second information stored in the second storage unit. At the first glance, the contents of the register can be the same when returning to the stage of executing the first process using the first information stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to surely ensure that the first process that performs the main control of the game is not affected by the second process that is executed between them. Therefore, there is an effect that the information used in the main control of the game can be preferably protected.

In gaming machine U1,
The gaming machine U2, wherein the fixed value is 0.

According to the game machine U2, in addition to the effect of the game machine U1, the following effect is achieved. That is, from the stage in which the arithmetic means uses the first information stored in the first storage means to execute the first process, the arithmetic means uses the second information stored in the second storage means. From the time of shifting to the stage of executing the second process and the stage of executing the second process by the arithmetic means using the second information stored in the second storage means, the arithmetic means stores the first memory. When returning to the stage of executing the first process using the first information stored in the means, 0 is stored as the fixed value of the predetermined register. As a result, it can be grasped that this predetermined register is apparently cleared to 0.
(Problem 3)
The gaming machines V1 to V9, W1 to W7, and X1 to X6 shown below are made to solve the following problems.

Conventionally, when a game medium is shot by a launching means to a game area provided with a plurality of winning openings and the gaming medium wins in any winning opening, a predetermined number of winning openings There is a game machine in which a game medium is paid out to a player (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-340046).

Now, some fraudulent persons make it difficult to win a game medium into a predetermined winning port, or conversely guide the game medium to easily win a predetermined winning port. However, there were insufficient measures to detect such misconduct.

The present technical idea has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably detecting fraudulent activity.
(Means and effects 3)
<Group V>
A game area with multiple winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the game area,
A prize detecting means which is provided for each prize hole and detects a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize hole,
When it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won in any prize hole, a predetermined number of games for the prize hole in which the game medium is won A gaming machine provided with a payout means for paying out a medium,
Game performance information display means for displaying game performance information indicating performance of the game executed in the gaming machine,
A gaming machine V1 comprising: a checking display means for performing a checking display for a predetermined period of time to check whether or not a normal display is possible on the game performance information display means.

According to the gaming machine V1, the game medium is launched by the launching means to the game area provided with a plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the winning detection means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won in one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of gaming media for the winning opening of the game Are paid out by the payout means. The game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in such a gaming machine is displayed on the game performance information display means. A confirmation display for confirming whether the normal display is possible is displayed on the game performance display means by the confirmation display means for a predetermined period. With this confirmation display, it is possible to confirm whether or not normal display is possible on the game performance display means, so that it is possible to judge whether or not the game performance information displayed on the game performance display means is normal. As a result, it is possible to determine the presence or absence of a fraudulent activity based on the game performance information that is determined to be normal, so that there is an effect that the fraudulent activity can be suitably detected.

In the gaming machine V1,
The gaming machine V2, wherein the confirmation display unit causes the game performance information display unit to display the confirmation display for a predetermined period when the power is turned on.

The gaming machine V2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine V1. That is, when the power is turned on, a confirmation display for confirming whether or not a normal display is possible is displayed on the game performance display means by the confirmation display means for a predetermined period. As a result, each time the power is turned on, it is possible to determine whether or not the display on the game performance display means is normal, so that it is possible to more accurately determine the presence or absence of misconduct based on the game performance information that is determined to be normal. There is.

In the gaming machine V1,
The gaming machine V3, wherein the confirmation display means causes the game performance information display means to perform the confirmation display for a predetermined period when a predetermined operation is performed on a predetermined operation means.

The gaming machine V3 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine V1. That is, when a predetermined operation is performed on a predetermined operation means, a confirmation display for confirming whether or not a normal display is possible on the game performance display means is displayed by the confirmation display means for a predetermined period. Be seen. Thus, by performing a predetermined operation on the predetermined operation means, it is possible to determine whether or not the display on the game performance display means is normal. Therefore, when the judgment is made, the judgment can be made by performing a predetermined operation on a predetermined operation means, and thus, there is an effect that it is possible to suitably detect fraud.

In the gaming machine V1,
The game machine is provided with a new startup specifying means for specifying that it is a new startup period,
The gaming machine V4, wherein the confirmation display means causes the game performance information display means to perform the confirmation display for a predetermined period when the new start-up period is reached.

The gaming machine V4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine V1. That is, when the specifying means specifies that the gaming machine is in the new start-up period, the confirmation display for confirming whether or not the normal display is possible on the game performance display means is the confirmation display. It is performed for a predetermined period by means. This makes it possible to determine whether or not the display on the game performance display means is normal, at least when the gaming machine is in the new startup period. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the shipment of the game machine in which the game performance display means cannot display normally.

In any of the gaming machines V1 to V4,
A gaming machine V5, characterized by comprising stop means for stopping the progress of the game during the predetermined time.

According to the gaming machine V5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines V1 to V4, during the predetermined period during which the confirmation display is displayed on the game performance information display means by the confirmation display means, Since the progress is stopped by the stop means, a confirmation display is displayed on the game performance display means, and while the game performance information is not displayed, the game progresses without being able to determine whether there is any misconduct. This has the effect of suppressing this.

In any of the gaming machines V1 to V4,
A gaming machine V6 characterized by continuing the progress of the game during the predetermined time.

According to the gaming machine V6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines V1 to V4, even during a predetermined period during which the confirmation display is displayed on the game performance information display means by the confirmation display means, Since the progress is continued, by displaying the confirmation display on the game performance information display means, it is possible to suppress the waiting of the game.

In any of the gaming machines V1 to V6,
The game performance information display means is provided with a plurality of segment indicators composed of a plurality of segments, and for each segment indicator, information is displayed by turning on, blinking or extinguishing each segment,
The gaming machine V7, wherein the confirmation display is a display in which all the segments of the plurality of segment indicators are turned on.

The gaming machine V7 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines V1 to V6. That is, the game performance information display means is provided with a plurality of segment indicators composed of a plurality of segments, and the information is displayed by turning on, blinking or extinguishing each segment for each segment indicator. .. Then, the confirmation display is a display in which all the segments of the plurality of segment indicators are turned on. As a result, it is possible to confirm whether all the segments can be normally turned on, and it is possible to easily determine whether or not the display on the game performance information display means is normally performed.

In any of the gaming machines V1 to V6,
The game performance information display means is provided with a plurality of segment indicators formed of a plurality of segments, and displays information by turning on, blinking or extinguishing each segment for each segment indicator,
The gaming machine V8, wherein the confirmation display is a display in which all the segments of the plurality of segment indicators are blinked.

The gaming machine V8 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines V1 to V6. That is, the game performance information display means is provided with a plurality of segment indicators composed of a plurality of segments, and the information is displayed by turning on, blinking or extinguishing each segment for each segment indicator. .. The confirmation display is a display in which all the segments of the plurality of segment indicators are blinked. As a result, it is possible to confirm whether all the segments can be normally turned on and off, and it is possible to easily determine whether or not the display on the game performance information display means is normally performed.

In any one of the gaming machines V1 to V8, the gaming performance information displayed on the gaming performance information display means is paid out when the gaming state is normal with respect to the number of gaming media ejected to the gaming area being 100. A gaming machine V9, which is a base value that is the number of gaming media.

The gaming machine V9 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines V1 to V8. That is, in the game performance information display means, as the game performance information, a base value that is the number of game media paid out in a normal game state is displayed with respect to 100 as the number of game media shot to the game area. To be done. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suitably detect fraud.

<W group>
A game area with multiple winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the game area,
A prize detecting means which is provided for each prize hole and detects a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize hole,
When it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won in any prize hole, a predetermined number of games for the prize hole in which the game medium is won A gaming machine provided with a payout means for paying out a medium,
Game performance information display means for displaying game performance information indicating performance of the game executed in the gaming machine,
New startup specifying means for specifying that the gaming machine is in a new startup period,
Special display mode display means for displaying the game performance information display means in a special display mode different from the normal time when the new startup specifying means specifies the new startup period. A gaming machine W1 characterized by the above.

According to the gaming machine W1, the game medium is launched by the launching means to the game area provided with a plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the winning detection means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won in one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of gaming media for the winning opening of the game Are paid out by the payout means. The game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in such a gaming machine is displayed on the game performance information display means. On the other hand, when the new startup specifying means specifies that the gaming machine is in the new start-up period, the special display mode display means displays the game performance information display means in a special display mode different from the normal time. Be seen. With this, it is possible to indicate from the game performance information display means displayed in the special display mode that the new start-up period is currently in progress, and to indicate that there is no information capable of determining fraud. There is an effect that can be.

In the gaming machine W1,
The game performance information display means is provided with a plurality of segment indicators formed of a plurality of segments, and displays information by turning on, blinking or extinguishing each segment for each segment indicator,
The special display mode is a display mode in which all the segments of the plurality of segment indicators are turned on or blinked.

According to the gaming machine W2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine W1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the game performance information display means is provided with a plurality of segment indicators composed of a plurality of segments, and the information is displayed by turning on, blinking or extinguishing each segment for each segment indicator. .. The special display mode is a display mode in which all the segments of the plurality of segment indicators are turned on or blinked. As a result, in the game performance information display means, it is possible to easily indicate that the new start-up period is currently in progress by lighting or blinking all the segments of the plurality of segment indicators.

In the gaming machine W1 or W2,
The game performance information display means,
It comprises a plurality of segment indicators composed of a plurality of segments, for each segment indicator, to display information by turning on, blinking or extinguishing individual segments,
Some segment indicators are used to display the game performance information, and other segment indicators are used to identify the type of the game performance information displayed on the some segment indicators. Used to display information,
The special display mode is a display mode in which information different from the identification information for identifying the type of the game performance information is lit or blinked on the other segment display device. ..

According to the gaming machine W3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine W1 or W2, the following effects are produced. That is, the game performance information display means is provided with a plurality of segment indicators composed of a plurality of segments, and the information is displayed by turning on, blinking or extinguishing each segment for each segment indicator. .. In addition, some segment indicators are used to display game performance information, and other segment indicators are identification information for identifying the type of game performance information displayed on some segment indicators. Is used to display. Then, the special display mode is a display mode in which information different from the identification information for identifying the type of the game performance information is lit or blinked on the other segment display. As a result, in the other segment display device of the game performance information display means, when information different from the identification information for identifying the type of game performance information is lit or blinked, it means that the new startup period is currently in progress. Has an effect that can be easily shown.

In gaming machine W3,
The special display mode is a display mode in which game performance information indicating game performance measured in real time is lit or blinked on the partial segment display.

According to the gaming machine W4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine W3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the special display mode is a display mode in which the game performance information indicating the game performance measured in real time is lit or blinked on some of the segment displays. As a result, since the regular game performance of the gaming machine cannot be measured because it is in the new start-up period, there is an effect that information indicating the game performance measured in real time can be shown as a reference.

The game performance information display means,
It comprises a plurality of segment indicators composed of a plurality of segments, for each segment indicator, to display information by turning on, blinking or extinguishing individual segments,
Some segment indicators are used to display the game performance information, and other segment indicators are used to identify the type of the game performance information displayed on the some segment indicators. Used to display information,
The special display mode is a mode in which identification information for identifying the type of the game performance information is displayed in a blinking manner on the other segment display device.

According to the gaming machine W5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine W1 or W2, the following effects are produced. That is, the game performance information display means is provided with a plurality of segment indicators composed of a plurality of segments, and the information is displayed by turning on, blinking or extinguishing each segment for each segment indicator. .. In addition, some segment indicators are used to display game performance information, and other segment indicators are identification information for identifying the type of game performance information displayed on some segment indicators. Is used to display. Then, the special display mode is a display mode in which the identification information for identifying the type of the game performance information is displayed blinking on the other segment display. As a result, when the identification information for identifying the type of the game performance information is displayed blinking on the other segment display of the game performance information display means, it can easily indicate that the new start-up period is currently in progress. There is an effect that you can.

In gaming machine W5,
The special display mode is a display mode in which information that is different from the game performance information is lit and displayed on the partial segment display.

According to the gaming machine W6, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine W5. That is, the special display mode is a display mode in which information different from the game performance information is lit and displayed on some of the segment display devices. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to clearly show that the regular gaming performance of the gaming machine cannot be measured because it is during the new startup period.

In any one of the gaming machines W1 to W6, the gaming performance information displayed on the gaming performance information display means is paid out when the gaming state is normal with respect to the number of gaming media ejected to the gaming area being 100. A gaming machine W7, which is a base value that is the number of gaming media.

According to the gaming machine W7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines W1 to W6, the following effect is achieved. That is, in the game performance information display means, as the game performance information, a base value that is the number of game media paid out in a normal game state is displayed with respect to 100 as the number of game media shot to the game area. To be done. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suitably detect fraud.

<Group X>
A game area with multiple winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the game area,
A prize detecting means which is provided for each prize hole and detects a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize hole,
When it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won in any prize hole, a predetermined number of games for the prize hole in which the game medium is won A gaming machine provided with a payout means for paying out a medium,
A game performance information acquisition unit that acquires game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in the gaming machine for each predetermined period,
Game performance information storage means for respectively storing the game performance information acquired by the game performance acquisition means for a plurality of predetermined periods;
A gaming performance information display means for displaying gaming performance information acquired for a plurality of predetermined periods, which is stored in the gaming performance information storage means, and a gaming machine X1.

According to the gaming machine X1, the game medium is launched by the launching means to the game area provided with a plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the winning detection means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won in one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of gaming media for the winning opening of the game Are paid out by the payout means. Here, for each predetermined period, the game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in such a gaming machine during the predetermined period is acquired by the game performance information acquisition unit, and the game performance information of each is acquired. It is stored in the performance information storage means. Then, the game performance information stored in the game performance information storage means and acquired for a plurality of predetermined periods is displayed on the game performance information display means. As a result, since the game performance information for a plurality of predetermined periods is shown, it becomes possible to more accurately determine whether or not there has been a dishonest act, and it is also possible to predict to some extent the period of the fraudulent action. it can. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suitably detect fraud.

In gaming machine X1,
The game performance acquisition means acquires game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in the game machine in real time during the predetermined period,
The game performance information storage means stores the game performance information acquired in real time,
The game property information display means displays the game performance information acquired in real time together with the game performance information acquired for a plurality of predetermined periods stored in the game performance information storage means. A gaming machine X2.

The gaming machine X2 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine X1. That is, the game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed on the gaming machine in real time is acquired by the game performance acquisition means in the middle of a predetermined period, and the game performance information acquired in real time is stored in the game performance information storage means. Remembered. Then, the game performance information acquired in real time is displayed on the game performance information display means together with the game performance information acquired for a plurality of predetermined periods stored in the game performance information storage means. As a result, since the game performance information acquired in real time is also shown, there is an effect that it is possible to more accurately determine whether or not there has been an illegal act.

In gaming machine X1,
The game performance information storage means,
A first storage area for storing game performance information in a predetermined period last time,
At least a second storage area for storing game performance information in a predetermined period two times before,
When the predetermined period has elapsed, the game performance information stored in the first storage area is shifted to the second storage area, and during the predetermined period acquired by the game performance acquisition means, in the gaming machine. A game machine X3, wherein game performance information indicating the performance of the executed game is stored in the first storage area.

According to the gaming machine X3, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine X1. That is, the game performance information storage means is provided with at least a first storage area for storing the game performance information in the previous predetermined period and a second storage area for storing the game performance information in the predetermined period two times before. .. Then, when the predetermined period of time has passed, the game performance information stored in the first storage area is shifted to the second storage area, and is executed in the game machine for the predetermined period acquired by the game performance acquisition means. Game performance information indicating the performance of the game is stored in the first storage area. As a result, each time a predetermined period of time elapses, the newly acquired game performance information is stored in the game performance information storage means instead of the oldest acquired game performance information and displayed on the game performance information display means. It Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to further determine whether or not there has been an illegal act based on the new game performance information.

In gaming machine X2,
The game performance information storage means,
A 0th storage area for overwriting and storing the game performance information acquired in real time by the game performance acquisition means in the middle of the predetermined period;
A first storage area for storing game performance information in a predetermined period last time,
At least a second storage area for storing game performance information in a predetermined period two times before,
When the predetermined period has elapsed, the game performance information stored in the first storage area is shifted to the second storage area, and the game performance information stored in the 0th storage area is stored in the eleventh storage area. A game machine X4 characterized by shifting.

According to the gaming machine X4, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine X2. That is, the game performance information storage means stores the 0th storage area for overwriting and storing the game performance information acquired in real time by the game performance acquisition means in the middle of the predetermined period, and the game performance information in the previous predetermined period. At least a first storage area for storing and a second storage area for storing game performance information in a predetermined period two times before are provided. Then, when the predetermined period has elapsed, the game performance information stored in the first storage area is shifted to the second storage area, and the game performance information stored in the 0th storage area is shifted to the first storage area. .. As a result, each time a predetermined period of time elapses, the newly acquired game performance information is stored in the game performance information storage means instead of the oldest acquired game performance information and displayed on the game performance information display means. It Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to further determine whether or not there has been an illegal act based on the new game performance information. Further, the game performance information stored in the 0th storage area when the predetermined period has elapsed becomes the game performance information in the predetermined period. By shifting it to the first storage area as it is, it is possible to easily store the game performance information in the previous predetermined period in the first storage area.

In gaming machine X3 or X4,
A gaming machine X5, comprising shift processing means for shifting game performance information between respective storage areas in the game performance information storage means by using an LDIR command.

The gaming machine X5 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine X3 or X4. That is, the shift processing means shifts the game performance information between the respective storage areas in the game performance information storage means by the LDIR command. As a result, there is an effect that the shift processing can be easily executed with one instruction.

In any of the gaming machines X1 to X5, the gaming performance information displayed on the gaming performance information display means is paid out when the gaming state is normal when the number of gaming media ejected to the gaming area is 100. A gaming machine X6, which is a base value which is the number of gaming media.

The gaming machine X6 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines X1 to X5. That is, in the game performance information display means, as the game performance information, a base value that is the number of game media paid out in a normal game state is displayed with respect to 100 as the number of game media shot to the game area. To be done. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suitably detect fraud.

(Problem 4)
The following gaming machines A1 to A9, A1 to A7, C1 to C5, D1 to D3, D1, D2, D1, D2, D1 to D3 are the following: This was done to solve the problem.

Conventionally, when a game medium is shot by a launching means to a game area provided with a plurality of winning openings and the gaming medium wins in any winning opening, a predetermined number of winning openings There is a game machine in which a game medium is paid out to a player (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-340046).

There are people who engage in fraudulent acts against such games. However, measures to suppress such fraud were insufficient.

The present technical idea has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately suppressing fraud.

(Means and effects 4)
<Group>
A game area with multiple winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the game area,
A prize detecting means which is provided for each prize hole and detects a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize hole,
When it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won in any prize hole, a predetermined number of games for the prize hole in which the game medium is won A gaming machine provided with a payout means for paying out a medium,
Game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in the game machine, and game performance information display means capable of switching and displaying information other than the game performance information other than the game performance information,
The game performance information display means,
First display means for displaying the game performance information or the information other than the game performance information,
Second display means for displaying identification information indicating the display content displayed on the first display means;
And a means for hiding the display of the second display means when the non-game performance information is displayed on the first display means.

According to the gaming machine a1, the game medium is launched by the launching means to the game area provided with a plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the winning detection means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won in one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of gaming media for the winning opening of the game Are paid out by the payout means. The game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in such a gaming machine is displayed on the game performance information display means. Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to suitably detect fraud from the game performance information displayed on the game performance information display means. Further, by switching the display, the game performance information display means also displays the non-game performance information other than the game performance information. Here, the game performance information or the non-game performance information is displayed on the first display means of the game performance information display means, and the identification information indicating the display content displayed on the first display means is displayed on the second display means. To be done. When the non-game performance information is displayed on the first display means, the display on the second display means is hidden. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to clearly understand that the display content displayed on the first display means is the non-game performance information information by seeing that the display on the second display means is not displayed.

In gaming machine A1,
A predetermined judgment is made when the start condition is satisfied, and when the judgment is a predetermined result, a predetermined game value is given to the player,
Change means for changing the probability of a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels,
If the changing means changes the probability of the predetermined result among a plurality of levels, the game performance information display means is switched to display the probability level as the game performance information outside information. A display control means for displaying the means, and a gaming machine a2.

According to the gaming machine A2, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1. That is, this gaming machine makes a predetermined determination triggered by the establishment of the start condition, and gives a predetermined gaming value to the player when the determination has a predetermined result. The probability that the predetermined result is obtained is changed among the plurality of levels by the changing means. Then, when the changing means changes the probability that the predetermined result is obtained in the predetermined determination, the display control means switches the display of the game performance information display means, and as the game performance information non-information, the probability level is changed. Is displayed. When the probability level is displayed on the first display means, the display on the second display means is hidden. With this, it is possible to see that the display of the second display means is not displayed and clearly understand that the display content displayed on the first display means is the level of the probability of being changed by the changing means. There is.

In gaming machine A1 or A2,
Error detection means for detecting an error,
Error history storage means for storing a history of error types detected by the error detection means,
An error history display receiving unit that receives a display of the history of the error type,
When the display of the history is accepted by the error history display acceptance means, the game performance information display means is switched, and the history of the error type is stored as the game performance information non-information based on the storage of the error history storage means. And a display control means for displaying on the game performance information display means.

According to the gaming machine A3, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2. That is, when an error is detected by the error detection means, the history of the error type is stored in the error history storage means. Further, when the display of the error type history is accepted by the error history display accepting unit, the display control unit switches the game performance information display unit, and the error type history is stored in the error history storage unit as the game performance information non-information. Is displayed on the game performance information display means based on. When the error type history is displayed on the first display means, the display on the second display means is hidden. Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to clearly understand that the display content displayed on the first display means is the history of the error type by seeing that the display on the second display means is not displayed.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A3,
The second display means is provided with a segment display composed of a plurality of segments, and displays information by turning on, blinking or extinguishing each segment with respect to the segment display,
The means for making the display of the second display means non-display is for turning off all the segments of the segment display device.

According to the gaming machine a4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines a1 to a3, the following effect is produced. That is, the second display means is provided with a segment display composed of a plurality of segments, and information is displayed by turning on, blinking, or extinguishing each segment on the segment display. Then, when the game performance information outside information is displayed on the first display means, all the segments of the segment display of the second display means are turned off and the display of the second display means is hidden. This has the effect that the non-display can be performed with simple control.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4,
The first display means is configured to display a plurality of digits,
The gaming machine is
When the non-game performance information is displayed on the first display means, a part of the plurality of digits is used to display the probability level, and the remaining digits are displayed as the game performance. A gaming machine (3), which is provided with means for performing a display mode that does not display information.

According to the gaming machine a5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines a1 to a4, the following effect is produced. That is, the first display means is configured to be able to display a plurality of digits, and when displaying the non-game performance information on the first display means, a part of the plurality of digits is used for the game performance. The outside information is displayed, and the remaining digits are displayed in a display mode that is not displayed in the game performance information display. With this, it is possible to clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is the game performance information or the game performance out-of-game information, based on the display content of the remaining digits on the first display means. effective.

In gaming machine A5,
The gaming machine 6 is provided with means for displaying the game performance information by using all of the plurality of digits when displaying the game performance information on the first display means.

According to the gaming machine a6, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine a5. That is, when the game performance information is displayed on the first display means, the game performance information is displayed by using all the digits. Thus, there is an effect that it is possible to more clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is the game performance information or the non-game performance information, based on the display content of the remaining digits.

In gaming machine A5 or A6,
The gaming machine 7 characterized in that the display of the remaining digits is performed in a display mode which is not displayed in the display of the game performance information, and the display of the remaining digits is hidden.

According to the gaming machine A7, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A5 or A6. That is, when the game performance out-of-game information is displayed on the first display means, a part of the plurality of digits is used to display the game-outperformance information, and the remaining digits are not displayed. .. As a result, by hiding the remaining digits, it is possible to more clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is the game performance information or the non-game performance information. is there.

In gaming machine A5 or A6,
The gaming machine a8, wherein the means for displaying the remaining digits in a display mode which is not displayed in the game performance information display is a fixed display of the remaining digits in a predetermined display mode.

According to the gaming machine a8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine a5 or a6, the following effects are produced. That is, when the non-game performance information is displayed on the first display means, a part of the plurality of digits is used to display the probability level, and the remaining digits are fixedly displayed in a predetermined display mode. It As a result, the remaining digits are fixedly displayed in a predetermined display mode, so that it is more clear whether the display content displayed on the first display means is game performance information or game performance out-of-game information. The effect is that you can judge.

In gaming machine A5 or A6,
The gaming machine 9 is characterized in that the means for displaying the remaining digits in a display mode which is not displayed in the display of the game performance information blinks the remaining digits in a predetermined display mode.

According to the gaming machine a9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine a5 or a6, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the non-game performance information is displayed on the first display means, a part of the plurality of digits is used to display the probability level, and the remaining digits are displayed in a blinking manner in a predetermined display mode. It As a result, by blinking the remaining digits in a predetermined display manner, it becomes more clear whether the display content displayed on the first display means is the game performance information or the non-game performance information. The effect is that you can judge.

<Group A>
A game area with multiple winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the game area,
A prize detecting means which is provided for each prize hole and detects a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize hole,
When it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won in any prize hole, a predetermined number of games for the prize hole in which the game medium is won A gaming machine provided with a payout means for paying out a medium,
Game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in the game machine, and game performance information display means capable of switching and displaying information other than the game performance information other than the game performance information,
The game performance information display means,
First display means for displaying the game performance information or the information other than the game performance information,
Second display means for displaying identification information indicating the display content displayed on the first display means,
The first display means is configured to display a plurality of digits,
The gaming machine is
When the non-game performance information is displayed on the first display means, a part of the plurality of digits is used to display the probability level, and the remaining digits are displayed as the game performance. A gaming machine (1) comprising means for performing a display mode that does not display information.

According to the gaming machine (i), the game medium is launched by the launching means to the game area provided with a plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the winning detection means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won in one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of gaming media for the winning opening of the game Are paid out by the payout means. The game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in such a gaming machine is displayed on the game performance information display means. Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to suitably detect fraud from the game performance information displayed on the game performance information display means. Further, by switching the display, the game performance information display means also displays the non-game performance information other than the game performance information. Here, the game performance information or the non-game performance information is displayed on the first display means of the game performance information display means, and the identification information indicating the display content displayed on the first display means is displayed on the second display means. To be done. The first display means is configured to be able to display a plurality of digits, and when displaying the non-game performance information on the first display means, a part of the plurality of digits is used to indicate the non-game performance information. Is displayed, and the remaining digits are displayed in a display mode which is not displayed in the game performance information display. Thereby, it is possible to clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is the game performance information or the non-game performance information, based on the display content of the remaining digits on the first display means. There is.

In gaming machine a1,
The game machine (i) 2 is provided with means for displaying the game performance information by using all of the plurality of digits when displaying the game performance information on the first display means.

The gaming machine a2 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine a1. That is, when the game performance information is displayed on the first display means, the game performance information is displayed by using all the digits. Thus, there is an effect that it is possible to more clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is the game performance information or the non-game performance information, based on the display content of the remaining digits.

In gaming machine a1 or a2,
A predetermined judgment is made when the start condition is satisfied, and when the judgment is a predetermined result, a predetermined game value is given to the player,
Change means for changing the probability of a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels,
If the changing means changes the probability of the predetermined result among a plurality of levels, the game performance information display means is switched to display the probability level as the game performance information outside information. And a display control means for displaying on the means.

The gaming machine a3 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine a1 or a2. That is, this gaming machine makes a predetermined determination triggered by the establishment of the start condition, and gives a predetermined gaming value to the player when the determination has a predetermined result. The probability that the predetermined result is obtained is changed among the plurality of levels by the changing means. Then, when the changing means changes the probability that the predetermined result is obtained in the predetermined determination, the display control means switches the display of the game performance information display means, and as the game performance information non-information, the probability level is changed. Is displayed. When the probability level is displayed on the first display means, the probability level is displayed by using a part of the plurality of digits, and the remaining digits are displayed by the game performance information display. The display is not performed. Thereby, it is possible to clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is the game performance information or the probability level based on the display content of the remaining digits on the first display means. is there.

In any of the gaming machines a1 to a3,
Error detection means for detecting an error,
Error history storage means for storing a history of error types detected by the error detection means,
An error history display receiving unit that receives a display of the history of the error type,
When the display of the history is accepted by the error history display acceptance means, the game performance information display means is switched, and the history of the error type is stored as the game performance information non-information based on the storage of the error history storage means. And a display control means for displaying on the game performance information display means.

According to the gaming machine a4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines a1 to a3, the following effect is produced. That is, when an error is detected by the error detection means, the history of the error type is stored in the error history storage means. Further, when the display of the error type history is accepted by the error history display accepting unit, the display control unit switches the game performance information display unit, and the error type history is stored in the error history storage unit as the game performance information non-information. Is displayed on the game performance information display means based on. Then, when displaying the history of the error type on the first display means, the history of the error type is displayed by using a part of the plurality of digits, and the display of the remaining digits is the display of the game performance information. Is displayed in a display mode not displayed. Thereby, it is possible to clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is the game performance information or the error type history, based on the display content of the remaining digits on the first display means. There is.

In any of the gaming machines a1 to a4,
The gaming machine B5, wherein the means for displaying the remaining digits in a display mode which is not displayed in the gaming performance information display is configured to hide the remaining digits.

According to the gaming machine a5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines a1 to a4, the following effects are produced. That is, when the game performance out-of-game information is displayed on the first display means, a part of the plurality of digits is used to display the game-outperformance information, and the remaining digits are not displayed. .. As a result, by hiding the remaining digits, it is possible to more clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is the game performance information or the non-game performance information. is there.

In any of the gaming machines a1 to a4,
7. The gaming machine B6, wherein the means for displaying the remaining digits in a display mode which is not displayed in the game performance information is fixedly displaying the remaining digits in a predetermined display mode.

According to the gaming machine a6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines a1 to a4, the following effect is produced. That is, when the non-game performance information is displayed on the first display means, a part of the plurality of digits is used to display the probability level, and the remaining digits are fixedly displayed in a predetermined display mode. It As a result, the remaining digits are fixedly displayed in a predetermined display mode, so that it is more clear whether the display content displayed on the first display means is game performance information or game performance out-of-game information. The effect is that you can judge.

In any of the gaming machines a1 to a4,
7. A gaming machine (7), wherein the means for displaying the remaining digits in a display mode not displayed in the game performance information display blinks the remaining digits in a predetermined display mode.

According to the gaming machine a7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines a1 to a4, the following effect is produced. That is, when the non-game performance information is displayed on the first display means, a part of the plurality of digits is used to display the probability level, and the remaining digits are displayed in a blinking manner in a predetermined display mode. It As a result, by blinking the remaining digits in a predetermined display manner, it becomes more clear whether the display content displayed on the first display means is the game performance information or the non-game performance information. The effect is that you can judge.

<c group>
A game area with multiple winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the game area,
A prize detecting means which is provided for each prize hole and detects a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize hole,
When it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won in any prize hole, a predetermined number of games for the prize hole in which the game medium is won A gaming machine provided with a payout means for paying out a medium,
Game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in the game machine, and game performance information display means capable of switching and displaying information other than the game performance information other than the game performance information,
The game performance information display means,
First display means for displaying the game performance information or the information other than the game performance information,
Second display means for displaying identification information indicating the display content displayed on the first display means;
When the non-game performance information is displayed on the first display means, the display of the second display means is performed in a display mode which is not displayed when the game performance information is displayed on the first display means. A gaming machine (1) comprising:

According to the gaming machine C1, the game medium is launched by the launching means to the game area provided with a plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the winning detection means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won in one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of gaming media for the winning opening of the game Are paid out by the payout means. The game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in such a gaming machine is displayed on the game performance information display means. Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to suitably detect fraud from the game performance information displayed on the game performance information display means. Further, by switching the display, the game performance information display means also displays the non-game performance information other than the game performance information. Here, the game performance information or the non-game performance information is displayed on the first display means of the game performance information display means, and the identification information indicating the display content displayed on the first display means is displayed on the second display means. To be done. When the game performance information outside information is displayed on the first display means, the display on the second display means is performed in a display mode which is not displayed when the game performance information is displayed on the first display means. Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to clearly understand whether the display content displayed on the first display means is the game performance information or the information other than the game performance information by looking at the display on the second display means.

In gaming machine U1,
A predetermined judgment is made when the start condition is satisfied, and when the judgment is a predetermined result, a predetermined game value is given to the player,
Change means for changing the probability of a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels,
If the changing means changes the probability of the predetermined result among a plurality of levels, the game performance information display means is switched to display the probability level as the game performance information outside information. A display control means for displaying on the means, and a gaming machine C2.

According to the gaming machine C2, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1. That is, this gaming machine makes a predetermined determination triggered by the establishment of the start condition, and gives a predetermined gaming value to the player when the determination has a predetermined result. The probability that the predetermined result is obtained is changed among the plurality of levels by the changing means. Then, when the changing means changes the probability that the predetermined result is obtained in the predetermined determination, the display control means switches the display of the game performance information display means, and as the game performance information non-information, the probability level is changed. Is displayed. Then, when the probability level is displayed on the first display means, the display on the second display means is performed in a display mode which is not displayed when the game performance information is displayed on the first display means. Thereby, it is possible to clearly understand whether the display content displayed on the first display means is the game performance information or the level of the probability of being changed by the changing means, by looking at the display of the second display means. effective.

In gaming machine u1 or u2,
Error detection means for detecting an error,
Error history storage means for storing a history of error types detected by the error detection means,
An error history display receiving unit that receives a display of the history of the error type,
When the display of the history is accepted by the error history display acceptance means, the game performance information display means is switched, and the history of the error type is stored as the game performance information non-information based on the storage of the error history storage means. And a display control means for displaying on the game performance information display means.

According to the gaming machine c3, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine c1 or c2. That is, when an error is detected by the error detection means, the history of the error type is stored in the error history storage means. Further, when the display of the error type history is accepted by the error history display accepting unit, the display control unit switches the game performance information display unit, and the error type history is stored in the error history storage unit as the game performance information non-information. Is displayed on the game performance information display means based on. Then, when the error type history is displayed on the first display means, the display on the second display means is performed in a display mode which is not displayed when the game performance information is displayed on the first display means. Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to clearly understand whether the display content displayed on the first display means is the game performance information or the error type history by looking at the display on the second display means.

In any of gaming machines c1 to c3,
When the non-game performance information is displayed on the first display means, the display of the second display means is performed in a display mode which is not displayed when the game performance information is displayed on the first display means. The means displays the display of the second display means in a fixed display manner in a fixed display manner.

According to the gaming machine c4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines c1 to c3, the following effect is achieved. That is, when the non-game performance information is displayed on the first display means, the display on the second display means is fixedly displayed in a predetermined display mode. As a result, it is possible to more clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is the game performance information or the game performance non-game information.

In any of the gaming machines c1 to c3,
When the non-game performance information is displayed on the first display means, the display of the second display means is performed in a display mode which is not displayed when the game performance information is displayed on the first display means. The means displays the display of the second display means in a blinking manner in a predetermined display mode.

According to the gaming machine c5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines c1 to c3, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the non-game performance information is displayed on the first display means, the display on the second display means is displayed in a blinking manner in a predetermined display mode. As a result, it is possible to more clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is the game performance information or the game performance non-game information.

<D group>
A game area with multiple winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the game area,
A prize detecting means which is provided for each prize hole and detects a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize hole,
When it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won in any prize hole, a predetermined number of games for the prize hole in which the game medium is won A gaming machine provided with a payout means for paying out a medium,
Game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in the gaming machine,
Error detection means for detecting an error,
Error history storage means for storing a history of error types detected by the error detection means,
Error history display receiving means for receiving the display of the history of the error type,
When the display of the history is accepted by the error history display acceptance means, the game performance information display means is switched and the history of the error type is displayed on the basis of the storage of the error history storage means. And a display control means for displaying on the gaming machine d.

According to the gaming machine d1, the game medium is launched by the launching means to the game area provided with a plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the winning detection means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won in one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of gaming media for the winning opening of the game Are paid out by the payout means. The game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in such a gaming machine is displayed on the game performance information display means. Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to suitably detect fraud from the game performance information displayed on the game performance information display means. Further, when an error is detected by the error detecting means, the history of the error type is stored in the error history storing means. Then, when the display of the error type history is received by the error history display receiving means, the display performance means switches the game performance information display means, and the error type history is stored in the error history storage means based on the game performance information. It is displayed on the display means. As a result, the history of error types can be displayed by one game performance information display unit, and there is an effect that fraudulent activity can be suitably detected from the history of error types.

In gaming machine D1,
The game machine d2, wherein the display control means continues to display the game performance information on the game performance information display means when an error is detected by the error detection means.

According to the gaming machine D2, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1. That is, when an error is detected by the error detection means, the display performance means continues to display the game performance information on the game performance information display means. Therefore, there is an effect that even if a cheating person intentionally causes some error, the cheating can be surely found from the game performance information continuously displayed on the game performance information display means.

In gaming machine D1 or D2,
The display control means switches the game performance information display means and displays the game performance information on the game performance information display means when the display of the history by the error history display reception means is completed. A gaming machine d.

According to the gaming machine d3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine d1 or d2, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the reception of the display of the error type history by the error history display reception means is finished, the display control means switches the game performance information display means, and the game performance information is displayed again on the game performance information display means. It As a result, even if the history of error types is once displayed on the game performance information display means, the game performance information can be displayed again, so that fraudulent activity can be reliably detected from the game performance information. There is an effect that you can.

<Group>
A game area with multiple winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the game area,
A prize detecting means which is provided for each prize hole and detects a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize hole,
When it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won in any prize hole, a predetermined number of games for the prize hole in which the game medium is won A payout means for paying out the medium,
A gaming machine that performs a predetermined determination triggered by establishment of a start condition, and gives a predetermined game value to a player when the determination is a predetermined result,
Storage means for storing information relating to a plurality of game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in the gaming machine;
Output means for outputting information on game performance information based on the information stored in the storage means,
Change means for changing the probability of a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels,
When the probability is changed by the changing means, of the information stored in the storage means, information relating to the game performance information that is affected by the probability is deleted, and related to the game performance information that is not affected by the probability. A storage device for storing information, and a gaming machine E1.

According to the gaming machine O1, the game medium is launched by the launching means to the game area provided with a plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the winning detection means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won in one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of gaming media for the winning opening of the game Are paid out by the payout means. Information relating to a plurality of game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in such a gaming machine is stored in the storage means and output by the output means. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suitably detect fraudulent activity from the information on the game performance information output from the output means. In addition, this gaming machine makes a predetermined determination triggered by the establishment of the start condition, and gives a predetermined gaming value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result. The probability that the predetermined result is obtained in is changed in the plurality of levels by the changing means. Then, when the changing means changes the probability that the predetermined result is obtained in the predetermined determination, the storage control means deletes the information relating to the game performance information, which is affected by the probability, from the information stored in the storage means. Information regarding the game performance information that is not affected by the probability is retained. Therefore, as for the information on the game performance information which is affected by the probability, the information on the game performance information is stored in the storage means at the newly set probability, so that the accurate game performance information can be output. On the other hand, since the information about the game performance information which is not influenced by the probability is held in the storage means, even if the fraudster changes the probability in order to conceal the deletion of the fraudulent activity, the information is held in the storage means. There is an effect that the fraudulent activity can be surely found based on the played game performance information.

In gaming machine O1,
The information regarding the game performance information affected by the probability is stored in a predetermined area of the storage means.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E01, information regarding the game performance information affected by the probability is stored in a predetermined area of the storage unit, so that the probability is changed by the changing unit. In this case, by collectively deleting the predetermined area of the storage means, it is possible to easily delete the information related to the game performance information that is affected by the probability.

<mosquito group>
A game area with multiple winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the game area,
A prize detecting means which is provided for each prize hole and detects a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize hole,
When it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won in any prize hole, a predetermined number of games for the prize hole in which the game medium is won A payout means for paying out the medium,
A gaming machine that performs a predetermined determination triggered by establishment of a start condition, and gives a predetermined game value to a player when the determination is a predetermined result,
Storage means for storing information relating to a plurality of game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in the gaming machine;
Output means for outputting information on game performance information based on the information stored in the storage means,
When the determination is not a predetermined result, a specific determination means for determining whether the determination is a specific result,
When the specific determination means determines that the determination is the specific result, the predetermined gaming value is not given, and normally closed one winning opening is opened for a predetermined time, and
Change means for changing the probability of the specific result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels,
A gaming machine controller 1, comprising: storage control means for erasing the information stored in the storage means when the probability is changed by the changing means.

According to the gaming machine power 1, the game medium is launched by the launching means to the game area provided with a plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the winning detection means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won in one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of gaming media for the winning opening of the game Are paid out by the payout means. Information relating to a plurality of game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in such a gaming machine is stored in the storage means and output by the output means. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suitably detect fraudulent activity from the information on the game performance information output from the output means. Further, this game machine makes a predetermined determination triggered by the satisfaction of the start condition, and when the result of the determination is a predetermined result, a predetermined game value is given to the player, and the determination is made. When the result is not the predetermined result, the specific determination means determines whether or not the determination is the specific result. When the specific determination means determines that the determination is a specific result, a predetermined game value is not imparted, and one normally closed winning opening is opened by the opening means for a predetermined time. When a game medium is won in the opened winning opening, the game medium is paid out by the payout means. Further, the probability that the specific result is obtained in the predetermined determination is changed among the plurality of levels by the changing means. Then, when the probability is changed by the changing means, the information stored in the storage means is erased by the storage control means. Therefore, with respect to the information on the game performance information, the information on the game performance information is stored in the storage means at the newly set probability, so that it is possible to output the accurate game performance information.

In the gaming machine power 1,
The gaming machine information 2, wherein the gaming performance information is a base value.

According to the gaming machine ka 2, since the gaming performance information is a base value in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine ka 1, the information about the base value has the information about the gaming performance information at a newly set probability. Since it is stored in the storage means, there is an effect that a highly accurate base value can be output.

<group>
A game area with multiple winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the game area,
A prize detecting means which is provided for each prize hole and detects a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize hole,
When it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won in any prize hole, a predetermined number of games for the prize hole in which the game medium is won A payout means for paying out the medium,
A gaming machine that performs a predetermined determination triggered by establishment of a start condition, and gives a predetermined game value to a player when the determination is a predetermined result,
Change means for changing the probability of a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels,
Display means for displaying the level of the probability,
The gaming machine key 1, wherein the display of the probability level on the display means is performed only when the power is turned on.

According to the gaming machine key 1, the game medium is launched by the launching means to the game area provided with a plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the winning detection means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won in one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of gaming media for the winning opening of the game Are paid out by the payout means. In addition, this gaming machine makes a predetermined determination triggered by the establishment of the start condition, and gives a predetermined gaming value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result. The probability that the predetermined result is obtained in is changed in the plurality of levels by the changing means. The probability level is displayed on the display means. The display of the probability level on the display means is performed only when the power is turned on. As a result, since the probability level set in the gaming machine is not displayed unless the power is turned on, it is difficult for the player to know the probability level set in the gaming machine, and it is possible to appropriately prevent fraud. There is an effect that can be.

In gaming machine key 1,
The gaming machine key 2 wherein the display means is provided on the back side of the gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine key 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine key 1, since the display means is provided on the back side of the gaming machine, unless the door of the gaming machine is opened and the back side of the gaming machine is exposed. , The probability level displayed on the display means cannot be confirmed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is more difficult for the player to know the level of the probability set in the gaming machine.

In gaming machine key 2,
A door opening detection means for detecting that the door of the gaming machine that has been locked is unlocked and opened;
The display of the probability level on the display means is performed on condition that at least the opening of the door is detected by the door opening detection means when the power is turned on. ..

The gaming machine key 3 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine key 2. That is, the door opening detection means detects that the door of the locked gaming machine is unlocked and opened. The display of the probability level on the display means is performed on condition that at least the door opening detection means detects the opening of the door when the power is turned on. Since the door is normally unlocked by the key managed by the hall, it is more difficult for the player to know the probability level set in the gaming machine.

(Problem 5)
Gaming machines K1 to K3, K1 to K6, K1 to K5, Sa1, Sa2, Si1, Si2, Su1, Su2, Se1, Se2, Se1, So 2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Chi 1 to Tsu 3, Te 1 to Te 3, To 1, and To 2 are made to solve the following problems.

Conventionally, when a game medium is shot by a launching means to a game area provided with a plurality of winning openings and the gaming medium wins in any winning opening, a predetermined number of winning openings There is a game machine in which a game medium is paid out to a player (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-340046).

There is a demand to change the winning probability for such a game. However, measures to change the probability of such a hit were insufficient.

The present technical idea has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability.

(Means and effects 5)
<KU group>
A game area with multiple winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the game area,
A prize detecting means which is provided for each prize hole and detects a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize hole,
When it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won in any prize hole, a predetermined number of games for the prize hole in which the game medium is won A payout means for paying out the medium,
A gaming machine that performs a predetermined determination triggered by establishment of a start condition, and gives a predetermined game value to a player when the determination is a predetermined result,
Change means for changing the probability of a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels,
A storage unit that stores information used for controlling a game and can retain the information even when the power is cut off,
Information erasing instruction means for instructing erasure of information stored in the storage means,
By being in a predetermined state, permission means for permitting change or confirmation of the probability level,
A first enabling the probability level to be changed by the changing means when the permitting means is brought into a predetermined state and the power is turned on while the information erasing instruction means gives an instruction to erase the information. A first mode starting means for starting in a mode,
When the permission unit is brought into a predetermined state and the power is turned on in the state where the information erasing instruction unit does not instruct the information erasing, the second mode for starting the probability level is possible. When the power is turned on while the two mode start-up means and the permitting means are not in a predetermined state and the information erasing instruction means gives an instruction to erase the information, the information stored in the storage means is stored. Third mode start-up means for starting in the third mode for erasing,
When the power is turned on without the permission unit being in a predetermined state and the information erasing instruction unit not instructing to erase the information, the fourth mode startup is performed in the fourth mode in which normal startup is performed. A gaming machine 1 characterized by comprising upper means.

According to the gaming machine C1, the game medium is launched by the launching means to the game area provided with a plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the winning detection means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won in one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of gaming media for the winning opening of the game Are paid out by the payout means. In addition, this gaming machine makes a predetermined determination triggered by the establishment of the start condition, and gives a predetermined gaming value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result. The probability that the predetermined result is obtained in is changed in the plurality of levels by the changing means. Further, the information used for controlling the game is stored in the storage means, and the information can be held even when the power is cut off. There are provided information erasing instruction means for instructing the erasing of the information stored in the storage means, and permission means for changing the probability level or permitting the probability by being brought into a predetermined state. Then, when the permitting means is brought into a predetermined state and the power is turned on with the information erasing instruction means instructing to erase the information, the first mode start-up means causes the changing means to change the probability level. It is started in the first mode that enables it. Further, when the permitting means is brought into a predetermined state and the power is turned on in the state where the information erasing instruction means does not instruct to erase the information, the second mode start-up means enables confirmation of the probability level. Launched in 2 modes. In addition, when the power is turned on while the permitting means is not in the predetermined state and the information erasing instruction means instructs the information to be erased, the third mode start-up means restores the information stored in the storage means. It is started in the third mode for erasing. In addition, when the power is turned on in a state where the permitting means is not in the predetermined state and the information erasing instruction means does not instruct the information to be erased, the fourth mode startup means performs the normal start-up. Can be launched at. As a result, by combining the operations of the information erasing instruction means and the permitting means, it is possible to easily set the startup mode including the mode in which the probability level can be changed and confirmed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability.

In gaming machine K1,
A door opening detection means for detecting that the door of the gaming machine that has been locked is unlocked and opened;
In the first mode startup means, the door opening detection means detects that the door has been opened, the permission means is brought into a predetermined state, and the information deletion instruction means gives an instruction to erase the information. When the power is turned on in this state, the changing means starts up in the first mode that enables the change of the probability level,
In the second mode start-up means, the door opening detection means detects that the door has been opened, the permission means is brought into a predetermined state, and the information deletion instruction means does not give an instruction to erase the information. A gaming machine 2 characterized by starting up in a second mode that enables confirmation of the probability level when the power is turned on in this state.

(Action effect)
According to the gaming machine C2, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1. That is, when the door opening detecting means detects that the door has been opened, the permitting means is brought into a predetermined state, and the power is turned on while the information erasing instruction means instructs the information to be erased, The 1-mode start-up means enables the start-up in the first mode in which the change level allows the change of the probability level. Further, when the door opening detecting means detects that the door is opened, the permitting means is brought into a predetermined state, and the power is turned on in a state where there is no information erasing instruction by the information erasing instruction means, the second The mode start-up means starts up in the second mode which enables confirmation of the probability level. As a result, since the probability level is not changed or confirmed unless the door is opened, there is an effect that it is difficult for the player to change or confirm the probability level.

In gaming machine K1 or K2,
The gaming machine 3 characterized in that the permission means is constituted by a key, and the predetermined state is a state of being rotated to a predetermined position by the key.

According to the gaming machine C3, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2. That is, the permission means is composed of a key, and the predetermined state is a state of being rotated to a predetermined position by the key. Therefore, when starting up in the first mode or when starting up in the second mode, it is necessary to rotate the permitting means to a predetermined position with the key. Since the key is managed by the hall side, there is an effect that it is difficult for the player to change or confirm the probability level.

<ke group>
A game area with multiple winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the game area,
A prize detecting means which is provided for each prize hole and detects a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize hole,
When it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won in any prize hole, a predetermined number of games for the prize hole in which the game medium is won A payout means for paying out the medium,
A gaming machine that performs a predetermined determination triggered by establishment of a start condition, and gives a predetermined game value to a player when the determination is a predetermined result,
Change means for changing the probability of a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels,
Confirmation means for confirming whether or not the level of the probability is normal each time a predetermined timing arrives,
The game machine case 1 is characterized by further comprising: a processing execution means for executing a predetermined processing when the confirmation means confirms that the probability level is not normal.

According to the gaming machine case 1, the game medium is launched by the launching means to the game area provided with a plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the winning detection means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won in one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of gaming media for the winning opening of the game Are paid out by the payout means. In addition, this gaming machine makes a predetermined determination triggered by the establishment of the start condition, and gives a predetermined gaming value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result. The probability that the predetermined result is obtained in is changed in the plurality of levels by the changing means. Whether or not the probability level is normal is confirmed by the confirmation means each time a predetermined timing arrives, and when it is confirmed that the probability level is not normal, the processing execution means executes a predetermined process. To be done. Thus, if the probability level is destroyed during a game for some reason, it can be discovered early and some kind of countermeasure can be taken. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability.

In gaming machine ke1,
The above-mentioned predetermined timing is a lapse of a predetermined time.

The gaming machine case 2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine case 1. That is, whether or not the probability level is normal is confirmed by the confirmation means each time a predetermined time has elapsed. Therefore, if the probability level is destroyed for some reason during the game, it is possible to surely discover it.

In gaming machine ke1,
The above-mentioned predetermined timing is the start of the dynamic display of the identification information that is executed upon the establishment of the above-mentioned starting condition.

According to the gaming machine case 3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine case 1, the following effects are produced. That is, whether or not the probability level is normal is confirmed by the confirmation means each time the dynamic display of the identification information is started. Therefore, there is an effect that if the probability level is destroyed during a game for some reason, it can be surely discovered before the dynamic display of the identification information is started.

In any of gaming machine ke 1 to ke 3,
The above-mentioned predetermined process includes a process for notifying that the probability level is abnormal, and the gaming machine case 4.

According to the gaming machine case 4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machine cases 1 to 3, the following effect is produced. That is, when it is confirmed that the probability level is not normal, the fact that the probability level is abnormal is notified, so that the player or the hall side can immediately grasp the state.

In any of gaming machine ke 1 to ke 4,
The gaming machine 5 is characterized in that the predetermined processing includes processing for stopping a game.

According to the gaming machine case 5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machine cases 1 to 4, the following effect is produced. That is, when it is confirmed that the probability level is not normal, the game is stopped, so that there is an effect that the player can be prevented from suffering a disadvantage by playing at an abnormal probability level.

In any of gaming machine ke1 to ke5,
The gaming machine case 6 characterized in that the predetermined processing includes processing for changing the probability level by the changing means.

According to the gaming machine case 6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machine cases 1 to 5, the following effect is produced. That is, when it is confirmed that the probability level is not normal, the probability level can be changed by the changing means, so that the game can be returned to the normal probability level.

<Group>
A game area with multiple winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the game area,
A prize detecting means which is provided for each prize hole and detects a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize hole,
When it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won in any prize hole, a predetermined number of games for the prize hole in which the game medium is won A payout means for paying out the medium,
A gaming machine that performs a predetermined determination triggered by establishment of a start condition, and gives a predetermined game value to a player when the determination is a predetermined result,
Change means for changing the probability of a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels,
In the start-up process executed when the power is turned on, confirmation means for confirming whether the probability level is normal,
The gaming machine 1 is provided with a processing execution means for executing a predetermined processing when the confirmation means confirms that the probability level is not normal.

According to the gaming machine C01, the game medium is launched by the launching means to the game area provided with a plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the winning detection means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won in one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of gaming media for the winning opening of the game Are paid out by the payout means. In addition, this gaming machine makes a predetermined determination triggered by the establishment of the start condition, and gives a predetermined gaming value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result. The probability that the predetermined result is obtained in is changed in the plurality of levels by the changing means. Then, in the start-up process executed when the power is turned on, the confirmation means confirms whether the probability level is normal, and when it is confirmed that the probability level is not normal, a predetermined process is performed. Is executed by the processing execution means. As a result, when the power is turned on, if the probability level has been destroyed, it can be reliably discovered and some kind of countermeasure can be taken. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability.

In gaming machine Ko1,
The above-mentioned predetermined processing includes a processing for notifying that the level of probability is abnormal, and the gaming machine CO2.

According to the gaming machine CO2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine CO1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when it is confirmed that the probability level is not normal, the fact that the probability level is abnormal is notified, so that the player or the hall side can immediately grasp the state.

In gaming machine Ko 1 or Ko 2,
The above-mentioned predetermined process includes a process of causing an endless loop, and the gaming machine 3.

According to the gaming machine co3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine co1 or co2, the following effects are produced. That is, when it is confirmed that the probability level is not normal, an infinite loop is performed, so that there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the start-up processing and the game being executed with the abnormal probability level.

In any of the gaming machines Co1 to Co3,
The above-mentioned predetermined process includes a process for causing the change means to change the level of probability, and the gaming machine KO4.

According to the gaming machine CO4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines CO1 to CO3, the following effect is produced. That is, when it is confirmed that the probability level is not normal, the changing means can change the probability level, so that the startup process can be completed at the normal probability level.

In any of the gaming machines Co1 to Co3,
The above-mentioned predetermined process includes a process for setting the probability level to one of normal levels.

According to the gaming machine co5, in addition to the effect that any one of the gaming machines co1 to co3 has, the following effects are produced. That is, when it is confirmed that the probability level is not normal, the probability level is set to one of the normal levels, so that there is an effect that the startup process can be completed at the normal probability level. is there.

<Service group>
A game area with multiple winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the game area,
A prize detecting means which is provided for each prize hole and detects a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize hole,
When it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won in any prize hole, a predetermined number of games for the prize hole in which the game medium is won A payout means for paying out the medium,
A gaming machine that performs a predetermined determination triggered by establishment of a start condition, and gives a predetermined game value to a player when the determination is a predetermined result,
Change processing execution means for executing processing for changing the probability of a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels,
A startup unit that executes the process by the change process execution unit on condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on,
The start-up means, when the processing by the change processing execution means is being executed when the power was last turned off, even if the predetermined condition is not satisfied when the power is turned on, A gaming machine server 1 characterized by executing processing by a change processing executing means.

According to the gaming machine server 1, the game medium is launched by the launching means to the game area provided with a plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the winning detection means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won in one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of gaming media for the winning opening of the game Are paid out by the payout means. In addition, this game machine makes a predetermined determination triggered by the establishment of a start condition, and gives a predetermined game value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result. In the processing executed by the change processing executing means, the probability that the predetermined result is obtained is changed among a plurality of levels. The processing by the change processing execution means is executed by the startup means on condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. In addition, when the process by the change process execution unit is being executed when the power was last turned off, the change process is executed by the startup unit even if the predetermined condition is not satisfied when the power is turned on. The processing by the means is executed. As a result, if the processing by the change processing executing means is being executed when the power is turned off last time, the probability level can be changed without fail when the power is turned on after that. You can make changes. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability.

In the gaming machine service 1,
The start-up means, when the processing by the change processing execution means is being executed when the power was last turned off, even if the predetermined condition is not satisfied when the power is turned on, A gaming machine server 2, wherein the processing by the change processing executing means is executed from the beginning.

The gaming machine server 2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine server 1. That is, if the process by the change process execution unit is being executed when the power was last turned off, the change process is executed by the startup unit even if the predetermined condition is not satisfied when the power is turned on. The processing by the means is executed from the beginning. As a result, the probability level can be reset from the beginning, so that there is an effect that the probability level can be changed with confidence.

<Group of moss>
A game area with multiple winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the game area,
A prize detecting means which is provided for each prize hole and detects a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize hole,
When it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won in any prize hole, a predetermined number of games for the prize hole in which the game medium is won A payout means for paying out the medium,
A gaming machine that performs a predetermined determination triggered by establishment of a start condition, and gives a predetermined game value to a player when the determination is a predetermined result,
Change processing execution means for executing processing for changing the probability of a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels,
Confirmation processing execution means for executing processing that enables confirmation of the set probability level,
If the predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, the process by the change process executing means is executed, and when the power is turned on, the second predetermined different from the predetermined condition is executed. A start-up means for executing the processing by the confirmation processing execution means on condition that the condition is satisfied,
The start-up means, when the processing by the change processing execution means is being executed when the power was last turned off, and the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. Even if it is, the game machine system 1 characterized by executing the process by the change process executing means.

According to the gaming machine series 1, the game medium is launched by the launching means to the game area provided with a plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the winning detection means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won in one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of gaming media for the winning opening of the game Are paid out by the payout means. In addition, this game machine makes a predetermined determination triggered by the establishment of a start condition, and gives a predetermined game value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result. In the processing executed by the change processing executing means, the probability that the predetermined result is obtained is changed among a plurality of levels. Further, the set probability level can be confirmed by the processing executed by the confirmation processing executing means. Here, the processing by the change processing executing means is on condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, and the processing by the confirmation processing executing means is predetermined by the power being turned on. It is executed by the startup means on condition that a second predetermined condition different from the condition is satisfied. Then, if the process by the change process executing means is being executed when the power was last turned off, even if the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, the The processing by the change processing execution means is executed by the raising means. As a result, if the processing by the change processing executing means is being executed when the power was last turned off, the probability level is always changed even if the second predetermined condition is satisfied and the power is turned on. Since it is possible to change, the probability level can be changed with confidence. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability.

In gaming machine series 1,
In the case where the startup means is executing the processing by the change processing execution means when the power was last turned off, and when the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. Even if it is, the game machine server 2 is characterized in that the processing by the change processing executing means is executed from the beginning.

The gaming machine Si 2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Si 1. That is, even if the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, when the process by the change process executing means is being executed when the power was last turned off, The processing by the change processing executing means is executed from the beginning by the raising means. As a result, the probability level can be reset from the beginning, so that there is an effect that the probability level can be changed with confidence.

<Group>
A game area with multiple winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the game area,
A prize detecting means which is provided for each prize hole and detects a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize hole,
When it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won in any prize hole, a predetermined number of games for the prize hole in which the game medium is won A payout means for paying out the medium,
A gaming machine that performs a predetermined determination triggered by establishment of a start condition, and gives a predetermined game value to a player when the determination is a predetermined result,
Change processing execution means for executing processing for changing the probability of a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels,
First storage means for storing the original probability level when the probability level is changed by the processing by the change processing execution means,
A game machine 1 comprising: a second storage means for storing the probability level changed by the processing by the change processing execution means.

According to the gaming machine 1, the game medium is launched by the launching means to the game area provided with a plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the winning detection means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won in one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of gaming media for the winning opening of the game Are paid out by the payout means. In addition, this game machine makes a predetermined determination triggered by the establishment of a start condition, and gives a predetermined game value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result. In the processing executed by the change processing executing means, the probability that the predetermined result is obtained is changed among a plurality of levels. When the probability level is changed by the processing by the change processing execution means, the original probability level is stored in the first storage means, and the probability level changed by the processing by the change processing execution means is stored in the second storage means. R. As a result, the original probability level is stored in the first storage means, and the change of the probability level is performed using the second storage means. Therefore, if the processing is stopped during execution of the processing by the change processing execution means, 1) The probability level can be changed again from the original probability level stored in the storage means. Therefore, since the probability level can be changed with peace of mind, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability.

In gaming machine S1,
A gaming machine 2 characterized in that the first storage means continues to store the original probability level even when the power is turned off.

According to the gaming machine S2, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine S1. That is, since the original probability level stored in the first storage means continues to be retained even when the power is turned off, even if the power is turned off during the execution of the processing by the change processing execution means, The probability level can be changed again from the original probability level stored in the first storage means after the input. Therefore, since the probability level can be changed with peace of mind, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability.

<Group>
A game area with multiple winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the game area,
A prize detecting means which is provided for each prize hole and detects a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize hole,
When it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won in any prize hole, a predetermined number of games for the prize hole in which the game medium is won A payout means for paying out the medium,
A gaming machine that performs a predetermined determination triggered by establishment of a start condition, and gives a predetermined game value to a player when the determination is a predetermined result,
Change processing execution means for executing processing for changing the probability of a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels,
A startup unit that executes the process by the change process execution unit on condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on,
The startup means is a second predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition when the power is turned on, when the processing by the change processing execution means is being executed when the power was turned off last time. Even when is satisfied, the processing by the change processing executing means is executed,
The predetermined condition includes that the first operating means is in the first state,
The second predetermined condition includes that the first operating means is in a second state different from the first state,
The change processing execution means includes a detection means for detecting that the first operation means has changed from the first state to the second state, and the detection means causes the first operation means of the first operation means to change. A gaming machine set 1 characterized in that, when a change from a state to the second state is detected, the changed probability level is confirmed.

According to the game machine C1, the game medium is launched by the launching means to the game area provided with a plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the winning detection means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won in one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of gaming media for the winning opening of the game Are paid out by the payout means. In addition, this game machine makes a predetermined determination triggered by the establishment of a start condition, and gives a predetermined game value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result. In the processing executed by the change processing executing means, the probability that the predetermined result is obtained is changed among a plurality of levels. The processing by the change processing execution means is executed by the startup means on condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. Further, when the process by the change process executing means is being executed when the power was last turned off, it means that the second predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. However, the processing by the change processing execution means is executed by the startup means. As a result, if the process by the change process executing means is being executed when the power was last turned off, the probability level is set even when the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is subsequently turned on. Since it is possible to change, the probability level can be changed with confidence. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability. Further, the predetermined condition includes that the first operating means is in the first state, and the second predetermined condition includes that the first operating means is in the second state different from the first state. I'm out. The change processing executing means has a detecting means for detecting that the first operating means is changed from the first state to the second state, and the detecting means causes the first operating state of the first operating means to change. When the change from to the second state is detected, the changed probability level is determined. Here, even if the change process execution means is executed when the second predetermined condition is satisfied, the change process execution means determines that the first operation means is in the second state and the change probability is changed. Instead of fixing the level, the detection means determines the changed probability level triggered by the detection of the change of the first operating means from the first state to the second state. Therefore, even if the change processing executing means is executed when the second predetermined condition is satisfied, the probability level can be surely changed.

In gaming machine C1,
The game machine set 2 is characterized in that the first operation means is a key.

According to the gaming machine SE 2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine SE 1, since the first operation means is a key, the probability level can be easily set by simply shifting the key from the first state to the second state. There is an effect that can be determined.

<Soviet group>
A game area with multiple winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the game area,
A prize detecting means which is provided for each prize hole and detects a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize hole,
When it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won in any prize hole, a predetermined number of games for the prize hole in which the game medium is won A payout means for paying out the medium,
A gaming machine that performs a predetermined determination triggered by establishment of a start condition, and gives a predetermined game value to a player when the determination is a predetermined result,
Change processing execution means for executing processing for changing the probability of a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels,
A startup unit that executes the process by the change process execution unit on condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on,
The startup means, when the processing by the change processing execution means is being executed when the power was last turned off, has a second predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition when the power is turned on. If established, an infinite loop state is provided, which is a gaming machine SO 1.

According to the gaming machine S01, the game medium is launched by the launching means to the game area provided with a plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the winning detection means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won in one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of gaming media for the winning opening of the game Are paid out by the payout means. In addition, this game machine makes a predetermined determination triggered by the establishment of a start condition, and gives a predetermined game value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result. In the processing executed by the change processing executing means, the probability that the predetermined result is obtained is changed among a plurality of levels. The processing by the change processing execution means is executed by the startup means on condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. In addition, when the process by the change process executing means is being executed when the power was last turned off, and when the second predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. Is in an infinite loop state. As a result, the probability level can be changed by instructing to turn on the power after satisfying a predetermined condition and executing the processing by the change processing executing means in the start-up processing. You can change the level. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability.

In gaming machine Seo 1,
The game machine console 2 is characterized in that the start-up means includes an informing means for informing that the predetermined condition is satisfied and the power is turned on when the infinite loop state is established.

The gaming machine seo 2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine seo 1. That is, when the start-up means brings the loop into the infinite loop state, the notification means gives a notification for instructing to turn on the power by satisfying a predetermined condition. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to easily understand that it is sufficient to turn on the power after satisfying a predetermined condition.

<Group>
A game area with multiple winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the game area,
A prize detecting means which is provided for each prize hole and detects a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize hole,
When it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won in any prize hole, a predetermined number of games for the prize hole in which the game medium is won A payout means for paying out the medium,
A gaming machine that performs a predetermined determination triggered by establishment of a start condition, and gives a predetermined game value to a player when the determination is a predetermined result,
Change processing execution means for executing processing for changing the probability of a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels,
Confirmation processing execution means for executing processing that enables confirmation of the set probability level,
If the predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, the process by the change process executing means is executed, and when the power is turned on, the second predetermined different from the predetermined condition is executed. A start-up means for executing the processing by the confirmation processing execution means on condition that the condition is satisfied,
The starting means is
In the case where the process by the change process executing means is being executed when the power was last turned off, even if the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, Execute the process by the change process execution means,
In the case where the process by the change process execution means is being executed when the power was last turned off, the predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition that are different from each other when the power is turned on differ from the third predetermined condition. When the conditions are met, the game machine 1 is set to an infinite loop state.

According to the gaming machine 1, the game medium is launched by the launching means to the game area provided with a plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the winning detection means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won in one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of gaming media for the winning opening of the game Are paid out by the payout means. In addition, this game machine makes a predetermined determination triggered by the establishment of a start condition, and gives a predetermined game value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result. In the processing executed by the change processing executing means, the probability that the predetermined result is obtained is changed among a plurality of levels. Further, the set probability level can be confirmed by the processing executed by the confirmation processing executing means. Here, the processing by the change processing executing means is on condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, and the processing by the confirmation processing executing means is predetermined by the power being turned on. It is executed by the startup means on condition that a second predetermined condition different from the condition is satisfied. Then, if the process by the change process executing means is being executed when the power was last turned off, even if the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, the The processing by the change processing execution means is executed by the raising means. As a result, if the processing by the change processing executing means is being executed when the power was last turned off, the probability level is always changed even if the second predetermined condition is satisfied and the power is turned on. Since it is possible to change, the probability level can be changed with confidence. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability. In addition, when the process by the change process executing means is being executed when the power was last turned off, the third predetermined condition different from the second predetermined condition when the power is turned on. If is established, the loop is infinite. As a result, the probability level can be changed by instructing to turn on the power after satisfying a predetermined condition and executing the processing by the change processing executing means in the start-up processing. You can change the level. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability.

In gaming machine 1
The startup means includes a notification means for issuing a notification for instructing to turn on the power by satisfying the predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition when the infinite loop state is set. A game machine to play 2.

The gaming machine ta 2 has the following effects in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ta 1. That is, when the start-up means brings the loop into the infinite loop state, the notification means gives the notification for instructing to turn on the power by satisfying the predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to easily understand that the power should be turned on after the predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition is satisfied.

<Group>
A game area with multiple winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the game area,
A prize detecting means which is provided for each prize hole and detects a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize hole,
When it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won in any prize hole, a predetermined number of games for the prize hole in which the game medium is won A payout means for paying out the medium,
A gaming machine that performs a predetermined determination triggered by establishment of a start condition, and gives a predetermined game value to a player when the determination is a predetermined result,
Change processing execution means for executing processing for changing the probability of a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels,
A startup unit that executes the process by the change process execution unit on condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on,
The predetermined condition includes that the first operating means is in the first state,
The change processing execution means includes detection means for detecting that the first operation means is changed from the second state to the first state, and the change operation execution means changes from the second state of the first operation means to the first state. When a change in is detected, the probability level is changed,
The gaming machine is
A storage means for storing the previous state of the first operation means,
The detection unit refers to the previous state of the first operation unit stored in the storage unit and the state of the first operation unit at that time, and the first operation unit changes from the second state to the first state. To detect whether or not the
The storage unit stores the first state as the state of the first operation unit of the last time from the time the power is turned on until the detection by the detection unit is performed for the first time. ..

According to the gaming machine H1, the game medium is launched by the launching means to the game area provided with a plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the winning detection means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won in one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of gaming media for the winning opening of the game Are paid out by the payout means. In addition, this game machine makes a predetermined determination triggered by the establishment of a start condition, and gives a predetermined game value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result. In the processing executed by the change processing executing means, the probability that the predetermined result is obtained is changed among a plurality of levels. The processing by the change processing execution means is executed by the startup means on condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. Here, the predetermined condition includes that the first operating means is in the first state. The change processing executing means has a detecting means for detecting that the first operating means is changed from the second state to the first state, and the detecting means causes the second state of the first operating means to be changed. When the change from to the first state is detected, the level of probability is changed. On the other hand, the previous state of the first operating means is stored in the storage means, and the detecting means refers to the previous state of the first operating means stored in the storage means and the state of the first operating means at that time. Then, it is detected whether the first operating means is changed from the second state to the first state. Then, the first state is stored in the storage means as the previous state of the first operation means after the power is turned on and before the detection by the detection means is performed for the first time. Thus, when the power is turned on, the first operating means is brought into the first state in order to satisfy the predetermined condition, and the first operating means is kept in the first state until the detection by the detecting means is performed for the first time. However, the first state is stored as the previous state of the first operating means in the storage means from the time the power is turned on until the detection by the detection means is performed for the first time. In the detection performed by the detection unit, it can be suppressed that the first operation unit is detected to be changed from the second state to the first state. Therefore, even if the first operating means is set to the first state in order to satisfy the predetermined condition, it is possible to prevent the probability level from being accidentally changed based on it, so that the probability can be suitably changed. There is an effect that the machine can be provided.

In gaming machine Chi 1,
The storage means stores information used for controlling a game, and can hold the information even when the power is cut off,
The gaming machine chip 2, wherein the first operation means is an instruction to erase the information stored in the storage means when the first state is brought into the first state.

The gaming machine chi 2 has the following effects in addition to the effects of the gaming machine chi 1. That is, the storage means stores the information used for controlling the game, and can retain the information even when the power is turned off. The first operation means stores the information in the storage means when the first state is set. It is an instruction to erase the stored information. Thereby, the probability level can be changed by using the first operation means for instructing the erasing of the information stored in the storage means, so that the storage means is not provided with a dedicated operation means for changing the probability level. There is an effect that the probability level can also be changed by using the first operating means for instructing deletion of the information stored in.

<Group>
A game area with multiple winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the game area,
A prize detecting means which is provided for each prize hole and detects a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize hole,
When it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won in any prize hole, a predetermined number of games for the prize hole in which the game medium is won A payout means for paying out the medium,
A gaming machine that performs a predetermined determination triggered by establishment of a start condition, and gives a predetermined game value to a player when the determination is a predetermined result,
Change processing execution means for executing processing for changing the probability of a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels,
Startup means for executing the processing by the change processing execution means on condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on,
A storage unit that stores information used for controlling a game and can hold the information even when the power is cut off,
When it is determined that the information stored in the storage means is abnormal, the start-up means sets an infinite loop state,
The gaming machine is
The gaming machine tool 1 is provided with means for executing a process of monitoring power-off even in the infinite loop state.

According to the gaming machine tool 1, the game medium is launched by the launching means to the game area provided with a plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the winning detection means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won in one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of gaming media for the winning opening of the game Are paid out by the payout means. In addition, this game machine makes a predetermined determination triggered by the establishment of a start condition, and gives a predetermined game value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result. In the processing executed by the change processing executing means, the probability that the predetermined result is obtained is changed among a plurality of levels. The processing by the change processing execution means is executed by the startup means on condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. Further, the information used for controlling the game is stored in the storage means, and the information is retained even when the power is cut off. Here, when the startup means determines that the information stored in the storage means is abnormal, it is set to an infinite loop state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being played at an abnormal probability level because the probability level changed before the power was turned off was not correctly retained. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability. On the other hand, even in the infinite loop state, the processing for monitoring the power interruption is executed. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the operation of the gaming machine from becoming further abnormal by properly performing the processing related to power-off.

In gaming machine tool 1,
The gaming machine 2 further comprising means for executing a process of updating a random number used in the predetermined determination even in the infinite loop state.

According to the gaming machine tool 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine tool 1, the following effect is achieved. That is, even in the infinite loop state, the updating process of the random number used for the predetermined determination is executed. This has the effect that the random number update process can be continued as long as the power is kept on.

In gaming machine Ts1 or Ts2,
The game machine tool 3 according to claim 3, wherein the start-up means includes an informing means for informing that the predetermined condition is satisfied and the power is turned on when the infinite loop state is established.

According to the gaming machine tsu 3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine tsu 1 or tsu 2, the following effects are produced. That is, when the start-up means brings the loop into the infinite loop state, the notification means gives a notification for instructing to turn on the power by satisfying a predetermined condition. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to cause the power to be turned on after a predetermined condition is satisfied.

<Te group>
A game area with multiple winning openings,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the game area,
A prize detecting means which is provided for each prize hole and detects a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize hole,
When it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won in any prize hole, a predetermined number of games for the prize hole in which the game medium is won A payout means for paying out the medium,
A gaming machine that performs a predetermined determination triggered by establishment of a start condition, and gives a predetermined game value to a player when the determination is a predetermined result,
Change processing execution means for executing processing for changing the probability of a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels,
A startup unit that executes the process by the change process execution unit on condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on,
The start-up means is provided with means for performing processing for non-execution of game control when it is determined to be in a predetermined state, and notifying the external device of that fact. Amusement machine TE 1.

According to the gaming machine te 1, the game medium is launched by the launching means to the game area provided with a plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the winning detection means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won in one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of gaming media for the winning opening of the game Are paid out by the payout means. In addition, this game machine makes a predetermined determination triggered by the establishment of a start condition, and gives a predetermined game value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result. In the processing executed by the change processing executing means, the probability that the predetermined result is obtained is changed among a plurality of levels. The processing by the change processing execution means is executed by the startup means on condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. Here, in the startup means, when it is determined that the game is in a predetermined state, a process for not executing the control related to the game is performed, and the external device is notified of that. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being played at an abnormal probability level due to the gaming machine being in a predetermined state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability. On the other hand, since it is notified to the external device, there is an effect that the person related to the hall or the like can take some measures against it.

In gaming machine te 1,
In the case where the predetermined state is that the second predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition when the power is turned on when the process by the change process executing means is being executed when the power was last turned off. A gaming machine te 2 characterized in that it is established.

According to the gaming machine te2, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine te1. That is, in the case where the process by the change process executing means is being executed when the power was last turned off, and when the second predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. Performs processing for non-execution of control related to the game, and notifies the external device to that effect. As a result, when the process by the change process executing means is being executed when the power was last turned off, and the second predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. Has an effect that it is possible to cause the power to be turned on after a predetermined condition is satisfied.

In gaming machine te 1 or te 2,
A storage unit that stores information used for controlling a game and can hold the information even when the power is cut off,
The game machine te 3 wherein the predetermined state is a state in which information stored in the storage means is abnormal.

According to the gaming machine te 3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine te 1 or te 2, the following effect is produced. That is, the information used for controlling the game is stored in the storage means, and the information is retained even while the power is cut off. When it is determined that the information stored in the storage means is abnormal, a process for non-execution of the game control is performed, and the external device is notified of that fact. As a result, when it is determined that the information stored in the storage means is abnormal while the processing by the change processing execution means is being executed when the power supply was last turned off, some countermeasure is taken. The effect is that you can

<Group>
A game area with a number of winning holes,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the game area,
A prize detecting means which is provided for each prize hole and detects a prize of the game medium to a corresponding prize hole,
When it is detected by the prize detecting means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won in any prize hole, a predetermined number of games for the prize hole in which the game medium is won A payout means for paying out the medium,
A gaming machine that performs a predetermined determination triggered by establishment of a start condition, and gives a predetermined game value to a player when the determination is a predetermined result,
Change processing execution means for executing processing for changing the probability of a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels,
Confirmation processing execution means for executing processing that enables confirmation of the set probability level,
If the predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, the process by the change process executing means is executed, and when the power is turned on, the second predetermined different from the predetermined condition is executed. Start-up means for executing the processing by the confirmation processing execution means on condition that the condition is satisfied;
An interrupt processing means for performing at least a process of monitoring whether or not the power supply is cut off, based on an interrupt generated every predetermined time;
An interrupt permitting unit that permits the interrupt while the change process executing unit executes the process and the confirmation process executing unit executes the process. ..

According to the gaming machine T1, the game medium is launched by the launching means to the game area provided with a plurality of winning openings. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting the winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the winning detection means that the game medium launched by the launching means has won in one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of gaming media for the winning opening of the game Are paid out by the payout means. In addition, this game machine makes a predetermined determination triggered by the establishment of a start condition, and gives a predetermined game value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result. In the processing executed by the change processing executing means, the probability that the predetermined result is obtained is changed among a plurality of levels. Further, the set probability level can be confirmed by the processing executed by the confirmation processing executing means. Here, the processing by the change processing executing means is on condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, and the processing by the confirmation processing executing means is predetermined by the power being turned on. It is executed by the startup means on condition that a second predetermined condition different from the condition is satisfied. Further, the interrupt processing means performs a process of monitoring at least whether or not the power supply is cut off, based on an interrupt generated every predetermined time. The interrupt permission unit permits the interrupt while the change process execution unit executes the process and the confirmation process execution unit executes the process. As a result, it is possible to monitor whether or not the power has been cut off while the processing by the change processing execution means is being executed, and while the processing by the confirmation processing execution means is being executed. Such processing can be executed. Therefore, when the power is turned on again, the processing corresponding to the situation where the power is cut off is executed while the processing by the change processing execution means is executed or while the processing by the confirmation processing execution means is executed. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability.

In gaming machine to 1,
A gaming machine 2 comprising an interrupt prohibiting means for prohibiting the interruption when the processing by the change processing executing means ends or the processing by the confirmation processing executing means ends.

According to the gaming machine to 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine to 1, the following effects are produced. That is, when the processing by the change processing executing means ends or the processing by the confirmation processing executing means ends, the interrupt prohibiting means prohibits the interrupt. Therefore, in the startup means, it is possible to prevent the interrupt processing from being unnecessarily executed by the interrupt processing means.

<Ichi group: Protective cover that covers the setting key when the inner frame is closed>
Conventionally, a control device provided on the back side of a gaming machine has contents of a game value given to a player according to a game result (a winning probability and/or a hit type, etc., hereinafter referred to as “setting contents”). A setting means capable of changing the setting is provided, and the setting contents of the gaming machine are set in a plurality of steps (for example, six steps of setting values "1" to "6") based on the operation of the setting means by a person related to the hall. It is configured to be changeable.

The setting means is provided so as to be exposed in the rear surface direction of the gaming machine when the opening/closing body is closed with respect to the support body, and the person in charge of the hall or the like unlocks the opening/closing body to support the opening/closing body. When rotated with respect to the body, the setting means is configured to be exposed in the front surface direction of the gaming machine with the rotation of the support body. With this configuration, when a person involved in the hall wants to change the setting contents of the gaming machine, by rotating the opening/closing body, it becomes possible to immediately insert the key for changing the setting into the setting means, It is configured so that the setting change work of the gaming machine can be performed quickly.

In addition, the hall is provided with an island facility including an automatic sphere feeder in a closed predetermined space. By attaching a support for a gaming machine to both sides of the island facility in the long side direction, the island facility can be installed. It is configured to be able to install a plurality of gaming machines. Then, the person related to the hall, etc. unlocks the opening/closing body and the support body of each gaming machine installed in the island equipment outside the business hours of the hall, and opens and closes the support body (island equipment). Open it and perform setting work and maintenance work for each gaming machine.

However, if the setting means is configured to be exposed on the back surface side of the gaming machine, for example, in a situation where the gaming machine is installed on the long side of the island facility 1 of the hall, the length of the gaming machine installed is long. If the opening/closing body of another gaming machine installed on the other long side (that is, the rear side of the gaming machine) that is not the side is opened for some reason (for example, cheating), the game is played. The setting means provided so as to be exposed on the back side of the machine can be directly operated. As a result, even when the opening/closing body of the gaming machine is not open, the setting means of the gaming machine can be directly operated by opening the gaming machine on the back side of the gaming machine, and the setting means There is a risk that the setting contents will be changed by operating the key illegally, causing an unexpected disadvantage in the hall.

Here, like a slot machine, a structure in which the entire back side of the gaming machine is covered with a casing structure to prevent fraudulent acts against the setting means of the control device from the back side of the gaming machine is conceivable. Unlike the slot machine, the gaming machine of (1) needs to supply game balls from the upper side of the island facility and to discharge balls (out balls). Therefore, if the back side of the gaming machine is covered with a casing structure, a complicated structure for replenishing and discharging the game balls is required, and the manufacturing cost increases due to the casing structure and the supplying and discharging structure. There is a risk of doing it.

Also, in the island facility, when considering the wiring connection with the card sanding device arranged adjacent to the left side of the game machine and the connection wiring with the power supply, the back structure of the game machine, especially the right side as viewed from the back side of the game machine ( It is desirable that the structure (on the left side when viewed from the front) be configured to be open to some extent and be easily connected by wiring to the above-described device or the like.

The invention of the Ichi group is made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the security performance of the gaming machine.

An opening/closing body (for example, an inner frame 12) that is supported to be openable and closable with respect to a support body (for example, the outer frame 11),
A locking device (for example, a cylinder lock 20) for locking the opening/closing body and the support,
A game body (for example, a game board 13) having a game area mounted on the opening/closing body and provided with a ball entering means (for example, a first starting opening 64a) into which a game ball can enter.
Launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area (for example, a ball launching unit 112a),
Lottery information acquisition means (for example, reserved ball storage area 203b) that acquires lottery information based on the game balls fired by the firing means having entered the ball entrance means,
Determination means for determining the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means (for example, fluctuation start processing (S307)),
A game machine provided with a game value giving unit (for example, a large opening opening/closing process (S103)) for giving a predetermined game value to a player based on the specific judgment result derived by the judging unit. ,
A setting unit (for example, a setting key 501) capable of setting and changing the probability of deriving the specific determination result by the determination unit,
The support is
The setting means is made difficult to operate when the opening/closing body is locked to the support body by the locking device, while the setting means can be operated when the opening/closing body is released from the support body. The game machine I 0, which is provided with a protection means (for example, a protection cover member 140).

According to the game machine I 0, the opening/closing body is supported so as to be openable/closable with respect to the support body, and the opening/closing body and the support body are locked by the locking device. Then, a game area is formed in which the game body is mounted on the opening/closing body, and the game body is provided with a ball entering means capable of entering a game ball. Further, based on the fact that the launch means launches a game ball toward the game area, and the game ball launched by the launch means enters the ball entry means, the lottery information acquisition means acquires lottery information. Then, the determination means determines the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, and based on the determination result being derived by the determination means, the game value imparting means imparts a predetermined game value to the player. To be done. Here, the setting unit is configured so that the probability that the determination result by the determination unit is derived can be changed. Then, by the protection means provided on the support, when the opening and closing body is locked to the support by the locking device, while making the setting means difficult to operate, when the opening and closing body is released from the support, The setting means is operable. Thus, when the opening/closing body is opened from the support, the setting means can be easily operated, while when the opening/closing body is locked to the support, it is difficult to operate the setting means by the protection means. Can be Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the security performance on the back surface side of the gaming machine when the opening/closing body is locked to the support body.

In game machine I 0,
The support is
Formed by combining multiple plates,
The protection means is
A gaming machine Ichi, which is attached to any one of the plates (for example, the right side plate 11d) in a cantilever shape.

According to the game machine Ichi 1, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the game machine Ichi 0. That is, a support is formed by combining a plurality of plates, and the protection means is cantilevered and attached to any one of the plates. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act on the setting means with a simple structure and to improve the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine at low cost.

The "cantilevered beam shape" is a beam shape in which one end of the protection means is fixed and the other end is not fixed and is in a free state.

In gaming machine Ichi 0 or Ichi,
Control means for controlling the game (for example, main controller 110),
Storage means for storing the control means (for example, the board box 100),
The setting means,
Provided in the control means,
The storage means is
A setting unit (for example, the setting unit 100d) in which the setting unit is located,
An exposed portion that exposes part of the setting means from the setting portion toward the outside of the storage means (for example, a portion in which the key hole of the setting key 501 in the setting portion 100d is exposed);
A recess for recessing the exposed portion from the outermost surface side of the storage means to the control means side (for example, the setting portion side wall 100e and the setting portion bottom surface 100f),
The protection means is
The gaming machine 1 is provided with a protrusion (for example, a cover-side protrusion 172) that enters the recess when the opening/closing body is locked with respect to the support.

According to the game machine Ichi 2, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the game machine Ichi 0 or Ichi. That is, the control means controls the game, the storing means stores the control means, and the control means is provided with the setting means. Here, the setting unit is located in the setting unit provided in the storing unit, the exposing unit exposes a part of the setting unit from the setting unit to the outside of the storing unit, and the recess forms the exposing unit in the storing unit. It is formed at a position recessed from the outermost surface side to the control means side. Then, when the opening/closing body is locked to the support, the protrusion provided on the protection means is configured to enter the recess. Thus, when the opening/closing body is locked to the support, the protrusion of the protection means is inserted into the recess of the storage means, and the setting means exposed from the storage means is covered by the protrusion to open/close the opening/closing body. It is possible to make it difficult to access the setting means from the back side of the gaming machine when locking the body. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act on the setting means with a simple structure and to improve the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine at a low cost.

In game machine I2,
The protrusion is
A gaming machine Ichi 3, which is formed so as to surround and close the setting means.

According to the game machine Ichi 3, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the game machine Ichi 2. That is, the projecting portion surrounds and closes the setting means. Thus, when the opening/closing body is locked to the support, the protrusion of the protection means is inserted into the recess of the storage means to surround and close the setting means exposed from the storage means. By covering with, it is possible to make it difficult to access the entire setting means from the back side of the gaming machine when the opening/closing body is locked. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act on the setting means with a simple structure and to improve the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine at a low cost.

In gaming machine Ichi 2 or Ichi 3,
The recess is
A recess side wall formed by recessing from the outermost surface of the storage means (for example, a setting portion side wall 100e),
A bottom surface of the recess that extends from the side wall of the recess to form the bottom surface of the recess, and the exposed portion is formed in a part of the bottom surface (the bottom surface of the setting portion 100f);
A recess-side protrusion (for example, a case-side protrusion 100g) that protrudes in a square shape so as to surround the exposed portion from the bottom surface of the recess toward the protection means,
The protrusion is
The gaming machine ic 4, wherein when the opening/closing body is locked to the support, the opening/closing body enters a space formed by the recess side wall and the recess side protrusion.

According to the game machine Ichi 4, in addition to the effect produced by the game machine Ichi 2 or Ichi 3, the following effect is produced. That is, the recess side wall of the recess is formed so as to be recessed from the outermost surface of the storage means, and the recess bottom surface of the recess section is also extended from the recess side wall to form the bottom surface of the recess and the exposed portion is formed in a part thereof. Similarly, the recess-side protruding portion of the recess is protruded from the bottom surface of the recess toward the protection means in a square shape so as to surround the exposed portion. When the opening/closing body is locked with respect to the support, the protrusion is configured to enter the space formed by the recess sidewall and the recess-side protrusion. As a result, when the opening/closing body is closed, the portion where the setting means is disposed is blocked by the recess-side protrusion of the storage means, making it difficult to access the setting means, and further, the recess wall portion of the storage means and the protection means. The projections of the two make it difficult to access the setting means. With this configuration, the crime prevention property of the setting means is enhanced, and there is no room for wires or the like to enter, so that there is an effect that it is possible to prevent an illegal act against the setting means.

In any one of gaming machine one 2 to one 4,
The protection means is
An attachment portion (for example, a cover attachment portion 150) attached to the plate body,
An upright portion (for example, upright portion 160) extending from the attachment portion to the back side of the gaming machine,
A cover portion (for example, a cover portion 170) extending from the upright portion to the setting unit side and having the protruding portion formed thereon,
The standing portion is
A game machine Ichi 5, which is provided with a bending portion (for example, a bending portion 154) capable of bending based on the impact when the protection means is impacted.

According to the game machine Ichi 5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects produced by the game machines Ichi 2 to Ichi 4. That is, the protection means is attached to the plate body by the attachment portion, the standing portion extends from the attachment portion to the back side of the gaming machine, and the cover portion extends from the standing portion to the setting means side. A protrusion is formed. Further, the bending portion provided in the upright portion is configured to be able to bend based on the impact when the protection means is impacted. Thus, when the opening/closing body is closed, even if the storage means or the like comes into contact with the protection means due to the momentum at the time of closing and a shock is applied, the bending portion bends to absorb the shock, thereby protecting the protection means. This has the effect of preventing damage.

In the gaming machine Ichi 5,
The cover is
At least along the outer shape of the cover portion, a rear protruding rib (for example, a cover outer rib 174) that protrudes to the back surface side of the gaming machine, is provided.

According to the game machine Ichi 6, in addition to the effect produced by the game machine Ichi 5, the following effect is produced. That is, the rear projecting rib of the cover part is projected to the back side of the gaming machine along at least the outer shape of the cover part. As a result, the rear protruding ribs increase the rigidity of the cover portion, and in the case of an illegal act by the wire from the back surface of the gaming machine, the wire is directed from the back surface side of the cover portion to above or below the cover portion. When the wire is transmitted, the wire collides with the rearward protruding rib, which has the effect of preventing the wire from entering.

In the gaming machine Ichi 6,
The rear protruding rib is
A game machine Ichi 7, which is provided on the back side of the game machine of the setting means.

According to the game machine Ichi 7, in addition to the effect produced by the game machine Ichi 6, the following effect is produced. That is, a rearward projecting rib is provided on the back side of the game machine of the setting means. Accordingly, by forming the rearward projecting rib in the cover portion at the position corresponding to the setting means, it is possible to make it difficult to form a hole or the like in the cover portion, and improve the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine. The effect is that you can.

In gaming machine one 5 to one 7,
The standing portion is
At least along the outer shape of the standing portion, a lateral protruding rib (for example, an upper outer cover portion 162b or a lower outer cover portion 163b) that protrudes to the lateral side of the gaming machine is provided, and the gaming machine Ichi 8.

According to the gaming machine Ichi 8, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines Ichi 5 to Ichi 7. That is, the lateral protruding rib of the standing portion is projected to the lateral side of the gaming machine at least along the outer shape of the standing portion. As a result, the side protruding ribs increase the rigidity of the standing portion, and in the case of an illegal act by the wire from the side of the gaming machine, the wire is above or below the standing portion from the side surface side of the standing portion. There is an effect that the wire can be prevented from entering by hitting the side protruding rib when the wire is transmitted to the wire.

In gaming machine Ichi 5 to Ichi 8,
The control means is
Arranged below the central part of the gaming machine,
The standing portion and the cover portion,
An upper inner cover portion (for example, an upper inner cover portion 162a) extending from the upper portion of the upright portion and the cover portion toward the inside of the gaming machine,
A lower inner cover portion (for example, a lower inner cover portion 163a) extending from the lower portion of the upright portion and the cover portion toward the inside of the gaming machine,
The lower inner cover portion is
The game machine Ichi 9, which is formed in a larger area than the upper inner cover portion.

According to the gaming machine Ichi 9, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines Ichi 5 to Ichi 8. That is, the control means is disposed below the central portion of the gaming machine, the upper inner cover portion is formed to extend from the upper portion of the standing portion and the cover portion toward the inner side of the gaming machine, and the lower inner cover portion is formed. The upper portion of the standing portion and the cover portion is formed to extend toward the inside of the gaming machine. The area of the lower inner cover portion is formed larger than the area of the upper inner cover portion.

Conventionally, since the control means is disposed below the central portion of the gaming machine, it is easier to access the control means from above the gaming machine from below when fraudulent acts are performed. Therefore, in many cases, a person who conducts an illegal act with respect to the control means conducts an illegal act by intruding a wire or the like from the lower side of the back surface of the gaming machine. Therefore, in order to prevent the above-mentioned fraudulent acts, the area of the lower inner cover portion is formed to be large, and the lower protective cover portion can minimize the gap between the control means and the protective means. There is an effect that the security performance on the side can be improved.

In any one of the gaming machine I 0 to I 9,
The protection means is
A game machine Ichi 10, which is formed of a transparent material or a translucent material.

According to the game machine Ichi 10, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the game machine Ichi 0 to Ichi 9. That is, the protection means is formed of a transparent material or a translucent material. With this, when the opening/closing body is closed, it is possible to confirm the changing means from the back side of the gaming machine through the transparent or semi-transparent protection means, and it is possible to detect fraud or malfunction of the changing means at an early stage. There is an effect.

<Second group: The cover that protects the control means is non-detachable from the back side>
Conventionally, a setting means for performing various settings of a game is arranged on the back side of a gaming machine, and a player cannot touch the setting means when the opening/closing body on which the setting means is mounted is closed. It is configured. On the other hand, a person related to the hall opens the opening/closing body to perform various maintenance work and setting work for the setting means outside the business hours of the hall (for example, Patent Document 1 (JP-A-2015-024202)).

However, with respect to such a gaming machine, there is a possibility that a fraudulent act may be performed on the setting means from the back side of the gaming machine even when the opening/closing body is closed, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of the second group is made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a fraudulent act against the setting means from the back side of the gaming machine.

An opening/closing body (for example, an inner frame 12) that is supported to be openable and closable with respect to a support body (for example, the outer frame 11),
A locking device (for example, a cylinder lock 20) for locking the opening/closing body and the support,
Setting means (for example, a setting key 501) mounted on the opening/closing body for performing various settings of the game,
Protecting means (for example, protective cover member 140) for protecting the back side of the game machine of the setting means,
Difficulty attaching/detaching means for making it difficult to attach/detach the protective means from the gaming machine (for example, with the mounting surface 151 of the protective cover member 140 abutting the inner wall of the right side plate 11d, a fixing screw is attached from the outside of the right side plate 11d 11g Luo), and a game machine 2 characterized by having.

According to the gaming machine 20, the opening/closing body is openably/closably supported with respect to the support body, the opening/closing body and the support body are locked by the locking device, and various setting of the game is performed by the setting means mounted on the opening/closing body. Done. Then, the protection means protects the back side of the game machine of the setting means. Here, the protection means is configured to be difficult to attach or detach from the gaming machine by the attachment/detachment means. Thereby, the protection means for protecting the back side of the gaming machine of the setting means for performing various settings of the game is configured to be difficult to attach or detach from the gaming machine by the attachment/detachment difficult means, and the illegal action from the back side of the game machine to the setting means The effect is that it can be prevented.

At the gaming machine 0,
The protection means is
Attached to the support,
The detachable means is
A gaming machine 1 characterized in that, when the opening/closing body and the support body are locked by the locking device, the protection means is configured to be difficult to attach or detach from the support body.

The gaming machine 2 has the following effects in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 0. That is, when the protection means is attached to the support body and the opening/closing body and the support body are locked by the locking device, the protection means is configured to be difficult to attach or detach from the support body by the attachment/detachment difficulty means.

Conventionally, in a hall where a game machine is installed, an island facility having an automatic supply device for game balls and the like is provided in a closed predetermined space, and a support for the game machine is provided on both sides in the long side direction of the island facility. By installing, multiple game machines can be installed on the island equipment. Then, the person related to the hall, etc. unlocks the opening/closing body and the support body of each gaming machine installed in the island equipment outside the business hours of the hall, and opens and closes the support body (island equipment). Open it and perform setting work and maintenance work for each gaming machine.

However, if the setting means is configured to be exposed on the back surface side of the gaming machine, for example, in a situation where the gaming machine is installed on the long side of the island facility 1 of the hall, the length of the gaming machine installed is long. If the opening/closing body of another gaming machine installed on the other long side (that is, the rear side of the gaming machine) that is not the side is opened for some reason (for example, cheating), the game is played. The setting means provided so as to be exposed on the back side of the machine can be directly operated. As a result, even when the opening/closing body of the gaming machine is not open, the setting means of the gaming machine can be directly operated by opening the gaming machine on the back side of the gaming machine, and the setting means There is a risk that the setting contents will be changed by operating the key illegally, causing an unexpected disadvantage in the hall.

Therefore, according to the gaming machine second 1, when the protection means is attached to the support body and the opening/closing body and the support body are locked by the locking device, the protection means is difficult to attach/detach from the support body by the attachment/detachment difficulty means. Non-detachable. Thereby, even if the gaming machine on the back side of the gaming machine is illegally opened, the setting means provided on the back side of the gaming machine is protected by the protecting means, and the protecting means is played when the opening/closing body is locked. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on the setting means by making it difficult to attach or detach from the back side of the machine.

In the gaming machine 2 or 1
The protection means is
An attachment portion (for example, attachment surface 151) attached to the plate body,
The support is
A plurality of plate bodies (for example, an upper plate 11a, a lower plate 11b, a left side plate 11c and a right side plate 11d) are formed in combination,
The plate is
A side part located on the side of the gaming machine,
On the front side of the gaming machine of the side portion, a front portion extendingly formed toward the inside of the gaming machine,
A rear side of the side portion on the rear side of the game machine, the rear portion extending toward the inside of the game machine;
The mounting portion is
A gaming machine 2 which is attached to the inner wall side of the side portion.

The gaming machine 2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine 0 or 2. That is, the protection means is attached to the plate by the attachment portion of the protection means. Moreover, a support is formed by combining a plurality of plate bodies. Then, on the plate body, a side portion located on the side surface of the gaming machine, a front portion extending toward the inside of the gaming machine on the front side of the gaming machine of the side portion, and a gaming machine of the side portion. On the rear side, a rear portion extending toward the inside of the gaming machine is provided. Then, the protection means is attached to the inner wall of the side portion. Thereby, by attaching the mounting portion of the protection means to the inner wall of the portion surrounded by the front portion, the side portion, and the rear portion of the plate body, from the front side of the gaming machine or the rear side of the gaming machine to the mounting portion of the protecting means. Can be made difficult to access. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fraudulent act against the setting means by making the protection means difficult or impossible to attach and detach from the back side of the gaming machine.

In game machine 2-2,
Part or all of the plate,
A gaming machine 2 characterized by being formed of a metal material (for example, made of aluminum) having a hardness higher than that of wood.

The gaming machine 2 has the following effects in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 2. That is, a part or the whole of the plate body is formed of a metal material having a hardness higher than that of wood. With this, by attaching the mounting portion of the protection means to the inner wall of the portion surrounded by the front portion, the side portion, and the rear portion of the plate body formed of a metal material having a higher height than the wood, the front side of the game machine or the game machine. It is possible to make it difficult to access the mounting portion of the protection means from the rear side of the machine. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fraudulent act against the setting means by making the protection means difficult or impossible to attach and detach from the back side of the gaming machine.

In the gaming machine 2 or 2
The side portion is
A side insertion hole (for example, a cover upper mounting hole 11e or a cover lower mounting hole 11f) into which a fixing member (for example, a fixing screw 11g) capable of fixing the protection means can be inserted into the support,
The mounting portion is
A mounting insertion hole (for example, an upper mounting hole 152 or a lower mounting hole 153) which is provided corresponding to the side insertion hole and into which the fixing member can be inserted,
The fixing member is
A gaming machine 2 which is inserted into the lateral insertion hole and the mounting insertion hole from the outside of the gaming machine of the lateral portion.

The gaming machine 2 has the following effects in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 2 or 2. That is, the fixing member capable of fixing the protection means to the support can be inserted into the side insertion hole provided in the side portion. Further, the fixing member can be inserted by the mounting insertion hole provided in the mounting portion corresponding to the side insertion hole. Then, the fixing member is inserted into the side insertion hole and the attachment insertion hole from the outside of the gaming machine in the side portion.

Conventionally, a game machine is installed without a gap in an island facility of a hall so that a player cannot access the back side of the game machine from the front side of the game machine. Also, on the side of the gaming machine installed in the island facility, there is a card sanding device that can insert a card that stores the amount of money used for playing the game, and this card sanding device also creates a gap with the gaming machine. It is arranged so that it does not exist.

Therefore, by inserting the fixing member from the outer side of the gaming machine to fix the plate body and the protection means, and installing the gaming machine in the island facility in that state, a gap is created in the portion where the fixing member is installed. You can avoid it. Therefore, it is possible to prevent access to the fixing member that secures the protection means to the gaming machine and prevent the protection means from being attached to and detached from the gaming machine, and to improve the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine. There is an effect.

In any of gaming machines 2-2,
The protection means is
An extending portion (for example, a bending portion 154) extending from the mounting portion to the rear side of the gaming machine is provided,
The extension is
A gaming machine second 5, which is formed in a shape along (abutting against) the inner wall shape of the rear portion.

The gaming machine 2 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 2 to 4. That is, the extending portion provided in the protection means is extended from the mounting portion to the rear side of the gaming machine, and the shape of the extending portion is formed in a shape along (abutting against) the inner wall shape of the rear portion. It Thereby, the mounting portion of the protection means is covered by the rear portion of the plate from the back side of the gaming machine, and the extended portion is formed in a shape along (abutting against) the inner wall shape of the rear portion, It is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the side portion where the fixing member is attached and the attachment portion. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the protection means from being attached to and detached from the gaming machine, and to improve the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine.

In gaming machine 2-5,
The extension portion is
A game machine 2 (6) comprising a flexible portion (for example, the bending portion 154 is made of resin having an elastic force) capable of elastically deforming when an impact is applied to the protection means.

According to the gaming machine 2, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine 2. That is, the flexure portion of the extension portion is configured to be elastically deformable when an impact is applied to the protection means. Thus, for example, when the opening/closing body is closed, even if a part of the opening/closing body comes into contact with the protection means and an impact is applied due to the momentum at the time of closing, the bending portion is elastically bent to absorb the impact. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the protection means from being damaged.

In any of the gaming machines 2 to 6,
A game body (for example, a game board 13) having a game area mounted on the opening/closing body and provided with a ball entering means (for example, a first starting opening 64a) into which a game ball can enter.
Launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area (for example, a ball launching unit 112a),
And a control means (for example, main controller 110) for controlling a game,
The control means is
Lottery information acquisition means (for example, reserved ball storage area 203b) that acquires lottery information based on the game balls fired by the firing means having entered the ball entrance means,
Determination means for determining the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means (for example, fluctuation start processing (S307)),
A game value giving means (for example, a large opening opening/closing process (S103)) for giving a predetermined game value to the player based on the specific judgment result derived by the judging means,
The setting means,
8. A gaming machine 2 which is configured so that the probability of deriving the specific determination result by the determining means can be changed.

The gaming machine 2 has the following effects in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 2 to 6. That is, a game area is formed in which the game body is mounted on the opening/closing body, and the game body is provided with a ball entering means capable of entering a game ball. In addition, the launch means launches a game ball toward the game area, and the control means controls the game. Then, the lottery information is acquired by the lottery information acquisition means provided in the control means on the basis that the game ball shot by the launch means has entered the ball entry means. Then, the determination means also provided in the control means determines the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, and based on the determination result being derived by the determination means, the game value provided in the control means. A given game value is given to the player by the giving means. Here, the setting unit is configured so that the probability that the determination result by the determination unit is derived can be changed. As a result, the protection means that can change the probability of the specific determination result and protects the back side of the gaming machine of the setting means that affects the result of the game is configured to be difficult to attach or detach from the gaming machine by the detachable means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent an illegal act from the back side of the game machine with respect to the setting means such that the setting content of the game machine is illegally changed.

In any of the gaming machines 2 to 7,
The protection means is
9. A game machine 2 which is made of a transparent material or a semi-transparent material.

According to the gaming machine 2-8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 2-0 to 7, the following effects are produced. That is, the protection means is formed of a transparent material or a translucent material. With this, when the opening/closing body is closed, it is possible to confirm the changing means from the back side of the gaming machine through the transparent or semi-transparent protection means, and it is possible to detect fraud or malfunction of the changing means at an early stage. There is an effect.

<Reference group: Settings can be changed/checked regardless of whether the inner frame is open>
Conventionally, a control device provided on the back side of a gaming machine has contents of a game value given to a player according to a game result (a winning probability and/or a hit type, etc., hereinafter referred to as “setting contents”). A setting means capable of changing the setting is provided, and the setting contents of the gaming machine are set in a plurality of steps (for example, six steps of setting values "1" to "6") based on the operation of the setting means by a person related to the hall. It is configured to be changeable.

In such a gaming machine, in order to improve the security performance, it is determined that setting is not possible when the opening/closing body equipped with the setting means is closed by the support, and the opening/closing body is released from the support, so that the setting means is set. When it is determined that the game machine can be operated from the front, the setting by the setting means is permitted. With this configuration, in the situation where the opening/closing body is closed with respect to the support body, even if the setting means is illegally operated by an illegal act from the back side of the gaming machine, the setting of the gaming machine is set. It cannot be changed (for example, Patent Document 1 (JP-A-2015-024202)).

However, when deciding whether to change the settings of the gaming machine based on the opening mode of the opening/closing body, if the opening detection means for detecting the opening of the opening/closing body cannot detect the opening state due to a failure or the like, the opening/closing body opens. It becomes impossible to change the settings that are possible based on the fact that Therefore, due to an erroneous detection of the opening detection means of the opening/closing body, it is not possible to change the setting, which is an important game element of the gaming machine, and it may not be possible to execute the business form expected by the hall.

The invention of the group has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the security performance of the gaming machine.

An opening/closing body (for example, an inner frame 12) that is supported to be openable and closable with respect to a support body (for example, the outer frame 11),
A locking device (for example, a cylinder lock 20) for locking the opening/closing body and the support,
An opening/closing detection means (for example, an inner frame opening switch 208g1) for detecting the opened/closed state of the opening/closing body with respect to the support,
When the locking of the opening/closing body and the support body by the locking device is released and the opening/closing body is in an open state, a first operation means (for example, a setting key 501) that can be operated from the front side of the gaming machine. When,
Changeability determination means (for example, S4412: Yes in the startup process) that determines whether or not to shift to a changeable state in which the degree of advantage for the player can be changed when the first operation means is operated in a predetermined manner. ,,
The changeability determination means,
Regardless of the detection result of the opening/closing detection means, a changeable state transition means (for example, S4407: Yes of start-up processing) that transitions to the changeable state when the first operation means is operated by the predetermined operation, A game machine that is equipped with 0.

According to the gaming machine reference 0, the opening/closing body is supported so as to be openable/closable with respect to the support body, and the opening/closing body and the support body are locked by the locking device. The open/close state of the open/close body with respect to the support is detected by the open/close detecting means. Further, when the locking of the opening/closing body and the support body by the locking device is released and the opening/closing body is in the open state, the first operating means can be operated from the front side of the gaming machine. Then, when the first operation means is operated in a predetermined manner, the changeability determination means determines whether or not to shift to a changeable state in which the degree of advantage for the player can be changed. Here, regardless of the detection result of the open/close detection means, when the first operation means is operated for a predetermined time, the changeable state transition means provided in the changeability determination means transitions to the changeable state. That is, as a condition for shifting to the changeable state, it is possible to shift to the changeable state when a predetermined operation is performed on the first operating means without judging the detection result of the opening/closing detecting means. Therefore, even if the opening detection means for detecting the opening/closing of the opening/closing body cannot detect the opening state due to a failure or the like, the setting change, which is an important gaming element of the gaming machine, can be changed, and the hall is assumed. There is an effect that the existing business form can be surely executed.

An opening/closing body (for example, an inner frame 12) that is supported to be openable and closable with respect to a support body (for example, the outer frame 11),
A locking device (for example, a cylinder lock 20) for locking the opening/closing body and the support,
An opening/closing detection means (for example, an inner frame opening switch 208g1) for detecting the opened/closed state of the opening/closing body with respect to the support,
When the locking of the opening/closing body and the support body by the locking device is released and the opening/closing body is in an open state, a first operation means (for example, a setting key 501) that can be operated from the front side of the gaming machine. When,
When the first operation means is operated for a predetermined time, it is possible to confirm whether or not the state shifts to an advantage confirmable state in which the degree of advantage for the player can be confirmed (for example, S4408: Yes in the start-up process). ),
The confirmation possibility determination means,
Regardless of the detection result of the opening/closing detection means, when the first operation means is operated by the predetermined operation, a confirmable transition means (for example, S4407: No of start-up processing) that transitions to the advantage confirmation possible state, 1. A game machine that is characterized by having 1.

According to the gaming machine reference 1, the opening/closing body is supported so as to be openable/closable with respect to the support body, and the opening/closing body and the support body are locked by the locking device. The open/close state of the open/close body with respect to the support is detected by the open/close detecting means. Further, when the locking of the opening/closing body and the support body by the locking device is released and the opening/closing body is in the open state, the first operating means can be operated from the front side of the gaming machine. Then, when the first operation means is operated in a predetermined manner, the confirmation propriety determination means determines whether or not to shift to an advantage degree confirmable state in which the advantage degree for the player can be confirmed. Here, regardless of the detection result of the opening/closing detection means, when the first operation means is operated for a predetermined time, the confirmability shifting means provided in the confirmation propriety determination means shifts to the advantageous level confirmable state. That is, as a condition for shifting to the advantage level confirmable state, it is possible to shift to the advantage level confirmable state based on the operation on the first operating means without judging the detection result of the opening/closing detecting means. Therefore, even if the opening detection means for detecting the opening/closing of the opening/closing body cannot detect the opening state due to a failure or the like, it is possible to confirm the setting status, which is an important game element of the gaming machine, and the setting has been completed. There is an effect that the setting contents of can be surely confirmed.

In game machine ginseng 0 or ginseng 1,
When the locking of the opening/closing body and the support body by the locking device is released and the opening/closing body is in the open state, the second operation means (for example, the RAM erase switch 122) that can be operated from the front side of the gaming machine. ),
The changeable state transition means or the confirmable transition means is
A gaming machine (2) characterized in that, when the second operating means is specially operated, the state is changed to the changeable state or the advantage level confirmable state.

According to the gaming machine gland 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine gland 0 or gland 1, the following effect is produced. That is, when the locking of the opening/closing body and the support body by the locking device is released and the opening/closing body is in the open state, the second operation means can be operated from the front side of the gaming machine. Then, when the second operating means is specially operated, the changeable state transition means or the checkable state transition means shifts to the changeable state or the advantage degree confirmable state. That is, as a condition for shifting to the changeable state or the advantage confirmable state, a predetermined operation for the first operating means and a special operation for the second operating means are performed without judging the detection result of the opening/closing detection means. Thus, it is possible to shift to the changeable state or the advantage level confirmable state. Therefore, even if the opening detecting means for detecting the opening/closing of the opening/closing body cannot detect the opening state due to a failure or the like, it is possible to change or confirm the setting, which is an important game element of the gaming machine. There is an effect that it is possible to surely execute the business form envisioned by. Further, in the control for shifting to the changeable state or the profitability checkable state, the process for detecting the opening/closing of the opening/closing body is unnecessary, and the control load of the gaming machine shifting to the changeable state or the profitability checkable state is reduced. There is an effect that can be.

In either of game machine 0 to 2
A third operating means that can be operated from the front side of the gaming machine when the opening and closing body and the support body are unlocked by the locking device and the opening and closing body is in an open state;
The third operating means is
When a specific operation is performed, change from the state where the power of the gaming machine is turned off to the state where the power of the gaming machine is turned on,
The changeability determination means,
A gaming machine reference 3, which is executed in a startup process executed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on.

According to the gaming machine gazette 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ginsengs 0 to 2, the following effects are played. That is, when the locking of the opening/closing body and the support body by the locking device is released and the opening/closing body is in the opened state, the second operation means provided in the specific detection means can be operated from the front side of the gaming machine. To be done. Then, when the third operation means is specifically operated, the operation of changing from the state in which the power of the gaming machine is turned off to the state in which the power of the gaming machine is turned on corresponds to the power of the gaming machine being turned on. The determination by the changeability determination means is performed in the start-up process executed when

Conventionally, when the process of detecting the opening of the opening/closing body is performed in the process of determining whether or not to shift to the changeable state in the startup process at power-on The control required when the power is turned on becomes complicated, and the processing load on the gaming machine may increase.

Therefore, according to the gaming machine reference 3, when changing the settings of the gaming machine, the setting can be changed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on in accordance with the operation of the third operating means provided on the back side of the gaming machine. It is possible to determine whether to shift to the state. Therefore, before the control of the game is executed, it is possible to determine whether or not to shift to the changeable state and set the gaming machine.

At the gaming machine ginseng 3,
The confirmation possibility determination means,
A gaming machine visit 4, which is executed in the startup process.

According to the gaming machine gazette 4, the following effects are produced in addition to the effect of the gaming machine gland 3. That is, similarly to the changeability determination means, the determination by the confirmation availability determination means is performed within the startup process that is performed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on.

Conventionally, when the process of detecting the opening of the opening/closing body is performed in the determination process of whether or not to shift to the advantage confirmable state in the startup process at power-on, the opening of the opening/closing body is detected. Because of the processing, the control required at power-on becomes complicated, and the processing load on the gaming machine may increase.

Therefore, according to the gaming machine reference 4, when confirming the settings of the gaming machine, when the power of the gaming machine is turned on in accordance with the operation of the third operating means provided on the back side of the gaming machine, the degree of advantage It is possible to determine whether or not to shift to the confirmable state. Therefore, before the control of the game is executed, there is an effect that it is possible to determine whether or not to shift to the advantage level confirmable state and confirm the setting of the gaming machine.

In any of game machine gland 0 to game machine gland 4,
When the opening/closing body is locked to the support body by the locking device, the first operation means is made difficult to operate, while the first operation is performed when the opening/closing body is released from the support body. A gaming machine model 5 comprising a protection means (for example, a protection cover member 140) that allows the means to be operated.

According to the gaming machine gazette 5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine ginsengs 0 to 4, the following effects are produced. That is, the protection means makes it difficult to operate the first operating means when the opening/closing body is locked to the support body by the locking device, and the first operating means when the opening/closing body is released from the support body. Is configured to be operable. Accordingly, when the opening/closing body is released from the support, the first operating means can be easily operated, while when the opening/closing body is locked on the support, the first operation is performed by the protection means. This has the effect of making the means difficult to operate and improving the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine when the opening/closing body is locked to the support. Further, the protection means prevents the first operation means from being operated without omission when the opening/closing body is closed. Therefore, even if the opening/closing body is not detected by the opening/closing detection means, the opening/closing body must be open. For example, since the first operation means cannot be operated, it is not necessary to determine the detection result of the opening/closing detection means as a condition for shifting to the changeable state or the checkable state. Therefore, in the control of shifting to the changeable state or the checkable state, the process of detecting the opening of the opening/closing body is unnecessary, and the control load of the gaming machine shifting to the changeable state or the checkable state can be reduced. effective.

At the game machine reference 5,
The protection means is
A gaming machine gland 6, which is attached to the support.

According to the gaming machine gazette 6, in addition to the effect that the gaming machine gazette 5 has, the following effect is obtained. That is, when the opening/closing body is locked to the support by the locking device by the protection means attached to the support, the second operating means is made difficult to operate, while the opening/closing body is released from the support. In addition, the second operating means is operable. Thus, when the opening/closing body is released from the support, the second operating means can be easily operated, while when the opening/closing body is locked on the support, the second operation is performed by the protection means. This has the effect of making the means difficult to operate and improving the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine when the opening/closing body is locked to the support.

In game machine ginseng 5 or ginseng 6,
The protection means is
A gaming machine gown 7, which is made of a transparent material or a semi-transparent material.

According to the gaming machine gazette 7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine gazette 5 or gong 6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the protection means is formed of a transparent material or a translucent material. With this, when the opening/closing body is closed, it is possible to confirm the changing means from the back side of the gaming machine through the transparent or semi-transparent protection means, and it is possible to detect fraud or malfunction of the changing means at an early stage. There is an effect.

<Group: Cannot change/check settings if front frame is open>
Conventionally, if you easily shift to a state where you can change the settings of the gaming machine or check the settings, it is not possible to exclude the room for unauthorized setting changes and settings confirmation, so you can change the settings as much as possible, Alternatively, it is desirable to take multi-step security measures for the gaming machine so as not to shift to a checkable state where the setting contents can be checked.

On the other hand, when a person involved in the hall performs maintenance work on the gaming machine, both the opening and closing body and the decorative body are released from the support body (opening and closing body), and the maintenance work is performed in the hall that has the authority to change settings and confirm settings. It is general that an employee of a hall who does not have the authority to change or confirm the setting, not the person in charge, performs the setting (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-092371)).

If an employee in a hall that does not have the authority to change settings or confirm settings can enter a changeable state or a checkable state during maintenance work, if the employee has communicated with an external illicit person. The information on the setting status of the gaming machine may be leaked to the unauthorized person.

The invention of the group of inventions has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the security performance of the gaming machine.

An opening/closing body (for example, an inner frame 12) that is supported to be openable and closable with respect to a support body (for example, the outer frame 11),
A decorative body (for example, the front frame 14) which is on the front side of the opening/closing body and is openably/closably supported with respect to the opening/closing body or the support body;
First locking means (for example, a part of the cylinder lock 20) for locking the support and the opening/closing body,
Second locking means (for example, a part of the cylinder lock 20) for locking the decoration and the support or the opening/closing body,
An opening/closing detection means (for example, an inner frame opening switch 208g1) for detecting the opened/closed state of the opening/closing body with respect to the support,
Decoration opening/closing detection means (for example, front frame opening switch 208g2) for detecting the opened/closed state of the decoration with respect to the support or the opening/closing body,
When the locking of the opening/closing body and the support body by the first locking means is released and the opening/closing body is in an open state, first operating means (for example, a power switch) operable from the front side of the gaming machine, respectively. ) And second operation means (for example, the setting key 501),
Changeability determination means (for example, whether or not to shift to a changeable state in which the degree of advantage to the player can be changed when the first operation means is operated in a predetermined manner and the second operation means is specifically operated) , S4412: Yes of startup processing,
The changeability determination means,
When the second operation means performs the specific operation, the opening/closing detection means detects opening of the opening/closing body, and the decoration opening/closing detection means does not detect opening/closing of the decoration body, transition to the changeable state A change-over means (for example, S4453: Yes and S4454: Yes of start-up process) for changing the game machine 0.

According to the gaming machine 0, the opening/closing body is supported so as to be openable/closable with respect to the support body, and the decoration body is supported on the front side of the opening/closing body so as to be openable/closable with respect to the opening/closing body or the support body. Then, the first locking means locks the opening/closing body and the support body, and the second locking means locks the decoration body and the support body or the opening/closing body. Here, the opening/closing detection means detects the opening/closing state of the opening/closing body with respect to the support body, and the decorative opening/closing detection means detects the opening/closing state of the decoration body with respect to the support body or the opening/closing body. In addition, when the opening and closing body and the support body are unlocked by the first locking means and the opening and closing body is in an open state, the first operating means and the second operating means can be operated from the front side of the gaming machine, respectively. Become. Then, when the first operation means is operated in a predetermined manner and the second operation means is operated in a specific manner, the changeability determination means determines whether or not to shift to a changeable state in which the advantage to the player can be changed. It Here, when the second operation means is specifically operated, the opening/closing detection means detects the opening of the opening/closing body, and the decoration opening/closing detection means does not detect the opening/closing of the decoration body, the change provided in the change possibility determination means The shift means shifts to the changeable state. That is, as conditions for shifting to the changeable state, a specific operation for the second operating means, detection of opening/closing of the opening/closing body by the opening/closing detection means, and non-opening (that is, closing) of the decoration body by the decoration opening/closing detection means. When the condition of detection is satisfied, the state can be changed to the changeable state. As a result, during maintenance work in which both the opening and closing body and the ornamental body are open, the settings cannot be changed, making it difficult for employees who do not have the authority to change the settings to change the settings. The effect is that the security performance for the machine can be improved.

In gaming machine 0,
Confirmability determination means for determining whether or not to shift to an advantage confirmable state in which the advantage for the player can be confirmed when the first operating means is operated in a predetermined manner and the second operating means is specifically operated. (For example, S4408 of startup processing: Yes),
The confirmation possibility determination means,
In the case where the second operation means is operated to perform the specific operation, the opening/closing detection means detects opening of the opening/closing body, and the decoration opening/closing detection means does not detect opening/closing of the decoration body, the merit checking state is possible. 1. A gaming machine case 1 characterized in that it comprises a confirmation transfer means (for example, S4451: Yes and S4452: Yes of start-up processing) for transferring to.

According to the gaming machine genre 1, the following effects are exerted in addition to the effects of the gaming machine genre 0. That is, whether or not the confirmability determining unit shifts to a confirmable state in which the degree of advantage to the player can be confirmed by the confirmability determination unit when the first operating unit is operated a predetermined amount and the second operating unit is specifically operated. Is determined. Here, when the second operation means is specifically operated, the opening/closing detection means detects the opening/closing of the opening/closing body, and the decoration opening/closing detection means does not detect the opening/closing of the decoration body, a change provided in the confirmation possibility determination means. The transition means transitions to the state in which the degree of advantage can be confirmed. That is, as a condition for shifting to the state of being able to become the advantage nucleus, a specific operation for the second operation means, detection of opening/closing of the opening/closing body by the opening/closing detection means, and non-opening of the decoration body by the decoration opening/closing detection means (that is, When the condition of detection of (closed) is established, it is possible to shift to the state in which the degree of advantage can be confirmed. As a result, during the maintenance work in which both the opening and closing body and the ornamental body are open, the settings cannot be confirmed, so that it is difficult for an employee who does not have the authority to confirm the settings to confirm the settings. There is an effect that the security performance for the machine can be improved.

In gaming machine 0 or 1
Third operation means (for example, a RAM erase switch 122) that can be operated when the opening/closing body is opened,
Operation mode detection means for detecting an operation mode of the third operation means (for example, detection of ON or OFF of the RAM erase switch 122),
The changeability determination means,
When the operation mode detection unit detects the first operation mode (for example, ON) of the third operation unit, it is determined whether or not to shift to the changeable state,
The confirmation possibility determination means,
When the operation mode detection unit detects a second operation mode (for example, off) different from the first operation mode of the third operation unit, it is determined whether or not to shift to the advantage level confirmable state. Amusement machine 2 characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine class 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine class 0 or the gaming machine 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the opening/closing body is opened, the third operating means becomes operable, and the operating mode detecting means detects the operating mode of the third operating means. Then, when the operation mode detection means detects the first operation mode of the third operation means, the changeability determination means determines whether or not to shift to the changeable state, and the operation mode detection means determines the third operation mode. When detecting the second operation mode different from the first operation mode of the operation means, the confirmation possibility determination means determines whether or not to shift to the advantage level confirmable state. Thus, there is an effect that the state can be changed to either the changeable state or the advantage level confirmable state according to the operation mode of the third operating means.

The “second operation mode” may be any operation mode as long as it is different from the first operation mode. For example, when the first operation mode is pressed, the second operation mode is An operation mode other than pressing, that is, an operation mode such as non-pressing, contact, pulling, or the like corresponds.

In any of the gaming machines No. 0 to No. 2,
The predetermined operation of the first operation means is
It is an operation to change from the state where the power of the gaming machine is turned off to the state where the power of the gaming machine is turned on.
The changeability determination means,
A gaming machine (3), which is executed in a start-up process executed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on.

According to the gaming machine space 3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine spaces 0 to 2, the following effects are produced. That is, as the predetermined operation of the first operation means, an operation of changing from a state in which the power of the game machine is turned off to a state in which the power of the game machine is turned on corresponds to the case where the power of the game machine is turned on. The determination by the changeability determination means is executed in the startup process that is executed. As a result, when changing the settings of the gaming machine, whether or not to shift to the changeable state when the power of the gaming machine is turned on in accordance with the operation of the first operating means provided on the back side of the gaming machine. Can be determined. Therefore, before the control of the game is executed, it is possible to determine whether or not to shift to the changeable state and set the gaming machine.

In gaming machine 肆3,
The confirmation possibility determination means,
A gaming machine 4. It is executed in the startup process.

According to the gaming machine case 4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine case 3, the following effect is produced. That is, similarly to the changeability determination means, the determination by the confirmation availability determination means is performed within the startup process that is performed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. Thereby, when confirming the settings of the gaming machine, when the power of the gaming machine is turned on in accordance with the operation of the first operating means provided on the rear surface side of the gaming machine, the state of transition to the profitability checkable state can be obtained. It can be determined whether or not. Therefore, before the control of the game is executed, there is an effect that it is possible to determine whether or not to shift to the advantage level confirmable state and confirm the setting of the gaming machine.

In any of the gaming machines 0 to 4,
When the opening/closing body is locked to the support body by the first locking means, the second operation means is made difficult to operate, while the opening/closing body is released from the support body, 2. A game machine set 5 characterized by comprising a protection means (for example, a protection cover member 140) that enables the operation means to be operated.

According to the gaming machine space 5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine spaces 0 to 4, the following effects are produced. That is, when the opening/closing body is locked to the support by the first locking means by the protection means, the second operation means is made difficult to operate, while the second opening/closing body is released from the support, The operation means is operable. Thus, when the opening/closing body is opened from the support and the decoration is closed by the opening/closing body or the support, the second operating means can be easily operated while the opening/closing body is supported by the support. In the case of being locked, it is possible to make the second operating means difficult to operate by the protection means, and to improve the security performance of the back side of the gaming machine when the opening/closing body is locked to the support. There is.

In gaming machine No. 5,
The protection means is
A gaming machine set 6, which is attached to the support.

According to the gaming machine genre 6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine genre 5, the following effects are produced. That is, when the opening/closing body is locked on the support by the first locking means by the protection means attached to the support, the second operating means is made difficult to operate, while the opening/closing body is released from the support. The second operation means is configured to be operable when it is present. Thus, when the opening/closing body is opened from the support and the decoration is closed by the opening/closing body or the support, the second operating means can be easily operated while the opening/closing body is supported by the support. In the case of being locked, it is possible to make the second operating means difficult to operate by the protection means, and to improve the security performance of the back side of the gaming machine when the opening/closing body is locked to the support. There is.

In gaming machines No. 5 to No. 6,
The protection means is
7. A gaming machine 7, characterized by being formed of a transparent material or a translucent material.

According to the gaming machine space 7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine space 5 or 6, the following effect is produced. That is, the protection means is formed of a transparent material or a translucent material. With this, when the opening/closing body is closed, it is possible to confirm the changing means from the back side of the gaming machine through the transparent or semi-transparent protection means, and it is possible to detect fraud or malfunction of the changing means at an early stage. There is an effect.

<Samurai: Cover that protects parts that affect game specifications>
Conventionally, on the back surface of the opening/closing body of a gaming machine composed of a support and an opening/closing body, a large number of influencing means that affect the result of the game are arranged, and during the opening hours of the hole While the opening/closing body is locked so that the player cannot operate the influencing means, the opening/closing body is opened to perform maintenance work on the influencing means outside the business hours of the hall (for example, Patent Document 1 ( JP-A-2005-024202))).

However, with respect to such a gaming machine, there is a possibility that a fraudulent act may be performed on the influencing means from the back side of the gaming machine even when the opening/closing body is closed, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of the corpse is made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing fraudulent acts against the influence means from the back side of the gaming machine.

An opening/closing body (for example, an inner frame 12) that is supported to be openable and closable with respect to a support body (for example, the outer frame 11),
A locking device (for example, a cylinder lock 20) for locking the opening/closing body and the support,
An influencing means (for example, the setting key 501, the main control device 110 or the payout control device 111) that is mounted on the opening/closing body and affects the result of the game by the player;
When the opening/closing body is locked to the support by the locking device, it partially or entirely covers the influencing means, and when the opening/closing body is released from the support, the influencing means is affected. A gaming machine 0 that is provided with a protection means (for example, a protection cover member 140) that enables an operation.

According to the gaming machine KO, the opening/closing body is openably/closably supported with respect to the support body, the opening/closing body and the support body are locked by the locking device, and the influencing means mounted on the opening/closing body allows the player to play the game. The results are affected. Then, the protection means covers a part or all of the influencing means when the opening/closing body is locked to the support by the locking device, while operating the influencing means when the opening/closing body is released from the support. Is possible. With this, when the opening/closing body is released from the support, the influencing means can be easily operated, while when the opening/closing body is locked to the support, a part of the influencing means is protected by the protection means. Alternatively, there is an effect that it becomes difficult to operate all of them, and the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine when the opening/closing body is locked to the support can be improved.

In addition, “influences the result of the game” means, for example, a case where the main control of the game has an influence, or a case where the influence is given by changing or determining the setting contents of the game. Or, the case where it affects by paying out the game value is exemplified.

At gaming machine Go 0,
The influencing means is
Main control means (for example, main control device 110) for controlling a game,
A payout control means (for example, payout control) that performs control according to a game medium payout instruction output from the main control means based on establishment of a predetermined prize condition (for example, winning of a ball into the first starting opening 64a). Apparatus 111), and
The protection means is
A gaming machine 1 characterized by covering a part or all of the main control means and a part or all of the payout control means.

According to the gaming machine Kao 1, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Sakai 0. That is, the game is controlled by the main control means provided as the influencing means, and the payout control means also provided as the influencing means outputs the game medium output from the main control means based on the establishment of a predetermined prize condition. The control is performed according to the payout instruction. Here, the protection means covers a part or all of the main control means and a part or all of the payout control means. Thereby, when the opening/closing body is released from the support, while the opening/closing body is locked to the support while being configured to be easily operated with respect to the main control means and the payout control means, The protection means can make it difficult to operate some or all of the main control means and some or all of the payout control means. Therefore, there is an effect that the security performance on the rear surface side of the gaming machine can be improved when the opening/closing body is locked to the support by one member (protection means).

In gaming machine Go 1,
The main control means,
A main control board (for example, a main board) on which a microchip (for example, MPU 201) that executes a game-related process is mounted,
A main storage means (for example, the board box 100) for storing the main control board,
A main sealing means (for example, a sealing unit 100c) for sealing the main storage means in a difficult-to-open manner,
The protection means is
At least the main sealing means is covered, a gaming machine corps 2.

According to the gaming machine corp. 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine corp. 1, the following effects are produced. That is, a microchip that executes a game-related process is mounted on the main control board provided in the main control means, and the main control board is stored in the main storage means. Then, the main sealing means makes it difficult to open the main storage means. Here, at least the main sealing means is covered by the protection means.

Conventionally, a fraudulent act such as illegal replacement of the main control board due to cutting of the main sealing means that seals the main storage means accommodating the main control board in a difficult-to-open manner causes an unexpected disadvantage in the hole. There is a risk.

Therefore, according to the gaming machine corp. 2, at least the main sealing means is covered by the protection means. With this, by protecting the main sealing means of the main housing means that houses the main control board on which the microchip that executes the processing related to the game is covered with the protection means, it is possible to prevent illegal acts such as illegally replacing the main control board. However, there is an effect that the security performance on the back surface side of the gaming machine can be improved when the opening/closing body is closed.

In gaming machine Go 1 or Go 2,
The main control means,
A game value giving means for giving a predetermined game value to the player based on the game result (for example, large opening opening/closing processing (S103)),
Setting means (for example, a setting key 501) capable of setting and changing the probability that the game value given to the player is derived by the game value giving means,
The protection means is
At least the above-mentioned setting means is covered, and the gaming machine corps 3.

According to the gaming machine corp. 3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine corp. 1 or corp. 2, the following effect is produced. That is, the game value giving means gives a predetermined game value to the player, and the setting means can set and change the probability that the game value giving means gives the game value to the player. Then, at least the setting means is covered by the protection means. Thus, by covering the setting means capable of changing the probability of deriving the game value to be given to the player with the protection means, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as illegally changing the setting contents, and at the time of closing the opening/closing body. There is an effect that the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines Go 1 to Go 3,
The main control means,
A wiring attachment section (for example, a connector attachment section 100h) to which wiring is attached for outputting control information to other control means including the payout control means,
The protection means is
At least the above-mentioned wiring attachment portion is covered, and a gaming machine corp.

According to the gaming machine corp. 4, in any of the gaming machine corps 1 to 3 the wiring for outputting the control information to the other control means including the payout control means by the wiring attachment part of the main control means. Is attached, and at least the wiring attachment portion is covered by the protection means. Thus, by protecting the wiring attachment part to which the wiring for exchanging control information between the main control means and the other control means is attached with the protection means, it is possible to prevent illegal acts such as attaching an illegal board to the wiring. However, there is an effect that the security performance on the back surface side of the gaming machine can be improved when the opening/closing body is closed.

In any of the gaming machines Go 1 to Go 4,
The main control means,
A game performance information display unit (for example, a base display device 401) for displaying game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in the gaming machine,
The protection means is
A gaming machine (5), characterized in that the gaming performance information display means is not covered.

The gaming machine 5 has the following effects in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 1 to 4. That is, the game performance information display means provided in the main control means displays the game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in the gaming machine, and the protection means does not cover the game performance information display means. Composed. As a result, there is an effect that the game performance information can be always confirmed without being unable to confirm the game performance information by the protection means.

In any of the gaming machines Go 1 to Go 5,
The payout control means,
A payout control board (for example, a payout board) on which a microchip (for example, MPU211) that executes a process related to a payout operation of a game medium is mounted,
A payout storing means (for example, the board box 101) for storing the payout control board,
A pay-out sealing means (for example, a sealing portion 111a) for sealing the pay-out storing means in a difficult-to-open manner,
The protection means is
At least the payout sealing means is covered, and a gaming machine corps.

According to the gaming machine corp. 6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine corps 1 to 5, the following effects are produced. That is, a microchip that executes a process relating to the payout operation of the game medium is mounted on the payout control board provided in the payout control means, and the payout control board is stored in the payout storage means. Then, the dispensing and storing means seals the dispensing and storing means in a difficult-to-open manner. Here, at least the dispensing seal means is covered by the protection means.

Conventionally, fraudulent acts such as illegal replacement of the payout control board due to disconnection of the payout sealing means that seals the payout storage means in which the payout control board is stored are difficult to open, causing an unexpected disadvantage in the hole. There is a risk.

Therefore, according to the gaming machine corp. 6, at least the payout sealing means is covered by the protection means. As a result, the payout control board is illegally replaced by covering the payout sealing means of the payout storage means in which the payout control board mounting the microchip that executes the process related to the payout operation of the game medium with the protection means. There is an effect that fraud can be prevented and the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine can be improved when the opening/closing body is closed.

In any of the gaming machines Go 0 to Go 6,
Storage means (for example, RAM 203) for storing game information relating to the game being executed,
Erasing means (for example, RAM erasing switch 122) for erasing the game information stored in the storage means by performing a predetermined operation (for example, pressing operation at power-on),
The protection means is
At least the erasing means is covered, and a gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine Go, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines Go to Go 6, the following effects are produced. That is, the storage means stores information on the game being executed, and the game information stored in the storage means is erased by performing a predetermined operation on the erasing means. Then, the erasing means is covered by the protecting means. Thus, by covering the erasing means capable of erasing the information related to the game with the protection means, it is possible to prevent illegal acts such as illegally erasing the information related to the game, and when the opening/closing body is closed, the back side of the gaming machine is protected. There is an effect that security performance can be improved.

In gaming machine Go,
The erasing means,
When the first condition is satisfied, the information stored in the storage means is deleted,
A gaming machine (8), which updates the probability that the game value will be derived when a second condition different from the first condition is established.

According to the gaming machine corp. 8, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine corps 7. That is, the erasing means erases the information stored in the storage means when the first condition is satisfied, and updates the probability that the game value is derived when the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied. It Thus, the effect that the erasing means can erase the memory means and change the probability by the setting means under different conditions, can perform various settings of the gaming machine with a small number of members, and reduce the manufacturing cost. There is.

In any of the gaming machines Go 0 to Go 8,
The support is
Formed by combining multiple plates,
The protection means is
A gaming machine corp. 9 which is attached to any one of the plates (for example, the right side plate 11d) in a cantilever shape.

According to the gaming machine Go, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines Go to Go, the following effects are produced. That is, a support is formed by combining a plurality of plates, and the protection means is cantilevered and attached to any one of the plates. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts against the influencing means with a simple structure and to improve the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine at a low cost.

The "cantilevered beam shape" is a beam shape in which one end of the protection means is fixed and the other end is not fixed and is in a free state.

In any of the gaming machines Go 0 to Go 9,
The protection means is
A gaming machine corp. 10 formed of a transparent material or a translucent material.

According to the gaming machine samurai 10, the following effects are exerted in addition to the effects exerted by the gaming machine samurai 0 to 9. That is, the protection means is formed of a transparent material or a translucent material. With this, when the opening/closing body is closed, it is possible to confirm the influencing means from the back side of the gaming machine through the transparent or semitransparent protection means, and it is possible to detect fraud or malfunction of the influencing means at an early stage. There is an effect.

<Land group: Connect the covers on the back side of the pachinko machine>
Conventionally, a plurality of control means for executing various settings and processing of a game are arranged on the back side of a game machine, and a player contacts the control means when the opening/closing body on which the control means are mounted is closed. It is configured so that it cannot. On the other hand, a person involved in the hall opens the opening/closing body to perform various settings and maintenance work for the control means outside the business hours of the hall (for example, Patent Document 1 (JP-A-2015-024202)).

However, with respect to such a gaming machine, there is a possibility that a fraudulent act may be performed on the control means from the back side of the gaming machine even when the opening/closing body is closed, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of the land group is made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing fraudulent acts against the control means from the back side of the gaming machine.

An opening/closing body (for example, an inner frame 12) that is supported to be openable and closable with respect to a support body (for example, the outer frame 11),
A first control means (for example, a voice lamp control device 113 or a display control device 114) and a second control means (for example, a main control device 110 or a payout) that are mounted on the back side of the game machine of the opening/closing body and control the game. Control device 111),
First protection means (for example, back pack 92) provided on the back side of the game machine of the opening/closing body and covering at least a part or all of the back side of the game machine of the first control means,
A second protective means (for example, a protective cover member 140) which is provided on the support and covers at least a part or the entire rear surface side of the game machine of the second control means,
The game machine land 0, wherein a part of the first protection means is formed so as to overlap and abut a part of the second protection means in the back surface direction of the game machine.

According to the game machine land 0, the opening/closing body is supported to be openable/closable with respect to the support body, and the first control means and the second control means for controlling the game are mounted on the rear side of the opening/closing body of the game machine. Then, at least part or all of the first control means on the rear surface side of the gaming machine is covered by the first protection means mounted on the rear surface side of the gaming machine of the opening/closing body. In addition, at least a part or all of the second control means on the rear surface side of the gaming machine is covered by the second protection means provided on the support. Here, a part of the first protection means is formed so as to overlap with a part of the second protection means in the back surface direction of the gaming machine and abut. This eliminates the gap between the first protection means and the second protection means that respectively cover the first control means and the second control means, and there is no room for wires or the like to enter the inside of the game machine from the back side of the game machine. There is an effect that the security performance on the back side of the machine can be improved. Further, when the opening/closing body is released from the support body, the first protecting means provided on the opening/closing body is formed so as to overlap the second protection means provided on the support body in the back surface direction of the gaming machine. However, since the first protection means of the opening/closing body and the second protection means of the support body do not interfere with each other, the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine is improved without increasing extra work in maintenance work or the like. The effect is that you can do it.

In game machine land 0,
The opening and closing body,
The first control means is installed above the second control means,
The first protection means is
A first protection portion that covers the back side of the game machine of the first control means;
A first projecting part (for example, a lower side projecting part) which is below the first protection part and projects to the back side of the gaming machine;
The second protection means is
A second protection portion that covers a part or all of the back side of the game machine of the second control means,
A second projecting portion (for example, an upper side projecting portion) projecting to the front side of the gaming machine above the first protective portion,
A game machine land 1 in which the first protrusion is formed so as to overlap the second protrusion in the vertical direction of the game machine.

According to the game machine land 1, in addition to the effect that the game machine land 0 has, the following effect is produced. That is, in the opening/closing body, the first control means is arranged above the second control means. Further, the back side of the game machine of the first control means is covered by the first protector provided in the first protector, and the first protrusion provided below the first protector is directed to the back side of the game machine. Be projected. Further, the back side of the game machine of the second control means is covered by the second protector provided in the first protector, and the second protrusion provided above the second protector is directed to the front side of the game machine. Be projected. Then, the first protrusion is formed so as to overlap the second protrusion in the vertical direction of the gaming machine. Thereby, since the respective projecting portions of the first protecting means and the second protecting means are formed so as to be folded in the vertical direction, the gap between the first protecting means and the second protecting means can be eliminated. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to effectively prevent a wire or the like from entering from the back side of the gaming machine and improve the security performance of the back side of the gaming machine.

In game machine land 0 or land 1,
The support is
Formed by combining multiple plates,
The second protection means is
A gaming machine land 2 characterized by being attached in a cantilever shape to any one of the plates (for example, the right side plate 11d).

According to the game machine land 2, in addition to the effect of the game machine land 0 or land 1, the following effect is produced. That is, a support body is formed by combining a plurality of plate bodies, and the second protection means is attached to any one of the plate bodies in a cantilever shape. Thus, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent an illegal act with respect to the second control means with a simple structure, and to improve the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine at a low cost.

The "cantilevered beam shape" is a beam shape in which one end of the protection means is fixed and the other end is not fixed and is in a free state.

In game machine land 2,
The first protection means is
A game machine land 3 characterized in that at least one end and the other end of the first protection means are fixed to the opening/closing body in the form of fixed beam ends.

According to the game machine land 3, in addition to the effect of the game machine land 2, the following effect is achieved. That is, at least one end and the other end of the first protection means are attached to the opening/closing body in the form of both-end fixed beams to which they are fixed. As a result, even when a shock is applied to the second protection means attached to the support in a cantilever shape from the back side of the gaming machine, the first protection attached to the opening/closing body in a both end fixed beam shape. By the means, the rigidity of the second protection means can be supplemented. Therefore, even when an impact or the like is given from the back side of the gaming machine, it is possible to prevent the second protection means from being damaged.

In any of game machine land 0 to land 3,
A locking device (for example, a cylinder lock 20) for locking the opening/closing body and the support body,
A game body (for example, a game board 13) having a game area mounted on the opening/closing body and provided with a ball entering means (for example, a first starting opening 64a) into which a game ball can enter.
Launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area (for example, a ball launching unit 112a),
Lottery information acquisition means (for example, reserved ball storage area 203b) that acquires lottery information based on the game balls fired by the firing means having entered the ball entrance means,
Determination means for determining the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means (for example, fluctuation start processing (S307)),
A game value giving means (for example, a large opening opening/closing process (S103)) for giving a predetermined game value to the player based on the determination result derived by the judging means;
A setting unit (for example, a setting key 501) capable of setting and changing the probability of deriving the specific determination result by the determination unit,
The second protection means is
When the opening/closing body is locked to the support by the locking device, the setting means is made difficult to operate, while the setting means can be operated when the opening/closing body is released from the support. A game machine land 4.

According to the gaming machine land 4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines land 0 to land 3, the following effects are produced. That is, the opening/closing body and the support body are locked by the locking device. Then, a game area is formed in which the game body is mounted on the opening/closing body, and the game body is provided with a ball entering means capable of entering a game ball. Further, based on the fact that the launch means launches a game ball toward the game area, and the game ball launched by the launch means enters the ball entry means, the lottery information acquisition means acquires lottery information. Then, the determination means determines the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, and based on the determination result being derived by the determination means, the game value imparting means imparts a predetermined game value to the player. To be done. Here, the setting unit is configured so that the probability that the determination result by the determination unit is derived can be changed. The second protection means makes it difficult to operate the setting means when the opening/closing body is locked to the support body by the locking device, while operating the setting means when the opening/closing body is released from the support body. Configured to be possible. Thus, when the opening/closing body is released from the support, the setting means can be easily operated, while when the opening/closing body is locked on the support, the setting means is set by the second protection means. This has the effect of making it difficult to operate and improving the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine when the opening/closing body is locked to the support.

In any of game machine land 0 to land 4,
It is characterized by further comprising engaging means for engaging a part of the first protection means and a part of the second protection means when the opening/closing body is closed with respect to the support body. Amusement machine land 5.

According to the gaming machine land 5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine land 0 to land 4, the following effects are produced. That is, when the opening/closing body is closed with respect to the support, the engaging means engages a part of the first protection means and a part of the second protection means. Accordingly, when the opening/closing body is closed, the first protection means and the second protection means are engaged with each other, so that the gap between the first protection means and the second protection means can be eliminated. Therefore, it is possible to effectively prevent a wire or the like from entering from the back side of the gaming machine when the opening/closing body is closed, and it is possible to improve the security performance of the back side of the gaming machine.

In game machine land 5,
The locking device is
It is configured to be operable from the front side of the gaming machine,
The game machine land 6 is provided with an engagement releasing means for releasing the engagement of the first protecting means and the second protecting means by the engaging means by being operated a predetermined time.

According to the game machine land 6, in addition to the effect of the game machine land 5, the following effect is achieved. That is, the locking device is configured to be operable from the front side of the gaming machine, and the engagement releasing means provided in the locking device allows the locking device to be operated in a predetermined manner to engage the first protecting means and the second protecting means by the engaging means. Is released. As a result, the engagement between the first protection means and the second protection means can be released from the front side of the gaming machine, so that even if the opening/closing body is released from the support body, the engagement is performed from the front side of the gaming machine. By operating the releasing means in a predetermined manner to release the engagement between the first protecting means and the second protecting means, the opening/closing body can be released from the support body without any trouble.

In any of the gaming machine land 0 to land 6,
The first protection means is
A game machine land 7 which is supported to be openable and closable with respect to the opening/closing body.

According to the gaming machine land 7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines land 0 to land 6, the following effects are produced. That is, the first protection means is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the opening/closing body. As a result, part of the first protection means overlaps with part of the second protection means in the back surface direction of the gaming machine, so that the first protection means is prevented from opening in the back surface direction of the gaming machine when the opening/closing body is closed. The effect is that you can do it.

<Lacquer group: Two types of Ichi group>
An opening/closing body (for example, an inner frame 12) that is supported to be openable and closable with respect to a support body (for example, the outer frame 11),
A locking device (for example, a cylinder lock 20) for locking the opening/closing body and the support,
A game body (for example, a game board 13) having a game area mounted on the opening/closing body and provided with a ball entering means (for example, a first starting opening 64a) into which a game ball can enter.
Launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area (for example, a ball launching unit 112a),
A game value giving means (for example, a large opening opening/closing process (S103)) for giving a predetermined game value to the player based on the fact that the game ball shot by the launch means has entered the ball entering means. In a gaming machine equipped with
A setting means (for example, a setting key 501) capable of changing and setting the game value given by the game value giving means,
The support is
When the opening/closing body is locked to the support by the locking device, the setting means is made difficult to operate, while the setting means can be operated when the opening/closing body is released from the support. A game machine lacquer 0, which is provided with a protection means (for example, a protection cover member 140) to be.

According to the gaming machine lacquer 0, the opening/closing body is supported so as to be openable/closable with respect to the support body, and the opening/closing body and the support body are locked by the locking device. Then, a game area is formed in which the game body is mounted on the opening/closing body, and the game body is provided with a ball entering means capable of entering a game ball. In addition, based on the fact that the launch means launches a game ball toward the game area, and the game ball launched by the launch means enters the ball entry means, the game value imparting means provides the player with a predetermined game. Value is added. Here, the setting means allows the game value given by the game value giving means to be changeable. Then, by the protection means provided on the support, when the opening and closing body is locked to the support by the locking device, while making the setting means difficult to operate, when the opening and closing body is released from the support, The setting means is operable. Thus, when the opening/closing body is opened from the support, the setting means can be easily operated, while when the opening/closing body is locked to the support, it is difficult to operate the setting means by the protection means. In addition, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the security performance on the back surface side of the gaming machine when the opening/closing body is locked to the support body.

<Group: Higher version of Ichi>
Conventionally, when a game medium is launched by a launching means into a game area provided with a plurality of winning openings, and that gaming medium wins in one of the winning openings, a predetermined number of winning openings are given. There is a gaming machine in which a game medium is paid out to a player.

Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, there is, for example, a gaming machine having a function that allows a hall-related person to change a gaming setting such as a game value to be given to a player, an acquisition condition and an acquired content (for example, Patent Document: Open 2015-024202 gazette).

There is a possibility that the game settings for such a gaming machine may be changed due to an illegal act, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a change in game settings due to an illegal act.

An opening/closing body (for example, an inner frame 12) that is supported to be openable and closable with respect to a support body (for example, the outer frame 11),
A locking device (for example, a cylinder lock 20) for locking the opening/closing body and the support,
A game body (for example, a game board 13) having a game area mounted on the opening/closing body and provided with a ball entering means (for example, a first starting opening 64a) into which a game ball can enter.
Launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area (for example, a ball launching unit 112a),
And a game value giving means (for example, a large opening opening/closing process (S103)) for giving a predetermined game value to the player when the game ball shot by the launch means enters the ball entering means. In the gaming machine,
A setting means (for example, a setting key 501) capable of changing the degree of advantage to the player in a plurality of stages,
The support is
When the opening/closing body is locked to the support by the locking device, the setting means is made difficult to operate, while the setting means can be operated when the opening/closing body is released from the support. A game machine handle 0, which is provided with a protection means (for example, a protection cover member 140).

According to the gaming machine handle 0, the opening/closing body is supported so as to be openable/closable with respect to the support body, and the opening/closing body and the support body are locked by the locking device. Then, a game area is formed in which the game body is mounted on the opening/closing body, and the game body is provided with a ball entering means capable of entering a game ball. In addition, when the game ball is launched toward the game area by the launching means and the game ball launched by the launching means enters the ball entering means, the game value assigning means gives the player a predetermined game value. Is given. Here, the setting means is configured such that the degree of advantage for the player can be changed in a plurality of steps. Then, by the protection means provided on the support, when the opening and closing body is locked to the support by the locking device, while making the setting means difficult to operate, when the opening and closing body is released from the support, The setting means is operable. Thus, when the opening/closing body is opened from the support, the setting means can be easily operated, while when the opening/closing body is locked to the support, it is difficult to operate the setting means by the protection means. Can be Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the security performance on the back surface side of the gaming machine when the opening/closing body is locked to the support body.

The "degree of advantage for the player" is, for example, the jackpot probability of the first symbol, the selection probability of the jackpot symbol in the case of a big hit with the first symbol, a game state advantageous to the player (for example, a probability variation state). Probability of transition to 1, the number of prize balls when a prize is won, the driving time or driving mode of a movable accessory that changes the flow mode of the game ball, the inclination mode of the member that affects the flow mode of the game ball, It may be any member or process that affects the situation advantageous to the player when the player plays the game, such as the inclination mode of the gaming machine itself.

<Ku-Gun: Lateral version of Ni-Gun>
Conventionally, a setting means for performing various settings of a game is arranged on the back side of a gaming machine, and a player cannot touch the setting means when the opening/closing body on which the setting means is mounted is closed. It is configured. On the other hand, a person related to the hall opens the opening/closing body to perform various maintenance work and setting work for the setting means outside the business hours of the hall (for example, Patent Document 1 (JP-A-2015-024202)).

However, with respect to such a gaming machine, there is a possibility that a fraudulent act may be performed on the setting means from the back side of the gaming machine even when the opening/closing body is closed, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of the group of husks has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing fraudulent acts against the setting means from the back side of the gaming machine.

An opening/closing body (for example, an inner frame 12) that is supported to be openable and closable with respect to a support body (for example, the outer frame 11),
A locking device (for example, a cylinder lock 20) for locking the opening/closing body and the support,
Setting means (for example, a setting key 501) mounted on the opening/closing body for performing various settings of the game,
A protection means (for example, a protection cover member 140) for protecting the setting means,
When the game machine is installed in a game arcade, the protection means is configured to be non-detachable (for example, a fixing screw 11g is inserted from the outside of the right side plate 11d, and the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the island facility without a gap). A game machine that is characterized by 0.

According to the game machine Ku 0, the opening/closing body is openably/closably supported with respect to the support body, the opening/closing body and the support body are locked by the locking device, and various setting of the game is performed by the setting means mounted on the opening/closing body. Done. Then, the setting means is protected by the protection means. Here, when the game machine is installed in the game arcade, the protection means is configured to be non-detachable. Thus, in the state where the gaming machine is installed in the game hall, the protection means for protecting the setting means for performing various settings of the game is configured to be difficult or unremovable from the gaming machine, and to prevent fraudulent acts against the setting means. There is an effect that can be.

An opening/closing body (for example, an inner frame 12) that is supported to be openable and closable with respect to a support body (for example, the outer frame 11),
A locking device (for example, a cylinder lock 20) for locking the opening/closing body and the support,
Setting means (for example, a setting key 501) mounted on the opening/closing body for performing various settings of the game,
A protection means (for example, a protection cover member 140) for protecting the setting means,
When the opening/closing body and the support body are locked by the locking device, the protection means is configured to be non-detachable (for example, in a state where the mounting surface 151 of the protection cover member 140 is in contact with the inner wall of the right side plate 11d). , A fixing screw 11g is inserted from the outside of the right side plate 11d).

According to the gaming machine game 1, the opening/closing body is openably/closably supported with respect to the support body, the opening/closing body and the support body are locked by the locking device, and various setting of the game can be performed by the setting means mounted on the opening/closing body. Done. Then, the setting means is protected by the protection means. Here, when the support and the opening/closing body are locked by the locking device, the protection means is configured to be non-detachable. Accordingly, in the state where the support and the opening/closing body are locked, the protection means for protecting the setting means for performing various settings of the game is configured to be difficult or impossible to attach/detach from the gaming machine, and prevent fraudulent acts on the setting means. The effect is that you can.

In gaming machine Ku 0 or Ku 1,
The setting means,
It has a keyhole into which a predetermined key can be inserted,
The keyhole is
A game machine game box (2), which faces the back side of the game machine when the support body and the opening/closing body are locked by the locking device.

According to the gaming machine game 2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine game 0 or game machine 1, the following effect is produced. That is, it is configured that a predetermined key can be inserted into a keyhole provided in the setting means, and the keyhole faces the rear side of the gaming machine when the support and the opening/closing body are locked by the locking device. .. Thus, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act from the back side of the gaming machine with respect to the setting means by the protection means that protects the setting means that performs various settings of the game.

In gaming machine Ku 0 or Ku 1,
The setting means,
It has a keyhole into which a predetermined key can be inserted,
The keyhole is
A gaming machine box (3), which faces the side of the gaming machine when the support and the opening/closing body are locked by the locking device.

According to the gaming machine game 2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine game 0 or game machine 1, the following effect is produced. That is, a predetermined key can be inserted into a keyhole provided in the setting means, and when the support and the opening/closing body are locked by the locking device, the keyhole is located on the side of the gaming machine (rightward or leftward). Configured to face. Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act from the side of the gaming machine with respect to the setting means by the protection means that protects the setting means for performing various settings of the game.

In addition, with respect to any of the configurations of the gaming machines A1 to A9, the gaming machines B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, K1, K2, K1 to K1 3, KU1-KU3, KE1-KE6, CO1-CO5, SA1, SA2, SH1, SH2, SU1, SU2, SE1, SE2, SO1, SO2, SE2 Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Chi 1, Tsu 1, Tsu 3, Te 1-Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1-0 to 1-10, 2-0-2, San 0-San 7, No 0 ~ The configuration limited to any one of the following: No. 7, No. 7, No. 0, No. 9, Land 0 to Land 7, Lacquer 0, Box 0, Box 0 to Box 3 may be applied.

In addition, with respect to any of the configurations of the gaming machines B1 to B6, the gaming machines A1 to A9, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, K1, K2, K1 to K1 3, KU1-KU3, KE1-KE6, CO1-CO5, SA1, SA2, SH1, SH2, SU1, SU2, SE1, SE2, SO1, SO2, SE2 Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Chi 1, Tsu 1, Tsu 3, Te 1-Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1-0 to 1-10, 2-0-2, San 0-San 7, No 0 ~ The configuration limited to any one of the following: No. 7, No. 7, No. 0, No. 9, Land 0 to Land 7, Lacquer 0, Box 0, Box 0 to Box 3 may be applied.

In addition, with respect to any one of the configurations of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, K1, K2, K1 to K1 3, KU1-KU3, KE1-KE6, CO1-CO5, SA1, SA2, SH1, SH2, SU1, SU2, SE1, SE2, SO1, SO2, SE2 Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Chi 1, Tsu 1, Tsu 3, Te 1-Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1-0 to 1-10, 2-0-2, San 0-San 7, No 0 ~ The configuration limited to any one of the following: No. 7, No. 7, No. 0, No. 9, Land 0 to Land 7, Lacquer 0, Box 0, Box 0 to Box 3 may be applied.

In addition, with respect to any one of the configurations of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, K1, K2, K1 to K1 3, KU1-KU3, KE1-KE6, CO1-CO5, SA1, SA2, SH1, SH2, SU1, SU2, SE1, SE2, SO1, SO2, SE2 Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Chi 1, Tsu 1, Tsu 3, Te 1-Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1-0 to 1-10, 2-0-2, San 0-San 7, No 0 ~ The configuration limited to any one of the following: No. 7, No. 7, No. 0, No. 9, Land 0 to Land 7, Lacquer 0, Box 0, Box 0 to Box 3 may be applied.

In addition, with respect to any one of the configurations of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, K1, K2, K1 to K1 3, KU1-KU3, KE1-KE6, CO1-CO5, SA1, SA2, SH1, SH2, SU1, SU2, SE1, SE2, SO1, SO2, SE2 Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Chi 1, Tsu 1, Tsu 3, Te 1-Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1-0 to 1-10, 2-0-2, San 0-San 7, No 0 ~ The configuration limited to any one of the following: No. 7, No. 7, No. 0, No. 9, Land 0 to Land 7, Lacquer 0, Box 0, Box 0 to Box 3 may be applied.

In addition, with respect to any of the configurations of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, K1, K2, K1 to K1 3, KU1-KU3, KE1-KE6, CO1-CO5, SA1, SA2, SH1, SH2, SU1, SU2, SE1, SE2, SO1, SO2, SE2 Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Chi 1, Tsu 1, Tsu 3, Te 1-Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1-0 to 1-10, 2-0-2, San 0-San 7, No 0 ~ The configuration limited to any one of the following: No. 7, No. 7, No. 0, No. 9, Land 0 to Land 7, Lacquer 0, Box 0, Box 0 to Box 3 may be applied.

In addition, with respect to any of the configurations of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, K1, K2, K1 to K1 3, KU1-KU3, KE1-KE6, CO1-CO5, SA1, SA2, SH1, SH2, SU1, SU2, SE1, SE2, SO1, SO2, SE2 Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Chi 1, Tsu 1, Tsu 3, Te 1-Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1-0 to 1-10, 2-0-2, San 0-San 7, No 0 ~ The configuration limited to any one of the following: No. 7, No. 7, No. 0, No. 9, Land 0 to Land 7, Lacquer 0, Box 0, Box 0 to Box 3 may be applied.

In addition, with respect to any of the configurations of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, K1, K2, K1 to K1 3, KU1-KU3, KE1-KE6, CO1-CO5, SA1, SA2, SH1, SH2, SU1, SU2, SE1, SE2, SO1, SO2, SE2 Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Chi 1, Tsu 1, Tsu 3, Te 1-Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1-0 to 1-10, 2-0-2, San 0-San 7, No 0 ~ The configuration limited to any one of the following: No. 7, No. 7, No. 0, No. 9, Land 0 to Land 7, Lacquer 0, Box 0, Box 0 to Box 3 may be applied.

In addition, with respect to any of the configurations of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, K1, K2, K1 to K1 3, KU1-KU3, KE1-KE6, CO1-CO5, SA1, SA2, SH1, SH2, SU1, SU2, SE1, SE2, SO1, SO2, SE2 Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Chi 1, Tsu 1, Tsu 3, Te 1-Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1-0 to 1-10, 2-0-2, San 0-San 7, No 0 ~ The configuration limited to any one of the following: No. 7, No. 7, No. 0, No. 9, Land 0 to Land 7, Lacquer 0, Box 0, Box 0 to Box 3 may be applied.

In addition, with respect to any one of the configurations of the gaming machines I1 to I4, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, K1, K2, K1 to K1 3, KU1-KU3, KE1-KE6, CO1-CO5, SA1, SA2, SH1, SH2, SU1, SU2, SE1, SE2, SO1, SO2, SE2 Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Chi 1, Tsu 1, Tsu 3, Te 1-Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1-0 to 1-10, 2-0-2, San 0-San 7, No 0 ~ The configuration limited to any one of the following: No. 7, No. 7, No. 0, No. 9, Land 0 to Land 7, Lacquer 0, Box 0, Box 0 to Box 3 may be applied.

In addition, with respect to any one of the configurations of the gaming machines J1 to J5, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1-I4, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1- V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, K1, K2, K1 to K1 3, KU1-KU3, KE1-KE6, CO1-CO5, SA1, SA2, SH1, SH2, SU1, SU2, SE1, SE2, SO1, SO2, SE2 Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Chi 1, Tsu 1, Tsu 3, Te 1-Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1-0 to 1-10, 2-0-2, San 0-San 7 ~ A configuration limited to any one of the following: No. 7, No. 0, No. 9, No. 0, No. 7, No. 7, No. 7, Lacquer, No. 0, No. 0 to No. 3 may be applied.

In addition, with respect to any one of the configurations of the gaming machines K1 to K5, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, K1, K2, K1 to K1 3, KU1-KU3, KE1-KE6, CO1-CO5, SA1, SA2, SH1, SH2, SU1, SU2, SE1, SE2, SO1, SO2, SE2 Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Chi 1, Tsu 1, Tsu 3, Te 1-Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1-0 to 1-10, 2-0-2, San 0-San 7, No 0 ~ The configuration limited to any one of the following: No. 7, No. 7, No. 0, No. 9, Land 0 to Land 7, Lacquer 0, Box 0, Box 0 to Box 3 may be applied.

In addition, with respect to any of the configurations of the gaming machines L1 to L5, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, K1, K2, K1 to K1 3, KU1-KU3, KE1-KE6, CO1-CO5, SA1, SA2, SH1, SH2, SU1, SU2, SE1, SE2, SO1, SO2, SE2 Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Chi 1, Tsu 1, Tsu 3, Te 1-Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1-0 to 1-10, 2-0-2, San 0-San 7, No 0 ~ The configuration limited to any one of the following: No. 7, No. 7, No. 0, No. 9, Land 0 to Land 7, Lacquer 0, Box 0, Box 0 to Box 3 may be applied.

In addition, with respect to any of the configurations of the gaming machines M1 to M6, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1- V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, K1, K2, K1 to K1 3, KU1-KU3, KE1-KE6, CO1-CO5, SA1, SA2, SH1, SH2, SU1, SU2, SE1, SE2, SO1, SO2, SE2 Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Chi 1, Tsu 1, Tsu 3, Te 1-Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1-0 to 1-10, 2-0-2, San 0-San 7, No 0 ~ The configuration limited to any one of the following: No. 7, No. 7, No. 0, No. 9, Land 0 to Land 7, Lacquer 0, Box 0, Box 0 to Box 3 may be applied.

In addition, with respect to any of the configurations of the gaming machines N1 to N5, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, K1, K2, K1 to K1 3, KU1-KU3, KE1-KE6, CO1-CO5, SA1, SA2, SH1, SH2, SU1, SU2, SE1, SE2, SO1, SO2, SE2 Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Chi 1, Tsu 1, Tsu 3, Te 1-Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1-0 to 1-10, 2-0-2, San 0-San 7, No 0 ~ The configuration limited to any one of the following: No. 7, No. 7, No. 0, No. 9, Land 0 to Land 7, Lacquer 0, Box 0, Box 0 to Box 3 may be applied.

In addition, with respect to any of the configurations of the gaming machine O1, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3. I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1- V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, K1, K2, K1 to K1 3, KU1-KU3, KE1-KE6, CO1-CO5, SA1, SA2, SH1, SH2, SU1, SU2, SE1, SE2, SO1, SO2, SE2 Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Chi 1, Tsu 1, Tsu 3, Te 1-Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1-0 to 1-10, 2-0-2, San 0-San 7, No 0 ~ The configuration limited to any one of the following: No. 7, No. 7, No. 0, No. 9, Land 0 to Land 7, Lacquer 0, Box 0, Box 0 to Box 3 may be applied.

In addition, with respect to any of the configurations of the gaming machines P1 to P5, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1- V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, K1, K2, K1 to K1 3, KU1-KU3, KE1-KE6, CO1-CO5, SA1, SA2, SH1, SH2, SU1, SU2, SE1, SE2, SO1, SO2, SE2 Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Chi 1, Tsu 1, Tsu 3, Te 1-Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1-0 to 1-10, 2-0-2, San 0-San 7, No 0 ~ The configuration limited to any one of the following: No. 7, No. 7, No. 0, No. 9, Land 0 to Land 7, Lacquer 0, Box 0, Box 0 to Box 3 may be applied.

In addition, with respect to any one of the configurations of the gaming machines Q1 to Q5, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, K1, K2, K1 to K1 3, KU1-KU3, KE1-KE6, CO1-CO5, SA1, SA2, SH1, SH2, SU1, SU2, SE1, SE2, SO1, SO2, SE2 Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Chi 1, Tsu 1, Tsu 3, Te 1-Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1-0 to 1-10, 2-0-2, San 0-San 7, No 0 ~ The configuration limited to any one of the following: No. 7, No. 7, No. 0, No. 9, Land 0 to Land 7, Lacquer 0, Box 0, Box 0 to Box 3 may be applied.

In addition, with respect to any one of the configurations of the gaming machines R1 to R5, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1- V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, K1, K2, K1 to K1 3, KU1-KU3, KE1-KE6, CO1-CO5, SA1, SA2, SH1, SH2, SU1, SU2, SE1, SE2, SO1, SO2, SE2 Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Chi 1, Tsu 1, Tsu 3, Te 1-Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1-0 to 1-10, 2-0-2, San 0-San 7, No 0 ~ The configuration limited to any one of the following: No. 7, No. 7, No. 0, No. 9, Land 0 to Land 7, Lacquer 0, Box 0, Box 0 to Box 3 may be applied.

In addition, with respect to any one of the configurations of the gaming machines S1 to S4, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, K1, K2, K1 to K1 3, KU1-KU3, KE1-KE6, CO1-CO5, SA1, SA2, SH1, SH2, SU1, SU2, SE1, SE2, SO1, SO2, SE2 Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Chi 1, Tsu 1, Tsu 3, Te 1-Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1-0 to 1-10, 2-0-2, San 0-San 7, No 0 ~ The configuration limited to any one of the following: No. 7, No. 7, No. 0, No. 9, Land 0 to Land 7, Lacquer 0, Box 0, Box 0 to Box 3 may be applied.

In addition, with respect to any one of the configurations of the gaming machines T1 and T2, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, and H1 to H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, U1, U2, V1- V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, K1, K2, K1 to K1 3, KU1-KU3, KE1-KE6, CO1-CO5, SA1, SA2, SH1, SH2, SU1, SU2, SE1, SE2, SO1, SO2, SE2 Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Chi 1, Tsu 1, Tsu 3, Te 1-Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1-0 to 1-10, 2-0-2, San 0-San 7, No 0 ~ The configuration limited to any one of the following: No. 7, No. 7, No. 0, No. 9, Land 0 to Land 7, Lacquer 0, Box 0, Box 0 to Box 3 may be applied.

In addition, with respect to any of the configurations of the gaming machines U1 and U2, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, and H1 to H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, V1- V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, K1, K2, K1 to K1 3, KU1-KU3, KE1-KE6, CO1-CO5, SA1, SA2, SH1, SH2, SU1, SU2, SE1, SE2, SO1, SO2, SE2 Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Chi 1, Tsu 1, Tsu 3, Te 1-Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1-0 to 1-10, 2-0-2, San 0-San 7, No 0 ~ The configuration limited to any one of the following: No. 7, No. 7, No. 0, No. 9, Land 0 to Land 7, Lacquer 0, Box 0, Box 0 to Box 3 may be applied.

In addition, with respect to any of the configurations of the gaming machines V1 to V9, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, K1, K2, K1 to K1 3, KU1-KU3, KE1-KE6, CO1-CO5, SA1, SA2, SH1, SH2, SU1, SU2, SE1, SE2, SO1, SO2, SE2 Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Chi 1, Tsu 1, Tsu 3, Te 1-Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1-0 to 1-10, 2-0-2, San 0-San 7, No 0 ~ The configuration limited to any one of the following: No. 7, No. 7, No. 0, No. 9, Land 0 to Land 7, Lacquer 0, Box 0, Box 0 to Box 3 may be applied.

It should be noted that, for any one of the configurations of the gaming machines W1 to W7, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, K1, K2, K1 to K1 3, KU1-KU3, KE1-KE6, CO1-CO5, SA1, SA2, SH1, SH2, SU1, SU2, SE1, SE2, SO1, SO2, SE2 Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Chi 1, Tsu 1, Tsu 3, Te 1-Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1-0 to 1-10, 2-0-2, San 0-San 7, No 0 ~ The configuration limited to any one of the following: No. 7, No. 7, No. 0, No. 9, Land 0 to Land 7, Lacquer 0, Box 0, Box 0 to Box 3 may be applied.

In addition, with respect to any of the configurations of the gaming machines X1 to X6, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, K1, K2, K1 to K1 3, KU1-KU3, KE1-KE6, CO1-CO5, SA1, SA2, SH1, SH2, SU1, SU2, SE1, SE2, SO1, SO2, SE2 Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Chi 1, Tsu 1, Tsu 3, Te 1-Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1-0 to 1-10, 2-0-2, San 0-San 7, No 0 ~ The configuration limited to any one of the following: No. 7, No. 7, No. 0, No. 9, Land 0 to Land 7, Lacquer 0, Box 0, Box 0 to Box 3 may be applied.

In addition, with respect to any one of the above-mentioned gaming machines A1 to A9, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3. H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2 U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, K1, K2, K1 to K1 3, KU1-KU3, KE1-KE6, CO1-CO5, SA1, SA2, SH1, SH2, SU1, SU2, SE1, SE2, SO1, SO2, SE2 Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Chi 1, Tsu 1, Tsu 3, Te 1-Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1-0 to 1-10, 2-0-2, San 0-San 7, No 0 ~ The configuration limited to any one of the following: No. 7, No. 7, No. 0, No. 9, Land 0 to Land 7, Lacquer 0, Box 0, Box 0 to Box 3 may be applied.

It should be noted that, for any one of the configurations of the gaming machines a1 to a7, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3. H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2 U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, K1, K2, K1 to K1 3, KU1-KU3, KE1-KE6, CO1-CO5, SA1, SA2, SH1, SH2, SU1, SU2, SE1, SE2, SO1, SO2, SE2 Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Chi 1, Tsu 1, Tsu 3, Te 1-Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1-0 to 1-10, 2-0-2, San 0-San 7, No 0 ~ The configuration limited to any one of the following: No. 7, No. 7, No. 0, No. 9, Land 0 to Land 7, Lacquer 0, Box 0, Box 0 to Box 3 may be applied.

In addition, with respect to any of the configurations of the gaming machines W1 to W5, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3. H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2 U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, E1 to D3, O1, O2, K1, K2, K1 to K1 3, KU1-KU3, KE1-KE6, CO1-CO5, SA1, SA2, SH1, SH2, SU1, SU2, SE1, SE2, SO1, SO2, SE2 Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Chi 1, Tsu 1, Tsu 3, Te 1-Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1-0 to 1-10, 2-0-2, San 0-San 7, No 0 ~ The configuration limited to any one of the following: No. 7, No. 7, No. 0, No. 9, Land 0 to Land 7, Lacquer 0, Box 0, Box 0 to Box 3 may be applied.

In addition, with respect to any of the configurations of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3. H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2 U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, O1, O2, K1, K2, K1 to K1 3, KU1-KU3, KE1-KE6, CO1-CO5, SA1, SA2, SH1, SH2, SU1, SU2, SE1, SE2, SO1, SO2, SE2 Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Chi 1, Tsu 1, Tsu 3, Te 1-Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1-0 to 1-10, 2-0-2, San 0-San 7, No 0 ~ The configuration limited to any one of the following: No. 7, No. 7, No. 0, No. 9, Land 0 to Land 7, Lacquer 0, Box 0, Box 0 to Box 3 may be applied.

In addition, with respect to the configuration of either of the gaming machines O1 and O2, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3. H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2 U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, K1, K2, K1 to K1 3, KU1-KU3, KE1-KE6, CO1-CO5, SA1, SA2, SH1, SH2, SU1, SU2, SE1, SE2, SO1, SO2, SE2 Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Chi 1, Tsu 1, Tsu 3, Te 1-Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1-0 to 1-10, 2-0-2, San 0-San 7, No 0 ~ The configuration limited to any one of the following: No. 7, No. 7, No. 0, No. 9, Land 0 to Land 7, Lacquer 0, Box 0, Box 0 to Box 3 may be applied.

It should be noted that, for any one of the configurations of the gaming machines K1 and K2, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3. H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2 U1, U2, V1-V9, W1-W7, X1-X6, A1-A9, A1-A7, U1-U5, E1-E3, O1, O2, Ki1-Ki 3, KU1-KU3, KE1-KE6, CO1-CO5, SA1, SA2, SH1, SH2, SU1, SU2, SE1, SE2, SO1, SO2, SE2 Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Chi 1, Tsu 1, Tsu 3, Te 1-Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1-0 to 1-10, 2-0-2, San 0-San 7, No 0 ~ The configuration limited to any one of the following: No. 7, No. 7, No. 0, No. 9, Land 0 to Land 7, Lacquer 0, Box 0, Box 0 to Box 3 may be applied.

In addition, with respect to any one of the above-mentioned gaming machines K1 to K3, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3. H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2 U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, O2, K1, K 2, KU1-KU3, KE1-KE6, CO1-CO5, SA1, SA2, SH1, SH2, SU1, SU2, SE1, SE2, SO1, SO2, SE2 Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Chi 1, Tsu 1, Tsu 3, Te 1-Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1-0 to 1-10, 2-0-2, San 0-San 7, No 0 ~ The configuration limited to any one of the following: No. 7, No. 7, No. 0, No. 9, Land 0 to Land 7, Lacquer 0, Box 0, Box 0 to Box 3 may be applied.

It should be noted that, for any one of the configurations of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3. H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2 U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, O2, K1, K 2, key 1 to key 3, key 1 to key 6, coefficient 1 to coefficient 5, service 1, service 2, service 1, service 2, service 1, service 2, service 1, service 2, service 1, service 2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Chi 1, Tsu 1, Tsu 3, Te 1-Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1-0 to 1-10, 2-0-2, San 0-San 7, No 0 ~ The configuration limited to any one of the following: No. 7, No. 7, No. 0, No. 9, Land 0 to Land 7, Lacquer 0, Box 0, Box 0 to Box 3 may be applied.

In addition, with respect to any of the configurations of the gaming machines K1 to K6, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3. H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2 U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, O2, K1, K 2, key 1 to key 3, ku 1 to ku 3, co 1 to co 5, sa 1, sa 2, shi 1, shi 2, su 1, su 2, se 1, se 2, so 1, so 2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Chi 1, Tsu 1, Tsu 3, Te 1-Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1-0 to 1-10, 2-0-2, San 0-San 7, No 0 ~ The configuration limited to any one of the following: No. 7, No. 7, No. 0, No. 9, Land 0 to Land 7, Lacquer 0, Box 0, Box 0 to Box 3 may be applied.

In addition, with respect to any one of the above-mentioned gaming machines CO1 to CO5, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3. H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2 U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, O2, K1, K 2, key 1 to key 3, key 1 to key 3, key 1 to key 6, service 1, service 2, service 1, service 2, service 1, service 2, service 1, service 2, service 1, service 2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Chi 1, Tsu 1, Tsu 3, Te 1-Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1-0 to 1-10, 2-0-2, San 0-San 7, No 0 ~ The configuration limited to any one of the following: No. 7, No. 7, No. 0, No. 9, Land 0 to Land 7, Lacquer 0, Box 0, Box 0 to Box 3 may be applied.

It should be noted that, with respect to any one of the configurations of the gaming machines Sa1 and Sa2, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3. H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2 U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, O2, K1, K 2, key 1 to key 3, key 1 to key 3, key 1 to key 6, coefficient 1 to coefficient 5, shi 1, shi 2, su 1, su 2, se 1, se 2, so 1, so 2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Chi 1, Tsu 1, Tsu 3, Te 1-Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1-0 to 1-10, 2-0-2, San 0-San 7, No 0 ~ The configuration limited to any one of the following: No. 7, No. 7, No. 0, No. 9, Land 0 to Land 7, Lacquer 0, Box 0, Box 0 to Box 3 may be applied.

In addition, with respect to any one of the configurations of the gaming machines Si1 and Si2, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3. H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2 U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, O2, K1, K 2, key 1 to key 3, key 1 to key 3, key 1 to key 6, coefficient 1 to coefficient 5, service 1, service 2, service 1, service 2, service 1, service 2, service 1, service 2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Chi 1, Tsu 1, Tsu 3, Te 1-Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1-0 to 1-10, 2-0-2, San 0-San 7, No 0 ~ The configuration limited to any one of the following: No. 7, No. 7, No. 0, No. 9, Land 0 to Land 7, Lacquer 0, Box 0, Box 0 to Box 3 may be applied.

In addition, with respect to the configuration of either of the gaming machines S1 and S2, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3. H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2 U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, O2, K1, K 2, key 1 to key 3, key 1 to key 3, key 1 to key 6, coefficient 1 to coefficient 5, service 1, service 2, service 1, service 2, service 1, service 2, service 1, service 2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Chi 1, Tsu 1, Tsu 3, Te 1-Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1-0 to 1-10, 2-0-2, San 0-San 7, No 0 ~ The configuration limited to any one of the following: No. 7, No. 7, No. 0, No. 9, Land 0 to Land 7, Lacquer 0, Box 0, Box 0 to Box 3 may be applied.

In addition, with respect to any one of the configurations of the gaming machines C1 and C2, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3. H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2 U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, O2, K1, K 2, key 1 to key 3, key 1 to key 3, key 1 to key 6, key 1 to key 5, service 1, service 2, service 1, service 2, service 1, service 2, service 1, service 2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Chi 1, Tsu 1, Tsu 3, Te 1-Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1-0 to 1-10, 2-0-2, San 0-San 7, No 0 ~ The configuration limited to any one of the following: No. 7, No. 7, No. 0, No. 9, Land 0 to Land 7, Lacquer 0, Box 0, Box 0 to Box 3 may be applied.

It should be noted that, with respect to either of the configurations of the gaming machines So1 and So2, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3. H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2 U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, O2, K1, K 2, key 1 to key 3, key 1 to key 3, key 1 to key 6, coefficient 1 to coefficient 5, service 1, service 2, service 1, service 2, service 1, service 2, service 1, service 2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Chi 1, Tsu 1, Tsu 3, Te 1-Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1-0 to 1-10, 2-0-2, San 0-San 7, No 0 ~ The configuration limited to any one of the following: No. 7, No. 7, No. 0, No. 9, Land 0 to Land 7, Lacquer 0, Box 0, Box 0 to Box 3 may be applied.

It should be noted that, with respect to either of the configurations of the gaming machines Ta1 and Ta2, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3. H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2 U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, O2, K1, K 2, key 1 to key 3, key 1 to key 3, key 1 to key 6, coefficient 1 to coefficient 5, service 1, service 2, service 1, service 2, service 1, service 2, service 1, service 2, So 1, So 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Chi 2, Tsu 1 to Tsu 3, Te 1 to Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1 to 0 to 10, 10, 2 to 8, 8, 0 to 7, 7 ~ The configuration limited to any one of the following: No. 7, No. 7, No. 0, No. 9, Land 0 to Land 7, Lacquer 0, Box 0, Box 0 to Box 3 may be applied.

In addition, with respect to any one of the configurations of the gaming machines J1 and J2, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3. H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2 U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, O2, K1, K 2, key 1 to key 3, key 1 to key 3, key 1 to key 6, coefficient 1 to coefficient 5, service 1, service 2, service 1, service 2, service 1, service 2, service 1, service 2, So 1, So 2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Tu 1 to Tsu 3, Te 1 to Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1 to 0, 1 to 0, 2 to 8, 8 to 7 and 0 ~ The configuration limited to any one of the following: No. 7, No. 7, No. 0, No. 9, Land 0 to Land 7, Lacquer 0, Box 0, Box 0 to Box 3 may be applied.

It should be noted that, for any one of the configurations of the gaming machines T1 to T3, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3. H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2 U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, O2, K1, K 2, key 1 to key 3, key 1 to key 3, key 1 to key 6, coefficient 1 to coefficient 5, service 1, service 2, service 1, service 2, service 1, service 2, service 1, service 2, So 1, So 2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Ta 1, Chi 2, Chi 2, Te 1-Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1-0 to 1-10, 2-0-2, San 0-San 7 ~ The configuration limited to any one of the following: No. 7, No. 7, No. 0, No. 9, Land 0 to Land 7, Lacquer 0, Box 0, Box 0 to Box 3 may be applied.

In addition, with respect to any one of the configurations of the gaming machines te1 to te3, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3. H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2 U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, O2, K1, K 2, key 1 to key 3, key 1 to key 3, key 1 to key 6, coefficient 1 to coefficient 5, service 1, service 2, service 1, service 2, service 1, service 2, service 1, service 2, So 1, So 2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Ta 1, Chi 2, Chi 2, Tsu 1 to Tsu 3, To 1, To 2, 1 to 0, 1 to 0, 2 to 8, 8 to 0 to 7, 7, 0 ~ The configuration limited to any one of the following: No. 7, No. 7, No. 0, No. 9, Land 0 to Land 7, Lacquer 0, Box 0, Box 0 to Box 3 may be applied.

In addition, with respect to any one of the configurations of the gaming machines To1 and To2, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3. H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2 U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, O2, K1, K 2, key 1 to key 3, key 1 to key 3, key 1 to key 6, coefficient 1 to coefficient 5, service 1, service 2, service 1, service 2, service 1, service 2, service 1, service 2, So 1, So 2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Ta 1, Chi 2, Chi 2, Tsu 1 to Tsu 3, Te 1 to Te 3, 1 0 to 1 10, 2 0 to 2 8, Gan 0 to 7, 7, 0 ~ The configuration limited to any one of the following: No. 7, No. 7, No. 0, No. 9, Land 0 to Land 7, Lacquer 0, Box 0, Box 0 to Box 3 may be applied.

It should be noted that, with respect to any one of the above-mentioned gaming machines I0 to I10, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3. H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2 U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, O2, K1, K 2, key 1 to key 3, key 1 to key 3, key 1 to key 6, coefficient 1 to coefficient 5, service 1, service 2, service 1, service 2, service 1, service 2, service 1, service 2, So 1, So 2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Ta 1, Chi 2, Chi 2, Tsu 1 ~ Tsu 3, Te 1 ~ Te 3, To 1, To 2, Ni 0 ~ Ni 8, San 0 ~ San 7, No 0 ~ The configuration limited to any one of the following: No. 7, No. 7, No. 0, No. 9, Land 0 to Land 7, Lacquer 0, Box 0, Box 0 to Box 3 may be applied.

In addition, with respect to any of the above-mentioned gaming machines 20 to 28, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3. H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2 U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, O2, K1, K 2, key 1 to key 3, key 1 to key 3, key 1 to key 6, coefficient 1 to coefficient 5, service 1, service 2, service 1, service 2, service 1, service 2, service 1, service 2, So 1, So 2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Ta 1, Chi 2, Chi 1, Tsu 3, Tsu 1-Tu 3, Te 1-Te 3, To 1, To 2, Ichi 0-Ichi 10, Ginseng 0-San 7, Wu 0 ~ The configuration limited to any one of the following: No. 7, No. 7, No. 0, No. 9, Land 0 to Land 7, Lacquer 0, Box 0, Box 0 to Box 3 may be applied.

In addition, with respect to any of the configurations of the above-mentioned game machines 0 to 7, the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3. H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2 U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, O2, K1, K 2, key 1 to key 3, key 1 to key 3, key 1 to key 6, coefficient 1 to coefficient 5, service 1, service 2, service 1, service 2, service 1, service 2, service 1, service 2, So 1, So 2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Ta 1, Chi 2, Chi 1, Tsu 3, Tsu 1-Tu 3, Te 1-Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1-0 to 1-10, 2-0-2, 0 ~ The configuration limited to any one of the following: No. 7, No. 7, No. 0, No. 9, Land 0 to Land 7, Lacquer 0, Box 0, Box 0 to Box 3 may be applied.

In addition, with respect to any one of the above-mentioned gaming machines 0 to 7, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3. H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2 U1, U2, V1-V9, W1-W7, X1-X6, A1-A9, A1-A7, U1-U5, E1-E3, O1, O2, O2, K1, K 2, key 1 to key 3, key 1 to key 3, key 1 to key 6, coefficient 1 to coefficient 5, service 1, service 2, service 1, service 2, service 1, service 2, service 1, service 2, So 1, So 2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Ta 1, Chi 2, Chi 2, Tsu 1, Tsu 3, Te 1-Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1-0 to 1-10, 2-0-2, San 0 ~ The configuration limited to any one of San 7, Sakai 0 ~ Sakai 9, Land 0 ~ Land 7, Lacquer 0, Box 0, Kus 0 ~ Ku 3 may be applied.

In addition, with respect to the configuration of any one of the above-mentioned gaming machines 0 to 9, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3. H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2 U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, O2, K1, K 2, key 1 to key 3, key 1 to key 3, key 1 to key 6, coefficient 1 to coefficient 5, service 1, service 2, service 1, service 2, service 1, service 2, service 1, service 2, So 1, So 2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Ta 1, Chi 2, Chi 2, Tsu 1, Tsu 3, Te 1-Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1-0 to 1-10, 2-0-2, San 0 ~ The configuration limited to any one of the reference 7, the reference 0 to the reference 7, the land 0 to the reference 7, the land 0 to the reference 7, the lacquer 0, the box 0, the box 0 to the box 3 may be applied.

In addition, with respect to any of the configurations of the above-mentioned gaming machines land 0 to land 7, the above gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3. H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2 U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, O2, K1, K 2, key 1 to key 3, key 1 to key 3, key 1 to key 6, coefficient 1 to coefficient 5, service 1, service 2, service 1, service 2, service 1, service 2, service 1, service 2, So 1, So 2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Ta 1, Chi 2, Chi 2, Tsu 1, Tsu 3, Te 1-Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1-0 to 1-10, 2-0-2, San 0 ~ The structure limited by any one of 7, 7, 0 to 7, 7, 0 to 9, Lacquer, 0, 0, and 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, with respect to any of the configurations of the gaming machine lacquer 0, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3. , I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2 , V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, K1, K2, K2 1-ki 3, ku 1-ku 3, ke 1-ke 6, ko 1-ko 5, sa 1, sa 2, shi 1, shi 2, su 1, su 2, sa 1, se 2, se 1, So 2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Tsu 1 to Tsu 3, Te 1 to Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1 to 0 1 to 10, 2 to 2 8, San 0 to 7 , 0 to 7, 7, 0 to 9, 9, 0 to 7, 7, 0, and 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, with respect to any of the configurations of the gaming machine 0, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3. , I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2 , V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to E3, O1, O2, K1, K2, K2 1-ki 3, ku 1-ku 3, ke 1-ke 6, ko 1-ko 5, sa 1, sa 2, shi 1, shi 2, su 1, su 2, sa 1, se 2, se 1, So 2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Tsu 1 to Tsu 3, Te 1 to Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1 to 0 1 to 10, 2 to 2 8, San 0 to 7 , 0 to 7, 7, 0 to 9, land 0 to 7, lacquer 0, and 0 to 3 may be applied.

It should be noted that, with respect to any one of the above-mentioned gaming machines Ku0 to Ku3, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3. H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2 U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, U1 to U5, E1 to D3, O1, O2, O2, K1, K 2, key 1 to key 3, key 1 to key 3, key 1 to key 6, coefficient 1 to coefficient 5, service 1, service 2, service 1, service 2, service 1, service 2, service 1, service 2, So 1, So 2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Ta 1, Chi 2, Chi 2, Tsu 1, Tsu 3, Te 1-Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1-0 to 1-10, 2-0-2, San 0 ~ The configuration limited to any one of the reference 7, the 0 to 7, the corps 0 to 9, the land 0 to 7, the lacquer 0, and the grid 03 may be applied.

In these cases, it is possible to obtain further effects by applying each configuration.

Gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A 9, a1 to a7, u1 to u5, d1 to d3, o1, o2, k1, k2, ki1 to ki3, k1 to k3, ke1 to ke6, Co 1 to Co 5, Sa 1, Sa 2, Si 1, Si 2, Su 1, Su 2, Su 1, Se 2, Se 1, So 2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Tsu 1 Kara to 3, Te 1 to Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1 0 to 1 10, 2 0 to 2 8, G 0 to G 7, G 0 to G 7, G 0 to G 9, Land 0 to Land 7. The gaming machine Y1 characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine in any one of 7, Lacquer 0, Box 0, and Box 0 to Box 3. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided to operate a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, on condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

Gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A 9, a1 to a7, u1 to u5, d1 to d3, o1, o2, k1, k2, ki1 to ki3, k1 to k3, ke1 to ke6, Co 1 to Co 5, Sa 1, Sa 2, Si 1, Si 2, Su 1, Su 2, Su 1, Se 2, Se 1, So 2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Tsu 1 Kara to 3, Te 1 to Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1 0 to 1 10, 2 0 to 2 8, G 0 to G 7, G 0 to G 7, G 0 to G 9, Land 0 to Land 7. A gaming machine Y2, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of 7, Lacquer 0, Box 0, and Box 0 to Box 3. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is actuated to a working opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. Further, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (major winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

Gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A 9, a1 to a7, u1 to u5, d1 to d3, o1, o2, k1, k2, ki1 to ki3, k1 to k3, ke1 to ke6, Co 1 to Co 5, Sa 1, Sa 2, Si 1, Si 2, Su 1, Su 2, Su 1, Se 2, Se 1, So 2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Tsu 1 Kara to 3, Te 1 to Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1 0 to 1 10, 2 0 to 2 8, G 0 to G 7, G 0 to G 7, G 0 to G 9, Land 0 to Land 7. Any of 7, Lacquer 0, Box 0, and Box 0 to Box 3, wherein the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or due to the operation of a predetermined time, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped, the It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is also provided. It requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and a lot of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.

The "sphere" described in each of the above-described embodiments corresponds to the "gaming medium" or the "gaming ball" in the claims, and the "feature ratio" described in each of the above-described embodiments is the "claim". Corresponding to the "ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning of the first winning hole to the number of the game media paid out by the payout means", "continuous" described in each of the above embodiments. The "feature ratio" corresponds to the "ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning of the second winning hole to the number of the game media paid out by the payout means" in the claims. To do.

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines)
11 Outer frame (part of support)
11d Right side plate (part of side part)
11e Cover mounting hole (part of side insertion hole)
11f Cover mounting hole (part of side insertion hole)
11g Fixing screw (part of fixing member)
12 Inner frame (part of opening/closing body)
14 Front frame (part of ornament)
20 Cylinder lock (part of locking device, part of first locking means, part of second locking means)
63a 1st regular prize hole (prize hole)
63b 2nd Regular Winner (Winner)
64a First start opening (winning hole, first winning opening)
64b Second start opening (winning opening, first winning opening)
65a Big prize hole (prize hole, 1st prize hole, 2nd prize hole)
100 board box (part of storage means, part of main storage means)
100c Sealing unit (part of sealing means, part of influencing means)
100d Setting part (part of change part, part of exposed part (key hole))
100e Side wall of setting section (part of immersion section)
100f Bottom of setting part (part of immersion part)
100h Connector mounting part (part of wiring mounting part, part of influencing means)
101 board box (part of payout storage means)
110 main control device (main control means, display control means, part of control means, part of influencing means)
111 payout control device (payout means, part of payout control means, part of influencing means)
111a Sealing part (part of sealing means, part of influencing means, part of dispensing sealing means)
112a Ball launching unit (launching means)
122 RAM erasing switch (predetermined operating means, information erasing instruction means, first operating means, part of third operating means, part of erasing means, part of influencing means)
140 Protective cover member (part of protective means)
150 Cover mounting part (part of mounting part)
152 Upper mounting hole (part of mounting insertion hole)
153 Lower mounting hole (part of mounting insertion hole)
154 Bending part (a part of the bending part)
160 Standing part (part of protection measures)
170 Cover part (a part of protection means)
171 Cover plate (part of protection means)
172 Cover-side protrusion (part of protrusion)
173 Key cover part (a part of protection means)
200 register 201 MPU (computing means, part of microchip)
202e Award ball number table (payout information storage means)
202f Trigger information data (predetermined trigger information storage means)
203 RAM (storage means)
203b Reserved ball storage area (part of lottery information acquisition means)
203l real-time base value data (part of game performance information storage means, 0th storage area)
203m last time base value data (part of game performance information storage means, first storage area)
203n two-time-preceding base value data (part of the game performance information storage means, second storage area)
203o Two before two base value data (a part of game performance information storage means)
203p New startup flag (new startup specifying means)
203x area in use area (first storage means)
203x1 outside work area (first work area)
203x2 outer stack area (first stack area)
203x11 probability set value data (first storage means)
203x12 update probability set value data (second storage means)
203x16 RAM erase switch flag (storage means)
203y Area outside use area (second storage means)
203y1 Outside work area (work area, second work area)
203y2 Outside stack area (stack area, second stack area)
203r Base value data (storage means)
203s Character ratio data (storage means)
203t error data (error history storage means)
207 Accessory ratio management chip (microchip)
207a Inspection terminal (external device connecting means)
208a First starting opening switch (winning prize detecting means)
208b Second start opening switch (winning prize detecting means)
208c First regular winning opening switch (winning detection means)
208d Second regular winning opening switch (winning detection means)
208e Special winning opening switch (winning detection means)
208g1 Inner frame open switch (part of open/close detection means)
208g2 Front frame open switch (part of decorative open/close detection means)
211 MPU (part of microchip)
261 CPU (external device connection detection means, second calculation means, ratio calculation means)
263 First Reading Memory (Second Storage Means)
H.264 second reading memory (storage means, third storage means)
267 Capacitor (power supply means)
300 Inspection device (external device)
401 base display device (game performance information display means, output means)
401a, 401b 7-segment display (segment display, second display means)
401c, 401d 7-segment display (segment display, first display means)
501 setting key (permitting means, first operating means, part of setting means, part of changing means)
502 Error display button (error history display acceptance means)
S103 Large opening opening/closing process (part of game value adding means)
S152 (Payout amount setting means)
S307 Variation start processing (a part of the determination means)
S717 (Power failure detection means)
S728 (second storage control means)
S729 (determination means)
S740, S741 (storage control means, ratio calculation means)
S723 (third storage control means)
S761 (memory control means)
S751 to S754, S771, S772 (output means)
S2022 (evacuation means)
S2024 (Stack pointer setting means)
S2025 (Returning means)
S2031 (first fixed value storage means)
S2041 (second fixed value storage means)
S3007 (Display means for confirmation)
S3008 (stopping means)
S3208 (game performance information acquisition means, shift processing means)
S3302 (Special display mode display means)
S4004: Yes (first mode start-up means)
S4004: No (third mode startup means)
S4011: Yes (second mode startup means)
S4011: No (4th mode startup means)
S4005 (Change means)
S4210 (Confirmation processing execution means)
S4213 (change processing execution means)
S4301 (interruption permission means)
S4308 (Detection means)
S4309 (Detection means)
S4312 (Interrupt prohibition means)
S4401 (interruption permission means)
S4405 (Interrupt prohibition means)
S4407 (part of specific detection transfer means)
S4408 (a part of confirmation possibility determination means)
S4412 (a part of the change possibility determination means)
S4451 (part of confirmation transfer means)
S4452 (part of confirmation transfer means)
S4453 (part of change transfer means)
S4454 (part of change transition means)

Claims (2)

An openable and closable body that is openably and closably supported with respect to the support body,
A first control means and a second control means which are mounted on the back side of the game machine of the opening and closing body and control the game;
First protection means provided on the back side of the game machine of the opening/closing body and covering at least a part or all of the back side of the game machine of the first control means,
A second protection means which is provided on the support and covers at least a part or all of the second control means on the rear surface side of the gaming machine;
A game machine, wherein a part of the first protection means is formed so as to overlap and abut a part of the second protection means in the back surface direction of the game machine. The game machine according to claim 1 , further comprising a game value giving means capable of giving a game value to the player.

Images